Issuu on Google+

ANEXO Bibliografia INSULAR. 1980-2009

Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico

REGIÃO AUTÓNOMA DA MADEIRA

ANUÁRIO DO CENTRO DE ESTUDOS DE HISTÓRIA DO ATLÂNTICO n.º 1 2009

ANEXO BIBLIOGRAFIA INSULAR 1980-2009

  Secretaria Regional de Educação e Cultura Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico Funchal

CEHA

3

BIBLIOGRAFIA INSULAR. 1980-2009 1.  1968-1983: New Guinea periodical index, Boroko, Papua New Guinea: Library, University of Papua New Guinea. 2.  1980: Our islands’ treasure, Cayman Islands: Pirate’s Week Committee. 3.  1980: The Blasket Islands: next parish to America (Island series, 4). Dublin: O’Brien Press. 4.  1981: Archaeology in Oceania, University of Sydney. 5.  1982: The Economic structure and national accounts of Bermuda, 1975/76 to 1980/81, prepared by Statistical Department, Ministry of Finance, Hamilton: The Department. 6.  1983: “History of Mopelia Atoll, Society Islands”, in Atoll research bulletin, no 274, pp. 1-37. 7.  1983: The Salomon Islands: Independance and Political Change, Civilisations, vol. vol. 33, no 2, pp. 227-261. 8.  1984: Bermuda national bibliography, [Hamilton]: Bermuda Library, Technical Services. 9.  1984: Characteristics of state plans for aid to families with dependent children under the Social Security Act, Title IV-A, and for Guam, Puerto Rico, & Virgin Islands, old age assistance, aid to the blind, aid to the permanently & totally disabled, under Titles I, X, XIV, and XVI of the Social Security Act, Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of Health and Human Services, Social Security Administration, Office of Family Assistance. 10.  1984: Development and ocean management in the Eastern Caribbean: the case of the Leeward Islands, Halifax, N.S., Canada: Dalhousie Ocean Studies Programme. 11.  1984: Grenada: diary of an invasion Race & Class, Jan 1984; vol. 25: pp. 15 - 26. 12.  1984: Nature et hommes dans les îles tropicales: réflexions et exemples, CRET Bordeaux III: CEGET (C.N.R.S.). 13.  1984: Yagl-Ambu, Vol 11, 3, 1984, Special issue on the 1984 Jackson Report (on Australia’s Overseas Aid Program). 14.  1985: Andaman and Nicobar Islands, New Delhi, Usha. 15.  1985: Tourism in a Small Island Economy: The Case of Malta. Miles Oglethrope, Tourism Management, vol. 6, no. 1, March 1985, pp. 23-31. 16.  1986 – 1992: Country profile. Guyana, Barbados, Windward & Leeward Islands, EIU, the Economist Intelligence Unit, London: The Unit. 17.  1986: Development in the Pacific: what women say, Canberra, ACT, Australian Council for

2009

4

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Overseas Aid. 18.  1986: La France de l’Ocean Indien, St. Benoit: Editions et Impressions Réunionnaises. 19.  1986: Pacific Island States: selected countries; Papua New Guinea, Fiji, Solomon Islands, Western Samoa, Vanuatu, Tonga, Kiribati, The Federated States of Micronesia and Micro States / prepared by the Regional and Country Studies Branch, [New York?]: UNIDO. 20.  1986: Religious Regionalism: Achievements & Prospects, Catalyst, 16 (4): 285301, Condensed reprint in Report of the 5th Assembly, Pacific Conference of Churches, Apia, pp. 191-7. 21.  1986: Small unit actions, Washington, D.C., Center for Military History, U.S. Army. 22.  1987: ”Problemes et possibilites de developpement des petits etats insulaires”, in Courrier Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 104, pp. 77-87. 23.  1987: A bibliography of plant conservation in the pacific islands: endangered species, habitat conversion, introduced biota, Atoll research bulletin, no 311, pp. 1-195. 24.  1987: Energy for Islands: Opportunities for British Science, Technology and Industry, London, England), London; Boston: Graham & Trotman. 25.  1987: Iles, Paris: Gallimard. 26.  1987: Independence for Bermuda: a compendium of those official documents that have been produced and published by the Bermuda Government and presented to Parliament during the period 1977-1987, Bermuda Islands, Hamilton, Bermuda: Cabinet Office. 27.  1987: Problemes et possibilites de developpement des petits etats insulaires, Courrier Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 104, pp. 77-87. 28.  1987: Travaux Geographiques sur Madagascar la grande Ile: Notes, Annales de Geographie, no 533, pp. 103-128. 29.  1987:”Vanuatu”, Oceania, vol. 58(2), 119-139. 30.  1988: A Historical Note on the Early Contacts with the Outside World of Bellona and Rennell Islands (Solomon Islands), The Journal of Pacific History, 23(2):191-200. 31.  1988: Disadvantaged island regions, Brussels: European Communities, Economic and Social Committee. 32.  1988: Problèmes spécifiques et besoins particuliers des pays en développement insulaires, Genève, Rapport du secrétariat général, Nations unies, A/43/513, 25/08/1988. 33.  1988: Répertoire, institutions/organisations et des personnes physiques des îles du sud ouest de l’océan Indien et des pays/régions francophones de l’océan Indien = Directory, institutions/organisations & individuals in the South West Indian Ocean Islands and other French speaking countries/areas bordering the Indian Ocean. Rose Hill, Ile Maurice: Centre de documentation, de recherches et de formation indianocéaniques. 34.  1988: The Law of the sea: régime of islands: legislative history of Part VIII (Article 121) of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea, United Nations. 35.  1989, 1995: Philippines in pictures, prepared by Geography Department, Minneapolis: Lerner. 36.  1989: Development co-operation report on Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, Solomon Islands, Tonga, Federated State of Micronesia, Republic of the Marshall Is., Palau, Tuvalu, Vanuatu, and Pacific regional programmes / compiled by the Office of the Resident Representative, United Nations Development Programme, Suva, Fiji, Suva, Fiji: The Office. 37.  1989: Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean, Washington, D.C.: Dept. of the Army. 38.  1989: L’ Île miroir: actes du colloque d’Aix-en-Provence, 27-28 novembre 1987, la Marge.

2009

CEHA

5

39.  1989: L’Île, territoire mythique, Centre de recherche sur la littérature des voyages (Paris) / Aux Amateurs de Livres. 40.  1990: International Relations in the Pacific Islands, The Pacific Basin: Economic & Political Viewpoints, Pacific Science Congress & Chilean Council on Foreign Relations, Santiago, pp. 15-38. 41.  1991: Flood insurance study: Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana, Saipan, Tinian and Rota Islands, [Washington, D.C.?]: Federal Emergency Management Agency. 42.  1991: From Tortola to Kingstown: a report on eastern Caribbean political union. [Saint Lucia?]: Voice Press. 43.  1991: Iles et sociétés insulaires: [Extraits du colloque «Territoires et sociétés insulaires: permanences, changements et devenir», Brest, 15-17 novembre 1990, Norois. 44.  1992: Global climate change and the Pacific islands: hearing before the Committee on Energy and Natural Resources, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, second session, on the scientific evidence and policy implications of sea level rise ... Honolulu, HI, May 26, 1992, United States. Congress. Senate. Committee on Energy and Natural Resources. Washington: U.S. G.P.O.: For sale by the U.S. G.P.O., Supt. of Docs., Congressional Sales Office. 45.  1992: Oceania nera: arte, cultura e popoli della Melanesia nelle collezioni del Museo di antropologia e etnologia di Firenze: Firenze, Sala d’arme di Palazzo vecchio 30 aprile-9 agosto 1992. 46.  1992: Our islands’ past: historical documents about Cayman from the Cayman Islands National Archive, George Town, Grand Cayman, B.W.I.: Cayman Islands National Archive and Cayman Free Press. 47.  1992: Staten Island secession: the price of independence, Mayor’s Task Force on Staten Island Secession, New York (N.Y.), [City of New York: Office of Management and Budget, Dept. of Finance]. 48.  1992: Studies on the natural history of the Caribbean region, Natuurwetenschappelijke Studiekring voor het Caraïbisch Gebied.

Amsterdam:

49.  1992: Voces de ultramar: arte en América Latina y Canarias, 1910-1960. [Las Palmas de Gran Canaria]: Centro Atlántico de Arte Moderno. 50.  1993: Achievements & Problems of the First Ten Years, Independence, Dependence & Interdependence: The First Ten Years of Solomon Islands Independence, University of the South Pacific. pp. 164-8. 51.  1993: Cook Islands: national environmental management strategy. Apia, Western Samoa: South Pacific Regional Environment Programme. 52.  1993: The Aleutians Campaign, June 1942-August 1943, Washington: Naval Historical Center, Dept. of the Navy: For sale by the U.S. G.P.O., Supt. of Docs. 53.  1994: America, 1994 annual meeting, Boulder, CO, United States, Geological Society. 54.  1994: Bibliography of the Philippine Islands, Library of Congress, Ermita Manila: Reprinted by National Historical Institute. 55.  1994: L’Intégration régionale dans le Monde, Paris, Karthala/GEMDEV. 56.  1994: Qing dai Zhong Liu guan xi dang an xu bian - Zhongguo di 1 li shi dang an guan bian, Beijing: Zhonghua shu ju: Xin hua shu dian Beijing fa xing suo fa xing. 57.  1994: Sri Lanka: State of Human Rights, Colombo, Sri Lanka: Law and Society Trust.

2009

6

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

58.  1994: Verslunarskýrslur, Reykjavík: Statistical Bureau of Iceland. 59.  1995: The big death: Solomon Islanders remember World War II, University of the South Pacific, Suva, 1995. 60.  1995: The Solomon Islands economy: achieving sustainable economic development. [Canberra]: Australian Agency for International Development. 61.  1996: Guadeloupe, les Saintes, Marie-Galante, la Désirade, Saint-Martin, Saba, SaintBarthélemy et Anguilla, [Éd.] 1997-98, Hachette. 62.  1996: Kinalamten Pulitikat: Sinenten I Chamorro (Issues in Guam’s Political Development:  The Chamorro Perspective), 1996, Hale’-ta Series, Agana Guam:  The Political Status Education Coordinating Commission.  63.  1996: La mer: espace, perception et imaginaire dans le Pacifique Sud: actes du neuvième Colloque, CORAIL. 64.  1996: Rade de Brest, baie de Douarnenez et les îles : atlas de la mer d’Iroise, Gallimard. 65.  1996: Sustainable tourism in islands and small states, Pinter. 66.  1997  : Vivre dans une île: une géopolitique des insularités: [actes du colloque, 19-22 septembre 1995, Casa de Cultura de Mahón]m, l’Harmattan. 67.  1997: Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, Cambridge University Press. 68.  1997: Coordination pour l’Océanie des recherches sur les arts, les idées et les littératures. Colloque (09 ; 1996), Université française du Pacifique: CORAIL: l’Harmattan. 69.  1997: Hai wai Tai gang bao diao yun dong zhuan ji, Carbondale, Ill, Riben qin hua yan jiu xue hui, (ilhas senkaku). 70.  1997: Île des merveilles: mirage, miroir, mythe, Centre culturel international (Cerisy-la-Salle, Manche). Colloque (1993-08-02), l’Harmattan. 71.  1997: Îles : vivre entre ciel et mer, Muséum national d’histoire naturelle: Nathan. 72.  1997: L’éternel Recours: les impasses de l’économie assistée en Nouvelle-Calédonie, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, pp.. 99-119. 73.  1997: L’île et le volcan : formes et forces de l’imaginaire, Lettres modernes. 74.  1998: Literary archipelagoes, Éd. universitaires de Dijon] / impr. 75.  1998: A different kind of voyage: development and dependence in the Pacific Islands, [Manila, Philippines], Asian Development Bank, Office of Pacific Operations. 76.  1998: Banking and finance in islands and small states, Pinter. 77.  1998: Land Tenure in the Pacific Developing Countries, Improving Growth Prospects in the Pacific, Asian Development Bank, Manila, pp.37-68. 78.  1998: Quel transports dans les petites iles caraïbes?, in Geode Caraibe, Paris: Karthala. 79.  1998: Seminario internazionale di studi sul tema «Le grandi isole del Mediterraneo orientale tra tarda antichità e medioevo»: in memoria di Luciano Laurenzi: Ravenna, 19-21 settembre. 80.  1998: The legacy of Ibo landing: Gullah roots of African American culture, edited by Marquetta L. Goodwine & the Clarity Press Gullah Project, Atlanta, GA, Clarity Press. 81.  1998: The Past in the Future: Trends in the Diverse Histories of Pacific Islands Societies & their Relevance for Today & Tomorrow (with Marjorie Tuainekore Crocombe), Pacific

2009

CEHA

7

Studies, Commonwealth Youth Programme, Honiara & Huddersfield. 82.  1999: An economic study for the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Saipan, MP: Business Development Center, Northern Marianas College. 83.  1999: Archives Administration in Oceania, Archives and Manuscripts, vol. 27. 84.  1999: Islands 2000: the world of islands: what development on the eve of the year 2000 ?: selected papers from the International Conference Giardini-Naxos, Italy, 19-24 May 1992, National Technical University. 85.  1999: Les outre-mers français: enjeux de la mondialisation: les grandes villes: insularité et continentalité... [etc.], Paris: Belin. 86.  1999: Pacific islands nations in the age of globalization, Tokyo, Fondation for advanced information and research. 87.  1999: Recent trends in population, labor force, employment, unemployment and wages: Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands 1973 to 1999, [Saipan, Mariana Islands], Central Statistics Division, Department of Commerce. 88.  1999: Sustainable energies: building the future of islands: island solar agenda, recommendations, proceedings: Island Solar Summit. Tenerife 1999, ITER: INSULA. 89.  2000, 2005: syllabi & bibliographies: 2000 to present, UHM, Center for Pacific Island Studies. Disponível online em url: url:  http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/content.html#biblio. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 90.  2000: Athènes et les îles grecques, Hachette. 91.  2000: Caribbean development strategies: issues and options, Largo, International development options. 92.  2000: Polynesian Migrations & Voyaging Traditions Bibliography, Polynesian Voyaging Society. Disponível online em url:   http://pvs.kcc.hawaii.edu/traditionsbib.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 93.  2000: Security Challenges in the New Millenium, The South Pacific: Zone of Peace or Sea of Troubles? Australian Defence Studies Centre, Canberra. Reprinted in Islands Business under the title “Australia, NZ Need to Understand Region Better”, vol 26(9), 38-9. 94.  2000:Leiđsögn um íslenska byggingalist, Reykjavík, Arkitektafélag Íslands. 95.  2000-2005: Pacific Studies Site Links to other Bibliographies, Pacific Studies Initiative, University of Hawaii. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/inet-links. html#Biblio. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 96.  2000: Isule literarie = Des îles littéraires: nouvelles de Méditerranée, Ajaccio [Corsica], Albiana-CCU. 97.  2001: “Cultural Geographies in Practice: Intimate distance: fantasy islands and English lakes”, in Cultural Geographies, vol. 8: pp. 112 - 119. 98.  2001: Anon. War in the Falklands, 1982, London: The Stationery Office. 99.  2001: Au bout du voyage, l’île: mythe et réalité, Centre de recherche VALS (Reims, Marne). Colloque international (1; 1999; Reims), Presses universitaires de Reims. 100.  2001: Foreign investment climate in Forum island countries, Suva: Pacific Islands Forum Secretariat. 101.  2001: Protocols Guide; Drumming the story; its our business, 2001, Mackay, Mackay and District Australian South Sea Islander Association.

2009

8

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

102.  2001: To islands far away: the story of the Thomasites and their journey to the Philippines, Manila, Public Affairs Section, U.S. Embassy. 103.  2001:Corso di cultura sull’arte ravennate e bizantina (44; 1988; Ravenne, Italie), Edizioni del Girasole. 104.  2002: A Polynesian People’s Struggle to Maintain Community in the Solomon Islands, In Constructing Moral Communities: Pacific Islander Strategies for Settling in New Places, edited by Judith Modell. Special issue, Pacific Studies, 25(1/2):45-70. 105.  2002: Pacific diaspora; Island peoples in the United States and across the Pacific, Honolulu, UH Press, 1-340, 22(4): 250-256. 106.  2002: Regional tourism strategy for the South and Central Pacific, Suva, Fiji: South Pacific Tourism Organisation. 107.  2003: L’outre-mer français dans le Pacifique: Nouvelle-Calédonie, Polynésie française, Wallis-et- Futuna, Paris-Nouméa, L’Harmattan. 108.  2003: Security for Small Polynesian States: The Cook Islands, Niue & Tuvalu (with Siliga Kofe), Pacific Islands Forum, Suva. 109.  2004: United Nations, ESCAP - Economic and social Commission for Asia and the Pacific (New York), Economic and Social Survey of Asia and the Pacific 2004: Asia-Pacific Economies: Sustaining Growth and Tackling Poverty, no 2004, p. 1-293. 110.  2005: Archaeology and early history of the Channel Islands, Heather Sebire. (Revealing history). Stroud: Tempus. 111.  2005: The Falklands War: [seminar] held at the Joint Services Command and Staff College (JSCSC), Watchfield, Wiltshire on 5 June 2002, chaired by Geoffrey Till; paper by Lawrence Freedman ; seminar edited by Andrew Dorman, Michael D. Kandiah and Gillian Staerck. London: Centre for Contemporary British History, Institute for Historical Research. 112.  2006, 2008: Fiji Arthropod Survey bibliography online, the Fiji Terrestrial Arthropod Survey, the National Science Foundation and the Schlinger Foundation. Disponível online em url: http://hbs.bishopmuseum.org/fiji/biblio.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. Obs.: informação bibliográfica sobre as ilhas Fiji. 113.  2006: Borneo bibliography, Free library. Disponível online em url: http://www.thefreelibrary. com/Borneo+bibliography+2006.-a0166350079. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 114.  2006: The Aid Trade: Resource Flows, Trade-Offs, Sovereignty & Development, Pacific Connection, vol 9. 115.  2006: The Channel Islands 1941-45: Hitler’s impregnable fortress; Charles Stephenson; illustrated by Chris Taylor. (Fortress: The Castles & Fortifications Quarterly, 41). Oxford: Osprey. 116.  2006: The decline and fall of St. Kilda: proceedings of an international conference organised by The Islands Book Trust in August 2005 to mark the 75th anniversary of the evacuation of St. Kilda. Port Ness: Islands Book Trust. 117.  2007: Tales and travels of a school inspector, in the Highlands and Islands at the end of the 19th century, including Jura, Heisker, Islay, Orkney, Coll, Argyll, Lewis and many others; John Wilson. Edinburgh: Birlinn. 118.  2007: The biographical dictionary of Britain’s railway personalities, organisations & events 1597-1923: excluding Ireland, Isle of Man, and Channel Islands; Dawn Smith. Peterlee: Glebe. 119.  2007: The Indian Uprising of 1857-8: prisons, prisoners, and rebellion; Clare Anderson.

2009

CEHA

9

(Anthem South Asian studies), London; New York: Anthem Press. 120.  2007: The official history of the Falklands Campaign; Lawrence Freedman. (Whitehall histories: government official history series). Rev. and updated edn. London: Routledge, 2 vols. 121.  2007: Viking-age communities: pap-names and papar in the Hebridean Islands; Kristján Ahronson. (BAR, British ser., 450). Oxford: Archaeopress. 122.  2008: Kourosh Ahmadi Islands and international politics in the Persian Gulf: Abu Musa and Tunbs in strategic perspective, London; New York: Routledge, cop. 123.  Aalen, F. H. A. ‘The mythical isles and North Atlantic discovery’, In Clarke, Howard B.; Prunty, Jacinta; Hennessy, Mark (ed.), Surveying Irelands’ past: multidisciplinary essays in honour of Anngret Simms (Dublin: Geography Publications), 169-195. 124.  Aarsse, Robert, 1993: L’Indonesie, Paris, karthala. 125.  Abad, Ricardo G., Visayas Rowe V. Cadeliña, Violeta Lopez-Gonzaga, 1986: Faces of Philippine poverty: four cases from the editors, [Philippines],Visayas Research Consortium, Philippine Social Science Council. 126.  Abbott, G.C., 1975: ‘Small states - the paradox of their existence.’ In P. Selwyn (ed.), Development Policy in Small Developing Countries, London: Croom Helm. 127.  Abbott, L. D., 1995: “Neogene Tectonic Reconstruction of the Adelbert-Finisterre-New Britain Collision, Northern Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of Southeast Asian Earth Sciences 11(1): 33-51. 128.  Abbott, Roland W., 1994: A brief history of the Offer Wadham Island, Newfoundland: the million dollar rock, St. John’s, Nfld.: Creative. 129.  Abers, G. A. and S. W. Roecker, 1991: “Deep-Structure of an Arc-Continent Collision Earthquake Relocation and Inversion For Upper Mantle P and S-Wave Velocities Beneath Papua New Guinea.” Journal of Geophysical Research-Solid Earth and Planets 96(B4): 6379-6401. 130.  Abeyasekere, Susan, 1987: Jakarta: A History, Singapore: Oxford University Press. 131.  Abeyratne, R.I.R., 1997: The impact of tourism and air transport on the small island developing states, Environmental Policy and Law. 27(3), pp. 198-202. 132.  Abraham, Sara, 2007: Labour and the multiracial project in the Caribbean: its history and its promise, Lanham: Lexington Books. 133.  Abulafia, David, 1994: A Mediterranean emporium: the Catalan kingdom of Majorca, Cambridge [England]; New York: Cambridge University Press. 134.  Abulafia, David, 2008: The discovery of mankind: Atlantic encounters in the age of Columbus, New Haven [Conn.]: Yale University Press. 135.  Accilien, Cécile, 2008: Rethinking marriage in francophone African and Carribean literatures, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books. 136.  ACCT: Agence Intergouvernementale de la Francophonie – París, France, 1983: Medecine traditionnelle et pharmacopee: contribution aux etudes ethnobotaniques et floristiques a maurice (iles maurice et rodrigues), Paris: acct. 137.  Ackrén, Maria e Olausson, Pär M., Condition(s) for Island Autonomy, International Journal on Minority and Group Rights, Volume 15, Numbers 2-3, 2008, pp. 227-258(32). 138.  Ackrén, Maria, 2002: Microstates and Autonomies in the Caribbean and South Pacific, Islands of the Workshop VII Conference: New Horizons in Island Studies, June 26-30,

2009

10

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Canada. 139.  Ackrén, Maria, 2005: Territoriella autonomier i världen – En empirisk studie över de självstyrda områdena i världen. Monography, The Åland Islands’ Peace Institute. 140.  Ackrill, Margaret, 1994: British imperialism in microcosm: the annexation of the Cocos (Keeling) Islands (London School of Economics, working papers in economic history, 18), London: London School of Economics and Political Science, 1994. 141.  Acosta, Miguel Angel Cabrera, José Alcaraz Abellán...[et al.], 2000: La Guerra Civil en Canarias, La Laguna,Francisco Lemus Editor. 142.  Acquaviva, Sabino, 1987: La Corsica: Storia di un genocidio, Franco Angeli, Milano. 143.  Adams, Kathleen M. 1984, Come to Tana Toraja, “Land of the Heavenly Kings”: Travel Agents as Brokers in Ethnicity, Annals of Tourism Research, 11:469-485. 144.  Adams, Kathleen M., 1988: Carving a New Identity: Ethnic and Artistic Change in Tana Toraja. Ph.D. dissertation, University of Washington. 145.  Adams, Kathleen M., 1990: Cultural Commoditization in Tana Toraja, Indonesia, Cultural Survival Quarterly, 14(1):31-33. 146.  Adams, Kathleen M., 1991: Distant Encounters: Travel Literature and the Shifting Images of the Toraja of Sulawesi, Indonesia, Terrae Incognitae, 23:81-92. 147.  Adams, Kathleen M., 1995: Making-Up the Toraja? The Appropriation of Tourism, Anthropology, and Museums for Politics in Upland Sulawesi, Indonesia.Ethnology, 34:143-153. 148.  Adams, Kathleen M., 1997: Ethnic Tourism and the Renegotiation of Traditionin Tana Toraja (Sulawesi, Indonesia), Ethnology, 36:309-320. 149.  Adams, Kathleen M., 1997a: Touting Touristic “Primadonas”: Tourism, Ethnicity, and national Integration in Sulawesi, Indonesia. In Tourism, Ethnicity, and the State in Asian and Pacific Societies. Robert E. Wood andMichel Picard, eds. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. Pp. 155-180. 150.  Adams, Kathleen M. 1998. Domestic Tourism and Nation-Building in South Sulawesi, Indonesia and the Malay World, 26:77-96. 151.  Adams, R., and M. (eds), 1992: European discovery or multiple discoveries, in Quanchi Culture contact in the Pacific, Melbourne, CUP (Chps 3 and 4). 152.  Adams, Ron, 1984: In the land of strangers: a century of European contact with Tanna, 1774-1874, Canberra. 153.  Adamson, E., [et al.], 1984: “West Nakanai (Kimbe) oil palm scheme, Papua New Guinea: social, economic and environmental aspects”, in Environmental Report No. 20. 154.  Adamson, E., L. Fett, A. Huntsman and G. Scarlett, 1984: West Nakanai (Kimbe) oil palm scheme, Papua New Guinea: social, economic and environmental aspects, Environmental Report No. 20. Melbourne, Graduate School of Environmental Science, Monash University. 155.  Adamthwaite, Anthony, 2003: ‘The British experience of war since 1945: Suez 1956, Falklands 1982’. In Domergue Cloarec, Danielle; Coppolani, Antoine (ed.), Des conflits en mutation? : de la guerre froide aux nouveaux conflits : essai de typologie : de 1947 à nos jours, Bruxelles: Editions Complexe, 255-69. 156.  ADB, 2005: Toward a new Pacific regionalism: an Asian Development Bank-Commonwealth Secretariat joint report to the Pacific Islands Forum Secretariat. Metro Manila: Asian

2009

CEHA

11

Development Bank. 157.  ADCOL (n.d.), Communications Systems - A 1979 Study of Cape Gloucester, Port Moresby, Administrative College of PNG. 158.  Adderley, Rosanne Marion; others, 2006: New negroes from Africa: slave trade abolition and free African settlement in the nineteenth-century Caribbean (Blacks in the diaspora), Bloomington: Indiana University Press. 159.  Addy, G., 1984: An economic analysis of banana intercropping in the windward islands, Fruits, no 2, p. p. 100-106. 160.  Adelaide Merlande, Jacques, 1992: La Caraibe et la Guyane au temps de la revolution et de l’Empire (1789-1804), Paris: karthala. 161.  Adkin, Mark, 1989: Urgent Fury: The Battle for Grenada: The Truth Behind the Largest U.S. Military Operation Since Vietnam. Trans-Atlantic Publications. 162.  Adler, Emily Stier; Lemons, J. Stanley, 1990: The Elect: Rhode Island’s women legislators, 1922-1990, Providence: League of Rhode Island Historical Societies. 163.  Adrover Rosselló, Pedro, 1995: La Orden de Predicadores en la historia de Baleares (siglos XIII-XX), presentación, Lorenzo Galmés Más, epílogo, Teodor Ubeda Gramage, Palma, Mallorca: Lleonard Muntaner. 164.  Afonso, João, 1997: Bibliografia Geral dos Açores, Sequência açoriana do dicionário bibliográfico português, Angra do Heroísmo, SREC, Direcção Regional dos Assuntos Culturais, 3 vols. 165.  Afflerbach, Holger, 2001: ‘”Mit wehender Fahne untergehen”: Kapitulationsverweigerungen in der deutschen Marine’, Vierteljahrshefte für Zeitgeschichte, 49:4, 598-612. 166.  Aglioni, François, 2004: La coopération régionale dans l’Océanie insulaire: des processus polymorphes, In Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.), Insularité, société et développement, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 53-74. 167.  Agniel, D., 1998: Aux Marquises, Paris, L’Harmattan/IRD. 168.  AGS, 1943: Routes Across New Britain, Special Report No. 25, Allied Geographical Section, Southwest Pacific Area. 169.  Aguillon, Florian, 1997: Chroniques marquisiennes, 1978-1983: la philosophie du ravage, Paris, Harmattan. 170.  AHelu Thaman, K., 2007: ‘Towards Different Island Research’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A Historical Geography, Vol. 39, No. 4, pp. 554-581. 171.  Ahern, Emily, 1981: The Anthropology of Taiwanese Society, Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press. 172.  Ahlburg, D., 1994: Return migration from the United States to American Samoa …, PS, 17, 2, 71-84. 173.  Ahmadi, Kourosh, 2008: Islands and international politics in the Persian Gulf: Abu Musa and Tunbs in strategic perspective, London; New York: Routledge. 174.  Ahronson, Kristján, 2007, Viking-age communities: pap-names and papar in the Hebridean Islands, Oxford: Archaeopress. 175.  Ainet, Guy, 1998: Goree et l’Ile Saint-Louis du Senegal: de l’insularite a l’urbanite, revue de geographie du cameroun, 1998, vol. vol. 13, no 2, p. p. 50-65. 176.  Akauola, L., Ilaiu, L. and Samate, A., 1980: The social and cultural impact of tourism in

2009

12

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Tonga. In: Crocombe, R. and Rajotte, F. (eds) Pacific Tourism as Islanders See it. Suva, Institute of Pacific Studies: USP, pp.17-23. 177.  Akimichi, Tomoya, 1984: Uo to bunka: Satawarutō minzoku gyoruishi, Tōkyō: Kaimeisha. 178.  Akis, S., Peristianis, N, and Warner, J., 1996: Residents attitudes to tourism development: the case of Cyprus, Tourism Management, 17(7), pp. 481-404. 179.  Akus, W., [et al.], 1996: “West New Britain Province galip survey: June 24th to July 7th 1996”, in KGIDP galip nut conference, Kandrian. 180.  Alamkan, Myriam, 2003: Histoire maritime des Petites Antilles, XVIIe et XVIIIe siècles, préface de René-Roger Annerose. – Matoury (Guyane): Ibis rouge. 181.  Alan A. Block, 1998: Masters of Paradise, New Brunswick and London, Transaction Publishers. 182.  Alante-Lima, Willy, 2000: L’île de Monrire: chronique et histoires breves, Saint-Maur-des Fossés, Editions Sépia. 183.  Alasia, Sam, 1997: «Party Politics and Government in the Solomon Islands», Discussion Paper 97:7, State, Society and Governance Project, Australian National University, Canberra, Australia. 184.  Albertini, F.; Salini, D. (dir.), 1998: Îles et mémoires, Corte, Université de Corse/Presses universitaires Corses. 185.  Albinski, 1994: America’s future in the Pacific Islands region, Journal of the Pacific Society, 16, 4, 14-25. 186.  Albuquerque, Luís de, 1990: “As ilhas que estavam lá…”, in Oceanos, nº 5, pp. 52 – 67. 187.  Albuquerque, Luís de; Madeira Santos, Maria Emília, 1995: História Geral de Cabo Verde, [Trad.: Histoire generale du Cap Vert], Instituto de Investigacao Cientifica Tropical – Lisbonne, Portugal; Instituto National da Cultura de Cabo Verde. 188.  Alcaraz Abellán, José, 1999: Instituciones y sociedad en Gran Canaria, 1936-1960, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo de Gran Canaria. 189.  Aldrich, R., 1990: The French presence in the South Pacific 1842-1940, London. 190.  Aldrich, Richard James, 2000: ‘The decolonisation of the Pacific islands’, Itinerario, 24:3-4, 173-191. 191.  Aldrich, Robert, 1990: The French presence in the South Pacific, 1842-1940, Basingstoke. 192.  Aldrich, Robert, 1993: France and the South Pacific since 1940, Basingstoke: Macmillan. 193.  Aldrich, Robert; Connell, John, 1998: 1946 - The last colonies, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 194.  Alenyar i Fuster, Miquel, 1984: Introducció a l’economia de les Balears, Palma de Mallorca: Caixa de Balears “Sa nostra”. 195.  Alexander, Alison (editor), 2005: The Companion to Tasmanian History Centre for Tasmanian Historical Studies, University of Tasmania, Hobart. 196.  Alexander, Caroline, 2003: The Bounty: The True Story of the Mutiny on the Bounty, Viking Penguin, Londres. 197.  Alexander, L., 1980: «Centre and Periphery: The Case of Island Systems», in Gottmann J. (dir.), Centre and Periphery. Spatial Variations in Politics, Beverly Hills, Sage Publications, p. 135-147.

2009

CEHA

13

198.  Alexander, Ronni, 1994: Putting the earth first: alternatives to nuclear security in Pacific Island states, Honolulu, Hawaii: Matsunaga Institute for Peace, University of Hawaii. 199.  Alexeyeff, Kalissa, 2008: Globalizing Drag in the Cook Islands: Friction, Repulsion, and Abjection, The Contemporary Pacific, Volume 20, Number 1, Spring pp. 143-161. 200.  Alié Claudy et al., 2007: Une méditerranée caraïbe: Clovis F. Beauregard, 60 ans de coopération régionale, 1946-2005, Fort-de-France: Archives départementales de la Martinique. 201.  Allaire, Louis, 1997: «The Caribs of the Lesser Antilles». In Samuel M. Wilson, The Indigenous People of the Caribbean, Gainesville, Florida: University of Florida. pp. 180–185. 201.  Allan, Colin H., 1983: “The Transfer of Power: Ministerialization in Island Countries”, in International Review of Administrative Sciences, Jan 1983; vol. 49: pp. 49 - 60. 202.  Allan, H.H., 1982: Indigenous Tracheophyta - Psilopsida, Lycopsida, Filicopsida, Gymnospermae, Dicotyledons, Flora of New Zealand Volume I. Botany Division, Department of Scientific and Industrial Research. 203.  Allen, Harry, 1981: The censuses of 1901 and 1911 for Copeland Island, Journal of Bangor Historical Society, 1, 10-12. 204.  Allen, J.; Rath, Daniel; Johnston, Raymond, 1980: “The Lamogai Family of Languages”, in Raymond Johnston, ed., Language, Communication and Development in New Britain, Ukarumpa: SIL, Pp. 185-196. 205.  Allen, J. and C. Gosden, Eds. 1991: Report of the Lapita Homeland Project, [Occasional Papers in Prehistory, No.20], Canberra, Dept Prehistory, RSPacS, ANU. 206.  Allen, J. and J. P. White, 1989: The Lapita Homeland: some new data and an interpretation, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 98:129-57. 207.  Allen, J., 2000: “From beach to beach: The development of maritime economies in prehistoric Melanesia”, In: S. O’Connor and P. Veth, Eds, East of Wallace’s Line: studies of past and present maritime cultures of the Indo-Pacific region, Rotterdam; Brookfield, VT, A.A. Balkema, pp. 139-176. 208.  Allen, Madelene, 1997: Wake of the Invercauld: shipwrecked in the sub-Antarctic, Montréal, McGill-Queen’s University Press. 209.  Allen, Matthew, 2002: Identity and Resistance in Okinawa. Lanham, Maryland: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, Inc.. 210.  Allen, Philip M., 1987: Security and nationalism in the Indian Ocean: lessons from the Latin Quarter Islands, Boulder, Westview Press. 211.  Alley, R., 1998: The United Nations in Southeast Asia and the South Pacific, Basingstoke, Macmillan. 212.  Alley, R., 2000: The domestic politics of international relations: cases from Australia, New Zealand and Oceania, Aldershot, Ashgate. 213.  Allibert, C. Mayotte, 1984: Plaque tournante et microcosme de l’Ocean Indien occidental, son histoire avant 1841, Paris: anthropos. 214.  Allibert, Claude, 1996: The early pre-Islamic history of the Comores islands: links with Madagascar and Africa, in Indian Ocean in antiquity, edited by Julian Reade, London; New York: Kegan Paul International in association with the British Museum, pp. 461-470. 215.  Allibert, Claude, 2008: “Austronesian Migration and the Establishment of the Malagasy Civilization: Contrasted Readings in Linguistics, Archaeology, Genetics and Cultural

2009

14

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Anthropology”, in Diogenes, May; vol. 55: pp. 7 - 16. 216.  Allied Geographical Section, 1944-45: An Annotated bibliography of the southwest Pacific and adjacent areas, Allied Geographical Section, Southwest Pacific Area, [Brisbane?]:Allied Geographical Section. 217.  Allison, Karen J., 1984: A View from the islands: the Samal of Tawi-tawi, Dallas, Tex.: International Museum of Cultures. 218.  Allman, James, 1983: L’Emigration Haitienne vers l’Etranger de 1950 a 1980, Conjonction, no 157, p. p. 65-81. 219.  Allsworth-Jones, P., 2008: Pre-Columbian Jamaica, Tuscaloosa, AL: University of Alabama Press. 220.  Almeida Aguiar, Antonio S., 2005: Británicos, deporte y burguesía en una ciudad atlántica: Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, 1880-1914, [Las Palmas]: Ayuntamiento de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones. 221.  Almeida Serra, António M. de, 2001: “Timor Loro Sa’e: It’s Hard to Build a New Country”, in Lusotopie, pp. 269-298. 222.  Almeida, Germano, 2003: Cabo Verde: Viagem pela História das Ilhas, Lisboa, Editorial Caminho. 223.  Almeida, Onésimo Teotónio, 1989: Açores, Açorianos, Açorianidade: um espaço cultural, Marinho Matos. 224.  Almeida, Onésimo Teotónio, [org.], 1986: Da Literatura Açoriana-subsídios para um balanço. Angra do Heroísmo, SREC. 225.  Almond, R. A., 1981: Investigation of 12, 13 August, 1979 earthquake swarm near Bialla, west New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Geological Survey, Report. 226.  Alomar Esteve, Gabriel; Canyelles, Antoni I. Alomar i., 1994: El patrimoni cultural de les Illes Balears: idees per una política de defensa i protección,[Palma, Spain?]: Institut d’Estudis Baleàrics. 227.  Alomar i Canyelles, Antoni I., 1998: L’Estendard, la festa nacional més antiga d’Europa (s. XIII-XXI), pròleg d’Armand de Fluvià, Palma, Edicions Documenta Balear. 228.  Alomar i Canyelles, Antoni, 1998: L’exércit mallorquí de la fi de l’edat mitjana a la seva desaparició, pròleg de Gabriel Cardona, Palma de mallorca: Documenta Balear. 229.  Alomo, Tony, 1984: An Island in Agony, Published by Tony Palomo. 230.  Alonso, Irma T., 2002: Caribbean economies in the twenty-first century, Gainesville, University Press of Florida. 231.  Als, Thomas D., Tove H. Jorgensen, Anders D. Børglum, Peter A. Petersen, Ole Mors and August G. Wang, 2006: Highly discrepant proportions of female and male Scandinavian and British Isles ancestry within the isolated population of the Faroe Islands, European Journal of Human Genetics, 14, 497–504. doi:10.1038/sj.ejhg.5201578. Disponível online em url: http://www.nature.com/ejhg/journal/v14/n4/full/5201578a.html. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 232.  Alsop, James D., 2005: “Island Refashioning: The Nantucket Agricultural Society, 18561880”, New England Quarterly, vol.77, no.4, pp.563-587. 233.  Altinay, Mehmet; Biçak, Hasan Ali, 1998: “Competitive strategies for the tourism sector of a small island state: The case of North Cyprus”, in Journal of Vacation Marketing, Jan; vol. 4: pp. 136 - 144.

2009

CEHA

15

234.  Altman I. and Butler R., 1994: The contact of cultures; perspectives on the Quincentenary, (of Columbus in the Americas in 1492), American Historical Review, April, pp.478-503. 235.  Altman, Ann M., 2004: Early Visitors to Easter Island 1864-1877 (translations of the accounts of Eugène Eyraud, Hippolyte Roussel, Pierre Loti and Alphonse Pinart; with an Introduction by Georgia Lee). Los Osos, CA: Easter Island Foundation. 236.  Alvar, Manuel, 1993: Estudios canários, Islas Canarias: Viceconsejería de Cultura Y Deportes, Gobierno de Canarias. 237.  Álvarez Astacio, Mrinali, 2009: De dónde dicen que vino la gente, San Juan, P. R.: La Editorial Universidad de Puerto Rico. 238.  Alvarez, José, 2004: Cuban Agriculture Before 1959: The Social Situation, Cuba’s Agricultural Sector, University Press of Florida. 239.  AM, Gibson, 1993: Yankees in paradise; the Pacific basin frontier, University of New Mexico Press. 240.  Amadio, Nadine, 1993: Pacifica: myth, magic, and traditional wisdom from the South Sea Island, photographs by John Tristram, Sydney, Australia; New York, NY, USA: Angus & Robertson. 241.  Amaral, Ilídio do, 2001: «As Ilhas Atlânticas e Índicas como Pontos Nodais na Rede de Globalização Iniciada nos Séculos XV a XVII», Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999,2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 113-138. 242.  Amaral, João Bosco Mota, 1990: O Desafio Insular, Ponta Delgada, Signo. 243.  Amarílis, Orlanda, 1992: “Josefa de Sta. Maria nas Ilhas de Cabo Verde Achadas pelo Piloto Diogo Gomes e pelo Genovês Antonioto Usodimore, Companheiro de Cadamosto no Ano de 1460”, in Oceanos, nº 10, pp. 129 – 130. 244.  Ambrose, W. R.; Johnson, R. W., 1986: “Unea: an obsidian non-source in Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of the Polynesian Society 95(4): 49l-7. 245.  Ambrose, W.; Golson, J.; Yen, D., 2000: Jim Allen and the Lapita Homeland Project, in: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds. Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen. Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 31-37. 246.  Amiot-Jouenne, Pascale, editor, 2001: Irlande: insularité, singularité?: actes du Colloque de la Société française d’études irlandaises, Université de Perpignan, 23 et 24 mars 2001, Société française d’études irlandaises, Pascale Amiot-Jouenne, Colloque, Université de Perpignan, Presses universitaires de Perpignan, 2001. 247.  Amirahmadi, edited by Hooshang, 1996: Small islands, big politics: the Tonbs and Abu Musa in the Persian Gulf, New York: St. Martin’s Press. 248.  Amorim, Norberta, «Um Estudo de População e Sociedade: O Caso de S. João do Pico (Séculos XVII e XVIII)», pp. 33-55, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 249.  Amuedo-Dorantes, Catalina, Susan Pozo and Carlos Vargas-Silva, 2007: Remittances and the Macroeconomy: The Case of Small Island Developing States, No UNU-WIDER

2009

16

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Research Paper RP2007/22, Working Papers from World Institute for Development Economic Research (UNU-WIDER). Disponível online em url: 2009. http://www.wider. unu.edu/stc/repec/pdfs/rp2007/rp2007-22.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 250.  Amussen, Susan Dwyer, 2007: Caribbean exchanges: slavery and the transformation of English society, 1640-1700, Chapel Hill: The University of North Carolina Press. 251.  Anastasiou, Harry, 2008: Broken Olive Branch: Nationalism Ethnic Conflict and the Quest for Peace in Cyprus, Syracuse University PressAnckar, Dag Carsten, 1998: Cultural heritage and electoral systems: the case of small island states, Åbo: Dept. of Political Science, Åbo Akademi University. 252.  Anckar, Dag Carsten, 2002: Why are Small Island States Democracies? In The Round Table, Vol. 91, No 365, pp. 375-390. 253.  Anckar, Dag Carsten, 2007: Islands, size, volcanoes: the study of the physical setting of politics, Åbo, Finland: Department of Political Science, Åbo Akademi University. 254.  Anckar, Dag Carsten, 2008: “Size, Islandness, and Democracy: A Global Comparison”, in International Political Science Review/ Revue internationale de science politique, Sep.; vol. 29: pp. 433 - 459. 255.  Andaya, Leonard Y., 1993: The World of Maluku: Eastern Indonesia in the Early Modern Period. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 256.  Anderson A, 1998: The welcome of strangers; an ethnohistory of Southern Maori AD 16501850, Dunedin, University of Otago Press. 257.  Anderson D., ed., 1990: The PNG-Australia relationship; problems and prospects, Sydney, Pacific Security Research Institute/Institute of Public Affairs. 258.  Anderson, Kay, 1998: “Science and the Savage: the Linnean Society of New South Wales, 1874-1900”, in Cultural Geographies, Apr.; vol. 5: pp. 125 - 143. 259.  Anderson, Atholl and Tim Murray, 2000: Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, he Australian National University, pp. 161-170. 260.  Anderson, Atholl J., 2001: The Prehistoric Archaeology of Norfolk Island, Southwest Pacific, Canberra, Australian National Museum. 261.  Anderson, Benedict, 2001: “Imagining East Timor”, in Lusotopie, pp. 233-239. 262.  Anderson, Clare, 2007: The Indian Uprising of 1857-8: prisons, prisoners, and rebellion, (Anthem South Asian studies), London; New York: Anthem Press. 263.  Anderson, Duncan, 2002: The Falklands War 1982 (Essential histories (Osprey Publishing), Oxford: Osprey. 264.  Anderson, John, 2001: Between slavery and freedom: special magistrate John Anderson’s journal of St. Vincent during the Apprenticeship; edited by Roderick A. McDonald; foreward by Richard S. Dunn (Early American studies), Philadelphia (PA): University of Pennsylvania Press. 265.  Anderson, Robert S., Grove, Richard H.; Hiebert, Karis (ed.), 2006: Islands, forests and gardens in the Caribbean: conservation and conflict in environmental history (Warwick University Caribbean Studies). Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean. 266.  Anderson, Stephen, Raphael Apuatimi, 1985: Tiwi Pima Art: Bathurst and Melville Islands, Nguiu, N.T., Nguiu Nginingawila Literature Production Centre. 267.  Anderson, Tim, 2003: Self-determination after Independence: East Timor and the World

2009

CEHA

17

Bank, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 11, No. 1, Pp. 169-185. 268.  Andrade Silva, Luiz, 1995: “Le rôle des émigrés dans la transition démocratique aux Îles du Cap-Vert”, in Lusotopie, 315-322. 269.  Andrade, Elisa, 2000: Quelques aspects du développement économique, social et politique aux Iles du Cap-Vert (1975-1999), Documents de Travail - Most, Andrea A.J., Overfield O.H., 2005: The Human Record, Vol 1; Letter by Christopher Columbus concerning recently discovered islands. Houghton Mifflin Company. 270.  Andreani, Jean-Louis et Yves Marc Ajchenbaum [textes sélectionnés et présentés], 2005: La Corse: histoire d’une insularité, Paris: [EJL: «Le Monde»], impr. 271.  Andreou, Stelios, 2001: “The Ionian Islands in the Bronze Age and Early Iron Age 3000–800 BC”, in European Journal of Archaeology, vol. 4: pp. 414 - 415. 272.  Andress, Reinhard, 2000: «Der Inselgarten»: das Exil deutschsprachiger Schriftsteller auf Mallorca, 1931 – 1936, Rodopi. 273.  Andrews, Philip, 1991: Ko Mata: the life in New Zealand of Anne Chapman, missionary at the Bay of Islands, Rotorua and Maketu 1830-1855,[Rotorua, N.Z.]: Rotorua & District Historical Society. 274.  Andriantsiferana, Marta; Ramiarison, Claudine responsables de l’édition. 1993: Médecine traditionnelle et pharmacopée, environnement et développement durable: réunion sousrégionale de l’Océan Indienne, Antananarivo, Madagascar, du 26 au 30 avril 1993, [Paris]: Direction générale de la coopération technique et du développement économique, Agence de coopération culturelle et technique; Antanananarivo: Tsipika. 275.  Andriotis, K., 1998: An Analysis of the Economic Impacts of Regional Tourism Development in Greece: The Island of Crete, Bournemouth University, Bournemouth. 276.  Andriotis, K., 2000: Local Community Perceptions of Tourism as a Development Tool: The Island of Crete, PhD thesis. Bournemouth: Bournemouth University. 277.  Andriotis, K., 2001: Tourism Planning and Development in Crete. Recent Tourism Policies and their Efficacy, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 9(4): 298-316. 278.  Andriotis, K., Titomichelaki, M., Kafetzakis, V., Mavrikakis, A., Kapetanakis, G., Marnelakis, I. and Bardis, V., 2001: Tourism and Development of Health Services in the Region of Crete, Medical Annals, 26(11): 545-553, [in Greek]. 279.  Andriotis, K., 2002: Local Authorities in Crete and the Development of Tourism, The Journal of Tourism Studies, 13(2):53-62. Disponível online em url: http://www.jcu.edu.au/ business/idc/groups/public/documents/journal_article/jcudev_012849.pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 280.  Andriotis, K., 2002a: Residents’ Satisfaction or Dissatisfaction with Public Sector Governance. The Cretan Case, Tourism and Hospitality Research: The Surrey Quarterly Review, 4(1): 53-68. 281.  Andriotis, K., 2002b: Scale of Hospitality Firms and Local Economic Development - Evidence from Crete, Tourism Management, 23(4): 333-341. 282.  Andriotis, K. and Vaughan D.R., 2003: Urban Residents’ Attitudes Towards Tourism Development: The case of Crete, Journal of Travel Research, 42(2): 172-185. 283.  Andriotis, K., 2003: Coastal Resorts Morphology: The Cretan Experience, Tourism Recreation Research, 28(1): 67-76. 284.  Andriotis, K., 2003a: Dependency on Tour Operators. Problem Faced by the Cretan Tourism Businesses and the Views of their Owners/Managers, International Journal of Hospitality

2009

18

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

and Tourism Administration, 4(3): 23-48. 285.  Andriotis, K., 2003b: Problems faced by the Cretan tourism industry as perceived by the business people, Tourism: An International Interdisciplinary Journal, 51(1): 21-30. 286.  Andriotis, K., 2003c: Problems in Island Tourism Development: The Insular Greek Regions In: Bramwell, B. (ed), Coastal Mass Tourism. Diversification and Sustainable Development in Southern Europe, Channel View Publications. 287.  Andriotis, K., 2003d: Tourism in Crete. A Form of Modernisation, Current Issues in Tourism, 6(1): 23-53. 288.  Andriotis, K. and Vaughan D.R., 2004: The Tourism Workforce and Policy: The Case of Crete, Current Issues in Tourism, 7(1): 66-87. 289.  Andriotis, K., 2004: Problems in Island Tourism Development: The Insular Greek Regions. In: Bramwell, B. (ed.) Coastal Mass Tourism. Diversification and Sustainable Development in Southern Europe, Clevedon: Channel View Publications, pp. 114-132. 290.  Andriotis, K., 2004a: The Perceived Impact of Tourism Development by Cretan Residents, Tourism and Hospitality Planning and Development, 1(2): 1-22. 291.  Andriotis, K., 2005: Community Groups Perceptions and Preferences to Tourism Development. Evidence From Crete, Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Research, 29(1): 67-90. 292.  Andriotis, K., 2005a: Seasonality in Crete. Problem or a way of life?, Tourism Economics, 11(2): 207-227. 293.  Andriotis, K., 2006: Researching the development gap between the Hinterland and the Coast Evidence from the Island of Crete, Tourism Management, 27(4): 629-639. 294.  Andriotis, K., 2006a: The Cretan Resort Cycle - From Explorers and Cruisers to Mass Tourism, In: Dixit, Ê. (ed), Promises and Perils in Hospitality and Tourism Management, (pp. 261-280), Aman Publications, New Delhi. 295.  Andriotis, K., 2008: The Greek Islands, In: Luck, M. (ed.), Encyclopedia of Tourism and Recreation in Marine Environments, CAB International. 296.  Andriotis, K., 2008a: Integrated resort development: The case of Cavo Sidero, Crete, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 16 (4), 428-444. 297.  Andriotis, K. and Vaughan, D.R., 2008b: Reality, Perceptions and Tourism Policy in Crete, The Interrelationship. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism, 1: 29-43. 298.  Andronicou, Antonios, 1979: Tourism in Cyprus. In Tourism--Passport to Development? Perspectives on the Social and Cultural Effects of Tourism in Developing Countries, Emanuel de Kadt, ed. New York: OxfordUniversity Press, pp. 237-264. 299.  Anell, B., 1960: “Hunting and Trapping Methods in Australia and Oceania”in Upsala, Studia Ethnographica Upsaliensia,18. 300.  Angel, Marc, 1978, 1980, 1998: The Jews of Rhodes: The History of a Sephardic Community. New York: Sepher-Hermon Press Inc. and The Union of Sephardic Congregations. 301.  Angleviel, Frederic, M. Charleux, W.G. Coppell, Jean-Pierre Doumenge 1991: Le Pacifique Sud, bibliographie des thèses et mémoires récents = The South Pacific, a bibliography of the recent theses and dissertations, Talence: CRET, Université de Bordeaux III et CEGETCNRS. 302.  Angleviel, Frédéric, 1994: Les missions à Wallis et Futuna au 19e siècle, Iles et archipels n° 18, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.

2009

CEHA

19

303.  Angus, Sandra, 1997: “Promoting the Health of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Island People: Issues for the Future”, in Promotion & Education, Sep 1997; vol. 4: pp. 22 - 24. 304.  Annis, B., 1995: The Economy in Honduras: a country study (pp. 107-144), T.E. Merrill (ed.). Washington DC: GPO. 305.  Anon, 2001: “More IPM `tools’ for oil palm growers in Papua New Guinea”, in Appropriate Technology 28(1): 43. 306.  Anon, 2001: War in the Falklands, 1982. London: The Stationery Office. 307.  Aranjo, Daniel, 1980: Insularité et outre-mer chez l’abbé Bégarie, Pau: Marrimpouey jeune. 308.  Association Culture, arts et lettres des îles (Ouessant, Finistère), 2001: Les iles de Bretagne sud: approche bibliographique / publ. à l’occasion du 3e Salon international du livre insulaire. 309.  Anson, D., 1983: Lapita Pottery of the Bismarck Archipelago and its affinities, PhD. University of Sydney, Sydney. 310.  Anson, D., 1986: “Lapita Pottery of the Bismarck Archipelago and its affinities” in Archaeology in Oceania 21: 157-165. 311.  Antheaume, B. et Bonnemaison J., 1988: Atlas des îles et des États du Pacifique sud, Montpellier, Publisud/GIP Reclus. 312.  Anthias, Floya; Ayres, Ron, 1983: Ethnicity and class in Cyprus, Race & Class, Jan 1983; vol. 25: pp. 59 - 76. 313.  Anthony, Rowland (ed.), 2001: Grouville, Jersey: the history of a country parish, Jersey: Parish of Grouville. 314.  AnthroGlobe. Contains bibliographies for Cook Islands, Fiji, Tonga, and Polynesian Outliers, as well as a bibliography for Vanuatu languages. Disponível online em url: http:// anthroglobe.ca/contents/contents.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 315.  Anthropological Institute, 17,305-317. 316.  Anzai, Shin, 1984: Nantō ni okeru Kirisutokyō no juyō, Tōkyō: Daiichi Shobō, Shōwa 59. 317.  Aoyagi, Machiko, 1985: Modekugei: Mikuroneshia Parao no shinshūkyo, Tōkyō: Shinsensha, 1985. 318.  Apostle, Richard,... [et al.] 2002: The restructuration of the Faroese economy: the significance of the inner periphery, Frederiksberg, Denmark: Samfundslitteratur. 319.  Apostolides, A., 2008: “How Similar to South-Eastern Europe were the Islands of Cyprus and Malta in terms of Agricultural Output and Credit? Evidence during the Interwar Period”,  in: Bank of Greece Working papers No. 80: pp. 1-26. Disponível online em url: http://www. bankofgreece.gr/BogEkdoseis/Paper200880.pdf .Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 320.  Apostolopoulos, Y., 1994: The Perceived Effects of Tourism Industry Development: A Comparison of two Hellenic Islands, PhD thesis. The University of Connecticut: Ann Arbor MI. 321.  Apostolopoulos, edited by Yorghos and Dennis J. Gayle, 2002: Island tourism and sustainable development: Caribbean, Pacific, and Mediterranean experiences, Westport, Conn.: Praeger. 322.  Aragonès, Joandomènec; Olivella i Prats, Ignasi; Sardà, M. Gili i., 1984: Els Sistemes naturals de les illes Medes, Barcelona: Institut d’Estudis Catalans. 323.  Arai, Shōjirō, 1983: Tsuranuke hoppō ryōdo, Tōkyō: Nihon Kōgyō Shinbunsha, Shōwa 58.

2009

20

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

324.  Aranda Mendíaz, Manuel, 1993: El hombre del siglo XVIII en Gran Canaria: el testamento como fuente de investigación histórico-jurídico, prólogo de José Antonio Escudero López, Las Palmas de G.C.: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones. 325.  Aranjo, Daniel, 1980: Insularité et outre-mer chez l’abbé Bégarie, Pau: Marrimpouey jeune; [Tanger]: [D. Aranjo]. 326.  Araújo, Adília Maria Henriques Araújo, 2006: O existencialismo na obra de Fernando Aires: uma consequência da insularidade?, Vila Real: Universidade de Trás-os-Montes e Alto Douro. Dissertação doutoramento. 327.  Araújo, Maria Benedita, 1995: “Elementos para o Estudo da Emigração Açoriana para o Brasil no Início do Século XVIII”, Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 81–102. 328.  Archer, B. H., 1988: Tourism and island economies: impact analyses. In: Cooper, C.P. and Lockwood, A. (eds), Progress in Tourism, Recreation and Hospitality Management. Vol. 1. Chichester: Wiley, pp.125-134. 329.  Archer, B.H., 1995: Importance of tourism for the economy of Bermuda, Annals of Tourism Research, 22(4), pp.918-930. 330.  Archer, B. H. and Fletcher, J., 1996: The economic impact of tourism in the Seychelles, Annals of Tourism Research, 23(1), pp.32-47. 331.  Archer, E., 1984: Estimating the relationship between tourism and economic growth in Barbados, Journal of Travel Research, 22(4), pp.8-12. 332.  Archives Historiques Nationales (Praia - Cap-Vert), 1998: Découverte des îles du Cap-Vert. Praia, Monteiro, António Mascarenhas (préf.); Almeida, José Maria (introd.): AHN. 333.  Archuleta, Margaret, Ed., 2000: Away from Home: American Indian Boarding, School Experiences, Heard Museum Shop. 334.  Are, Te Ariki Tara, History and traditions of Rarotonga, Auckland Polynesian Society, Dept. of Anthropology, University of Auckland. 335.  Areias, Laura, 2002: Ilhas riqueza, ilhas miséria: uma expressão literária da insularidade num triângulo atlântico lusófono, Novo Imbondeiro. 336.  Arena, Giuseppe A., 2003: Bibliografia generale delle Isole Eolie, Messina, Società messinese di storia patria. 337.  Arentz, F., [et al.], 1989: “Traditional uses of flora and vegetation of the Talasea, Hoskins, Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn timber areas, in Scientific Report 5.2B” in Scientific Reports for Talasea, Hoskins, Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn Environment Plan, Lae, Unitech Development and consultancy Ptty. Ltd. Forestry, Environment and Ecology Unit. 338.  Arge, Símun V., 1993: On the landnam of the Faroe Islands, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 465-72. 339.  Argentino, Automóvil Club, 1985: Territorio Nacional de la Tierra del Fuego, Antártida e Islas del Atlántico Sur, Argentina, Automóvil Club Argentino, Sector de Cartografía Vial y Turística, [Buenos Aires], El Club. 340.  Aria, Matteo, 2007: Cercando nel vuoto: la memoria perduta e ritrovata nella Polinesia francese, Ospedaletto, Pisa: Pacini. 341.  Aribeth Erb, 1997: Contested Time and Place: Constructions of History in Todo, Manggarai (Western Flores, Indonesia); Journal of Southeast Asian Studies, Vol. 28. 342.  Arioli, A., 1989: Le isole mirabili: periplo arabo medievale, Torino: Einaudi.

2009

CEHA

21

343.  Armesto, F. Fernández ...[et al.], 1995: Canarias e Inglaterra a través de la historia, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 344.  Armonk, N.Y., M.E. Sharpe, 2000: Landscapes and communities on the Pacific Rim: cultural perspectives from Asia to the Pacific Northwest, Armonk, N.Y. ; London: M.E. Sharpe. 345.  Armstrong, H. W., Johnes, G., Johnes, J., and MacBean, A.I., 1993: ‘The role of transport costs as a determinant of price level variations between the Isle of Man and the United Kingdom’, World Development, vol. 21, 311-318. 346.  Armstrong, H.W., and Read, R., 1994: ‘Micro-states, autonomous regions and the European Union’, European Urban and Regional Studies, vol. 1, 71-78. 347.  Armstrong, H. W., and Read, R., 1995: ‘Western European micro-states and EU autonomous regions: The advantages of size and sovereignty’, World Development, vol. 23, 12291245. 348.  Armstrong, H. W., and Read, R., 2000: ‘Comparing the economic performance of dependent territories and sovereign micro-states’, Economic Development and Cultural Change, vol. 48, 285-306. 349.  Armstrong, H. W. and Read, R., 2002: ‘The phantom of liberty? Economic growth and the vulnerability of small states’, Journal of International Development, 14(3), 435-458. 350.  Armstrong, H.W. and Read, R., 2002a:‘Small states, islands and small states that are also islands’, Studies in Regional Science, vol. 33(1), 1-24. 351.  Armstrong, H. W. and Read, R., 2003b: ‘Small states and island states: Implications of size, location and isolation for prosperity’, in J. Poot (ed), On the Edge of the Global Economy: Implications for Economic Geography for Small and Medium Sized Economies at Peripheral Locations, Edward Elgar, Cheltenham, 6-34. 352.  Armstrong, H. W., and Read, R., 2003c: ‘Micro-states and sub-national regions: Mutual industrial policy lessons’, International Regional Science Review, vol. 26, 117-141. 353.  Armstrong, H. W., de Kervenoael, R.J., Li, X., and Read, R., 1998, ‘A comparison of the economic performance of different micro-states and between micro-states and larger countries’, World Development, vol. 26, 639-656. 354.  Armstrong, H. W. and Read, R., 2005: ‘Insularity, remoteness, mountains and archipelagoes: a combination of challenges facing small states?’Asia Pacific Viewpoint, 47(1), 79-92. Disponível online em url: http://www.regional-studies-assoc.ac.uk/events/presentations04/ armstrongread.pdf. Consulta dem 11 de julho de 2009. 355.  Armstrong, John, 2008: Historia civil, y natural de la isla de Menorca: descripción topográfica de la ciudad de Mahón, y demás poblaciones de ella ... / escrita en ingles por Jorge Armstrong... ; y traducida al castellano por Josef Antonio Lasierra y Navarro, Mairena de Aljarafe, Sevilla: Extramuros. 356.  Armstrong, Patrick, 1991: Under the blue vault of heaven: a study of Charles Darwin’s sojourn in the Cocos (Keeling) Islands, foreword by Carolyn Stuart, Nedlands, W.A.: Indian Ocean Centre for Peace Studies. 357.  Armstrong, Patrick H., 1992: Darwin’s desolate islands: a naturalist in the Falklands 18331834, Chippenham: Picton. 358.  Armstrong, Patrick H., 1995: Darwin’s other islands, Durham: University of Durham Research Foundation. 359.  Armstrong, Patrick, 2004, 2006: Darwin’s other islands, London; New York: Continuum. 360.  Árnadóttir, Lilja, Ketil Kiran, 1997: Church and art: the medieval church in Norway and

2009

22

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Iceland, [Oslo] Norwegian Institute for Cultural Heritage Research, [Reykjavík], National Museum of Iceland. 361.  Arnason, edited by Ragnar and Lawrence Felt, 1995: The North Atlantic fisheries: successes, failures, and challenges, Charlottetown, P.E.I.: Institute of Island Studies. 362.  Arnaud, Vicente Guillermo, 2000: Las Islas Malvinas: descubrimiento, primeros mapas y ocupación: siglo XVI Buenos Aires: Academia Nacional de Geografía. 363.  Arnberger, E.; Arnberger, H., 1988: Die tropischen inseln des indischen und pazifischen ozeans, Vienne: F. Deuticke. 364.  Arnberger, H.; Arnberger, E., 2001: The tropical islands of the Indian and Pacific oceans, Vienne, Austrian Academy of Sciences Press. 365.  Arnett, Chris, 1999: The terror of the coast: land alienation and colonial war on Vancouver Island and the Gulf Islands, 1849-1863, Burnaby, B.C.: Talonbooks. 366.  Arniston, Tristam, 2006: ‘Two intaglios from St Peter Port, Guernsey’. In Henig, Martin (ed.), Roman art, religion and society: new studies from the Roman art seminar, Oxford 2005 (BAR, British ser., 1577), Oxford: Archaeopress, 67-69. 367.  Arno, T.; Orian, C., 1985: Ile Maurice, une société multiraciale, Paris, L’Harmattan. 368.  Arnold, Caroline, 1997: Stone Age farmers beside the sea: Scotland’s prehistoric village of Skara Brae, photographs by Arthur P. Arnold, New York, Clarion Books. 369.  Arnold, compiled and edited by Charles, 2008: Mediterranean islands: a unique and comprehensive guide to the islands and islets of the Mediterranean, London: Mediterranean islands. 370.  Arnold, Jeanne E., 1987: Craft specialization in the prehistoric Channel Islands, California, Berkeley, University of California Press. 371.  Arnold, J., 2001: The origins of a Pacific Coast chiefdom: the Chumash of the Channel Islands, Salt Lake City, University of Utah Press. 372.  Arthur, W. S, 2001: Autonomy and identity in the Torres Strait; a borderline case, JPH, 36, 2, pp.215-24. 373.  Aruca Alonso, coordinadores, Lohania J.; Camero Álvarez José María, Expediciones, exploraciones y viajeros en el Caribe: Antonio Núñez Jiménez, sus exploraciones en Cuba y el Caribe: I Conferencia Científica Regional, 2004, Conferencia Científica Regional (1st: 2004: Havana, Cuba) El Vedado, Ciudad de La Habana, Cuba: Ediciones Unión, 2006. 374.  Ås, Stefan, Jan Bengtsson, Torbjörn Ebenhard, 1997: Archipelagoes and Theories of Insularity Archipelagoes and Theories of Insularity, Ecological Bulletins, No. 46, Boreal Ecosystems and Landscapes: Structures, Processes and Conservation of Biodiversity, pp. 88-116. 375.  Asafu-Adjaye, John and Renuka Mahadevan, 2009: Regional Trade Agreements versus Global Trade Liberalisation: Implications for a Small Island Developing State, The World Economy, 2009, vol. 32, issue 3, pages 509-529. 376.  Asann, Ridvan, 2007: A Brief History of the Caribbean (Revised ed.). New York: Facts on File, Inc. 377.  Asato, Seiichi, 1990: Okinawa no uta sanshin: sono fūdo to kokoro, Tōkyō: Ikkei Shobō. 378.  Asato, Tsumichiyo, 1983: Hitotsubu no mugi: hachijūnen no kaiko: Beigun shiseika no shihanseiki, Okinawa-ken Naha-shi: Minshatō Okinawa-ken Rengōkai.

2009

CEHA

23

379.  Ashby, G. (Ed.), 1985: Micronesian Customs and Beliefs, Eugene (Oregon): Rainy Day Press. 380.  Ashley, Scott, 2001: “The poetics of race in 1890s Ireland: an ethnography of the Aran Islands”, in Patterns of Prejudice, 35:2, 5-18. 381.  Ashton, Stephen Richard; Louis, William Roger (ed.), 2004: East of Suez and the Commonwealth 1964-1971, (British documents on the end of empire, Series A, 5). London: TSO. 382.  Asian Productivity Organization, 1993: Environment and forestry management, Tokyo, Asian Productivity Organization (APO). 383.  Asin Cabrera, M.A., (1988), Islas y archipelagos en las Comunidades Europeas, Madrid, Tecnos. 384.  Aspalter, Christian, 2001: Conservative Welfare State Systems in East Asia, Westport, Conn.: Praeger. 385.  Association Bibliographie de Bretagne, 2002: Les îles de Bretagne nord: approche bibliographique / Association Bibliographie de Bretagne; Association Culture arts et lettres des îles, Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne; [Ouessant]: Association Culture arts et lettres des îles, 29-Briec-de-l’Odet: Impr. Côté. 386.  Atchoarena, D., 1989: Educational Planning in Small States: the case of the Caribbean, Paris: UNESCO, International Institute for Educational Planning. 387.  Atha, Mick, 1998: Jerbourg Battery: a multiperiod military site in Guernsey, Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 24:3, 492-504. 388.  Athukorala, S. Lakshman and Barry Reid, 2002: Diagnostic study of accounting and auditing practices in selected developing member countries: Azerbaijan, Fiji Islands, Republic of the Marshall Islands, Philippines, Sri Lanka. Manila, Philippines: Asian Development Bank, Disponível online em url: http://www.adb.org/Documents/Books/Diagnostic_Study_ Accounting_Auditing/Selected_DMCs/. Consulta em 29 e Julho de 2009. 389.  Atkins, by Jonathan, Sonia Mazzi and Carlen Ramlogan, 1998: A Study on the Vulnerability of Developing and Island States: A Composite Index, issued by the Commonwealth Secretariat in August. 390.  Atkins, J.; Mazzi, S.; Easter, C., 2000: “Commonwealth Vulnerability Index for Developing Countries: The Position of Small States,” Economic Paper, No. 40, Londres, Commonwealth Secretariat. 391.  Attenbrow, edited by Val and Fullagar, Richard, 2004: A Pacific odyssey: archaeology and anthropology in the Western Pacific: papers in honour of Jim Specht,Sydney:Australian Museum. 392.  Attwood, Bain, Fiona Magowan, 2001 Telling Stories: Indigenous History and Memory in Australia and New Zealand, Allen & Unwin. 393.  Aubert de la Rue, Edgard, 1956: L’homme et les îles, Paris: Gallimard. 394.  Aubin, Jean, Denys Lombard, 1988: Marchands et hommes d’affaires asiatiques dans l’océan Indien et la mer de Chine, 13e-20e siècles, Éditions de l’École des hautes études en sciences sociales. 395.  Audley-Charles, M.G., 1987: “Dispersal of Gondwanaland: relevance to evolution of the Angiosperms” In: Whitmore, T.C. (ed.), 1987: Biogeographical Evolution of the Malay Archipelago, Oxford Monographs on Biogeography 4, Clarendon Press, Oxford, pp. 5–25.

2009

24

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

396.  Aufsess, Hans Max; Freiherr von und zu, 1985: The von Aufsess occupation diary, edited and translated by Kathleen J. Nowlan, Chichester: Phillimore. 397.  Augé, M., 1995: Non-Places: An Introduction to an Anthropology of Supermodernity, London, Verso. 398.  Aulich, edited by James, 1992: Framing the Falklands War: nationhood, culture and identity, Philadelphia: Open University Press. 399.  Aunay, Arnaud d’, 2006: Napoléon, empereur des îles, empereur d’exil / textes et illustrations d’Arnaud d’Aunay; préface de la princesse Napoléon, [Paris]: Gallimard loisirs. 400.  Auphan, Éric, 1996 : Les Iles de la Mer D’ouest: Approche Historique des Societes Insulaires de L’armor D’apres le Temoignage de la Litterature Regionale; Sous La Direction De Jean Martin, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Histoire: Lille 3. 401.  Auphan, Eric, 1999: Les îles de la mer d’Ouest: approche historique des sociétés insulaires de l’Armor d’après le témoignage de la littérature régionale, Villeneuve d’Ascq. 402.  Auphan, établie par Éric et Jacques Bayle-Ottenheim, 2000: Les îles de la mer d’Iroise: approche bibliographique, Association Bibliographie de Bretagne; Association Culture, arts et lettres des îles, Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne. 403.  Auphan, Eric, sous la dir. 2002: Les îles de Bretagne nord, approche bibliographique, Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne; Ouessant: Culture, Arts et Lettres des Îles. Disponível online em url: http://www.livre-insulaire.fr/index.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 404.  Auphan, Éric, 2005: Les îles de la mer d’Ouest: approche historique des sociétés insulaires de l’Armor d’après le témoignage de la littérature régionale; sous la direction de Jean Martin, Université Charles de Gaulle (Lille). UFR Sciences historiques, artistiques et politiques. Université de soutenance. 405.  Aupiais, Damien, 2006: Les immigrants bretons à l’île Bourbon de 1665 à 1810, Saint Paul (La Réunion). 406.  Austin Ranney, Howard R. Penniman, 1985: Democracy in the Islands: The Micronesian Plebiscites of 1983, American Enterprise Institute. 407.  Australia, Government of: Australian International Development Assistance Bureau and Government of Papua New Guinea, Department of West New Britain, 1989: KandrianGloucester District Development Project Feasibility Study, Stages 1 and 2 Report: Institutional Capacity and Resource Assessment and Program and Project Planning Induction. 408.  Australia, Government of: Australian International Development Assistance Bureau and Government of Papua New Guinea, Department of West New Britain, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project: Final Draft, Volume 1. Main Report. 409.  Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 161-170. 410.  Australian Mobile Veterinary Survey Unit, 1946: Report on the animal diseases survey of Papua and the Mandated Territory of New Guinea, Australian Mobile Veterinary Survey Unit. 411.  Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), 2001: Portos, Escalas e Ilhéus no Relacionamento entre o Ocidente e o Oriente, Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.

2009

CEHA

25

412.  Ayala, H., 1995: From quality product to eco-product: will Fiji set a precedent?, Tourism Management, 16(1), pp. 39-47. 413.  Aymes, Marc, 2004: Chypre en archipel: d’une modernité insulaire des réformes Ottomanes au milieu du XIXe siècle, Cahiers de la Méditerranée, vol. 68–vol. 68. 414.  Azevedo, Lucas Pereira de Araújo; Sousa, Celso Batista de (Introdução e notas), 1992: “Memórias da Ilha de S. Tomé”, in Mare Liberum, nº 4, Dezembro, pp. 165–183. 415.  Aznar Vallejo, Eduardo, La integración de las Islas Canarias en la Corona de Castilla, 14781526, Las Palmas: Ediciones de Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 416.  Azuaje, Ricardo, 1995: Autobiografía de un dodo: biodiversidad, extinción y algunas insensateces, sobre trabajos científicos realizados por Franklin J. Rojas Suárez y Jon Paul Rodríguez, Caracas: Ediciones Angria: Fundación Polar: Provita. 417.  Babadzan, A., 1982: Naissance d’une tradition. Changement culturel et syncretisme religieux aux iles australes (polynesie francaise). Paris: Orstom. 418.  Babadzan, Alain, 1993: Les dépouilles des dieux: essai sur la religion tahitienne à l’époque de la découverte, Paris: Editions de la Maison des sciences de l’homme. 419.  Babadzan, textes réunis par Alain, 2003: Insularités: hommage à Henri Lavondès, Nanterre: Société d’ethnologie. 420.  Babbage, R, 1989: Australian interests in the South Pacific, in Albinski H, et.al., The South Pacific; political, economic and military trends, Washington, Brasseys. 421.  Babich, J., 1996: Making peoples; a history of the New Zealanders from Polynesian settlement to the end of the Nineteenth Century, Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press. 422.  Bacchus, K and C Brock, 1987: The Challenge of Scale: Educational Development in the Small states of the Commonwealth. London: Commonwealth Secretariat. 423.  Bachimon, P., 1990: Tahïti entre mythes et réalités, Paris, Comité des travaux historiques et scientifiques. 424.  Bachimon, P., 1995: “L’insularité océanienne dans la cosmogonie maohi”, L’Espace géographique, n ° 3, p. 227-235. 425.  Backhurst, Marie-Louise, 1990: Family history in Jersey, St. Helier, Jersey, Channel Islands: Channel Islands Family History Society. 426.  Badsey, Stephen, 2005: The Falklands Conflict as a media war In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London ; New York: Cass, 39-58. 427.  Baert, Annie, 1999: Le paradis terrestre, un mythe espagnol en Océanie: les voyages de Mendaña et de Quiros, 1567-1606, Paris. 428.  Baglole, H. & Weale, D., 1974: Cornelius Howatt: Superstar, Charlottetown PEI, Williams & Crue. 429.  Bahuchet, Serge, et all..., 2004: Un terrien des îles: A propos de Jacques Barrau, Jatba, 2004, vol. 42, p 1-206. 430.  Bailey, Dan E., 1982: WW II wrecks of the Kwajalein and Truk lagoons, Redding, CA: North Valley Diver Publications. 431.  Bailey, Jennifer L., 1992: Philippine Islands, [Washington, D.C.]: U.S. Army Center of Military History. 432.  Bailey, Jonathan; Benest, David, 2005: ‘The development of joint doctrine since the

2009

26

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Falklands Conflict’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 282-94. 433.  Bailey, Roderick, 2002: “The hidden hand: Britain, America and Cold War secret itelligence”, in Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 383-88. 434.  Bailleul, Michel, 2001: Les îles Marquises: Histoire de la Terre des Hommes du XVIIIe siècle à nos jours, Papeete. 435.  Bain Attwood, 2001: Telling Stories: Indigenous History and Memory in Australia and New Zealand, Fiona Magowan; Allen & Unwin. 436.  Bain, A., 1988: A protective labour policy? An alternative interpretation of early colonial labourpolicies in Fij, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 23(2), 119-136. 437.  Baines, Graham B K, and Edvard Hviding, 1992: Traditional Environmental Knowledge from the Marovo Area of the Solomon Islands. In LORE: Capturing Traditional Environmental Knowledge, edited by Martha Johnson, 92–110. Ottawa: International Development Research Centre. 438.  Baines, Graham B K, and Edvard Hviding, 1993: Traditional Ecological Knowledge for Resource Management in Marovo, Solomon Islands. In Traditional Ecological Knowledge: Wisdom for Sustainable Development, edited by Nancy M Williams and Graham B K Baines, Canberra: Cres, Australian National University.Pp 56–65. 439.  Baker, C. Ashford, 1988: The ultimate dilemma: obligation conflicts in wartime, Lanham, MD: University Press of America. 440.  Baker, edited by Gordon, 2007: No island is an island: the impact of globalization on the Commonwealth Caribbean, London: Chatham House. 441.  Baker, Emerson W., 2007: The devil of Great Island: witchcraft and conflict in early New England, New York: Palgrave Macmillan. 442.  Baker, R. (ed.), 1992: Public administration in small and island states, West Hartford, Kumarian Press. 443.  Balbi, J., 1989: “Identité culturelle”, In: Les îles européenes, Corse, Univ. 444.  Baldacchino & D. Milne (eds.) Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 141-155. 445.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, ‘De la Forme et la Dimension de l’Île’, Introduction to Jean-Yves Vigneau (ed.) Artistes aux Îles de la Madeleine, pp. 1-5. 446.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 1993: ‘Bursting the Bubble: The Pseudo-Development Strategies of Microstates’, Development & Change, Vol. 24, No. 1, pp. 29-51. 447.  Baldacchino, Godfrey and Robert Greenwood, 1998: Competing strategies of socioeconomic development for small islands, Charlottetown, P.E.I., Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island. 448.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 1998: ‘Far Better to Serve in Heaven than to Reign in Hell: Malta’s Logic of Relating to the European Union’ in G. Baldacchino & R. Greenwood, eds., Competing Strategies of Socio-Economic Development for Small Islands, Canada, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island, pp. 213-238. 449.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with Robert Greenwood) 1998: Competing Strategies of SocioEconomic Development for Small Islands, Canada, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island.

2009

CEHA

27

450.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with David Fabri), 1999: ‘The Malta Financial Services Centre: A Study in Microstate Dependency Management?’, in M.P. Hampton & J.P. Abbott, eds.: Offshore Finance Centres and Tax Havens, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp.140-166. 451.  Baldacchino, edited by Godfrey and David Milne, 2000: Lessons from the political economy of small islands: the resourcefulness of jurisdiction, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire: Macmillan; New York: St. Martin’s Press. 452.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with David Milne) 2000: ‘Introduction’ and ‘Conclusion’ in: Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, UK, Macmillan/ New York, St Martin’s Press. 453.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with Charles J. Farrugia) 2002: Educational Management and Planning in Small States: Concepts and Experiences, London, Commonwealth Secretariat. 454.  Baldacchino, Godfrey (ed.), 2004: Island Studies, Tesg: Tijdschrift voor economische en sociale geografie, 2004, p. 269-355. 455.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004a: ‘Editorial Introduction’, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie (Journal of Economic and Social Geography), Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 269271. 456.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004b: ‘Introduction’, Island Studies sub-section, World Development, Vol. 32, No. 2. p. 327. 457.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004c: ‘Island Studies Comes of Age’, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie (Journal of Economic and Social Geography), Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 272-283. 458.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004d: ‘Sustainable User Practices on/for Islands’, INSULA: International Journal of Island Affairs, February pp. 5-10. 459.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2005: ‘Successful Small Scale Manufacturing from Small Islands: Comparing Firms benefiting from Local Raw Material Input’, Journal of Small Business & Entrepreneurship, Vol. 18, No. 1, pp. 21-38. 460.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2005a: ‘The Contribution of Social Capital to Economic Growth: Lessons from Island Jurisdictions’, The Round Table: Commonwealth Journal of International Affairs, Vol. 94, No. 378, pp. 35-50. 461.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2005b: ‘The Representation of Islands’, Editorial Introduction, Geografiska Annaler, Vol. 87B, No. 4, pp. 247-251. 462.  Baldacchino, [edited by] Godfrey, 2006: Extreme tourism: lessons from the world’s cold water islands, Amsterdam; Boston: Elsevier. 463.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with T. Fairbairn) 2006a: ‘Entrepreneurship and Small Business Development in Small Islands’, Journal of Small Business & Entrepreneurship, Vol. 19, No. 4, pp. 331-340. 464.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with L. Dana) 2006b: ‘Impact of Public Policy on Entrepreneurship: Investigating the Protestant Ethic on a Divided Island Jurisdiction’, Journal of Small Business & Entrepreneurship, Vol. 19, No. 4, pp. 419-430. 465.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006c: ‘Innovative Development Strategies from Non-Sovereign Island Jurisdictions: A Global Review of Economic Policy and Governance Practices’, World Development, Vol. 34, No. 5, pp. 852-867. 466.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006d: ‘Managing the Hinterland beyond: Two, ideal-type Strategies of Economic Development for Small Island Territories’, Asia-Pacific Viewpoint, Vol. 47, No. 1, pp. 45-60.

2009

28

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

467.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006e: ‘Warm versus Cold Water Island Tourism: A Review of Policy Implications’, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 1, No. 2, pp. 183-200. 468.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006f: ‘Small Islands versus Big Cities: Lessons in the political economy of regional development from the world’s small islands’, Journal of Technology Transfer, Vol. 31, No. 1, pp. 91-100. 469.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006g: ‘Small States as Holons: The Transnational Survival Kit of Small (often island) Jurisdictions’ in L. Briguglio, G. Cordina & E.J. Kisanga, eds. Building the Economic Resilience of Small States, Malta & London, University of Malta and Commonwealth Secretariat, pp. 212-224. 470.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006h: ‘The Brain Rotation and Brain Diffusion Strategies of Small Islanders: Considering ‘Movement’ in lieu of ‘Place’’, Globalisation, Societies and Education, Vol. 4, No. 1, pp. 143-154. 471.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006i: Extreme Tourism: Lessons from the World’s Cold Water Islands, Oxford & Amsterdam, Elsevier Science. 472.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007: ‘Fixed Links and the Engagement of Islandness: Reviewing the Impact of the Confederation Bridge’, to appear in Canadian Geographer, Vol. 50, No. 3. 473.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007a: ‘Governance in Small Places: The Unleashing of Asymmetric Federalism’ in G. Baldacchino, L. Felt & R. Greenwood (eds.) Remote Control: Lessons in Governance from/for Small Places, St John’s NL, ISER Press. 474.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007b: ‘Introducing a World of Islands’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Malta & Canada, Agenda & Institute of Island Studies, pp. 1-29. 475.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007c: ‘Serving Sustainable Island Tourism: Hot or Cold?’, INSULA: International Journal of Island Affairs (Paris, UNESCO). 476.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007d: ‘The Internationalization of SMEs in Malta: A Critical Assessment in the Context of Five European Island Regions’. in: The Handbook of International Entrepreneurship: European Perspectives, UK, Edward Elgar. 477.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007e: A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Malta & Canada, Agenda Academic and Institute of Island Studies. 478.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007f: Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links, Charlottetown, Acorn Press. 479.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with A. Spears) 2007g: ‘The Bridge Effect: A Tentative Score Sheet for Prince Edward Island’ in G. (ed.): Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links, Charlottetown, Acorn Press, pp. 49-68. 480.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with D. Milne (eds.), 2007h: The Case for Non-Sovereignty: Lessons from Sub-National Island Jurisdictions, London, Routledge. 481.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with L. Felt & R. Greenwood (eds.) 2007i: Remote Control: Lessons in Governance from/for Small Places, St John’s NL, ISER Press. 482.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007j: ‘Bridges and Islands: A Strained Relationship’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links, Charlottetown, Acorn Press, pp. 1-13. 483.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2008: Countries within Countries: Lessons in Creative Governance from Sub-National Island Jurisdictions, Montreal, McGill-Queens University Press. 484.  Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2008a: Studying Islands: On Whose Terms? Some Epistemological and Methodological Challenges to the Pursuit of Island Studies, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 37-56.

2009

CEHA

29

485.  Balfour, Roderick A. C., 1993: “The Highland and Island Emigration Society, 1852-1858”, in Transactions of the Gaelic Society of Inverness, 57 (1993 for 1990-2), 429-566. 486.  Ball, Simon, 2006: ‘The unchanging lessons of battle: the British Army and the Falklands War, 1982’. In Strachan, Hew (ed.), Big wars and small wars: the British Army and the lessons of war in the twentieth century (Military History and Policy), London: Routledge, 145-61. 487.  Ballance, Alison, 2003: South Sea islands: a natural history, Toronto: Firefly Books. 488.  Ballantyne, John H. and Brian Smith, Shetland documents, 1195-1579, with contributions by Michael Barnes, Adolf Hofmeister, and Athol Murray, Lerwick, Shetland Islands Council & Shetland Times. 489.  Ballard, C., 1995: “The forces of habit: time, being and unconscious acts in archaeological explanation”, Review Article: in TAJA, 6(3): 203-213. 490.  Ballard, C, 2006: ‘The last unknown: Gavin Souter and the historiography of New Guinea’, in D. Munro and B. V. Lal (eds), Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, University of Hawai’i Press, Honolulu, 238–349. 491.  Ballendorf, D., 1984: Secrets without substance; US intelligence in the Japanese mandates 1915-1935, Journal of Pacific History, 83-99. 492.  Balme, Christopher, B, 2007: Pacific performances: theatricality and cross-cultural encounter in the South Seas, Houndmills, Basingstoke; New York: Palgrave Macmillan. 493.  Balme, R. (dir.), 1996: Les politiques du néo-régionalisme. Paris, Economica. 494.  Baloch, G. M., 1972: “Review of the coconut leaf miner and tree hopper problems in Papua New Guinea, with a report on their incidence on Southern New Britain,” in The Papua New Guinea Agricultural Journal, 23(1/2): 27-40. 495.  Band, Jonathon, 2005: ‘British High Command during and after the Falklands Campaign’ In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 30-38. 496.  Bandler, F., and Fox, L, 1980: Marani in Australia, Wacvie, Rigby. 497.  Bankoff, G., 2005: Wants, Wages, and Workers: Laboring in the American Philippines, 18991908, Pacific Historical Review, Vol 74; Part 1, Pages 59-86. 498.  Banks, G. and Ballard, C., eds, 1997: The Ok Tedi settlement; issues, outcomes and implications, Canberra NCDS. 499.  Baptista, Maria Luísa, 1993: Vertentes da insularidade na novelística de Manuel Lopes, Edições Afrontamento. 500.  Barber, IG, 1999: Early European contact and understanding ... the Grass Cove conflict, in Calder, A, Lamb J and Orr B, eds, 1999, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 17691840, UH Press, Honolulu, pp.156-79. 501.  Barbier, Jean Paul and Douglas Newton, edited by, 1989: Islands and ancestors: indigenous styles of Southeast Asia, München, Federal Republic of Germany: Prestel; New York, NY, USA: Distributed in the USA and Canada by te Neues Pub. 502.  Bardolet, Esteban, 1989: El coste de la insularidad, Cámara Oficial de Comercio Industria y Navegación de Mallorca, Ibiza y Formentera, Servicio de Publicaciones. 503.  Baré, Jean François, 1987: Tahiti, les temps et les pouvoirs: pour une anthropologie historique du Tahiti post-européen, Paris, Editions de l’ORSTOM.

2009

30

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

504.  Baré, Jean-François, 1985: “L’Angleterre dans la mythologie historique polynésienne: Tahiti et Hawaii”, In: Lagayette P. (ed.), Deckker de P. (ed.), Etats et pouvoirs dans la Pacifique français: schéma d’évolution, Paris: L’Harmattan, p. 17-25. 505.  Baré, Jean-François, 1985: Le malentendu pacifique: des premières rencontres entre polynésiens et anglais et de ce qui s’ensuivit avec les français jusqu’à nos jours, Paris: Hachette. 506.  Baré, Jean-François, 1985: “Les conversions tahitiennes au protestantisme comme malentendu productif (1800-1820)”, In, Anthropologie et histoire, Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (1), p. 125-136. 507.  Barfleur, L.; Jos, E., 1997: Coopération et intégration économique régionale dans la Caraïbe, Paris, Montchrestien. 508.  Barker, David; McGregor, Duncan F.M., edited by. 1995: Klaus de Albuquerque and Jerome L. McElroy --The cost of housing a tourist economy: the US Virgin Islands, in Environment and development in the Caribbean: geographical perspectives, Mona, Kingston, Jamaica: The Press, University of the West Indies. 509.  Barker, David; McGregor, Duncan F.M., edited by. 1995a: Lesley France and Brian Wheeller -- Tourism development in small islands: St. Maarten, St. Martin and Bermuda, in Environment and development in the Caribbean: geographical perspectives, Mona, Kingston, Jamaica: The Press, University of the West Indies. 510.  Barker, Nicholas, 1997: Beyond Endurance: an epic of Whitehall and the South Atlantic, with a foreword by Sir Rex Hunt, London, Leo Cooper. 511.  Barlow, Kathy, and Stephen Winduo, editors, 1997: Logging the Western Pacific: Perspectives from Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands, and Vanuatu. Special issue of The Contemporary Pacific 9 (1). 512.  Barlow, Virginia, 1993: The nature of the islands: plants and animals of the eastern Caribbean, color illustrations by Katie Shears, photographs by John Douglas, Virginia Barlow, Chris Doyle, underwater photographs by Joan Bourque, black and white drawings by Joan Waltermire, Chris Doyle, edited by Chris Doyle, Dunedin, FL, C. Doyle Pub., Cruising Guide Publications. 513.  Barnes, Brooks Miles, Barry R. Truitt, 1997: Seashore chronicles: three centuries of the Virginia Barrier Islands, Charlottesville, University Press of Virginia. 514.  Barnes, Natasha, 2006: Cultural conundrums: gender, race, nation, and the making of Caribbean cultural politics, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press. 515.  Barnes, Robert, 2000: Falkland Islands: the black and red postal franks (1869-1878), Baldock: The author. 516.  Barnett, J., 2002: «Environmental change and human security in Pacific island countries», Development Bulletin, 58, p. 28-32. 517.  Barquisseau, R., 1941: Les îles. Paris, Grasset. 518.  Barr, Cameron W., 1996: “More nations whip up squalls over tiny islands”, Christian Science Monitor, 88 (Nr 84, 29 March-4 April): 1, 10-11. 519.  Barratt, Glynn R. V., 1988-92: Russia and the South Pacific, 1696-1840, 4 vols: Vol.1: The Russians and Australia; Vol.2: Southern and Eastern Polynesia; Vol.3: Polynesian Fringe; Vol.4: The Tuamotu Islands and Tahiti, Vancouver (BC). 520.  Barratt, Glynn, 1988: Southern and Eastern Polynesia, University of British Columbia Press. 521.  Barratt, Glynn, 1992: The Tuamotu Islands and Tahiti, Vancouver: UBC Press.

2009

CEHA

31

522.  Barrault, Michèle, 1985: Malte: et ses îles, Paris: Éd. BEBA. 523.  Barrett, Charles, 1944: The island world: an anthology of the Pacific, Melbourne. 524.  Barry, M Gough, 1992: The Falkland Islands/Malvinas: the conquest for empire in the South Atlantic, London; Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Athlone Press. 525.  Barry, T.; Wood, B.; Preusch, D., 1984: The other side of paradise: foreign control in the Caribbean, New york: resource center. 526.  Barthélémy, G.; Girault, C. (dir.), 1993: La République haïtienne. États des lieux et perspectives, Paris, ADEC/Karthala. 527.  Bartlett, Kenneth R.; Rodgers, Jimmie, 2004: “HRD as National Policy in the Pacific Islands”, in Advances in Developing Human Resources, vol. 6: pp. 307 - 314. 528.  Bartmann, B., 2000: The Microstate Experience: Very Small States in the International System. Disponível online em URL: http://www.fodk.dk/Baggrund/microstate_experience. htm. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009. 529.  Barthon, Céline, 2001  : Géographie, culture et patrimoine: essai sur l’identité insulaire charentaise à partir des exemples des îles de Ré et d’Oléron, Lille: Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses. 530.  Barton, K. J.; [et al.], 1980:”Excavations at the Chateau des Marais (Ivy Castle), Guernsey”, in Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 20:5, 657-702. 531.  Barton, Ken, 1989: The principal fortifications of the Channel Islands before 1750, Fortress: The Castles & Fortifications Quarterly, 1:3, 24-32. 532.  Barton, Kenneth James, 2003: The archaeology of Castle Cornet, St. Peter Port, Guersnsey; edited by Nigel Jee (Guernsey Museum monograph, 7), St. Peter Port, Guernsey: Guernsey Museum. 533.  Bartstra, Gert-Jan Susan Keates, Basoek, Bahru Kallupa, 1991: On the dispersal of Homo sapiens in Eastern Indonesia: the Paleolithic of South Sulawesi, Current Anthropology, 32(3): 317-21. 534.  Baskett, Geoffrey, 1991?: Islands and mountains, Castle Hill, N.S.W.: G. Baskett. 535.  Bassargette, Denis et Guy Di Meo, 2008: Les limites du modèle communal français en Guyane: le cas de Maripasoula, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 241-242, Janvier-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index3273.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 536.  Bastian, Jeannette Allis, 2003: Owning memory: how a Caribbean community lost its archives and found its history, Westport, Conn., Libraries Unlimited. 537.  Bastien, D., (dir.); Lemoine, M. (collab.). 1989: Antilles: espoirs et dechirements de l’ame creole, Paris: Autrement. 538.  Bastin, R., 1984: Small island tourism: development or dependency? Development Policy Review, 2(1), pp. 79-90. 539.  Basu, Paul, Pilgrims to the far country: North American “roots-tourists” in the Scottish Highlands and islands, in Ray, Celeste (ed.), Transatlantic Scots, Tuscaloosa (AL): University of Alabama Press, 286-31. 540.  Bataille Benguigui, M.C.; Bare, J.F., 1992: Pecheurs de mer, pecheurs de terre. La mer dans la pensee tongienne, In: La terre et le Pacifique, ER - Etudes Rurales, no 127-128, p. p. 55-73. Bataille Benguigui, Marie Claire, 1994: Le cote de la mer: quotidien et imaginaire aux Iles Tonga

2009

32

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Polynesie Ocidentale, Iles et archipels n° 19, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. Batalha, Luís, 2004: The Cape Verdean diaspora in Portugal: colonial subjects in a postcolonial world, Lanham, Md.; Oxford: Lexington Books. 541.  Bateman, David ed., 2005: Bateman New Zealand Encyclopedia, David Bateman (Auckland, N.Z). 542.  Bates, Stephen, 1990: The South Pacific island countries and France: a study in inter-state relations, Canberra: Dept. of International Relations, Research School of Pacific Studies, the Australian National University: Distributed by, Bibliotech ANUTECH. 543.  Batey, P. et alii., 2000: Regional competition, New York, Springer. 544.  Bathgate, Murray Alexander, 1991: Three Folk Stories from West Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands, Wellington, New Zealand: Alexander Enterprise. 545.  Battersby, Paul, 2007: To the Islands: White Australians and the Malay Archipelago since 1788, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books. 546.  Baudry, R., et al..., 1994: Ile des merveilles: mirage, miroir, mythe: colloque de Cerisy, textes réunis et présentés par Daniel Reig, Paris, France, L’Harmattan. 547.  Bauer, Brian S. Charles Stanish, 2001: Ritual and pilgrimage in the ancient Andes: the islands of the sun and the moon, Austin: University of Texas Press. 548.  Bault, A. E., 1982: Les industries de l’alimentation dans les iles antillaises, Bibliographie analytique et signaletique. Bordeaux: Ceget. 549.  Bault, A. E., 1983: Les industries de l’alimentation dans les iles antillaises, Quebec: presses de l’universite Laval. 550.  Bault, A. E., 1984: Le rhum aux antilles, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Institut de geographie et d’etudes regionales. 551.  Baum, T., 1997: Island tourism as an emerging field of study, Islander Magazine, Jan (3). 552.  Baum, T., 1997a: The fascination of islands: A tourism perspective. In: Lockhart, D.G. and Drakakis-Smith, D. (eds) Island Tourism: Trends and Prospects. London and New York: Pinter, pp.21-35. 553.  Bauman, Kay, 1998: Solomon Island Folktales from Malaita, Danbury, CT: Rutledge Books. 554.  Baver, edited by Sherrie L., Barbara Deutsch Lynch, 2006: Beyond sun and sand: Caribbean environmentalisms, New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press. 555.  Baxter, John M.; Usher, Michael B., edited. 1994: The islands of Scotland: a living marine heritage, and [London]: HMSO. 556.  Bayle-Ottenheim, Jacques (dir.), 2000: Les îles de la mer d’Iroise, approche bibliographique, Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne. 557.  Bayliss-Smith, T. P.; Bedford, R. D.; Brookfield, H. C.; Latham, M. Islands, 1988: Islanders and the World: the Colonial and Post-Colonial Experience of Eastern Fiji, Cambridge, New York. 558.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1982: A Polynesian Atoll, In The Ecology of Agricultural Systems by T. P. Bayliss-Smith, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Pp. 56-65. 559.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1986: Ontong Java Population, Economy and Society, 1970-1986, Armidale, NSW: South Pacific Smallholder Project, University of New England. Occasional Paper No. 9. Reprinted (1988) by Ministry of Agriculture and Lands, Solomon Islands Government, Dodo Creek Research Bulletin No. 19.

2009

CEHA

33

560.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1987: Ontong Java: Ethnographic Description, Recent History, and Profile of the Survey Samples, In The Solomon Islands Project: A Long-Term Study of Health, Human Biology and Culture Change, edited by J. S. Friedlaender. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Pp. 23-26 and 51-55. 561.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1987a: Tattooing on Ontong Java, Solomon Islands, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 96:107-110. 562.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1988: Ontong Java Atoll, 1970-86, In Problems of Atoll Development, edited by J. Abington and S. Jones, Honiara, Solomon Islands: Ministry of Agriculture and Lands. Pp. 43-52. 563.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim... [et al.], 1988a: Islands, islanders, and the world: the colonial and postcolonial experience of Eastern Fiji, with contributions from Muriel Brookfield, Cambridge [Cambridgeshire]; New York: Cambridge University Press. 564.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1988b: Role of Hurricanes in the Development of Reef Islands, Ontong Java, Solomon Islands, Geographical Journal, 54:377-391. 565.  Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1990: Atoll Production Systems: Fish and Fishing on Ontong Java Atoll, Solomon Islands, In Pacific Production Systems, edited by D. E. Yen and J. Mummery, Canberra: Department of Prehistory, Australian National University. Pp. 57-69. 566.  Beaman, Libby, 1987: Libby: the sketches, letters & journal of Libby Beaman, recorded in the Pribilof Islands, 1879-1880, Tulsa, Okla., Council Oak Books, Austin, Tex., Distributed by Texas Monthly Press. 567.  Beasant, J., 1986: The Santo rebellion: an imperial reckoning, Honolulu. 568.  Beaton, Rick, 2001: An Eye on the Island’s Future, Canadian Issues, August- September pp.25-28. 569.  Beattie, A. G.; Beattie, M. H. (ed.). 1990: Pre-1855 gravestone inscriptions in Lochaber and Skye: a summary of, and index to, pre-1855 gravestone inscriptions found in burial grounds in the western part of the main land portion of Invernessshire, the small isles, Skye and associated islands, Edinburgh. 570.  Beaumont, John, 2005: Achillbeg: the life of an island, Usk: Oakwood. 571.  Beauvir, L., 1988: Le Pacifique insulaire: geographie politique et sa geopolitique. Universite de Bordeaux 3, Uer de Geographie. 572.  Beauvir, L., 1987: Le tourisme dans l’Archipel des Hawaii. Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, Institut de Geographie, Mem. Ter: Geogr.: Bordeaux 3. 573.  Beck, E Boyde; Burden, P John, 1996: Prince Edward Island: an (un)authorized history, Charlottetown, PE, Canada. 574.  Beck, Peter J., 1987: “A cold war: Britain, Argentina and Antarctica”, in History Today, 37, 16-23. 575.  Beck, Peter J., 1988: The Falkland Islands as an international problem, London; New York: Routledge. 576.  Beck, Robert J., 1993: The Grenada Invasion: Politics, Law, and Foreign Policy Decisionmaking. Boulder: Westview Press. 577.  Becke, Louis, 2000: The ebbing of the tide [Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas Nicholas, (Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago University Press), 327-33. 578.  Beckett, Jeremy, 1987: Torres Strait Islanders: custom and colonialism Cambridge

2009

34

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

[Cambridgeshire], New York, Cambridge University Press. 579.  Beckles, Hilary McD., 1994: The colours of property: brown, white and black chattels and their responses on the Caribbean frontier, Slavery & Abolition, 15:2, 36-51. 580.  Beckles, Wilson, 1901: The Truth About Newfoundland, The Tenth Island, second edition, London. 581.  Bedford, R., 1986: La filiere polynesienne: Migrations et changements sociaux en NouvelleZelande et dans le Pacifique Sud, l’Espace Geographique, no 3, p. p. 172-186. 582.  Bedford, S.; C. Sand and D. Burley, Eds. 2002: Fifty years in the field: Essays in honour and celebration of Richard Shutler Jr’s archaeological career, Auckland, New Zealand Archaeological Association. 583.  Bedford, S.; Sand, C.; Burley, D., Eds. 2002: Fifty years in the field: Essays in honour and celebration of Richard Shutler Jr’s archaeological career, Auckland, New Zealand Archaeological Association. 584.  Beehler, B., 2001: Island Biogeography redux, with a speciation twist, (Book Review: of Mayr and Diamond, The Birds of Northern Melanesia), Science, 294 (2 November): 10078. 585.  Beem, E. A., 1992: ‘Casco Bay Morning’, Island Journal, Maine, Island Institute, No. 9, 8687. 586.  Beer, G., 1989: ‘Discourses of the Island’ in F. Amrine, ed., Literature and Science as Modes of Expression, Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic, pp. 1-27. 587.  Beer, G., 1990: ‘The Island and the Aeroplane: The Case of Virginia Woolf’ in H.K. Bhabha, ed., Nation and Narration, London, Routledge, pp. 265-290. 588.  Beer, G., 2003: ‘Island Bounds’ in R. Edmond & V. Smith, eds., Islands in History and Representation, London, Routledge, pp. 32-42. 589.  Beerman, Eric, 1988: “The Last Battle of the American Revolution: Yorktown, no, the Bahamas!”, in The Americas, 45:1, 79-96. 590.  Beillevaire, Patrick, 2002: Ryukyu studies since 1854: western encounter. Part 2, Richmond: Curzon. 591.  Belanger, Jacqueline, 2000: “The desire of the west: the Aran Islands and Irish identity in Grania” In Litvack, Leon; Hooper, Glenn (ed.), Ireland in the nineteenth century: regional identity (Dublin: Four Courts), 95-107. 592.  Bélanger, L.; Mace, G. (eds), 1999: The Americas in transition: the contours of regionalism. Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers. 593.  Belfield, A. G., 1999: The stamps of the pictorial issue of the Falkland Islands and dependencies 1938 to 1951, Falkland Islands. 594.  Bélisle, François J., 1984a: Food Production and Tourism in Jamaica: Obstacles to Increasing Local Food Supplies to Hotels, Journal of Developing Areas, 19:1-20. 595.  Bélisle, François J., 1984b: Tourism and Food Imports: The Case of Jamaica, Economic Development and Cultural Change, 32:819-842. 596.  Bélisle, François J., 1985: Food Production and Tourism in Jamaica: Obstacles to Increasing Local Food Supplies to Hotels, Journal of Developing Areas, 10:1-16. 597.  Bell L, 1992: Colonial constructs; European images of Maori 1840-1914, Auckland Uni Press, Auckland. 598.  Bell, H. C. P., 1883: The Maldive Islands, An account of the Physical Features, History,

2009

CEHA

35

Inhabitants, Productions and Trade, Colombo. 599.  Bell, H.C.P., 1989: The Maldive Islands; Monograph on the History, Archaeology and Epigraphy, Reprint Colombo 1940. Council for Linguistic and Historical Research. Male’. 600.  Bell, H. C. P., 1999: Excerpta Maldiviana, Reprint Colombo 1922/35 edn. Asian Educational Services, New Delhi. 601.  Bell, L., 1999a: Augustus Earle’s The meeting of the artists …., In Calder, A., Lamb, J. and Orr, B., eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, Honolulu, UH Press. 602.  Bell, L., 1999b: Looking at Goldie; face to face with ‘All ’e Same T’e Pakeha, in N Thomas and D Losche, eds, Double Vision, Cambridge, CUP, pp.163-192. 603.  Bell, R.; McDonald, T.; Tidwell, A., eds, 1996: Negotiating the Pacific century; the new Asia, the United States and Australia, Allen and Unwin 1996. 604.  Bell, Walter F., 1999: The Philippines in World War II, 1941-1945: A Chronology and Select Annotated Bibliography of Books and Articles in English, Greenwood Press. 605.  Bell, William M., 1995: I beg to report: policing in Guernsey during the German occupation, Guernsey: Guernsey Press, 1995. 606.  Bell, William M., 2002: Guernsey occupied but never conquered, Exeter: Studio. 607.  Belle, Nicole, Bramwell, Bill, 2005: “Climate Change and Small Island Tourism: Policy Maker and Industry Perspectives in Barbados”, in Journal of Travel Research, vol. 44: pp. 32 41. 608.  Beller, W.; D’Ayala, P.; Hein, P. (eds.). 1990: Sustainable development and environmental management of small islands, Paris: UNESCO. 609.  Bell-Krannhals, Ingrid, 1990: Haben um zu geben: Eigentum und Besitz auf den TrobriandInseln Papua New Guinea, Basel: Ethnologisches Seminar der Universität und Museum für Völkerkunde: In Kommission bei Wepf & Co.. 610.  Bello Jiménez, Víctor M., 2005: Allende las columnas: la presencia cartaginesa en el Atlántico entre los siglos VI y III a. C. Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Anroart Ediciones. 611.  Bellwood, P.; Koon, V., 1989: “Lapita colonists leave boats unburned! The question of Lapita links with Island Southeast Asia”, in Antiquity, 63: 613-622. 612.  Bellwood, Peter, 1997: Prehistory of the Indo-Malaysian archipelago. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 613.  Bellwood, Peter; Fox, James J.; Tryon, Darrell, edited by. 1995: The Austronesians: historical and comparative perspectives, Canberra: Dept. of Anthropology as part of the Comparative Austronesian Project, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University. 614.  Belot, Victor R., 1980: Guide des îles des côtes françaises: accès, hébergement, histoire, navigation, tourisme, écologie, Paris: P. Horay. 615.  Bender, Barbara, Robert Caillaud, 1986: The archaeology of Brittany, Normandy, and the Channel Islands: an introduction and guide, London, Boston, Faber and Faber. 616.  Bengtsson, S.; Ebenhard, T., 1997: “Archipelagoes and theories of insularity”, Ecological bulletins, n°46, p. 88-97. 617.  Benitez-Rojo, Antonio, 1992: The Repeating Island: The Caribbean and the Postmodern Perspective, Durham, North Carolina: Duke UP. 618.  Benjamin, C. and I. Wapi, 1982: Subsistence gardening on the Hoskins oil palm scheme,

2009

36

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

in R. M. Bourke and V. Kesavan, Eds. Proceedings of the Second Papua New Guinea Food Crops Conference. Part One. Port Moresby, Department of Primary Industry. Pp. 168-175. 619.  Benjamin, C., 1985: Some food market influences of a large-scale small-holder development in the West New Britain area of Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea Journal of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, 33(3-4): 133-141. 620.  Benjamin, C., 1996: “Walindi Plantation: An example of ecotourism and its role in conservation management”, in D. Gladman, D. Mowbray and J. Duguman, Eds. From Rio to Rai: Environment and Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and beyond, Volume 2: Voices Unheard and Unheeded. Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press, Pp. 215-224. 621.  Benjamin, Didier; Godard, Henry, 1999: Les outre-mers Français: des espaces en mutation, Gap; Paris: Ophrys. 622.  Bennett S. and Quanchi M., 1994: South Sea Islanders in Australia; from kidnapping to a call for recognition”, The History Teacher, Vol 32/4, pp.23-41. 623.  Bennett, Geoffrey Martin, 2000: Coronel and the Falklands. Edinburgh: Birlinn. 624.  Bennett, Judith A., 1987: Pacific Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press. 625.  Bennett, Judith A., 1987a: Wealth of the Solomons: a History of a Pacific Archipelago, 18001978 (Pacific Islands Monograph, 3), Honolulu (HI). 626.  Bennett, Judith A., 1994: Britain, and Germany in Melanesia, In Howe, Kerry Ross; Kiste, Robert C.; Lal, Brij V. (ed.), Tides of history: the Pacific islands in the twentieth century, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, 40-70. 627.  Bennett, Judith A., 2000: “Across the Bougainville Strait: commercial interests and colonial rivalry, c.1880-1930”, in Journal of Pacific History, 35:1, 67-82. 628.  Bennett, Judith A., 2000a: “The grievous mistakes of the Vanikoro concession”: the Vanikoro Kauri Timber Company, Solomon Islands, 1926-1964”, in Environment and History, 6:3, 317-348. 629.  Bennett, Judith A., 2000b: Pacific forest: a history of resource control and contest in the Solomon Islands, c.1800-1997, Leiden: Brill Academic; Knapwell: White Horse. 630.  Benoist, J., 1987: «L’insularité comme dimension du fait social» in Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. «îles et archipels», n°8, p. 37-44. 631.  Benoît, Antheaume, 1983: L’atlas de Nouvelle Calédonie: itinéraire d’un programme, Paris: ORSTOM. Disponível online em url: http://horizon.documentation.ird.fr/exl-doc/pleins_ textes/divers07/04108.pdf. consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 632.  Benoit, France, 1989: Greenland since 1979: An annotated, cross-referenced bibliography. Ottawa ON: Canadian Arctic Resources Committee. 633.  Bensa A and Wittersheim E., 1998: Nationalism and interdependence; the political thought of Jean-Marie Tjibaou, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 10, 2, 369-90. 634.  Bensa, Alban et Isabelle Leblic (éd.), 2000: En pays kanak: ethnologie, linguistique, archéologie, histoire de la Nouvelle-Calédonie, Paris: Maison des sciences de l’homme. 635.  Bensa, Alban; Wittersheim, Eric, 1997: Nationalisme d’interdépendance: la pensée politique de Jean-Marie Tjibaou, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, France, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, pp. 197-21.

2009

CEHA

37

636.  Benton, Russell E., 1988: Emma Naea Rooke (1836-1855), beloved queen of Hawaii, v. 5. Lewiston, N.Y.: Edwin Mellen Press. 637.  ́Berard, Benôit, 2004: Les premìeres occupations agricoles de l’ arc antillais, migration et insularíte: le cas de l’occupation saladöide ancienne de la Martinique, Oxford, Archaeopress. 638.  Berg, P., 1992: Singsing tumbuan, (mask dance), text & research by Paula van den Berg; photos by Marsha Berman, David Hannan, Paula van den Berg; concept & design by Marsha Berman. Boroko, Papua New Guinea, Asples Productions in cooperation with the P.N.G. National Museum & Art Gallery. 639.  Bergé-Gobit, Johanna; Augustin, Jean-Pierre (Directeur de thèse), 2004: Territoire politique et identités autochtones spatialités en mutation: Le cas de la communauté inuit des îles Belcher au Nunavut (Canada), Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3. U.F.R. de Géographie et d’Aménagement, Pessac. 640.  Bergreen, Laurence, 2003: Over the Edge of the World, Morrow. 641.  Beriatos, E., 1990: Evolutions and impacts of immigration movement in islands: The case of the islands Kefalonia and Ithaki, The Greek Review of Social Research, 77(l):62-94. [in Greek]. 642.  Berlin, Ira; Morgan, Philip D., edited by. 1991: The Slaves’ economy: independent production by slaves in the Americas, London, England; Portland, Or.: Frank Cass. 643.  Berlinguer, L et Mattone, 1998: La Sardegna. Storia d´´Italia. Le regioni dall’Unita a oggi. Einaudi, Torino. 644.  Berloquin-Chassany, P., 2004: Haïti, une démocratie compromise (1890-1911). Paris, L’Harmattan. 645.  Berman, M., 1983: Arawe: a traditional Melanesian culture in modern times, Kimbe, Papua New Guinea, Asples Productions. 646.  Berman, M., 1994: Experiences of development in Arawe, West New Britain, Research in Melanesia, 18. 647.  Berman, M., 1996: Legislating for people’s participation in resource planning and management, D. Gladman, D. Mowbray and J. Duguman, Eds From Rio to Rai: Environment and Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and beyond Volume 2: Voices Unheard and Unheeded. Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press, pp. 197-208. 648.  Bernabéu-Casanova, Emmanuel, 2004  : La Corse, la Sardaigne, l’Europe: une nouvelle donne géopolitique entre régions, Etats-nations et Union européenne ? , Lille: Atelier national de reproduction des thèses. 649.  Bernabò Brea, Luigi; Cavalier, M.; Spigo, Umberto, 1995: Lipari, Museo eoliano, Palermo: Novecento; [Rome]: Libreria dello Stato. 650.  Bernardie, Nathalie, 1999: Malte, parfum d’Europe, souffle d’Afrique, Iles et archipels n° 27, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 651.  Bernardie-Tahir, Nathalie; Omar, El-Mahaboubi, 2001: MAYOTTE: des parfums au tourisme, Les nouveaux enjeux du litoral, Les Cahiers D’Outre Mer, 2001, vol. 54, no 216, p. P. 369396. 652.  Bernardie-Tahir, Nathalie, 2004: L’île et l’illicite: les nouvelles formes du relais maltais dans l’antimonde méditerranéen, Mappemonde, 2004, no 75, p. 1-10. Disponível online em url: http://mappemonde.mgm.fr/num3/articles/art04304.html. Consulta em 29 de Julho de

2009

38

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2009. 653.  Bernardie, Nathalie (Directrice scientifique); Taglioni, François (Directeur scientifique); Pelletier, Philippe (Préfacier); Marrou, Louis (Postface), 2005: Les dynamiques contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires: De l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires, Paris: Karthala. 654.  Bernardie-Tahir, Nathalie, 2005: Des “bouts du monde” à quelques heures: l’illusion de l’isolement dans les petites îles touristiques, Annales de géographie, juillet-août 2005, vol. 114, no 644, p. 362-382. 655.  Bernardie-Tahir, sous la direction de Nathalie, 2008: L’autre Zanzibar: géographie d’une contre-insularité, Paris: Karthala; Pessac: ADES-Dymset; Limoges: GEOLAB-Limoges. 656.  Bernhard, Virginia, 1999: Slaves and slaveholders in Bermuda, Columbia, MO, University of Missouri Press. 657.  Bernhardt, R., 1981: Federalism and Autonomy in Models of Autonomy, (pp.23 47), Y. Dinstein (ed.), New Brunswick: Transaction Books. 658.  Berno T., 1999: When a guest is a guest. Cook islanders view tourism, Annals of Tourism Research, 26(3), pp.656-675. 659.  Bernsteintaylor, B. L., [et al.], 1992: “Basement Slivers Within the New Britain Accretionary Wedge - Implications For the Emplacement of Some Ophiolitic Slivers,” in Tectonics, 11(4): 753-765. 660.  Berry, M., 2001: Refined white, Innisfail, Australian Sugar Industry Museum. 661.  Berry, William E. 1989. U.S. Bases in the Philippines: The Evolution of the Special Relationship. Boulder: Westview. 662.  Bertile, W., 1987: La Reunion, developpement, integration europeenne et cooperation regionale, In: L’ile de la Reunion, Bulletin de l’association de geographes Francais, vol. vol. 64, no 5, p. p. 395-406. 663.  Bertile, W., 1987a: La Réunion: atlas thématique et régional, Saint-Denis, Éditions arts graphiques modernes. 664.  Bertram, I.G. & R.F. Watters, 1985: The MIRAB economy in South Pacific microstates, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. 26 (3), 1985: 497-520. 665.  Bertram, G., 1986: ‘Sustainable development’ in Pacific micro-economies’, World Development, vol. 14, 809-822. 666.  Bertram, G., 2003: ‘On the convergence of small island economies with their metropolitan partons’, World Development, vol. 32, 343-364. 667.  Bertram, G. & Poirine, B., 2007: ‘Island Political Economy’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Canada and Malta, Institute of Island Studies and Agenda Publications, pp. 323-377. 668.  Bertrand, Romain, 2001: “Indonesia Raya: les trois âges du nationalisme indonésien”, in Lusotopie, pp. 197-214. 669.  Besson, edited by Jean and Janet Momsen, 2007: Caribbean land and development revisited, New York, N.Y.: Palgrave Macmillan. 670.  Besson, Gérard & Brereton, Bridget, 1992: The Book of Trinidad, Port of Spain: Paria Publishing Co. Ltd.. 671.  Bethel, N., 2002: “Navigations: Insularity versus Cosmopolitanism in the Bahamas: Formality and Informality in an Arichipelagic Nation”, Social Identities, Volume 8, Number 2, 1 June,

2009

CEHA

39

pp. 237-253(17). 672.  Béthencourt Massieu, Antonio, 1991: Canarias e Inglaterra: el comercio de vinos, 16501800, Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 673.  Bettencourt, Urbano, 2003: Ilhas conforme as circunstâncias, Lisboa, Edições Salamandra. 674.  Bhabha, J. et alii., 1999: “Aspects sociaux et culturels de l’intégration à l’échelle régionale”, Revue internationale des sciences sociales, n°159. 675.  Bhattacharya, Asutosh, 1983: Andhakārera Āndāmāne: nr’tattvamūlaka bhramaṇa-kāhinī, Kalikātā : E. Mukhārji. 676.  Biagini, E.; Hoyle, B., 1999: Insularity and development: international perspectives on islands, Londres, Pinter. 677.  Bibliography - Sri Lanka, U.S. Library of Congress, on-line disponível em http://countrystudies. us/sri-lanka/76.htm¸ consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 678.  Bibliography On Borneo. Disponível online em url: http://lib.ysnet.org.my:8000/kborneo/ bibliography.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 679.  Bicheno, Hugh, 2006: Razor’s edge: the unofficial history of the Falklands War, London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson. 680.  Bickerton, James, 1998: Federal Regional Development Policies and Atlantic Canada’s Islands in Baldacchino, G and Greenwood, R (eds.), Competing Strategies of SocioEconomicDevelopment for Small Islands, The Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island Charlottetown Prince Edward Island, Canada, pp. 238-267. 681.  Biedermann, Hans, 1984 – 1983: Die Spur der Altkanarier: eine Einführung in die Altvölkerkunde der Kanarischen Inseln, Hallein: Burgfried-Verlag, 1984. 682.  Bigelow, G. F., 1987: “Domestic architecture in medieval Shetland”, in Review of Scottish Culture, 3, 23-38. 683.  Bigelow, G. F., 1987: Domestic architecture in medieval Shetland, Review of Scottish Culture, 3 (1987), 23-38. 684.  Biggi, M., 1992: Structures et Systèmes Administratifs en Corsica in The Political Administrative Systems of the European Island Regions, Ponta Delgada: Secretaria Regional da Administração Interna. 685.  Biggi, M. (dir.), 1996: Les systèmes de transport dans les îles, Paris, L’Harmattan/Eurisles. 686.  Bijl, Nicholas van der; Aldea, David, 2003: 5th Infantry Brigade in the Falklands 1982, Barnsley: Leo Cooper. 687.  Biggi, M. (sous la direction de), 2003: Les systèmes de transport dans les îles, Paris, Editions L’Harmattan. 688.  Bilney G., 1994: Australia’s relations with the South Pacific’; challenge and change, MPA6 of 1994, Ministerial Press Release, Canberra. 689.  Bingham, F. M. and R. Lukas, 1995: The Distribution of Intermediate Water in the Western Equatorial Pacific During January February 1986, Deep-Sea Research Part I-Oceanographic Research Papers 42(9): 1545-1573. 690.  Binns, R. A., 2000: “Geochemical comparison between the Oligocene volcanic sequences in the Finisterre Mountains, New Britain and New Ireland, Papua New Guinea”, in Geological Society of Australia Abstracts 59: 40. 691.  Birch, Chris, 2008: The milk jug was a goat: two families, two Caribbean islands, 1635-

2009

40

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1987: being an historical survey of the true adventures in the West Indies and Australia of various distinguished members of the Burt and Berridge families in 1635 onwards for more than three and a half centuries with an account of the history of the Caribbe islands of Saint Christopher and Nevis; Cambridge: Pegasus. 692.  Birchenall, Peter; Birchenall, Mary (ed.), 2001: Occupation Nurse: nursing in Guernsey, 1942-45, Bognor Regis: Woodfield. 693.  Bird, R.; Torrence, R. G.; Summerhayes, R.; Bailey, G., 1997: “New Britain Obsidian Sources”, in Archaeology in Oceania 32(1): 61-67. 694.  Bird, Wal (Wal F.), 1996: South Sea Island trader: narrative of a voyage to the islands of Melanesia on the M.V. Malaita, 1950, Wollongong, NSW: W. Bird. 695.  Bishop Museum, Papuan Herpetological Bibliography. Disponível online em url: http://www2. bishopmuseum.org/PBS/PapuaHerpBib/query.asp. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 696.  Bishop, K. D. and L. S. Broome, 1980: Report of a preliminary survey of the wildlife of the Kapuluk timber development area Kombe, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea, Department of Environment and Conservation. 697.  Bishop, K. D. and D. N. Jones, 2001: The montane avifauna of West New Britain, with special reference to the Nakanai Mountains, Emu, 101(3): 205-220. 698.  Bissessar, Ann Marie, 2001: The historical development of the health system in Trinidad and Tobago; edited by Mary Hadley, Anne Mills (PHP departmental publication, 34; Health care reform: policy content and process in the Caribbean, 2), [London]: London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine. 699.  Bisson, J.; Veyret, Y.; Vidal, T.; Noni, Georges de (ed.); Roose, Eric (ed.); Nouvelot, Jean François (ed.); Veyret, Y. (ed.), 1995: Minorque ou l’exception en Méditerranée: une île sans erosion, In: Environnement humain de l’érosion, Reseau Erosion Bulletin, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer,cahiers des sciences humaines, Paris, France 1995, no 15, p. p. 137-148. 700.  Bitterli U., 1986/1993: Cultures in conflict; encounters between European and non-European cultures 1492-1800, Cambridge, Polity Press. 701.  Bittner, A., editor. 1992: Madagaskar: Mensch und Natur im Konflikt, Birkhauser Verlag, Basel, Boston, Berlin. 702.  Blache, J., 1936: “Le problème des îles”, Revue de géographie alpine, p. 717-723. 703.  Blache, J., 1948: «Les particularités géographiques des îles», Bulletin de la société de géographie d’Aix-Marseille, n°44, p. 5-22. 704.  Black, David W., 1992: Living close to the ledge: prehistoric human ecology of the Bliss Islands, Quoddy Region, New Brunswick, Canada, Dundas, Ont.: Copetown Press. 705.  Black, edited by Ronald, 2007: To the Hebrides: Samuel Johnson’s Journey to the western islands of Scotland and James Boswell’s Journal of a tour to the Hebrides, Edinburgh: Birlinn. 706.  Black, G., 1985: Mare Nostrum: US security policy in the english-speaking Caribbean, Nacla, no 4, pp. 13-48. 707.  Black, Jeremy, 1990: “Johnson’s Thoughts on the Falklands: a Tory tract”, in Literature & History, ns, 1, 42-47. 708.  Black, Jeremy, 2002: Samuel Johnson, Thoughts on the late transactions respecting Falkland’s Islands, and the Tory tradition of foreign policy, In Clark, Jonathan Charles Douglas; Erskine-Hill, Howard (ed.), Samuel Johnson in historical context (Basingstoke:

2009

CEHA

41

Palgrave), 169-83. 709.  Black, Ronald, 2005: The Gaelic Otherworld: John Gregorson Campbell’s Superstitions of the Highlands and Islands of Scotland and Witchcraft and Second Sight in the Highlands and Islands, Birlinn. 710.  Black, Ronald, 2007: To the Hebrides: Samuel Johnson’s Journey to the western islands of Scotland and James Boswell’s, Journal of a tour to the Hebrides; edited by. Edinburgh: Birlinn. 711.  Black, Wallace B.; Blashfield, Jean F., 1992: Island hopping in the Pacific, New York: Crestwood House; Toronto: Maxwell Macmillan Canada; New York: Maxwell Macmillan International. 712.  Blackburn, J., 1997: The Emperor’s Last Is land: A Journey to St. Helena, London, Vintage. 713.  Blackman, Francis, 1989: Methodism: 200 years in British Virgin Islands, Bridgetown, Barbados: [Methodist Church in the British Virgin Islands]. 714.  Blackmore, G. C., 2003: Sense of Place: Loss and the Newfoundland and Labrador Spirit, Report presented to the Royal Commission on Renewing and Strengthening Our Place in Canada. Disponível online em URL: http://www.gov.nl.ca/publicat/royalcomm/research/ blackmore.pdf. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009. 715.  Blackwood, Ray, 1997: Whitsunday Islands: an historical dictionary, Rockhampton, Qld., CQU Press. 716.  Blair P., 1968: Le problème des micro-États, Genève: Dotation Carnegie pour la paix internationale. 717.  Blais, Hélène, 2005: Voyages au grand océan. Géographies du Pacifique et colonisation 1815-1845, Paris: CTHS. 718.  Blake, Emma, 1999: “Identity-Mapping in the Sardinian Bronze Age”, in European Journal of Archaeology, Apr 1999; vol. 2: pp. 35 - 55. 719.  Blanc, Pierre (Editeur scientifique), 2006: Dossier: Eau et pouvoirs. Confluences Méditerranée [Texte imprimé], Blake, N. M.; B. R. Hawkins; R. L. Kirk; R. Bhatia; P. Brown, R.M. Garruto and D. C. Gajdusek, Eté, no 58, p 9-165. 720.  Blancher, N.; Mainguy, C., 1998: “Comparaison des processus de régionalisation en Afrique sub-saharienne et en Asie orientale. Revue analytique de la littérature”, Revue Tiers Monde, n°155, p. 505-528. 721.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1981: Les petites et moyennes entreprises Polynesiennes: le cas de la petite hotellerie, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, Paris, France. 722.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1984: L’Economie de la Polynesie Francaise de 1960 a 1980: un apercu de son evolution, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, Cahiers des sciences humaines, Papeete, Paris, France. 723.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1985: Le développement régional en question: une voie pacifique pour le Pacifique Sud ?, Papeete: ORSTOM. 724.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1985: L’economie de la Polynésie française de 1960 à 1980: un aperçu de son évolution, Paris: ORSTOM, (195), (Travaux et Documents de l’ORSTOM; 195). 725.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1985a: Les fondements d’une identité: territoire, histoire et société dans l’archipel de Vanuatu (Mélanésie): essai de géographie culturelle, 2. Les hommes-lieux et les hommes-flottants, Paris: ORSTOM, 2/2, 679 p. multigr. Th. 3e cycle: Lett. et Sci. Hum. : Paris 4.

2009

42

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

726.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1994: La Polynésie française à la croisée des chemins, Mondes en Développement, 22, p. 23-35. Disponível online em url: http://horizon.documentation. ird.fr/exl-doc/pleins_textes/pleins_textes_6/b_fdi_35-36/41005.pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 727.  Blanchet, Gilles, 1994a: La Polynesie Francaise a la croissee des chemins / Gilles Blanchet, Honolulu, HI: East-West Center. 728.  Blanchet, Gilles; Bonnemaison, Joùl (ed.); Freyss, J. (ed.), 1997: L’aide au développement dans le Pacifique insulaire: réflexion en forme de bilan, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 57-78. 729.  Blanchet, Gilles (éd.), et all…, 2002: La pêche aux Antilles (Martinique et Guadeloupe), Paris: IRD Editions. 730.  Blanchy Daurel, S., 1990: La vie quotidienne a Mayotte (Archipel des Comores), Paris: L’Harmattan. 731.  Blanchy, Sophie, 1992: Famille et parente dans l’archipel des Comores, journal des africanistes, no 1, p. p. 7-53. 732.  Blandy, Richard, 1986: The Pacific Island labour markets, Port Moresby, Papua New Guinea: Institute of National Affairs. 733.  Blanes i Blanes, Coloma... [et al.], 1990: Les Illes a les fonts clàssiques, Mallorca: M. Font. 734.  Blank, Hannah, 2002: A Short Life on a Sunny Isle: An Alphonse Dantan Mystery. New York: Hightrees/Prism Corporatio. 735.  Blanton, Casey, editor. 1995: Picturing paradise: colonial photography of Samoa, 1875 to 1925, with essays by Elizabeth Edwards ... [et al.], [Daytona Beach, Fla.]: Daytona Beach Community College. 736.  Bleasdale, S., and S. Tapsell. 1994. Contemporary Efforts to Expand the Tourist Industry in Cuba: The Perspective from Britain. In Tourism: The Stateof the Art. A. V. Seaton, ed.. Chichester, England: Wiley. Pp. 100-109. 737.  Bleeker, P. and D. F. Freyne, 1981: Areas suitable for cocoa production in Papua New Guinea. Papua New Guinea, Department of Primary Industries, Papua New Guinea, Department of Primary Industries. 738.  Bleeker, P.; Freyne, D. F., 1981: Areas suitable for cocoa production in Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea, Department of Primary Industries. 739.  Blerald, P A., 1986: “Dépendances étatiques et souverainetés dans la Caraïbe: essai de typologie”, Les Cahiers de l’Administration Outre-Mer, n° 1, mai, Martinique, p. 122-236. 740.  Bleznick, Donald W., 1995: A Sourcebook for Hispanic Literature and Language: A Selected, Annotated Guide to Spanish, Spanish-American, and United States Hispanic Bibliography, Literature, Linguistics, Journals and Other Source Materials, 3rd ed. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press. 741.  Bligh, William, 1991: A narrative of the mutiny, on board His Majesty’s ship Bounty: and the subsequent voyage of part of the crew, in the ship’s boat, from Tofoa, one of the Friendly Islands, to Timor, a Dutch settlement in the East Indies, illustrated with charts. 742.  Blm Lee, 2000: The relationship between the United States and the Native Hawaiian people; a case of spouse abuse, in Borofsky R, ed, Remembrances of Pacifivc pasts, UH Press, 358-60. 743.  Bloch, Michael, 1988: The secret file of the Duke of Windsor, London: Bantam, xvi, 326 p.

2009

CEHA

43

744.  Bloch, M., 1993: Placing the Dead: Tombs, Ancestral Villages, and Kinship Organisation in Madagascar, Waveland Pr. Inc. 745.  Block, Alan A., 1998: Masters of Paradise, New Brunswick and London, Transaction Publishers. 746.  Blondy, Caroline, 2005: Le tourisme en Polynésie française: les acteurs privés de l’hébergement dit « chez l’habitant » (exemples des îles hautes de Tahiti et Moorea, archipel de la Société), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index243.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 747.  Blouet, Olwyn M., 2007: The contemporary Caribbean: history, life and culture since 1945, London: Reaktion Books. 748.  Blum, Gabriella, 2007: Islands of agreement: managing enduring armed rivalries, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. 749.  Blume, H. Kuba, 1985: Die Karibische, zuckerinsel, Geographische rundschau, 1985, no 6, pp. 286-294. 750.  Blythe, Jennifer M., 1978: Following both sides: processes of group formation in Vitu, Ph.D. dissertation, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada. 751.  Blythe, Jennifer M., 1992: “Climbing a mountain without a ladder: chronologies and stories”, in Time and Society, 1(1):45-50. 752.  Blythe, Jennifer M., 1995: “Vanishing and Returning Heroes: ambiguity and persistent hope in an Unea island legend”, in Anthropologica, 37(2):207-228. 753.  Boa, Sheena, 2001: “Experiences of women estate workers during the Apprenticeship period in St Vincent, 1834-38: the transition from slavery to freedom”, In Women’s History Review, 10:3, 381-407. 754.  Boase, Alice M., 1985: When the Sun Never Set, [Uckfield, Sussex]. 755.  Bobbé, Sophie 1999: Banquises: les Inuit et l’infini arctique, Paris, Editions Autrement. 756.  Bobrow, Jill & Jinkins, Dana. 1985, 1993: St. Vincent and the Grenadines. 4th Edition Revised and Updated, Concepts Publishing Co., Waitsfield, Vermont. 757.  Bock Digne, Marie-S., 2003: Paysages urbains et lieux de vie: étude diachronique des villes maritimes insulaires du sud-ouest et de l’ouest de l’océan Indien, Paris, Harmattan. 758.  Bodiguel, Maryvone, 1997: Le littoral entre nature et politique, Paris: L’Harmattan. 759.  Böhm, Karl, 1983: Leben einiger Inselvölker Neuguineas, Berlin: D. Reimer. 760.  Böhm, Karl, 1983a: The life of some island people of New Guinea: a missionary’s observations of the volcanic islands of Manam, Boesa, Biem, and Ubrub, introduction by Nancy Lutkehaus, Berlin: D. Reimer. 761.  Boia, L. – 1994: “L’île, lieu de l’étrange”, In: Cahiers e l’Imaginaire, n.10. 762.  Bois, Paul, Pierre Boyer, Yves J. Saint-Martin, 1998: L’ancre et la croix du sud: la marine française dans l’expansion coloniale en Afrique noire et dans l’océan Indien, de 1815 à 1900, cartographie de Robert Baud, Vincennes, Service historique de la marine. 763.  Boissevain, J., 1996: ‘But we live here!’ perspectives on cultural tourism in Malta. In: Briguglio, L., Butler, R., Harrison, D. and Filho, W.L. (eds), Sustainable Tourism in Islands and Small States: Case studies, London: Pinter, pp.220-240. 764.  Boisson, Danièle, 1981: Une notion d’insularité: trois îles bretonnes: Belle Ile, Houat, Hoëdic;

2009

44

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

dirigée par Madame Uzan, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de Paris-Valde-Marne. UER Lettres et Sciences humaines. Université de soutenance, Mémoire de maîtrise: Géographie: Paris 12. 765.  Bolia, Robert S., 2004: “The Falklands War: The Bluff Cove Disaster”, in Military Review, 84, 66-72. 766.  Bologna, Alfredo Bruno, 1988: Los derechos de la República Argentina sobre las Islas Malvinas, Georgias del Sur (San Pedro) y Sandwich del Sur, Buenos Aires: Ediar. 767.  Bolton L., 1999: Radio and the redefinition of kastom in Vanuatu, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 11, 2, pp.335-60. 768.  Bolton, Lissant 1996: Tahigogona’s Sisters: Women, Mats and Landscape on Ambae, In Arts of Vanuatu, edited by Joël Bonnemaison, Christian Kaufmann, Kirk Huffman, and Darrell Tryon. Bathurst: Crawford House Publishing, 112–119. 769.  Bon, Olivier, 2005: L’insoutenable développement urbain de l’île de Tahiti: politique du « tout automobile » et congestion des déplacements urbains, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index433.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 770.  Bonanno, Carmela, 1998: I sarcofagi fittili della Sicilia, Roma, “L’Erma” di Bretschneider. 771.  Bondarenko, O., 1992: Neizvestnye Kurily: ser’eznye razmyshleni i a o statuse Kuril’skikh ostrovov, Moskva: “VTI-Deĭta Press”. 772.  Boneparth, E. and MJ Wilkinson, 1995: Terminating trusteeship for the FSM and RMI; independence and self-sufficiency in the post-Cold War Pacific, PS, 18, 1, 61-78. 773.  Bongie, Chris, 1998: Islands and exiles: the Creole identities of post colonial literature, Stanford (Calif.): Stanford university press. 774.  Boninu, Antonietta (appendice), con la collaborazione di Maria Christiana Oppo, 2002: Insulae Christi: il Cristianesimo primitivo in Sardegna, Corsica e Baleari / a cura di Pier Giorgio Spanu, Oristano: Mythos iniziative; S’Alvure. 775.  Bonisch, D. K. (ed), 1980: Some Pacific priorities, in Priorities in Medicine, Massey University, Palmerston North. 776.  Bonnard, Brian, 1993; Alderney at war: 1939-49, Dover, NH: A. Sutton. 777.  Bonneuil, C., Et P. Petitjean, 1996: « Les Chemins De La Création De L’orstom, Du Front Populaire A La Libération En Passant Par Vichy, 1936-1945 : Recherche Scientifique Et Politique Coloniale », Dans Roland Waast Et Patrick Petitjean (Dir.), Les Sciences Hors d’Occident Au Xxe Siècle, Paris, ORSTOM, P. 113-161. 778.  Bonnemaison, J., 1985: ‘The Tree and the Canoe: Roots and Mobility in Vanuatu Societies’, Pacific Viewpoint, Vol. 26, No. 1, pp. 30-62. 779.  Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985a: “Les lieux de l’identité: vision du passé et identité culturelle dans les îles du sud et du centre de Vanuatu (Mélanésie)”, In: Anthropologie et histoire, Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (1), p. 151-170. 780.  Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985b: “The tree and the canoe: roots and mobility in Vanuatu societies”, In: Chapman M. (ed.), Morrison P.S. (ed.) Mobility and identity in the island Pacific, Pacific Viewpoint, 26 (1), Pacific Science Congress Symposium on Mobility and Identity in the Island Pacific, 15, Dunedin (NZL), p. 30-62. 781.  Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985c: “Un certain refus de l’Etat: autopsie d’une tentative de sécession en Mélanésie”, in International Political Science Review, 6 (2), p. 230-247.

2009

CEHA

45

782.  Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985d: Les fondements d’une identité: territoire, histoire et société dans l’archipel de Vanuatu (Mélanésie): essai de géographie culturelle, 1. L’arbre et la pirogue, Paris: ORSTOM, 1/2, 533 p. multigr. Th. 3e cycle: Lett. et Sci. Hum. : Paris 4. 783.  Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985e: Vanuatu: La coutume et l’indépendance, Hérodote, 37 (38), p. 145-162. 784.  Bonnemaison, J., 1986: La Dernière Île, Paris, Arka/Orstom, Oceania, vol.60, 1. 785.  Bonnemaison, J., 1990: “L’espace réticulé”, in Tropiques, lieux et liens, Paris, ORSTOM, p. 500-510. 786.  Bonnemaison, J., 1991: “Vivre dans l’île: une approche de l’ïléité océanienne”, L’Espace géographique, nº2, p. 119-125. 787.  Bonnemaison, Joùl, 1996: Gens de pirogue et gens de la terre: les fondements géographiques d’une identité - l’Archipel du Vanuatu - Essai de géographie culturelle - Livre 1., Paris: ORSTOM. 788.  Bonnemaison, J., 1996 et 1997: Les fondements géographiques d’une identité, l’archipel du Vanuatu. Tome I: Gens de la pirogue et gens de la terre, Tome II: Les gens des lieux, histoire et géosymboles d’une société enracinée: Tanna, Paris, Éditions de l’ORSTOM. 789.  Bonnemaison, J., 1997a: “La sagesse des îles”, in Sanguin, A.-L. (dir.), Vivre dans une île. Paris, l’Harmattan, p. 121-129. 790.  Bonnemaison, J. e Freyss, J., dir., 1997b: Le Pacifique insulaire, Revue Tiers-Monde, n°149. 791.  Bonnemaison, Joùl; Waddell, Eric, 1997c: L’extrême Orient dans l’oeil du cyclone. Les nouvelles frontières économiques et politiques du Pacifique insulaire, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 13-34. 792.  Bonniol, J. L. - 1987 “Micro-insularité et particularisme: approche comparée à partir de cas antillais et seychellois”, In: Doumenge, J. F. et alii Insularité, insularisme, Bourdeaux, Cret. (Collection Iles et Archipels). 793.  Bonvallot, Jacques; Laboute, Pierre; Rougerie, Francis; Vigneron, Emmanuel, 1994: Les atolls des Tuamotu, Paris: ORSTOM. 794.  Bonvillain, Nancy, 1994: The Haidas: people of the Northwest Coast, Brookfield, Conn.: Millbrook Press. 795.  Boomert, Arie, 2000: Trinidad, Tobago and the Lower Orinoco Interaction Sphere: An archaeological/ethnohistorical study. Alkmaar: Cairi Publications. 796.  Boomgaard, Peter, 2003: In the shadow of rice: Roots and tubers in Indonesian history, 1500-1950 = Dans l’ombre du riz: racines et tubercules dans l’histoire indonésienne, 1500-1950, Agricultural history, vol. 77, no4, pp. 582-610. 797.  Booth, Rosemary, 1987: “The army and navy and Governor Hatton”, in Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 22 (1987 for 1986), 62-70, ISSN 01441973. 798.  Borca, F., 2000: Terra mari cincta. Insularità e cultura romana, Rome, Carocci. 799.  Bordallo, Oliver W.S., 2007: Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, The Historian, Vol. 69. 800.  Bordoni, Benedetto, 1983: Libro di Benedetto Bordone Isolario, introduzione di Massimo Donattini, Modena: Edizioni Aldine. 801.  Bordoni, Benedetto (14..-1539), 2000 : Isolario, Les Belles Lettres: N. Aragno / impr. 802.  Borel, Gildas, 1990: la conquete de l’espace maritime en polynesie francaise; sous la

2009

46

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

direction de jean chaussade, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Nantes. 803.  Borel, Vincent, 1997: Porquerolles et les îles de Hyères vers 1900, Marly-le-Roi, Editions Champflour pour La Rosalba, Giens. 804.  Borgatti, Lisa, 2007: “Pacific Islands’ Bilateral Trade: The Role of Remoteness and of Transport Costs”, in No UNU-WIDER Research Paper RP2007/21, Working Papers from World Institute for Development Economic Research (UNU-WIDER). 805.  Borofsky, Robert, 1987: Making history: Pukapukan and anthropological constructions of knowledge, Cambridge [Cambridgeshire], New York: Cambridge University Press. 806.  Borofsky, R. & A. Howard (eds), 1989: Developments in Polynesian Ethnology, Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press. 807.  Borofsky, R., 1999: Cook, Lono, Obeyesekere and Sahlins, in Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake history, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.420-42. 808.  Borofsky, R., ed. 1999, 2000: Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake history, Honolulu, UH Press. 809.  Borrero Navia, José M. (José María), 1994: Estrategia de conservación y sostenibilidad en las islas San Andrés, Old Providence y Santa Catalina (Caribe occidental), Cali: Fundación para la Investigación y Protección del Medio Ambiente, FIPMA. 810.  Borsboom, AD., 1988: The savage in European social thought; a prelude to the conceptualization of the divergent peoples and cultures of Australia and Oceania, Bijdragentot de Taal-land-en Volkenkunde, Vol 144, pp.419-32. 811.  Borthwick, M., 1992: Pacific century; the emergence of modern Asia-Pacific, Westview Press 1992. 812.  Bosa, Miguel Suárez, 2004: “The Role of the Canary Islands in the Atlantic Coal Route from the End of the Nineteenth Century to the Beginning of the Twentieth Century: Corporate Strategies” (Commodities of Empire Working Paper, 4), in International Journal of Maritime History [St John’s, Newfoundland], 16:1 (2004), 95-124. 813.  Bosch Fiol, Esperança, Victòria A. Ferrer Pérez, 1997: El model de dona proposat per la secció femenina: implantació a les Illes Balears (1939-1975), Palma de Mallorca, Universitat Illes Balears. 814.  Bosseur-Salini Dominique, Nicoli, Marie-Jeanne, Lantieri Francesca, 1987: “L’ile, figureparadoxe”, Peuples Méditerranéens, Janvier-juin, n° 38-39, pp. 123-129. 815.  Bostock, Frances, 1994: A bank of dual nationality. The origins and strategy of the Ionian Bank before 1914, Bankhistorisches Archiv [Frankfurt], 20 (1994), 3-25. 816.  Boswell, T.D., 1986: The characteristics of internal migration to and from New Providence Island (Greater Nassau), Bahamas: 1960-1970, Social and economic studies, vol. vol. 35, no 1, p. p. 111-150. 817.  Boucher, Philip P., 2008: France and the American tropics to 1700: tropics of discontent?, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. 818.  Bouchindomme, Marie Camille, 2003: Visages de l’île dans les films d’Ingmar Bergman; sous la dir. de Murielle Gagnebin, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Mémoire DEA : Etudes Cinématographiques et audiovisuelles: Paris III. 819.  Boudet, C., 1997: Les îles de l’Union européenne, Saint-Denis de la Réunion, Observatoire du développement de la Réunion, n°20.

2009

CEHA

47

820.  Boughton, G., and Leary, P., eds 1994: A time of change; relations between the US and American Samoa, Guam, the Northern Marianas, Puetro Rico and the US Virgin Islands, University of Guam 1994. 821.  Boulder, Colo, Lynne Rienner, 2007: Security and development in the Pacific Islands: social resilience in emerging states, Berkeley: University of California Press. 822.  Boulder, Colo.: Lynne Rienner, 2007a: Historical dictionary of the discovery and exploration of the Pacific Islands, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press. 823.  Bouloux, Nathalie, Antoine Franzini, 2004: «Îles du Moyen Âge», Bulletin du Centre d’études médiévales d’Auxerre, 8. Disponível online em URL: http://cem.revues.org/document909. html. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009. 824.  Boultbee, Paul G, David F. Raine, compilers, Bermuda, Oxford, England, Santa Barbara, Calif., Clio Press, (bibliografia). 825.  Boultbee, Paul G. (comp.), Cayman Islands (World Bibliographical Series, 187), Oxford: Clio, 1996. 826.  Boultbee, Paul G. Compiler by. 1991: Turks and Caicos Islands, Oxford, England ; Santa Barbara, Calif. : Clio Press,(bibliografia). 827.  Bound, Graham, 2006: Falkland Islanders at war, Barnsley: Pen & Sword. 828.  Bound, Graham, 2007: Invasion 1982: the Falkland Islanders’ story, Barnsley [England]: Pen & Sword Military. 829.  Bouquet, Christian, 1984: Insulaires et riverains du lac Tchad: Etude géographique, Bordeaux: Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3, Th. Doct.: Géographie: Unviersité Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3. 830.  Boura, Olivier (éd.), 1993: Les Atlantides: Généalogie d’un Mythe, Paris. 831.  Bourke, Marie, 1988: “The Aran fisherman’s drowned child”, in Irish Arts Review Yearbook, 190-196. 832.  Bourke, R. M., [et al.], 1996: “West New Britain Province: Text Summaries, Maps, Code Lists and Village Identification”, in Agricultural Systems of Papua New Guinea Working Paper No. 13. Canberra, Department of Human Geography, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University. 833.  Bourke, R. M. and Betitis, T., 2003: Sustainability of Agriculture in Bougainville Province, Papua New Guinea: Report of a Study Conducted in September-October 2002 of Village Agriculture in Bougainville Province, Papua New Guinea, for the Bougainville Provincial Government and PNG Department of National Planning and Monitoring and Funded by the Australian Agency for International Development. Canberra: Land Management Group, RSPAS, The Australian National University. 834.  Boutilier, J., Hughes, D.; Tiffany, S., Eds. 1978: Mission, Church and Sect in Oceania, ASAO Monograph No. 6. Lanham, University Press of America. 835.  Boutilier, James A., 1981: The Nature, Scope, and Impact of the Tourist Industry in the Solomon Islands, In Persistence and Exchange: A Symposium. Roland W. Force and Brenda Bishop, eds. Honolulu: Pacific Science Association. Pp. 37-50. 836.  Boutilier, James A., 1984: European Women in the Solomon Islands, 1900-1942: Accomodation and Change on the Pacific Frontier, In Rethinking Womens’ Roles: Perspectives from the Pacific, eds. O’Brien, Denise; Tiffany, Sharon W. (Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA), 173-200. 837.  Boutillier, J.A., 1984: Hungry sharks: Japanese economic activity in Melanesia, 1960-1980,

2009

48

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

PS, vol. 8 (1), 71-94. 838.  Boutillier Jean-Louis; Brossier J.; Funel, J.M., 1985: Recherche-Développement: Haïti, Paris: MRE CODEV. 839.  Bóveda, Jorge Rafael, 2007: Malvinas: la odisea del submarino Santa Fe, Buenos Aires: Instituto de Publicaciones Navales. 840.  Bovis, Edmond de, 1980: État de la société tahitienne à l’arrivée des Européens. English Tahitian society before the arrival of the Europeans, translation and introduction by Robert D. Craig, Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University-Hawaii Campus. 841.  Bowden, Thomas N., 2004: A century of motor vehicle registration marks in the British Isles: including Channel islands, Ireland and Isle of Man, Ivybridge: ATM. 842.  Bower, Jeff, 1995: A passion for the primitive: a volunteer’s experiences in Papua New Guinea and the Solomon Islands, Taree: Tarara. 843.  Bowley, R. L., 1990: The fortunate islands: the history of the Isles of Scilly, St. Mary’s, Isles of Scilly: Bowley. 844.  Bowman, J. E., 1986: “The Highlands and Islands: a nineteenth century tour”, Gloucester. 845.  Bowman, L.W., 1991: Mauritius – Democracy and Development in the Indian Ocean, Dartmouth: Westview Press. 846.  Boxill, Ian, 1997: “Fiji: the limits of ethnic political mobilisation”,in Race & Class, Oct 1997; vol. 39: pp. 37 - 49. 847.  Boyce, David George, 2005: The Falklands War (Twentieth-century wars), New York: Palgrave Macmillan. 848.  Boyd, M., 1980: Coping with Samoan resistance after the 1918 influenza epidemic: Colonel Tate’sproblems and perplexities, JJournal of Pacific history, vol. 15(3), 155-174. 849.  Boyer, Alain-Michel, 1995: Logoden et autres îles, Rezé: Éd. Séquences. 850.  Boyer, publ. sous la dir. de Philippe, 1997: La mer: espace, perception et imaginaire dans le Pacifique Sud: actes du neuvième Colloque CORAIL, Papeete: Université française du Pacifique; Nouméa (BP 2448): CORAIL; Paris: l’Harmattan. 851.  Boyer, William W., 1982: Civil liberties in the U.S. Virgin Islands, 1917-1949, St. Croix, U.S.V.I. (Box 6932, St. Croix 00820): Antilles Graphic Arts. 852.  Boyer, William W., 1983: America’s Virgin Islands: a history of human rights and wrongs, Durham, N.C.: Carolina Academic Press, c1983. 853.  Boyle, Stephen A., 1983: Economy and society of the Aran Islands, county Galway in the early 19th century, Irish Geography, 16, 36-54. 854.  Bradley, Charles C., 1994: Aleutian echoes, introduction by Pat Roppel, [Fairbanks, AK]: University of Alaska Press. 855.  Bradshaw, J., 1995: Children of Kilibob: Creation, cosmos, and culture in Northeast New Guinea, Alice Pomponio, Review article, David R. Counts, Thomas G. Harding (guest eds.) 1994. Pacific Studies Special Issue, vol. 17, no. 4. Laie: The institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University - Hawai’i. Oceanic Linguistics 34(2): 472-474. 856.  Bradt, H., 2002: Madagascar: the Bradt Travel Guide, Seventh edition, London. 857.  Bradt, Hilary, 1989: Madagascar, Cincinnati: Seven Hills. 858.  Braga, Isabel M. R. Mendes Drumond, 1999: Bigamia e insularidade: o caso da Madeira

2009

CEHA

49

na época moderna, Françoise Massa, Ed., Les Iles Atlantiques: Réalités et imaginaire. Actes du coloque, Rennes: Université Haute Bretagne Rennes 2, equipe de Recherches interdisciplinaires en Langues romanes, pp.189-197, republicado em Islenha, 28 (2001), pp69-73. 859.  Braga, Isabel M.R. Mendes Drumond, 2001: «A Inquisição e a Sociedade Madeirense na Época Moderna: Elementos para o seu Estudo», pp. 183-255, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 860.  Braga, Isabel M. R. Mendes Drumond, 2004, «Historiografia universitária sobre temáticas regionais insulares (1974-2000)», in Islenha, n.º 34, pp. 4-20. 861.  Bragard, Véronique, 2008: Transoceanic dialogues: coolitude in Caribbean and Indian Ocean literatures, Bruxelles, Belgium; New York: P.I.E. Peter Lang. 862.  Braith Waite; C.J.R.; Stoddart, D.R., (ed.), 1984: Biogeography and ecology of the Seychelles Islands, In Geology of the Seychelles, La haye; Boston; Lancaster: Junk. 863.  Brana-Shute, Rosemary, 1983: A Bibliography of Caribbean Migration and Caribbean Immigrant Communities. Gainesville: Center for Latin American Studies, University of Florida. 864.  Brandao, Jose Antonio, 2000: Your Fyre Shall Burn No More: Iroquois Policy Toward New France and its Native Allies to 1701, Bison Books Corporation. 865.  Braunstein, Florence; François Pépin, Jean, 1994: Les civilisations oubliées, Paris: Marketing. 866.  Bray, M. & Packer, S., 1994: Education in Small States: Concepts, Challenges & Strategies, Oxford, Pergamon. 867.  Bray, M. and Fergus, H., 1986: ‘The implications of size for educational development in small countries: Montserrat, a Carribean case study’, Compare, 16(1), 91-143. 868.  Bray, M., 1987: ‘Small countries in international development’, Journal of Development Studies, 23(2), 295-300. 869.  Bray, M., 1991: ‘Education in small states: Growth of interest and emergence of theory.’ Prospects, 21(4), 503-516. 870.  Bray, M., Charles, H. et al., 1991: Making Small Practical: Organisation and Management of Ministries of Education in Small States, London: Commonwealth Secretariat. 871.  Braybrooke, J. C., 1968: Geological investigation of Lake Hargy hydro-electric scheme, west New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Geological Survey. 872.  Breen, Eamonn, 1990: The three islands: international agreements in Northern Ireland, Cyprus, and Sri Lanka, [Belfast: Dept. of Politics], Queen’s University of Belfast. 873.  Brenner, T.; Fornahl, D. (eds), 2003: Cooperation, networks and institutions in regional innovation systems, Cheltenham, Edward Elgar publishing. 874.  Breslin, S., 2002: New regionalism in the global political economy, Londres, Routledge. 875.  Breton, Jean-Marie (dir.); et all…, 2001: L’écotourisme, un nouveau défi pour la Caraïbe ?, Paris; Pointe-à-Pitre: Karthala; CREJETA. 876.  Breton, Jean-Marie (Directeur scientifique); Portecop, Jacques (Préfacier), 2006: Développement viable et valorisation environnementale Caraïbe - Amérique latine

2009

50

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

(Enjeux, menaces et perspectives), Paris; Pointe-à-Pitre: Karthala; CREJETA. 877.  Breure, C. J., 1982: “Factors affecting yield and growth of oil palm tenera in West NewBritain”, in Oleagineux, 37(5): 213-227. 878.  Breure, C. J., J. Konimor and E. A. Rosenquist, 1982a: Oil palm selection and seed production at Dami Oil Palm Research Station, Papua New Guinea, Oil Palm News, No. 26: 2-17. 879.  Breure, C. J., 1982b: “Factors affecting yield and growth of oil palm trees teneras in West New Britain [Papua New Guinea], in Proceedings of the International Conference on Oil Palm in Agriculture in the Eighties, Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia), Institut Penyelidikan Minyak Kelapa Sawit Malaysia; Pergabongan Persatuan Peladang, Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia). PpP (ISP). 880.  Breure, C. J., 1985: “Relevant factors associated with crown expansion in oil palm (Elaeis guineensis Jacq.)” in Euphytica 34 (1): 161-175. 881.  Breure, C. J., [et al.], 1986: “Oil palm introductions to Papua New Guinea and the formulation of selection methods at Dami Oil Palm Research Station”, in Proceedings of International Workshop on Oil Palm Germplasm and Utilisation, Workshop Proceedings of the Palm Oil Research Institute of Malaysia, Bangi, Selangor (Malaysia), Institut Penyelidikan Minyak Kelapa Sawit Malaysia, Bangi, Selangor. 882.  Breure, C. J., 1986a: “Parent selection for yield and bunch index in the oil palm in West New Britain”, in Euphytica, 35(1): 65-72. 883.  Brewin, Christopher, 2000: European Union and Cyprus, Eothen Press. 884.  Brézet, François-Emmanuel, 2002: La bataille du cap Coronel et des Falklands: croisière sans retour, l’escadre de croiseurs du vice-amiral Graf von Spee [The battle of Cape Coronel and the Falklands: a cruise without a return journey: vice-admiral Graf von Spee’s cruiser fleet], Nantes: Marines. 885.  Briceno Ruiz, J., 2001: “Remaking of the triangular relation between the USA, the European Union and Latin America”, Journal of European integration, n°2, p. 199-215. 886.  Briceño Ruíz, José, 2007: La integración regional en América Latina y el Caribe: procesos históricos y realidades comparadas, Mérida, Venezuela: Publicaciones Vicerrectorado Académico CODEPRE. 887.  Brigand, Louis, 1983: Les Iles Bretonnes: Aspects Geographiques De L’insularite; Sous La Direction De Annik Moign, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),Thèse de 3e cycle: Géographie: Brest. 888.  Brigand Louis, en coll., 1991: « Les îles en Méditerranée: enjeux et perspectives», Paris: Economica, brigand Louis, en coll., Territoires et sociétés insulaires, actes du Colloque international (Brest et Ouessant, 15-17 novembre 1989), Brest: Université de Bretagne occidentale, Institut de géoarchitecture. 889.  Brigand, L., Edited by F. Gourmelon and, 1991: Territoires et sociétés insulaires – Actes du colloque international de Brest. 15-17 Novembre 1989. Université de Bretagne occidentale, Brest. 890.  Brigand Louis, 1995, 2002: Les îles du Ponant: histoires et géographie des îles et archipels de la Manche et de l’Atlantique, Quimper: Éd. Palantines. 891.  Brigand, L., 1995: “D’île en île, l’archipel du Conservatoire du littoral”, Les Cahiers du Conservatoire du littoral, no. 3. 892.  Brigand, Louis, 2000: Iles, Ilots et Archipels du Ponant: de L’abandon a la Surfrequentation ?: Essai sur la Question Des Usages, de la Gestion et de la Conversation Depuis 1950;

2009

CEHA

51

Sous La Direction De Fernand Verger, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université Panthéon-Sorbonne (Paris). Université de soutenance, Thèse de doctorat : Géographie: Paris 1. 893.  Brigand, L., 2002: “Les frontières géographiques de l’île ou l’île dans le temps et dans l’espace”. in Regards pratiques et savoir, le littoral. Études offertes à Fernand Verger, Paris, Édition de l’ENS, p. 169-190. 894.  Brigand, L., 2006: Que serais-je sans elles? Relation d’un Voyage d’un Quart de Siécle d’île en île, in J.-P.Castelain(ed.), Îles Réelles, Îles Rêvées, Ethnologie Française, nº2006/3, 475-483. 895.  Brigand, Louis, 2009: Besoin D’Iles, Paris, Stock. 896.  Briggs, Asa, 1995: The Channel Islands occupation and liberation, 1940-1945, London: Batsford in association with the Imperial War Museum. 897.  Briguglio, L., 1992: Preliminary Study on the Construction of an Index for Ranking Countries According to their Economic Vulnerability, UNCTAD/LDC/Misc.4. 898.  Briguglio, L., 1993: The Economic Vulnerabilities of Small Island Developing States, study commissioned by CARICOM for the Regional Technical Meeting of the Global Conference on the Sustainable Development of Small Island Developing States, Port of Spain, Trinidad and Tobago, July. 899.  Briguglio, L. and Kaminarides, J. (eds), 1993a: ‘Islands and small states: issues and policies’, World Development, 21(2), February (SpecialIssue). 900.  Briguglio, L., 1995: “Small Island States and their Economic Vulnerabilities,” World Development, Vol. 23, 1615-1632. 901.  Briguglio, L., Archer, B. Jafari, J. & Wall, G. eds., 1996: Sustainable Tourism in Islands and Small States – Vol. 1: Issues and Policies, 2 vols, London, Pinter.Briguglio, L. & Kisanga, E.J. (eds.), 2004: Economic Vulnerability and Resilience of Small States, Islands and Small States Institute of the University of Malta and the Commonwealth Secretariat, Malta, Formatek. 902.  Briguglio, L., Archer, B., Jafari, J. and Wall.G. (eds), 1996: Sustainable Tourism in Islands & Small States: Issues and Policies. London: Pinter. 903.  Briguglio, L, 1997: Alternative Economic Vulnerability Indices for Developing Countries. Report prepared for the Expert Group on Vulnerability Index. UN (DESA), 17-19 December. 904.  Briguglio, L., 1998: The Global Involvement of Small Island Developing States, Mauritius, Paper Presented at the International Small Islands Studies Association Conference. 905.  Briguglio, edited by = edité par Lino, 1999: Sustainable development of small island developing states in the Indian Ocean, Mediterranean and Atlantic regions (IMA-SIDS): report = Le developpement durable des petits etats insulaires en voie de developpement des regions de L’ocean indien, de la mediterranee et de l’atlantique (PEID-OIMA) : report = rapport, Malta: Islands and Small States Institute, Foundation for International Studies, University of Malta in collaboration with the Multilateral Affairs Dept. of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Malta and the United Nations Environment Programme. 906.  Briguglio, L., Cordina, G. & Kisanga, E.J. (eds.), 2006: Building the Economic Resilience of Small States, Islands and Small States Institute of the University of Malta and the Commonwealth Secretariat, Malta, Formatek. 907.  Brinklow, edited by Laurie, Ledwell, Frank, Ledwell, and Jane, 2000: Message in a bottle: the literature of small islands: proceedings from an international conference, Charlottetown,

2009

52

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Prince Edward Island, Canada, June 28 to 30, 1998, Charlottetown, P.E.I.: Institute of Island Studies. 908.  Britain Oil Palm Development Ltd., 1983: Research at Dami Oil Palm Research Station, the first 15 years 1968-1982, Lae, Papua New Guinea. 909.  British Museum (Natural History), 1984- 1987: Catalogue of the natural history drawings commissioned by Joseph Banks on the Endeavour voyage 1768-1771, held in the British Museum (Natural History). British Museum (Natural History), London: The Museum, 1984-1987 (Dorchester: Dorset Press). 910.  Brito González, Alexis, 1997: D. Extranjeros en Lanzarote, 1640-1700, [Arrecife], Servicio de Publicaciones del Cabildo de Lanzarote. 911.  Brito, Oswaldo, 1989: La encrucijada internacional: historia contemporánea: Canarias, 1876-193, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 912.  Britsch, R. Lanier, 1986: Unto the islands of the sea: a history of the Latter-day Saints in the Pacific Salt Lake City, UT, Deseret Book. 913.  Brittain-Catlin, William, 2005: Offshore: the dark side of the global economy, Farrar, Strauss and Giroux, New York. 914.  Brizan, George, 1984: Grenada Island of Conflict: From Amerindians to People’s Revolution 1498–1979. London, Zed Books Ltd., publisher; Copyright, George Brizan. 915.  Broadhead, John, 1995: Gwaii Haanas transitions study: social & economic trends in communities on Haida Gwaii (the Queen Charlotte Islands) affected by the creation of a Haida Heritage Site & National Park Reserve in Gwaii Haanas (South Moresby), [Skidegate, B.C.]: Queen Charlotte Islands Museum Press. 916.  Broch, H.B., 1981: Cultural variation on the islands in the sea of Flores, Archipel, 1981/00, no 22, pp. 43-53. 917.  Bronfman, Alejandra, On the move: the Caribbean since 1989, Halifax, N.S.: Fernwood Publishing; London; New York: Zed Books. 918.  Broodbank, Cyprian, 2000: An island archaeology of the early Cyclades, Cambridge University Press. 919.  Brooke, W. Michael, co-ordinator and editor, 1980?: Blacks in Bermuda: historical perspectives, Hamilton?: Bermuda College. 920.  Brower, Kenneth; Harri Peccinotti, 1981: Micronesia: The Land, the People, and the Sea, Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press. 921.  Brown, Alice, McCrone, David and Paterson, Lindsay, 1996: Politics and Society in Scotland, McMillan Press Ltd Houndmillis, Basingstoke, Hampshire and London. 922.  Brown, Cedric C., 1998: ‘”This Islands watchful Centinel”: anti-Catholicism and protoWhiggery’, In Zwicker, Steven N. (ed.), The Cambridge companion to English literature 1650-1740, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 165-8. 923.  Brown, edited by M. Anne, 2007: Security and development in the Pacific Islands: social resilience in emerging states, Boulder, Colo.: Lynne Rienner. 924.  Brown, George, 1905: Pioneer, Missionary and Explorer: an autobiography, London: Hodder and Stroughton. 925.  Brown, James, William P. Snyder, 1985: The Regionalization of warfare: the Falkland/ Malvinas Islands, Lebanon, and the Iran-Iraq conflict, New Brunswick, N.J., Transaction Books.

2009

CEHA

53

926.  Brown, M., 1995: A History of Madagascar, Damien Tunnicliffe, UK. 927.  Brown, Prepared for online presentation by the Right Reverend Dr. Terry, 2007: J.W. Beattie Journal of a Voyage to the Western Pacific in the Melanesian Mission Yacht Southern Cross 25 August-10 November 1906. Disponível online em url: http://anglicanhistory.org/ oceania/beattie_journal1906.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 928.  Brown, Stewart and John Wickham, eds. 1999: The Oxford Book of Caribbean Short Stories. Introduction by Stewart Brown, New York: Oxford UP. 929.  Brown, Susan, 1981: Victorian Frederiksted: details of 19th century Caribbean architecture of Frederiksted, St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, [S.l.: St. Croix Landmarks Society]. 930.  Browne, Christopher, 2006: Pacific island economies, Washington, D.C.: International Monetary Fund. 931.  Browne, Frank, 1998: Images of Aran: photographs by Father Browne 1925-1938; compiled by E. E. O’Donnell. Dublin: Wolfhound Press, 1998. 932.  Browne, Zoë; Donnelly, Sue, 2005: Ionian Bank Limited: retroconversion and digitisation project, Business Archives, 91, 16-27. 933.  Brugge, David M., 1999: The Navajo-Hopi Land Dispute: An American Tragedy, university of New Mexico Press. 934.  Brun, Jean-Pierre, 1997: Les îles d’Hyères: fragments d’histoire, en collaboration avec Jean-Marie Guillon ... [et al.], Arles: Actes sud. 935.  Bruner, Edward M., 1995: The Ethnographer/Tourist in Indonesia. In International Tourism: Identity and Change. Marie-Françoise Lanfant, John B. Allcock, and Edward M. Bruner, eds. London: Sage. pp. 224-241. 936.  Brunet, edited by M.A., and Davies, J.E., 1994: The Cayman Islands: natural history and biogeography/, Dordrecht, The Netherlands; Boston: Kluwer Academic. 937.  Brunet, Roger (dir.), et all..., 1995: Asie du Sud-Est, Oceanie. In L’angle de l’Asie: continentalite et insularite, Paris; Montpellier: Belin; Reclus. 938.  Brunet, R., 1997: “Quelle est la plus grande île du monde ?”, Mappe Monde, n° 4, p. 40-41. 939.  Brunt, M.A.; Davies, J.E., edited by. 1994: The Cayman Islands: natural history and biogeography, Dordrecht, The Netherlands; Boston: Kluwer Academic. 940.  Bruton, Henry J., 1992: Sri Lanka and Malaysia, New York: Oxford University Press. 941.  Bryan, A., 1997: “The New Clinton Administration and the Caribbean: Trade, Security and Regional Politics”, Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs, nº1, p. 101-120. 942.  Bryan, A.; Bryan, R., 1999: “The new face of regionalism in the Caribbean”, The NorthSouth Agenda, nº 35. 943.  Bryden, John, 1981: Appraising a Regional Development Programme - The Case of the Scottish Highlands and Islands. European Review of Agricultural Economics, 18, pp. 475-497. 944.  Buchanan, Meg, (ed.). 1995: St. Kilda: the continuing story of the islands, Edinburgh: HMSO. 945.  Buchholz, H.J., 1987: Sudpazifik-Inseln. Kleinheit als entwicklungsproblem, Geographische rundschau, no 1, pp. 14-21. 946.  Buck, E., 1993: Paradise remade; the politics of culture and history in Hawaii, Temple University Press. 947.  Buckley K. and Klugman K, 1983: The Australian presence in the Pacific; Burns Philp 1914-

2009

54

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1946, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 948.  Buckley K. and Klugman K, 1986: South Pacific Focus; Burns Philp’s trading viewed through photographs early this century, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 949.  Buhagiar, Mario, 1986: Late Roman and Byzantine catacombs and related burial places in the Maltese Islands, Oxford, England, B.A.R.. 950.  Buhagiar, Mario, 1987: The iconography of the Maltese Islands, 1400-1900: painting, Valletta, Malta: Progress Press. 951.  Buhalis, D. and Diamantis, D., 1999: Tourism development and sustainability on the Greek archipelagos. In: Apostolopoulos, Y. (ed), Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism Development, London: Cassel, pp. 143-170. 952.  Buissonnières, 1995: D’île en île: l’archipel du Conservatoire du littoral, Paris: Conservatoire du littoral. 953.  Bulbeck C., 1992: Australian women in Papua New Guinea, Melbourne, CUP. 954.  Bulmer-Thomas, V., 2001: Regional integration in Latin America and the Caribbean: the political economy of open regionalism, Londres, University of London, Institute of Latin American Studies. 955.  Bumsted, J.M., 1980: The Only Island there is The Writings of PEI History in Smitheram, Verner, Milne, David and Dasgupta, Satadal, The Garden Transformed Prince EdwardIsland 1945-1980. Ragweed Press, Charlottetown, pp. 11-38. 956.  Bunce, P., 1988: The Cocos (Keeling) Islands: Australian atolls in the Indian Ocean. Milton: Jacaranda Press, 1988. 957.  Bunge, F.M., 1985: American Samoa, in Oceania: a regional study, (pp. 353-62), F.M. 958.  Bunge, Frederica M. edited by. 1983: Indian Ocean, five island countries, Foreign Area Studies, The American University; Washington, D.C.: The Studies: For sale by the Supt. of Docs., U.S. G.P.O.. 959.  Bunge, Frederica M., Melinda W. Cooke, 1984: Oceania, a regional study - Foreign Area Studies, the American University,Washington, D.C. , U.S. G.P.O.. 960.  Bunkabu hen, Ryūkyū Shinpō, 1983: Okinawa-gaku no gunzō, Tōkyō: Honpō Shoseki. 961.  Bunting, Madeleine, 1995: The model occupation: the Channel Islands under German rule, 1940-1945, London: HarperCollins. 962.  Buondelmonti, C., 2005: Liber insularum archipelagi: Universitäts- und Landesbibliothek Düsseldorf Ms. G 13, I. Siebert & M. Plassmann, eds., Wiesbaden, Reichert. (A facsimile edition of a manuscript of Buondelmonti’s work.). 963.  Buondelmonti, Cristoforo, 2007: Liber insularum archipelagi, Transkription des Exemplars Universitäts- und Landesbibliothek Düsseldorf Ms. G 13, Übersetzung und Kommentar von Karl Bayer, Wiesbaden: Reichert Verlag. 964.  Burac, Maurice, Olivier Chapuis, Alain Huetz de Lemps, Jean-René Vanney, 1986: Contribution française à la connaissance géographique des Antilles et de l’Atlantique au sud des Açores, Iles et archipels n° 15, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 965.  Burac, Pierre, 1989: Les Petites Antilles: etude geographique des disparites regionales de developpement, Bordeaux: presses universitaires de Bordeaux, 1989, 3 vols. 966.  Burac, M., 1991: “Approche géographique du problème de l’unité politique dans les Etats et pays multi-insulaires de la Caraïbe, in: Etudes Caribéennes. Société et Politique, Sous la direction de Yacou, A et Martin, M., Toulouse, CERC, Presses de l’Institut d’Etudes

2009

CEHA

55

Politiques de Toulouse, p. 147-158. 967.  Burac, Maurice, 1993: La Barbade. Les mutations récentes d’une île sucrière, Iles et archipels n° 17, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 968.  Burac, M. (dir.), 1994: Guadeloupe, Martinique et Guyane dans le monde américain, Paris, Karthala. 969.  Burden, Rodney A., 1986: Falklands: the air war, [s.l.]: British Aviation Research Group. 970.  Burenhult, Göran, 2002: The archaeology of the Trobriand Islands, Milne Bay Province, Papua New Guinea: excavation season 1999, Oxford : Archaeopress. 971.  Burgarella Mattei, Marie-Noelle, 1995: Contribution A L’etude Du Fonctionnement Des Petites Economies Insulaires, Sous La Direction De Bernard Fustier, Mémoire Ou Thèse (Version D’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Sciences économiques: Corte. 972.  Burgarella-Mattei M. N., 1997: «Conséquences socio-économiques de l’insularité: de l’isolement à la coopération». Colloque de l’Université de Corse. 19 au 21 juin Ajaccio, Editions Alain Piazzola. îles principales de la Méditerranée orientale”. Travaux de la Maison de l’Orient méditerranéen, °25, p. 29-52. 973.  Burgess, Douglas R., 2008: The pirates’ pact: the secret alliances between history’s most notorious buccaneers and colonial America, Chicago: McGraw-Hill. 974.  Burgess, Glenn, 2008: From the Common Law Mind to The Discovery of Islands: J.G.A. Pocock’s Journey, History of Political Thought, 29:3 (2008), 543-61. 975.  Burmester H, 1983: Outposts of Australia in the Pacific Ocean, Australian Journal of Politics and History, Vol 29, pp.14-25. 976.  Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2001: Foreign In a Domestic Sense: Puerto Rico, American Expansion, and the Constitution, Durham, NC: Duke University Press, Co-edited the volume and co-authored the introduction (with Burke Marshall). 977.  Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2001a: The Case for Puerto Rican Decolonization, Orbis: A Journal Of World Affairs, 433(Summer). 978.  Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2002: The Status of Puerto Rico: Political, Social, and Economic Dimensions (with Howard Hills), Working Paper No. 9, Center for International Development, Heller School forSocial Policy and Management, Brandeis University. 979.  Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2005: The Edges of Empire and the Limits of Sovereignty: American Guano Islands,” in Mary Dudziak and Leti Volpp, eds., Legal Borderlands: Law and the Construction of American Borders, 57:3 American Quarterly, 779 (Special Issue, 2005) (also published as a book by Johns Hopkins University Press, 2006). 980.  Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2007: None of the Above Means More of the Same: The Elusive Quest for Puerto Rican Self-Determination,” in Frances Negrón Muntaner, ed., None of the Above: Puerto Ricans in the Global Era, New York: Palgrave Macmillan. 981.  Burnett, John, 2001: “The Highlands and Islands of Scotland as a “cultural museum”, 19002000: a century of migration”, in Immigrants & Minorities, 20:1, 35-70. 982.  Burnett, Kathryn and Burnett, Andrew, 1999: Europe and the Mediation of Regional Identity, A View from Scotland’s Margins. Paper presented at the Regional Studies Association European Conference, 18-21 September, (1999), University of the Basque Country Bilbao, Spain. 983.  Burns, Sir Alan 1965: History of the British West Indies, George Allen and Unwin Ltd, London England.

2009

56

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

984.  Burt, Ben, 1998: Writing local history in Solomon Islands, In Pacific Answers to Western Hegemony: Cultural Practices of Indentity Construction (Explorations in Anthropology), Jürg Wassman, ed. Oxford: Berg. 985.  Burt, edited by Ben and Christian Clerk,1997: Environment and development in the Pacific Islands, Canberra: National Centre for Development Studies, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National University; Port Moresby: University of Papua New Guinea Press. 986.  Burton-Bradley, B. G., 1990: “Traditional medicine”, in B. G. Burton-Bradley, Ed. A History of Medicine in Papua New Guinea: Vignettes of an Earlier Period, Kingsgrove, NSW, Australasian Medical Publishing Company Limited, pp. 1-13. 987.  Burton-Bradley, B. G., 1990: Traditional medicine, A History of Medicine in Papua New Guinea: Vignettes of an Earlier Period, Kingsgrove, NSW, Australasian Medical Publishing Company Limited, pp. 1-13. 988.  Burton-Bradley, B. G., ed.1990: Traditional medicine, in A History of Medicine in Papua New Guinea: Vignettes of an Earlier Period, Kingsgrove, NSW, Australasian Medical Publishing Company Limited, pp. 1-13. 989.  Bushnell, O. A., 1993: The Gifts of Civilization: Germs and Genocide in Hawaii, University of Hawaii Press. 990.  Busoni, Jaurès, 1980: Confinati a Lipari, Milano: Vangelista. 991.  Busteed, Mervyn, 2000: Little islands of Erin: Irish settlement and identity in mid-nineteenth century Manchester, in MacRaild, Donald M. (ed.), The Great Famine and beyond: Irish migrants in Britain in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, Dublin: Irish Academic Press, 94-127. 992.  Busto Duthurburu, José Antonio del, 2000: Túpac Yupanqui: descubridor de Oceanía, Lima: Editorial Brasa. 993.  Butel, Paul, 2002: Histoire des Antilles Françaises XVIIe - XXe siècle, Perrin. 994.  Butel, V., 1982: Contribution a une etude comparee de la canne a sucre dans les petites iles tropicales, Bibliographie analytique et commentee, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Institut de Geographie. 995.  Butler, / Roger, 2001: Islands in the sun: prints by indigenous artists of Australia and the Australasian region, Canberra, Australia: National Gallery of Australia. 996.  Butler, R.W., 1993: Tourism development in small islands: past influences and future directions. In: Lockhart, D., Drakakis-Smith, D. and Schembri, J. (eds) The Development Process in Small Islands States. London: Routledge, pp.71-91. 997.  Butler, R.W., 1996: Problems and possibilities of sustainable tourism: The case of the Shetland Islands. In: Briguglio, L., Butler, R., Harrison, D. and Filho, W.L. (eds) Sustainable Tourism in Islands and Small States: Case Studies. London: Pinter, pp.11-31. 998.  Buttimer, A. & Seamon, D., eds., 1980: The Human Experience of Space and Place, NewYork, St. Martin’s Press. 999.  Buxton, Anne; McEwan, Jacqueline, 1992: The Orkney chronicles, 1900 & 1989, Newmill, Penzance, Cornwall: Jamieson Library. 1000.  Byrn, John D., 1989: Crime and punishment in the Royal Navy: discipline on the Leeward Islands station, 1784-1812, Aldershot, Hants, England: Scolar Press; Brookfield, Vt., USA: Gower. 1001.  Byrne, Seán, “Power politics as usual in Cyprus and Northern Ireland: Divided islands and

2009

CEHA

57

the role of external ethno-guarantors”, in Nationalism & Ethnic Politics, 6:1, 1-23. 1002.  Caballero Mujica, Francisco, 1992: Canarias hacia Castilla: datos de un proceso histórico / Francisco Caballero Mujica, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Caja Insular de Ahorros de Canarias. 1003.  Cabasset, Christiane, 1995: Tourisme culturel et tourisme de masse a Bali, In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 319-346. 1004.  Cabaussel, G., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Les mecanismes climatiques des iles intertropicales a travers l’exemple de l’archipel guadeloupeen, Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 25-50. 1005.  Cabral, Nelson Eurico, 1980: Le Moulin et le Pilon: les Iles du Cap-Vert, Paris: L’Harmattan; ACCT. 1006.  Cachey, T. J. (Theodore J.), 1995: Le Isole Fortunate: appunti di storia letteraria italiana, Roma: “L’Erma” di Bretschneider. 1007.  Cadet, Jean-Robert, 1998: Restavec: From Haitian Slave Child to Middle Class American, Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. 1008.  Cahen, Michel, 1994: “De Timor à Letícia, géopolitiques des mondes lusophones”, in Lusotopie, pp. 19-34. 1009.  Cahen, Michel, 2001: “Loro Sa’e, «soleil levant» archaïsant, ou signe de modernité à l’ère de la mondialisation ?”, in Lusotopie, pp. 125-133. 1010.  Cahill P., 1997: A prodigy of wastefulness, corruption, ignorance and indolence; the Expropriation Board in New Guinea 1920-1927, Journal of Pacific history, Vol 32, 1, pp.228. 1011.  Calder A, Lamb J., and Orr B, eds, 1999: Introduction; postcoloniality and the Pacific, in Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, UH Press, Honolulu, p.1-24. 1012.  Calder, Alex, 1996: The temptations of William Pascoe Crook: an experience of cultural difference in the Marquesas, 1797-1798, Journal of Pacific History, 31:2,144-61. 1013.  Caldwell, Bill, 1981: Islands of Maine: where America really began, Portland, Me.: G. Gannett Pub. Co.. 1014.  Caldwell, J.C., G.E. Harrison, and P. Quiggin, 1980: Demography of Micro, in World Development, Vol. 8, No 12 (pp. 953-967). 1015.  Calixte, directeurs Fritz, Edelyn Dorismond, 2007: Vaudou, santéria, candomblé: les pratiques religieuses dans la Caraïbe, Paris: L’Harmattan. 1016.  Calleya, S., 2000: Regionalism in the post-cold war world, Aldershot, Ashgate. 1017.  Callick, R., 1993: Pacific 2010; A doomsday scenario, in Cole R., ed, Pacific 2010; Challenging the future, Canberra, NCDC, ANU, 1-11. 1018.  Calligas, Eleni, 1994: “Lord Seaton’s Reforms in the Ionian Islands, 1843-8: A Race With Time”, in European History Quarterly, Jan; vol. 24: pp. 7 - 29. 1019.  Callow, P. and J.M. Cornford, 1986: La Cotte de St. Brelade 1961-1978: excavations by C.B.M. McBurney, Norwich [Norfolk], Geo Books. 1020.  Callus, Ivan, 2009: Maltese literature in the language of the other: a case study in minority literatures’ pursuit of ‘majority’, in Acta Scientiarum Language and Culture Maringá, v. 31, n. 1, p. 31-40. 1021.  Calmont, Andre, et all..., 1999: des espaces tropicaux entre insularité et continentalité, In:

2009

58

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Les outre-mers français, Mappemonde, no 54, p. p. 10-14. 1022.  Calvo, Andrea, 1985: Nove de le isole & terraferma novamente trovate in India English & Italian News of the islands and the mainland newly discovered in India by the captain of His Imperial Majesty’s fleet, translated and with notes by Edward F. Tuttle, Culver City, Calif.: Labyrinthos. 1023.  Camacho, Maria Graziela Fernandes, 1999: A insularidade no romance de Horácio Bento de Gouveia [Texto policopiado]: uma introdução à sua obra, Tese mestr. Literatura Portuguesa - Moderna e Contemporânea, Univ. Cat. Portuguesa. 1024.  Camberoque, Charles, 1985: Els mallorquins, els eivissencs: chiens de chasse des Baléares, textes de Miguel Elena Rosselló, [Vinça, France], Chiendent. 1025.  Cameron, A. D., 1986: Go listen to the crofters: the Napier Commission and crofting a century ago, Stornoway, Isle of Lewis, Acair. 1026.  Cameron, Ewen A., 2005: communication or Separation? Reactions to Irish Land Agitation and Legislation in the Highlands of Scotland, c.1870-1910, English Historical Review, 120:487633-66. 1027.  Cameron, J., 1991: Economic development options for the FSM at independence, PS, 14, 4, 35-70. 1028.  Cameron, J., ed., 2003: Changing Places: Re-imagining Australia, Double Bay NSW, Longueville. 1029.  Camhis, M. and Coccossis, H., 1983: Environment and tourism in island regions, Planning and Administration, 10(1), pp.16-23. 1030.  Campbell, David G., 1981: The ephemeral islands: a natural history of the Bahamas, London: Macmillan. 1031.  Campbell, Ewan; Lane, Alan, 1989: Llangorse: a 10th-century royal crannog in Wales, Antiquity, 63, 675-81. 1032.  Campbell, Gwyn, 2005: An economic history of Imperial Madagascar, 1750-1895: the rise and fall of an island empire, Cambridge University Press. 1033.  Campbell, I. C. (Ian Christopher),, 1980: Savages noble and ignoble; the preconceptions of early European voyagers in Polynesia, Pacific Studies, Vol 4/1 pp.45-59. 1034.  Campbell, I. C., 1982: Polynesian perceptions of Europeans in the 18th and 19th centuries, Pacific Studies, Vol 5, No 2, pp.64-80. 1035.  Campbell, I. C., 1985: Race relations in the pre-colonial Pacific Islands; a case of prejudice and pragmatism, Pacific Studies, Vol 8, No 2, Pp.61-80. 1036.  Campbell, I.C., 1998a: Gone native in Polynesia, Westport, Greenwood Press. 1037.  Campbell, I. C., 1989: A History of the Pacific Islands, St Lucia (Qld), Berkeley and Los Angeles (CA). 1038.  Campbell, I. C., 1989: A History of the Pacific Islands, University of Canterbury Press. Place of Publication: Christchurch, N.Z. Publication Year. 1039.  Campbell, I.C., 1990: The alleged imperialism of George Tupou 1, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 23(2), 159-175. 1040.  Campbell, I.C., 1990a: Culture contact and Polynesian identity in the European Age, in Journal of World History, Vol 8, pp.29-55. 1041.  Campbell, I.C., 1990b: A history of the Pacific Islands, Brisbane, University of Queensland

2009

CEHA

59

Press. 1042.  Campbell, I.C., 1994: European-Polynesian encounters; a critique of the Pearson thesis, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 29/2, pp.222-31. 1043.  Campbell, I.C., 1998: Anthropology and the professionalism of colonial administration in Papua and new Guinea, Journal of Pacific history, 33, 1, pp.69-90. 1044.  Campbell, I.C., 2000: The ASOPA controversy; a pivot of Australian policy for Papua and New Guinea 1945-49, Journal of Pacific history,, 25,1, 83-99. 1045.  Campbell, Ian C., Latouche, J.-P., 2001 : Les insulaires du Pacifique: histoire et situation politique, Presses universitaires de France. 1046.  Campbell, I. C., 2003: The Culture of Culture Contact: Refractions from Polynesia, Journal of World History, Volume 14, Number 1, March. 1047.  Campbell, John Gregorson, 2005: The Gaelic otherworld: John Gregorson Campbell’s Superstitions of the highlands & islands of Scotland and Wtchcraft & second sight in the highlands & islands; edited with commentary by Ronald Black. Edinburgh: Birlinn. 1048.  Campbell, John Lorne, 1984: Canna: the story of a Hebridean island, Oxford. 1049.  Campbell, M., 2002: “History in prehistory: the oral traditions of the Rarotongan land court records”, in Journal of Pacific History, 37:2, 221-38. 1050.  Campbell, R. J. (ed.), 2000: The discovery of the South Shetland Islands: the voyages of the brig Williams 1819-1820 as recorded in contemporary documents and the journal of Midshipman C.W. Poynter (Hakluyt Society, 3rd ser., 4). London: Hakluyt Society. 1051.  Campey, Lucille H., 2001: A very fine class of immigrants: Prince Edward Island’s Scottish pioneers, 1770-1850, Toronto: Natural Heritage/Natural History. 1052.  Campling, Liam, 2006: “A Critical Political Economy of the Small Island Developing States Concept: South–South Cooperation for Island Citizens?”, in Journal of Developing Societies, vol. 22: pp. 235 - 285. 1053.  Canclini, Arnoldo, 2007: Malvinas 1833: antes y después de la agresión inglesa: un estudio documental, Buenos Aires: Claridad. 1054.  Cann, Kathleen; Gunson, Walter Niel, 1988: “Pacific material in the archives of the British and Foreign Bible Society”, in Journal of Pacific History, 23:2, 223-225. 1055.  Cannan, Edward, 1992: Churches of the South Atlantic Islands, 1502-1991, Oswestry, Shropshire, England: Anthony Nelson. 1056.  Canoro, Elisabetta, 2003: Ireland: the land of heart’s desire, Dublin: Gill & Macmillan. 1057.  Cantet, Christèle, 2005: Mythes et figures de la belle créole dans la littérature de langue française: France, Mascareignes, Antilles française; sous la direction de Jean-Claude Carpanin Marimoutou, Université de la Réunion. Université de soutenance. 1058.  Capdevila, Ricardo, 1998: Islario: crónicas del descubrimiento de las Islas San Pedro (Georgias del Sur) y del Aurora (Rocas Cormorán y Negra), Buenos Aires: Instituto de Investigaciones Históricas Tierra del Fuego. 1059.  Capecchi, Bernard, 1995: Les consequences de l’instabilite tectonique a Wallis et Futuna, In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 381-400. 1060.  Carayol, M.; Chaudenson, R. Barat, C., 1984: Atlas linguistique et ethnographique de la Réunion, vol. 1. Paris, CNRS. 1061.  Carballo Armas, Pedro, 2001: Canarias y su diferenciación: balance y perspectivas del

2009

60

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

hecho diferencial canario, Las Palmas: Universidad de las Palmas de Gran Canaria. 1062.  Carbone, Maurizio, 2003: Les Iles Cook, Courrier (Le), Afrique-Caraïbes-Pacifique-Union européenne, no 200, p. 36-48. 1063.  Carbonero Gamundí, Maria Antònia, 1994: Padrins i repadrins a les Balears: una societat de quatre generacions davant el 2000, presentació: Miquel Munar Cardell, Palma, Mallorca: L. Muntaner. 1064.  Cardell, Kerry; Cumming, Cliff, 1992: Scotland’s three tongues in Australia: colonial Hamilton in the 1860s, Scottish Studies, 31 (1992-3), 40-62. 1065.  Carew, Jan, 1996: “Caribbean culture and development”, in Race & Class, Oct 1996; vol. 38: pp. 71 - 76. 1066.  Caré, Jean-Marc, 1997: Îles, Centre international d’études pédagogiques. 1067.  Carey, Peter, 2001: “Challenging Tradition, Changing Society: the Role of Women in East Timor’s Transition to Independence”, in Lusotopie, pp. 255- 267. 1068.  Carile, Paolo, 1995: Sulla via delle Indie orientali: aspetti della francofonia nell’Oceano indiano /Sur la route des Indes orientales: aspects de la francophonie dans l’océan Indien, Fasano: Schena; Paris: Nizet. 1069.  Carita, Rui, 1997: “O Padre António Vieira e os colégios das Ilhas”, in Oceanos, nº 30/31, pp. 66 – 80. 1070.  Carita, Rui, 2001: «A Expansão Atlântica no Século XVI: A Provedoria das Obras de Álvaro Pires e as Ilhas Atlânticas», pp. 391-414, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 1071.  Carleton, Jones, 2004: The Burren and the Aran Islands: an archaeological guide, Cork: Collins Press, 2004. 1072.  Carneiro de Sousa, Ivo, 2001: “The Portuguese Colonization and the Problem of the East Timorese Nationalism”, in Lusotopie, pp.183-194. 1073.  Carneiro de Sousa, Ivo, 2001: “Timor dos Malai Sira?”, in Lusotopie, pp.135-140. 1074.  Carolyn Cartier and Alan A. Lew, 2005: Seductions of place: geographical perspectives on globalization and touristed landscapes, London; New York: Routledge. 1075.  Carpenter, Kevin, 1984: Desert isles & pirate islands: the island theme in nineteenth-century English juvenile fiction, a survey and bibliography, Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang. 1076.  Carr, Tony, 2004: “From Castlebellingham to the Bay of Islands: Lully Mathews, New Zealand’s first brick maker”, in Journal of the County Louth Archaeological (& Historical) Society, 25: 4 (2004), 471-474. 1077.  Carreira, António, 1982: Migrąções nas Ilhas de Caba Verde, London: C. Hurst; Hamden, Conn.: Archon Books. 1078.  Carreira, António, 1982: The people of the Cape Verde Islands: exploitation and emigration, translated from the Portuguese and edited by Christopher Fyfe, London: C. Hurst; Hamden, Conn.: Archon Books. 1079.  Carrier, James G.; Carrier, Achsah H., 1989: Wage, trade, and exchange, in Melanesia: a Manus society in the modern state, Berkeley: University of California Press. 1080.  Carrington, Lois, 1981: Twenty years of Pacific linguistics: an index of contributions to Pacific linguistic studies, 1961-1981, Canberra, A.C.T., Australia: Dept. of Linguistics,

2009

CEHA

61

Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. 1081.  Carrington, Lois, 2003: A Linguistic Bibliography of the New Guinea Area, Australia, Australian National University’s Research School of Pacific & Asian Studies. 1082.  Carrington, Sean, 2007: A~Z of Barbados Heritage, Macmillan Caribbean Publishers Limited. 1083.  Carrington, Selwyn H.H., 2003: Capitalism & Slavery and Caribbean Historiography: An Evaluation, The Journal of African American History, Vol. 88. 1084.  Carter, Lee D., Ed. 1997: Guam History: Perspectives, University of Guam. 1085.  Carucci, Laurence Marshall, 1997: Nuclear nativit: rituals of renewal and empowerment in the Marshall Islands, DeKalb, Northern Illinois University Press. 1086.  Carucci, lm, 1987: Jekero: Symbolizing the transition to manhood in the Marshall Islands, Micronesica, vol. vol. 20, no 1-2, p. p. 1-17. 1087.  Carvalho, Alberto, 1995: Evasionismo, configuração existencial da insularidade caboverdiana, In: Coscienza nazionale nelle letterature africane di lingua portoghese, org. Piero Ceccucci. - Roma: Bulzoni, p. 9-23. 1088.  Carvalho, Isabel Maria Boavida, 1995: “Vida e Morte Florentina – A Sociedade da Ilha das Flores nos Séculos XVII – XVIII”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 73–80. 1089.  CAS, 2003: Madagascar Bibliography, California Academy of Sciences Library. Disponível online em url: http://research.calacademy.org/research/library/biodiv/biblio/mad2000.htm. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 1090.  Casa de Colon, 1955-2006: Anuário de Estúdios Atlânticos. Índice analítico de autores y Matérias (1955-2006), Madrid-Las Palmas, nº1-52. 1091.  Casabianca, F., 1998: Suds et îles de la Méditerranée, Paris, Publisud. 1092.  Casals, Lluís, 1990: Mediterranean houses: Balearic Islands, introduction, Martí Lucena, Salvador Roig, Barcelona: G. Gili. 1093.  Casanova y Todolí, Ubaldo de, 2004: Aproximación a la historia mallorquina del siglo XVII: política financiera y crisis de subsistencia, Salamanca: Amarú Ediciones. 1094.  Cass, Deborah, 1988: “A playground for imperialists”, in Pacific Islands Monthly, 59:10, 58. 1095.  Cassar, C., 1988: Everyday life in Malta in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries in The British colonial experience 1800-1964. The impact on Maltese society, Malta, Mireva Publications. 1096.  Cassar, C., 2000: Society, culture and identity in early modern Malta, Malta, Mireva Publications. 1097.  Castagnino Berlinghieri, Elena Flavia, 2003: The Aeolian Islands crossroads of the Mediterranean maritime routes: a survey on their maritime archaeology and topography from the prehistoric to the Roman periods, Oxford, England: Archaeopress. 1098.  Castel, Antoni, 1999:”Timor Este, al fin emancipado ? Breve apunte de las negociaciones sobre el futuro del territorio ocupado por Indonesia”, in Lusotopie, pp. 241-246. 1099.  Castelain, Jean-Pierre (Editeur scientifique); Meistersheim, Anne (Postface), 2006: Iles réelles, îles rêvées, Ethnologie Française, Juillet, vol. XXXVI, no 3, p. 389-508. 1100.  Castellani, Michel, 1999: Entre insularité et ouverture: une nouvelle géographie de la Corse: contribution à l’étude de la géographie humaine de la Corse: habilitation à diriger des recherches; mémoire placé sous la direction du Professeur Jean Robert Pitte, Mémoire

2009

62

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

ou thèse (version d’origine), Habilitation à diriger des recherches: Géographie: Paris 4. 1101.  Castellano Gil, José M. director de la colección; Martín, Francisco J. Macías, 1993: Historia de Canarias, [Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 1102.  Castilla, Juan Carlos, 1987: Islas oceánicas chilenas: conocimiento científico y necesidades de investigaciones, Santiago, Chile: Ediciones Universidad Católica de Chile. 1103.  Castelli, Antoine, 1995: L’insularité, la desserte aérienne entre le continent, le système de continuité territoriale, Mém. DESS : Transp. aér.: Aix-Marseille 3. 1104.  Castillo, Dennis A., 2006: The Maltese Cross: a strategic history of Malta, Westport, Conn.: Praeger Security International. 1105.  Castro Morales, Federico, 1992: La imagen de Canarias en la vanguardia regional: historia de las ideas artísticas, 1898-1930, prólogo, Alberto Darias Príncipe, La Laguna, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 1106.  Castro, Aníbal Pinto de, 1993: “De Montemor–O-Velho às Ilhas do Japão: A Peregrinação de Fernão Mendes Pinto e o Encontro de Culturas”, in Oceanos, nº 15, pp. 35 – 42. 1107.  Catalão, P.M., 1992: O motivo da ilha mítica na literatura medieval portuguesa, Tese de mestrado, Lisboa, Universidade Nova de Lisboa. 1108.  Cateura Bennàsser, Pau, 1997: Mallorca en el segle XIII, [Palma de Mallorca]; El Tall. 1109.  Cateura Bennàsser, Pau, 1998: El regne esvaït: desenvolupament econòmic, subordinació política, expansió fiscal (Mallorca 1300-1335), Mallorca, El Tall Editorial. 1110.  Cateura Bennàsser, Pau, editor, 2006: Comprar, vendre i pagar al rei: els impostos indirectes al Regne de Mallorca (segles XIV-XV): Palma de Mallorca, 10-11 d’octubre de 2005, Palma de Mallorca: El Tall Editorial. 1111.  Cathcart, Michael; Griffiths, Tom; Watts, Lee; Anceschi, Vivian; Houghton, Greg; Goodman, David, 1990: Mission to the South Seas: The Voyage of the Duff, 1796-1799, Parkville, Vic. 1112.  Caudwell, R. W., 2000: “A sustainable IPM system for oil palm in Papua New Guinea”, Brighton Crop Protection Conference Pests and Diseases, 1: 215-220. 1113.  Caudwell, R. W., 2000a: “Integrated Management of Insect Pests (Orthoptera: Tettigoniidae) of Oil Palm in Papua New Guinea”, Planter, 76(892): 393-408. 1114.  Caudwell, R. W., 2000b: “The successful development and implementation of an integrated pest management system for oil palm in Papua New Guinea” in Integrated Pest Management Reviews 5(4): 297-301. 1115.  Caudwell, R., 2001: “More IPM ‘tools’ for oil palm growers in Papua New Guinea”, in Appropriate Technology 28(1): 43-45. 1116.  Cauna, Alexandra de, 2006: Le multiculturalisme à l’Ile Maurice. Pour une lecture géographique, Géographie et cultures, no 58, p. 67-82. 1117.  Cawley, David and Frederick Sharpe, 2007: The church bells of the Channel Islands; Hampshire: Insigne Press. 1118.  Cazes Duvat, Virginie; Paskoff, Roland (pref.), 1999: Les Littoraux des Iles Seychelles, Paris: L’Harmattan. 1119.  Cazes-Duvat, Virginie; Robert, René, 2001: Atlas de l’environnement côtier des îles granitiques de l’archipel des Seychelles, Saint Denis; Montpellier: Conseil Régional de La Réunion; Université de La Réunion; CIRAD-Emvt.

2009

CEHA

63

1120.  Cazes, Georges (dir.); Courade, Georges (dir.), 2004: Les masques du tourisme, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. 45, no 178, p. 247-386. 1121.  Cazes-Duvat, Virginie; Magnan, Alexandre, 2004: Les îles-hôtels, terrain d’application privilégié des préceptes du développement durable: l’exemple des Seychelles et des Maldives (Océan Indien), In Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.). Insularité, société et développement, Les Cahiers d’Outre Mer, vol. 57, no 225, pp. 75-100. 1122.  Cazes-Duvat, Virginie; Magnan, Alexandre, 2004a: L’île de Bird aux Seychelles: une exemple de développement durable? Saint-Denis; Paris: Université de La Réuinion; L’Harmattan. 1123.  CEA, 1997: La Caraïbe: des îles au continent, Cahiers d’Études Africaines, n°148, p. 7591022. 1124.  CEGET, 1987: “Actes du colloque de Bordeaux-Talence, Iles tropicales: insularité, insularisme “ in Iles et archipels, CEGET. 1125.  CEGET, 1989: Iles et tourisme en milieux tropical et subtropical, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France; CEGET: Centre d’Etude de Géographie Tropicale; CRET: Centre de Recherches sur les Espaces Tropicaux. 1126.  CEHA, 1993: III Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira. Actas, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura- Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico. 1127.  CEHA, 2005: As ilhas e a história da ciência, Funchal, CEHA. 1128.  Céitinn, Seosamh, 1992: Tomás Oileánach: fear idir dhá thraidisiún, Baile Átha Cliath [Dublin]: An Clóchomhar Tta. 1129.  Celimène, F. ; Watson, P., 1991: Économie politique caribéenne, Paris, Economica. 1130.  Celimène, F.; Lacour, C. (dir.), 1997: L’intégration régionale des espaces, Paris, Economica. 1131.  Centeno, coordenação de Yvette Kace e Lima de Freitas, 1991: A simbólica do espaço: cidades, ilhas, jardins / [colóquio organização pelo o Gabinete de estudos de simbologia da Universidade nova de Lisboa em colab. com o Cine-Forum de Funchal, 21 a 23 de abril 1987]; Lisboa: Editorial Estampa. 1132.  Cervantes-Rodríguez, edited by Margarita, Ramón Grosfoguel, and Eric Mielants, 2009: Caribbean migration to Western Europe and the United States: essays on incorporation, identity, and citizenship, Philadelphia: Temple University Press. 1133.  Cerveau, Marie Pierre, 1998: L’horticulture commerciale dans les iles du Vent, archipel de la Societe, Polynesie francaise: une activite d’avenir. Les Cahiers d’Outre Mer, 1998/06, vol. vol. 51, no 202, p. p. 141-156. 1134.  Cerveau, Marie-Pierre, 2001: Les Îles Marquises: insularité et développement, [publ.] par le Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux de l’Université Michel de Montaigne, Bordeaux 3; UMR 5064, DYMSET, Dynamique des milieux et des sociétés dans les espaces tropicaux, [Pessac]: CRET. 1135.  Cerveau Marie-Pierre, 2002: Les îles Marquises.Insularité et développement, Iles et archipels n° 31, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 1136.  Chacourou Abal Anrabe, Abdou, 1992: Le contrôle des finances publiques aux Comores, Paris: L’Harmattan. 1137.  Chagnoux, Herve; Haribou, Ali, 1980, 1990: Les Comores, 2. ed., Paris: PUF, 1990. 1138.  Chakraborty, Dilip Kumar, 1990: The Great Andamanese, struggling for survival, Calcutta: Seagull Books on behalf of the Anthropological Survey of India.

2009

64

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1139.  Chakravarty, I., 2001: Tourism development in small islands: A case study of Elephanta Island, Maharashtra, India, Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp. 15-24. 1140.  Chaminade, Agnès, 1992: Tourisme et environnement dans les petits états insulaires tropicaux, Bordeaux: Universite Michel de Montaigne 3, Institut de Geographie Louis Papy, 1992. 1141.  Chand, edited by Satish, 1998: Productivity performance in the South Pacific islands, Canberra: Asia Pacific Press, National Centre for Development Studies, Asia Pacific School of Economics and Management, Australian National University. 1142.  Chand, Satish ed., 2005: Pacific Islands regional integration and governance, Canberra: Asia Pacific Press at the Australian National Unuiversity. 1143.  Chandonnet, Fern, edited by. 1995: Alaska at war, 1941-1945: the forgotten war remembered: papers from the Alaska at War Symposium, Anchorage, Alaska, November 11-13, 1993, Alaska at War Symposium (1993: Anchorage, Alaska) Anchorage, Alaska: Alaska at War Committee. 1144.  Chandra, R.; Ward, G., 1997: “Fidji, un nouveau départ: développement et problème ethnique”, Tiers-Monde, n°149, p.157-176. 1145.  Chandra, Satish; Arunachalam, B.; Suryanarayan, V. edited by. 1993: The Indian Ocean and its islands: strategic, scientific, and historical perspectives, New Delhi; Newbury Park: Sage Publications. 1146.  Chane Kune, Sonia, 1991: Identite Reunionaise, Analyse Geopolitique; Sous La Direction De Yves Lacoste, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Paris 8. 1147.  Chanel-Tisseau des Escotais, Josette, 2004: Culture et mythologies des îles Canaries, Paris, Harmattan. 1148.  Chaney, Edward, 2000: “British and American Travellers in Sicily from the eighth to the twentieth century”, The Evolution of the Grand Tour, Routledge. 1149.  Chang, T. C., 1998: “Regionalism and Tourism Exploring Integral Links in Singapore”, Asia Pacific Viewpoint, n°1, p. 73-94. 1150.  Chanteraud, Annabel R., 2001: La Saga du Kava. Du Vanuatu à la Nouvelle-Calédonie, Pessac, Cret, Dymset. 1151.  Chanudet, C.; Rakotoarisoa, J.-A., 2000: Mohéli: Une île des Comores à la recherche de son identité, Paris, L’Harmattan. 1152.  Chapin, John C., 1994: Breaching the Marianas: the battle for Saipan, Washington, D.C.: History and Museums Division, Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps. 1153.  Chapin, John C., 1994: Breaking the outer ring: Marine landings in the Marshall Islands, Washington, D.C.: History and Museums Division, Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps. 1154.  Chapman, Murray; Prothero, Mansell, ed. 1985: Circulation in population movement: substance and concepts from the Melanesian case, cartography by Alan G. Hodgkiss. 1155.  Chapman, William, 1986: Historic churches of the Virgin Islands, foreword by Frederik Gjessing, [Christiansted?], Saint Croix Landmarks Society. 1156.  Chappell, D., 1992: Shipboard relations between Pacific Island women and Euroamerican men,1767-1887, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 27, No 2, pp.131-149. 1157.  Chappell, D., 1994: Secret sharers; indigenous beachcombers in the Pacific Islands, PS, Vol 17/2, pp.1-22.

2009

CEHA

65

1158.  Chappell, D., 1995: Active agents versus passive victims; decolonised historiography or problematic paradigm, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 7, No 2, pp.302-326. 1159.  Chappell, D., 1997: Double Ghosts - Oceanian Voyagers on Euroamerican Ships,New York, ME Sharpe. 1160.  Chappell, D., 2000: The forgotten Mau; anti-Navy protest in American Samoa 1920-1935, Pacific Historical Review, 69, 2, 217-60. 1161.  Chappell, David, 2007: Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, Oceania, Vol. 77. 1162.  Chardon, J. P.; Girault, C. (ed.). 1983: Les Antilles aujourd’hui, économie et géographie In les transports aeriens et maritimes, miroir de l’extraversion economique: resume, Bordeaux: CEGET. 1163.  Chardon, Jean-Pierre, 1987: L’avion dans les Antilles. Géographie des transports aériens des îles de la Caraïbe, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 1164.  Chardon, Jean Pierre; Hartog, Thierry, 1995: Saint-Barthelemy: un choix et ses limites, In: Iles tropicales, Les Cahiers d’Outre Mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, pp. 261-276. 1165.  Chardon, J-P., 1998: “L’avion et les îles” in Géode Caraïbe. Quels transports dans les petites îles caraïbes ?, Paris, Karthala, p. 54-60. 1166.  Charles, Bertram L., 2004: Alien in paradise: time for healing in the U.S. Virgin islands, Eugene, Or., ACW Press. 1167.  Charles, E. (ed.), 1997: A future for small states. Overcoming vulnerability, Londres, Commonwealth Secretariat. 1168.  Charlton, Michael, 1989: The long struggle for the Falklands, Oxford. 1169.  Chasek, (P.), 2005: «Margins of Power: Coalition Building and Coalition Maintenance of the South Pacific Island States and the Alliance of Small Island States», RECIEL, 14(2), p. 125-137. 1170.  Chatan, Robbin, 2003: ‘The Governor’s vale levu Architecture and Hybridity at Nasova House, Levuka, Fiji Islands’, International Journal of Historical Archaeology, 7:4, 267-92. 1171.  Chaudenson, Robert, 1992: Des iles, des hommes, des langues: essai sur la creolisation linguistique et culturelle, Paris: l’Harmattan. 1172.  Chauris, Louis, 1992: Problèmes d’insularité: origine des pierres de construction à Ouessant (Finistère, France), Norois, no153, p. 45-55. 1173.  Chauvet, Lisa, Paul Collier and Anke Hoeffler, Paradise Lost: The Costs of State Failure in the Pacific, No UNU-WIDER Research Paper RP2007/16, Working Papers from World Institute for Development Economic Research (UNU-WIDER). Disponível online em url: http://ideas.repec.org/p/unu/wpaper/rp2007-16.html. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009. 1174.  Chauvet, Stéphen, 1935, 2005: Easter Island and its Mysteries, Disponível online em url: http://www.chauvet-translation.com/. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 1175.  Chauvin, Michael E., 1993: Astronomy in the Sandwich Islands: the 1874 transit of Venus, Hawaiian Journal of History, 27, 185-225. 1176.  Chavigny, B. de, 1988: Le tourisme dans la Caraibe insulaire, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Mem. Dea: Geogr.: Bordeaux 3. 1177.  Chawla, Sumedha, Pandit, T. N., 1981: Bibliography on Andaman and Nicobar Islands: covering anthropology, biology, geography, geology, history, statistics, etc. T.N., Calcutta: Anthropological Survey of India, Govt. of India.

2009

66

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1178.  Chazan-Gillig, Suzanne, 2004: Insularité et mondialisation: Diasporas et créolisation de la société mauricienne contemporaine, in Journal des anthropologues, no 96-97, pp. 321339. 1179.  CHEAM: Centre des Hautes Etudes sur l’Afrique et l’Asie Modernes, 1986: La Reunion dans l’Ocean Indien, Paris, France. 1180.  Cheape, Hugh, 1993: The “straight spade” of the Highlands and Islands, In Cheape, Hugh (ed.), Tools and traditions: studies in European ethnology, presented to Alexander Fenton, Edinburgh: National Museums of Scotland, 76-84. 1181.  Chen Henry C. L.; Hay, Pete, 2006: “Defending Island Ecologies: Environmental Campaigns in Tasmania and Taiwan”, in Journal of Developing Societies, vol. 22: pp. 303 - 326. 1182.  Chen, Xinxiong, 1985: Penghu Song Yuan tao ci = Shards of the Sung and Yüan period found in the Pescadores Islands, [Magong zhen?], Penghu xian li wen hua zhong xin, min guo 74. 1183.  Chenoweth, Michael, Thomas Thistlewood, 2003: The 18th Century Climate of Jamaica: Derived from the Journals of Thomas Thistlewood, 1750-1786, DIANE Publishing. 1184.  Chen-Young, P., 1982: Tourism in the economic development of small states: Jamaica’s experience. In: Jalan, B. (ed) Problems and Policies in Small Economies. London: St. Martin’s, pp. 221-229. 1185.  Chernichovsky, D.; Meesook, O.A., 1981: Regional aspects of family planning and fertility behavior in Indonesia, World Bank staff working paper, no 462, p. p. 1-62. 1186.  Chernichovsky, D.; Meesook, O.A., 1984: Poverty in Indonesia, World Bank staff working paper, no 671, p. p. 1-56. 1187.  Cherry, John F.; Davis, J.L.; Mantzourani, E., 1991: Landscape archaeology as long-term history: northern Keos in the Cycladic Islands from earliest settlement until modern times, with contributions by J. Bennet ... [et al.], Los Angeles: UCLA Institute of Archaeology. 1188.  Chérubini, Bernard (Directeur de publication), [et al], 2004: Le territoire littoral: Tourisme, pêche et environnement dans l’océan Indien, Université de la Réunion, Faculté des lettres et des Sciences Humaines, CREGUR, Centre de Recherches et d’Etudes en Géographie de l’Université de la Réunion (Saint-Denis), Paris; L’Harmattan. 1189.  Chesneaux, Jean, 1987: Transpacifiques: observations et considérations diverses sur les terres et archipels du grand ocean, Paris: La Découverte. 1190.  Chesneaux, Jean; Maclellan, Nic, 1992: La France dans le Pacifique: de Bougainville a Moruroa, Paris: La Decouverte. 1191.  Cheung, Catherine and DeVantier, Lyndon, 2006: Socotora: a natural history of the islands and their people, Hong Kong: Odyssey. 1192.  Cheuvel, Richard, 1990: Nationalists, Soldiers, and Separatists: the Ambonese Islands from Colonialism to Revolt, 1880-1950, Leiden, Netherlands: KITLV Press. 1193.  Chewings, Hannah, 1900: Mongst tropical islands, or, notes and observations made during a visit ... in 1899 to New Guinea, New Britain and the Solomon Islands, Adelaide, Australia. 1194.  Chiang, Hung-Min, 2006: Chinese Islanders: Making a Home in the New World. Charlottetown: Island Studies Press. 1195.  Chin Chin Yoon, 2003: Potential For Conflict In The Spratly Islands, Master Of Arts In Security Studies (Security Building In Post-Conflict Environments), From The Naval Postgraduate School. Disponível online em url: http://www.ccc.nps.navy.mil/research/ theses/Chin03.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.

2009

CEHA

67

1196.  Chinnery, S. 1998: Malaguna Road; the Papua and New Guinea Diaries of Sarah Chinnery, Canberra, National Library of Australia. 1197.  Chiōtēs, Panagiōtēs, 1980: Historia tou Ioniou Kratous apo systaseōs autou mechri henōseōs, etē 1815-1864, Athēna: Vivliopōleio D.N. Karavia. 1198.  Chiōtēs, Panagiōtēs, 1980a: Historika apomnēmoneumata Heptanēsou, Athēna: Vivliopōleio D.N. Karavia. 1199.  Chittick, N.,... [et al.], 1983: Relaciones históricas a través del océano Índico; informe y documentos de trabajo de la reunión de expertos sobre “Los contactos históricos entre África oriental por una parte y el sureste asiático por otra, a través del océano Índico,” Mauricio, 15-19 de julio de 1974 / Barcelona: Serbal; Paris: Unesco. 1200.  Chiu, Hungdah, 1999: analysis of the Sino-Japanese dispute over the T’iaoyutai Islets (Senkaku Gunto), Baltimore, Md., University of Maryland School of Law. 1201.  Chomsky, Noam, 1999: “La tragédie au Timor oriental et l’attitude des États-Unis”, in Lusotopie, pp. 247-252. 1202.  Chon, K.C. and Oppermann, M., 1996: Tourism development and planning in Philippines, Tourism Recreation Research, 21(1), pp.35-43. 1203.  Chowning, Ann, 1980 Culture and biology among the Sengseng of New Britain,The Journal of the Polynesian Society, 89(1):7-31. 1204.  Chowning, Ann, 1980: Self-Esteem and drinking in Kove, West New Britain, in Mac Marshall, ed. Through a Glass Darkly: Beer and Modernization in Papua New Guinea. Boroko, PNG: Institute of Social and Economic Research, Pp. 365-378. 1205.  Chowning, A., 1981: Report on research in Sengseng, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea November 1980-February 1981, Victoria University of Wellington, NZ (mimeo). 1206.  Chowning, Ann with Pamela Swadling 1981. Shellfish gathering at Nukakau Island, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes. L37 (No 72-73)d:159-67. 1207.  in Mac Marshall, ed. Through a Glass Darkly: Beer and Modernization in Papua New Guinea. Boroko, PNG: Institute of Social and Economic Research. 1208.  Chowning, A., 1983: “Interaction between Pidgin and three West New Britain languages”, in Pacific Linguistics A-65: 191-206. 1209.  Chowning, A., 1984: “Culture and biology among the Sengseng of New Britain” in Journal of the Polynesian Society, 89(1): 7-31. 1210.  Chowning, Ann, 1983: Inspiration and conventionalization in Lakalai painting. Pp. 91104 in S.M. Mead & B. Kernot, eds. Art and Artists in the Pacific. Palmerston North:The Dunmore Press. 1211.  Chowning, Ann, 1984: Culture and biology among the Sengseng of New Britain, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 89(1): 7-31. 1212.  Chowning, A.1985: Rapid lexical change and aberrant Melanesian languages: Sengseng and its neighbours Pacific Linguistics C-88: 169-198. New York: Gordon and breach. 1213.  Chowning, A., 1985a: Kove women and violence: the context of wife-beating in a West New Britain society. S. Toft, Ed. Domestic Violence in Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea Law Reform Commission Monograph No. 3. Port Moresby, PNG Law Reform Commission, pp. 72-91. 1214.  Chowning, A., 1985b: Patterns of infant feeding in Kove (West New Britain, Papua New

2009

68

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Guinea), 1966-1983, L. B. Marshall, Ed. Infant Care and Feeding in the South Pacific. London, Gordon and Breach, pp. 171-188. 1215.  Chowning, A., 1986: The development of ethnic identity and ethnic stereotypes on Papua New Guinea plantations, Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 42(82-3): 153-162. 1216.  Chowning, Ann, 1986a: Refugees, traders, and other wanderers: the linguistic effects of population mixing in Melanesia, in P. Geraghty, L. Carrington, and S.A. Wurm, eds. FOCAL II: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics. Pacific Linguistics C-94. Canberra: Australian National University, pp. 407-434. 1217.  Chowning, A., 1987: A note on underestimating female age in lowland Papua New Guinea, T. McDevitt, Ed., The Survey Under Difficult Conditions: Population Data Collection and Analysis in Papua New Guinea. New Haven, HRAFlex, pp. 239-242. 1218.  Chowning, A., 1987a: “Sorcery and the social order in Kove”, in Michele Stephen, ed. Sorcerer and Witch in Melanesia. Melbourne: Melbourne University Press, Pp. 149-182. 1219.  Chowning, Ann, 1987b: “Women are our business”: women, exchange and prestige in Kove. in Marilyn Strathern, Ed., Dealing with Inequality. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. pp. 130-149. 1220.  Chowning, A., 1988: Family fertility decisions among the Kove. In Nancy McDowell, Ed. Reproductive Decision-making and the Value of Children in Rural Papua New Guinea, Monograph 27. Port Moresby, IASER. 1221.  Chowning, A., 1989: The doctor and the curer: medical theory and practice in Kove, in S. Frankel and G. Lewis, Eds. A continuing trial of treatment, Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic Publ., pp 217-247. 1222.  Chowning, Ann, 1989a: Sex, shit, and shame: changing gender relations among the Lakalai. Pp. 17-32 In Mac Marshall and John L. Caughey, eds., Culture, Kin and Cognition: Essays in Honor of Ward H. Goodenough. Special Publication No. 25. American Anthropological Association. 1223.  Chowning, Ann, 1990: “God and ghosts in Kove”, Pp. 33-59 in John Barker, Ed. Christianity in the Pacific, Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania, Lanham, MD: University Press of America. 1224.  Chowning, Ann, 1991: Lakalai and Sengsentp in Encyclopedia of World Cultures, Vol 2: Oceania. Boston: G.K. Hall, pp. 139-43; 295-98. 1225.  Chowning, Ann, 1996: “Relations among languages of West New Britain: an assessment of recent theories and evidence” in M.D. Ross, ed. Studies in Languages of New Britain and New Ireland, 1: Austronesian Languages of the North New Guinea Cluster, In Northwestern New Britain. Pacific Linguistics, C-135, pp. 7-62. 1226.  Chowning, Ann, 1997: Changes in Housing and Residence Patterns in Galilo, New Britain, 1918-1992, In Jan Rensel and Margaret Rodman, Home in the Islands: Housing and Social Change in the Pacific. Honolulu; University of Hawaii Press, pp. 79-102. 1227.  Choy, Dexter J. L.. 1984: Tourism and Development: The Case of American Samoa, Annals of Tourism Research, 11:573-590. 1228.  Choy, D. J. L., 1991: National tourism planning in the Philippines, Tourism Management, 12(3), pp.245-252. 1229.  Choy, D.J.L., 1992: Life cycle models for Pacific island destinations, Journal of Travel Research, 30(3), pp.26-31. 1230.  Christensen, J. and D. R. J. Densley (n.d.), 1986: Oil palm, D. R. J. Densley, Ed. Agriculture

2009

CEHA

69

in the Economy: A Series of Review Papers, Volume 2. Port Moresby, Department of Primary Industry. 1231.  Christensen, J., 1986: “The development of the oil palm industry in Papua New Guinea: past, present and future”, in Harvest, 11(4): 136-141. 1232.  Christenson, A. E., 1984: Boats and boatbuilding in western Norway and the Islands, In Fenton, Alexander; Pálsson, Hermann (ed.), The Northern and Western Isles in the Viking world: survival, continuity and change (Edinburgh), 85-95. 1233.  Christmann, Helmut; Hempenstall, Peter; Ballendorf, Dirk Anthony, 1991: Die KarolinenInseln in deutscher Zeit: eine kolonialgeschichtliche Fallstudie, Münster: Lit. 1234.  Chubrétovich A., Carlos (Chubrétovich Alvarez), 1986: Las islas Falkland o Malvinas: su historia, la controversia argentino-británica y la guerra consiguiente, [Santiago, Chile?]: Editorial La Noria. 1235.  Chung, Margaret, 1993: Population and sustainable development in Pacific Island countries, Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program. 1236.  Churchill, Ward, 1998: A Little Matter of Genocide: Holocaust and Denial in the Americas 1492 to the Present, City Light Books. 1237.  Chytērēs, Ger., 1982: Hē politikē tōn endoseōn: mia phasē tēs historias tou Ionikou Kratous, Kerkyra: Hetaireia Kerkyraikōn. 1238.  Ciaccio, Cândida, 1984: Turismo e microinsularità: Le isole minori della Sicília, Bologna: Pàtron. 1239.  Cichon, D., 1989: British Dependencies: British Virgin Islands, Anguilla, and Montserrat in Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional study, The Division (Washington, D.C.). 1240.  Cichon, D., 1989a: British Dependencies: The Cayman Islands and the Turks and Caicos Islands in Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional study (pp. 561-582), S.W. Meditz, D.M. Hanratty (eds.). Washington DC: GPO. 1241.  Cichowski, Catherine, 1987: Archeologie Et Histoire De Siphnos A Travers Les Temoignages Litteraires, Epigraphiques, Les Recits Des Voyageurs Et Une Enquete Sur Le Terrain; Sous La Direction De Andre Laronde, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de 3e cycle: HISTOIRE: Paris 4. 1242.  Cidolit, S. (these), 1986: Les industries et l’industrialisation aux Antilles, Universite de Bordeaux 3, 1986. 1243.  Cilento, R. W., 1928: The causes of the depopulation of the Western Islands of the Territory of New Guinea, Canberra, Government Printer. 1244.  Cillaurren, Espérance, Gilbert David, René Grandperrin; préf. du Pr François Doumenge, 2001: Atlas des pêcheries côtières de Vanuatu: un bilan décennal pour le développement =Coastal fisheries atlas of Vanuatu: a 10-year development assessment, Paris: IRD éd.. 1245.  Ciolek, T. Matthew, 2000-2006: The AnthroGlobe Bibliographies, Asian Studies WWW VL/ Pacific Studies WWW VL. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/ Biblio/biblio_fiji1.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. Obs.: lista bibliográfica sobre Antropologia nas ilhas Fidji, que faz parte de AnthroGlobe (url: http://coombs.anu.edu. au/Biblio/biblio_index.html). [Obs.: Faz parte de Coombsweb: The Asian Studies Server, a scholarly information system of the Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National University, Canberra, Australia. Informação bibliográfica sobre a área de Antropologia sobre as ilhas: Cook Islands, East Timor, Fiji, Madura (Indonesia),

2009

70

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Polynesian Outlier, Tonga.]. 1246.  Ciolino, Caterina, 1995: Atlante dei beni storico-artistici delle Isole Eolie, Messina: Edizioni Dr. Antonio Seameni. 1247.  Cirer i Costa, Joan-Carles, 2006: El turisme a les Balears (1900-1950), Palma: Edicions Documenta Balear. 1248.  Clair, Sylvie, Marie-Pascale Mallé, 2001: Les îles du Salut: Guyane, [French Guiana], Ibis rouge éditions, 2001. 1249.  Clark, Byron, 2000: Gleanings on the Magdalen Islands, [Magdalen Islands, Quebec], B. Clark. 1250.  Clark, E., 2004: ‘The Ballad Dance of the Faeroese: Island Biocultural Geography in an Age of Globalization’, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 284-297. 1251.  Clark, E., Johnson, K., Lundholm, E. & Malmberg, G., 2007: Island Gentrification and Space Wars, in G. Baldacchino (ed.), A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Charlottetown & Malta, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island & Agenda Publishers, pp. 483-512. 1252.  Clark, Eric, 2004: “The Ballad Dance Of The Faeroese: Island Biocultural Geography In An Age Of Globalisation”, in Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, vol. 95, issue 3, pages 284-297. 1253.  Clark, G. 2005: A 3000-year culture sequence from Palau, western Micronesia, Asian Perspectives, 44: 349-380. 1254.  Clark, G. and Anderson, A. 2001: The pattern of Lapita settlement in Fiji, Archaeology in Oceania, 36: 77-88. 1255.  Clark, G. R., Anderson, A.J. and Vunidilo, T. (eds.) 2001: The Archaeology of the Lapita Dispersal in Oceania, Pandanus Press, Australian National University. 1256.  Clark, G. R. (ed.) 2003: Dumont d’Urville’s divisions of Oceania: Fundamental Precincts or Arbitrary Constructs?, Journal of Pacific History, 38(2). 1257.  Clark, Geoffrey, 2003: Shards of Meaning: Archaeology and the Melanesia-Polynesia Divide, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 38, No. 2, Dumont d’Urville’s Divisions of Oceania: Fundamental Precincts or Arbitrary Constructs? (Sep., 2003), pp. 197-215. 1258.  Clark, G. and Murray, T. 2006: Decay characteristics of the eastern Lapita design system, Archaeology in Oceania, 41: 107-117. 1259.  Clark, G. and Martinsson-Wallin, H., 2007: Monumental architecture in Western Polynesia: Origins, chiefs and archaeological approaches, Archaeology in Oceania, 42: 28-40. 1260.  Clark, Geoffrey, 2007: “Culture contact in the Palau Islands, 1783”, in Journal of Pacific History, 42:1, 89-97. 1261.  Clark, G., Burley, D. and Murray, T. 2008: Monumentality in the development of the Tongan maritime chiefdom, Antiquity, 82(318): 994-1004. 1262.  Clark, G.R., Leach, F. and O’Connor, S. (eds.) 2008a: Islands of Inquiry: Colonisation, seafaring and the archaeology of maritime landscapes, Terra Australis, 29. Canberra, ANU E Press. 1263.  Clark, R., 1994: Moriori and Māori: The Linguistic Evidence. In Sutton, Douglas G. (Ed.) Sutton, Douglas G., 1994: The Origins of the First New Zealanders. Auckland: Auckland University Press.

2009

CEHA

71

1264.  Clark, Wallace, 1988, 1993: Rathlin: its island story, 2nd edition. Limavady: North-West Books. 1265.  Clarke C. (dir.); Ley, D. (ed.); Peach, C. (ed.); 1984: Geography and ethnic pluralism, In Pluralism and plural societies: Carribean perspectives, Londres: Allen and Unwin. 1266.  Clarke C. (dir.); Payne, T. (dir.), 1987: Politics, security and development in small states, Londres: Allen and Unwin. 1267.  Clarke, C. and Payne, T., 1987: Introduction in Clarke, C. and T. Payne (eds), Politics, Security and Development in Small States, UK, Allen and Unwin Clarke, C. (ed.), 1991: Society and politics in the Caribbean, Basingstoke: Macmillan in association with St Antony’s College Oxford. 1268.  Clarke, C. G. and Payne, A., (eds.), 1987: Politics, Security and Development in Small States, London: Allen & Unwin. 1269.  Clarke, C., 1990: Europe in the Caribbean: from Colonial Hegemony to Geopolitical Marginality in Peace, development and Security in the Caribbean. 1270.  Clarke, A. R., S. Balagawi, B. Clifford, R. A. I. Drew, L. Leblanc, A. Mararuai, D. McGuire, D. Putulan, S. A. Sar and D. Tenakanai, 2002: “Evidence of orchid visitation by Bactrocera species (Diptera: Tephritidae) in Papua New Guinea”, Journal of Tropical Ecology, 18: 441-448. 1271.  Clarke, Nicholas, Bertrand Lettsome, 1989: Natural resources of the British Virgin Islands, [Road Town, Tortola, British Virgin Islands, W.I.]: Laurel Publications International. 1272.  Clarke, T., 2001: Searching for Crusoe: A Journey among the Last Real Islands, London, Little Brown. 1273.  Clarke, W.C. and Thaman, R.R. 1993: Agroforestry in the Pacific Islands: Systems for sustainability, United Nations University Press, Tokyo. 1274.  Clarke, Wallace. Harvey. Ros, 2005: slands of Connaught: paintings and stories from sailing the islands, Donaghadee, Co. Down: Cottage Publications. 1275.  Claval, Paul, cultural geography perspectives on islands and indigenous peoples. Disponível online em URL: http://sgo.pccu.edu.tw/GEOG/CHI/B/B1/chapters-culturegeog/A.pdf. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009. 1276.  Clayton, Daniel Wright, 2000: Islands of truth: the imperial fashioning of Vancouver Island , Vancouver : UBC Press. 1277.  Cleland, R., 1999: Across the decades, in Carrying the banner, Nedlands, UWA, pp.45-55 1278.  Clement, B.G., [compiled] by, 1989: Through Caribbean eyes: reflections on an era of independence, London, New York: ECA Associates. 1279.  Clement, Russell T., 1980: A bibliography of Mormonism in the Pacific: holdings in the BYU-HC Library Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies. 1280.  Clementi, Sir Cecil, 1937: A Constitutional History of British Guiana, London: Macmillan. 1281.  Cliff, A.D., Haggett, P. & Smallman-Raynor, M. R., 2000: Island Epidemics, Oxford, Oxford University Press. 1282.  Clifford, James, 1982: Person and myth: Maurice Leenhardt in the Melanesian world, Berkeley: University of California Press. 1283.  Clifford, J., 1997: The mahu goes native. Sexist or subversive? Gauguin’s South Seas visions and renegade hybrid style, Times Literary Supplement, November 7.

2009

72

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1284.  Clifford, J., 1997a: Travelling cultures, in Routes; travel and translation in the late twentieth century, Harvard Uni Press, Cambridge, pp.17-46. 1285.  Cling, J.-P., 1997: “De la coopération régionale à l’intégration économique”, Afrique contemporaine, n°184, p. 126-132. 1286.  Cluer, O., 1990: Working Paper J: Women-in-development. In: P. I. M. S. etc, Ed. Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project (Volume 3), Primary Industry Management Services Pty Ltd. 1287.  Clune, F., 1951: Somewhere in New Guinea, Sydney, Angus and Robertson. 1288.  CMF, 1998: Livro de Comunicações do Colóquio. As Ilhas e a Mitologia, Funchal, Departamento de Cultura da Câmara Municipal do Funchal. 1289.  CMF, 1999: Livro de Comunicações do Colóquio. Cultura de Periferias. Insularidades, Funchal, Departamento de Cultura da Câmara Municipal do Funchal. 1290.  CNDP, 1989: Actas do II Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, Funchal, Setembro de, Funchal, Comissão Nacional para a Comemoração dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 1291.  CNDP, 2001: Ilhas Fantásticas, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP. 1292.  CNRS PRODIG (Paris); IRD (Paris), Guillaud, Dominique (dir.); Huetz de Lemps, Christian (dir.); Sevin, Olivier (dir.); et all...2000: Iles rêvées: Territoires et identités en crise dans le Pacifique insulaire, Paris Paris: Prodig; Presses de l’Université de Paris-Sorbonne. 1293.  CNRS, 1980: “Actes du colloque du groupement d’intérêt scientifique sciences humaines sur l’aire méditerranéenne”, Iles de la Méditerranée, Aix-en-Provence: Ed. CNRS. 1294.  CNRS; 1987: “Actes du colloque de Bordeaux-Talence, Iles tropicales: insularité, insularisme “ in Iles et archipels, CEGET. 1295.  Coates, Richard, 1991: The ancient and modern names of the Channel Islands: a linguistic history, Stamford, 1991. 1296.  Cobb, S. C., 2001: ‘Globalization in a small island context: Creating and marketing competitive advantage for offshore financial centres’, Geografiska Annaler, vol. 83 B, 161-174. 1297.  Coccossis, H. and Parpairis, A., 1992: Assessing the interactions between environment and tourism: case study of the island of Mykonos. Paper presented in the IV World Congress of Regional Science International, University of Balearic Islands, Palma de Mallorca, pp.26-29. 1298.  Coccossis, H. and Parpairis, A., 1995: Assessing the interaction between heritage, environment and tourism: Mykonos, In: Coccossis, H. and Nijkamp, P. (eds) Sustainable Tourism Development. London: Avebury. 1299.  Coccossis, H. and Parpairis, A., 1996: Tourism and carrying capacity in coastal areas: Mykonos, Greece. In: Priestley, G.K., Edwards, J.A. and Coccossis, H. (eds) Sustainable Tourism? European Experiences, pp.153-175. Oxon: CAB. 1300.  Cochrane, James, 2007: Dewees: the island and its people, Charleston, SC: History Press. 1301.  Coconi, Luciana, 2007: ¿Islas Malvinas o Falkland Islands?: la cuestión de la soberanía sobre las islas del Atlántico Sur, Barcelona: Asociación para las Naciones Unidas en España. 1302.  Codrington, H. W., 1994: A Short History of Ceylon, New Delhi (Reprint. Asian Educational Services). 1303.  Cody, Martin L., 2006: Plants on islands: diversity and dynamics on a continental, Berkeley,

2009

CEHA

73

Calif.: University of California Press. 1304.  Coëffé, Vincent, 2005: Les Hawai’i saisies par la géo-graphie: l’espace utopique de Mark Twain, Cahiers de géographie du Québec, vol. 49, no 137, p. 225-240. 1305.  Coëffé, Vincent, 2005: Touristicité idéale. Hawaï, un parcours utopique, L’information géographique, vol. 69, no 4, p. 100-104. 1306.  Cohen, Anthony P. (Anthony Paul), 1987: Whalsay: symbol, segment, and boundary in a Shetland island community, Manchester [Greater Manchester], Wolfeboro, N.H.: Manchester University Press. 1307.  Cohen, Arlene compiled and edited, 1993: Directory of libraries, archives, and museums in Micronesia, Mangilao, Guam: University of Guam, Micronesian Area Research Center. 1308.  Cohen, Frederick E., 1998: The Jews in the Channel Islands during the German occupation 1940-1945, [London]: Institute of Contemporary History and Wiener Library in association with the Jersey Jewish Congregation. 1309.  Cohen, Getzel M., 1995: The Hellenistic settlements in Europe, the Islands, and Asia Minor, Berkeley: University of California Press. 1310.  Cohen, Robin, editor. 1983: African islands and enclaves, Beverly Hills: Sage Publications. 1311.  Colbert, Evelyn S., 1997: The Pacific Islands: paths to the present, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press. 1312.  Colchester, Marcus, 1997: “Guyana: fragile frontier”, in Race & Class, Apr 1997; vol. 38: pp. 33 - 56. 1313.  Cole R.V. and T.G. Parry, 1986: Selected issues in Pacific Island development: papers from the Island - Australia Project, Canberra, Australia, National Centre for Development Studies, Australian National University. 1314.  Cole, B., 2006: Taiwan’s Security: History and Prospects, Routledge. 1315.  Cole, eds., Rodney V. & Somsak Tambunlertchai 1993: The Future of Asia-Pacific economies: Pacific Islands at the crossroads?, Kuala Lumpur: Asian and Pacific Development Centre; [Canberra]: National Centre for Development Studies. 1316.  Coleman, Carol, Steven C. Smith, 1986: Life as a Peace Corps volunteer in the Republic of the Marshall Islands, Columbia, MD, Development through Self-Reliance, Inc.. 1317.  Coleman, D.; Underhill, G., 2002: Regionalism and global economic integration: Europe, Asia, and the Americas, Londres, Routledge. 1318.  Coleman, Deirdre, 2003: ‘Bulama and Sierra Leone: Utopian islands and visionary interiors’. In Edmond, Rod; Smith, Vanessa (ed.), Islands in history and representation, London: Routledge, 63-80. 1319.  Coleman, Tessa, 1995: Threads of history: the Jersey occupation tapestry, St Hellier: V. M. Promotions. 1320.  Conlin, V., Michael; Baum, Tom, eds, 1995: “Island Tourism: Management Principles and Practice”, in Journal of Travel Research, Vol. 34, No. 2, 70. 1321.  Collard, Sneed B., 2000: Lizard Island: science and scientists on Australia’s Great Barrier Reef, New York: Franklin Watts. 1322.  Collectif, 2001: “Regionalismo, comercio internacional y OMC”. Foro internacional, n°2, p. 237-392. 1323.  Colletta, Nat J., 1980: American schools for the natives of Ponape: a study of education

2009

74

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

and culture change in Micronesia, Honolulu: Published for the East-West Center by the University Press of Hawaii. 1324.  Colley, Ann C., 2004: Robert Louis Stevenson and the colonial imagination, Aldershot, England; Burlington, VT: Ashgate. 1325.  Colley, Linda, The ordeal of Elizabeth Marsh: a woman in world history, New York: Anchor Books. 1326.  Colli, Claudia; B.V.I. Tourist Board, 1983: Our British Virgin Islands: a cultural and historical tour of the British Virgin Islands, [S.l.]: British Virgin Islands Tourist Board. 1327.  Collins, Timothy, 1993: Praeger in the west: naturalists and the antiquarians in Connemara and the islands, 1894-1914, Journal of the Galway Archaeological and Historical Society, 45, 124-154. 1328.  Comeau, Paul, 1987: Economic Development and Cultural Survival in Coffey, William J. and Runte, Roseann, Local Development The Future of Isolated Cultural Communities and Small Economic Regions, Presse de L’Universite Saite-Anne, pp. 57-62. 1329.  Comissão para os direitos do povo Maubere, 2001:  “Les réfugiés de Timor oriental en Indonésie : l’affaire du « recensement » de mai-juin 2001”, in Lusotopie, pp. 243-253. 1330.  Commissaire général du plan, 2000: L’intégration régionale: une nouvelle voie pour l’organisation de l’économie mondiale ?, Bruxelles, De Boeck Université. 1331.  COMMISSION DES ILES, 1994: Pour une politique européenne des îles, Rennes, CRPM 1332.  Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands capital improvement strategy, fiscal years 1986-1992, [Saipan, Mariana Islands], The Commonwealth. 1333.  Commonwealth Secretariat, 2000: Small states: economic review. Londres, Commonwealth Secretariat. 1334.  Conan, coordination de la rédaction, Alain et Camilla, Stéphane 2008: Le mystère Lapérouse, ou le rêve inachevé d’un roi / Association Salomón, [avec le précieuse participation de Stéphane Camille], Paris: Conti. 1335.  Condominas, Georges, et all...1995: L’etranger intime. Melanges offerts a Paul Ottino: Madagascar, Tahiti, Insulinde, Monde Swahili, Comores, Reunion, saint andre la reunion: universite de la reunion, faculte des lettres et des sciences humaines. 1336.  Conférence des Nations Unies sur le commerce et le développement. Conseil du commerce et du développementk, 1983: Les Conséquences des catastrophes naturelles dans les pays en développement insulaires: étude établie par le Secrétariat de la C.N.U.C.E.D.; en collab. avec le Bureau du coordonnateur des Nations Unies pour le secours en cas de catastrophes. Conférence des Nations Unies sur le commerce et le développement, Conseil du commerce et du développement, New York: Nations Unies. 1337.  Conference Des Regions Peripheriques Maritimes, 1995: L’Europe des îles, Rennes, CRPM. 1338.  Congrés Internacional d’Estudis Històrics, 1992: Les Illes Balears i Amèrica, Palma de Mallorca, Spain, [Palma]: Institut d’Estudis Baleàrics. 1339.  Conkling, Philip W., 1981: Islands in time: a natural and human history of the islands of Maine, drawings by Katherine Hall Fitzgerald; photographs by George Putz, Jim Kosinski, and Rick Perry, Camden, Me. : Down East Books. 1340.  Conlin, M. & Baum, T.G., 1995: Island Tourism: Management Principles and Practice, Chichester, John Wiley & Sons.

2009

CEHA

75

1341.  Connell, John, 1983: Migration, employment, and development in the South Pacific: country report, Noumea, New Caledonia: South Pacific Commission. 1342.  Connell, J., 1987: Trouble in paradise; the perception of New Caledonia in the Australian Press, Australian Geographical Studies, Vol 25, 2, pp.54-65. 1343.  Connell, J., 1987a: New Caledonia or Kanaky? The political history of a French colony, Canberra. 1344.  Connell, John, 1988: Sovereignty & survival: island microstates in the third world, [Sydney]: Dept. of Geography, University of Sydney. 1345.  Connell, J., 1991: The new Micronesia: pitfalls and problems of dependent development, PS, vol.14 (2): 87-120. 1346.  Connell, John, Aldrich, Robert, 1991a: The Last Colonies: Failures of Decolonisation?, In Colonialism and Development in the Contemporary World, eds. DIXON, Christopher John; Heffernan, Michael J. (London and New York, 1991), 183-203. 1347.  Connell, John, 2000: “Migration and remittances in island microstates: a comparative perspective on the South Pacific and the Caribbean”, in International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, vol. 24, issue 1, pages 52-78. 1348.  Connell, John, 2002: Urbanisation in the Island Pacific: Towards Sustainable Development, John Lea; Routledge. 1349.  Connell, J., 2003: Island dreaming: The contemplation of Polynesian paradise, Journal of Historical Geography, 29 (4), 554–81. 1350.  Conolly, edited by James, Matthew Campbell, 2008: Comparative island archaeologies, Oxford: Archaeopress. 1351.  Conroy, John, 1987: Shelter for the homeless: Asian-Pacific needs and Australian responses, Canberra, Australian Council for Overseas Aid. 1352.  Constant, F., 1990: “Le fait insulaire et la C.E.E.”, Revue de Science Administrative de la Méditerranée Occidentale, nº spécial, p. 9-18. 1353.  Constant, F., 1992: “Alternative forms of decolonisation in the Eastern Caribbean: the comparative politics of the non-sovereign islands”, in The Political Economy of Small Tropical Islands, Hintjens, H.; Newitt, M., Exeter, University of Exeter Press, p. 51-63. 1354.  Constant, F.; Daniel, J., 1999: Politique et développement dans les Caraïbes, Paris, L’fharmattan. 1355.  Conte, Eric, 1988: Les Techniques De Peche Pre-Europeennes Et Leurs Survivances En Polynesie Francaise. L’exploitation Traditionnelle Des Ressources Marines A Napuka (Tuamotu-Polynesie Francaise); Sous La Direction De Jose Garanger, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),Thèse de doctorat: Histoire: Paris 1. 1356.  Conte, Eric, 1992: Tereraa: voyages et peuplement des iles du Pacifique, Papeete: Polymages Scoop. 1357.  Conte, Eric, 1997: La differenciation culturelle en Polynesie orientale. Propositions pour une interpretation alternative, journal de la societe des oceanistes, 1997, vol. vol. 105, no 2, p. p. 157-171. 1358.  Conte, Eric and Patrick Vinton Kirch, 2004: Archaeological investigations in the Mangareva Islands (Gambier Archipelago), French, Berkeley, CA: Archaeological Research Facility, University of California, Berkeley. 1359.  Convegno internazionale di studi (2000; Calasetta, Italie), 2001: Insularità linguistica e

2009

76

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

culturale: il caso dei Tabarchini di Sardegna: documenti del Convegno internazionale di studi, Calasetta, 23-24 settembre 2000 / a cura di Vincenzo Orioles e Fiorenzo Toso; premessa di Tullio De Mauro ; real. del comune di Calasetta con la collab. scientifica del Centro internazionale sul plurilinguismo, Università degli studi di Udine, Recco: le Mani. 1360.  Cook, Andrew S., 1989: Survey of the shores and islands of the Persian Gulf, 1820-1829, [Farnham Common]: Archive Editions. 1361.  Cook, Jonathan, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project: Working Paper A. Economic Situation, Primary Industry Management Services,Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) CARE Australia. 1362.  Cook, Linda A., 1991: World War II in the Aleutians [electronic resource]: alternatives for preservation and interpretation of historic resources at Dutch Harbor Naval Operating Base and Fort Mears, U.S. Army, national historic landmark, Unalaska, Alaska, Anchorage, Alaska: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, National Park Service, Alaska Regional Office. 1363.  Cooke, Steven; McLean, Fiona, 2002: “Picturing the nation: the Celtic periphery as discursive other in the archaeological displays of the Museum of Scotland”, in Scottish Geographical Journal, 118:4 (2002), 283-98 1364.  Cookson, Michael B. 2009: Overview of key reference resources related to the Indonesian province of Papua. Disponível online em url: http://www.papuaweb.org/bib/ papuabibs-090226.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 1365.  Cooley. Alexander. 2006: The Political Economy of Okinawa’s Antimilitarism, Armed Forces & Society, Vol. 32, No. 4, 566-583. 1366.  Coomans, Fr. Peter, 1997: History of the mission in the Mariana Islands, 1667-1673; translated and edited by Rodrigue Levesque, Northern Mariana Islands: Division of Historic Preservation, Dept. of Community and Cultural Affairs, Commonwealth of Mariana Islands. 1367.  Coombe, Jack D., 1991: Derailing the Tokyo Express: the naval battles for the Solomon Islands that sealed Japan’s fate, Harrisburg, PA: Stackpole Books. 1368.  Coombes, James, 2004: “The Margaret Hughes and the maritime traditions of Sherkin Island; from an article by Rev. James Coombes”, in Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula Historical and Archaeological Society], 12, 60-62. 1369.  Cooneratne, W.; Obudho, R. (eds), 1997: Comptemporary issues in regional development policy, Aldershot, Asghate. 1370.  Cooper, C. and Jackson, S., 1989: Destination life cycle. The Isle of Man case study, Annals of Tourism Research, 16(2), pp.377-398. 1371.  Cooper, C., 1995: Strategic planning for sustainable tourism: The case of the Offshore islands of the UK, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 3(4), pp.191-209. 1372.  Cooper, Derek, 1991: Road to the isle: travellers in the Hebrides, 1770-1914, New edn. Edinburgh. 1373.  Coppell, W. G., 1983: A bibliography of Pacific Island theses and dissertations,[Canberra?]: Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University, in conjunction with the Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University, Hawaii Campus: Distributed by University of Hawaii Press. 1374.  Copper, John F., 1990: Taiwan: Nation-State or Province, London: Westview Press. 1375.  Copper, John F., 2000: Historical Dictionary of Taiwan (Republic of China), 2d ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press.

2009

CEHA

77

1376.  Coppet, D.; Iteanu, A., 1995: Cosmos and society in Oceania, Oxford, Berg. 1377.  Corbett, Ben, 2004: This Is Cuba: An Outlaw Culture Survives. Westview Press. 1378.  Cordeiro Carlos, 1992: Insularidade e continentalidade: os Açores e as contradições da regeneração, 1851-1870, Livraria Minerva. 1379.  Cordeiro, Carlos; Madeira, Artur Boavida, 2004: Nos primórdios da emigração açoriana para o Canadá: Leituras e contextos, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 12, No. 2, 2004. 1380.  Cordy, Ross H., 1981: A study of prehistoric social change: the development of complex societies in the Hawaiian Islands, New York: Academic Press. 1381.  Cormerais, Jean-Pierre, 1988: Les îles infortunées, Paris. 1382.  Cornell, S. E., 2002: Autonomy and Conflict: Ethnoterritoriality and Separatism in the South Caucasus – Cases in Georgia, Uppsala: Department of Peace and Conflict research. 1383.  Cornu, Henri, 1980: Paris et Bourbon, la politique française dans l’océan Indien de 1664 à 1815: réflexions sur l’histoire de la Réunion; préface de Jean-François Sam Long, [SaintDenis]: Union pour la diffusion du livre réunionnais. 1384.  Coronato, Fernando R., 2004: “Connections between the Welsh colony in Patagonia and the Falkland Islands - the loss of the schooner Denby”, in Maritime Wales, 25, 100-103. 1385.  Coronese, Stefano, 1980: Una religione che muore: la cultura delle isole Mentawai nell’impatto con il mondo moderno, Bologna: Editrice missionaria italiana. 1386.  Corris, P., 1970: Pacific Island labour migrants in Queensland, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 5, 1970:43-64. 1387.  Cortazar, L. and Martin, C., 1999: Tourism and sustainable development from theory to practice: The island experience. Disponível online em url: http://www.insula.org/. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 1388.  Cosaert, Patrice (dir.); Bart, François (dir.). 2003: Patrimoines et développement dans les pays tropicaux, Pessac: DYMSET, pp. 135-148. 1389.  COSTA, João Paulo Oliveira e, 2001: Um oceano a explorar. A doação de ilhas desconhecidas pela coroa portuguesa no século XV, in in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP, pp.44-55. 1390.  Costa, Susana Goulart, 2001: «Para uma Outra Leitura das Escalas Insulares: A Religiosidade Micaelense no Decurso do Século XVII», pp. 161-182, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 1391.  Côté, Serge. 1996: Identité de développement des milieux insulaires, Groupe de recherche interdisciplinaire sur le développement régional, de l’Este du Québec, Université du Québec, Rimouski. 1392.  Cottrell, Philip Leonard, 2002:’Founding a multinational financial enterprise: Ionian Bank, 1833-1849’. In Kostis, Kostas P. (ed.), The creators and the creation of banking enterprises in Europe from the 18th to the 20th century, Athens: Alpha Bank Historical Archives. 1393.  Couillot, M.F.; Darlu, P.; Belaid, H., 1983: Evolution de l’alimentation aux iles marquises de la colonisation a nos jours, jatba, journal d’agriculture traditionnelle et de botanique appliquee, no 2, p. p. 111-126. 1394.  Coulcher, Patrick, 1999: The sun islands: a natural history of the Isles of Scilly, Sussex,

2009

78

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

England: Book Guild. 1395.  Coull, James R. (ed.), 1985: The county of Shetland (Third statistical account of Scotland, 22B). Edinburgh. 1396.  Coulter, Hugh, 1992: Commodity marketing institutions in the Pacific Islands: a case study of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby, Papua New Guinea: Institute of National Affairs. 1397.  Counihan, C. Food, 1981: Culture and political economy: an investigation of changing lifestyles in the Sardinian town of Bosa, Thèse de Philosophie: Massachusetts. 1398.  Counts, David R. and Dorothy Ayers Counts, 1982: Kandrian-Gloucester development study, West New Britain. Crown Agents, Consultants Report, National Planning Office, Port Moresby, PNG. 1399.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983: “1977 Independence and the rule of money in Kaliai” in Oceania 48:30-39. 1400.  Counts, David R. and Dorothy E. Counts, 1983-84: Aspects of dying in Northwest New Britain. In Special Section: Dying in Cross-Cultural Perspective. Peter H. Stephenson, ed. Omega 14:101-112. 1401.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983: Near-Death and out-of-body experiences in a Melanesian society, Anabiosis 3:115-135. 1402.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983-84: Aspects of dying in Northwest New Britain, In Special Section: Dying in Cross-Cultural Perspective. Peter H. Stephenson, ed. Omega 14:101-112. 1403.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983: Father’s water equals mother’s milk: the conception of parentage in Kaliai, West New Britain, In Concepts of Conception: Procreation Ideologies in Papua New Guinea. Dan Jorgenson, ed. Special Issue of Mankind 14:46-56. 1404.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1985: “The cultural construction of aging and dying in a Melanesian community”,in International Journal of Aging and Human Development, 20:231-242. 1405.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1985: I’m not dead yet! Aging and death, process and experience in Kaliai, in Aging and Its Transformations, Dorothy Ayers Counts and David R. Counts, eds. A.S.A.O. Monograph No. 10. Lanham, Md.: University Press of America. Reprinted 1992 by the University of Pittsburgh Press, Pittsburgh, Pp. 131-156. 1406.  Counts, David R. and Dorothy Ayers Counts, 1989: Complementarity in medical treatment in a West New Britain society, in A Continuing Trial of Treatment: Medical Pluralism in Papua New Guinea, Stephen Frankel and Gilbert Lewis, eds., Kluwer Academic Publishers. Dordrecht, pp. 277-294. 1407.  Counts, David R., 1989: “Shadows of war: changing remembrance through twenty years in New Britain”, in The Pacific Theater: Island Representation of World War II. White Geoffrey, and Lamont Lindstrom, eds. University of Hawaii Press, Honolulu HI, pp. 187 - 204. 1408.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1989: Complementarity in medical treatment in a West New Britain society, in A Continuing Trial of Treatment: Medical Pluralism in Papua New Guinea, Stephen Frankel and Gilbert Lewis, eds., Kluwer Academic Publishers. Dordrecht, pp. 277-294. 1409.  Counts, David R., 1990: “Too Many Bananas, not enough pineapple, and no watermelon at all” in The Humbled Anthropologist: Tales from the Pacific, Philip R. DeVita, ed. Wadsworth

2009

CEHA

79

Publishing, Belmont, CA, pp. 18-24. 1410.  Counts, C., Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1991: Loss and anger: death and the expression of grief in Kaliai, in Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying and Grieving, David R. Counts and Dorothy A. Counts, eds. Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood Press. pp. 191-212. 1411.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1991: ‘People Who Act LikeDogs’ adultery and deviance in a Melanesian community, In Deviance in Cross-cultural Perspective, special issue of Anthropologica, 33 (1-2):99-110, Richard A. Brymer and David Counts, eds. 1412.  Counts, David R. and Dorothy A. Counts, 1992: Exaggeration and reversal: clowning among the Lusi- Kaliai, in Clowning as Critical Practice: Performance Humor in the South Pacific, William Mitchell, ed. ASAO Monograph 13. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press, pp. 88-103. 1413.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1994: When Women Win: male-female disputing in Kaliai, West New Britain, In Law and Anthropology, International Yearbook for Legal Anthropology, Volume 7. Eds. René Kuppe and Richard Potz. Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff. To read this essay click on the blue words, pp. 331-352. 1414.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1998: Fictive Families in the Field, in Fieldwork and Families: Constructing New Models for Ethnographic Research. Juliana Flinn, Leslie Marshall and Jocelyn Armstrong eds. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, Pp 142-153. 1415.  Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 2000: Review of Cultures of Secrecy: Reinventing Race in Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults, Andrew Lattas.. Paideuma: Mitteilungen zur Kulturkunde 46:323-328. 1416.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1980: Akro and Gagandewa: a Melanesian myth, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 89(1):33-65. 1417.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1980a: Fighting Back is Not theWay: suicide and the women of Kaliai, American Ethnologist, 7(2):332-351. 1418.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1982: The Tales of Laupu: Stories from Kaliai, West New Britain. Told by Jakob Mua Laupu, Benedik Solou Laupu, and Maria Sapanga. Translated, transcribed, and with an Introduction by Dorothy Ayers Counts. Boroko: Institute of Papua New Guinea Studies. 1419.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1982a: A question of legitimacy: middlemen and change in West New Britain, in Middlemen and Brokers in Oceania, William Rodman and Dorothy Ayers Counts, eds. A.S.A.O. Monograph No. 9. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, Reprinted 1983 by University Press of America, Lanham, Md. Pp. 117-148. 1420.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1983: Father’s water equals mother’s milk: the conception of parentage in Kaliai, West New Britain. In Concepts of Conception: Procreation Ideologies in Papua New Guinea. Dan Jorgenson, ed. Special Issue of Mankind 14:46-56. 1421.  Counts, Dorothy E. Ayers, 1983a: Near-Death and out-of-body experiences in a Melanesian society, Anabiosis, 3:115-135. 1422.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1984: Revenge suicide by Lusi women: an expression of power, in Rethinking Women’s Roles: Perspectives from the Pacific, Denise O’Brien and Sharon Tiffany, eds. Berkeley: University of California Press, pp. 71-93. 1423.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1985: “Sweeping men and harmless women: responsibility and gender identity in later life”, in Aging in the Third World: Part II, Publication No. 23. Jay Sokolovsky, ed. Studies in Third World Societies, Williamsburg, VA: College of William

2009

80

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

and Mary, Pp. 1-26. 1424.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1985a: Infant care and feeding in West New Britain, in Infant Care and Feeding in the South Pacific, Leslie B. Marshall. New York: Gordon and Breach. Pp. 155-170, Also in Food and Nutrition in History and Anthropology, 3:155-170. 1425.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1985b: Tamparonga: The ‘big women’ of Kaliai (Papua New Guinea), In Her Prime, Judith K. Brown and Virginia Kerns, eds. Bergin and Garvey, Pp.49-64. 1426.  Counts, Dorothy A, and David R. Counts, 1985c: The cultural construction of aging and dying in a Melanesian community, International Journal of Aging and Human Development, 20:231-242. 1427.  Counts, Dorothy A. and David R. Counts, 1985d: I’m not dead yet! Aging and death, process and experience in Kaliai, in Aging and Its Transformations, Dorothy Ayers Counts and David R. Counts, eds. A.S.A.O. Monograph No. 10. Lanham, Md.: University Press of America. Reprinted 1992 by the University of Pittsburgh Press, Pittsburgh. Pp. 131-156. 1428.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1987: Female Suicide and Wife Abuse in cross cultural perspective. Suicide and Life Threatening Behavior 17(3):194-204. 1429.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1988: Ambiguity in the interpretation of suicide: female death in Papua New Guinea, in Why Women Kill Themselve s. David Lester, ed. Springfield IL: Charles Thomas, pp. 87-110. 1430.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1988a: Kaliai children: changes in family planning in a West New Britain society, In Reproductive Decision Making and the Value of Children in Rural Papua New Guinea, Nancy McDowell, ed. Boroko, Papua New Guinea: Institute of Applied Social and Economic Research, pp. 163-178. 1431.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1990: Abused women and revenge suicide: anthropological contributions for understanding suicide, In Current Concepts of Suicide, Philadelphia: The Charles Press, David Lester, ed. pp. 95-106. 1432.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1990a: Beaten wife, suicidal woman: domestic violence in Kaliai, West New Britain. In Special Issue: Domestic Violence in Oceania. Dorothy Ayers Counts, ed. Pacific Studies 13: 151-169. 1433.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1991: Aging Health and Women in West New Britain, J. of CrossCultural Gerontology, 6:277-285. 1434.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1991a: Loss and anger: death and the expression of grief in Kaliai. in Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying and Grieving. David R. Counts and Dorothy A. Counts, eds. Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood Press. pp. 191-212. 1435.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1991b: Suicide in Different Ages from a cross-cultural perspective. Pp. 215-230 in Life Perspectives of Suicide: Time-Lines in the Suicide Process, Antoon Leenaars, ed. New York: Plenum Press. 1436.  Counts, Dorothy E. and David R. Counts, 1991c: ‘People Who Act LikeDogs’ adultery and deviance in a Melanesian community, In Deviance in Cross-cultural Perspective, special issue of Anthropologica, 33 (1-2):99-110, Richard A. Brymer and David Counts, eds. 1437.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1992: All men do it: wife beating in Kaliai, Papua New Guinea, in Sanctions and Sanctuary: Cross-Cultural Perspectives on the Beating of Wives, Boulder, Colorado: Westview press, pp. 63-76. 1438.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1992a: Tamparonga: the ‘big women’ of Kaliai (Papua New Guinea).

2009

CEHA

81

In In Her Prime: New Views of Middle-Aged Women. Judith K. Brown and Virginia Kerns, eds., pp. 61-74. Second edition. Urbana: University of Illinois Press. 1439.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1992b: The fist, the stick and the bottle of bleach: wife bashing and female suicide in a Papua New Guinea Society, in Contemporary Pacific Societies: Studies in Development and Change, V. Lockwood, T. Harding, B. Wallace, eds. N.Y.: Prentice Hall, pp. 249-259. 1440.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1994: Snakes, adulterers, and the loss of paradise in Kaliai, In Children of Kilibob, special issue of Pacific Studies, Alice Pomponio, David R. Counts and Thomas G. Harding guest editors, Pacific Studies, 17: 109-151. 1441.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1994a: When Women Win: male-female disputing in Kaliai, West New Britain, In Law and Anthropology, International Yearbook for Legal Anthropology, Volume 7. Eds. René Kuppe and Richard Potz. Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff. pp. 331-352. 1442.  Counts, Dorothy E. Ayers and David R. Counts, 2000: Review of Cultures of Secrecy: Reinventing Race in Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults. Andrew Lattas. Paideuma: Mitteilungen zur Kulturkunde 46:323-328. 1443.  Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David Counts, 2004: The good, the bad, and the unresolved death in Kaliai, In Social Science & Medicine, 58: 887-897. 1444.  Couper, A.D., edited by, 1989: Development and social change in the Pacific islands, London; New York: Routledge. 1445.  Couraud, P., 1985: Origine et transformation de l’agriculture en Polynesie francaise: analyse economique du secteur agricole, Paris, Th. Doct. Ing.: Agron., INA - Institut National Agronomique, Paris, France. 1446.  Courtman, Sandra, 2004: Beyond the blood, the beach & the banana: new perspectives in Caribbean studies, Kingston, Jamaica: Ian Randle. 1447.  Covarrubias, Miguel, 1938: Island of Bali, New York: Knopf. 1448.  Covell, Maureen, 1987: Madagascar: Politics, Economics, and Society, New York: Covell, Maureen, 1995: Historical Dictionary of Madagascar, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press. 1449.  Covington, Paula H., ed., 1992: Latin America and the Caribbean: A Critical Guide to Research Sources. Bibliographies and Indexes in Latin American and Caribbean Studies, no. 2. New York: Greenwood Press. 1450.  Cox, edited by Paul Alan and Sandra Anne Banack, 1991: Islands, plants, and Polynesians: an introduction to Polynesian ethnobotany: proceedings of a symposium sponsored by the Institute of Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University--Hawaii Campus, Laie, Hawaii, Portland, Or.: Dioscorides Press. 1451.  Cox, G. Stevens, St Peter Port, 1680-1830: the history of an international entrepôt, Woodbridge, Rochester, NY, Boydell Press. 1452.  Coyne, T.; Badcock, J. (ed.); Taylor, R. (ed.). 1984: The effect of urbanisation and western diet on the health of Pacific Island populations, Noumea: Cps. 1453.  CPIS, 1989: The Contemporary Pacific, Honolulu, Hawaii: Center for Pacific Islands Studies & University of Hawaii Press. 1454.  CPIS, 2005: Pacific studies initiative. Syllabus and bibliography collection, the University of Hawai`i Center for Pacific Islands Studies and the East-West Center Pacific Islands Development Program (PIDP).UHM, Center for Pacific Island Studies. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.

2009

82

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1455.  Craddock, C. N., 1985: Rotuma: A Changing Mobility: 1978-1983, M. A. Thesis in Geography, Massey University, Palmerston North, New Zealand. 1456.  Craig, E. W. G., 1985: Destiny well sown: a biography of Lt.-Col. W.E. Gudgeon ..., Whakatane, N.Z.,Whakatane & District Historical Society. 1457.  Craig, Robert D., 2002: Historical dictionary of Polynesia, Lanham, Mass.: Scarerow Press, 2nd. Asian/Oceanian Historical Dictionaries, no.39. 1458.  Crain, Edward E., 1994: Historic architecture in the Caribbean Islands, Gainesville: University Press of Florida. 1459.  Craton, Michael and Saunders, Gail, 1992: Islanders in the Stream: A History of the Bahamian People. Volume One: From Aboriginal Times to the End of Slavery, Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press. 1460.  Craton, Michael and the New History Committee, 2003: Founded upon the Seas: A History of the Cayman Islands and Their People, Ian Randle Publishers, Kingston, Jamaica. 1461.  Craton, Michael, 1988-9: “Seeking a Life of Their Own: Aspects of Slave Resistance in the Bahamas”, in Indian Historical Review, 15:1-2, 96-115. 1462.  Craton, Michael; Saunders, D. Gail, 1990: “Seeking a Life of Their Own: Aspects of Slave Resistance in the Bahamas”, in Journal of Caribbean History, 24:1, 1-27. 1463.  Craton, Michael, 1996: The ambivalencies of independency: the transition out of slavery in the Bahamas, c.1800-1850, In McDonald, Roderick Alexander (ed.), West Indies accounts: essays on the history of the British Caribbean and the Atlantic economy in honour of Richard Sheridan (Kingston (Jamaica): The Press, University of the West Indies, 1996), 274-96. 1464.  Craton, Michael, 2002: ‘Loyalists mainly to themselves: the “Black Loyalist” diaspora to the Bahamas, 1783-c.1820’. In Shepherd, Verene A. (ed.), Working Slavery, Pricing Freedom : Perspectives from the Caribbean, Africa and the African Diaspora, Oxford: James Currey, 44-68. 1465.  Craton, Michael, 2002a: Pindling: the life and times of Lynden Oscar Pindling first Prime Minister of the Bahamas, 1930-2000, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean. 1466.  Creel, Margaret Washington, 1988: A peculiar people: slave religion and community-culture among the Gullahs, New York: New York University Press. 1467.  Crenshaw, Russell Sydnor, 1995: The Battle of Tassafaronga, [Baltimore, MD]: Nautical & Aviation Pub. Co. of America. 1468.  Crenshaw, Russell Sydnor, 1998: South Pacific destroyer: the battle for the Solomons from Savo Island to Vella Gulf, Annapolis, Md.,Naval Institute Press. 1469.  CRET, 1984: Nature et hommes dans les îles tropicales, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles et archipels”, n°3. 1470.  CRET, 1987: Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme: actes du colloque organisé à BordeauxTalence du 23 au 25 octobre 1986 / Groupe de recherche sur la viabilité des pays insulaires, Talence: Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux. 1471.  CRET, 1989: Îles et tourisme, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles et archipels”, n°10. 1472.  CRET, 2004: Les aires protégées insulaires et littorales tropicales, [organisé] par le Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux de l’Université Michel de Montaigne, Bordeaux 3 (CRET, Iles et archipels 32, 2004). 1473.  Cribb, Robert, 2000: Historical Atlas of Indonesia, London and Honolulu: Routledge Curzon

2009

CEHA

83

Press, University of Hawaii Press. 1474.  Crocombe, R. and Rajotte, F. (eds), 1980: Pacific Tourism as Islanders See it, Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies. 1475.  Crocombe, Rex, 1994: The Continuing Creation of Identities in the Pacific Islands: Blood, Behaviour and Belief, In: Hooson, David, Geography and National Identity, Blackwell, Oxford. 1476.  Crocombe, Ron; Ali, Ahmed, editors, 1982: Politics in Melanesia, contributors, Ahmed Ali ... [et al.], [Suva, Fiji]: Institute of Pacific Studies of the University of the South Pacific. 1477.  Crocombe, Ronald, & A. Ali (eds.) 1983: Foreign forces in Pacific politics, Suva. 1478.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1968, 1975, 1977, 1980: Improving Land Tenure, sole author, South Pacific Commission, Noumea. In 3 editions: complete in English (122 pp) & French (La Reforme des Regimes Fonciers). 1479.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1968, 1985, 1992, 1994: The Works of Ta’unga, joint author with Marjorie Tuainekore Crocombe, Australian National University Press & University Press of Hawaii. 1480.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1971, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1998: Land Tenure in the Pacific, Ed. & joint author, Oxford University Press. 1481.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1973, 1978, 1983, 1987, 1989, 1994: The South Pacific, sole author, Reed, Wellington & Australian National University Press, Canberra. 1482.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1975, 1977, 1980, 1982: The Pacific Way - Social Issues in Development, joint ed. & author with S.Tupouniua & C. Slatter, South Pacific Social Sciences Association, Suva. 1483.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1975, 1993: Holy Torture in Fiji, co-authored with 4 others, Pacific Publications, Sydney, Reprint 1993 by University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1484.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1976, 1978, 1980, 1982: The Pacific Way - An Emerging Identity, Lotu Pasifika, Suva. 1485.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1977, 1978, 1981, 1983, 1984: Pacific Courts & Justice, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific, Suva & Commonwealth Magistrates Association, London. 1486.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1977, 1984: Education for Rural Development: the Tutu Experiment & its Relevance in the Pacific, joint author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1487.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1978, 1980, 1995, 1996: Land Tenure in Niue, ed. & joint author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1488.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1980 - 1983: Land Tenure: Supplementary Readings, ed. with Howard Van Trease, University of the South Pacific Extension Services, Suva, 2 vols. 1489.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1980: Land tenure & land reform in the 1980s, in The Role of CASLE Professions in Rural Development in the South Pacific, Commonwealth Association of Surveying & Land Economy, London, pp. 62-69. 1490.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1980a: Bases for Pacific Cooperation: the Islands & the Rim, La Communidad del Pacifico en Perspectiva, pp 320-30, Institute of International Relations, University of Chile, Santiago. Reprint in Directions, 5:53-61. 1491.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1980b: Challenges of the 80s, in Papauta: South Pacific Consultation on Theological Education, Lotu Pasifika, Suva, pp 83-9, Reprint 1981 in Report of the Fourth Assembly, Pacific Conference of Churches, Suva.

2009

84

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1492.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1980c: Conquest by creating dependency: is the American victory in Micronesia moving south?, South Pacific Business News, May, pp. 5-8. 1493.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1980d: Cultural Policies in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Perspective 9(1):6473, Revised reprint 1994 in Culture, Custom, Tradition: Developing Cultural Policy in Melanesia, G. White & L. Lindstrom (eds), East-West Center, Honolulu. 1494.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981, 1983: Land, People & Government: Public Lands Policy in the South Pacific, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific. 1495.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981a, 1984: Pacific Tourism, ed. & author, University of the South Pacific. 1496.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981b: CANA: A Caribbean Model for Pacific News Distribution”, Pacific Perspective, 10(1):43-4. 1497.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981c: Dependence by Extension, in Dimensions of Distance: Distance Education in a Pacific Setting, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 129-32. 1498.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981d: Inter-country Institutional Arrangements for Economic & Technical Cooperation among Developing Asian & Pacific Nations, sole author, vol 3, Pacific Institutions, United Nations Economic & Social Commission for Asia & the Pacific, Bangkok, & University of the South Pacific. 1499.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981e: Options for the Pacific’s largest ethnic group, Pacific Indians, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 183-216. 1500.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981f: Pacific Indians: Profiles from 20 Countries, ed. & author. University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1501.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981g: Patterns of Dependence in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Concerns Research Centre, Honolulu, Resource Report No. 187, pp 31. 1502.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981h: Politics, power & rural people, in The Road Out: Rural Development in Solomon Islands, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1503.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981i: Super powers in the Pacific, Pacific Islands Monthly, April, pp 11-14. 1504.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981j: The Future of Islam in the Pacific, Al-Qalam, Suva. 1505.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1981l: Trends in Tenure & Training, in Surveys for Resource Development in the Pacific Region, Fiji Institute of Surveyors, Suva, pp. 74-85. 1506.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1982, 1989: Regional Cooperation, Foreign Forces in Pacific Politics, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 178-203. 1507.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1982a, 1994: Polynesian Missions in Melanesia, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific. 1508.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1982b, 1983: Politics in Melanesia, ed. University of the South Pacific. 1509.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983 - 1985: Foreign Forces in Pacific Politics, ed. & contributing author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1510.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983a - 1989: Religious Cooperation in the South Pacific, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1511.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983b - 1989: The Associations of Theological Schools, Religious Cooperation in the Pacific, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1512.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983c: Land Tenure & Agriculture Development in the Pacific Islands, being Extension Bulletin No. 187, Asian-Pacific Council Food & Fertilizer Technology

2009

CEHA

85

Centre, Taiwan, Reprint 1983 in Land Tenure & the Small Farmer in Asia, Taipei. 1513.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983d: Nauru: the politics of phosphate, in Politics in Micronesia, University of the South Pacific, Suva, Revised reprint 1988 in Micronesian Politics, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1514.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983e: The South Pacific: an introduction, Suva. 1515.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1983f: Wantok rules: the five Melanesias, Islands Business, 9(7):51-5. 1516.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1984 - 1989: Land Tenure & Rural Productivity, ed. & author. University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1517.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1984a: Options in University education for the Pacific Islands, Pacific Perspective, 12(1):8-17. 1518.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1984b: Pacific History: Perceptions from within, Pacific History Newsletter, No 12, Newcastle. Reprint 1985 in Tok Tok Bilong Haus Book, Papua New Guinea Library Association, Port Moresby. 1519.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1984c: Registration in the Pacific Islands: Experiences & Potentials, in Land Tenure & Rural Development, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 26-46. 1520.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1984d: Soft Sciences & Hard Realities in Land Management, Proceedings of the PNG Survey Conference, Port Moresby. 1521.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1984e: The Pan-Pacific Person, in Pacific Perspective, 12(2):51-60. 1522.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1985: Education, Enjoyment & Integrity in Tourism, Contours, 1(8):1014 Bangkok. 1523.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1986: Book Distribution in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Islands Communication Journal, 14(1):28-42, University of the South Pacific, Suva, Reprint 1993 in Readings in Pacific Literature, Paul Sharrad (ed), University of Wollongong. 1524.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1986: Intellectual Life at USP, Unispac, December. 1525.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1986a: Land Rights of Pacific Women, ed. University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1526.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987, 1989, 1991: Class & Culture in the South Pacific, joint ed. & author, University of Auckland. 1527.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987a, 1989, 1991: Studying the Pacific: Past experiences & future potentials, Class & Culture in the South Pacific, University of the South Pacific & University of Auckland, pp 115-39. 1528.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987b, 1991, 1995, 1997: Land Tenure in the Atolls, ed. & joint author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1529.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987c: Distance Education & Scientific Cooperation in the Pacific, Agricultural Science, 21(4):14-17. 1530.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987d: Ethics for the Pacific in the 21st Century, in The Ethics of Development, University of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby, pp 9-39. 1531.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987e: Productive Potentials for the Pacific Islands, Journal of the Pacific Society, Tokyo, 10(1):21-40. 1532.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987f: Studying the Pacific: Past experiences & future potentials, Class & Culture in the South Pacific, University of the South Pacific & University of Auckland, pp 115-39, Reprint 1989. 1533.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1987g: The South Pacific & East Asia: Patterns of Interaction in

2009

86

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Education, Research & Information, Internationalizing Higher Education, Kinokuniya Publishing Co, Tokyo. 1534.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1988, 1995: Land Courts, in Pacific Courts & Legal Systems, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 112-26. 1535.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1988a: Constraints & Opportunities for Small Farmers in the South Pacific, Transfer of Technology to Small Farms, ASPAC Food & Fertilizer Center, Taipei. 1536.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1988b: Micronesian Politics, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1537.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1988c: Pacific Universities, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1538.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1988d: The Development of Higher Education in the South Pacific, Islanders in Pacific Rim Universities & The Future of University Education in the South Pacific, being chapters in Pacific Universities, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 20-34, 253-70, 341-87. 1539.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1988e: The Tenure & Management of Land in the Pacific Islands, Proceedings of the Commonwealth Planners Association, Honiara. 1540.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1989: French Polynesia: Selected Readings, joint ed, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1541.  Crocombe, Ronald, with Malama Meleisea, 1989a: Higher Education in the Pacific Islands: Spheres of Influence, Trends & Developments, International Journal of Educational Development, 9(3):163-73. Reprint 1990 O’o: Journal of Solomon Islands Studies, 2(4). 1542.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1989a: NGOs: The Voluntary Contribution to Pacific Development (sole author), typescript report to USAID (USA), AIDAB (Australia) and the Commonwealth Foundation (London). 1543.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1989b: Some problems facing Pacific Island countries, Pacific Perspective, 14(1):1-7, Japanese translation in Island States of Oceania & the Industrialised Countries, edited by Kimitada Miwa, Keiryu-sha, Tokyo. 1544.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1989c: The South Pacific: An Introduction, Institute of Pacific Studies, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp. 38-39. 1545.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1989d: Tomorrow’s customary tenures in relation to conservation, Customary Tenures, Traditional Resource Management & Nature Conservation, SPREP, South Pacific Commission, Noumea. 1546.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1990: Cook Islands Society, in Encyclopaedia of World Cultures, Human Relations Area Files, Yale University, New Haven. 1547.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1990a: Land Reform in the Third World, in Land is Life: Sharing of Land in the Third World, LWF Publication 27, Geneva, pp 4-14. 1548.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1990b: Latin America & the Pacific Islands, The Contemporary Pacific 3(1):115-44. 1549.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1990c: South Pacific Regionalism, Public Administration & Management in Small States, Yash Ghai (ed), University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 227-50. 1550.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1990d: The Cook Islands & Niue, 1989, Journal of Pacific History, 25(3):35-8. 1551.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1990e: Voluntary Service & Development in the Cook Islands, sole author, University of the South Pacific, Rarotonga.

2009

CEHA

87

1552.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1991: American Influences on Pacific Island Cultures, Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania, Chicago. 1553.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1991b: Naming & claiming in the South Pacific, Proceedings of the South Pacific Place Names Conference, The Geographical Society, Wellington, pp.1-27. 1554.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1991c: The Cook Islands (with Marjorie Crocombe), Te Manu Rere, Wellington. 1555.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1991d: The Cook Islands, Encyclopaedia Brittanica, Chicago. 1556.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1991e: The Cook Islands: July 1989-June 90, The Contemporary Pacific, 3(1):192-5. 1557.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1991f: The Pacific Islands in the 21st Century, Studies for the 21st Century, ed. Gerald O. Barney et al, Institute for 21st Century Studies, Washington, pp 429-47, Reprint by UNESCO, Paris. Extended version 1992 Journal of the Pacific Society, 15(2):120-54 & reprint 1993 as Special Bulletin No. 50 of Deutch Pazifische Gesselschaft, 1993, 36 pages, Serialised reprint Tonga Chronicle June-Oct 1994, Tongan translation in Kalonikali Tonga, June-October 1994, Japanese translation 1993-4 Overseas Fishery Cooperation Journal, 48:38-59, & 50:33-60. 1558.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992, 2001: Te Rau Maire: Poems & Stories of the South Pacific, joint ed., University of Auckland & University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1559.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992a: Culture & Democracy in the South Pacific, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1560.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992b: Education & Training for Adults with Little of Either, Partners in Educational Leadership: Schools & Communities Prepare for the Future, University of the Northern Territory, Darwin, pp 26-43. 1561.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992c: Improving Long-term Prospects: Some Issues for Small Island States, Mauritius 2020, Port Louis. 1562.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992d: New Zealand & the Other Pacific Islands: Changing Social, Economic & Political Relations, Pacific History, Don Rubinstein (ed.), University of Guam Press, pp 293-312. 1563.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992e: Pacific neighbours: New Zealand’s relations with other Pacific Islands: Aotearoa me Nga Moutera o te Moana Nui a Kiwa, Christchurch, N.Z.: Centre for Pacific Studies, University of Canterbury; Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 1564.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992f: The Cook Islands: July 1990-June 1991, The Contemporary Pacific, 4(1):193-6. 1565.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1992g: The Future of Democracy in Pacific Islands, & Achievements & Directions (the latter jointly) in Culture & Democracy in the South Pacific, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 9-27 & 239-61. 1566.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1993: Sources for the Continuing Creation of Identities in the Pacific Islands: Blood, Boundaries, Behaviour & Belief, in National Identity & Geography, David Hooson, editor, Blackwells, London. pp 311-30. 1567.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1993a: Ethnicity, Identity & Power in Oceania, in Islands & Enclaves: Nationalism & Separatism in Island & Littoral Contexts, Gary Trompf (ed), Sterling Publishers, New Delhi. pp 195-223. 1568.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1993b: Independence, Dependence & Interdependence: The First Ten Years of Solomon Islands Independence, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific

2009

88

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

& Solomon Islands College of Higher Education. 1569.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1993c: Scale, Sovereignty, Wealth & Enterprise: Comparisons in Education between the Cook Islands & Solomon Islands, Comparative Education, 29(3):307-319. 1570.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1993d: The Cook Islands July 1991-June 1992, The Contemporary Pacific, 5(1):152-6. 1571.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994, 1995, 2001: Pacific Science in the 21st Century, Science of Pacific Island Peoples, John Morrison et al (eds), University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1572.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994, 1997: Potentials for the World’s Smallest Microcultures Directions of the Expressive Arts in the Pacific Islands, Coherence & Chaos in our Uncommon Futures: Visions, Means, Action, World Future Studies Federation, Turku. 1573.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994: Pacific Science in the 21st Century, Science of Pacific Island Peoples, John Morrison et al (eds), University of the South Pacific, Suva. Reprint 2001. Reprint 1994 in Futures, 25(8):894-901. 1995 reprint in Viewpoint, 1(1):2-9. 1574.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994a: Environmental Education in the South Pacific, in Environmental Education in Small Island States, Commonwealth of Learning, Vancouver pp.35-63. 1575.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994a: Post-Secondary Education in the South Pacific, jointly with Marjorie Tuainekore Crocombe, Commonwealth Secretariat, London. 1576.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994b: Land Issues in the Pacific, senior editor & author, University of Canterbury, Christchurch. 1577.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994b: Potentials for the World’s Smallest Microcultures - Directions of the Expressive Arts in the Pacific Islands, Coherence & Chaos in our Uncommon Futures: Visions, Means, Action, World Future Studies Federation, Turku. 1578.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994c: Overview, Traditional Marine Tenure & Sustainable Management of Marine Resources in Asia & the Pacific, Robin South et al (eds), International Ocean Institute, Suva pp.291-300. 1579.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994c: Trends & Issues in Pacific Land Tenures, Land Tenure in the Pacific, University of Canterbury, Christchurch. 1580.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1994d: Welche Zukunft fur die Pazifischen Inseln?, being the lead chapter of Jahrbook Mission, Missionschilfe Verlag, Hamburg pp.1-11. Reprinted 1994 in Deutsch Pazifische Gesellschaft Bulletin, no. S-51 pp.8-17. 1581.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1995: Customary Land Tenure & Sustainable Development in the South Pacific, ed. & joint author, South Pacific Commission, Noumea. 1582.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1995: The Pacific Islands and the USA, Suva, [Fiji]: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific; Honolulu: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center. 1583.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1995a: Customary Land Tenure Systems in Papua New Guinea, joint author, AUSAID, Canberra. 1584.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1995b: Customary Land Tenure: It’s Impact on Economic Development & Policy Alternatives, United Nations Secretariat Report on Opportunity & Participation, New York. 1585.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1995c: New Politics in the South Pacific, senior editor, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1586.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1995d: The Cook Islands 1992-94, The Contemporary Pacific, 7(1):138-

2009

CEHA

89

44. 1587.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996: Geopolitical Change in the Pacific Islands, Global Geopolitical Change and the Asia-Pacific, Dennis Rumley et al (eds), Ashgate Publishing, Vermont pp 282-300. 1588.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996a: Learning to Live with the Reality of Land Tenures in Melanesia in the 21st Century, Papua New Guinea Journal of Land Studies, 2(1). 1589.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996b: Political Economy in Paradise, in Merian, 12:74-6. 1590.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996c: The Cook Islands 1994-95, The Contemporary Pacific, 8(1):17482. 1591.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996d: The LMS and Culture: Impacts on and from Pacific Cultures, South Pacific Journal of Mission Studies, 17:4-11. 1592.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996e: The Pacific Islands & the USA, sole author, East-West Center, Hawaii & University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1593.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1996f: We are all Futurists imbedded in the Past, Futures, 28(6-7):5469. Updated reprint in Futurists: Visions, Methods & Stories, Ross Cowie & Rick Slaughter (eds), DDM Publishers & the Future Studies Centre, Melbourne. Reprinted 2005 in Knowledge Base of Future Studies, Richard Slaughter & Sohail Inayatullah (eds), World Future Society & Foresight International, Brisbane. 1594.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1997: Asia and the Pacific Islands, Occasional Papers no. 31, Research Center for the South Pacific, University of Kagoshima, Also translated in Japanese in the same series. 1595.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1997a: The Cook Islands 1995-96, The Contemporary Pacific, 9(1):21827. 1596.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1998: Hugh Fraser Ayson, Dictionary of New Zealand Biography, vol 4. Disponível online em url: http://www.dnzb.govt.nz. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 1597.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1998a: Pacific Studies, editor & senior author, Commonwealth Youth Programme, Honiara, and University of Huddersfield. 1598.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1998b: Prospects & Possibilities (with Ueantabo Neemia-Mackenzie), Pacific Studies, Commonwealth Youth Programme, Honiara & Huddersfield. 1599.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1998c: Reforming the Political System of the Cook Islands, joint author with Iaveta Short & John Herrmann, Government Printer, Rarotonga. 1600.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1998d: The Cook Islands 1996-97, The Contemporary Pacific, 10(1):192-7. 1601.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1999: Akatereanga Taokotai: Partnership in Management: A Report to the Ministry of Outer Islands Development & the United Nations Development Programme, joint author, Rarotonga. 1602.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1999a: Austronesian Heritage in the 21st Century: A Basis for Relations between Taiwan & the Pacific Islands, Festival of Austronesian Cultures: Proceedings, Taitung. 1603.  Crocombe, Ronald, 1999b: Tenures, Pacific Islands Environment and Society, sole author (Moshe Rapaport, ed), Bess Press, Honolulu. 1604.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2000: Partnerships in Education (a review of Cook Islands education), joint author, Victoria University, Wellington. 2 volumes, Rarotonga. 1605.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2000a: Asia in the Pacific Islands: Expanding Interactions, Indeterminate

2009

90

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Consequences, (keynote address to the European Society for Oceanists), Journal of the Pacific Society, 23(1):1-8. 1606.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2000b: Bases for Belonging in Polynesia, Anthropological Journal on European Cultures 8(1):31-60 special issue edited by Regina Roemhild & Ina-Maria Greverus, Johan Wolfgang Goethe University, Frankfurt. 1607.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2000c: Enhancing Pacific Security, South Pacific Forum, Suva. Reprinted in Japanese in Pacific Way, Spring issue, Japan Institute for Pacific Studies, Tokyo. 1608.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2000d: Pan Pacific Person, New Zealand & the Pacific Islands, Latin America & the Pacific Islands etc, in The Pacific Islands: An Encyclopaedia, Australian National University, Camberra. 1609.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2000e: Twelve Thoughts on the Future, Islands Business, 26(1):24-6. 1610.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2001: The South Pacific, Suva, IPS. 1611.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2001a: Security in Melanesia (Fiji, Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands and Vanuatu), joint author, Pacific Islands Forum, Suva. 1612.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2002: Cook Islands Culture (editor with Marjorie Crocombe), University of the South Pacific. 1613.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2002a: Customary Land: Some Lessons for the Future from Past & Present Experiences in the Pacific Region, Customary Land Issues in Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea Institute of Valuers and Land Administrators, Lae www.ivla.pg, And in Melanesian Land Studies, vol.1, November. 1614.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2002b: Pacific Regional Security Report: Samoa (with Asofou So’o), Pacific Islands Forum, Suva. 1615.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2002c: Pacific Regional Security Report: Tonga, Pacific Islands Forum, Suva. 1616.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2002d: Perceptions of Mission, South Pacific Journal of Mission Studies, No. 26, April, pp. 14-20. 1617.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2003: Law, Practice & Culture in Economic & Political Relations between the Pacific Islands & Europe, in Terres & Territoires: Défis & Evolutions dans les Pays du Pacifique, Maryvonne Nedeljkovic (ed), L’Harmattan, Paris. pp 9-31. 1618.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2003: Security in Small Polynesian States, Cook Islands, Niue, Tuvalu, Pacific Islands Forum, Suva. 1619.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2003a: New Zealand & the (Other?) Pacific Islands: Prospects, Potentials & Possibilities, Futures Times, 3:3-5. 1620.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2003b: Responding to Threats to the Pacific Islands Region, Security in Oceania in the 21st Century, eds. Eric Shibuya & Jim Rolfe, Asia Pacific Center for Security Studies, Honolulu. pp. 219-230. Also on, http://www.apcss.org/publications/ monographs/SecurityinOceania.pdf. 1621.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2003c: The Notion of Sovereignty & Money Havens in the South Pacific, in Terres & Territoires: Défis & Evolutions dans les Pays du Pacifique, Maryvonne Nedeljkovic (ed), L’Harmattan, Paris. pp 87-107. 1622.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2004: India & the Pacific Islands, in India & Australasia: History, Culture & Society, N.N. Vohra (ed), India International Centre, Delhi. 1623.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2005: Political Culture, Representation, & the Electoral System in

2009

CEHA

91

the Cook Islands, Proceedings of the Conference on Political Culture, Representation & Electoral Systems in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Institute of Advanced Studies – Development & Governance, University of the South Pacific, Vila, Vanuatu 1-12 July. 1624.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2005b: Regionalism & the Reduction of Conflict, in Securing a Peaceful Pacific, John Henderson & Greg Watson (eds), pp. 153-160, Canterbury University Press, Christchurch. 1625.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2005c: Trends in Pacific Thought: The Last 50,000 Years & the Next 100, in Polynesian Paradox: Essays in Honour of Futa Helu, Ian Campbell & Eve Coxon (eds), pp. 243-62, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1626.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2006: Elite Communication between the Pacific Islands & Asia, Asian Media Information & Communication Centre Conference Proceedings, Penang, 17-20 July, Published on CD and on Website: www.amic.org.sg, and in print in 2007 in South Pacific Islands Communication: Regional Perspectives, Local Issues, Evangelia Papoutsaki & Usah Sundar Harris (eds), AMIC Singapore & Pacific Media Centre, Auckland. 1627.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2007: Asia in the Pacific Islands: Replacing the West, sole author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1628.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2007a: Chinese Migration to the Pacific Islands, Taiheiyojo Shokokuken no Dokuji Bunka narabini Sogoteki Shigen Kaihatsu-riyo ni kansuru Chosa-Kenkyu (Cultures of Island States of the Pacific & Development & Utilization of Resources of the Region), Hiroshi Nakajima (ed), Shigen Kyokai, Tokyo. 1629.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2007b: From the Pacific to the Asia-Pacific: The Shifting Focus of Regional Organizations, 10th Pacific Islands Political Studies Association Conference, Vila, 7-8 December. 1630.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2007c: The Fourth Wave: Chinese in the Pacific Islands in the 21st Century, Symposium on Chinese in the Pacific, Electronic Journal of the Centre for the Southern Chinese Diaspora, ANU, Canberra. 1631.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2007d: Asia in the Pacific Islands: Replacing the West, Suva. 1632.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2008: The South Pacific, sole author, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 1633.  Crocombe, Ronald, 2008a: “Tenure” and “Education”, chapters in The Pacific Islands: Environment & Society, Moshe Rapaport (ed), UHP, Honolulu. 1634.  Crofton, Edward, 2000: ‘Keeping the Peace (1945-2000)’ [Second to none: the Coldstream Guards, 1650-2000]. In Paget, Julian (ed.), Second to none: the Coldstream Guards, 1650-2000, London: Leo Cooper, 228-60. 1635.  Cronin, William B., 2005: The disappearing islands of the Chesapeake Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press in association with the Calvert Marine Museum, Chesapeake Bay Maritime Museum, Mariner’s Museum, [and the] Maryland Historical Society. 1636.  Crooks, Paul, 2008: A tree without roots: the guide to tracing British, African and Asian Caribbean ancestry, London: Arcadia. 1637.  Cross, J. P.; Gurung, Buddhiman (ed.), 2002: Gurkhas at war: in their own words: the Gurkha experience, 1939 to the present, London: Greenhill Books. 1638.  Cross, M. and Nutley, S., 1999: Insularity and accessibility: the small island communities of Western Ireland, Journal of Rural Studies, 15(3), pp.317-330. 1639.  Crossan, Rose-Marie, 2007: Guernsey, 1814-1914: migration and modernisation, Woodbridge, UK; Rochester.

2009

92

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1640.  Crowards, T and Coulter, W., 1998: Economic Vulnerability in the Developing World with Special reference to the Caribbean, Caribbean Development Bank. 1641.  Crowards, T., 1999: An Economic Vulnerability Index for Developing Countries, with Special Reference to the Caribbean, Bridgetown, Caribbean Development Bank. 1642.  Crown Agents, 1982: Kandrian-Gloucester Development Study, West New Britain. Port Moresby, PNG National Planning Office. 1643.  Croyden, R., 1983: Horticulture extension and development. Annual Report for 1982 Lowland Agrigultural Experiment Station, Kervat. Department of Primary Industry Port Moresby. 1644.  Crumley, J., 1994: Among Islands, Edinburgh, Mainstream. 1645.  Crusol, J. (dir.), et alii., 1988: L’enjeu des Petites Économies Insulaire, Paris, Economica. 1646.  Crusol, J.; Crusol, L.; Dommen, E. (ed.).1980: Islands, In A programme for agriculture in island plantation economies, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon. 1647.  Crusol, Jean (dir.); Hein, Philippe (dir.); Vellas, Francois (dir.). 1988: L’enjeu des petites economies insulaires. Paris: Economica. 1648.  Crusol, Jean, 2007: Les îles à sucre: de la colonisation à la mondialisation, Bécherel: Les Perséides. 1649.  Crusol, Jean; Vellas, Francois, 1996: Le tourisme et la Caraibe, Paris: L’Harmattan. 1650.  Crusz, Noel, 2001: The Cocos Islands mutiny, Freemantle (WA): Freemantle Arts Centre Press. 1651.  Cruz Domínguez, Antonio, 2005: Canarias y su proceso autonómico, 1975-198 : la transformación del archipiélago en la región política a través del periódico “La Provincia”, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Anroart Ediciones. 1652.  Cruz, Maria Augusta Lima, 2001: «A Lenda dos Dois Bons Irmãos, Paulo e Vasco da Gama», pp. 483-500, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/ Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 1653.  Cuerda Barceló, Juan, 1989: Los tiempos cuaternarios en Baleares, Palma de Mallorca: Conselleria de Cultura, Educació i Esports, Dirreció General de Cultura, Govern Balear, 1989. 1654.  Cuisenier, Jean, 2003: Le périple d’Ulysse, Paris: Fayard. 1655.  Cukier-Snow, J. and Wall, G., 1993: Tourism employment: perspectives from Bali, Tourism Management, 14(3), pp.357-365. 1656.  Cukier, J. and Wall, G., 1995: Tourism employment in Bali, Tourism Economics, 1(4), pp.389-401. 1657.  Cukier, J., Norris, J. and Wall, G., 1996: The involvement of women in the tourism industry of Bali, Indonesia, Journal of Development Studies, 33(2), pp.248-270. 1658.  Cukier, J., 1996: Tourism employment in Bali: trends and implications. In: Butler, R. and Hinch, T. (eds.) Tourism and Indigenous Peoples. London: Thompson. 1659.  Cukier, J., 1999: Tourism employment and shifts in the determination of social status in Bali: The case of the guide. In: Ringer, G. (ed) Destination. Cultural Landscapes of Tourism. London and New York: Routledge, pp.63-79.

2009

CEHA

93

1660.  Culliney, John L., 1988: Islands in a far sea: nature and man in Hawaii, San Francisco: Sierra Club Books. 1661.  Cuñado, Juncal and Luis A. Gil-Alaña, Tourism in the Canary Islands: Forecasting Using Several Seasonal Time Series Models, No 02/07, Faculty Working Papers from School of Economics and Business Administration, University of Navarra. Disponível online em url: http://www.unav.es/econom/files/workingpapersmodul ... 171283617_wp0207.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 1662.  Cunha, Fernando Whitaker Tavares da, 1980: Sentimento e tempo: Estudos, Carioca de Letras. 1663.  Cunqueiro, A., 1983: Fábulas y Leyendas de la Mar, Barcelona. 1664.  Curran, H. Allen; White, Brian, edited by. 1995: Terrestrial and shallow marine geology of the Bahamas and Bermuda, Boulder, Colo.: Geological Society of America. 1665.  Currie, Alex S., 1986: Historico-Contextual Overview of Adventist Theological Education in South Pacific Islands, 1800-1918, Mission Studies, 3:1, 25-42. 1666.  Curry, G. and G. Koczberski, 1998: Migration and circulation as a way of life for the Wosera Abelam of Papua New Guinea, in Asia Pacific Viewpoint, 39(1): 29-52. 1667.  Curry, G. and G. Koczberski, 1999: “The risks and uncertainties of migration: an exploration of recent trends amongst the Wosera Abelam of Papua New Guinea”, Oceania, 70(2): 130-145. 1668.  Curry, G. N., 2001: Market and non-market exchange in Papua New Guinea: facilitating indigenous alternatives for “development, The Joint Conference of the Institute of Australian Geographers and New Zealand Geographical Society. 1669.  Curry, Jimmy, 1985: To The Rescue/First Bahamian Rap/Hip Hop Song, Royal Crown Records. 1670.  Curry, Jimmy, 1996: Filthy Rich Gangster/First Bahamian Movie, Movie Mogul Pictures. 1671.  Cushnahan, G., 2001: Resource use and tourism on a small Indonesian Island, Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp 25-32. 1672.  D’Arcy, Paul, 1984: The role of the tuna fishery in the economy of Federated States of DA Moreland, The quest that failed; Jack London’s last tales of the South Seas”, PS, 8, 1, 48-70. 1673.  D’Arcy, Paul, 2001: Connected by the sea: towards a regional history of the Western Caroline Islands, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 36(2), 163-182. 1674.  D’Arcy, Paul, 2003: Warfare and State Formation in Hawaii: The Limits on Violence as a Means of Political Consolidation, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 38, No. 1 (Jun.), pp. 29-52. 1675.  D’Arcy, Paul, 2006: The people of the sea: environment, identity and history in Oceania, Honolulu: University of Hawai´i Press D’Arcy, Paul (ed.), 2008: Peoples of the Pacific: The History of Oceania to 1870, Aldershot. 1676.  DaBreo, D. Sinclair, 1988: Will insularity and political opportunism defeat Caribbean integration?, Castries, St. Lucia: Commonwealth Publishers International. 1677.  Dadzie, Stella, 1990: Searching for the invisible woman: slavery and resistance in Jamaica, Race & Class, Jan 1990; vol. 32: pp. 21 - 38. 1678.  Dagar, J. C., H.S., 1999: Ethnobotany of aborigines of Andaman-Nicobar Islands, Dehra Dun: Surya International Publications.

2009

94

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1679.  D’Agostino, T.; Hillman, R., 2003: Understanding contemporary Caribbean, Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers. 1680.  Dahl, A.L. & Depraetere, C., 2007: ‘Island Locations and Classifications’, in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Canada and Malta, Institute of Island Studies and Agenda, pp. 57-106. 1681.  Dahl, Ø., 1999: Meanings in Madagascar: Cases of Intercultural Communication, Bergin & Hervey, Westport Connecticut and London. 1682.  Daipu, R., 1995: A brief report on Bialla smallholder oil palm scheme and Opic - extension services. 1683.  Dalama, Marie-Gisèle, 2005: L’île de la Réunion et le tourisme: d’une île de la désunion à la Réunion des Hauts et des Bas, Espace géographique (Paris), octobre-décembre 2005, vol. 34, no 4, p. 342-349 1684.  Dale, Iain (ed.), 2002: Memories of the Falklands, London: Politico’s. 1685.  Dalleo, Peter D., 1981: “Pirates and Plunderers: Rethinking Bahamanian History”, in Africana Journal, 12:4, 293-320, Africana Publishing Co. 1686.  D’Alleva, Anne, 2005: ‘Christian skins: Tatau and the evangelization of the Society Islands and Samoa’. In Thomas, Nicholas, Cole, Anna; Douglas, Bronwen (ed.), Tattoo: bodies, art and exchange in the Pacific and Europe, London: Reaktion, 90-108. 1687.  D’Alleva, Anne, 2005: Christian skins: Tatau and the evangelization of the Society Islands and Samoa, In Thomas, Nicholas; Cole, Anna; Douglas, Bronwen (ed.), Tattoo: bodies, art and exchange in the Pacific and Europe, London: Reaktion, 90-108. 1688.  D’Alleva, Anne, Arts of the Pacific islands, New York: H.N. Abrams. 1689.  Dalton, J., 1992: An anlaysis of the Solarz report, in Rubinstein, D., ed, Pacific History, University of Guam, 323-30. 1690.  Daly, Eugene, 2000: “Heir Island”, in Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula Historical and Archaeological Society], 8, 34-55. 1691.  Daly, Eugene, 2002: ‘John Daly and the ‘Thomas Joseph’’. Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula Historical and Archaeological Society], 10, 100-108. 1692.  Daly, Eugene, 2004: Heir Island: its history and people, Curraheen Leap, Co. Cork: Heron’s Way Press. 1693.  Damas, David, 1994: Bountiful island: a study of land tenure on a Micronesian atoll, Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfrid Laurier University Press. 1694.  Damon, Frederick H., 1990: From Muyuw to the Trobriands: transformations along the northern side of the Kula Ring, Tucson: University of Arizona Press. 1695.  Danchev, Alexy, 2002: Economic Benefits of Biodiversity Conservation (Case Study of the Bulgarian Danube Islands), Economic Thought journal, issue 7, pages 129-151. 1696.  Daniel, Justin, 1996: Les Iles Caraibes. Modeles politiques et strategies de developpement, Paris: Karthala. 1697.  Danielsson, Bengt; Marie-Thérèse Danielsson, 1986: Poisoned Reign: French Nuclear Colonialism in the Pacific, New York: 1698.  Danson, M, Lloyd, M.G and Newlands, D., 1992: Scotland, in Townroe, Peter (ed.), Regional Development in the 1990s: The British Isles in Transition, Regional Studies Association. Jessica Kingsley Publishers, London and Philadelphia, pp. 105-139.

2009

CEHA

95

1699.  Darias Príncipe, Alberto, 1991: Arquitectura en Canarias, 1777-1931, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria; [Madrid]: CEPSA 1700.  Dark, P. J. C., 1983: Among the Kilenge art is something which is well done. S. Mead and B. Kermot, Eds., Art and Artists of Oceania, Palmerston North, NZ, Dunmore Press, pp. 25-44. 1701.  Dark, Philip J. C. and Roger G. Rose (eds) 1993: Artistic Heritage in a Changing Pacific. University of Hawai’i Press, Honolulu. Esp. 1702.  Dark, P., 1997: “Some observations on water transport in the Pacific”, In: M. Schindlbeck, Ed. Gestern und Heute -Traditionen in der Südsee, Festschrift zum 75 Geburtstag von Gerd Koch, Baessler-Archiv Beiträge zur Völkerkunde, pp. 291-314. 1703.  Dark, P., 1999: “Of Old Models and New in Pacific Art: real or spurious?”, In: B. Craig, B. Kernot and C. Anderson, Eds. Art and Performance in Oceania. Bathurst, N.S.W., Crawford House Publishing, pp. 266-288. 1704.  Darling, David, [1790-1867], 2000: ‘Tapu and conceit in the Marquesas’ [Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas Nicholas, In Lamb, Jonathan; Smith, Vanessa; Thomas, Nicholas, Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900, Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago University Press, 233-43. 1705.  Darrach, Brad; David Doubilet, 1995: “Treasured Islands”, Life, (August 1995): 46–53. 1706.  Darrah, Allan C., Crain, Jay B., 2000: Trobriand Massim Bibliography, The DEPTH Project: Department of Anthropology CSUS. Disponível online em url: http://www.csus.edu/anth/ trobriand/depth/trobibed.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 1707.  Das, Shiva Tosh, 1982: India Lakshadweep Islands: from tradition to modernity, New Delhi: Sagar Publications. 1708.  Das, Shiva Tosh, 1982a: The Andaman & Nicobar Islands: a study of habitat, economy & society, from tradition to modernity, New Delhi: Sagar Publications. 1709.  Das, Shiva Tosh, 1986: The Indian islands: a study of habitat, economy, and society, New Delhi: Cosmo. 1710.  Das, Shiva Tosh, 1990: Nomads, a study of the Bay Islanders, Delhi, India: Penman Publishers. 1711.  Dāsa, Hari Hara; Rath, Rabindranath, 1991: The tribals of Andaman and Nicobar Islands, New Delhi, Ashish Pub. House. 1712.  Dāsa, Harihara, Rabindranath Rath, 1988: The land of the coral beds: Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Berhampur, Orissa, India: Shantilata Das. 1713.  Dasgupta, Jayant, 2004: Japanese in Andaman & Nicobar Islands: red sun over black water, New Delhi: Manas Publications. 1714.  Dasgupta, Satadal, 1982: The Garden Transformed Prince Edward Island 1945-1980, Ragweed Press, Charlottetown, pp. 155-176. 1715.  Dash, J Michael, 2003: Anxious Insularity: Identity Politics and Creolization in the Caribbean, Matatu - Journal for African Culture and Society, A Pepper-Pot of Cultures: Aspects of Creolization in the Caribbean. Edited by Gordon Collier and Ulrich Fleischmann, pp. 287299(13) 1716.  Dathorne, OR, 1995: Paradise conquered, in Asian voyages; Two thousand years of constructing the other, Westport Ct, Bergin and Garvey.

2009

96

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1717.  Dauphiné, catalogue rédigé par Joël, Claude Cornet, Nicole Célestin, et al., 2005: Île d’exil, terre d’asile: les déportations politiques et les expulsions en temps de guerre en Nouvelle-Calédonie: [exposition, Musée de la ville de Nouméa, mai 2005] / [Nouméa: Ville de Nouméa. 1718.  Davenport, Trevor, 2003: Festung Alderney: the German defences of Alderney, Jersey: Barnes Publications in association with Alderney Society and Guernsey Branch of the Channel Islands Occupation Society. 1719.  Davenport, William, H., 1986, 1988: Two Kinds of Value in the Eastern Solomon Islands, in The Social Life of Things, edited by Arjun Appadurai, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. 1720.  Davenport-Hines, Richard, 1991: The End of Insularity: Essays in Comparative Business History, Routledge 1721.  David, Andrew, 1995: The voyage of HMS Herald to Australia and the South-west Pacific, 1852-1861, under the command of Captain Henry Mangles Denham, Carlton, Vic.: Miegunyah Press. 1722.  David, C.-P., 1997: “La paix par l’intégration? Régionalisme et perspectives de sécurité”, Études internationales (québec), n°2, p. 221-355 1723.  David, G., 1999: Du village à la construction de l’État: l’agrandissement de la territorialité dans le Pacifique insulaire. In Bonnemaison, J. et alii – Le territoire, lien ou frontière ?, Paris, L’Harmattan, tome II, p. 235-251. 1724.  Davidson, Art, 1993: Endangered Peoples, Sierra Club Books. 1725.  Davidson, Basil, 1981: No fist is big enough to hide the sky: building Guinea- Bissau and Cape Verde, Race & Class, Jan 1981; vol. 23: pp. 43 - 64. 1726.  Davidson, J. M., [et al.], 1996: “Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green”, Dunedin, in New Zealand Journal of Archaeology Special Publication. 1727.  Davidson, J. M., G. Irwin, B. F. Leach, A. Pawley and D. Brown, Eds., 1996: Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green, Dunedin, New Zealand Journal of Archaeology Special Publication. 1728.  Davies, Elizabeth W., 1995: The legal status of British dependent territories: the West Indies and North Atlantic region, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. 1729.  Davies, M., 1992: Colonial discourses, representations and the construction of otherness; case studies from Papua, in Rubinstein, D. (ed), Pacific History; Papers from the 8th PHA conference, Guam PHA/MARC, pp.49-59. 1730.  Davies, M., 1992: Public health and colonialism: the case of German New Guinea, 1884 – 1914, MA thesis. The Australian National University, Canberra. 1731.  Davies, N, 1999: The Isles: a history, London: Macmillan. 1732.  Davis Sonny B., 2004: Salazar, Timor, and Portuguese Neutrality in WorldWar II, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 13, Nos. 1 and 2, pp. 449-476. 1733.  Davis, D. and Goodwin R.C., 1990: “Island Carib Origins: Evidence and non-evidence”, American Antiquity, vol.55 no.1. 1734.  Davis, David Brion, 2006: Inhuman Bondage: The Rise and Fall of Slavery in the New World, New York: Oxford University Press. 1735.  Davis, Derrin, 1993: Sustainable development and natural resources in Pacific Island countries, Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program.

2009

CEHA

97

1736.  Davis, edited by Darién J., 2007: Beyond slavery: the multilayered legacy of Africans in Latin America and the Caribbean, Lanham, Md.: Rowman & Littlefield. 1737.  Davis, Karen, 1991: Vivinei Ruruhu pa Hoava / Custom Stories from Hoava, Gizo, Western Province, Solomon Islands: Western Province Government. 1738.  Davis, Mella, 1998: African trickster tales in diaspora: resistance in the Creole-speaking South Carolina sea islands and Guadeloupe, French West Indies. 1739.  Davis, Mella, 1998: islands and Guadeloupe, French West Indies, Thesis (Ph. D.), Northwestern University. 1740.  Davis, Wade, 1985: The Serpent and The Rainbow, New York: Simon and Schuster. 1741.  Daws, Gavan, 1980: A Dream of Islands: Voyages of Self-Discovery in the South Seas: John Williams, Herman Melville, Walter Murray Gibson, Robert Louis Stevenson, Paul Gauguin, New York. 1742.  Daws, Gavan, 1988: Hawaii, the islands of life: the Nature Conservancy of Hawaii, Honolulu: Published by Signature Publishing. 1743.  Daws, Gavan, 1989: Shoal of Time, a History of the Hawaiian Islands, University of Hawai’i Press. 1744.  Daws, Gavan and Fujita, Marty, 1999: Archipelago: the islands of Indonesia: from the nineteenth-century discoveries of Alfred Russel Wallace to the fate of forests and reefs in the twenty-first century, Gavan Daws; prologue by Edward O. Wilson; epilogue by John C. Sawhill, Berkeley: University of California Press. 1745.  Day, Alan Edwin, 1997: St. Helena, Ascension, and Tristan da Cunha, Oxford, Santa Barbara, Calif., Clio Press. 1746.  Day, Alan, 1996: A Russian army in Jersey and Guernsey, Army Quarterly & Defence Journal, 126, 261-66. 1747.  Day, Alan, 1997: A Russian army on Guernsey and Jersey (1799), Guernsey Society Review, 53:2, 40-45. 1748.  Daya and C R de Silva, 1992: Sri Lanka since Independence: A Reference Guide to the Literature, New Delhi, Navrang. 1749.  d’Ayala, P. G.; Cavallaro, C.; Moropoulou, A., 1999: Islands 2000. The world of islands: what development on the eve of the year 2000?, Paris, International Council for Island Development. 1750.  de Albuquerque, K. and McElroy, J., 1992: Caribbean small-island tourism styles and sustainable strategies, Environmental Management, 16, pp.619-632. 1751.  de Albuquerque, K. and McElroy, J., 1999: Tourism and Crime in the Caribbean, Annals of Tourism Research, 26 (4), pp.968-984. 1752.  Decoudras, Pierre-Marie, 2005: Géographie et Recherche aujourd’hui à l’Université de la Polynésie Française (UPF), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index247.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1753.  Decoudras, Pierre-Marie, 2005a: Polynésie, dynamique contemporaine et enjeux d’avenir, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 229, Janvier-Mars. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues. org/index249.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1754.  Decoudras, Pierre-Marie, Danièle Laplace et Frédéric Tesson, 2005: Makatea, atoll oublié des Tuamotu (Polynésie française): de la friche industrielle au développement local par le tourisme, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.

2009

98

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

revues.org/index239.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1755.  De Deckker, P., 1997: Évolutions statutaires dans le Pacifique insulaire: la manière anglosaxonne, Notes et études documentaires, n° 5053-54, p. 82-98. 1756.  De Haan; Leo J., 1993: Window on the Netherlands: small islands in the Caribbean, the last remains of the tropical netherlands: the netherlands Antilles and Aruba, Tesg:Tijdschrift voor economische en sociale geografie, 1993/05, vol. vol. 84, no 5, p p. 378-385 1757.  De la Mare, Walter, 1988: Desert islands and Robinson Crusoe, with decorations by Rex Whistler, London, Boston, Faber and Faber. 1758.  De La Pedraja, René, 2006: ‘The Argentine Air Force versus Britain in the Falkland Islands, 1982’, In Higham, Robin D. S.; Harris, Stephen John (ed.), Why air forces fail: the anatomy of defeat, Lexington, Ky.: University Press of Kentucky, 227-60 1759.  de Silva, Chandra Richard, 1987: Sri Lanka: A History, New Delhi: Vikas 1760.  De Val, Seamus (intr.), 2004: ‘’Saoirse - Irisleabhar Oileáin Spice’’ in The Spike Island journal, 1921, The Past, 25, 86-102. 1761.  De Vorsey, Louis, Jr., John Parker, 1985: In the wake of Columbus: islands and controversy, Detroit, Wayne State University Press. 1762.  Del Piano, L., 1987: Gioacchino Volpe e la Corsica ed altri saggi, Istituto di storia moderna dell’Università di Cagliari, Cagliari. 1763.  Deacon, Harriet Jane, 1996: “Madness, race and moral treatment: Robben Island Lunatic Asylum, Cape Colony, 1846-1890”, in History of Psychiatry, Jun; vol. 7: pp. 287 - 297. 1764.  Deakin, R., 2000: Waterlog, London, Vintage. 1765.  Dean, Susan, 1982: A complete bibliography of materials pertaining to the United States Virgin Islands available in the Research Institute for the Study of Man, compiled by Susan Dean, New York, NY: Metro Center, New York University. 1766.  Deane, Paul, 1989: ”Paul Henry on Achill Island: paintings and drawings”, in Éire-Ireland, 24:1, 59-65. 1767.  Dearden, P. N. and D. F. Freyne, 1981: Pre-feasibility Study of Potential Areas for Rice Production, Port Moresby, Dept of Primary Industry. 1768.  Debbage, K.G., 1990: Oligopoly and the resort cycle in the Bahamas, Annals of Tourism Research, 17(5), pp.513-527. 1769.  Debes, Hans Jacob, 1993: Problems concerning the earliest settlement in the Faroe Islands, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 45464. 1770.  Debidour, Philippe, 1994: L’île chez Jules Verne, Université Jean Moulin (Lyon). Université de soutenance. 1771.  deBoer, A. J., 1996: “Mirabilopsaltria, a new cicada genus from New Guinea, its taxonomy and biogeography (Homoptera Tibicinidae)”, in Tropical Zoology, 9(2): 349-379. 1772.  Decker, K. and A. Keener, 2001: A Report on the English Based Creole of San Andres and Providencia Islands, Colombia. SIL International. 1773.  Deckker (de), P.; Kuntz, L., 1998: La bataille de la coutume et ses enjeux pour le Pacifique Sud, Paris, L’Harmattan. 1774.  Deckker (de), P.; Tryon, D., 1999: Identités en mutation dans le Pacifique à l’aube du

2009

CEHA

99

troisième millénaire, Bordeaux, CRET, “Îles et archipels”, n°26. 1775.  Deena, Seodial F. H., 2009: Situating Caribbean literature and criticism in multicultural and postcolonial studies, New York: Peter Lang. 1776.  Defert, Pierre, 1988: Problématique du tourisme insulaire, Aix-en-Provence: Université de droit, d’économie et des sciences, Centre des hautes études touristiques. 1777.  Defoe, Daniel (1661?-1731), 1997: The life and strange, surprising adventures of Robinson Crusoe, of York, marines [sic], as related by himself, Tyndale House. 1778.  Defranceschi, Ean, 1986: Recherches sur la nature et répartition de la propriété foncière en Corse de la fin de l’Ancien Régime jusqu’au milieu de XIXe siècle, Ajaccio. 1779.  Dehoorne, Olivier (Directeur scientifique) et all..., 2008: Mondes insulaires: Géopolitique, économie et développement durable, Paris: Ellipses. 1780.  Deia International Conference of Prehistory, 2002: World islands in prehistory: international insular investigations, Deia International Conference of Prehistory (5; 2001; Deia, Majorque, Espagne), Archaeopress. 1781.  Deibert, Michael, 2005: Notes from the Last Testament: The Struggle for Haiti, Seven Stories Press, New York. 1782.  Delépine, Gracie, 1998: L’amiral de Kerguelen et les mythes de son temps, cartographie par Sylvie Rimbert, Paris, France, L’Harmattan. 1783.  Delépine, Gracie; 1995: Les îles australes françaises: Kerguelen, Crozet, Amsterdam, Saint-Paul, préface de Christian Dors; cartographie par Sylvie Rimbert, Rennes: OuestFrance. 1784.  Deleuze, G., 2004: Desert Islands and Other Texts: 1953-1974, edited by D. Lapoujade. 1785.  Deleuze, Gilles, 2002: L’île déserte et autres textes [textes et entretiens 1953-1974], éd. préparée par David Lapoujade. - Paris: Éd. De Minuit. 1786.  Delgado Aguiar, Gerardo[et al.], 2007: Puertos y sistemas portuarios de las islas atlánticas europeas (Canarias, Azores y Madeira), Santa Cruz de Tenerife; Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Idea. 1787.  Delgado Perez, M. M., 2003: Lo Real y lo Maravilloso en la ecumene del siglo XIII. Las islas en el Atar al-Bilad de Al-Qazwini, Spain, Ediciones Alfar of Seville. 1788.  Delgado Pérez, María Mercedes, 2005: La Corse: histoire d’une insularité / [textes sélectionnés et présentés par Jean-Louis Andreani et Yves Marc Ajchenbaum], Paris: EJL: “Le Monde”. 1789.  Delgado, James, 1987: Alcatraz Island: The Story Behind the Scenery, Las Vegas: KC Publications. 1790.  Delmas, Marie-Charlotte, 1995: Les aventures de Robinson Crusoé: parcours éditorial d’une œuvre littéraire, Issy-les-Moulineaux: Association d’animation de la médiathèque d’Issy-les-Moulineaux. 1791.  Delorme, Robert L., 1988: Latin America, 1983-1987: Social Science Bibliography, Bibliographies and Indexes in Sociology, no. 14. New York: Greenwood Press. 1792.  DeLoughrey, E., 2001: ‘“The Litany of Islands, The Rosary of Archipelagoes”: Caribbean and Pacific Archipelagraphy’, ARIEL (A Review of International English Literature), 32, 21-52. 1793.  DeLoughrey, E., 2004: Island Ecologies and Caribbean Literatures, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 298-310.

2009

100

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1794.  DeLoughrey, E.M., 2007: Routes and Roots: Navigating Caribbean and Pacific Island Literatures, Honolulu HI, University of Hawaii Press. 1795.  Demas, W., 1965: The economics of development in small countries with special references to the Caribbean, Montreal, Mc. Gill University Press. 1796.  Demaze, Moïse Tsayem, Jean-Marie Fotsing et Frédéric Huynh, 2002: La déforestation dans la région de Saint-Georges de l’Oyapock (Guyane française), Les Cahiers d’OutreMer, 218, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index1096.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1797.  Demaze, Moïse Tsayem et Sandrine Manusset, 2005: L’agriculture itinérante sur brûlis en Guyane française: la fin des durabilités écologique et socioculturelle?, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 241-242, Janvier-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/ index3173.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1798.  Demmke, Andreas; Haberkorn, Gerald; Rakaseta, Vilimaina L.; Lepers, Christelle, 1997: Federated states of Micronesia population profile, Noumea: South Pacific Commission, 1997. 1799.  Denfeld, D. Colt, 1997: Hold the Marianas: the Japanese defense of the Mariana Islands, Shippensburg, PA, White Mane. 1800.  Dening, G., 1980: Islands and Beaches: Discourse on a Silent Land, Marquesas 17741880, Melbourne, Melbourne University Press. 1801.  Dening G, 1986: Possessing Tahiti, Archaeology, in Oceania, Vol 21, pp.103-18 1802.  Dening, G., 1989: History in the Pacific, The Contemporary Pacific, vol. 1(1 & 2), 134-139 1803.  Dening G, 1992: Mr Bligh’s bad language, Melbourne, CUP. 1804.  Dening G, 1996: Performances, Melbourne, MUP. 1805.  Dennon, D. et al, 1997, 2004: The Cambridge History of the Pacific Islands, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. 1806.  Dennon, D. et al, 2000: A History of Australia, New Zealand and the Pacific Islands – the formations of identities, Londres, Blackwell. 1807.  Denoon, D. & R. Lacey (eds). 1980: Oral tradition in Melanesia, Port Moresby. 1808.  Denoon D., ed, 1996: The Cambridge history of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, Melbourne 1809.  Denoon, Donald, 1996a: Pacific Island History at the Australian National University: The Place and the People, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 31, No. 2 (Dec.), pp. 202-214. 1810.  Denoon, D., ed, 1997: Emerging from empire; decolonisation in the Pacific, Canberra ANU 1811.  Denoon, D.B.H., Brams (S. J.), 1997a: «Fair Division: A New Approach to the Spratly Islands Controversy», International Negotiation, 2(2), pp. 303-329. 1812.  Denoon D., 2000a: Getting under the skin; the Bougainville Copper Agreement and the creation of the Panguna mine, Melbourne, MUP 1813.  Denoon, Donald, Malama Meleisea, Stewart Firth, Jocelyn Linnekin, Karen Nero, 2004: The Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, Cambridge University Press. 1814.  Dentinho, Tomaz Ponce e RIVERA, Jorge Croce, 2001: «As Experiências Insulares na Construção dos Mundos Moderno e Pós-Moderno: A Importância das Tecnologias da Comunicação», pp. 353-370, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/

2009

CEHA

101

Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 353370. 1815.  Dentinho, Tomaz Ponce, Pedro Ferreira e Vasco Silva, Input Output Tables for the Management of Water Resources in Islands. The Case of Terceira Island, ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association, Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa06/papers/124.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 1816.  Dentinho, Tomaz Ponce, Vanda Serpa, Paulo Silveira e Joana Goncalves, Land Use Change and Socio-Economic Evaluation in São Jorge Island (Between 15th and 20th Century), ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association, Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa06/papers/91. pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 1817.  D’Entrecasteaux, B., 2001: Voyage to Australia and the Pacific, 1791-1793, Carlton, Vic, Melbourne University Press. 1818.  Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1987: “Oil Palm Review”, in Rural Development Series Handbook No. 13. Port Moresby, Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 1819.  Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1990: “Didimag Newsletter”, Volume 22, 5. Port Moresby, Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 22. 1820.  Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1993: “Didimag Newsletter”, Volume 25, 8. Port Moresby, Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 25. 1821.  Depraetere, C., 1990-1991: «Le phénomène insulaire à l’échelle du globe: tailles, hiérarchies et formes des îles océanes », L’Espace géographique, vol 20, n°2, p. 126-134 1822.  Depraetere, C., 2007: Locations & Concentrations, in A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Malta & Canada Agenda Academic & Institute of Island Studies 1823.  Depreatere, C., 2008: The Chalenge of Nissology: A Global Outlook on the World Archipelago Part I: Scene Setting the World Archipelago, in Island Studies Journal, vol.3, nº1, 3-16. 1824.  Desalle, R. & G. Amato, 2004: The expansion of conservation genetics, Nature, (5): 702712. 1825.  Desantes Fernández, bajo la dirección y tutoría de Blanca, 1993: Inventario de fondos masónicos de Cataluña y Baleares, realizado por las alumnas Natividad Ortiz Albear, Mercedes Casado Vázquez; Madrid: Dirección de Archivos Estatales. 1826.  Descantes, Christophe, 2005: Integrating archaeology and ethnohistory: the development of exchange between Yap and Ulithi, Western Caroline Islands, Oxford: Archaeopress. 1827.  Descottes, J. 1930: La question de l’insularité du Mont-Saint-Michel: les divagations du Couesnon et ses irruptions dens les terres avant son endiguement, Imprimeries Oberthur. 1828.  Desmond, Jane C., 1999: Staging Tourism: Bodies on Display from Waikiki to Sea World, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 1829.  Desse, Michel, 2002: Pression anthropique et dégradation des littoraux haïtiens : l’exemple du golfe de la Gônave, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 219, Juillet-Septembre. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index1018.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1830.  Destefani, Laurio H., 1981: Las Malvinas en la época hispana (1600-1811), Buenos Aires: Corregidor. 1831.  Destéfani, Laurio Hedelvio, 1982: Síntesis de la geografía y la historia de las Islas Malvinas, Georgias y Sandwich del Sur, Buenos Aires, República Argentina: Ministerio

2009

102

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

de Educacíon, Centro Nacional de Documentación e Información Educativa, 1832.  Destéfani, Laurio Hedelvio, 1982: The Malvinas, the South Georgias and the South Sandwich Islands: the conflict with Britain, translated from the Spanish by Martha Heath and Ruth James, Buenos Aires: Edipress. 1833.  Develtere, Patrick. 1994: Co-operation and development: With special reference to the experience of the Commonwealth Caribbean, ACCO. 1834.  Devendra, T. and D. Gunasena, 1996: Sri Lanka: The Emerald Island, New Delhi, Roli Books. 1835.  Devine, Thomas Martin, 1989: The emergence of the new élite in the Western Highlands and Islands, 1800-1860, In Devine, Thomas Martin (ed.), Improvement and Enlightenment: proceedings of the Scottish Historical Studies Seminar, University of Strathclyde, 19871988 (Edinburgh: Donald), 108-42. 1836.  Dévoué, E., 2000: Les Antilles françaises: les activités informelles, Paris, Publisud. 1837.  Dewar, Robert E., 1997: Does It Matter That Madagascar Is an Island?, Human Ecology, Volume 25, Number 3 / September, pp.481-489. 1838.  Deyts, Pierre, 2000: Le trésor dans l’île, thème de ficion narrative: Alexandre Dumas «Le comte de Monte-Cristo», Robert Louis Stevenson «L’île au trésor», Hergé «Le secret de la licorne» et «Le trésor de Rackham le Rouge », Bordeaux : Bordeaux 3. 1839.  Dhillon, Mohindar Singh, 1994: A Titan in the Andamans, Dr. Diwan Singh Kalepani: a biography, Chandigarh: Angad Publishers. 1840.  Dho’gaḍe, Rameśa, S.R. Sharma, Krupa Kulkarni, 1989: Minority language communities-islands or icebergs?, Pune: Deccan College. 1841.  Di Castri, F. & Balaji, V. eds., 2002: Tourism, Biodiversity and Information, Leiden, Backhuys. 1842.  Di Piazza, Anne, 2004: Sailing routes of old Polynesia: the prehistoric discovery, settlement and abandonment of the Phoenix Islands, Honolulu: Bishop Museum Press. 1843.  Diamond, J. M., 1971: “Bird records from West New Britain”, in Condor 73(4): 481-483. 1844.  Diamond, Jared and Ernst Mayr, 2001: The Birds of Northern Melanesia: Speciation, Ecology, and Biogeography, N.Y.: 1845.  Diamond, Jared, 2005: Collapse: How Societies Choose to Fail or Succeed, New York: Viking. 1846.  Diamond, Judith, 1995: Solomon Islands, Chicago: Childrens Press. 1847.  Dianoux, H. J. de., 1980: La Guinee-Gissau et les iles du Cap-Vert, Afrique Contemporaine, vol. vol. 19, no 107, pp. 1-16. 1848.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1993: Uma estratégia de sucesso numa economia periférica: a casa Bensaúde e os Açores, 1800-1873, Ponta Delgada. 1849.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1993: “Os empresários micaelenses no século XIX: o exemplo de sucesso de Elias Bensaúde (1807-1868)”, Análise Social, vol. XXXI, n.sº 136/137. 1850.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1995: A Fábrica de Tabaco Micaelense: 1866-1995, Ponta Delgada, Fábrica de Tabaco Micaelense. 1851.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1995: Escritos sobre a história das mulheres, Ponta Delgada, Jornal de Cultura. 1852.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira Dias, 1997: Diário de Navegação: 50º aniversário do 1º voo comercial da SATA, Ed. Sata Air Açores.

2009

CEHA

103

1853.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1999: Uma estratégia de sucesso numa economia periférica. A Casa Bensaúde e os Açores, 1800-1870, (1996), Ponta Delgada, Ribeiro e Caravana Editores, 2.ª ed. 1854.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 2002: Em defesa dos interesses empresariais desde 1835. Ed. Câmara do Comércio e Indústria de Ponta Delgada. 1855.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 2007: Indiferentes à Diferença. Os judeus nos Açores séculos XIX e XX, Ponta Delgada, CEEplA. 1856.  Dias, Fátima Sequeira Dias, 2008: Os Açores na História de Portugal, Lisboa, Livros Horizonte. 1857.  Díaz Lorenzo, Juan Carlos, 1992: Los trasatlánticos de la emigración, 1946-1974: líneas regulares, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Viceconsejería de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno de Canarias. 1858.  Diaz, V., 1994: Simply Chamorro; telling tales of demise and survival in Guam, TCP, 6, 1, 29-58, 1994. 1859.  Diaz, Vicente M., 2001: Fight Boys, Pacific Diaspora: Island Peoples, in the United States and across the Pacific, Paul Spickard, Joanne Rondilla and Deborah Hippolite-Wright, eds. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, pp. 169-195. 1860.  Diaz, Vicente M., 2004: To ‘P’ or Not to ‘P’?”: Marking the Territory Between Pacific Islander and Asian American Studies, Journal of Asian American Studies, Volume 7, Number 3, October pp. 183-208 1861.  Dibb, P, 1989: One strategic entity; An Australian defence perspective on the South Pacific, in Hegarty D and Polomka P, eds, The security of Oceania in the 1990s, Canberra, ANU, pp. 66-70 1862.  Dibblin, Jane, 1988: Day of two suns: US nuclear testing and the Pacific Islanders, London: Virago. 1863.  Dick, H.W., 1985: Interisland shipping: progress, problems and prospects, Bulletin of indonesian economic studies, no 2, pp. 95-114 1864.  Dickason, Renée, 2003  : ‘La BBC, imperméable à la propagande? De la Guerre des Malouines aux Guerres du Moyen-orient’, Vingtième Siècle, 80, 71-82 1865.  Dickinson, A. B. 2007: Seal fisheries of the Falkland Islands and dependencies: an historical review, (Research in Maritime History, 34). St John’s (Nfld): International Maritime Economic History Association. 1866.  Dickinson, A. B., 2001: “Controlled sealing in the Falkland Islands during the twentieth century”, in International Journal of Maritime History [St John’s, Newfoundland], 13:2, 119-36. 1867.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, (org.), 1989: “Ciências Sociais e o Mar no Brasil”, In: Coletânea do III Encontro de Ciências Sociais e o Mar no Brasil. São Paulo, NUPAUBUSP. 1868.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, (org.), 1997a: Ilhas e sociedades insulares, São Paulo: NUPAUB-USP. 1869.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1995: Povos e Mares: por uma sócio-antropologia marítima, NUPAUB-USP, São Paulo. 1870.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1996: O mundo insular; simbolismo e imaginário. Tese de livre docência apresentada na Universidade de S.Paulo.

2009

104

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1871.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1997: Les îles tropicales au Bresil. In: Colloque de lÚniversité de Corse: L´île laboratoire, 1999, Ajjacio. Annales du Colloque l´Ile Laboratoire. Ajjacio: Editions Allain Piazola, v. 1. p. 332-344. 1872.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1998: Ilhas e Mares, Simbolismo e Imaginário, Ed. Hucitec, São Paulo. 1873.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1999: Sociedades Insulares e Biodiversidade. Disponível online em url: http://www.usp.br/nupaub/Marajo.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 1874.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 2003: A Ilha de Búzios, São Paulo, (Prefácio, Pósfacio/ Prefácio). 1875.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 2003a: Povos e Mares: Uma Retrospectiva de - SócioAntropologia Marítima, in A pesca construindo sociedades. Disponível em http://www. usp.br/nupaub/Cap2.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2008. 1876.  Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 2006: A Interdisciplinaridade no Estudo do Mar: O papel das Ciências Sociais, In: 2da Reunión Ciencia Tecnología y Sociedade, 2006, Buenos Aires. Los Océanos y sus recursos Pesqueros, Buenos Aires: Museo Argentino de Ciencias Naturales Bernardino Rivadavia, v. 01. p. 3-77. 1877.  Díez Torre, Alejandro R.; Mallo, Tomás y Pacheco Fernández, Daniel, coordinadores: 1995: De la ciencia ilustrada a la ciencia romántica: actas de las II Jornadas sobre España y las Expediciones Científicas en América y Filipinas, Jornadas sobre “España y las Expediciones Científicas en América y Filipinas” (2nd: 1993: Ateneo de Madrid), Madrid: Doce Calles: Ateneo Científico, Literario y Artístico. 1878.  Diggines, C. E., 1984: ‘The problems of smaller states’, The Round Table, 295. 1879.  Diment, Judith A., 1984-87: Catalogue of the natural history drawings commissioned by Joseph Banks on the Endeavour voyage 1768-1771, held in the British Museum (Natural History), 1: Botany: Australia; 2: Botany: Brazil, Java, Madeira, New Zealand, Society Islands and Tierra del Fuego, 2 vols. (Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History), Historical series, 11-12). 1880.  Dimou, Michel, Industrial development in small islands economies. A comparative study of Mauritius and La Reunion growth performances, ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association. Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ ersa/ersaconfs/ersa04/PDF/190.pdf. consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 1881.  Din, Gilbert C., 1988: The Canary Islanders of Louisiana, Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press. 1882.  Dinnen, S., 2002: ‘Winners and losers: politics and disorder in the Solomon Islands 20002002’, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol.37, No.3, pp.285–98. 1883.  Dinnen, Sinclair, 2001: Law and order in a weak state: crime and politics in Papua New Guinea, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian, and Pacific Studies, University of Hawai’i Press. 1884.  Dipla, H.; Caflish, L. (pref.).1984: Le regime juridique des Iles dans le droit International de la mer, Paris: PUF. 1885.  Dirrane, Bridget, 1997: A woman of Aran: the life and times of Bridget Dirrane, Dublin, Blackwater Press, c1997. 1886.  Disney, Anthony R., 1995: Historiography of Europeans in Africa and Asia, 1450-1800: 1450-1800, Edição de Variorum.

2009

CEHA

105

1887.  Disney, Anthony, 2001: «The Portuguese and Saint Helena», in Portos, Escalas e Ilhéus no Relacionamento entre o Ocidente e o Oriente, vol. 1, coord. Avelino de Freitas de Meneses, Lisboa, Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses – Univerdidade dos Açores, pp. 213-238. 1888.  Dissanayaka, T. D. S. A., 1994: The Politics of Sri Lanka, Colombo, Sri Lanka: Swastikha (Private) Ltd.. 1889.  Dixon, R., 1996: Playing Tarzan; Australian photography and travel writing about Melanesia 1920-1945, Australian Journal of Art, 13, 133-42. 1890.  Dixon, R., 2001: Prosthetic Gods; travel, representation and colonial governance, St Lucia, UQP. 1891.  DOAJ, 2009: Directory of Open Access Journals, Disponível online em url: http://www.doaj. org/. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009. 1892.  Doak, D. F. & L. S. Mills, 1994: A useful role for theory in conservation, Ecology, 75(3):615626. 1893.  Dobson, David, 2004: Transatlantic voyages, 1600-1699, Baltimore, Md., Clearfield. 1894.  Dobson, David, 2005: Scots-Scandinavian links in Europe and America, 1550-1850, Baltimore, Md.: Clearfield. 1895.  Dobyns, H.F., 1994: The clash of cultures in Burenhult G, ed, New world and Pacific Civilizations, Harper, San Francisco, pp.209-70. 1896.  Dockrill, Michael Lawrence, 1989: Britain and the first Chinese offshore islands crisis, 1945-1955, In British foreign policy, 1945-1956, eds. Dockrill, M.L.; Young, J.W., 173-96. 1897.  Dodds, Klaus, 1998: Enframing the Falklands: identity, landscape, and the 1982 South Atlantic War’, Environment and Planning D: Society and Space, 16, 733-56. 1898.  Dodds, K., 2000: “Putting maps in their place: the demise of the Falkland Islands Dependency Survey and the mapping of Antarctica, 1945-1962”, in Ecumene, 7:2, 176-210. 1899.  Dodds, Klaus; Manóvil, Laura, 2001: “Back to the Future? Implementing the AngloArgentine 14th July 1999 Joint Statement”, in Journal of Latin American Studies, 33, 777-806. 1900.  Dodds, Klaus; Manóvil, Laura, 2001a: ‘A shared space? The Falklands/Malvinas and the geopolitics of Anglo-Argentine relations in the South Atlantic’, Geopolitics, 6, 103-30. 1901.  Dodds, Klaus, 2002: Pink ice: Britain and the South Atlantic empire (International library of human geography, 6), London: I.B. Tauris. 1902.  Dodds, Klaus, 2002a: ‘Screening Antarctica: Britain, the Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey, and Scott of the Antarctic (1948)’. Polar Record, 204, 1-10 1903.  Dodds, Klaus, 2003: ‘God save the Falklands: postcolonial geographies of the Falklands/ Malvinas’. In Edmond, Rod; Smith, Vanessa (ed.), Islands in history and representation, London: Routledge, 177-89. 1904.  Dodds, Klaus, 2005: ‘Contesting war: British media reporting and the 1982 South Atlantic War’. In Connelly, Mark; Welch, David (ed.), War and the media: reportage and propaganda, 1900-2003, London: I.B. Tauris, 218-35 1905.  Dodge, Steve, 1983: Abaco: The History of an Out Island and its Cays, North Miami: Tropic Isle Publications. 1906.  Dodgshon, R. A., 1998: From chiefs to landlord: social and economic change in the Western Highlands and Islands, c1493-1820, Edinburgh, Edinburgh University Press.

2009

106

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1907.  Dodgshon, Robert A., 1992: Farming practice in the western Highlands and Islands before crofting: a study in cultural inertia or opportunity costs?, Rural History, 3, 173-89. 1908.  Dodgshon, Robert A., 1993: Strategies of farming in the western Highlands and Islands of Scotland prior to crofting and the clearances, Economic History Review, 2nd ser., 46, 679-701. 1909.  Dodgshon, Robert A., 2004: “Coping with Risk: Subsistence Crises in the Scottish Highlands and Islands, 1600-1800” in Rural History, 15:1, 1-26. 1910.  Dodgshon, Robert A., 2005: “The Little Ice Age in the Scottish Highlands and Islands: Documenting its Human Impact” in Scottish Geographical Journal, 121:4, 321-37. 1911.  Dodille, Norbert, Oceán indien, Disponível online em url: http://www.culturesfrance.com/ adpf-publi/folio/mondes_francophones/10.pdf. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 1912.  Dodille, Norbert, 2009: Idees et Representations Coloniales dans L’ocean Indien, Presses de l’Université de Paris-Sorbonne (PUPS). 1913.  Dods, Clement (ed.), 1999: Cyprus: The Need for New Perspectives, The Eothen Press. 1914.  Dodson, Jualynne E., in collaboration with José Millet Batista, 2008: Sacred spaces and religious traditions in Oriente Cuba, Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press. 1915.  Dolley, Jacques, 1987: L’Indonesie: 13 000 Iles et cinq principles, croissance des jeunes nations, no 290, pp. 19-26 1916.  Dollfus, O., 1995: “L’émergence des régions planétaires”, Sciences Humaines, hors série, n° 8, pp. 24-30. 1917.  Dolman, (A.), 1985: «Paradise Lost? The Past Performance and Future Prospects of Small Island Developing Countries», in DOMMEN (E.), HEIN (P.) (eds), States, Microstates and Islands, Londres, Croom Helm, pp. 40-69. 1918.  Domashnev, A. D, T.N. Drozdova, 1985: Severnoe chudo--Solove t ska i a krepost, Moskva: Stroĭizdat. 1919.  Dommen, E., (ed.). 1980: Islands, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon. 1920.  Dommen, (E.), 1985: «What is a Microstate?», in Dommen (E.), Hein (P.)(eds), States, Microstates and Islands, Londres, Croom Helm, pp. 1-15. 1921.  Dommen, E. and Hein, I. (eds), 1985: States, Microstates and Islands, Kent: Croom Helm Ltd. 1922.  Donahue, David M., 2002: Rhode Island’s Last Holdout: Tenure and Married Women Teachers at the Brink of the Women’s Movement, History of Education Quarterly, Vol. 42, No. 1 (Spring), pp. 50-74 1923.  Donaldson, Roderick N., 1981: A guide to the laws of the Cayman Islands Hialeah, Fla.: Peninsular Productions. 1924.  Donatos, G. and Zairis, P., 1991: Seasonality of foreign tourism in the Greek island of Crete, Annals of Tourism Research, 18(3), pp. 515-519. 1925.  Donawerth, Jane L.; Kolmerten, Carol A., edited by, 1994: Lee Cullen Khanna -- Islands of Felicity: women seeing utopia in seventeenth-century France, in Utopian and science fiction by women: worlds of difference, foreword by Susan Gubar, Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press. 1926.  Donegan, compiled and edited by Terence, 1982: The Companies Ordinance, 1981, for and on behalf of the Government of the Turks and Caicos Islands, [S.l.]: Govt. of the Turks and Caicos Islands.

2009

CEHA

107

1927.  Donkin, R. A., 1997: Between East and West: The Moluccas and the Traffic in Spices Up to the Arrival of Europeans, American Philosophical Society. 1928.  Donnell, Alison, 2006: Twentieth-Century Caribbean Literature: Critical Moments in Anglophone Literary History, London: Routledge. 1929.  Donoghue, Eddie, 2002: Black women/white men: the sexual exploitation of female slaves in the Danish West Indies, Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press,. 1930.  Donovan, Kenneth, 1985: Cape Breton at 200: historical essays in honour of the island’s bicentennial, 1785-1985, Sydney, N.S., University College of Cape Breton Press. 1931.  Dookhan, Isaac, 1994: A History of the Virgin Islands of the United States, University of the West Indies Press. 1932.  Doran, Adelaide LeMert, 1980: Pieces of eight Channel Islands: a bibliographical guide and source book, Glendale, Calif.: A.H. Clark Co.. 1933.  Doran, S., 2001: Toeing the line; Australia’s abandonment of traditional West New Guinea policy, The journal of Pacific History, 36, 1, pp.5-18 1934.  Dornan, Brian, 2000: Mayo’s lost islands: the Inishkeas, Dublin: Four Courts. 1935.  Dorney, S., 1990: Papua New Guinea: people, politics and history since 1975, Milsons Point, NSW: Random House Australia. 1936.  Dorney, S., 1995: Reporting from Port Moresby, Lal, B.V. and Nelson, H., eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp225-29 1937.  Dorrance, J.C., 1989: The Pacific Islands and U.S. security interests. A new era poses new challenges, Asian survey, vol. vol. 29, no 7, pp. 698-715 1938.  Dorrance, John C., 1992: The United States and the Pacific Islands, foreword by William J. Crowe, Jr., Westport, Conn.: Praeger. 1939.  Dorras, Jo, Peter Walker, 1998: The old stories: a play about the history of Vanuatu, [Port Vila, Vanuatu: Wan Smolbag Theatre. 1940.  D’Orso, Michael, 2002: Plundering paradise: the hand of man on the Galápagos islands, New York: HarperCollins Publishers. 1941.  Doster Edited by Stephen, 2008: Voices from St. Simons: personal narratives of an island’s past, John F. Blair, Publisher 1942.  Douaire-Marsaudon, F. & C. Zheng, 2005: Dynamiques identitaires en Asie et dans le Pacifique, vol. 1: Enjeux sociaux, économiques et politiques, vol. 2: Pratiques symboliques en transition, Aix-en-Provence: Publications de l’Université de Provence. 1943.  Douaire-Marsaudon, F.; Tcherkézoff, S., 1997: Le Pacifique Sud aujourd’hui: identités et transformations culturelles, Paris, CNRS éditions. 1944.  Douaire-Marsaudon, Françoise, 1998: Les premiers fruits: parenté, identité sexuelle et pouvoirs en Polynésie occidentale (Tonga, Wallis et Futuna), Paris, CNRS editions, Editions de la Maison des sciences de l’homme. 1945.  Dougherty, Michael, 1992: To Steal a Kingdom, Island Style Press. 1946.  Douglas, B., 1999: Art as ethno-historical text; science, representation and indigenous presence in 18th and 19th century oceanic voyaging literature, in Thomas, N. and Losche D, 1999, eds, Double vision; art histories and colonial histories in the Pacific, CUP, Melbourne pp.65-102 1947.  Douglas, N., 1996: The allocentrics, Lismore, Southern Cross University Press

2009

108

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

1948.  Douglas, N., 1997: Applying the life cycle model to Melanesia, Annals of Tourism Research, 24(1), pp.1-22. 1949.  Douglas, Ngaire, 1996: They came for savages: 100 years of tourism in Melanesia, [Lismore, N.S.W.]: Southern Cross University Press. 1950.  Doumanis, Nicholas, Pappas, Nicholas G., 1997: Grand History in Small Places: Social Protest on Castellorizo (1934), Journal of Modern Greek Studies, Volume 15, Number 1, May pp. 103-123 1951.  Doumenge, Jean-Pierre, 1980: Les mélanésiens et leur espace en Nouvelle-Calédonie: thèse de doctorat d’état, Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Bordeaux 3, 5 vols. 1952.  Doumenge, François, 1983: Aspects de la viabilite des petits pays insulaires: etude descriptive, Geneve: Cnuced. 1953.  Doumenge, François, 1983a: Unite et diversite des caracteres naturels des iles tropicales, (conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 novembre 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no 12, pp. 11-18 1954.  Doumenge, François, 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Unite et diversite des caracteres naturels des iles tropicales, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France; CEGET; CRET, pp. 9-24. 1955.  Doumenge, J.P., 1984a: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Enjeu geopolitique et interet scientifique des espaces insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France; CEGET; CRET, pp. 1-6. 1956.  Doumenge, J.P., 1984b: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Controle de l’espace et utilisation du sol en Oceanie insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, pp. 135-140. 1957.  Doumenge, François, 1984c: Unité et diversité des caractères naturels des îles tropicales». In Nature et hommes dans les îles tropicales, Bordeaux: CRET, coll. « îles et archipels, nº 3, pp. 9-24. 1958.  Doumenge, J. P., 1985: Les mélanésiens et la société pluriethnique en Nouvelle-Calédonie, In: Ces îles ou l’on parle français, Herodote, no 37-38, pp. 98-128. 1959.  Doumenge, J. P., E. Métais, A. Saussol, 1986: La Nouvelle Calédonie: occupation de l’espace et peuplement, Talence: Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux. 1960.  Doumenge, J. P., 1986: La nouvelle-caledonie, a la recherche de son equilibre economique et de son unite sociale, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 39, no 155, p p. 221-248 1961.  Doumenge, Jean-Pierre, Villenave, D., Chapuis, Odile.,1988: Agriculture, food and nutrition in four South Pacific archipelagos: New Caledonia, Vanuatu, French Polynesia, Wallis and Futuna, Bogor (Indonésie) : CGPRT 1962.  Doumenge, J. P., 1988: Demographic, economic, socio-cultural and political facts nowadays in the French Pacific Territories, GeoJournal, Vol. 16, No. 2, Mar, 143-56 pp. Dordrecht, Netherlands. Disponível online em url  : http://www.springerlink.com/ content/028u1u2r6826k134/fulltext.pdf?page=1. consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009. 1963.  Doumenge, François, 1985: Les îles et les micro-Etats insulaires, In: Ces îles où l’on parle français, Herodote, no 37-38, pp. 297-327. 1964.  Doumenge, François, Eliane Métais, Alain Saussol, 1986: La Nouvelle-Calédonie. Occupation de l’espace et peuplement, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 1965.  Doumenge, J. P., et all…, 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Amenagements

2009

CEHA

109

touristiques et bouleversements ecologiques dans les petites iles: l’exemple de SaintMartin, Bordeaux: Cret, pp. 16-34. 1966.  Doumenge, J. P., 1987: Les Iles Seychelles, Annales de Geographie, no 533, pp. 78-102 1967.  Doumenge, J. P., 1987: Realites et perspectives geopolitiques de l’oceanie insulaire, bulletin de l’association de geographes Francais, vol. vol. 64, no 2, pp. 119-138 1968.  Doumenge, J. P.; Perrin, M.F. ; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou, ... ; Huetz De Lemps, C. ; Poirier, J. ; Clapier Valladon, S., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Essai sur une problematique de la mythologie et de la psychologie insulaires, BORDEAUX: CRET, pp. 44-56. 1969.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le geographe et les iles, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 1-6. 1970.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Doumenge, F., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Quelques contraintes du milieu insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 8-15. 1971.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Monnier, Y., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Amenagements touristiques et bouleversements ecologiques dans les petites iles: l’exemple de Saint-Martin, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 16-34. 1972.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’insularite comme dimension du fait social, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 37-43. 1973.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Poirier, J.; Clapier Valladon, S., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Essai sur une problematique de la mythologie et de la psychologie insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET p. 44-56. 1974.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Fleischmann, U., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Insularite et creolisation: approches theoriques, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET pp. 57-66. 1975.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Bonniol, J.L., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Micro-insularite et particularisme: approche comparee a partir de cas antillais et seychellois, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 67-86. 1976.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Jardel, J.P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le processus de creolisation et leur approche en milieu insulaire (Antilles-Mascareignes), Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 87-106. 1977.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lesourd, M.; Reaud Thomas, G., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le fait creole dans la formation de l’identite nationale en Republique du Cap Vert, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 107-124. 1978.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Gerbeau, H.;1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Approche historique du fait creole a la Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 125-156. 1979.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saussol, A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Peut-on parler de creolite en

2009

110

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Nouvelle-Caledonie? Reflexions autour d’une identite insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 157-164. 1980.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Giacottino, J.C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Problematique et perspectives du developpement des petits pays insulaires tropicaux de moins de 1 million d’habitants, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 167-191. 1981.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lowenthal, D., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In A propos du developpement insulaire: besoins, incertitudes, resistances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 193-207. 1982.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Dommen, E.; Lebale, N., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Caracteristiques des exportations de services des pays insulaires, BORDEAUX Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 209-228. 1983.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Dommen, E., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme», In Les zones franches industrielles d’exportation (ZFIE) dans les iles, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 229-239. 1984.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lefevre, D., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Les structures spatiales reunionnaises, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 241-260. 1985.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Rochoux, J.Y., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Du sucre aux services ou du developpement economique a La Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 261-272. 1986.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Squarzoni, R., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’emploi a La Reunion: quelques reflexions et propositions, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,. pp. 273294. 1987.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Berron, H., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Les petites activites dans le developpement des Hauts de La Reunion: le cas des chambres d’hotes, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 295-303. 1988.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saddul, P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Disparites dans le developpement regional de l’ile Maurice: une approche geographique et economique, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 305-318. 1989.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Tentatives de diversification d’une economie de plantation: le cas de l’ile Maurice, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 319-330. 1990.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Mutations economiques et saturation du tissu urbain dans l’ile de Mahe (Seychelles), Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 351-360. 1991.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In De la primaute des plantations a l’economie de

2009

CEHA

111

services: l’exemple des Hawaii, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 360-398. 1992.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Miras, C. De., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’economie martiniquaise: developpement sans croissance, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 399-420. 1993.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Verin, P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’archipel ecartele: problemes de la gestion de l’etat multi-insulaire des Comores, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 436-442. 1994.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Houbert, J., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme” In L’Independance de Maurice et ses dependances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 443-457. 1995.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Castel, A. Du., Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Insularisme et desordre politique: autour du cas Sri Lanka, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 459-467. 1996.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; De Deckker, P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Statut constitutionnel insulaire et espace autonome dans le Pacifique, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 469-483. 1997.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Huetz de Lemps, A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Rapport de synthese: iles, insularite, «insularisme, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 487-499. 1998.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Roca, P.J., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Haiti en quete d’avenir, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 421-434. 1999.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lassere, G., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le geographe et les iles, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET. 2000.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Doumenge, F., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Quelques contraintes du milieu insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET. 2001.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Doumenge, F., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’insularite comme dimension du fait social, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET. 2002.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Poirier, J.; Clapier Valladon, S., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Essai sur une problematique de la mythologie et de la psychologie insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 44-56. 2003.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Fleischmann, U., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Insularite et creolisation: approches theoriques, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET. 2004.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Bonniol, J.L., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Micro-insularite et particularisme: approche comparee a partir de cas antillais et seychellois, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET.

2009

112

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2005.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Jardel, J.P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le processus de creolisation et leur approche en milieu insulaire (Antilles-Mascareignes), Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 87-106. 2006.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lesourd, M.; Reaud Thomas, G., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le fait creole dans la formation de l’identite nationale en Republique du Cap Vert, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 107-124. 2007.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Gerbeau, H., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Approche historique du fait creole a la Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 125-156. 2008.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saussol, A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Peut-on parler de creolite en Nouvelle-Caledonie? Reflexions autour d’une identite insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 157-164. 2009.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Giacottino, J.C., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Problematique et perspectives du developpement des petits pays insulaires tropicaux de moins de 1 million d’habitants, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 167-191. 2010.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lowenthal, D., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In A propos du developpement insulaire: besoins, incertitudes, resistances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 193-207. 2011.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Dommen, E.; Lebale, N., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Caracteristiques des exportations de services des pays insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 209-228. 2012.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Dommen, E., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les zones franches industrielles d’exportation (ZFIE) dans les iles, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 229-239. 2013.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lefevre, D., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les structures spatiales reunionnaises, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 241-260. 2014.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Rochoux, J.Y., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Du sucre aux services ou du developpement economique a La Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 261-272. 2015.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Squarzoni, R., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’emploi a La Reunion: quelques reflexions et propositions, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 273294. 2016.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Berron, H., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les petites activites dans le developpement des Hauts de La Reunion: le cas des chambres d’hotes, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 295-303 2017.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saddul,

2009

CEHA

113

P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Disparites dans le developpement regional de l’ile Maurice: une approche geographique et economique, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 305-318. 2018.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Singaravelou, 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Tentatives de diversification d’une economie de plantation: le cas de l’ile Maurice, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 319-330. 2019.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Hein, C., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les zones franches industrielles dans les etats insulaires: le cas de Maurice, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 331-350. 2020.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Mutations economiques et saturation du tissu urbain dans l’ile de Mahe (Seychelles), Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 351-360. 2021.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», l’exemple des Hawaii, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 360-398. 2022.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Miras, C.De., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’economie martiniquaise: developpement sans croissance, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 399-420. 2023.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Verin, P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’archipel ecartele: problemes de la gestion de l’etat multi-insulaire des Comores, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 436-442. 2024.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Houbert, J., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’Independance de Maurice et ses dependances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 443-457. 2025.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Castel, A. Du. 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Insularisme et desordre politique: autour du cas Sri Lanka, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 459-467. 2026.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; De Deckker, P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Statut constitutionnel insulaire et espace autonome dans le Pacifique, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 469-483. 2027.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Huetz de Lemps, A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Rapport de synthese: iles, insularite, “insularisme”, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 487-499. 2028.  Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Roca, P.J., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Haiti en quete d’avenir, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 421-434. 2029.  Doumenge, François (1926-2008), Huetz de lemps, A.; Chapuis, O., 1988: Contribution française à la connaissance géographique des mers du Sud: bibliographie des principaux travaux scientifiques français traitant des océans Pacifique et Indien, des mers Australes et de leurs îles = French contribution to the scientific research on the Southern seas : bibliography of the main scientific French works on the tropical Pacific ocean, Indian

2009

114

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

ocean, Austral ocean and their islands, Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux: Centre d’études de géographie tropicale. 2030.  Doumenge, François, 1988: Critères de base pour une estimation de viabilité des petits états insulaires, In CEGET-CNRS, Centre d’Etudes de Géographie Tropicale (Talence); Comité Franco-Japonais de Géographie (Paris); CRET, Centre de Recherches sur les Espaces Tropicaux, Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3, Géographie et écologie des milieux tropicaux: Problèmes d’analyse, et d’aménagement et de développement: IVe Colloque Franco-Japonais de Géographie, Talence, 1-4 Octobre 1985, Talence: CEGET-CNRS. 2031.  Doumenge, François, 1989: “Les îles tropicales: un monde de priviligiés ou un monde de laissés-pour-compte ?”, in Pauvreté et développement dans les pays tropicaux, Hommage à Guy Lasserre. Bordeaux, CEGET, p. 73-84. 2032.  Doumenge, François, 1989-a: “Basic criteria for estimating the viability of small island states” in L. (ed.) et alii., The economic development of small countries. Problems, strategies and policies, Delft, Eburon Publishers, p. 39-56. 2033.  Doumenge, François, Yves Monnier, 1989-b: Les Antilles Francaises, Presses universitaires de France. 2034.  Doumenge, François, 1990: “La dynamique géopolitique du Pacifique Sud”, Les Cahiers d’foutremer, nº170, p. 113-188. 2035.  Doumenge, François, Peter-John Perry, Alain Huetz de Lemps, 1990: Géopolitique du Pacifique Sud, Tiré à part des Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, n° 170/avr.-juin 1990, Iles et archipels n° 11, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 2036.  Doumenge François, 1991: Le Pacifique, L’océan, ses rivages et ses îles/The Pacific. The Ocean, its Shores and Islands. Colloque organisé par la Fondation Singer-Polignac «Trente ans de recherche scientifique française dans le Pacifique (1960-1990)», 6 nov. 1990, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 2037.  Doumenge, J. P., 1991: “Rapport de synthèse. Traits de permanence et diversité du devenir des pays insulaires», In UNESCO (ed), Culture des îles et développement. Islands’ culture and development. Etudes prospectives/Future-oriented studies, Paris, UNESCO & Fondation pour la coopération culturelle ACP-CEE/Foundation for ACP-EEC Cultural Cooperation, pp. 223-236. 2038.  Doumenge, J. P., 1995: L’urbanisation a Guam, In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 347-380. 2039.  Doumenge, J. P., Frederic Angleviel, Michel Charleux, William G. Coppell ed., 1991 : Le Pacifique Sud: bibliographie des theses et memoires recents = The South Pacific: a bibliography of the recent theses and dissertations, Talence [France]: Centre de recherche sur les espaces tropicaux-CRET, Institut de geographie, Universite de Bordeaux III: Centre d’etudes de geographie tropicale-CEGET-CNRS. 2040.  Dovert, Stéphane, 2001: “Timor Loro Sa’e, un nouvel État à l’heure du village global ? : réflexions sur nos mythes et nos modes” , in Lusotopie, pp. 327-345. 2041.  Dowdeswell, J. A.; Hambrey, Michael, 2002: Islands of the Artic, New York: Cambridge University Press. 2042.  Downs, I., 1980: The Australian Trusteeship; Papua New Guinea 1945-75, Canberra, AGPS. 2043.  Doyle, Neville, 1991: From Sea-eagle to Flamingo: Channel Island airlines, 1923-1939,

2009

CEHA

115

Upton-upon-Severn: Self Publishing Association. 2044.  DRAC, 1986: Actas do I Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, 2 vols, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo Cultura e Emigração, Direcção Regional dos Assuntos Culturais. 2045.  Drakakis-Smith, D.; Lockhart, D.; Schemberi, J. (eds)., 1998: The development process in small islands states, Londres, Routledge. 2046.  Drakard, Jane, 1999: A Kingdom of Words: Language and Power in Sumatra, Oxford University Press. 2047.  Drake, D. R.; Mulder C.P.H.; Towns D.R.; Daugherty C.H., 2002: The biology of insularity: an introduction, Journal of Biogeography, Volume 29, Numbers 5-6, May/June, pp. 563569(7). 2048.  Dransfield, J.; Beentje, H., 1995: The Palms of Madagascar, Kew: Royal Botanical Gardens and International Palm Society. 2049.  Driessen, H. A. H., 1982: “Outriggerless canoes and glorious beings: pre-contact prophecies in the Society Islands”, in Journal of Pacific History, 17:1, 3-28. 2050.  Driver, Marjory, 1989: Fray Juan Pobre in the Marianas, 1602, Mangilao, Guam: Micronesian Area Research Center, University of Guam. 2051.  Drouin, Jean-Marc, 1991: “Quelques figures de l’insularité - Réflexions sur la biogéographie”, Maîtres et protecteurs de la nature, Alain Roger et François Guéry dir., Paris, Champ Vallon, 338, pp. 197-216. 2052.  Drower, G. M. F., 1992: Britain’s dependent territories: a fistful of islands, Aldershot, Hants, England; Brookfield, Vt.: Dartmouth. 2053.  Druett, Joan, 2007: Island of the lost: shipwrecked at the edge of the world, Chapel Hill, N.C.: Algonquin Books of Chapel Hill. 2054.  DT Hughes and SK Laughlin, 1982: Key elements in the evolving political culture of the FSM, PS, 6, 1, 71-84, 1982. 2055.  Du Puy, D.; [et al.], 1999: The Orchids of Madagascar, Kew: Royal Botanical Gardens. 2056.  Dubesset, Eric., 1991: La Caraibe precolombienne: le cas de Cuba, Santo Domingo et Puerto Rico, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, ufr d’Espagnol. 2057.  Dubois, Laurent, and John D. Garrigus, 2006: Slave revolution in the Caribbean, 17891804: a brief history with documents, Boston, MA; New York, NY: Palgrave. 2058.  Dubon, Ferran Dídac Lluch I, 1997: Geografia de les Illes Balears, presentació, Gaspar Valero i Martí, pròleg, Joana Maria Petrus Bey, Lluch i Dubon, Ferran Dídac. 2059.  Dudley, Michael Kioni and Keoni Kealoha Agard, 1993: Call for Hawaiian Sovereignty, Na Kane O Ka Malo Press. 2060.  Duenas Jollard, P., 2001: Le traitement de l’insularité en Europe, Palma de Mallorca, Publications du Gouvernement des Baleares 2061.  Duféal, Marina, 2005: L’inscription spatiale de l’insularité: la Corse séparée de la Francesur le web, Annales de géographie, septembre-octobre, vol. 114, no 645, p. 496-509 2062.  Duhaut-Cilly, Auguste, 1999: Voyage autour du monde, principalement à la Californie et aux îles Sandwich, pendant les années 1826, 1827, 1828, et 1829. A voyage to California, the Sandwich Islands & around the world in the years, 1826-1829; translated and edited by August Frugé and Neal Harlow, Berkeley: University of California Press.

2009

116

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2063.  Dumond, Don E., 2001: Archaeology in the Aleut zone of Alaska: some recent research, Dept. of Anthropology and Museum of Natural History, University of Oregon. 2064.  Dumotier-Sigwalt, E., 2002: ‘Le Grand insulaire et pilotage d’André Thevet: une oeuvre iconographique du XVIe siècle, magistrale et “naufragée”,’ in M. Pelletier, ed., Les îles, du mythe à la réalité, Paris, CTHS, pp. 101-121. 2065.  Dun, G. S., 1954: “Annual report of the Senior Entomologist, Department of Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries 1952-1953.” In New Guinea Agricultural Gazette 8(3): 18-27, DTCA Provincial Rural Transport Study - WNB Report. TP O’Sullivan and Partners, Gitec Consult GMBH, and Gardno and Devies PNG Pty Ltd. Port Moresby, DTCA. 2066.  Dun, James Alexander 2005: “What Avenues of Commerce, Will You, Americans, Not Explore!”: Commercial Philadelphia’s Vantage onto the Early Haitian Revolution, William And Mary Quarterly, Vol 62; Numb 3, pp 473-504. 2067.  Dunlop, P., 1982: Samoan Parents and the Primary School, New Zealand Education Department. 2068.  Dunlop, P., 1983: `As Others See Us’, National Education, New Zealand Education Institute, November 2069.  Dunmore, S., 1982: “The castle in the Isle of Lundy”, in Proceedings of the Devon Archaeological Society, 40, 153-62, Publisher: Devon Archaeological Society. 2070.  Dunn, Charles. W., 1991: Highland Settler A Portrait of the Scottish Gael, in Cape Breton and Eastern Nova Scotia. Breton Books Wreck Cove, Cape Breton Island. 2071.  Dunn, Michael, Angela Terrill, Ger Reesink, Robert A. Foley, Stephen C. Levinson, 2005: “Structural Phylogenetics and the Reconstruction of Ancient Language History”, Science, 309: 2072–2075. 2072.  Dunn, Richard S., 2000: “The English sugar islands and the founding of South Carolina”, in South Carolina Historical Magazine, 101:2, 142-54. 2073.  Dupon, J.-F. (dir.), 1993: Atlas de la Polynésie française, Paris, ORSTOM. 2074.  Dupon, Jean Francois, 1985: “Les Seychelles du rêve à la réalité”, In: Ces îles où l’on parle français, Hérodote, (37-38), p. 237-248. 2075.  Dupuy, Alex, 1982: Class formation and underdevelopment in nineteenth-century Haiti, Race & Class, Jan; vol. 24: pp. 17 - 31. 2076.  Duquette, M., Van Eeuwen, D., 2005: La périphéricité: du concept au lobby politique, L’Espace Politique, 2 | 2007-2 2077.  Durán Bernal, Carlos Andrés, 2007: ¿Es nuestra isla para dos?: conflicto por el desarrollo y la conservación en Islas del Rosario, Cartagena, Bogotá D.C., Colombia: Universidad de Los Andes, Facultad de Ciencias Sociales-Ceso, Departamento de Antropología. 2078.  Durand, Frédéric, 2001: “Timor Loro Sa’e: la déstructuration d’un territoire”, in Lusotopie, pp.215- 232. 2079.  Durand, Frédéric, 2004: Catholicisme et protestantisme dans l’île de Timor: 1556-2003: Construction d’une identité chrétienne et engagement politique contemporain, Toulouse; Bangkok: Arkuiris; IRASEC, 2080.  Durand, Frédéric et Romain Pirard, 2008: Quarante ans de politiques forestières en Indonésie, 1967-2007: la tentation de la capture par les élites, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 244, Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index5384.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.

2009

CEHA

117

2081.  Durand, Olivier, 2003: La lingua còrsa, Paideia Editrice, Brescia. 2082.  Dureau, Christine, 1998: Decreed affinities: nationhood and the Western Solomon Islands, Journal of Pacific History, 33:2, 197-220. 2083.  Dureau, Christine, 1998: From sisters to wives: changing contexts of maternity on Simbo, western Solomon Islands’, In Ram, Kalpana; Jolly, Margaret Anne (ed.), Maternities and modernities: colonial and postcolonial experiences in Asia and the Pacific, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 239-74. 2084.  Duriez, C., 1987: Les termes du régionalisme dans l’évolution historique du Pacifique Sud de 1945 à 1985, Paris, Université de Paris VII, mémoire de DEA. 2085.  Duriez-Toutain, Caroline, 1996: Présence et perceptions maristes à Tonga, 1840-1900, Iles et archipels n° 22, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 2086.  Durix, Jean-Pierre, 1998: Literary archipelagos, Dijon, Editions universitaires de Dijon. 2087.  Durrell, G., 1994: Aye-Aye and I: Rescue Expedition in Madagascar, Vifiko Africa: Publication Tag for Madagascar. 2088.  d’Urville, Jules-Sébastien-César Dumont (dir.), 1988: Voyage pittoresque autour du monde: îles Marquises, île de Pâques, Tuamotu, îles de la Société, îles Australes, Papeete. 2089.  Dutra, Francis A., 2001: «The Order of Santiago and the Portuguese Atlantic Islands, 1492-1777», pp. 257-277, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/ Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 2090.  Dutson, G., 1999: “Notes on the Melanesian megapode Megapodius eremita and Vanuatu megapode Megapodius layardi,” in Megapode Newsletter, 13(1): 5. 2091.  Dutton, T., Ed. 1992: Culture change, language change: case studies from Melanesia, Canberra, Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. 2092.  Duursmaa, J. C., 1996: Self determination, statehood and international relations of micro states: the cases of Liechtenstein, San Marino, Monaco, Andorra and the Vatican city, Leyden: Leyden University. 2093.  Duvat, Virginie, 2006: Mondialisation touristique et environnement dans les petites îles tropicales, Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, vol. 59, no 236, p. 513-539. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index616.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 2094.  Duyker, Edward (ed.), 1992: The Discovery of Tasmania: Journal Extracts from the Expeditions of Abel Janszoon Tasman and Marc-Joseph Marion Dufresne 1642 & 1772, St David’s Park Publishing/Tasmanian Government Printing Office, Hobart. 2095.  Dworkin, G., 1988: The theory and practice of autonomy, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 2096.  Dwyer, R. E. P., 1953: “Diseases of coconuts (Cocos nucifera) in Papua and New Guinea,” in New Guinea Agricultural Gazette, 8(1): 24-40. 2097.  Dyde, Brian, 2005: Out of the crowded vagueness: a history of the islands of St. Kitts, Nevis & Anguilla, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean. 2098.  Dye, Alan and Richard Sicotte, 2004: The U.S. Sugar Program and the Cuban Revolution, The Journal of Economic History, vol. 64, issue 03, pages 673-704. 2099.  Dyson, Stephen L. and Robert J. Rowland, Jr., 2008: Archaeology and History in Sardinia

2009

118

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

from the Stone Age to the Middle Ages. Shepherds, Sailors, and Conquerors, (Philadelphia: The University of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology). 2100.  Easter, C., 1999: “Small states development: a Commonwealth vulnerability index”, The Round Table, n°351, p. 403-422. 2101.  Easterly, W.; Kraay, A., 2000: “Small States, small problems?”, World development, n°11, p. 2013-2027. 2102.  Easton, M., 1985: Papua New Guinea in Oceania: a regional study F.M. Bunge, M.W. Cooke (eds.). Washington DC: US Print. Off., pp. 137-206. 2103.  Eaton, P., 1986: Grassroots conservation: wildlife management areas in Papua New Guinea, Land Studies Centre Report 86/1, University of Papua New Guinea. 2104.  Ebanks, S. O., 1983: Cayman emerges: a human history of long ago Cayman, [Cayman Islands?]: Northwester Co.. 2105.  Echeverri Gent, E., 1995: The Society and Its Environment in Honduras: a country study (pp. 63 106). Washington DC: GPO. 2106.  Eckhaus, R., 1997: “Is it Beautiful to be Small, or is it a Burden?”, Journal of Eastern Caribbean Studies, n°4,p. 1-30. 2107.  Economides, B., 1987: Réflexions sur la défense d’îles et d’archipels, Athènes. 2108.  Edinval, Eryc (dir.); Maurin, Alain (dir.); Montauban, Jean Gabriel (dir.); Abraham Frois, Gilbert (pref.). 1997: Strategies de developpement comparees dans la Caraibe, S.L.: L’HERMES. 2109.  Edmond, edited by Rod and Vanessa Smith, 2003: Islands in history and representation, London; New York: Routledge. 2110.  Edmond, Rod, 2003: ‘Abject bodies/abject sites: leper islands in the high imperial era’. In Edmond, Rod; Smith, Vanessa (ed.), Islands in history and representation, London: Routledge,, 133-45 2111.  Edmunds, J.E., 1983: Recherche et developpement du plantain dans les windward islands, Fruits, vol. vol. 38, no 4, p. p. 333-337 2112.  Edridge, S., 1985: Solomon Islands Bibliography to 1980, Honiara: Institute of Pacific Studies, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji, The Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, New Zealand and the Solomon Islands National Library, Honiara. 2113.  Edwards, Elizabeth (eds), 1992: Anthropology and Photography, 1860-1920, New Haven: Yale University Press. 2114.  Edwards, Kevin J., 2005: “On the Windy Edge of Nothing”, A Historical Human Ecology of the Faroe Islands, Human Ecology, 33: 585-596 2115.  Eeuwen (van), D. (dir.), 1997: “Nouvelles intégrations latino-américaines et Caraïbes. Régionalisme ouvert et mondialisation”, Annales d’Amérique latine et des Caraïbes, nº 14-15, p. 255-296. 2116.  Efstratiou, Nicholas, 1985: Agios Petros: a neolithic site in the northern Sporades: Aegean relationships during the Neolithic of the 5th millennium, Oxford [Oxfordshire], England, B.A.R.. 2117.  Eilenburg, M., 1981: American policy in Micronesia, Journal of Pacific History, 17, 62-64. 2118.  Eisenlohr, Patrick, 2006: Little India: Diaspora, Time, and Ethnolinguistic Belonging in Hindu Mauritius, Berkeley: University of California Press

2009

CEHA

119

2119.  Eisenman, Stephen F. 1997: Gauguin’s Skirt. London: Thames and Hudson. 2120.  Eisler, W., 1995: The furthest shore; Images of Terra Australis from the Middle Ages to Captain Cook, CUP, Melbourne 2121.  Eiusler, W., and Smith B., 1988: Terra Australis; the furthest shore, Sydney, Art Gallery of New South Wales 2122.  El-Agraa, A., 1999: Regional integration: experience, theory and measurement, Lanham, Barnes & Noble. 2123.  Elder, P., 2001: The winds of change: E.W.P. Chinnery (1887-1972) and F. G. G. Rose (1915-1991) in the Australian Territories, The South Pacific Journal of Philosophy and Culture, 5: 50-93. 2124.  Eldridge, Robert D., 2001: The Origins of the Bilateral Okinawa Problem: Okinawa in Postwar, Garland Publishing 2125.  Eldridge, Robert D., 2004: The return of the Amami Islands: the reversion movement and U.S.-Japan relations, Lanham, Md.; Oxford: Lexington Books. 2126.  Electronic Journals Library, 1997-2009: The Elektronische Zeitschriftenbibliothek EZB (Electronic Journals Library), University Library of Regensburg. Disponível online em url: http://rzblx1.uni-regensburg.de/ezeit/index.phtml?bibid=AAAAA&colors=7&lang=en. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009. 2127.  Elferink, (A.G.O.), 2001: «The Islands in the South China Sea: How Does Their Presence Limit the Extent of the High Seas and the Area and the Maritime Zones of the Mainland Coasts?», Ocean Development and International Law, 32(2), p. 169-190. 2128.  Elías de Zevallos, Hilda, 1995: El entorno de Isabel Barreto Castro de Mendaña y su viaje hacia las Islas Salomon, 1595-1596, Lima, Perú: Asociación Nacional Pro-Marina del Perú 2129.  Eliis, William, 2005: The American mission in the Sandwich islands: a vindication and an appeal, in relation to the proceedings of the Reformed Catholic Mission at Honolulu, Ann Arbor, Michigan: University of Michigan Library. Disponível online em url: http://quod.lib. umich.edu/cgi/t/text/text-idx?c=moa;idno=AGA4516. Consulta em 22 de julho de 2009. 2130.  Elizalde, Ma. Dolores; Fradera, Josep M.; Alonso, Luis, eds. 2001: Imperios y naciones en el Pacífico, Madrid: Asociación Española de Estudios del Pacífico: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas. 2131.  Ellada, Kriti, 1994: Portrait of the Islands, Luxembourg, European Commission. Eurostat. 2132.  Elliot, L. and Ryan, C., 1993: The impact of crime on Corsican tourism - a descriptive assessment, World Travel and Tourism Review, 3, pp.287-293. 2133.  Elliott, Jacqueline D., 1988: Pacific law bibliography, London: Commonwealth Legal Education Association, 2134.  Elliott, Jacqueline D., 1990: Pacific law bibliography, 2nd ed. Hobart, Tas. : Pacific Law Press. 2135.  Ellis, J., 1998: ‘Literary Cartographies in Oceania’ in L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J.Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The Literature of Small Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island, pp. 51-64. 2136.  Ellis, W.S.; Blair, J. P., 1986: A way of life lost; Bikini, National Geographic, 169, 6, 813-34. 2137.  Ellison, George T. H., 2005: ‘Growth of Jersey Schoolchildren During the 1940-1945

2009

120

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

German Occupation: Comparison with Schoolchildren on Mainland Britain’, Human Biology, 77:6, 761-72. 2138.  Ellison, J. C., 1997: Mangrove ecosystems of the Western and Gulf Provinces of Papua New Guinea, a review, Science in New Guinea, 23(1): 3-16. 2139.  Ellul, A., 1998: Sustainable Tourism Development in Small Island Developing States: with Special Reference to the Indian Ocean, Mediterranean, Atlantic Small Island Developing States. Malte, Paper Presented at the Conference on the Sustainable Development of Small Island Developing States. 2140.  Ellwood, Robert S., 1993: Islands of the dawn: the story of alternative spirituality in New Zealand, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 2141.  Emmer, Pieter C., 1999: New societies: the Caribbean in the long sixteenth century, co-editor, German Carrera Damas, London: published jointly by UNESCO Publishing/ Macmillan Education Ltd.. 2142.  Enenkio Atoll Consulate General, 1996: The Kingdom of Enenkio Atoll- A Pacific Island Sanctuary. August, Disponível online em url: http://www.mail-archive.com/cpunks@ einstein.ssz.com/msg00979.html. Visita a 29 de julho de 2009. 2143.  Engélibert, Jean-Paul, 2003: Problèmes de l’insularité: la clôture et la fente dans Le Château des Carpathes, L’Île du docteur Moreau et L’Invention de Morel, Revue de littérature comparée, nº 305/1, p. 23-34. 2144.  English, Christopher John Basil, (ed.), 2005: Two islands: Newfoundland and Prince Edward Island (Essays in the history of Canadian law, 9). Toronto: University of Toronto Press for the Osgoode Society for Canadian Legal History. 2145.  Enright, Tim, 1988: George Thomson, a memoir, Dingle, Co. Kerry, Ireland; Wolfeboro, N.H.: Brandon. 2146.  Ensenyat Pujol, Gabriel, La literatura catalana medieval a Mallorca, [Palma de Mallorca]: El Tall Editorial. 2147.  Environnement et patrimoine culturel de la région de Fort-Liberté, Port-au-Prince/Nantes. Projet “Route 2004”. Ministère de la Culture (Haïti)/PNUD. 2148.  Épailly, Eugène, 1986: Les Anciens pénitenciers insulaires de Guyane, les îles du Salut, l’îlet la Mère, [Cayenne], Impr. les Amandiers. 2149.  Epstein, A. L., 1984: The experience of shame in Melanesia: an essay in the anthropology of affect, London: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland. 2150.  Erb, Maribeth, 1997: Contested Time and Place: Constructions of History in Todo, Manggarai (Western Flores, Indonesia), Journal of Southeast Asian Studies, Vol. 28. 2151.  Eric, Solsten, ed., 1991: Cyprus: A Country Study, Washington: GPO for the Library of Congress. 2152.  Erickson, Brice, 2005:Archaeology of Empire: Athens and Crete in the Fifth Century B.C. Archaeology of Empire: Athens and Crete in the Fifth Century B.C., American Journal of Archaeology, 109, Issue: 4, October, pp: 619-663. Disponível online em url: http://www. atypon-link.com/AIA/doi/abs/10.3764/AJA.109.4.619. consulta a 21 de Agosto de 2009. 2153.  Erisman, M., 1983: Tourism and cultural dependency in the West Indies, Annals of Tourism Research, 10(3), pp.337-362. 2154.  Ernst, Manfred, 1994: Winds of change: rapidly growing religious groups in the Pacific Islands, Suva, Fiji: Pacific Conference of Churches.

2009

CEHA

121

2155.  Erotokritakis, K. and Andriotis, K., 2007: Residents’ perceptions towards tourism in a rural Cretan community, Paper presented at the International Conference of Trends, Impacts and Policies on Tourism Development, 15-18 June 2007, Heraklion, Greece. Disponível online em url: http://tourism-conference.eap.gr/pdf%20files/Erotokritakis%20K.%20&%20 Andriotis%20K.pdf. 2156.  Escallier, directeur de publication Robert, 2004: Modernité et insularité en Méditérranée, Nice: CMMC, UFR lettres, arts et sciences humaines. 2157.  Escandell Bonet, Bartolomé, 1992: Baleares y América, Madrid: Editorial MAPFRE. 2158.  Escobar, A., 2001: ‘Culture Sits in Places: Reflections on Globalism and Subaltern Strategies of Localization’, Political Geography, Vol. 20, No. 2, pp. 139-174. 2159.  Espach, R. ; Tulchin, J. (eds), 2000: Security in the Caribbean basin: the challenge of regional cooperation, Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers. 2160.  Essig, F. B., 1992: “A new species of Heterospathe (Palmae) from New Britain”, Principes, 36(1): 4-6. 2161.  Essig, F. B., 1995: “A Checklist and Analysis of the Palms of the Bismarck Archipelago”, Principes, 39(3). 2162.  Estensen, M., 2006: Terra Australis Incognita: The Spanish Quest for the mysterious Great South Land, Allen & Unwin, Australia. 2163.  Ette, Tomar, 2005: Una literatura sin residencia fija. Insularidad, historia y dinámica sociocultural en la Cuba del siglo XX, Revista de Indias, vol. LXV, núm. 235, Págs. 729754. 2164.  EURISLES, 1997: Indicateurs statistiques des disparités régionales engendrées par l’insularité et l’ultrapériphéricité, Rennes, Eurisles 2165.  EURISLES, 1999: Les régions insulaires et le prix du transport de marchandises intracommunautaire, Rennes, Eurisles 2166.  EURISLES, 2002: Au large de l’Europe. La construction européenne et la problématique des îles, Rennes, Eurisles 2167.  EURISLES, 2003: Les transports insulaires et l’UE, Rennes, Eurisles 2168.  Eurisles; 1981: Iles de Méditerranée, CNRS-Paris. 2169.  Eustis, Nelson, [1979] 1980: Aggie Grey of Samoa. Adelaide, South Australia: Hobby Investments. 2170.  Evans, B. R., 1994: Kandrian-Gloucester Development Study West New Britain. Canberra and Kimbe, Project Design and Management and Kandrian and Gloucester Integrated Development Project. 2171.  Evans, B. R., 1994: Marketing galip nut (Canarium spp.) in Kandrian and Gloucester Districts, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Canberra and Kimbe, PO Box 507. 2172.  Evans, Dorothy, 1994: Schooling in the South Atlantic Islands, 1661-1992, Oswestry: Anthony Nelson. 2173.  Evans, G, 1989: Australia in the South Pacific, World Review, Vol 28/2 2174.  Evans, G., and Brant, B, 1991: Australia’s foreign relations in the world of the 1980’s, Melbourne, OUP 2175.  Evans, J., 1973: “Islands as laboratories for the study of culture process” in The explanation of culture change: models in prehistory, Londres, Duckworth, p. 517-520

2009

122

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2176.  Evans, R.; Moore, C; Saunders K and B Jamison, eds, 1997: 1901 Our Future’s past; documenting Australia’s federation, Sydney, Macmillan. 2177.  Evans, T. R., 1993: Residents Perceptions of Tourism in Selected New Zealand Communities: A Segmentation Study, MPhil thesis. Otago: Otago University. 2178.  Evelyn, Wareham, 2002: From Explorers to Evangelists: Archivists. 2179.  Everard, Judith, 2007  : ‘Les îles normandes en 1204: le rôle décisif de l’aristocratie normande’, In Flambard Héricher, Anne-Marie; Gazeau, Véronique (ed.), 1204: la Normandie entre Plantagenêts et Capétiens (Caen: Publications du CRAHM,), 215-25 2180.  Everard, Judith; Holt, James Clarke, 2004: Jersey 1204: the forging of an island community, London: Thames & Hudson. 2181.  Ewins, Rory, 1998: Changing their minds: tradition and politics in contemporary Fiji and Tonga, Macmillan Brown Centre for Pacific Studies. 2182.  Ewitt, M.,1983: The Comoro Islands in Indian Ocean trade before the 19th century, Cahiers d’etudes africaines, no 89-90, p. p. 139-165. 2183.  Eyley, Claudia Pond and Robin White, 1987: Twenty-Eight days in Kiribati. Auckland: New Women’s Press. 2184.  Faaniu, S., 1983: Travellers and workers. In Tuvalu: A History, Institute of Pacific Studies, Suva. 2185.  Faatau, Luc., 1985: Les Iles sous le Vent: etude de geographie humaine, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3. 2186.  Faberon, Jean-Yves, 1992: La Nouvelle-Calédonie, laboratoire du statut de territoire d’outre-mer, Nouméa. 2187.  Fadda, Antonio Franco, 2002: Isole alla specchio: Sadergna e Corsica tra identità, tradizione e innovazione, Roma: Carocci. 2188.  Fagan, B.M., 1996, Clash of cultures, London, Altamira Press. 2188.  Fagan, G. Honor, 2002: “Globalization and Culture: Placing Ireland”, in The ANNALS of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Jan; vol. 581: pp. 133 - 143. 2189.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1984: The Cook Islands: domestic stabilisation of international trade instability, note, Pacific viewpoint, vol. vol. 25, no 1, p. p. 57-76. 2190.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1985: Island economies. Studies from the South Pacific, Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies University of the South Pacific. 2191.  Fairbairn, Te’O, Thomas T. Parry, 1986: Multinational Enterprises in the Developing South Pacific Region, Univ of Hawaii Pr. 2192.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., edited by, 1988: Island entrepreneurs: problems and performances in the Pacific, Honolulu, HI: East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program. 2193.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., e outros, 1991: The Pacific Islands: politics, economics, and international relations, Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, International Relations Program. 2194.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1994: “Pacific Island Economies: Structure, Current Developments and Prospects”, In N. and N. Douglas (eds), Pacific Islands Yearbook (17th Edition), Fiji Times Ltd., pp. 11-24. 2195.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1994a: The case for and against an independent currency for small Pacific island countries, with special reference to Kiribati, the Cook Islands and Tuvalu, [Kensington, N.S.W.] : Centre for South Pacific Studies.

2009

CEHA

123

2196.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., Worrell, D., 1996: South Pacific and Caribbean island economies. A comparative study, Brisbane, The foundation for development cooperation. 2197.  Fairbairn, Te’o, 1997: The economic impact of natural disasters in the South Pacific: with special reference to Fiji, Western Samoa, Niue, and Papua New Guinea. Fiji? : s.n.. 2198.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1999: “Pacific island economies: performance, groxth prospects and the impact of the Asian economic crisis”, Asian-Pacific economic literature, nº 2, p. 43-56. 2199.  Fairbairn, T. I. J., 2007: Economic Vulnerability and Resilience of Small Island States, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 133-140. 2200.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, (ed),  Translations by Noumea Simi:  Tamaitai Samoa:  Their Stories (Samoan translation),  IPS, USP Suva. 2201.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1981: `Samoan Parents and the Primary School’, Unpublished M.A. Thesis, Victoria University, Wellington. 2202.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1984: `Factors Affecting Language Maintenance:  The Samoan in New Zealand ‘, New Zealand Journal of Educational Studies , Vol. 19, No.22. pp.99113. 2203.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1985:  `Aspects of Samoan Personality’, Pacific Perspectives, Suva, Vol.12, 2. 2204.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1986:  `Samoan Parents and Pre-School Education:  New Zealand ‘, Australian Journal of Early Childhood Education, Vol 11, no. 1, February. 2205.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1987: `Searching for the Written Fagogo:  Samoan Writing’.  in Pacific Writing and Publishing, IPS USP Suva , pp 41-69. 2206.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1987a:  Counterpart Training:  Western Samoa, USP School of Agriculture. 2207.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1988: `Culture and Communication at Alafua’, in Pacific Universities, R.Crocombe and M Meleisea (ed) IPS USP Suva, pp. 155-166. 2208.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1988a:  `Pule Oe:  It’s up to You.  Women’s Career Patterns in Western Samoa ‘, in Women and Education in PNG and the South Pacific.  E.Wormald and A.Crossley (ed) UPNG Press, pp. 217-238. 2209.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1990: `Strengthening NGO Structures:  Western Samoa ‘, in Sydney Talk:  Australia in the South Pacific, McCall, G.(ed),  Pacific Studies Monograph No. 1, UNSW.pp. 2210.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1990: The Household and Agriculture:  Western Samoa, Working Paper, International Gender Study Group:  University of Newcastle-on-Tyne.  2211.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy,  1991: `E au le inailau a tamaitai: Women, Education and Development Western Samoa ‘, unpublished Ph D thesis, Macquarie University. 2212.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1992: `A positive response to migration constraints:  Western Samoa , 1989’ in McCall G(ed) A World Perspective on Pacific Islander Migration , UNSW, Pacific Studies Monograph no 6. 2213.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993: `Decentralisation, Centralisation:  Education in Western Samoa ‘, Access, Jan 1993, University of Auckland. 2214.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993a: Status of Women and Pacific Platform paper for Beijing, SPC August. 2215.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993b: Women’s Status in the South Pacific , ESCAP.

2009

124

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2216.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993c: `Women and Agriculture in Western Samoa’, in Momsen, J. and V. Kinnaird (ed), different places, difference voices, gender and development, Routledge, UK. 2217.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994: `If I plant a tree will my children be here to see it grow’, in A. Emberson-Bain (ed), Sustainable Development or Malignant Growth, Marama Press, Fiji. 2218.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994a: `Mother, farmer, trader, weaver: Juggling Roles in Pacific Agriculture’, in A. Emberson-Bain (ed), Sustainable Development or Malignant Growth, Marama Press, Fiji. 2219.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994b: `Samoan Writing:  The Search for the Written Fagogo’, reprinted in P. Sharrad (ed), Reading in Pacific Literature, New Literatures Research Centre, University of Wollongong. 2220.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994c: `Tourism impacts on traditional culture and female enterprise in Western Samoa ‘, in Kinnaird, V. and Hall, D., Tourism Development: the gender dimension, Routledge, UK. 2221.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy(ed), 1995: Pacific Women and Agriculture, Report of the Women and Agriculture Regional Workshop, Port Vila 1993 2222.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1995a: `Women’s Education: Pacific Overview’ 1994, Directions, 30 Vol 16 no 1, USP, Suva. 2223.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, P., 1996a: Tamaitai Samoa: Their Stories, IPS, USP/ and Kin Publications, California (women’s oral history). 2224.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1997: Pacific Women’s Triple Agricultural Role: food security, informal trade and cash cropping, in Journal of South Pacific Agriculture, vol 4 Jan-Dec. 2225.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2000:  `Gender, Culture and Sustainable Development - the Pacific Way ‘, in Hooper, A. (ed), Culture and Sustainable Development in the Pacific,  National Centre for Development Studies, Canberra. 2226.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2000a:  `Pacific Women and Lifelong Education’,  Directions, 42, Volume 22 No 1.  2227.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2000b:  `To hit or not to hit: Is there room for a third space’,  In A. Jones (ed),  Touchy Subject: Teachers Touching Children, University of Otago Press. 2228.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2001: `Women and the Privatisation of the coconut oil mill, Samoa ‘,  Pacific Economic Bulletin, ANU, Vol 16, no 1. 2229.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2001a: Tetee Atu le sasa ma le upu malosi: hold back your hands and your harsh words,  Pacific Health Dialogue, Vol 8, No 1, March. 2230.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2001b: Tetee Atu: Using a self-report strategy to explore disciplining behaviours in Tu Mau, Social Work Review, Massey University, Spring, Vol XIII, Number 3. 2231.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2002: What Samoans want today is a quarter acre section of freehold’ in Flowers, Fale, Fanua and faa Polynesia, Working Paper No 8,  Asia Pacific Migration Research Network, R Bedford, R Longhurst and Y Underhill-Sem (ed)  UNESCO, Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2002a:  Emele Moa Teo Fairbairn,  in Shifting Centres; Women and Migration in New Zealand History,  Lyndon Fraser & Katie Pickles (ed)  University of Otago Press. 2232.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, (ed), 2003: Samoan Women:  Widening Choices, IPS,  USP. 2233.  Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, G Makisi, (ed), 2003: Making our place: Growing Up PI in New Zealand, Dunmore Press,  Palmerston North.

2009

CEHA

125

2234.  Fajardo Spínola, Francisco, 1992: Hechicería y brujería en Canarias en la Edad Moderna, Las Palmas: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2235.  Faleomavaega, E.F.H, 1990: Some perspectives on American Samoa’s political relationship with the United States, PS, 13, 2, 119-24. 2236.  Faleomavaega, E.F.H., 1994: American Samoa; a unique relationship in the South Pacific, in vom Busch W, et.al., eds, New politics in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 113-22. 2237.  Faleomavaega, Eni, 1995: Navigating the future: a Samoan perspective on U.S.-Pacific relations, Suva, Fiji: KIN Publications in association with the Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific and the Pacific Islands Development Program. 2238.  Falgout, Suzanne, 1987: Master Part of Heaven: the ethnohistory and archaeology of Wene, Pohnpei, Eastern Caroline Islands, Saipan, CM: Micronesian Archaeological Survey, Division of Historic Preservation, Dept. of Community and Cultural Affairs ; Detroit, Mich., U.S.A.: Distributed by Cellar Book Shop. 2239.  Falgout, Suzanne, 1995: “Americans in Paradise: Anthropologists, Custom, and Democracy in Postwar Micronesia”, Ethnology, 34 (Spring): 99–111. 2240.  Falgout, Suzanne; Poyer, Lin; Carucci, Laurence M., 2008: Memories of war: Micronesians in the Pacific War,Honolulu : University of Hawai’i Press. 2241.  Fanciullo, Franco, 1983: Dialetto e cultura materiale alle isole Eolie: due inchieste a confronto, 1928-29 H. Coray, 1979, Palermo: Centro di studi filologici e linguistici siciliani. 2242.  Fanning, Edmund, 1989: Voyages and discoveries in the South Seas 1792-1832, New York. 2243.  Faria, Miguel A., 2002: Cuba in Revolution--Escape from a Lost Paradise, Hacienda Publishing, Macon, Georgia. 2244.  Faris, R.W., 1999: ‘Unto Themselves: Insularity and Democracy’, Masters thesis, ChapelHill NC, Department of Sociology, University of North Carolina. 2245.  Farjon, I., 1980: Madura nd surrounding islands: an annotated bibliography, 1860-1942, The Hague: M. Nijhoff. 2246.  Farmer, Paul, 2003, 2005: Pathologies of Power: Health, Human Rights, and the New War on the Poor. Berkeley: University of California Press, edition. 2247.  Farmer, Paul, 2003: The uses of Haiti, Monroe, Maine: Common Courage Press. 2248.  Farnsworth, edited by Paul, 2001: Island lives: historical archaeologies of the Caribbean, Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press. 2249.  Farrell, Byran H. 1992. Tourism as an Element in Sustainable Development: Hana, Maui. In Tourism Alternatives: Potentials and Problems in the Development of Tourism. Valene L. Smith and William R. Eadington, eds. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. Pp. 115-134. 2250.  Farrell, D., 1984-91: The pictorial history of Guam, (4 vols) Micronesian Productions. 2251.  Farrell, Don A., 1990: Saipan, translations by Ikuo Itakura, Saipan, MP: Micronesian Productions, CNMI. 2252.  Farrujia de la Rosa, A. José, 2005: Imperialist archaeology in the Canary Islands: French and German studies on prehistoric colonization at the end of the 19th century. Oxford: John and Erica Hedges. 2253.  Fatemi, K., 2001: International public policy and regionalism at the return of the century, Londres, Elsevier.

2009

126

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2254.  Fatnowna, N., 1988: Fragments of a lost heritage, Sydney, Angus and Robertson. 2255.  Fatome, Henri, 2002: La perte des îles anglo-normandes et de la Normandie, Cherbourg: H. Fatome. 2256.  Fatome, Henri, 2002: La perte des îles anglo-normandes et de la Normandie. Cherbourg: H. Fatome. 2257.  Faulkner, B., 1998: Tourism development options in Indonesia and the case of agrotourism in central Java. In: Laws, E., Faulkner, B. and Moscardo, G. (eds) Embracing and Managing Change in Tourism: International Case Studies. London: Routledge, pp.202221. 2258.  Fausett, D., 1993: Writing the New World; imaginary voyages and Utopias of the great southern land, Uni of Syracruse Press, Syracruse 2259.  Faustmann, Hubert and Nicos Peristianis, 2006: Britain and Cyprus: Colonialism and PostColonialism, 1878-2006, Bibliopolis. 2260.  Fauvel, A.A., 1980: Unpublished documents on the history of the Seychelles Islands anterior to 1810, [Victoria?: s.n.]. 2261.  Favole, Adriano, 2000: La palma del potere: i capi e la costruzione della società a Futuna (Polinesia occidentale), Torino: Il segnalibro. 2262.  Fawcett, James T. and Benjamin V. Cariño, 1987: Pacific bridges: the new immigration from Asia and the Pacific islands, Staten Island, N.Y., Center for Migration Studies. 2263.  Fawcett, L.; Hurrell, A. (eds), 1995: Regionalism in World politics, Oxford, Oxford University Press. 2264.  Fay, Marianne, Morrison, Mary, 2007: Infrastructure in Latin America and the Caribbean: recent developments and key challenges, Washington, DC: World Bank. 2265.  Feehan, John, 1994: The book of Aran: the Aran Islands Co, Galway; ed. John Waddell. Kinvara, County Galway: Tir Eolas. 2266.  Feinberg, Richard, 1980: History and Structure: A Case of Polynesian Dualism, Journal of Anthropological Research, 36(3):331-378. 2267.  Feinberg, Richard, 1980a: Supernatural Sanctions and the Social Order on a Polynesian Outlier, Anthropological Forum, 4(3):331-351. 2268.  Feinberg, Richard, 1980b: Introduction: breast-feeding in America. In Tempest in a Tea House: Ameri­can Attitudes toward Breast-feeding, edited by Richard Feinberg. Kent, Ohio: Kent Popular Press. Pp. 1-9. 2269.  Feinberg, Richard, 1981: Anuta: Social Structure of a Polynesian Island, with foreword by Sir Raymond Firth. Lā’ie and Copenhagen: Institute for Polynesian Studies in cooperation with the National Museum of Denmark, Second Printing. 2270.  Feinberg, Richard, 1981a: The Meaning of ‘Sibling’ on Anuta Island, In Siblingship in Oceania: Studies in the Meaning of Kin Relations, edited by Mac Marshall. ASAO Monograph Num­ber 8, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press. Pp. 105-148. 2271.  Feinberg, Richard, 1981b: What is Polynesian Kinship all About?, Ethnology, 29(2):115131. 2272.  Feinberg, Richard, 1981c: Symbolic dimensions of breast-feeding in America. Case Analysis, 1(4):329-335. 2273.  Feinberg, Richard, 1981d: Competition and cooperation: human nature in cross-cultural per­spective. The Journal of Anthropology, 2(2):147-153.

2009

CEHA

127

2274.  Feinberg, Richard, 1981e: Structural dimensions of sociopolitical change on Anuta. Pacific Studies, 5(2). 2275.  Feinberg, Richard, 1982: Some Observations on a Polynesian Naming System: Personal Names and Naming on Anuta, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 91(4):581-588. 2276.  Feinberg, Richard, 1982a: Structural Dimensions of Sociopolitical Change on Anuta, Proceedings of Conference on Evolving Political Cultures in the Pacific Islands, edited by Gloria Cronin. Lā‘ie: Institute for Polynesian Studies Reprinted from Pacific Studies 5(2), 124-142. 2277.  Feinberg, Richard, 1983: Melanesian Winds in Polynesian Sails, Pacific Magazine, (MayJune):25-27. 2278.  Feinberg, Richard, 1983a: Polynesian Music in the Old Style, Resound: A Quarterly of the Archives of Traditional Music, 2(2):2. 2279.  Feinberg, Richard, 1983b: What’s in a Name? Personal Identity and Naming on Anuta, Central Issues in Anthropology, 5(1):27-42. 2280.  Feinberg, Richard, 1983c: The meaning of ‘sibling’ on Anuta Island. In Siblingship in Oceania: Studies in the Meaning of Kin Relations, edited by Mac Marshall. ASAO Monograph Num­ber 8. Pp. 105-148. Lanham, Maryland: University Press of America. Second Print­ing. 2281.  Feinberg, Richard, 1984: On individual and culture in American anthropology: reply to Herve Varenne. Current Anthropology, 25(4):534-535. 2282.  Feinberg, Richard, 1985: A Note on Data Presentation in Ethnographic Reports, American Anthropologist, 87(3):666-668. 2283.  Feinberg, Richard, 1985a: CA comment on “Structural patterns of sibling classification in Island Ocea­nia”, by Mac Marshall, Current Anthropology, 26(5):660. 2284.  Feinberg, Richard, 1986: Introduction to Translation of ìEthnography of Ontong Java and Tasman Islands, with remarks re. the Marqueen and Abgarris Islandsî by Richard Parkinson, translated by Rose S. Hartmann, Pacific Studies 9(3):1-31. 2285.  Feinberg, Richard, 1986a: On Anomalous Westerlies, El Niño, and the Colonization of Poly­nesia, by Ben R. Finney, American Anthropologist, 88(2):454-455. 2286.  Feinberg, Richard, 1986b: The “Anuta Problem”: Local Sovereignty and National Integration in the Solomon Islands, Man, 21(3):438-452. 2287.  Feinberg, Richard, 1986c: Market economy and changing sex-roles on a Polynesian atoll. Ethnology, 25(4):271-282. 2288.  Feinberg, Richard, 1988, 2003: Polynesian Seafaring and Navigation: Ocean Travel in Anutan Cul­ture and Soci­ety, Kent, Ohio: Kent State University Press. 2289.  Feinberg, Richard, 1988: Margaret Mead and Samoa: Coming of Age in fact and fiction. American Anthro­pologist, 90(3):656-663. 2290.  Feinberg, Richard, 1988a: Socio-spatial Symbolism and the Logic of Rank on Two Polynesian Outliers, Eth­nology, 27(3):291-310. 2291.  Feinberg, Richard, 1989: Possible Prehistoric Contacts between Tonga and Anuta, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 98(3):303-317. 2292.  Feinberg, Richard, 1989a: What’s so Funny about That? Fieldwork and Laughter in Polynesia, In The Humbled Anthropologist: Tales from the Pacific, edited by Philip DeVita. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Company, pp. 53-60.

2009

128

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2293.  Feinberg, Richard, 1989b: Symbolic Structures and Social Space: Reflections on the Logic of Rank in Polynesia, Geographia Religionum, 7:11-27. 2294.  Feinberg, Richard, 1990: New Guinea Models on a Polynesian Outlier? Ethnology 29(1):8396. 2295.  Feinberg, Richard, 1990a: The Solomon Islands Tenth Anniversary of Independence: Problems of National Symbolism and National Integration, Pacific Studies 13(2): 19-40. 2296.  Feinberg, R., 1990b: Oral Traditions of Anuta: A Polynesian Outlier in the Solomon Islands, Oxford Studies in Anthropological Linguistics 15, New York: Oxford University Press. 2297.  Feinberg, Richard, 1991: A Long-distance Voyage in Contemporary Polynesia, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 100(1):25-44. 2298.  Feinberg, Richard, 1991a: Anuta, In Encyclopedia of World Cultures, Volume II: Oceania, Terence E. Hays, volume editor. Boston: G. K. Hall, pp. 13-16. 2299.  Feinberg, Richard, 1992: Margaret Mead and Samoa: Coming of Age in fact and fiction. In Critical Think­ing and Writing in the Disciplines, edited by Mary McGann. Allyn and Bacon, Publishers. Pp. 206-216. Reprinted from American Anthropologist (1988). 2300.  Feinberg, Richard, 1994: Illness as an Index of Social Stress and Acculturation, Etnograficheskoe Obozrenie, Ethnological Review, 1(1):24-32. 2301.  Feinberg, Richard, 1994: Contested worlds: politics of culture and the politics of anthro­ pology. The Place of Humanism in Anthropology Today, edited by Ivan Brady and Edith Turner. Special issue, Anthropology and Humanism, 19(1):20-35. 2302.  Feinberg, R., 1995: Introduction: Theme and Variation in Pacific Island Seafaring, in the Contemporary Pacific Islands, Dekalb: Northern Illinois University, pp. 3-13. 2303.  Feinberg, Richard, 1995a: Politics of Culture in the Pacific Islands (edited by R. Feinberg and L. Zimmer-Tamakoshi), Ethnology, 34(2-3):89-209. Special Issue. 2304.  Feinberg, Richard, 1995b: Christian Polynesians and Pagan Spirits: Anuta, Solomon Islands, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 104(3):267-301. 2305.  Feinberg, Richard, edited by, 1995c: Harry A. Powell -- Maritime travel, present and past, in Marovo, western Solomon Islands, in Seafaring in the contemporary Pacific islands: studies in continuity and change, DeKalb, Ill.: Northern Illinois University Press. 2306.  Feinberg, Richard, 1995d: Seafaring in the Contemporary Pacific Islands, edited by R. Feinberg. DeKalb, Illinois. Northern Illinois University Press. 2307.  Feinberg, Richard, 1995e: Introduction: theme and variation in Pacific Island seafaring. In Seafaring in Contemporary Oceania: Studies in Continuity and Change, edited by Richard Feinberg. DeKalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press. pp. 3-15. 1.  Feinberg, Richard, 1995f: Continuity and change in Nukumanu maritime technology and prac­ tice. In Sea­faring in Contemporary Oceania: Studies in Con­tinuity and Change, edited by Richard Feinberg. DeKalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press. Pp. 159-195. 2308.  Epilogue (by Ward H. Goodenough and Richard Feinberg). In Sea­faring in Contem­porary Feinberg, Richard, 1995g: Oceania: Studies in Con­tinuity and Change, edited by Richard Feinberg. DeKalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press. pp. 219-230. 2309.  Feinberg, Richard, 1996: Spirit encounters on Anuta, Solomon Islands. In Spirits in Culture, History, and Mind, edited by Jeanette Marie Mageo and Alan Howard. New York and Lon­ don: Routledge. pp. 99-120. 2310.  Feinberg, Richard, 1996a: Preface (by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo)

2009

CEHA

129

to Leadership and Change in the Western Pacific: Es­says in Honor of Sir Raymond Firth, edited by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo. London School of Eco­nomics Mono­graphs on Social Anthropology, Number 66. London: Athlone. pp. viii-xiv. 2311.  Feinberg, R. & K. Watson-Gegeo, eds. 1996b: Leadership and Change in the Western Pacific: Essays Presented to Sir Raymond Firth on Occasion of his 90th Birthday, Berg Publishers 2312.  Feinberg, Richard, 1996c: Leadership and change in the Western Pacific (by Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo and Richard Feinberg). Introduction to Leadership and Change in the Western Pa­cific: Es­says in Honor of Sir Raymond Firth, edited by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo. London School of Eco­nomics Monographs on Social An­ thropology. 2313.  Feinberg, Richard, 1996d: Outer Islanders and Urban Resettlement in the Solomon Islands: The Case of Anutans on Guadalcanal, Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 103(2):207-217. 2314.  Feinberg, Richard, 1996-2005: Polynesian Outlier Bibliography, The World-Wide Web Virtual Library. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_ polynesian_outlier.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 2315.  Feinberg, Richard, 1997: Polynesian navigation. In Encyclopedia of the History of Sci­ ence, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures, Helaine Selin, ed. Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Pp. 773-776. 2316.  Feinberg, Richard, 1998: Oral Traditions of Anuta: A Polynesian Outlier in the Solomon Islands, Oxford Studies in Anthropological Linguistics, Volume 15. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press. 2317.  Feinberg, Richard, 1998a: Righting Wrongs on Anuta, Pacific Studies, 21(3):29-49. 2318.  Feinberg, Richard, 1998b: Anuta. In The Garland Encyclopedia of World Music: Australia and the Pacific Islands, edited by Adrienne Kaeppler and Jacob W. Love. New York: Garland. Pp. 856-861. 2319.  Feinberg, Richard, 1998c: Sanctity and Power on Anuta: Polynesian Chieftainship Revisited, In Leader­ship and Change in the Western Pacific: Essays in Honor of Sir Raymond Firth, edited by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo, London School of Eco­nomics Monographs on Social Anthropology, Number 66. London: Athlone. Pp. 56-92. 2320.  Feinberg, Richard, 1998d: Righting Wrongs on Anuta, Pacific Studies, 21(3):29-49. 2321.  Feinberg, Richard, 2000: Staying afloat in the Western Pacific, Keel Hauler’s KaNews, November, Feinberg, Richard and Marianne George, pp. 1-3 2322.  Feinberg, Richard, 2001: Cruising the South Pacific, Daily Kent Stater, February 9, p A12. 2323.  Feinberg, Richard, 2001a: Hauling keel in the Pacific, Keel Hauler’s KaNews, January. Pp. 2-4. 2324.  Feinberg, edited by R. and M. Ottenheimer, 2001b: The Cultural Analysis of Kinship: The Legacy of David M. Schneider, Urbana: University of Illinois Press. 2325.  Feinberg, Richard, 2001c: The Anuta Islanders. In Endangered Peoples of Oceania: Struggles to Survive and Thrive, edited by Judith M. Fitzpatrick. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press. Pp. 17-32. 2326.  Feinberg, Richard, 2001d: Danger in paradise: Euphoria and near-tragedy on Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands. In Incidents, edited by Terry Stocker. Tempe, AZ: Franklin Publishing. Pp. 76-88.

2009

130

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2327.  Feinberg, Richard, 2001e: Introduction: Schneider’s cultural analysis of kinship and its implications for anthropological relativism. In The Cultural Analysis of Kinship: The Legacy of David M. Schneider, edited by Richard Feinberg and Martin Ottenheimer. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. pp. 1-31. 2328.  Feinberg, Richard, 2002: Elements of Leadership in Oceania, Anthropological Forum, 12(1): 9-44. 2329.  Feinberg, Richard, Andrew J. Strathern, Pamela Stewart, Laurence M. Carucci, Lin Poyer, and Cluny Macpherson, 2002a: Oceania: An Introduction to the Cultures and Identities of Pacific Islanders. Durham, NC: Carolina Academic Press. 2330.  Feinberg, Richard, 2002d: A Polynesian people’s struggle to maintain community in the Solomon Islands. In Constructing Moral Communities: Pacific Islander Strategies for Settling in New Places, edited by Judith Modell. Special issue, Pacific Studies 25(1/2): 45-70. 2331.  Feinberg, Richard, 2003: Polynesian Seafaring and Navigation: Ocean Travel in Anutan Culture and Society, Kent, Ohio: Kent State University Press, Second (paperback) edition. 2332.  Feinberg, Richard, 2003a: Storm damage and reconstruction on Anuta and Tikopia (Solomon Islands), Keel Haulers Kanews, February, pp. 2-3. 2333.  Feinberg, Richard, 2003b: Reply to Warren Shapiro’s review of The Cultural Analysis of Kinship: The Legacy of David M. Schneider. American Anthropologist, 105(4):881. 2334.  Feinberg, Richard, 2003c: Overstatements in “The Fall of Kinship”, Journal of Cognition and Culture, 3(4):318-322. 2335.  Feinberg, Richard, 2003d:‘Drawing the coral heads’: mental mapping and its physical representation in a Polynesian community, By R. Feinberg, U. J. Dymon, Pu Paiaki, Pu Rangituteki, Pu Nukuriaki, and M. Rollins, The Cartographic Journal, 40(3):243-253. 2336.  Feinberg, Richard, 2004: Anuta: Polynesian Lifeways for the 21 st Century, Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press. 2337.  Feinberg, Richard, 2005: Pacific Voyaging and Navigation, In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James Brix. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. 2338.  Feinberg, Richard, 2005a: Polynesian Navigation, In Encyclopedia of the History of Science, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures (second edition), edited by Helaine Selin, Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers. 2339.  Feinberg, Richard, 2005b: A Polynesian Outlier Bibliography, compiled and edited by Richard Feinberg. Canberra: Australian National University AnthroGlobe online Bibliographies. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_polynesian_outlier.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 2340.  Feinberg, Richard, 2005d: ASAO Bibliography: Publications Resulting from Sessions at Annual Meetings of the Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania, complied and edited by Richard Feinberg, Susan Win, Lynette Furuhashi, Karen Peacock, and Joy St. James. Honolulu: Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania. Disponível online em url: http://www.soc.hawaii.edu/asao/pacific/hawaiki.html. (Orig.: 1991; 1st update: 1996). Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 2341.  Feinberg, Richard, 2005e: Reflections on the value of ethnography, Anthropological Forum, 15(3):297-306. 2342.  Feinberg, Richard, 2006: Pacific Seafaring. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James Birx. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Pp. 1798-1799.

2009

CEHA

131

2343.  Feinberg, Richard, 2006a: Schneider, David M. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James Birx. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Pp. 2060-2061. 2344.  Feinberg, Richard, 2006b: Tikopia. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James Birx. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Pp. 2191-2196. 2345.  Feinberg, Richard, 2006c: Early European–Polynesian contact reenacted: Anutan “handling” of a foreign fishing vessel. American Ethnologist, 33(1):114-125. 2346.  Feinberg, Richard, 2006d: The changing role of music in a Polynesian Outlier Community: Anuta, Solomon Islands. Anthroglobe Journal, Disponível online em url: http://www. anthroglobe.ca/docs/changing_music_anuta.htm. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. Feinberg, Richard, 2007: Seafaring in the Polynesian Outliers In Encyclopedia of the History of Science, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures, edited by Helaine Selin, Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers. 2347.  Feinberg, Richard, 2007a: Polynesian navigation, In Encyclopedia of the History of Sci­ ence, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures (second edition), edited by Helaine Selin. Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers. 2348.  Fellows Jensen, Gillian, 2001: Some new thoughts on personal names in the Viking colonies, In Mortensen, Andras; Arge, Símun V. (ed.), Viking and Norse in the North Atlantic: selected papers from the proceedings of the fourteenth Viking Congress, Tórshavn, 19-30 July 2001 (Annales Societatis Scientiarum Faeroensis, 44) (Tórshavn: Føroya Fróðskaparfelag), 152-59. 2349.  Felt, L.F., 2003: Small, Isolated and Successful: Lessons from Small, Isolated Societies of the North Atlantic, Report presented to the Royal Commission on Renewing and Strengthening Our Place in Canada. Disponível online em URL: http://www.gov.nl.ca/ publicat/royalcomm/research/Felt.pdf. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009. 2350.  Fenech, Katrin, 2007: Human-induced changes in the environment and landscape of the Maltese Islands from the Neolithic to the 15th century AD: as inferred from a scientific study of sediments from Marsa, Malta, Oxford, England: Archaeopress. 2351.  Fenton, Alexander; Pálsson, Hermann edited by, 1984: The Northern and western isles in the Viking world: survival, continuity, and change, for the Bicentenary of the National Museum of Antiquities of Scotland, 1781-1981, Edinburgh: J. Donald Publishers; Atlantic Highlands, N.J.: Distributed in the U.S.A. by Humanities Press. 2352.  Ferdon, Edwin N., 1993: Early observations of Marquesan culture, 1595-1813, Tucson: University of Arizona Press. 2353.  Fergus, Howard A., 2003: A history of education in the British Leeward Islands, 1838-1945, Kingston, Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press. 2354.  Ferguson, James, 1992: Jamaica: stories of poverty, Race & Class, Jan 1992; vol. 34: pp. 61 - 72. 2355.  Ferguson, James, 2008: A traveller’s history of the Caribbean, Northampton, Mass.: Interlink. 2356.  Fernandez Martin, F., 1999: Iles et régions ultraphériphériques de l’Union européenne. Marseille, Éditions de l’Aube. 2357.  Fernandez, C., 2000: Regionalisering och regionalism: idé, ideologi och politisk verklighet. Lund: Statsvetenskapliga institutionen, Univ. 2358.  Fernández-Armesto, Felipe, 1982: The Canary Islands after the conquest: the making of a colonial society in the early sixteenth century, Oxford [Oxfordshire]: Clarendon Press;

2009

132

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

New York: Oxford University Press. 2359.  Fernández-Armesto, Felipe, 1997: Las Islas Canarias después de la conquista: la creación de una Sociedad Colonial a principios del siglo XVI, traducción de Gina Louse Oxbrow e Iñaqui Iriondo Sáez. Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2360.  Fernando, Tissa, and Robert N. Kearney, 1986: Sri Lanka: Profile of an Island Republic, Boulder, Colo.: Westview. 2361.  Ferrà i Martorell, M. (Miquel), 2000: La cuina de la Revolució Francesa i les illes Balears, Palma, Mallorca: Edicions Documenta Balear. 2362.  Ferrà i Martorell, M., 1994-1995: Llegendes i tradicions de les Balears, Palma: Documenta Balear. 2363.  Ferrandini, Marie-Hélène, 2005: L’insularité dans l’œuvre de Michel Déon, in Trabelsi, Mustapha (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand. 2364.  Ferrari, Sylvie (dir.); Point, Patrick (dir.); Boyer, Michel (préf.), 2003: Eau et littoral. Préservation et valorisation de la ressource dans les espaces insulaires, Paris; SaintDenis: Karthala; Université de La Réunion. 2365.  Ferraro, a cura di Alessandra (textes réunis et présentés par), 2005: Altérité et insularité : relations croisées dans les cultures francophones = Alterità e insularità: relazioni incrociate nelle culture francophone, Udine: Forum. 2366.  FERREIRA, José Medeiros, 1995: A Autonomia dos Açores na percepção espacial da comunidade portuguesa, Ponta Delgada, Jornal de Cultura. 2367.  Ferreira, Mário Olímpio Clemente, 1995: “Alguns Aspectos das Relações Comerciais entre os Açores e o Brasil no Século XVII”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 235–245. 2368.  Ferrer Vieyra, Enrique, 2007: Las islas Malvinas y el derecho internacional, Córdoba, Argentina: Lerner Editora. 2369.  Feuer, A.B. edited by. 1992: Coast watching in the Solomon Islands: the Bougainville reports, December 1941-July 1943, foreword by Walter Lord, New York: Praeger. 2370.  Feyrer, James and Bruce Sacerdote, 2009: Colonialism and Modern Income: Islands as Natural Experiments, The Review of Economics and Statistics, vol. 91, issue 2, pages 245-262 2371.  Fiannachta, Pádraig Ó. 1995: Oileáin agus oileánaigh, An Daingean: An Sagart. 2372.  Ficat, C., 2000: Histoires d’îles. Paris, Sortilèges. 2373.  Fick, Carolyn E., 1990: The Making of Haiti: The Saint Domingue Revolution from Below. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press. first ed edition (1 February). 2374.  Fiehrer, Thomas, 1990: Political violence in the periphery: the Haitian massacre of 1937, Race & Class, Jan 1990; vol. 32: pp. 1 - 20. 2375.  Field, M.J., 1984: Mau: Samoa’s struggle against New Zealand oppression, Wellington. 2376.  Field, Michael, 2006: Black Saturday: New Zealand’s tragic blunders in Samoa, Auckland, N.Z.: Reed Publishing (NZ). 2377.  Fieldhouse, D.K., 1981: Colonialism 1870-1945: an introduction, London. 2378.  Fierro Benítez, Rodrigo, Jorge Revelo Rosero, Flor María Hidalgo, 1997: Bibliografía científica ecuatoriana sobre las Islas Galápagos, Quito, Ecuador, Casa de la Cultura Ecuatoriana “Benjamín Carrión”, Centro Nacional de Documentos Científicos Ecuatorianos.

2009

CEHA

133

2379.  FIF., Sunia, 1983: American Samoa; Fa’a Amerika?, in Afeaki E, et. Al..., Politics in Polynesia, IPS/USP, 115-30. 2380.  Fife, W., 1996: Education and society in PNG; towards independence 1945-1975, Man and Culture in Oceania, 14, 61-79. 2381.  Fife, Wayne, 1992: A Certain Kind of Education: Education, Culture and Society in West New Britain, Ph.dissertation, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada. 2382.  Fife, Wayne, 1992a: Crossing boundaries: dissolution as a secondary message of education in Papua New Guinea, Journal of Educational Development, 12(3):213-221. 2383.  Fife, Wayne, 1995: “The look of rationality and the bureaucratization of consciousness in Papua New Guinea”, in Ethnology, 34(2): 129-141. 2384.  Figueroa Colon, edited by Julio C., 1996: The scientific survey of Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands: an eighty-year reassessment of the islands’ natural history, New York: New York Academy of Sciences. 2385.  Filer, C., Ed., 1997: The Political Economy of Forest Mangement in Papua New Guinea, Monograph 32. Port Moresby and London, National Research Institute & IIED. 2386.  Filho, João Lopes, 2001:“Cabo Verde, as Ilhas Hesperitanas”, in Oceanos, nº 46, pp. 84 – 96. 2387.  Filliot Jean-Michel, 1985: Bibliographie de l’histoire des Seychelles, Paris: ORSTOM, 53 p. 2388.  Filliot Jean-Michel, 1985: Le livre du Maître de l’Histoire des Seychelles, sl: ORSTOM. 2389.  Finazzi-Agrò, Ettore, 1993: A invenção da ilha: tópica literária e topologia imaginária na descoberta do Brasil, Rio de Janeiro, RJ: PUC-Rio Historia. 2390.  Finlan, Alastair, 2002: “British Special Forces and the Falklands conflict: Twenty years on”, in Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 319-32. 2391.  Finlan, Alastair, 2002a: “British Special Forces and the Falklands War of 1982”, in Small Wars and Insurgencies, 13:3,75-96. 2392.  Finlan, Alastair, 2004: The Royal Navy in the Falklands Conflict and the Gulf War: culture and strategy (British politics and society). London: Cass. 2393.  Finlan, Alastair, 2005: War culture: The Royal Navy and the Falklands Conflict, In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London ; New York: Cass, 193-212. 2394.  Finnegan, Ruth; Orbell, Margaret, edited by. 1995: South Pacific oral traditions, Bloomington: Indiana University Press. 2395.  Finney, B. R., et. al., 1989: Wait for the west wind, JPS, vol. 98(3), 261-302. 2396.  Finney, Ben, 1992: From Sea to Space, Palmerston North, NZ: Massey University. 2397.  Finney, B., 1994: The other one-third of the globe, Journal of World History, Vol 5/2, pp.27398. 2398.  Finney, Ben R., 2003: Sailing in the Wake of the Ancestors, Honolulu: Bishop Museum Press. 2399.  Fiquet, testi riuniti da Françoise, 2000: Bonali Marguerite Yourcenar dall’Isola di Creta all’île heureuse: [giornata di Studi sull’opera di Marguerite Yourcenar (Pontremoli, Salone Comunale 28 febbraio 1998)], Cremona: Fantigrafica. 2400.  Firth S., 1989: Sovereignty and independence in the contemporary Pacific, TCP, 1, 1, 7596, 1989.

2009

134

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2401.  Firth S., 1997: The war in the Pacific, in Denoon D, ed, 1997, The Cambridge history of the Pacific Islanders, Melbourne, CUP pp.291-323. 2402.  Firth, R., 1936/1983: We, The Tikopia: A Sociological Study of Kinship in Primitive Polynesia, Stanford CA, Stanford University Press. 2403.  Firth, Raymond William, [1939] 2004: Primitive Polynesian Economy, London: Routledge. 2404.  Firth, Raymond William, [1951] 2000: Elements of Social Organization, Beacon Press. 2405.  Firth, Raymond William, [1959] 2004a: Social Change in Tikopia. Routledge. 2406.  Firth, Raymond William, 1984: ‘Roles of Women and Men in a Sea Fishing Economy: Tikopia Compared with Kelantan’ in The Fishing Culture of the World: Studies in Ethnology, Cultural Ecology and Folklore, Béla Gunda (ed), Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó 1145-1170. 2407.  Firth, Raymond William, 1985: Taranga Fakatikopia ma Taranga Fakainglisi: TikopiaEnglish Dictionary. 2408.  Firth, Raymond William, 1990: Tikopia Songs: Poetic and Musical Art of a Polynesian People of the Solomon Islands, Cambridge university Press. 2409.  Firth, Raymond William; McLean, Mervyn, 1990a: Tikopia songs: poetic and musical art of a Polynesian people of the Solomon Islands, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. 2410.  Firth, Raymond William, [1996] 2005: Religion: A Humanist Interpretation, Taylor & Francis. 2411.  Firth, Raymond William, 2001. “The Creative Contribution of Indigenous people to Their Ethnography. Journal of the Polynesian Society, Vol. 110, No. 3, 241–245. 2412.  Firth, Raymond William, 2001a: ‘Tikopia Dreams: Personal Images of Social Reality’, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 110(1):7–29. 2413.  Firth, S., 1982: The Germans in New Guinea, in R.J. May & H. Nelson (eds.), Melanesia beyonddiversity, vol. 1, Canberra. 2414.  Firth, S., 1987: Nuclear playground, Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press. 2415.  Firth, S., 1987a: The nuclear issue in the Pacific Islands, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 21 (4), 1986: 202-216. 2416.  Firth, S., 1989: Labour in German New Guinea. S. Latukefu, Ed. Papua New Guinea: A Century of Colonial Impact 1884-1984. Port Moresby, National Research Institute and University of Papua New Guinea, pp. 179-202. 2417.  Firth, S., 1989a: Sovereignty and independence in the contemporary Pacific, The Contemporary Pacific, vol. 1 (1-2),: 75-96. 2418.  Firth, S., 1989b: Review article: the contemporary history of Fiji”, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 24 (2), 242-246. 2419.  Firth, S., 1993: The calling of the HMS Seringapatam at Rapanui..., Pacific Studies, Vol 16, No 1, pp.67-84. 2420.  Firth, S., 1994: “Strategic and nuclear issues”, in Howe KR, Kiste RC and Lal BV, eds, Tides of History, Allen and Unwin, 300-24. 2421.  Firth, S., 1997: “The war in the Pacific”, in D Denoon, ed, The Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, 291-23. 2422.  Firth, S.; von Strokirch, K., 1997: “A nuclear Pacific”, in D. Denoon, ed, The Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, 324-58.

2009

CEHA

135

2423.  Firth, S., 1999: Vancouver’s vision of native peoples; the northwest coast and Hawaii, in A Frost and J Samson, eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams, Melbourne, MUP, pp.147-64. 2424.  Firth, S. (ed.), 2006: Globalisation and Governance in the Pacific Islands, Canberra Firth, S., 1989: Review article: the contemporary history of Fiji”, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 24 (2), 1989: 242-246. 2425.  Firth, S., 2000: The Pacific islands and the globalization agenda. The contemporary Pacific, n°1, p.178-192. 2426.  Firth, Stewart, 1983: New Guinea Under the Germans. Carlton, Australia: Melbourne University Press. 2427.  Fischer, Gerard and Encontre, 1998: The Economic Disadvantages of Island Developing Countries: Problems of Smallness, remoteness and Economies of Scale in Baldacchino, G. and Greenwood, R (eds.), Competing Strategies of Socio-Economic Development for Small Islands. The Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island Charlottetown Prince Edward Island, Canada, pp. 69-87. 2428.  Fischer, Steven Roger, 1995: Preliminary Evidence for Cosmogonic Texts in Rapanui’s Rongorongo Inscriptions, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 104. 303-21. 2429.  Fischer, Steven Roger, 1997: Rongo Rongo, the Easter Island Script: History, Traditions, Texts, Oxford and N.Y.: Oxford University Press. 2430.  Fischer, Steven R., 2002: A history of the Pacific Islands, New York: Palgrave. 2431.  Fisher, Ian, 2001: Early Medieval sculpture in the West Highlands and Islands, The Royal commission on the ancient and historical monuments of Scotland: and the Society of antiquaries of Scotland. 2432.  Fisher, Jon, 1983: Uninhabited and deserted islands, Port Townsend, WA: Loompanics Unlimited. 2433.  Fisher, Robin, 1999: Vancouver’s vision of native peoples; the northwest coast and Hawaii, in A Frost and J Samson, eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams, Melbourne, MUP, pp.147-64. 2434.  Fitzgerald, Maureen H., 2001: Whisper of the mother: from menarche to menopause among women in Pohnpei, in collaboration with Eugenia Samuel and Linda Phillip; foreword by Mac Marshall, Westport, Conn.; London: Bergin & Garvey. 2435.  Fitz-Gibbon, Spencer, Not mentioned in despatches: the history and mythology of the Battle of Goose Green, Cambridge: Lutterworth Press. 2436.  Fitzhugh, William W.; Chaussonnet, Valérie edited by. 1994: Ann Fienup-Riordan -- Aleut in the Kurile Islands: 1820-1870, in Anthropology of the North Pacific Rim, Washington: Smithsonian Institution Press. 2437.  Fitzpatrick, edited by Judith M., 2001: The Anuta Islanders, In Endangered Peoples of Oceania, Westport, CT: Greenwood Press. Pp. 17-32. 2438.  Fitzpatrick, M., [et al.], 2001: Madagascar: tradewinds, taboos and traditions, Fourth edition, Lonely Planet. 2439.  Fitzpatrick, Scott M. Westport, 2004: Voyages of discovery: the archaeology of islands, Conn., London, Praeger. 2440.  Fitzpatrick, S., 2007: ‘Archaeology’s Contribution to Island Studies’, Island Studies Journal. 2441.  Fitzpatrick, S.M., Nelson, G.C. and Clark, G. 2008: Small scattered fragments do not a

2009

136

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

dwarf make: Biological and archaeological data indicate that prehistoric inhabitants of Palau were normal sized. PLoS ONE, 3(8): e3015 (1-12). 2442.  Flacourt, Étienne de, 1991: Histoire de la Grande Isle Madagascar (1658), Saint Denis. 2443.  Flambart, Marie-Madeleine, 2000 : Îles du Ponant: de Chausey à l’île d’Aix, Éd. «OuestFrance. 2444.  Flannery, Tim (ed. & intr.), 2001: The life and adventures of John Nicol, mariner, Edinburgh: Canongate. 2445.  Fleming, Euan and Pauline Fleming, 2006: A Reappraisal of the Role of Agriculture in Economic Growth in Melanesian Countries, No 25715, Annual Meeting, August 12-18, 2006, Queensland, Australia from International Association of Agricultural Economists. Disponível online em url: http://ideas.repec.org/p/ags/iaae06/25715.html. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009. 2446.  Fletcher, C.B., 1917: The new Pacific; British policy and German aims, London. 2447.  Fletcher, Shirley E. A. 1984: Enhancing the Positive Socio-Cultural Impacts of Tourism in the Caribbean, Vol. 2. Reference Guidelines for Enhancing the Positive Socio-Cultural and Environmental Impacts of Tourism Washington, D.C.:International Trade and Tourism Division, Department of Economic Affairs,Executive Secretariat for Economic and Social Affairs, Organization of American States. 2448.  Fleury, Christian, 2006: Discontinuité et systèmes spatiaux: la combinaison île / frontière à travers les exemples de Jersey, de Saint-Pierre-et-Miquelon et de Trinidad; sous la direction de Pascal Buléon, Université de Caen. Université de soutenance. 2449.  Flinn, Derek, 1994: Geology of Yell and some neighbouring islands in Shetland London: H.M.S.O.. 2450.  Floch, Daniel, 1993: Les oubliés de l’île Saint-Paul: des Crozet et des Kerguelen, Rennes: Ouest-France. 2451.  FLOHIC, 1998: Le patrimoine des communes de la Guadeloupe, [collaboration rédactionnelle et photographie, Catherine Debedde-Georgel... et al.], Charenton-le-Pont, Editions FLOHIC. 2452.  Flood, Bo, Beret E. Strong, William Flood, 1999: Pacific Island legends: tales from Micronesia, Melanesia, Polynesia, and Australia, illustrations by Connie J. Adams, Honolulu, Hawai’i : Bess Press. 2453.  Flood, Bo, 2001: Marianas island legends: myth and magic, Honolulu, Hawai’i: Bess Press. 2454.  Flores, Jorge Manuel, 2001: A Ilha de Ceilão e o Império Asiático Português, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP, pp.98-113. 2455.  Florido Castro, Amara, 1998: Panaderías, molinerías y otras industrias derivadas en Las Palmas de Gran Canaria durante la Restauración: estudio de arqueología industrial, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2456.  Floyd, A. G., 1954: Final report on ethnobotanical expedition, West Nakanai, New Britain, July-August 1954, Unpublished report, Lae, Division of Botany, Department of Forests. 2457.  Foighel, I., 1978: A Framework for Local Autonomy: The Greenland Case, in Models of Autonomy (pp. 31 52), Y. Dinstein (ed.), New Brunswick: Transaction Books. 2458.  Foner, Nancy, 1984:“Jamaicans in New York City.” Migration Today, 12: 6-12. 2459.  Foner, Nancy, 1983: “Jamaican Migrants: A Comparative Analysis of the New York and London Experience.” Occasional Paper No. 36. New York Research Program in Inter-

2009

CEHA

137

American Affairs, New York University. 2460.  Foner, Nancy, 1985: “Race and Color: Jamaican Migrants in London and New York City.” International Migration Review 19: 708-727. 2461.  Foner, Nancy, 1986: “Sex Roles and Sensibilities: Jamaican Women in New York and London.” International Migration: The Female Experience, edited by Rita Simon and Caroline Brettell. Totowa, N.J.: Rowman and Allanheld, pp. 133-151. 2462.  Foner, Nancy, 1987: “The Jamaicans: Race and Ethnicity among Migrants in New York.” New Immigrants in New York, edited by Nancy Foner. New York: Columbia University Press, pp. 195-217. 2463.  Foner, Nancy, 1987a: “Jamaicans in London and New York: A Comparative Note,” New Community 14: 182-185. Special issue on Racial and Ethnic Relations in Britain: Past, Present and Future. 2464.  Foner, Nancy, 1997: “Jamaicans.” American Immigrant Cultures. New York: Macmillan Reference, pp. 491-496. 2465.  Foner, Nancy, 2000: From Ellis Island to JFK: New York’s Two Great Waves of Immigration. New Haven and New York: Yale University Press and Russell Sage Foundation. 2466.  Foner, Nancy, 2001: “From Ellis Island to JFK: Education in New York’s Two Great Waves of Immigration.” Brandeis Review, 21: 32-37. 2467.  Foner, edited by Nancy, 2001a: Islands in the city: West Indian migration to New York, Berkeley: University of California Press. 2468.  Foner, Nancy, 2008: “A (Sheltered) Island of Acceptance,” Contexts, 7 (Fall): 64-66. 2469.  Foner, Nancy, 2009: “Gender and Migration: West Indians in Comparative Perspective,” International Migration, 47: 3-29. 2470.  Fonseca, G.A.B. da., 1981: Biogeografia Insular aplicada a conservação, Revista Brasileira de geografia, no 3, pp. 383-398. 2471.  Fonseca, Luís Adão da, 1999: «O Horizonte Insular na Experiência Cultural da Primeira Expansão Portuguesa», Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/ Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 5593. 2472.  Fonseca, Vilma Lurdes da, 2001: A presença dos elementos naturais na construção de identidades, memória e história dos lugares: o caso da insularidade e sua abordagem pela literatura. Revista Virtual de História, São Paulo, v. 08; Fonseca, Vilma. L. 1998: A Insularidade na obra do cubano José Lezama Lima. In: VIII Semana de Pedagogia Trajetórias e perspectivas, 1998, Maringá. Anais VIII Semana de Pedagogia - Trajetórias e perspectivas. Maringá: Universidade Estadual de Maringá - Departamento de teoria e prática da educação, v. 01. p. 92-92. 2473.  Fonseca, Vilma. L. 2000: Insularidade: os horizontes do processo criativo. In: XV Encontro Regional de História - História no ano 2000: Perspectivas, São Paulo - SP. Programa e Resumos do XV Encontro Regional de História - História no ano 2000: Perspectivas. São Paulo: Editora da Universidade do Sagrado Coração, v. 01. p. 141-142. 2474.  Fonseca, Vilma. L. 2001: José Lezama Lima e a busca da Identidade Insular: Uma reflexão sobre a Fronteira Imaginária, Diálogos Revista Electrónica de História, Universidad de Costa Rica.

2009

138

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2475.  Fonseca, Vilma. L. 2004: Fronteiras Imaginárias, fronteiras Insulares: José Lezama Lima e a expressão poética cubana. Revista Brasileira do Caribe, Goias - Brasil, v. IV, n. 8, p. 207-235. 2476.  Fontaine, Jannick, 2003: Le monde du travail à la Réunion: archaïsmes et mutations d’une société post-coloniale en quête d’intégration; sous la direction de Jean-Louis Guébourg, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de la Réunion. Université de soutenance 2477.  Forbes, Annabella Keith, 1987: Unbeaten tracks in islands of the Far East : experiences of a naturalist’s wife in the 1880’s, Singapore: Oxford University Press, xii, 305 p. 2478.  Ford, Douglas, 1989: The Pacific islanders, New York: Chelsea House. 2479.  Ford, E., 1938: “Artificial cranial deformation in New Britain”, in The Medical Journal of Australia 2:729-735. 2480.  Forde, Brendan, 1989-90: “Inishkea: a glimpse of island life and customs in the last century”, in North Mayo Historic Journal, 2:3, 34-38. 2481.  Forestier Hubert, Guillaud D., Meyers K., Simanjuntak T., 2008: Mentawai. L’île des Hommes Fleurs, IRD, Romain Pages Éd.. 2482.  Forman, Charles W., 1982: The island churches of the South Pacific: emergence in the twentieth century, Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books. 2483.  Forster, John Reinold 1996: Observations Made During a Voyage Round the World, on Physical Geography, Natural History and Ethic Philosophy, New Edition: Eds. Nicholas. 2484.  Forsyth, David J. C., 1996: Mobilising human resources for development and growth in the Pacific Islands, Suva: University of the South Pacific. 2485.  Forte, edited by Maximilian C., 2006: Indigenous resurgence in the contemporary Caribbean: Amerindian survival and revival, New York: Peter Lang. 2486.  Forth, Gregory L., 1991: Space and place in Eastern Indonesia, Canterbury: University of Kent, Centre of South-East Asian Studies. 2487.  Fortune, Félix-Hilaire, 2000: Les îles françaises d’Amérique, De la vision géopolitique de Richelieu à l’Union européenne, Paris: L’Harmattan. 2488.  Fortune, Félix-Hilaire, 2002: Antilles Françaises: De la Nature et des Hommes: Traits Géophysiques. De la Dynamique du Globe aux Antilles, L’Occupation humaine des îles, Environnement et Protection, Paris: L’Harmattan. 2489.  Forty, George, 1999: Channel Islands at war: a German perspective, Shepperton, Ian Allan. 2490.  Fossen, Anthony van, 1995: “Corporate Power in the Pacific Islands”, in Current Sociology, vol. 43: pp. 115 - 133. 2491.  Fossier, Arnaud e Gardella, Édouard, 2003: «Insularités théoriques. De la circulation conceptuelle à la communication langagière entre chercheurs», Tracés. Revue de Sciences humaines, n° 3, L’île, juillet. Disponível online em URL: http://traces.revues.org/ index3583.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 2492.  Foster, Kevin, 1999: Fighting fictions: war, narrative and national identity, London, Sterling, Va., Pluto Press. 2493.  Foster, Robert J., 1995: Nation making: emergent identities in postcolonial Melanesia, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, c1995. 2494.  Foster, Robert John, 2002: Materializing the nation: commodities, consumption, and media in Papua New Guinea, Bloomington: Indiana University Press.

2009

CEHA

139

2495.  Foster, Robert L., 1993: Disaster in paradise, St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands: Trebor Retsof Publications. 2496.  Foster, Simon, 1995: Hit the beach! amphibious warfare from the Plains of Abraham to San Carlos Water, London: Arms and Armour; New York, NY: Distributed in the USA by Sterling Pub. Co.. 2497.  Foucher, Michel, 1984: Les Antilles, Iles de la Mediterranee d’Amerique: presentation geopolitique, Problemes d’amerique latine, no 71, p. p. 32-65 2498.  Fougère, Eric, 1981: Iles de Méditerranée, CNRS-Paris. 2499.  Fougère, Eric, 1994: Les Voyages Et L’ancrage. Representation De L’espace Insulaire A L’age Classique Et Aux Lumieres (1615-1797); Sous La Direction De Yves Chevrel, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Litterature Civil.COMP: Paris 4: 2500.  Fougère, Eric, 1995: Les voyages et l’ancrage: représentation de l’espace insulaire à l’Age classique et aux Lumières (1615-1797), Paris: L’Harmattan. 2501.  Fougère, Eric, 1997: Îles, autres terres (carnets de route), Nouméa: Grain de sable. 2502.  Fougère, Eric, 2001: La peine en littérature et la prison dans son histoire: solitude et servitude, Paris. 2503.  Fougère, Eric, 2002: Île-prison, bagne et déportation, Paris: L’Harmattan. 2504.  Fougère, Eric, 2002a: Le grand livre du bagne: en Guyane et Nouvelle-Calédonie, Ste Clotilde. 2505.  Fougère, Eric, 2004: Escales en littérature insulaire: îles et balises, Paris: Harmattan. 2506.  Fougère, Eric, 2004a: «Le malheur insulaire: une géographie de la peine», in Îles funestes, îles bienheureuses, textes réunis et présentés par…, Paris: Transboréal. 2507.  Fougère, Eric, 2005: «Insularité politique et politique insulaire: le cas des voyages imaginaires et des utopies», in L’insularité, études rassemblées par Mustapha Trabelsi, ClermontFerrand: Presses universitaires Blaise Pascal. 2508.  Fougère, Eric, 2008: Des indésirables à la Désirade, Matoury (Guyane). 2509.  Fouquin, M.; Siroën, J.-M., 1998: “Régionalisme et multilatéralisme sont-ils antinomiques?”, Économie internationale, n°74, p. 3-156 2510.  Fournet-Guérin, Catherine, 2006: Une géographie musicale et cinématographique de Madagascar: regards géographiques sur le film Mahaleo, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 233, Janvier-Mars. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index195.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 2511.  Fournier, Pierre, 1998: Une zone frontière franco-anglaise: conflits autour des îles anglonormandes, Revue de la Manche, 40:159, 7-48. 2512.  Fourtina, Hervé, 1987: Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme, Bordeaux, CRET, coll.. 2513.  Fourtina, sous la direction de Hervé, Nathalie Jaëck, Joël Richard, 2008: Insularités [publié par le] Groupe d’études et de recherches britanniques, Université Michel de MontaigneBordeaux 3; Pessac: Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 2514.  Fowler, R. M. (Richard Murray), 1980: The Furneaux group, Bass Strait: a history, Canberra, A.C.T. : Roebuck. 2515.  Fox, James J., edited by. 1980: The Flow of life: essays on eastern Indonesia, contributors, Marie Jeanne Adams ... [et al.], Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. 2516.  Fox, James J.; Sather, Clifford, ed. 1996: Origins, ancestry and alliance: explorations

2009

140

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

in Austronesian ethnography, Canberra: Dept. of Anthropology, Australian National University, 1996. 2517.  Fox, Robert, 1985: Antarctica and the South Atlantic: discovery, development and dispute, London: British Broadcasting Corporation. 2518.  Fox, Robin, 1982: “Principles and pragmatics on Tory Island”, In Cohen, Anthony P. (ed.), Belonging: identity and social organisation in British rural cultures, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 50-71. 2519.  Frace, Ryan, K., 2008: Religious Toleration in the Wake of Revolution: Scotland on the Eve of Enlightenment (1688-1710s), History, Volume 93, Number 311, July, pp. 355-375(21) 2520.  Fraenkel, Ed. Jon, Stewart Firth & Brij V. Lal, 2009: The 2006 military takeover in Fiji. Disponível online em url: http://epress.anu.edu.au/coup_coup_citation.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 2521.  Fraenkel, Jon, 2002: Strategic Registration from Metropolis to Periphery in the Republic of the Marshall Islands, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 37, No. 3 (Dec.), pp. 299-312 2522.  Fraenkel, Jon and Stewart Firth (eds), 2007: From election to coup in Fiji The 2006 campaign and its aftermath, Australian National university- Epress, Co-published with Asia Pacific Press. 2523.  France, L., 1991: An application of the tourism destination area life cycle to Barbados, Tourist Review, 46(3), pp. 25-31. 2524.  Franco, José Eduardo (coordenação), 2008: Cultura madeirense: temas e problemas, Porto, Campo das Letras. 2525.  François, Genièvre, 1999: La quête insulaire: Approche physique, culturelle, et symbolique de l’île; sous la dir. de Robert Hérin, Caen: [s.n]. 2526.  Franda, Marcus F., 1982: The Seychelles: unquiet islands, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press. 2527.  Franklin W. Knight, 1994: The New Caribbean and the United States, Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Vol. 533, Trends in U. S.-Caribbean Relations (May), pp. 33-47. 2528.  Franklin, Cynthia, Ruth Hsu, Suzanne Kosanke, 2000: Navigating islands and continents: conversations and contestations in and around the Pacific: selected essays, Honolulu: College of Languages, Linguistics and Literature, University of Hawai’i and the East-West Center: Distributed by University of Hawai’i Press. 2529.  Franks, Jill, 2006: Islands and the modernists: the allure of isolation in art, literature, and science, Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland & Co. 2530.  Frankson, A. S., 2008: A Caribbean identity: memoirs of the colonial service / A.S. Frankson,London; New York: Radcliffe Press. 2531.  Fraser, David, 2000: The Jews of the Channel Islands and the rule of law, 1940-1945: quite contrary to the principles of British justice, Brighton, Portland, OR, Sussex Academic Press. 2532.  Fraser, David, 2007: Un antisémitisme très britannique: l’application des lois anti-juives sur les îles anglo-normandes (1940-1945), In Prum, Michel (ed.), Changements d’aire: de la “race” dans l’aire anglophone (Racisme et eugénisme), Paris: L’Harmattan, 19-38. 2533.  Fraser, edited by Lyndon and Katie Pickle, 2002: Shifting Centres: Women and Migration in New Zealand History, Otago University press. 2534.  Fraser, Lyndon, 2002: To Tara via Holyhead: The Emergence of Irish Catholic Ethnicity in

2009

CEHA

141

Nineteenth-Century Christchurch, New Zealand, Journal of Social History, Volume 36, Number 2, Winter, pp. 431-458. 2535.  Frawley-Holler, Janis, 2003: Island wise: lessons in living from the islands of the world, New York: Broadway Books. 2536.  Freedman, Lawrence, 2005, 2007: The official history of the Falklands Campaign (Whitehall histories: government official history series), Rev. and updated, 2 vols., edn. London: Routledge. 2537.  Freedman, Lawrence, 2005: The impact of the Falklands Conflict on international affairs, In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 9-22. 2538.  Freedman, Lawrence; Gamba-Stonehouse, Virginia, 1990: Signals of war, the Falklands conflict of 1982, London: Faber. 2539.  Freeman, Bill, 1999: A magical place: Toronto Islands and its people, contemporary photography by David Laurence, Toronto: James Lorimer. 2540.  Freeman, Derek, 1983: Margaret Mead and Samoa: the making and unmaking of an anthropological myth, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. 2541.  Freeman, John Derek, 1999: The Fateful Hoaxing of Margaret Mead: A Historical Analysis of her Samoan Research, Basic Books. 2542.  Freeman, Julian, edited by, 1989: Landscapes from a high latitude: Icelandic art 19091989, in a collaboration between Listasafn Islands (The National Gallery of Iceland) and Brighton Polytechnic Gallery; foreword by Magnus Magnusson. London: Published for the Govt. of Iceland and the City of Reykjavík by Lund Humphries. 2543.  Freire Guevara, Enrique, 1999: Archipielago del llanto, Quito, Ecuador, Casa de la Cultura Ecuatoriana Benjamín Carrión. 2544.  Freitas, António Aragão Figueira de e Gilda Vieira, 1981-1984: Madeira-Investigação bibliográfica, Funchal, DRAC, 3 vols. 2545.  Frere, Sheppard Sunderland, 1987: “Roman Britain in 1986, 1: Sites Explored”, in Britannia, 18, 301-59, Publisher: Society for the Promotion of Roman Studies. 2546.  Freud, Claude; Richard, Jacques; Papazian, Vatche, 1986: Dynamique des systems agraires: l’exercice du developpement, In L’Ile de San Nicolau (Republique du Cap Vert): un type de detournement de l’aide, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, Paris, France, p. 227-276. 2547.  Freud, C., 2000: “Different paths to free trade: the gains from regionalism”, The Quaterly Journal of Economics, n°4, p. 1317-1341. 2548.  Freyss, Jean (dir.), Bonnemaison, Joùl (dir.), 1997: Le Pacifique insulaire. Nations, aides, espaces, Revue tiers monde, 01/04/1997, vol. vol. 38, no 149. 2549.  Friedman, Hal M., 1993: “The Beast in Paradise: The United States Navy in Micronesia, 1943–1947”, Pacific Historical Review, 62 (May 1993): 173–195. 2550.  Friedman, H.M., 1994: Arguing over empire; American interservice and interdepartmental rivalry over Micronesia 1943-47, Journal of Pacific History, 29, 1, 36-48. 2551.  Friedman, H.M., 1997: Races undesirable from a military point of view; United States security in the Pacific Islands 1945-47, Journal of Pacific History, 32, 1, 49-70. 2552.  Friedman, H.M., 1997: The open door in paradise? United States strategic security and

2009

142

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

economic policy in the Pacific Islands 1945-47, PS, 20, 1, 63-88. 2553.  Friedman, Hal M., 2001: Creating an American lake: United States imperialism and strategic security in the Pacific Basin, 1945-1947, Westport, Conn., Greenwood Press. 2554.  Friedman, Jonathan, and Edvard Hviding, 2001 Islands Connected: Making PacificWorlds. In Migrations and Exchange in Historical Perspective, edited by Paul Wallin, 4–9. No Barriers Seminar Papers, Vol 3. Oslo: The Kon-Tiki Museum, Institute for Pacific Archaeology and Cultural History. 2555.  Friedman, Hal M., Governing the American Lake: the US defense and administration of the Pacific, 1945-1947, East Lansing: Michigan State University Press. 2556.  Friedman, J., 1985: Captain Cook and the world system, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 20(4), 1985: 191-208. 2557.  Friedman, Jonathan, 1988: “A Review Essay: No History Is an Island: An Exchange Between Jonathan Friedman and Marshall Sahlins”, in Critique of Anthropology, Dec 1988; vol. 8: pp. 7 - 39. 2558.  Friedman, Jonathan; Carrier, James G., ed. 1996: Melanesian modernities, Lund, Sweden: Lund University Press, 1996. 2559.  Friend, T., 2003: Indonesian Destinies, Harvard University Press. 2560.  Friends of Denmark Danish Information Service, 1945: A Brief Bibliography of Denmark and Greenland, Friends of Denmark Danish Information Service. 2561.  Frimigacci, Daniel ... [et al.], Ko le fonu tu’a limulimua = La tortue au dos moussu: textes de tradition orale de Futuna, Paris: Peeters. 2562.  Fritz, Georg., 1986: The Chamorro: A History and Ethnography of the Mariana,. Translated by Elfriede Craddock, Edited by Scott Russel, Saipan, CM: Division of Historic Preservation. 2563.  Fröhlich, Anne Marie, 1988: Inseln in der Weltliteratur, Nachwort von Federico Hindermann, Zürich: Manesse. 2564.  From Rio to Rai: Environment and Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and beyond Volume 2: Voices Unheard and Unheeded, Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press. 2565.  Frost, A. and Samson J., eds, 1999: Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams, Melbourne, MUP. 2566.  Frustier, sous la direction de Pierre, 2007: Les identités insulaires face au tourisme: actes du colloque organisé par le CREC, Centre de recherche éducation-culture, Université de Nantes, La Roche-sur-Yon, 1er et 2 juin 2006, La Roche-sur-Yon: Siloë. 2567.  Fry, G., 1981: Regionalism and international politics of the South Pacific, Pacific Affairs, Vol 54, 3, pp.458-60 and 476-84. 2568.  Fry, G., 1982: Melanesian and South Pacific regional politics, in May R. and Nelson H, eds, Melanesia beyond diversity, Canberra, RSPacS, ANU, pp.651-73. 2569.  Fry, G., 1983: A nuclear free zone for the Southwest Pacific; prospects and significance, Working Paper, No 75, Canberra, SDSC, ANU. 2570.  Fry, G., 1987: Regional arms control in the South Pacific. in Ball, D. and Mack, A., eds, The future of arms control, Canberra, ANU pp.137-56. 2571.  Fry, Gerald, Rufino Mauricio, 1987a: Pacific Basin and Oceania, Oxford, England, Santa Barbara, Calif., Clio Press.

2009

CEHA

143

2572.  Fry, G., 1993: At the margin; the South Pacific and the changing world order, in Richardson JL and Leaver R, eds, The post-cold war order; diagnoses and prognoses, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 2573.  Fry, G., 1994: Climbing back on the map? The South Pacific Forum and the new development orthodoxy, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 29,3, pp.64-72. 2574.  Fry, G., 1996: Framing the Islands; knowledge and power in changing Australian images of the South Pacific, Canberra, Working Paper, Dept of International Relations ANU. 2575.  Fry, G., 1997: Australia and the South Pacific; the rationalist ascendancy, in Cotton, J. and Ravenhill, J, eds, Seeking Asian engagement; Australia in world affairs 1991-95, Melbourne, OUP, p.291-308. 2576.  Fry, G., 1997: Framing the Islands; knowledge and power in changing Australian images of the South Pacific, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 9, 2, 305-344. 2577.  Fry, G., 1997a: The South Pacific experiment; reflections on the origins of regional identity, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 32, 2, pp.180-202. 2578.  Fry, G., Ed. 1991: Australia’s regional security, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 2579.  Fry, G., Ed. 1991: The region in review, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 3/2, pp.384-8. 2580.  Fry, G., Ed. 1991a: Australia’s South Pacific policy; from strategic denial to constructive commitment, Working Paper No 8, Canberra, RSPacS, ANU. 2581.  Fry, G., Ed. 1991b: Constructive commitment with the South pacific; Munroe doctrine or new partnership, in, Australia’s regional security, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 2582.  Fry, G., Ed. 1991c: The region in review, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 3/2, pp.384-8. 2583.  Fry, G., Ed. 1992: Australia and the South Pacific, in Boyce RJ and Angel JR, eds, Diplomacy in the marketplace; Australia in world affairs 1981-90. 2584.  Fry, G., Ed. 1992a: Peace keeping in the South Pacific; some questions and prior considerations, Dept of International relations, Canberra ANU. 2585.  Fry, G., Ed. 1992b: The region in review; international issues and events 1991, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 4/2, pp.379-86. 2586.  Fry, G., Ed. 1993: The region in review; international issues and events 1992, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 5/2, pp.390-402. 2587.  Frye, Galliard; Demeritt, Carolyn and Deloria, Vine, 1998: As Long as the Waters Flow: Native Americans in the South and the East, John F. Blair Pub.. 2588.  Frynas, J.G.; Wood, G.; Oliveira, R.M.S. Soares de, 2003: Business and Politics in São Tomé e Príncipe: From Cocoa Monoculture to Petro-State, LUSOTOPIE, 2003, no 2003, p. 33-58, bibliogr. notes, 1 tabl.. (Version mise à jour de l’article publié dans African Affairs, CII (1), January 2003.) 2589.  Fuchs, L.H., 1961: Hawaii Pono; a social history, Harvest/HBJ, 1961. 2590.  Fujii, Reiichi, 1987: Nantō bungaku joron, Ōsaka-shi: Kaifūsha. 2591.  Fujii, Sadakazu, 1990: “Omoimatsugane” wa utau uta ka: Ko Nihon bungaku hasseiron, zoku, Tōkyō: Shintensha. 2592.  Fuligni, Bruno, 2003: L’île à éclipses: histoire des apparitions et disparitions d’une terre française en Méditerranée, Paris: Les Editions de Paris. 2593.  Fullagar, R. L. and et al..., 1991: Obsidian sources at Mopir, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Archaeology in Oceania, 26(3): 11O-14.

2009

144

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2594.  Fullagar, R. L.; [et al.], 1991: “Research report: obsidian sources at Mopir, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea”, in Archaeology in Oceania 26: 111-114. 2595.  Funk, FLS Matt, On the Problem of Dependent People: hyperbolic discounting in Atlantic Canadian island jurisdictions, MPRA Paper from University Library of Munich, Germany. Disponível online em url: http://mpra.ub.uni-muenchen.de/14522/. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 2596.  Fursdon, Edward, 1988: The Falklands aftermath: picking up the pieces, 1988. 2597.  Furt, Jean-Marie (Directeur scientifique); Michel, Frank (Directeur scientifique), 2006: Tourismes & identities, Paris: L’Harmattan. 2598.  Furuki, Toshiaki (ed.), 2006: Self-Governance of Islands in the Era of Regions: A Comparative Study of the Åland Islands in the Baltic Sea and the Ryukyu Islands in the East China Sea, Japan, Institute of Social Sciences, Chuo University. 2599.  Fusimalohi, T. and J. Crossland, 1980: Report on the South Pacific Commission Deep Sea Fisheries Development Project in the West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, 5 Sept.-14 Dec., 1979, Noumea, South Pacific Commission. 2600.  Fuson, Robert Henderson, 1995: Legendary islands of the Ocean Sea, Sarasota, Fla.: Pineapple Press, c1995. 2601.  Fustier, B., 1995: “Position économique des régions insulaires par rapport à la norme européenne: le poids de l’isolement”, Revue d’économie régionale et urbaine, n°1, p. 87-102. 2602.  Futatsuka, M., T. Inaoka, R. Ohtsuka, T. Sakurai, K. Moji and T. Igarashi, 1996: Life and health of chain saw operation in tropical rain forests: changes in work conditions and health due to the mechanization of forestry, Environmental Sciences 4 (Sup.): S135-S145. Pacifique, vol. 1: Enjeux sociaux, économiques et politiques, vol. 2: Pratiques symboliques en transition, Aix-en-Provence: Publications de l’Université de Provence. 2603.  Gabert, P. 1981: «L’évolution démographique des îles de Sicile et de Sardaigne et les problèmes économiques de l’Italie.» Iles de Méditerranée. Actes de la table ronde du groupement d’intérêt scientifique sciences humaines sur l’aire méditerranéenne –Cahier n° Aix-en-Provence Octobre 1980, Paris, Editions du CNRS. 2604.  Gabilondo, P., 1998: “A Second Creation”: in Search of the Island of the Colourblind’ in L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J. Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The Literature of Small Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island, pp. 85-100. 2605.  Gaffaney, T.J., 1995: Linking colonization and decolonisation; the case of Micronesia, PS, 18, 1, 23-60. 2606.  Gaffney, Ellie, 1989: Somebody now: the autobiography of Ellie Gaffney, a woman of Torres Strait, Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press. 2607.  Gaffney, Vincent... [et al.], 1997: The Adriatic Islands Project: contact, commerce and colonialism, 6000 BC-AD 600, with a commentary on the classical sources for the island by Slobodan Čače, Oxford, Tempvs Reparatvm. 2608.  Gage, Catherine, 1995: A history of the island of Rathlin, Northern Ireland: J. Margaret Dickson, 1995. 2609.  Gailey, Christine Ward, 1987: Kinship to kingship: gender hierarchy and state formation in the Tongan Islands, Austin, Tex.: University of Texas Press. 2610.  Gailey, Harry A., 1986: Howlin’ Mad vs the army: conflict in command, Saipan, 1945,

2009

CEHA

145

Novato, CA: Presidio Press. 2611.  Gailey, Harry A., 2003: Bougainville: the forgotten campaign, 1943-1945, Lexington (KY): University of Kentucky Press. 2612.  Gaillard, Olivier, 1996, Insularité: babil avec un insulaire de fortune: Babil avec un insulaire de fortune, O. Gaillard. 2613.  Gajdusek, D. Carleton, 1989: Melanesian journal: expedition to New Hebrides, Solomon Islands, Manus, New Britain, and New Guinea, 23 January 1965 to 7 April 1965, [Bethesda, Md.: Study of Child Growth and Development and Disease Patterns in Primitive Cultures, Laboratory of Central Nervous System Studies, National Institute of Neurological Disease and Stroke, U.S. Dept. of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health] 2614.  Galani-Moutafi, V., 1993: From agriculture to tourism: Property, labor, gender, and kinship in a Greek island village (Part one), Journal of Modern Greek Studies, 11, pp. 241-270. 2615.  Galibert, Charlie, 2004: La Corse, une île et le monde: essai ethno-historique sur l’insularité, Presses universitaires de France. 2616.  Galipaud, Jean Christophe, Ian Liley, 1999: Le Pacifique de 5000 à 2000 avant le présent. Supplément a l’Histoire dune Colonisation, Actes du Colloque, Vanuatu, 1996, Paris, Éditions de IRD. Disponível online em http://arts.anu.edu.au/arcworld/resources/papers/ Spriggs/1999/Spriggs1999f.pdf. consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 2617.  Gallagher, Steve and Carol Jean Gallagher, 2000: Sociolinguistic and Literacy Studies: Bariai, In John Brownie ed., Data Papers on Papua New Guinea Languages, volume 45. Summer Institute of Linguistics, Ukarumpa, Papua New Guinea. 2618.  Gallant, Thomas W., 2002: Experiencing dominion: culture, identity, and power in the British Mediterranean, Notre Dame, Ind., University of Notre Dame Press. 2619.  Gallay, Gretel, 1988: Die mittel- und spätbronze- sowie ältereisenzeitlichen Bronzedolche in Frankreich und auf den britischen Kanalinseln, München: C.H. Beck. 2620.  Gallet, Dominique, 2001: São Tomé et Principe. Les îles du milieu du monde, Paris: Karthala, 2001. 2621.  Gallienne, Matthew, edited by John Waller, 1989: A Methodist pilgrimage in France: the journal of Matthew Gallienne, 1877, Loughborough, Leicestershire Loughborough University of Technology. 2622.  Galván Guijo, Javier, 1998: Islas del Pacífico: el legado español, Barcelona: Mininsterio de Educación y Cultura, Dirección General de Cooperación y Comunicación Cultural. 2623.  Galván Rodríguez, Eduardo, 1998: Hecho insular y Unón Europea: un aporte históricojurídico, Madrid, Centro de Estudios Políticos y Constitucionales. 2624.  Galván Tudela, Alberto, 1987: Las fiestas populares Canárias, prologo de William A. Christian, [Spain], Interinsular, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, Ediciones Canarias. 2625.  Galván Tudela, Alberto, 1997: La identidad herreña, [La Laguna, Tenerife], Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 2626.  Gambín García, Mariano, 2006: En nombre del rey: los primeros gobernadores de Canarias y América, 1480-1526, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2627.  Gamble, A.; Payne, A. (eds), 1996: Regionalism & World order, Basingstoke, Macmillan. 2628.  Gammage, B., 1996: Police and power in the pre-war PNG Highlands, Journal of Pacific History, 31, 2, 62-77. 2629.  Gammage, B., 1999: The sky travellers; journeys in New Guinea 1938-1939, Melbourne,

2009

146

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

MUP. 2630.  Gammeltoft, Peder, 2005: ‘Islands great and small: a brief suvey of the names of islands and skerries in Shetland’, In Gammeltoft, Peder; Hough, Carole; Waugh, Doreen J. (ed.), Cultural contacts in the North Atlantic region: the evidence of names (Scotland: NORNA: Scottish Place-Name Society: Society for Name Studies in Britain and Ireland), 119-126 2631.  Gandelot, Ludovic, 2008: Contribution à L’étude des Sentiments Identitaires des Indiens de Madagascar,  Lusotopie, Volume 15,  Number 1, pp. 175-182 (8).   2632.  Gandía, Enrique de, 1986: Primitivos navegantes vascos y las Malvinas, Buenos Aires: Editorial Vasca Ekin. 2633.  Gannier, Odile, Cécile Picquoin, 2003: Le voyage du capitaine Marchand, [1791]: les Marquises et les îles de la révolution, Pirae, Tahiti: Au Vent des îles. 2634.  Ganter, Regina, The pearl-shellers of Torres Strait: resource use, development and decline, 1860s-1960s, Carlton, Vic.: Melbourne University Press. 2635.  Garanger, J.; Robineau, C., 1980: Bora-Bora, Paris: Nouvelles Editions Latines. 2636.  Garbutt, N., 1999: Mammals of Madagascar, Pica Press. 2637.  García Cantús, Dolores, 2006: Fernando Poo: una aventura colonial española,[Vic (Barcelona)]: CEIBA, Centros Culturales Españoles de Guinea Ecuatorial. 2638.  García-Passalacqua, Juan M., 1994: The Grand Dilemma: Viability and Sovereignty for Puerto Rico, Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Vol. 533, Trends in U. S.-Caribbean Relations (May), pp. 151-164. 2639.  Gardiner, By J. Stanley, B.A. 1898. The natives of Rotuma, Journal  of the Royal Anthropological Institute, 27:396-435, 457-524, Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. (Communicated by Professor Alexander Macalister, M.A., F.R.S.) Disponível online em url: http://www.rotuma.net/os/Gardiner/GdrContents.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 2640.  Gardiner, Mark; McDowell, Jacqueline (ed.), 2005: The Channel Islands: report and proceedings of the 150th summer meeting of the Royal Archaeological Institute in 2004 (Archaeological Journal. Supplement, 161). London: Royal Archaeological Institute. 2641.  Gardiner, Vince, 1996: The same but different: nineteenth century tourism in the Channel Islands and the visit of Sir David Wedderburn, 1873, Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 24 (1996), 110-26. 2642.  Gardiner, W., 1992: Te mura o te ahi; The story of the Maori batallion, Reed. 2643.  Garí-Montllor Hayek, Domingo, 1992: Historia del nacionalismo canario: historia de las ideas y de la estrategia política del nacionalismo canario en el siglo XX, Editorial Benchomo, La Laguna (Tenerife) . 2644.  Garnier, Val, 2002: Medical history of the Jersey hospitals and nursing homes during the occupation 1940-1945, London: Channel Islands Occupation Birth Cohort Study, Social Science Research Unit, Institute of Education, University of London. 2645.  Garrett, J., 1982: To live among the stars, Suva. 2646.  Garrido Torres, Carlos, 1998: Arqueoguía de Cataluña y Baleares: una guía práctica para visitar el pasado, dibujos de Vicenç Sastre, Barcelona, Planeta. 2647.  Garrigues-Belot, Fabienne, 1995: Contraintes de gestion des ressources en eau, dans les petites îles montagneuses de la zone intertropicale, Bordeaux: Universite Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3, 1.

2009

CEHA

147

2648.  Garrioch, Véronique, 1992: Insularité et quête du sens dans le roman d’aventures du XIXe siècle, Mém. de maîtrise: Lett. mod.: Réunion. 2649.  Garrison, Ervan G. ... [et al.], 1989: An Eighteenth-century ballast pile site, Chandeleur Islands, Louisiana: an instrumental and archaeological study, New Orleans: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, Minerals Management Service, Gulf of Mexico OCS Regional Office. 2650.  Garry W. Trompf, ed. 1987: The Gospel is not Western: Black theologies from the Southwest Pacific, Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books. 2651.  Garuba, H., 2001: The Island Writes Back: Discourse/Power and Marginality in Wole Soyinka’s “The Swamp Dwellers,” Derek Walcott’s “The Sea at Dauphin,” and Athol Fugard’s “The Island”, Research in African Literatures, Vol. 32, No. 4 (Winter), pp. 61-76. 2652.  Gary Y. Okihiro, 2001: The Columbia Guide to Asian American History, Columbia University Press. 2653.  Gasparini, Graziano, 1995: La arquitectura de las Islas Canarias, 1420-1788, fotografías del autor, [Caracas]: Armitano Editores. 2654.  Gaspart, C.; Cohen, R. (ed.), 1983: African Islands and enclaves, In, les survivances coloniales aux Comoros, Beverly hills; Londres; New Delhi: sage publications, 1983. p. 217-248. 2655.  Gathorne-Hardy, F.J., [et al.], 2007: “The Chironomidae of Gróthúsvatn, Sandoy, Faroe Islands: climatic and lake-phosphorus reconstructions, and the impact of human settlement”, in The Holocene, vol. 17: pp. 1259 - 1264. 2656.  Gatrell J.D.; Spiker J.S., 2002: “The regional concept and régional development: Policy networks in action and in place”, Professional Paper of the Indiana State University, n°22, p. 3-12. 2657.  Gatty, Harold, 1999: Finding Your Ways Without Map or Compass, Dover Publications, Inc. 2658.  Gaulme, François, 2000: “São Tomé dix ans après la démocra­tisation, ou les apories d’un libéralisme systématique”, in Lusotopie, pp.47-58. 2659.  Gaunder, Padmini, 1999: Education & race relations in Fiji 1835-1998, Universal Printing. 2660.  Gawin, Izabella, 1995: Insula Fortunata: vom Nutzen einer Atlantikinsel: Gran Canaria vom Spätmittelalter bis zur Gegenwart, Bremen: Edition Temmen. 2661.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1990-1991: «La distance et la promotion d’un produit touristique insulaire: le cas de Tahiti et ses îles», L’Espace géographique, n° 2, p. 149-157. 2662.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1994: «Le tourisme en Polynésie française», Annales de géographie, n° 577, p. 276-292. 2663.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1995: «Le tourisme en Nouvelle-Calédonie», Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, n° 189, p. 55-70. 2664.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1998: “La dynamique touristique de l’île Rodrigues (Maurice)”. Actes des VIIe Journées de Géographie Tropicale de Brest, Nantes, Ouest éditions/ Presses académiques, p. 205-212. 2665.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1998: «Les Hauts de la Réunion conquis par les loisirs», Mappemonde, n° 51, p. 31-37 (en collaboration avec P. Bouchet). 2666.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1999: «Le tourisme dans les Outre-mers de l’océan Pacifique», Mappemonde, n° 54, p. 26-29. 2667.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1999a: «Les balbutiements du tourisme mahorais», Travaux et documents (revue de la faculté des lettres et des sciences humaines de l’université de la

2009

148

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Réunion), n° 11 (Propos géographiques sur le sud-ouest de l’océan Indien), p. 137-152. 2668.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1999b: Recherches sur les discontinuités spatiales et le tourisme, Université de Paris VII, Habilitation à diriger des recherches. 2669.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2000: “Deux figures du retranchement touristique: l’île-hôtel et la zone franche”. Mappemonde, nº 59, p. 2-8. 2670.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2000a: “La mise en tourisme des îles intertropicales”, Mappemonde, nº58, p. 17-22. 2671.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2000b: “Le tourisme dans un espace non touristique: le cas de la République fédérale islamique des Comores”. L’information géographique, nº4, p. 300313. 2672.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2001: La diffusion du tourisme dans l’archipel comorien, Mappemonde, no 64, p. p. 15-18. 2673.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2001a: L’île-Hôtel, symbole du tourisme maldivien, In Aspects du développement dans l’Océan Indien, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 54, no 213, p. p. 27-52. 2674.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2003: «Discontinuités et aires protégées» in Lebigre J.-M. et Decoudras P.-M. (dir.), Les Aires protégées insulaires et littorales tropicales (Actes du colloque Dymset, Transcultures, Sepanrit, Nouméa (Nouvelle-Calédonie), 30 et 31 octobre 2001), Pessac, CRET, Université Bordeaux-III, coll. «Îles et archipels» n° 32, p. 17-28. 2675.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2003: L’outre-mer français en mouvement, Paris, La documentation française, «Documentation pohotographique», nº ‹8031. 2676.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2004: «Tourisme, politique et développement aux Seychelles», Revue Tiers-Monde, n° 178, p. 319-339. 2677.  Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2008:«Les territoires français du Pacifique» in Arias, S. et Chaudron, E., dir., Belin histoire-géographie terminal ST2S, p. 232-239 et 252-253. 2678.  Geary, Christraud M. and Virginia-Lee Webb, 1998: Delivering views: distant cultures in early postcards, Washington [D.C.], Smithsonian Institution Press. 2679.  Geddes, John, 2007: Spearhead assault: blood, guts and glory on the Falklands frontline, London: Century. 2680.  Gegeo, D. W., & Watson-Gegeo, K. A., 2002: Whose knowledge? Epistemological collisions in Solomon Islands community development, The Contemporary Pacific, 14(2), pp. 377–409. 2681.  Geiger, Wilhelm, 1999: Maldivian Linguistic Studies, Reprint 1919 edn. Asian Educational Services. Delhi. 2682.  Gell, Alfred, 1996: Wrapping in Images: Tattooing in Polynesia, Oxford: Clarendon Press. 2683.  Gendre, Annick, 2007: La Representation de soi à travers la textualisation de l’espace insulaire réunionnais: Etude de l’oeuvre de Jean Lods, Bourdeaux, Université Bourdeaux, III. 2684.  Geoffrey, C. Gunn, 2000: The 500-Year Timorese Funu, Bulletin of Concerned Asian Scholars, Vol. 32. 2685.  Geoffroy, Edouard, 2007: Dynamique entrepreneuriale et insularité: le cas des entreprises de la caraïbe francophone; sous la direction de Emmanuel Okamba, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de Marne-la-Vallée. Université de soutenance, Thèse de doctorat: Comptabilité, Contrôle de gestion, Finance: Marne-la-Vallée.

2009

CEHA

149

2686.  Geoffroy-Schneiter, Bérénice, 2000: Primal arts: Africa, Oceania and the southeast Asian islands, London: Thames & Hudson. 2687.  George, K. M., 1994: Socio-economic survey of smallholder oil palm growers in Papua New Guinea, August 1994, Draft final report. 2688.  George, Marianne, 1986: Review of Tikopia: The Prehistory and Ecology of a Polynesian Outlier by Patrick V. Kirch and D. E. Yen, Pacific Studies, 9(1):185- 190. 2689.  George, Marianne, 1998: The Return of Lata: Building An Authentic Polynesian Voyaging Canoe, Sea History, Spring, Pp. 40-42. 2690.  George, Marianne, 2001: Sir Raymond Firth: Honorary Fellow, ASAO Newsletter 109:2122. 2691.  George, Marianne, 2002: In Memoriam: Sir Raymond Firth, ASAO Newsletter 112:23. 2692.  George, Marianne, 2005: Tikopia, In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James Brix. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. 2693.  Geraghty, Paul, 1993: Pulotu, Polynesian homeland, JPS, vol. 102(4), 1993, 343-384. 2694.  Gershator, Phillis, 1994: Tukama tootles the flut: a tale from the Antilles, paintings by Synthia Saint James, New York: Orchard Books. 2695.  Gestur Guđmundsson,1990: Rokksaga Íslands: frá Sigga Johnnie til Sykurmolanna, Reykjavík : Forlagið. 2696.  Getz, D., 1986: Tourism and population change: long term impacts of tourism on in the Badenoch and Strathspey district of the Scottish Highlands, Scottish Geographical Magazine,102(2), pp.113-126. 2697.  Ghina (F.), 2003: «Sustainable Development In Small Island Developing States: The Case Of The Maldives Environment», Development And Sustainability, 5, p. 139-165. 2698.  Ghisoni, D. (dir.); Iopue, W. (dir.); Rabin, C. (dir.); Tjibaou, J.M. (pref.), 1988: Ces iles que l’on dit francaises, Université de Lyon, Paris; L’Harmattan. 2699.  Giacottino, J.-C., 1982: “Les pays caraïbes anglophones. Passé colonial et transformation contemporaines”, Hérodote, nº 27, p. 101-118. 2700.  Giacottino, J.-C., 1987: “Problématique et perspectives du développement des petits pays insulaires tropicaux”, in Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme. Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles et archipels”, n°8, p. 167-192. 2701.  Giacottino, J.-C., 1993: “Les Départements d’Outre-Mer des Antilles: crise ou mutation”, Annales des Pays d’Amérique Latine et des Caraïbes, nº 11 et 12, p. 191-223. 2702.  Giacottino, J.-C., 1995: Les Guyanes, Paris, PUF, coll. “Que sais-je ?”. 2703.  Giaoutzi, Maria; Nijkamp, Peter, 1993: Decision support models for regional sustainable development: an application of geographic information systems and evaluation models to the Greek Sporades Islands, in association with Jeroen van den Bergh ... [et al.], Aldershot, Hants, England: Avebury; Brookfield, Vt.: Ashgate Pub. Co.. 2704.  Gibbons, Henry K., 1997: The Myth and Mystery of John Cabot: The Discoverer of North America, Marten Cat Publishers, Port Aux Basques, Newfoundland. 2705.  Gibbons, J. D.; Fish, M., 1987: World tourism forecasts and the outlook for the US Virgin Islands, Social and economic studies, vol. vol. 36, no 4, p. p. 193-207. 2706.  Giblin-Delvallet, Béatrice, 1985: “Et pourquoi pas un front de libération des îles franconormandes ? “, Hérodote, n° 37-38.

2009

150

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2707.  Gibran, Daniel K., 1998: The Falklands War: Britain versus the past in the South Atlantic, Jefferson (NC): McFarland. 2708.  Gibson, J. S. Wycherley; Hampson, Elizabeth, 2000: Marriage and census indexes for family historians, 8th edn. Bury: Federation of Family History Societies. 2709.  Gibson, Jeremy Sumner Wycherley; Medlycott, Mervyn T., 1997: Local census listings, 1522-1930: holdings in the British Isles, 3rd edn. Birmingham: Federation of Family History Societies, 1997. 2710.  Gibson, Sally, 1984: More than an island: a history of the Toronto island, Toronto, Canada: Irwin Pub.. 2711.  Gideon, Hieromonk, edited by Richard A. Pierce, 1989: The round the world voyage of Hieromonk Gideon, 1803-1809, with an introduction and notes, by Lydia T. Black, Kingston, Ont. ; Fairbanks, Alaska: Limestone Press. 2712.  Gifford, John, 1992: Highland and islands, London: Penguin Books in association with the Buildings of Scotland Trust. 2713.  Gifford, John.1992: The buildings of Scotland: Highland and Islands (The Buildings of Scotland, 5). London: Lane. 2714.  Gil, David; Vickers, Michael, 1995: Antiquities from the Lipari islands in the Ashmolean Museum, Oxford, in, Giustolisi, Vittorio, Vulcano: introduzione alla storia e all’archeologia dell’antica Hiera, [Palermo]: Centro di documentazione e ricerca per la Sicilia antica “Paolo Orsi”: Regione siciliana, Assessorato dei beni culturali ed ambientali. 2715.  GIL, Juan, 1995: Las Islas de la Índia, in Los Universos Insualres, Cuadernos del Cemyr, III, La Laguna. 2716.  GIL, Juan, 2001: As Ilhas Imaginárias, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP, pp.11-27 2717.  Gil-Alana, Luis A., Juncal Cuñado and Fernando Perez de Gracia, 2008: Tourism in the Canary Islands: forecasting using several seasonal time series models, Journal of Forecasting, 2008, vol. 27, issue 7, pages 621-636 2718.  Gildas, Bernier, 1989: Ships, harbours and navigation between the Continent and the Celtic Islands during the early middle ages, In Ireland, John de Courcy, Sheehy, David C. (ed.), Atlantic visions (Dun Laoghaire: Boole Press), 155-57. 2719.  Gill, J. B.; Morris, J. D. and R. W. Johnson 1993: Timescale For Producing the Geochemical Signature of Island-Arc Magmas - U-Th-Po and Be-B Systematics in Recent Papua New Guinea Lavas, Geochimica Et Cosmochimica Acta, 57(17): 4269-4283. 2720.  Gillett, R. D., 1987: Traditional tuna fishing: a study at Satawal, central Caroline Islands, Honolulu: Bishop Museum Press. 2721.  Gilliard, E. T., 1961: “Exploring New Britain’s land of fire”, in National Geographic, 119(2): 261-292. 2722.  Gilliard, E. T.; LeCroy, M., 1967: “Results of the 1958-59 Gilliard New Britain Expedition. 4: Annotated list of the birds of the Whiteman Mountains, New Britain”, in Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History, 135: 173-266. 2723.  Gillis, J., 2001: ‘Places Remote and Islanded’, Michigan Quarterly Review, v40 nº1: 39-58 2724.  Gillis, J., 2003: Taking History Offshore: Atlantic Islands in European Minds, 1400-1800’, in Edmond, R and Smith, V(eds), Islands in History and Representation, London: Routledge. 2725.  Gillis, J., 2004: Islands of the Mind: How the Human Imagination Created the Atlantic

2009

CEHA

151

World, New York, Palgrave Macmillan. 2726.  Gillis, John R., 2007: Island sojourns. (Report), The Geographical Review. Disponível online em URL: http://www.accessmylibrary.com/coms2/summary_0286-33344774_ITM. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009. 2727.  Gilson, Richard Phillip, 1980: The Cook Islands, 1820-1950, edited by Ron Crocombe, [Wellington, N. Z.]: Victoria University Press in association with the Institute of Pacific Studies of the University of the South Pacific. 2728.  Ginard i Féron, David, 1994: L’esquerra mallorquina i el franquisme pròleg de Josep Benet, Palma : Edicions Documenta Balear. 2729.  Ginard i Féron, David, 1997: L’oposició al franquisme a les Balears, 1936-1975, Documenta Balear, S.A. 2730.  Ginns, Michael, 1994: The Organisation Todt and the fortress engineers in the Channel Islands (Archive book, 8), Jersey: Channel Islands Occupation Society. 2731.  Ginzburg, Carlo, 2000: No island is an island: four glances at English literature in a world perspective, Columbia University Press. 2732.  Giot, Pierre-Roland, 1989: The Attraction for Coasts and Islands, from later Prehistory to the Dark Ages, In Ireland, John de Courcy, Sheehy, David C. (ed.), Atlantic visions (Dun Laoghaire: Boole Press), 125-31. 2733.  Girault, C. (ed.). 1983: Les Antilles aujourd’hui, économie et géographie, Bordeaux: CEGET. 2734.  Girault, Christian, 1981: La genese des Nations haitienne et Dominicaine (1492-1900), Paris: CNRS. 2735.  Gistitin, C., 1995: Quite a colony; South Sea Islanders in central Queensland 1867-1993, AEBIS Publishing 2736.  Githire, Njeri, 2006: Voices from ex/isle: Caribbean and indian ocean women writers break geographical confines, Pennsylvania State university. Université de soutenance, Ann Arbor (Mich.): UMI dissertation services, impr. 2737.  Gittins, Anne, 1991: Tales of the Fiji Islands, by the wife of a District Commissioner, Anne Gittins, Fleet, Hants: J.A. Gittins. 2738.  Glaser, Horst Albert, 1996: Utopische Inseln: Beiträge zu ihrer Geschichte und Theorie, Frankfurt a. M; Bern: P. Lang. 2739.  Glasscoe, Marion Exeter, 1999: The medieval mystical tradition: England, Ireland, and Wales: Exeter Symposium VI: papers read at Charney Manor, July 1999, Symposium (6th: 1999: Charney Manor) ,Cambridge [U.K.]; Rochester, NY: D.S. Brewer. 2740.  Glassow, Michael A. edited by. 1993: Archaeology on the northern Channel Islands of California: studies of subsistence, economics, and social organization, contributions by Brenda Bowser ... [et al.], Salinas, CA: Coyote Press. 2741.  Glaw, F.; Vences, M., 1992: A Field Guide to the Amphibians and Reptiles of Madagascar, Vences & Glaw, Cologne. 2742.  Glazier, Stephen D., 1982: An Annotated Ethnographic Bibliography of Trinidad, CrossCultural Research, Jan; vol. 17: pp. 31 - 58. 2743.  Glazier, Stephen, 1985: Caribbean ethnicity revisited: a special issue of ethnic groups, international periodical of ethnic studies, New York: Gordon and Breach Science Publishers.

2009

152

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2744.  Glogović, Dunja, 1989: Prilozi poznavanju željeznog doba na sjevernom Jadranu: Hrvatsko primorje i Kvarnerski otoci = Studies in the Iron Age of the Northern Adriatic: Hrvatsko Primorje and Kvarner Islands, Zagreb: Jugoslavenska akademija znanosti i umjetnosti u Zagrebu. 2745.  Glytsos, N.P., 1999: The impact of demographic deterioration on labour balances in Greece, Journal of Economic Studies, 26(2), pp.130-158. 2746.  Gøbel, Erik, 2002: A guide to sources for the history of the Danish West Indies (U. S. Virgin Islands), 1671-1917, Odense, University Press of Southern Denmark; [Copenhagen]: Danish National Archives; Portland, OR: [Distributed in U.S. by] International Specialized Book Services. 2747.  Godard, H. (dir.), 1998: Les outre-mers, Atlas de France, n°13. Paris, Reclus/La documentation Française. 2748.  Goddard, M., 1995: The rascal road; crime, prestige and development in Papua New Guinea, The Contemporary Pacific, 7, 1995, 55-80 2749.  Godelier, M., 1986: The Making of Great Men: Male Society, Language and Ritual, London: Athlone Press 2750.  Godelier, Maurice; Strathern, Marilyn, ed. 1991: Big men and great men: personifications of power in Melanesia, Cambridge [England]; New York: Cambridge University Press; Paris: Editions de la Maison des Sciences de l’Homme. 2751.  Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães, 1990, «As Historiografias Insulares; Presente e Futuro», in Actas do I Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, II vol., Funchal, SRTCE – DRAC, pp. 1389-1398. 2752.  Goebel, Julius, 1982: The struggle for the Falkland Islands: a study in legal and diplomatic history, with a preface and an introduction by J.C.J. Metford, New Haven: Yale University Press. 2753.  Goetzfridt, Nicholas J., 1992: Indigenous navigation and voyaging in the Pacific: a reference guide, New York: Greenwood Press, 2754.  Goetzfridt, Nicholas J., 1995: Indigenous Literature of Oceania: A Survey of Criticism and Interpretation. Foreword by Vilsoni Hereniko. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press. 2755.  Goetzfridt, Nicholas J.; Wuerch, William L., compiled. 1989: Micronesia, 1975-1987: a social science bibliography, New York : Greenwood Press. 2756.  Goetzfridt, Nicholas J., 2002: Micronesian histories: an analytical bibliography and guide to interpretations, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press. 2757.  Goiffon, Marie, 2008: Pression foncière et littoralisation à la Martinique, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 223, Juillet-Septembre. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/ index831.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 2758.  Golden, Graeme A., 1993: The early European settlers of the Solomon Islands, Melbourne: G. Golden. 2759.  Golder, William E., 1989: Long Island’s first inhabitants: Paleo, Archaic, Transitional, Woodland: a 9000 year history of the Indian occupation of Long Island, Southold, N.Y. (P.O. Box 248, Southold 11971): Southold Indian Museum. 2760.  Goldman, D.E., 2003: the Demarcation of Hispanic Caribbean Cultural Spaces in the Diaspora, Latino Studies, Volume 1, Number 3, November, pp. 403-423(21) 2761.  Goldstein, Donald M., Dillon, Katherine V., 1992: The Williwaw War: the Arkansas National Guard in the Aleutians in World War II, Fayetteville: University of Arkansas Press.

2009

CEHA

153

2762.  Golski, K., 1998: Watched by ancestors; an Australian family, in PNG, Sydney, Hodder Headline Australia 2763.  Gombaud, Stéphane, 2007: Iles, insularité et îléité: le relativisme dans l’étude des espaces archipélagiques, Université de la Réunion. Université de soutenance, Mémire de Thése. 2764.  Gonçalves, Marco Antonio, 2000: Firth e os Tikopia: Da etnografia como experiência, Novos Estudos Cebrap. São Paulo. 2765.  Gonick, Gloria, 1995: Splendor of the Dragon: costumes of the Ryukyu kingdom: published on the occasion of an exhibition organized in cooperation with the Okinawa Prefectural Museum, with an essay by Ichiko Yonamine, Los Angeles: Craft and Folk Art Museum. 2766.  Gonsalves, Ralph E., 1994: History and the Future: A Caribbean Perspective. Quik-Print, Kingstown, St. Vincent. 2767.  González Lemus, Nicolás, 1995: Las islas de la ilusión: británicos en Tenerife, 1850-1900, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2768.  González Lemus, Nicolás, 1997: Comunidad británica y sociedad en Canarias: la cultura inglesa y su impacto sociocultural en la sociedad isleña, Güímar, Tenerife, Islas Canarias, Edén Ediciones. 2769.  González Lemus, Nicolás, 1998: Viajeros victorianos en Canarias: imágenes de la sociedad isleña en la prosa de viaje, prólogo, Raymond Carr, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2770.  González Morales, Alejandro; Aguiar, Gerardo Delgado, 1995: La vivienda en Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 2771.  González Rolán, Tomás; González, Fremiot Hernández; Suárez-Somonte, Pilar Saquero, 1994: Diplomacia y humanismo en el siglo XV: edición crítica, traducción y notas de las Allegationes super conquesta Insularum Canariae contra portugalenses de Alfonso de Cartagena, Madrid: Universidad Nacional de Educación a Distancia. 2772.  Gonzalez, Horacio Mir, 2005: ‘An Argentinian airman in the South Atlantic’ [Falklands Conflict]. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 5-80. 2773.  González, José Manuel, 1993: La sabiduría popular: técnicas y conocimientos científicos tradicionales en Canarias, [La Laguna, Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular de Canaria. 2774.  Goodale, Jane C., 1966: “Blowgun hunters of the South Pacific”, in National geographic 7933: 817. 2775.  Goodale, Jane C., 1980: “Siblings as spouse: the reproduction and replacement of Kaulong society”, in Mac Marshall, ed., Siblingship in Oceania, ASAO Monograph no. 8. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press Pp. 275-306. 2776.  Goodale, Jane C., 1983: Gender, sexuality and marriage: a Kaulong model of nature and culture. in C. MacCormack and Marilyn Strathern eds., Nature, Culture and Gender, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 119-142 2777.  Goodale, Jane C., 1985: “Pigs’ teeth and skull cycles: both sides of the face of humanity”, in American Ethnologist, 12 (2):228-244. 2778.  Goodale, Jane C., 1995: To Sing With Pigs is Human, Seattle: University of Washington Press. 2779.  Goodale, Jane C., with Ann Chowning, 1996: Two-Party Line, Lanham, MD: Rowan and

2009

154

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Littlefield. 2780.  Goodall, John, 1987: Goodbye to Empire: A Doctor Remembers, Edinburgh. 2781.  Goodenough, Ward and Richard Feinberg, 1995: Epilogue, Seafaring in the Contemporary Pacific Islands, Richard Feinberg, ed. Dekalb: Northern Illinois University, pp. 219-228. 2782.  Goodlad, J.H., 1987: ‘The Faroese Road to Autonomy: An Analysis of the Faroese Political System’, Reprinted from Shetland Life, pp. 1-26. 2783.  Goodman, James, 1987: The Navajo Atlas: Environments, Resources, Peoples and History of the Dine Bekeyah, University of Oklahoma Press. 2784.  Goodman, S. M.; Benstead, J. P., 2004: The Natural History of Madagascar, University of Chicago Press. 2785.  Goodman, S. M.; Patterson, B. D., 1997: Natural Change and Human Impact in Madagascar, Smithsonian Institution Press. 2786.  Goonetileke, H A I., 1970-1983: A Bibliography of Ceylon: A Systematic Guide to the Literature on the Land, People, History and Culture Published in the Western Languages from the Sixteenth Century to the Present Day, 5 Volumes, Zug, Switzerland, Inter Documentation Co.. 2787.  Gordon, R. J.; Waiko, K. 1980: “Intensive ethnographic and sociological studies in Papua New Guinea”, In Oral History, 8(7): 75-90. 2788.  Gordon, Rosemary compiled and edited by. 1990: Tokelau: a collection of documents and references relating to constitutional development, Apia: Tokelau Administration. 2789.  Gordon, Suzanne, Hersh, Anne, 2005: Searching for sugar mills: an architectural guide to the Caribbean, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean. 2790.  Gordon, Walter, 1979-1980: Walter Gordon, athlete, officer in law enforcement and administration, Governor of the Virgin Islands: interviews, conducted by Anne Brower ... [et al.]; with an introd. by John D. Holstrom, Berkeley: University of California, The Bancroft Library, Regional Oral History Office. 2791.  Gorenflo, L J, 1990: Regional discontinuities of planning objectives in the Republic of the Marshall Islands, Environment and Planning C: Government and Policy, vol. 8, issue 3, pages 297-314. 2792.  Gorenflo, L.J., 1996: Demographic change in the republic of Palau, Pacific Studies, 1996, vol. vol. 19, no 3, p. p. 37-106. 2793.  Gorenflo, LJ; Levin, M. J., 1994: “The evolution of regional demography in the Marshall Islands”, in PS, 17, 1, 93-59. 2794.  Gosden, C., 1989: Prehistoric social landscapes of the Arawe islands, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Archaeology, in Oceania, 24(2): 45-58. 2795.  Gosden, C., J. Allen, W. Ambrose, D. Anson, J. Golson, R. Green, P. Kirch, I. Lilley, J. Specht and M. Spriggs, 1989: Lapita sites of the Bismarck archipelago, Antiquity, 63(240): 561-586. 2796.  Gosden, C., 1990: “Archaeological work in the Arawe Islands, West New Britain province, Papua New Guinea, December 1989 - February 1990”, Australian archaeology, (30): 37. 2797.  Gosden, C., 1993: Understanding the settlement of Pacific islands in the Pleistocene. M. A. Smith, M. Spriggs and B. Fankhauser, Eds. Sahul in Review: Pleistocene Archaeology in Australia, New Guinea and Island Melanesia, Canberra, Department of Prehistory, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, pp. 131-143.

2009

CEHA

155

2798.  Gosden, C.; Pavlides, C., 1994: “Are islands insular?”, in Archaeology in Oceania, 29: 162-171. 2799.  Gosden, C.; Webb, J., 1994: “The creation of a Papua New Guinean landscape: archaeological and geomorphological evidence”, in Journal of Field Archaeology, 21(1): 29-51. 2800.  Gosden, C. and et al, 1994: Lolmo Cave: a mid- to late Holocene site, the Arawe islands, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Asian Perspectives, 33(1): 97-119. 2801.  Gosden, C., 1994: Social Being and Time, Oxford, Blackwell. 2802.  Gosden, C. and L. Head, 1999: Different histories: a common inheritance for Papua New Guinea and Australia? In: C. Gosden and J. G. Hather, Eds., The Prehistory of Food: Appetites for Change, London, Routledge, pp. 232-251. 2803.  Gosden, C., 2000: “On His Todd: Material Culture and Colonialism”, In: R. Welsch and M. O’Hanlon, Eds. Hunting the Gatherers: ethnographic collectors, agents and agency in Melanesia, 1870-1930s. Oxford, Berghahn Press, pp. 320-352. 2804.  Gosden, C., 2000a: Varieties of colonial experience: material culture and colonialism in West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea. In: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds. Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 161-170. 2805.  Gosden, C. and C. Knowles, 2001: “Material culture and colonialism in West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea”, Bar International Series, 955: 113-120. 2806.  Gosden, C. and C. Knowles, 2001a: Collecting Colonialism: Material Culture and Colonial Change, Oxford, Berg. 2807.  Gosling, Paul, 1993: Archaeological inventory of county Galway, 1: West Galway (including Connemara and the Aran Islands), Dublin: The Stationery Office. 2808.  Gössling, edited by Stefan, 2003: Tourism and development in tropical islands: political ecology perspectives, Cheltham; Northhampton, MA: Edward Elgar Pub.. 2809.  Götherström, Anders; Stenbäck, Niklas; StorÅ, Jan, 2002: “The Jettböle Middle Neolithic Site on the Åland Islands — Human Remains, Ancient dna and Pottery”, in European Journal of Archaeology, vol. 5: pp. 42 - 68. 2810.  Gottlieb, Matthew, 2008: Is It Nationalism? History.s Impact on Okinawan Identity, thesis, faculty of Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State Universit. Disponível online em url: http://scholar.lib.vt.edu/theses/available/etd-11122008-230632/unrestricted/GottliebDoc7. pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 2811.  Gottmann, J. (dir.), 1980: Centre and Periphery. Spatial Variations in Politics, Beverly Hills, Sage Publications 2812.  Gough, Barry M., 1990: “The British reoccupation and colonization of the Falkland Islands, or Malvinas, 1832-1843” in Albion, 22, 261-87. 2813.  Gough, Barry M., 1992: The Falkland Islands/Malvinas: the conquest for empire in the South Atlantic, London; Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Athlone Press. 2814.  Goulden, Rick J., 1982: A Comparative Study of Lusi and Bariai, Two Austronesian Languages of West New Britain, M.A. thesis, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada. 2815.  Goulden, Rick J., 1987: The Melanesian content in Tok Pisin, Unpublished PhD dissertation, Department of Anthropology, University of Toronto.

2009

156

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2816.  Goutier, Hégel, 1996: “Madagascar: une histoire de l’inconnu”, in le courrier Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Union Europeenne, no 156, p. p. 14-32. 2817.  Goüy de Bellocq, Joëlle, 2003 : Insularité et parasitisme: impacts sur l’investissement dans la réponse immune et la diversité génétique du CMH chez le mulot sylvestre, Apodemus sylvaticus, dans le bassin méditerranéen, sous la dir. de] Carlos Feliu, Serge Morand, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), thèse doctorat: Biologie, parasitologie: Perpignan. 2818.  Goveia, Elsa V., 1956: A Study on the Historiography of the British West Indies to the End of the Nineteenth Century, Edição de Instituto Panamericano de Geografía e Historia. 2819.  Goveia, Elsa V., 1980: Slave society in the British Leeward Islands at the end of the eighteenth century Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press. 2820.  Government of Faroes, 1999: Hvitabok, The White Book, Torshavn, Foroya Landsstyri. 2821.  Government of Papua New Guinea, Office of National Planning, 1999: Papua New Guinea Human Development Report 1998 (eds. K. McKay, K. Lepani, W. Wagner), New York, UNDP (United Nations Development Programme. 2822.  Gowricharn, Ruben S., 2006: Caribbean transnationalism: migration, pluralization, and social cohesion, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books. 2823.  Goyette, P.; Mayer-Renaud, M., 1991: Isolement et insularité: une revue de la littérature sur l’isolement social des familles, Montréal, Centre de services sociaux du Montréal métropolitain. 2824.  Graham, edited by Penelope, 2008: Horizons of home: nation, gender and migrancy in island Southeast Asia, Clayton: Monash Asia Institute. 2825.  Graham, Ross, 1997: Bay Islands English: linguistic contact and convergence in the Western Caribbean, Thesis (Ph. D.), University of Florida. 2826.  Granberry, Julian, 2004: Languages of the pre-Columbian Antilles, Tuscaloosa, University of Alabama Press. 2827.  Grandidier, A., 1875: Histoire physique, naturelle et politique de Madagascar, Imprimerie Nationale, Paris. 2828.  Grandidier, A., 1903: Collection des Ouvrages Anciens Concernant Madagascar, Paris. 2829.  Granger, Orman E., 1985: Caribbean climates, Progress in Physical Geography, Mar 1985; vol. 9: pp. 16 - 43. 2830.  Granjon, Laurent, 1992: Évolution allopatrique chez les Muridés: mécanismes écoéthologiques liés au syndrome d’insularité chez Mastomys et Rattus, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Th. ND: Biol. des populations et des écosyst.: Montpellier 2. 2831.  Grannum, Karen; Taylor, Nigel, 2004: Wills and other probate records: a practical guide to researching your ancestor’s last documents, Kew: National Archives. 2832.  Grant, Jill and Martin, Zelenietz, 1980: Changing patterns of wage labour migration in the Kilenge area of Papua New Guinea, International Migration Review, 14(2): 215-234. 2833.  Grant, Jill, 1980: Struggling with Development: Planning Problems and Strategies in Melanesia, M.A. thesis, University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario, Canada Grant, Jill and Martin Zelenietz, 1982: Horticulture in the Kilenge area: potential for development. Appendix A, in George Murray, Proposed Kaliai Cattle Project Report, West New Britain Province. Kimbe: Department of Primary Industries, pp. 11-15,Grant, Jill and Martin Zelenietz, 1982: Kilenge kinship terminology, Research in Melanesia, 6:54- 90. 2834.  Grant, Jill; Zelenietz, Martin, 1983: “Naming practices in Kilenge”, in Names, 31:179-190.

2009

CEHA

157

2835.  Grant, Jill; Zelenietz, Martin; Saito, H., 1986: “Where development never comes: business activities In Kilenge, Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of the Polynesian Society, 95(2):195219. 2836.  Grant, Jill, 1987: The impacts of dependent development on community and resources in Kilenge, Papua New Guinea, Human Ecology, 15(2): 243-26. 2837.  Grant, J., 1988: “The effects of new land use patterns on resources and food production in Kilenge, West New Britain”, in Food and Foodways (Special Issue on Pacific Foodways): 59-77. 2838.  Grant. edited by Peter R., 1998: Evolution on islands, Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press. 2839.  Grant, T., 2000: “States newly admitted to the United Nations: some implications”, Columbia journal of transnational law, n°1, p. 177-192. 2840.  Grasmuck, Sherri; Pessar, Patricia R., 1991: Between two islands: Dominican international migration, Berkeley: University of California Press. 2841.  Grassie, James, 1983: Highland experiment, photographs by Oscar Marzaroli, Aberdeen: Aberdeen University Press. 2842.  Graves, Tomás, 1997: Un hogar en Mallorca: guía práctica de la casa y la vida rural, José J. de Olañeta, Editor. 2843.  Gravil, Roger, 1985: The Anglo-Argentine connection, 1900-1939, Boulder and London. 2844.  Gray, G., 1996: The next focus of power to fall under the spell of this little gang; anthropology and Australia’s post war policy in PNG, War and Society, 14, 2, 101-17. 2845.  Gray, G., 2000: Managing the impact of war; Australian anthropology and the Southwest Pacific, in McLeod R, ed, Science and the Pacific war; science and survival in the Pacific 1939-1945, Dordrecht, Kluwer, 187-210. 2846.  Gray, Hannah, 2001: The historical development of the health system in the Bahamas; edited by Mary Hadley, Anne Mills (PHP departmental publication, 33; Health care reform: policy content and process in the Caribbean, 1). [London]: London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine. 2847.  Gray, Peter W., 2005: ‘Air power: Strategic lessons from an idiosyncratic operation’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 253-64. 2848.  Gray, William, 1993: Coral reefs & islands: the natural history of a threatened paradise, Newton Abbot, Devon [Eng.]: David & Charles. 2849.  Green, Cecilia Anne, 1998: Laboring women: a historical, sociological, and comparative analysis of Afro-Caribbean women’s economic roles in three islands, Ottawa, ON, National Library of Canada, Acquisitions and Bibliographic Services. 2850.  Green, Eugene; Sachse, William L., 1983: Names of the land: Cape Cod, Nantucket, Martha’s Vineyard, and the Elizabeth Islands, Chester, Conn.: Globe Pequot Press. 2851.  Green, Martin Burgess, 1990: The Robinson Crusoe story, University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press. 2852.  Greenblatt, S., 1991: Marvellous possessions; the wonder of the new world, Clarendon, OUP. 2853.  Greene, M., 2001: Ruling an island without a navy. A comparative view of Venetian and

2009

158

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Ottoman Crete, Oriente moderno, 20(81), 193-207. 2854.  Greengrass, Mark; Ogier, D. M. (Darryl Mark), 1995: 1962 - A French Reformation on English soi: religious change in the Channel Islands, Proceedings of the Huguenot Society of Great Britain and Ireland, 26, 173-85. 2855.  Greg, Dening, 1980: Names and places, in Islands and beaches; discourse on a silent land Marquesas 1774-1880, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.9-34. 2856.  Greg, Dening, 1999: The hegemony of laughter; Purea’s theatre, in A Frost and J Samson, eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams, Melbourne, MUP, pp.127-46. 2857.  Gregor, Thomas A., Tuzin, Donald, 2001: Gender in Amazonia and Melanesia: an exploration of the comparative method, Berkeley: University of California Press. 2858.  Gregory, Desmond, 1985: The ungovernable rock: a history of the Anglo-Corsican Kingdom and its role in Britain’s Mediterranean strategy during the Revolutionary War, 1793-1797, London: Fairleigh Dickinson University Press. 2859.  Gregory, Desmond, 1986: “A Defence Policy for the Ionian Islands - some wrong conclusions drawn by Soldiers and Statesmen”, in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research, 64:257, 24-33. 2860.  Gregory, Desmond, 1988: The beneficent usurpers: a history of the British in Madeira, Rutherford, [N.J.]: Fairleigh Dickinson University Press; London: Associated University Presses. 2861.  Gregory, Desmond, 1990: Minorca, the Illusory Prize: A History of the British Occupations of Minorca between 1708 and 1802, Cranbury, NJ, Toronto, Ont and London. 2862.  Gregory, M., 1995: More Custom Stories from Choiseul, Gizo, Solomon Islands: Western Province Office. 2863.  Greig, Malcolm and Ronald W. McQuaid, The Impact of Ferry Services on an Island Economy, ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association, Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa05/papers/740. pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 2864.  Grenand, Pierre; Grenand, Françoise; Menget, P., 1985: La question amérindienne en Guyane française: éléments de synthèse, Ethnies, 1 (1/2), p. 54-58. 2865.  Grenier, C., 1994: De l’espace marginal a l’espace pionnier frontalier: ouverture et attraction des Galapagos, l’espace geographique, no 3, p. p. 250-262. 2866.  Grenier, C., 2000: Conservation contre nature, Les îles Galápagos, Paris: IRD. 2867.  Gressitt, J. L., 1959: “The coconut leaf-mining beetle Promecotheca papuana”, in The Papua and New Guinea Agricultural Journal, 12(2/3): 119-148. 2868.  Grey, Winifred, 1994: Winifred Grey: a gentlewoman’s remembrances of life in England and the Gulf Islands of British Columbia, 1871-1910, edited by Marie Elliott, Victoria, B.C. : Gulf Islands Press. 2869.  Grieb, Kenneth, 1988: Central America in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries: An Annotated Bibliography, Boston: G.K. Hall. 2870.  Grieve, R., 1986: “The oil palm industry of Papua New Guinea”, in Australian Geographer, 17(1): 72-76. 2871.  Griffin, C., 1997: Democracy and neoliberalism in the developing word. Lessons from the anglophone Caribbean, Aldershot, Asghate. 2872.  Griffin, Eric R., 2000: “Daniel Brevint: French preacher to the king in exile, in Anglican and

2009

CEHA

159

Episcopal History, 69:3, 295-314 2873.  Griffith, I., 1996: Caribbean security on the eve of the 21st century, National Defense University. Mcnair, paper 54. 2874.  Griffith, I., 1997: Drugs and security in the Caribbean, PA, Penn State University Press. 2875.  Grimble, Arthur Francis, Sir, 1989: Tungaru traditions: writings on the Atoll culture of the Gilbert Islands, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian, and Pacific Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press. 2876.  Grimshaw, Beatrice, 1931: Isles of adventures: from Java to New Caledonia, but principally Papua, Boston. 2877.  Grimshaw, P., 1989: Paths of duty: American missionary wives in 19th century Hawaii, Honolulu. 2878.  Grimsley, Eric J., 1998: The historical development of the Martello tower in the Channel Islands, St Peter Port: Sarnian. 2879.  Grinager, Patricia, 1999: Uncommon lives: my lifelong friendship with Margaret Mead, Lanham, Md.; Oxford: Rowman & Littlefield. 2880.  Groningen, D. v., 1980: “Migration of the Kilenge: a village study”, in Yagl-Ambu 7(2): 3346. 2881.  Grossman, Zoltan, 1986: Inside the Philippine resistance, Race & Class, Jan 1986; vol. 28: pp. 1 - 29. 2882.  Grove, Eric J., 2002: “The Falklands War and British defense policy”, in Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 307-17 2883.  Grove, Philip D., 2005: ‘Falklands Conflict 1982 - the air war: A new appraisal’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 2005, 265-81 2884.  Grow, Michael, 1992: Scholars’ Guide to Washington, D.C. for Latin American and Caribbean Studies, 2nd rev. ed. Washington, D.C.: Woodrow Wilson Center Press. 2885.  Grubb, F., 2001: Social science versus social rhetoric; methodology and the Pacific Island Labour trade to Queensland, Australia, Historical Methods, Vol 34, No 1, pp.5-36 2886.  Guanche, Jesús, 1992: Significación canaria en el poblamiento hispánico de Cuba: los archivos parroquiales, 1690-1898, prólogo, Sergio Valdés Bernal, La Laguna: Ayuntamiento de La Laguna, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 2887.  Guarnizo, Luis E., 1994: Los Dominicanyorks: The Making of a Binational Society, Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Vol. 533, Trends in U. S.Caribbean Relations (May), pp. 70-86 2888.  Guay, Lorraine, 2003: À la découverte des Îles du Saint-Laurent: de Cataracoui à Anticosti, Sillery, Québec: Septentrion. 2889.  Guébourg, Jean Louis, 1995: Migrants et clandestins de la Grande Comore, In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 295-318 2890.  Guébourg, Jean-Louis, 1999: Petites îles et archipels de l’océan Indien, préface de Roger Brunet, Paris: Karthala. 2891.  Guébourg, Jean-Louis, 2004: Les Seychelles, Paris: Karthala. 2892.  Guébourg, J-L., 1998: Socotra, une île hors du temps, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “Îles et archipels”, nº25.

2009

160

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2893.  Guerreiro, Inácio, Tradição e Modernidade nos Isolarios ou «Livros de Ilhas» dos Séculos XV e XVI, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP, pp.28-43. 2894.  Guerrero Ayuso, Víctor M., 1997: El pensamiento científico en la prehistoria balear; Fuentes bibliográficas para el estudio de la prehistoria balear, prólogo, Camilo J. Cela Conde, Palma (Mallorca), Lleonard Muntaner. 2895.  Guerrero, coordinador y editor, Víctor M., 2007: Prehistoria de las Islas Baleares: registro arqueológico y evolución social antes de la Edad de Hierro, Oxford: Archaeopress. 2896.  Guest, Harriet, 1989: The Great Distinction: Figures of the Exotic in the Work of William Hodges, Oxford Art Journal, 12:36-58. 2897.  Guest, Harriet, 1992: Curiously Marked: Tattooing, Masculinity, and Nationality in Eighteenth Century British Perceptions of the South Pacific, In John Barrell (ed.) Painting and the Politics of Culture: New Essays on British Art, 1700-1850, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 101-134. 2898.  Guevara, Gisela Medina, As relações luso-alemães antes da Primeira Guerra Mundial: a questão da concessão dos sanatórios da Ilha da Madeira, Lisboa, Edições Colibri. 2899.  Guiart, Jean 2004: Découverte de l’Océanie (tome 2) Connaissance des hommes, Nouméa & Papeete. 2900.  Guiart, Jean, 1992: Structure de la chefferie en Mélanésie du Sud, Paris: Institut d’Ethnologie. 2901.  Guiart, Jean, 2003: Les Mélanésiens devant l’économie de marché, du milieu du XIXe siècle à la fin du millénaire, Nouméa. 2902.  Guidieri, Remo, 1980: La route des morts, Paris: Seuil. 2903.  Guidieri, Remo, 2005: Ombre: sul culto dei morti a Malekula, Melanesia orientale, Milano: Medusa. 2904.  Guiking, F. C. T., 1984: Problems in the uptake of potash by the oil palm (E. [Elaeis] guineensis) in Papua New Guinea, Kimbe, West New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia), Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association, Guinea”, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 21 (3-4), 183-201. 2905.  Guiking, F. C. T., 1984: Problems in the uptake of potash by the oil palm (E. [Elaeis] guineensis) in Papua New Guinea, Kimbe, West New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia), Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association. 2906.  Guilaine, J.; Briois F.; Vigne J.-D.; Carrere I., 2000: New discovery of an early Cyprus preceramic Neolithic (late 9th, early 8th<space>millennia cal. BC), related to the Early/ Middle PpNB of the northern Levant, Comptes Rendus de l’Academie des Sciences Series IIA Earth and Planetary Science, Volume 330, Number 1, 15 January, pp. 75-82(8) 2907.  Guilcher, A. (dir.), 1991: “Îles et sociétés insulaires”, Norois, numéros spéciaux, n°145 et 146. 2908.  Guild, R., 2003: Pacific Islands. In Chin Saik Yoon (Ed.) Digitial Review of Asia Pacific, 2003–2004, Orbicom, pp. 306–318. 2909.  Guillaud, D., Seysset, M., Walter, A. (dir.), 1998: Le voyage inachevé..., Paris; Orstom/ Prodig. 2910.  Guillaud, David, G., D., Pillon, P. (dir.), 1999: La Nouvelle-Calédonie à la croisée deschemins: 1989-1997, Société des Océanistes, Paris, IRD. 2911.  Guillaud, D.; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Sevin, O., 2002: îles rêvées. Territoires et identités en

2009

CEHA

161

crise dans le Pacifique insulaire, Paris, Presses universitaires de la Sorbonne. 2912.  Guillaumin, P., 1999: La dimension ultrapériphérique de l’Union européenne. Disponível online em url: htttp://www.eurisles.com/Textes/statut/ ULTRAPERIPHERI QUEFR.htm. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 2913.  Guillemet, Dominique, 1987: Insularité et archaïsmes, paysans et seigneurs à Belle-Ile-enmer, vers 1660-1760; sous la dir. de Jean Tarrade, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thès doct. (nouv. régime): Histoire moderne: Poitiers. 2914.  Guillemet, Dominique, 2007: Les îles de l’Ouest: de Bréhat à Oléron, du Moyen âge à la Révolution, La Crèche: Geste poche. 2915.  Guillemot, Julie, “Governance and territorial development in an insular environment: the case of Isle-aux-Coudres /Gouvernance et developpement territorial en milieu insulaire: le cas de l’Isle-aux-Coudres”. Canadian Journal of Regional Science. Disponível online em url: http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb6565/is_3_31/ai_n31591127/. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 2916.  Guimerá Ravina, Agustín, 1985: Burguesía extranjera y comercio atlántico: la empresa comercial irlandesa en Canarias, 1703-1771, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, Islas Canarias, Consejería de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno Canarias; Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas. 2917.  Guimerá Ravina, Agustín, 1989: La Casa Hamilton: una empresa británica en Canarias (1837-1987), Santa Cruz de Tenerife: [s.n.]. 2918.  Guinness, Patrick, 1973: Bush and Village: An analysis of Maututu Nakanai Mythology, Master’s Thesis, University of Sydney. 2919.  Guinness, W.E., 1936: Walkabout: a journey in lands between the Pacific and Indians Oceans, London:William Heinimann, Ltd. 2920.  Guinot, D., 1986: “Description of a Troglobitic Blind Crab From New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Trogloplax-Joliveti Gen-Nov Sp-Nov, and Definition of a New Subfamily, Trogloplacinae Subfam Nov”, Comptes Rendus De L Academie Des Sciences Serie IiiSciences De La Vie-Life Sciences, 303(8): 307-312. 2921.  Guirty, Geraldo, 1989: Harlem’s Danish-American West Indians, 1899-1964, New York, Vantage Press, Guitar, Lynne, 2000:Criollos: The Birth of a Dynamic New Indo - Afro European People and Culture on Hispaniola”, KACIKE: Journal of Caribbean Amerindian History and Anthropology, 1:1, pop.1-17. Disponível em url: in http://www.kacike.org/ LynneGuitar.html. consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 2922.  Gumbs, Wycherley, 1997: Islands in the sun: the Virgin Islands: “the history and culture of the Virgin Islands in poetry”, [S.l.: s.n.], U.S. Virgin Islands, Supreme Printing. 2923.  Gumerman, George J., David Snyder, W. Bruce Masse., 1981: An archaeological reconnaissance in the Palau archipelago, Western Caroline Islands, Micronesia, Carbondale, Ill: Center for Archaeological Investigations, Southern Illinois University. 2924.  Gunke, Shin’ichi, 1985: Uminari no Gotō shi, Tōkyō, Kokusho Kankōkai, Shōwa 60 2925.  Gunn, Geoffrey C.; Huang, Reyko, 2004: “Reconciliation as State-building in East Timor”, in Lusotopie, pp.19-38. 2926.  Gunson, N., 1987: Sacred women chiefs and female headmen, in Polynesian history, Journal of Pacific history, vol 22(3- 4), 139-172. 2927.  Gunson, N., 1990: The Tonga-Samoan connection 1777-1845, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 25(2), 176-187.

2009

162

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

2928.  Gunson, N., 1993: Understanding Polynesian traditional history, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 28(2), 139-158. 2929.  Gunson, Walter Niel, 1994: British missionaries and their contribution to science in the Pacific islands, In MacLeod, Roy M.; Rehbock, Philip F. (ed.), Darwin’s laboratory: evolutionary theory and natural history in the Pacific, Honolulu (HI): University of Hawai’i Press, 283-316. 2930.  Gurney, David, 1993: The post office in the smaller Channel Islands, Ilford: Channel Islands Specialists, Soc.. 2931.  Gurney, David, 2001: The postal history of the Jersey sub-post offices, Poole: Channel Islands Specialists’ Society. 2932.  Gurr, Andrew, 2001: A little piece of England: my adventures as Chief Executive of the Falkland Islands, London: John Blake Publishing. 2933.  Gustafson, Lowell S., 1988: The Sovereignty Dispute over the Falkland (Malvinas) Islands, New York and Oxford. 2934.  Guterres, Justino, 2001: “Para uma antropologia do sistema de alianças em Timor: o caso dos Makasae”, in Lusotopie, pp.173-181. 2935.  Gutsche, Andrea, Cindy Bisaillon, 1999: Mysterious islands: forgotten tales of the Great Lakes, Toronto: Lynx Images. 2936.  Guven-Lisaniler, F.; Warner, J., 1998: “Cyprus-Bridge or bunker? The Cyprus problem and prospects for its resolution”, Perceptions, March-May, p. 86-103 2937.  Guy, Jacques B.M., 1985: On a fragment of the “Tahua”. Tablet. Journal of the Polynesian Society, 94. 367-87. 2938.  Guy, Jacques B.M., 1988: Rjabchikov’s Decipherments Examined, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 97, pp. 321-3. 2939.  Guy, Jacques B.M., 1990: On the Lunar Calendar of Tablet Mamari, Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 91:2.135-49. 2940.  Haberkorn, Gerald, 1997: A sea of islands - a myriad of indicators: on the interface between demography and planning in the Pacific Islands, Asia Pacific Viewpoint, vol. 38, no 3, p. p. 219-236. 2941.  Haberle, Simon, 1996: “Explanations for palaeoecological changes on the northern plains of Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands: the last 3200 years”, in The Holocene, vol. 6: pp. 333 - 338. 2942.  Hache, Jean-Didier (editor): 2000: Quel statut pour les îles d’Europe ? =What status for Europe’s islands ?, L’Harmattan. 2943.  Haddon, A. C.; Hornell, J., 1975: Canoes of Oceania, Honolulu, Hawaii, Bishop Museum Press. 2944.  Haddon, A.C., 1937: “New Britain” (Neu Pommern), in Canoes of Oceania, Vol II The Canoes of Melanesia, Queensland and New Guinea Honolulu: Bishop Museum Special Publication 28, Pp. 148-154. 2945.  Haitlinger, R., 1989: “New canestriniid mites (Acari, Astigmata, Canestriniidae) connected with beetles of the subfamilies Dynastinae and Cetoniinae (Insecta, Coleoptera, Scarabaeidae)”, in Wiadomosci Parazytologiczne 35(1): 43-60. 2946.  Hale, P. R., 1975: “An index for the identification of locations in the New Guinea islands with suitable rainfall for upland rice production”, in Science in New Guinea, 3(3): 199-210.

2009

CEHA

163

2947.  Halstead, B., 1996: The Dive Sites of Papua New Guinea, London, New Holland (Publishers) Ltd. 2948.  Halstead, P. J., 1982: “A district medical office in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea”, in Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 25(4): 273-7. 2949.  Hamel-Green, 1991: Regional arms control in the South Pacific; Island state responses to Australia’s nuclear free zone initiative, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 3/1 2950.  Hamilton, David, 1987: The Highlands and Islands medical services, In Improving the common weal, Aspects of Scottish Health Services 1900-1984, ed. MCLACHLAN, Gordon (Edinburgh), 481-90. 2951.  Hammond, Jane 1986: Tifaifai and Quilts of Polynesia, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 2952.  Hancock, David, 2000: “A world of business to do”: William Freeman and the foundations of England’s commercial empire, 1645-1707, William and Mary Quarterly, 3rd ser., 57:1 2953.  Hanlon, David L., 1981: From Mesenieng to Kolonia: An Archaeological Survey of Historic Kolonia. Micronesian Archaeological Survey Report 5. Saipan: Trust Territory Government Press 2954.  Hanlon, David L., 1982: Myths, Strategies and Guilt in Micronesia, Perspectives [EastWest Center, Honolulu] Summer, pp. 24–27. 2955.  Hanlon, David L., 1983: Introduction to Recent Soviet Works on the Pacific, Soviet Studies in History, 21 (4), pp.5–13. 2956.  Hanlon, David L., 1983: The Federated States of Micronesia: Unifying the Remnants (with William Eperiam). In Politics in Micronesia, vol 3, Politics in the Pacific Islands, edited by Ron Crocombe and Ahmed Ali, Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific, pp. 81–99. 2957.  Hanlon, David L., 1984: God vs. Gods: The First Years of the Micronesian Mission on Ponape, 1852 to 1859, Journal of Pacific History, 19 (1), pp.41–59. 2958.  Hanlon, David L., 1984: Upon a stone altar; a history of the island of Pohnpei, UH Press, Honolulu. 2959.  Hanlon, David L., 1988: Another Side of Henry Nanpei, Journal of Pacific History, 23 (1), pp.36–51. 2960.  Hanlon, David L., 1988: The Federated States of Micronesia: Unifying the Remnants (with William Eperiam). In Politics in Micronesia, vol 3, Politics of the Pacific Islands, edited by Ron Crocombe and Ahmed Ali, Revised edition. Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific, pp.85–106. 2961.  Hanlon, David L., 1989: Micronesia: Writing and Rewriting the Histories of a Nonentity, Pacific Studies, 12 (2), pp. 1–21. 2962.  Hanlon, David L., 1990:“The Pleasure of Speculation and Conjecture”: Early EuroAmerican Visions of Nan Madol and Their Relevance to Post-Modern Archaeological Investigations. In Recent Advances in Micronesian Archaeology: Proceedings of the Micronesian Archaeology Conference held on Guam from September 1987, edited by Rosalind L Hunter-Anderson, 99–116. Special issue of Micronesica, Supplement 2 (October). Mangilao, Guam: University of Guam Press, pp. 9–12. 2963.  Hanlon, David L., 1992: The Path Back to Pohnsakar: Luelen Bernart, His Book, and the Practice of History on Pohnpei, Isla: A Journal of Micronesian Studies 1 (1) , pp.13–36 2964.  Hanlon, David L., 1993: Sorcery, “Savage Memories,” and the Edge of Commensurability

2009

164

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

for History in the Pacific. In Pacific Islands History: Journeys and Transformations, edited by Brij V Lal, Canberra: The Journal of Pacific History, pp. 107–128. 2965.  Hanlon, David L., 1994: Remaking Micronesia: A Reflection on the Cultural and Strategic Politics of Economic Development in American Micronesia, 1945–1968. In Dangerous Liaisons: A Festschrift for Greg Dening, edited by Donna Merwick, Melbourne: Melbourne University Press, pp. 135–156. 2966.  Hanlon, David L., 1994: Patterns of Colonialism in Micronesia to 1942. In The History of the Pacific Islands in the Twentieth Century, edited by Kerry R Howe, Brij V Lal, and Robert C Kiste, Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press; Auckland: Allen & Unwin, pp. 93–118. 2967.  Hanlon, David L., 1995: The End of History for the Edge of Paradise: Economic Development and the Compacts of Free Association in American Micronesia. In Colonial Inheritance: The Pacific Islands Since Independence, edited by Brij V Lal and Hank Nelson, Brisbane: Pacific History Association, pp. 83–93. 2968.  Hanlon, David L., 1998: Remaking Micronesia: discourses over development in a Pacific territory, 1944-1982, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 2969.  Hanlon, David L., 1999: Magellan’s Chroniclers? American Anthropology’s History in Micronesia. In American Anthropology and Micronesia, edited by Robert C Kiste and Mac Marshall, Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press, pp.53–79. 2970.  Hanlon, David L., 1999: The Chill of History: The Experience, Emotion and Changing Politics of Archival Research in the Pacific. Archives and Manuscripts, The Journal of the Australian Society of Archivists, 27 (1) , pp. 8–21. 2971.  Hanlon, David L., 2000: Introduction (with Geoffrey M White). In Voyaging Through the Contemporary Pacific, edited by David Hanlon and Geoffrey M White, 1–22. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers 2972.  Hanlon, David L., 2001: Converting Pasts and Presents: Reflections on Histories of Missionary Enterprises in the Pacific. In Pacific Lives, Pacific Places: Changing Boundaries in Pacific History, edited by Brij V Lal and Peter Hempenstall, 143–154. Canberra: Coombs Academic Publishing. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii. edu/cpis/files/Hanlon-Converting_Pasts.pdf. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009. 2973.  Hanlon, David L., 2003: Beyond “the English Method of Tattooing”: Decentering the Practice of History in Oceania. In Back to the Future: Decolonizing Pacific Studies, edited by Vilsoni Hereniko and Terence Wesley-Smith. Special issue of The Contemporary Pacific 15:19–40.Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/files/Hanlon-Beyond_the_ English.pdf. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009. 2974.  Hanlon, David L., 2004: Wone Sohte Lohdi: History and Place on Pohnpei. In Pacific Places, Pacific Histories: Essays in Honor of Robert C. Kiste, edited by Brij V Lal, 195– 215. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii. edu/cpis/files/Hanlon-Wone_Sohte.pdf. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009. 2975.  Hanlon, David L., 2005: On Francis X. Hezel’s The First Taint of Civilization. In Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, edited by Doug Munro and Brij V Lal, Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press pp. 202-212. 2976.  Hanlon, David L., 2008: “’You Did What, Mr. President!” Trying to Write a Life History of Tosiwo Nakayama,” in Telling Pacific Lives: Prisms of Process, Brij V. Lal and Vicki Luker, eds., Canberra: Australian National University E-Press, pp. 165-176. 2977.  Hannell, David, 1987: A Case of Bad Publicity: Britain and the Ionian Islands, 1848-51, European History Quarterly, Apr 1987; vol. 17: pp. 131 - 143.

2009

CEHA

165

2978.  Hannell, David, 1989: “Lord Palmerston and the “Don Pacifico affair” of 1850: the Ionian connection”, in European History Quarterly, 19, 495-507. 2979.  Hannell, David, 1989: “The Ionian Islands under the British Protectorate: Social and Economic Problems”, in Journal of Modern Greek Studies, 7,105–132. 2980.  Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 1992: Cultural contacts in the Faroe islands in the viking age, In Hall, R. A.; Hodges, R. M.; Clarke, Helen (ed.), 1992: Medieval Europe, 5: exchange and trade, York, 13-18. 2981.  Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 1993: Viking-age Faroe Islands and their southern links in the light of recent finds at Toftanes, Leirvik, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 473-86. 2982.  Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 1996: Aspects of Viking society in Shetland and the Faroe Islands, In Waugh, Doreen J.; Smith, Brendan, Shetland’s northern links: language and history, Edinburgh: Scottish Society for Northern Studies, 117-35. 2983.  Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 2007: Governor on Antiquarian Mission: Christian Pløyen a Faroese Link between Copenhagen and Shetland, In Smith, Beverley Ballin; Taylor, Simon, Williams, Gareth (ed.), West over sea: studies in Scandinavian sea-borne expansion and settlement before 1300; a festschrift in honour of Dr. Barbara E. Crawford (The Northern world, 31), Leiden: Brill, 431-42. 2984.  Hanson, A., 1982: Female pollution in Polynesia, JPS, vol. 91, pp. 333-381. 2985.  Hanson, L. W., B. J. Allen, R. M. Bourke and T. J. McCarthy, 2001: Papua New Guinea Rural Development Handbook, Canberra, The Australian National University. 2986.  Hanson, L. W., R. M. Bourke and D. S. Yinil, 1998: Cocoa and Coconut Growing Environments in Papua New Guinea: A Guide for Research and Extension, Canberra, Australian Agency for International Development. 2987.  Hardy, J., and Frost, A., eds, 1989: Studies from Terra Australis to Australia, Canberra, Highland Press/AAH. 2988.  Hardy, J., and Frost, A., eds, 1990: European voyaging towards Australia   Canberra, Highland Press/AAH. 2989.  Hargesheimer, Fred, 2002: The School That Fell From the Sky: The Autobiography of Fred Hargesheimer, published through eBookstand Books. 2990.  Harmon, Alexandra, 1998: Indians in the Making:  Ethnic Relations and Indian Identities, Around Puget Sound, University of California Press. 2991.  Harpet, C., 2000: Le Lémurien: du sacré et de la malédiction, L’Harmattan, Paris. 2992.  Harris, R. E., 1980: Islanders deported, part 1: the complete history of the British subjects who were deported from the Channel Islands during the German occupation of 1940-45 and imprisoned in Europe, Ilford. 2993.  Harris, Richard, 2005: ‘Making Leeway in the Leewards, 1929-51: The Negotiation of Colonial Development’, Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, 33:3, 393-418. 2994.  Harrison, D., 2001: Islands, image and tourism, Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp. 9-14. 2995.  Harrison, D., 2001: Tourism in small islands and microstates, Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp. 3-8. 2996.  Harrison, Simon, 1993: The mask of war: violence, ritual, and the self in Melanesia,

2009

166

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Manchester, UK; New York, NY: Manchester University Press: Distributed exclusively in the USA and Canada by St. Martin’s Press. 2997.  Hart, Ian B., 2006: Whaling in the Falkland Islands dependencies 1904-1931: a history of the shore and bay-based whaling in the Antarctic, Newton St Margarets: Pequena. 2998.  Harvey, Brian, 1991: Changing fortunes on the Aran Islands in the 1890s, Irish Historical Studies, 27, 237-49. 2999.  Hasager, U., Friedman, J., 1994: Hawaii; return to nationhood, IWGIA, Copenhagen. 3000.  Hatanaka, S., 1991:The dilemme of the South Pacific Islands: states, traditions, ethnicity, Journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 92-93. 3001.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1981: Mekeo: inequality and ambivalence in a village society, Canberra: Australian National University Press; Miami, Fla.: Books Australia. 3002.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1986. The Implications of Being Very Small. Paper delivered to the Tokai University/Friedrich Ebert-Stiftung Seminar on Cooperation in Development. Tokyo. 3003.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1987: Kisses in the Nederends, Auckland, N.Z.: New York, N.Y., U.S.A.: Penguin Books. 3004.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1987: Tales of the Tikongs, Auckland, N.Z.: Longman Paul. 3005.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1990: “Oral Traditions and Writing.” Landfall: A New Zealand Quarterly, 44:402-11. 3006.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1993. “Our Sea of Islands”. In. E. Waddell, V. Naidu e E. Hau’ofa (eds.), A New Oceania: Rediscovering Our Sea of Islands. Suva: School of Social and Economic Development, University of the South Pacific/ Book House. pp 2-19. 3007.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, et al., 1993: A New Oceania: rediscovering our sea of islands / [Suva, Fiji: School of Social and Economic Development, The University of the South Pacific, in association with Beake House. 3008.  Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1994: ‘Our Sea of Islands’, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol. 6, No. 1, pp. 148-160. 3009.  Hauptman, Laurence M., 1999: Conspiracy of Interests: Iroquois Dispossession and the     Rise of New York State, Syracuse University Press. 3010.  Hauser-Schäublin, Brigitta, Marquesas - plagued by misfortune, In Hauser-Schäublin, Brigitta; Krüger, Gundolf (ed.), James Cook: gifts and treasures from the South Seas: Gaben und Schätze aus der Südsee, München and New York: Prestel, 221-33. 3011.  Haussmann, Eberhard, 1994: Vogel in der Kultur der Mbirao: Ergebnisse ethnoornithologischerund ethnotaxonomischer Untersuchungen in einer Ethnie der Salomonen, Bonn: Holos Verlag. 3012.  Hawke, Siobhán, 2004: A social and economic history of Bere Island, 1900-1920, Castletownbere: The Shell. 3013.  Hawkins, Richard A., 1997: An English entrepreneur in the Hawaiian Islands: the life and times of John Kidwell, 1849-1922, Hawaiian Journal of History, 31, 127-42. 3014.  Hayami, Y.; Kawagoe, T., 1989: Farmers and middlemen in a transmigration area in Indonesia, Bulletin of Indonesian Economic Studies, vol. vol. 25, no 3, p. p. 73-97 3015.  Hayes, L. T., 1992: Plant Macroremains from Archaeological Sites in the Arawe Islands, Papua New Guinea: a study of Tree exploitation and the interpretation of archaeobotanical remains in Melanesian Prehistory, BA Honours thesis, La Trobe University, Bundoora.

2009

CEHA

167

3016.  Haynes, Douglas E.; Wuerch, William L., 1995: Micronesian religion and lore: a guide to sources, 1526-1990, introduction by Francis X. Hezel, S. J., Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press. 3017.  Hayward, Philip, 1998: Music at the borders; Not Drowning Waving and their engagement with Papua New Guinea culture (1986-96), Sydney, John Libby. 3018.  Hayward, Philip, 1998: ‘The Papua New Guinea music industry and the world music market’ in Mitsui, T (ed) Popular Music: Intercultural Interpretations (IASPM Sixth International Conference Proceedings), Kanazawa (Japan): Kanazawa University Graduate program in Music, pp. 442-447. 3019.  Hayward, Philip, 2001:Tide Lines: Music, Tourism and Cultural Transition in the Whitsunday Islands, Lismore: Music Archive for The Pacific Press. 3020.  Hayward, Philip, 2003: Hearing The Call – A Music History of Lord Howe Island, Lord Howe Island Arts Council. 3021.  Hayward, Philip, 2004: ‘Tourism, contact and cultural commodification: a case study of local musical entertainment on the Whitsunday Islands, Queensland, Australia from the 1930s to 1990s’ in Harrison, D (ed) Pacific Islands Tourism, New York, Sydney and Tokyo: Cognizant, pp.125-139. 3022.  Hayward, P., Fitzgerald, J. 2004: ‘Alternative Mixes: A comparative discussion of Contemporary Music programs at Macquarie and Southern Cross Universities’, in unattributed (ed) Proceedings of the XXVIth Annual Conference of the Australian Association for Research in Music Education, Melbourne AARME, pp152-162. 3023.  Hayward, Philip, 2005: ‘Hauntings: Soundtrack representations of Papua New Guinea’ in Coyle, R (ed) Reel Tracks: Australian Feature Film Music and Cultural Identities, Eastleigh (UK): John Libbey and Co (2005) pp48-58. 3024.  Hayward, Philip, 2005: ‘Culturally Engaged Research and Facilitation’, in Evans, M (ed) Refereed Proceedings of the First International Conference on Small Island Cultures, Sydney: Small Island Cultures Research Initiative. 3025.  Hayward, Philip, 2005: ‘Country Music in Norfolk Island’, in Evans, M and Walden, G (eds) At the Crossroads: Australian Country Music Volume 3, Gympie: Australian Institute of Country Music Press, pp143-160. 3026.  Hayward, Philip, 2006: ‘Dancing to a Pacific Beat: Music Video in Papua New Guinea’, in Beebe, R (ed) Music Video/Television, Durham: Duke University Press. 3027.  Hayward, Philip, 2006: Bounty Chords: Music, Culture and Cultural Heritage on Norfolk and Pitcairn Islands, Eastleigh (UK): John Libbey and Co. 3028.  Hayward, Philip, ed., 2008: The Dynamics of Small Island Cultures, Bristol (UK): Intellect Books. 3029.  Healey, C., 1993: “Responding to environmental perturbations in Papua New Guinea”, N. M. Williams and G. Baines, Eds. Traditional Ecological Knowledge: Wisdom for Sustainable Development, Canberra, Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies, Australian National University, pp. 162-165. 3030.  Healy, A., 1987: Monocultural administration in a multicultural environment; the Australians in Papua New Guinea, in Eddy, J.J. and Nethercote, J.J., eds, From colony to coloniser;  studies in Australian administrative history,  Sydney, Hale and Ironmonger,  pp.207-24. 3031.  Healy, AM. 1997: Colonial law as metropolitan defence; the curious case of Australia in New Guinea, in Hiery H and MacKenzie JM, eds, European impact and Pacific influence;

2009

168

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

British and German policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response, London, Tauris Academic Studies, pp.214-30. 3032.  Heaney, Seamus, 1980: ”A tale of two islands: reflections on the Irish literary revival”, in Irish Studies, 1, 1-20. 3033.  Heath, Robert, 2004: Ancient curiosities of Cornwall & the Scillies, Monmouth: Oakmagic. 3034.  Hedges, J. W., 1987: Bu, Gurness and the Brochs of Orkney, with the collaboration of Bernard Bell and Beverley Smith, 3 vols. in 2 (BAR, British ser., 163), Oxford. 3035.  Hellberg, I. J., 2005: ‘An experience with the commando logistic regiment Royal Marines’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 109-30. 3036.  Hempenstall, P., 1999: Releasing the voices; historicising colonial encounters in the Pacific, in Borofsky, R, ed, Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake history, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.43-61. 3037.  Hempenstall, P.J., & N. Rutherford, 1984: Protest and dissent in the colonial Pacific, Suva. 3038.  Henderson, J.C., 2001: Developing and managing small islands as tourist attractions, Tourism and Hospitality Research, 3(2), pp.120-131. 3039.  Henkel, F-W., [et al.], 2000: Amphibians and Reptiles of Madagascar, the Mascarenes, the Seychelles, and the Comoro Islands, Krieger Publishing Co. Florida. 3040.  Hennessy, Peter, 2005: “War cabinetry” : The political direction of the Falklands Conflict, In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), 2005: The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass. 3041.  Hennessy, Peter, 2005: ‘”War cabinetry”: The political direction of the Falklands Conflict’. Conflict]. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, pp.131-46. 3042.  Henningham, S., 1989: Keeping the tricolour flying: The French Pacific into the 1990s. 3043.  Henningham, S., 1992: Australia and the South Pacific in Mediansky, F.A., ed, Australia in a changing world, Sydney, Macmillan. 3044.  Henningham, S., 1992: France and the South Pacific: a contemporary history, Sydney. 3045.  Henningham, S., 1994: The best specimens in all our colonial domains; New Caledonian Melanesians in Europe 1931-32, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 29/2, pp.172-87. 3046.  Henningham, S., 1995: “Decolonisation, indigenous rights and internal conflicts”, in his The Pacific Island States; security and sovereignty in the post-Cold War Pacific, Macmillan, 52-70. 3047.  Henningham, S., 1995: The limits of power; Australia and New Zealand and the region,  in The Pacific Island States; security and sovereignty in the post-cold war World,  London, Macmillan, pp.114-36. 3048.  Henry, Paget, 1981: De-colonization, Tourism and Class/Race Structure in Antigua. In Contemporary Caribbean: A Sociological Reader, Vol. 1. Susan Craig, ed. Pp. 243-263. Maracas, Trinidad and Tobago: College. 3049.  Henry, Ralph, and Kim Johnson, 1985: Linking Tourism and Agriculture to Create Jobs and Reduce Migration in the Caribbean, In Migration and Development in the Caribbean: The

2009

CEHA

169

Unexplored Connection, Robert A. Pastor, ed. Pp.289-300. Boulder, Colorado: Westview. 3050.  Henshall, Brian D., and Rae Roberts, 1985: Comparative Assessment of Tourist Generating Markets for New Zealand, Annals of Tourism Research, 12:219-238. 3051.  Herber, Mark D., 2000: Ancestral trails: the complete guide to British genealogy and family history. 2nd edn. Stroud: Sutton. 3052.  Hercock, Marion, 2003: “Masters and Servants: The Contrasting Rôles of Scientists in Island Management”, in Social Studies of Science, Feb 2003; vol. 33: pp. 117 - 136. 3053.  Hereniko, V., 1987: South Pacific Islanders, Rourke Publications. 3054.  Hereniko, Vilsoni, 1995: Woven Gods: Female Clowning and Power in Rotuma, Pacific Islands Monograph Series 12. Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies and University of Hawai‘i Press. 3055.  Hereniko, V., 1996: Representations of cultural identities, in Howe K, Kiste RC and Lal BV, (eds), Tides of history, pp.406-34. 3056.  Herity, Michael, 1989: “Cathair na Naomh and its cross-slabs”, in Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical Society), 9, 91-100. 3057.  Herman, D., 1999: Race, identity and representation, in Rapaport M, ed, The Pacific islands; Society and environment, Honolulu, Bess Press, pp.156-65 3058.  Herman, R. D. K., 1997: Hawaï, à la croisée des chemins: la renaissance d’une identité pacifique, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, France, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 177-196. 3059.  Hernon, Ian, 1998: Massacre and retribution: forgotten wars of the nineteenth century, Stroud: Sutton. 3060.  Herr, Richard A., 2006: ‘Australia, security and the Pacific Islands: From Empire to Commonwealth’, Round Table, 95:387, 705-16. 3061.  Hexel, Francis X., 1983: The first taint of civilization: a history of the Caroline and Marshall islands in pre-colonial days, 1521-1885, University of Hawaii press. 3062.  Heying, H. E., 2002: Antipode: Seasons with the Extraordinary Wildlife and Culture of Madagascar, St. Martin’s Press, New York. 3063.  Hezel, F., 1982: From conversion to conquest: The early Spanish mission in the Marianas, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 17(3), 115-137. 3064.  Hezel, F., 1988: New directions in Pacific History: a practitioner’s critical view, PS, vol. 11(3), 1988: 101-110. 3065.  Hezel, F., and Driver, M., 1988: From conquest to colonisation; Spain in the Marianas Islands 1690-1740, Journal of Pacific History,  Vol 4, No 1, pp.45-59. 3066.  Hezel, F.X., 1989: Suicide and the Micronesian family, TCP, 1,1, 43-74, Hezel, Francis X., 2001: The new shape of old island cultures: a half century of social change in Micronesia, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3067.  Hezel, Francis X., Is That the Best You Can Do? A Tale of Two Micronesian Economies, East-West Center Pacific Islands Policy Series. Disponível online em url: http://www. eastwestcenter.org/fileadmin/stored/pdfs/pip001.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 3068.  Hicks, Dan, 2008: ‘”Material Improvements”: the Archaeology of Estate Landscapes in the British Leeward Islands, 1713-1838’. In Finch, Jonathan; Giles, Kate (ed.), Estate landscapes : design, improvement and power in the post-medieval landscape (Society

2009

170

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

for Post-Medieval Archaeology monograph, 4), Woodbridge: Boydell and Brewer, 205-28 3069.  Hide, R. L., 1990: Working Paper K: Issues in community participation in development. Primary Industry Management Services Pty Ltd, Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) and CARE Australia, Eds. Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project Final Draft Volume 3 Working Papers F-K: Social and Other Sectors, Sydney, Primary Industry Management Services Pty Ltd in association with Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) & CARE Australia. 3070.  Hide, R. L., A. Cochrane and (compiled) 1990: A bibliography of the Kandrian and Gloucester Districts of West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Primary Industry Management Services Pty Ltd and e. al, Eds. Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project Final Draft Volume 1 Main Report. Sydney, Primary Industry Management Services Pty Ltd in association with Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) & CARE Australia, pp. 49-57. 3071.  Hiery, Hermann Joseph; MacKenzie, John MacDonald, 1997: Introduction, [British and German colonial policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response], In Hiery, Hermann Joseph; MacKenzie, John MacDonald (ed.), European impact and Pacific influence: British and German colonial policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response (Library of international relations; International library of historical studies, 7), London and New York: Tauris Academic and the German Historical Institute, 1-8. 3072.  Hiery, Hermann, 2005: Bilder aus der deutschen Südsee: Fotografien 1884-1914; mit einem Beitrag von Antje Kelm, Paderborn: Schöningh. 3073.  Higgitt, Mark, 2001: Through fire and water: Ardent: the forgotten frigate of the Falklands, Edinburgh: Mainstream. 3074.  Higman, Barry William Caldwell, 1995: Small islands, large questions: post-emancipation historiography of the Leeward Islands, In Olwig, Karen Fog (ed.), Small islands, large questions: society, culture and resistance in the post-emancipation Caribbean, London & Portland (OR): Cass, 8-28 3075.  Hill, H., 1984: Superpower of the Pacific; Australia and its island neighbours, in Eastwood J, et. al., (eds), Labour essays,  Melbourne. 3076.  Hionidou, Violetta, 1995: “Nuptiality Patterns and Household Structure On the Greek Island of Mykonos, 1849-1959”, in Journal of Family History, Jan 1995; vol. 20: pp. 67 - 102. 3077.  Hirashima, Y., 1986: “Biological studies on insect species diversities and productivities in the highland agricultural ecosystems of Papua New Guinea: a progress report for the year 1984”, in Esakia No. 24: 1-4. 3078.  Hirst, David, 2007: ‘Lunacy and the “Islands in the British Seas”’, History of Psychiatry, 18:4, 411-33. 3079.  Hoare, Kieran, 2001: “A guide to the archival holdings of the James Hardiman Library, National University of Ireland, Galway”, in Journal of the Galway Archaeological and Historical Society, 53, 84-104 3080.  Hobsbawn, Patricia e Stuckings, Natalie, 1998, 2006: Papua New Guinea Agricultural Bibliography, Land Management Group, Department of Human Geography. Disponível online em url: http://database.anu.edu.au/rspas/hug/pngagbib/. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 3081.  Hocart, R. ‘Guernsey: 1991: Local history in an insular context, Local Historian, 21 (1991), 20-26. 3082.  Hocart, Richard, 1992: The building of the New Town, Société Guernesiaise Report and

2009

CEHA

171

Transactions, 23:2 (1993 for 1992), 342-77. 3083.  Hohepa, P., 1999: My musket, My missionary and my mana,  in Calder A, Lamb J and Orr B, eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, UH Press, Honolulu pp.180-201. 3084.  Holland, James, 2003: Fortress Malta: an island under siege 1940-1943, London: Orion. 3085.  Holland, Robert Featherstone, 2008: ‘Patterns of Anglo-Hellenism: A ‘Colonial’ Connection?’, Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, 36:3, 383-96. 3086.  Holland, Robert Featherstone; Markides, Diana Weston, 2006: The British and the Hellenes: struggles for mastery in the eastern Mediterranean, 1850-1960, Oxford: Oxford University Press. 3087.  Holzknecht, P. W., 1980: “An Annotated Bibliography of German-language material held by the New Guinea collection of the University of Papua New Guinea”, in Oral History 8(6): 1-63. 3088.  Hope, Kempe R., 1980: The Caribbean Tourism Sector: Recent Performance and Trends, International Journal of Tourism Management, 1:175-183. 3089.  Hopkins, J, 1995: The place of foreign Pacific Islanders in Torres Strait and Papua 18631878, Journal of the RHSQ, Vol 15, No 12, pp.571-78. 3090.  Hore, Peter, 2005: ‘The ‘logistics miracle’ of Ascension Island’ [Falklands conflict]. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 213-25. 3091.  Horn, Walter; Marshall, Jenny White; Rourke, Grellan D., 1990: The forgotten hermitage of Skellig Michael (California studies in the history of art, 2), Berkeley: Oxford University of California Press. 3092.  Howard, Alan, and E. Kjellgren, 1994: Martyrs, progress and political ambitions: reexamining Rotuma’s “religious wars”, Journal of Pacific History, 29(2): 131-152. 3093.  Howard, Alan, 1981: Rotuma, In R. D. Craig and F. P. King, eds., Historical Dictionary of Oceania, Greenwood Press, Westport Connecticut. pp. 253-254. 3094.  Howard, Alan, 1985: History, myth and Polynesian chieftainship: the case of Rotuman kings, In Hooper, A. and J. Huntsman, eds., Transformations of Polynesian Culture, essays based on contributions to a symposium at the 15th Pacific Science Congress, pp. 39-77, Memoir N°45. The Polynesian Society, Auckland. 3095.  Howard, Alan, 1989: Developments in Polynesian Ethnology (co-editor with R. Borofsky). University Press of Hawaii. 3096.  Howard, Alan, 1993: Reflections on history in Polynesia, In T. Otto, ed., Pacific Island Trajectories: Five Personal Views. Occasional Paper of the Department of anthropology, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, Canberra in association with the Centre for Pacific Studies, University of Nijmegen, The Netherlands. 3097.  Howard, Alan, 1994: History in Polynesia: changing perspectives and current issues, In P. van der Grijp and T. van Meijl, eds., Politics, Tradition and Change in the Pacific, Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 149: 646-660. 3098.  Howard, Alan, 2001: Where Has Rotuman Culture Gone? And What is it Doing There? (with Jan Rensel) Pacific Studies, 24 (1/2):63-88. 3099.  Howard, Alan, 2002: www.repatriating_ethnography.edu/rotuma, in Handle with Care:

2009

172

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Ownership and Control of Ethnographic Materials, edited by Sjoerd R. Jaarsma. University of Pittsburg Press. ASAO Monograph No. 20. 3100.  Howard, Alan, 2004: Contextualizing Histories: Our Rotuman Experience (with Jan Rensel), Pacific Studies, 27 (3/4):11-36. 3101.  Howard, Alan, 2004: Introduction: Back in the Field Again: Long Term Fieldwork in Oceanic Anthropology (with John Barker), Pacific Studies, 27 (3/4):1-10. 3102.  Howard, Alan, 2004: Restraint and Ritual Apology: The Rotumans of the South Pacific, in Keeping the Peace, edited by Graham Kemp and Douglas P. Fry. New York: Routledge. pp. 35-52. 3103.  Howard, Alan, 2004: Rotuman Identity in the Electronic Age (with Jan Rensel), in Shifting Images of Identity in the Pacific, edited by Toon van Meijl and Jelle Miedema. Leiden: KITLV Press. 3104.  Howard, Alan, 2007: Island Legacy: A History of the Rotuman People (with Jan Rensel). Victoria B.C. Trafford Publishing. 3105.  Howard, Alan, 2006: Presenting Rotuma to the World: The Making of The Land Has Eyes, Visual Anthropology Review, 22(1):73-95. 3106.  Howard, Chris Perez, 2000:  Mariquita:  A tragedy of Guam.  Hagatna, Guam:  Cyfred, Lt. Gill-Perez House. 3107.  Howarth, J., 1990: Lemurs of the Lost World: Exploring the Forests and Crocodile Caves of Madagascar. 3108.  Howe, K. R., 1984: considering the new historiography, in Where the waves fall, Sydney, Allen and Unwin 3109.  Howe, K. R., 1984: Where the Waves Fall: a New South Sea Islands History from First Settlement to Colonial Rule, Pacific Islands Studies Program, Center for Pacific and Asian Studies, Honolulu: University of Hawaiëi Press. 3110.  Howe, K. R., 1992: The intellectual discovery and exploration of Polynesia, in Fisher R and Johnston H (eds), From maps to metaphors, University of British Columbia Press. 3111.  Howe, K. R., 1996: The making of Cook’s death, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 31(1), 108118. 3112.  Howe, K. R.; Kiste, Robert & Lal, Brij (eds.), 1994: Tides of history: the Pacific Islands in the twentieth century, st. leonards, nsw. 3113.  Howells, Roscoe. ‘The Pembrokeshire islands’, In Howell, David W. (ed.), Pembrokeshire county history, vol. IV: modern Pembrokeshire, 1815-1974, Haverfordwest: Pembrokeshire Historical Soc., 208-23; 490-92. 3114.  Howitt, Richard; Connell, John; Hirsch, Philip, ed. 1996: Resources, nations and indigenous peoples: case studies from Australasia, Melanesia and Southeast Asia, Melbourne; New York: Oxford University Press. 3115.  Howkins, Adrian, 2006: ‘Icy relations: the emergence of South American Antarctica during the Second World War’, Polar Record, 42:2, 153-65. 3116.  H–skuldsson, L., 1980: A Directory of Scandinavian Scholars in Asian Studies, Copenhagen: Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies. 3117.  Huetz de Lemps, C., 1981: Plantations sucrieres et protection de l’environnement aux Iles

2009

CEHA

173

Hawaii, Bulletin de Liaison - Sepanrit, no 11, p. p. 73-77 3118.  Huetz de Lemps, Alain, 1983: Le Monde des Atolls et des Iles Basses (conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, Bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no 12, pp. 63-76. 3119.  Huetz de Lemps, A., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Le monde des atolls et des iles basses, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France; Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 93-106. 3120.  Huetz de Lemps, C., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Activites et demographie des populations insulaires du monde tropical, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 109-119. 3121.  Huetz de Lemps, C., 1984: Un jeune Etat melanesien: les iles Salomon. Bordeaux: CEGET. 3122.  Huffer, E., 1991: Les iles dans le monde ou le monde vu des iles, Une approche comparee de la politique exterieure de trois micro-Etats Oceaniens: Fidji, Tonga et Vanuatu, Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, no 92-93, pp. 7-19. 3123.  Huffer, E., 1993: Grands Hommes et Petites Îles, La Politique Extérieure de Fidji, de Tonga et du Vanuatu, Paris IRD, Études et Thèses. 3124.  Huffer, E.; Bonnemaison, Joel (pref.). 1993: Grands hommes et petites iles: la politique exterieure de Fidji, de Tonga et du Vanuatu, Paris: ORSTOM. 3125.  Huffer, Elise, 1997: Pirogues et porte-avions: les relations internationales dans le Pacifique sud, In Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, pp.35-55. 3126.  Huffman, Kirk W., 1996:  The “Decorated Cloth” from the “Island of Good Yams”: Barkcloth in Vanuatu, with Special Reference to Erromango, In Arts of Vanuatu, edited by Joël Bonnemaison, Christian Kaufmann, Kirk Huffman and Darrell Tryon. Bathurst: Crawford House Publishing, 129–140. 3127.  Hughes, D.E., 1986: The prahu and unrecorded inter-island trade, Bulletin of Indonesian Economic Studies, no 2, p. p. 103-113. 3128.  Hulme, D., 1983: “An economic appraisal of the Hoskins oil palm scheme”, in Australian Geographer 15: 330-334. 3129.  Hulme, D., 1984: Land settlement schemes and rural development in Papua New Guinea, PhD thesis, James Cook University, Townsville. 3130.  Humble, Richard, 1986: The rise and fall of the British navy, Macdonald Queen Anne Press. 3131.  Hunt, D. J.; Moore, D., 1999: “Rhigonematida from New Britain diplopods. 2. The genera Rhigonema Cobb, 1898 and Zalophora Hunt, 1994 (Rhigonematoidea: Rhigonematidae) with descriptions of three new species”, in Nematology, 1: 225-242. 3132.  Hunt, Peter, 1998: A brief history of Jersey, Jersey: Société Jersiaise. 3133.  Hunt, Rex, 2002: My Falkland days, Revised & updated edn. London: Politico’s. 3134.  Hunter Anderson, R.L., 1990: Recent advances in Micronesian archaeology, Selected papers from the Micronesian Archeology Conference Septembre 9-12, 1987, Micronesica, no 2, p. p. 1-434. 3135.  Hunter, James, 1991: The claim of crofting: the Scottish highlands and islands, 1930-1990, Edinburgh : Mainstream.

2009

174

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3136.  Hunter, Jim, 1996: Tory island - habitat, economy and society, Ulster Folklife, 42, 38-78. 3137.  Hunter, Jim, 2003: Tory Island and its artists, Coleraine: University of Ulster. 3138.  Hunter-Anderson, Rosalind L., 1983: Yapese settlement patterns: an ethnoarchaeological approach, Agana, Guam: Pacific Studies Institute; Detroit, Mich: Cellar Book Shop [distributor]. 3139.  Huntsman, A. C., 1984: “Health and nutrition of labourers’ families in Papua New Guinea”, in Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 27(2): 73-81. 3140.  Huntsman, A. C., 1984: Health and nutrition of labourers’ families in Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 27(2): 73-81. 3141.  Huria, I. and G. R. Tyrie, 1982: Airagilpua Survey, Cape Gloucester, West New Britain, Department of Primary Industry Land Utilisation Section, Unpublished Report, Port Moresby. 3142.  Hurley, Jim, 1988-89: “The Keeragh Islands: a review”, in Journal of the Wexford Historical Society, 12, 86-91. 3143.  Huser, K.; Reinl, T., 1987: Landnutzung Tropischer Inseln: La Reunion und Mauritius im Sudindischen Ozean, Geographische Rundschau, no 1, p. p. 44-51. 3144.  Hviding, Edvard, 1995: Kiladi oro vivineidi tongania tingitonga pu ko pa idere oro goana pa Marovo / Of Reef and Rainforest: A Dictionary of Environment and Resources in Marovo Lagoon. Bergen: Centre for Development Studies, University of Bergen, in cooperation with Western Province Division of Culture, Gizo, Solomon Islands. 3145.  Hviding, Edvard, 1995a: Vivinei tuari pa Ulusaghe / Custom Stories of the Marovo Area. Recorded, edited and translated by Edvard Hviding. Bergen: Centre for Development Studies, University of Bergen, in collaboration with Western Province Division of Culture, Gizo, Solomon Islands. 3146.  Hviding, E. and Baines, G.,1996: Custom and complexity; marine tenure, fisheries management and conservation in Morovo lagoon, Solomon Islands, in Howitt R, Connell J and Hirsch P, eds, Resources nations and indigenous peoples, Oxford University Press, 66-89. 3147.  Hviding, Edvard, 1996a: Guardians of Marovo Lagoon: Practice, Place, and Politics in Maritime Melanesia. Pacific Islands Monograph Series 14. Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies and University of Hawai‘i Press. 3148.  Hviding, Edvard, 1996b: Nature, Culture, Magic, Science: On Meta-Languages for Comparison in Cultural Ecology, In Nature and Society: Anthropological Perspectives, edited by P Descola and G Pálsson, 165–184. London: Routledge. 3149.  Hviding, Edvard, 1998: Western Movements in Non-WesternWorlds: Toward an Anthropology of Uncertain Encounters. Journal of the Finnish Anthropological Society 23 (3): 30–51. 3150.  Hylan, Ken, 1989: Cargo and Christianity in Kaliai, Health and nutritional status within the Talasea, Koskins, Kapiura, Ania Fulleborn Timber areas. UNITECH Development and Consultancy Pty Ltd, Ed. Scientific Reports for the Environmental Plan: Talasea, Hoskins, Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn Timber Areas. Lae, UNITECH. 3151.  Hylan, Ken, 1990: “Cargo and Christianity in Kaliai”, in Catalyst, 20(2): 167-188. 3152.  Hylan, Ken, 1990: “The New Tribes in Kaliai: a response” in Catalyst, 20(3):261- 266. 3153.  Hyland, K., 1989: “Health and nutritional status within the Talasea, Koskins, Kapiura, Ania Fulleborn Timber areas”, UNITECH Development and Consultancy Pty Ltd, Ed. Scientific

2009

CEHA

175

Reports for the Environmental Plan: Talasea, Hoskins, Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn Timber Areas. Lae, UNITECH, International, [International Geological Congress], pp. 506. 3154.  Hyndman, D., 2001: Academic responsibilities and representation of the Ok Tedi crisis in postcolonial Papua New Guinea, TCP, 13, 1, pp.33-54. 3155.  IAC, 1985: A Autonomia como fenómeno Cultural e Político. Comunicações apresentadas na VIII Semana de Estudos dos Açores, Angra do Heroísmo, Instituto Açoriano de Cultura. 3156.  IBI, 2002: Islands business,, Suva, Fiji: Islands Business International. 3157.  Ibrahime, Mahmoud, 1997: Etat français et colons aux Comores, 1912-1946, Paris, CEROI-INALCO, Editions L’Harmattan, Montréal, Qc., Canada, L’Harmattan Inc., c1997. 3158.  ICES, 1992: bliography: Ethnicity and Conflict - Sri Lanka, The International Centre for Ethnic Studies (ICES), Sri Lanka. Disponível online em url: http://www.ices.lk/sl_database/ ethnic_conflict/bibliography.shtml. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 3159.  ICG, 1997: Il Mare per le grandi isole del Mediterraneo nord-occidentale: atti del Convegno, Bastia, 11-13 giugno 1996, Genova, [Istituto di scienze geografiche] 3160.  IGLP, 2004: Insularité, société et développement, Institut de Géographie Louis Papy, Université Michel-de Montaigne - Bordeaux III. 3161.  Ihimaera, Witi; (ed) Adsett, Sandy and Whiting, Cliff (general editors), 1996: Mataora: The Living Face, Contemporary Maori Art. Auckland: David Bateman/Creative New Zealand. 3162.  Illouz, Charles; Tréfeu, Thérèse, 2003: Sources du Pacifique insulaire: Lieux de recherche et d’information scientifique, Paris: Karthala. 3163.  Imada, Adria Lyn, 2004: Hawaiians on Tour: Hula Circuits Through the American Empire, American Quarterly, Volume 56, Number 1, March, pp. 111-149. 3164.  Imperial College – London, 2009: Electronic Journals - A to Z. Disponível online em url: http://www3.imperial.ac.uk/library/digitallibrary/electronicjournals. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009. 3165.  Inbar, E.; Sheffer, G., 1997: The national security of small states in a changing world, Londres, Frank Cass. 3166.  Indenrigsministeriet, 1981: Ø-kommunernes økonomiske og servicemæssige problemer: betænkning, afgivet af Indenrigsministeriets udvalg af 25. april 1979. København: Direktoratet for statens indkøb. 3167.  Inglis, A., 1997: re-reading the White Women’s Protection ordinance, in Hiery H and MacKenzie JM, eds, European impact and Pacific influence; British and German policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response, London, Tauris Academic Studies, pp.324-37. 3168.  Ingoldby, Grace, 1990: Out of call or cry: the Island of Sark, London: Heinemann. 3169.  Inkson, K., 2004: “The New Zealand Brain Drain: Expatriate views”, University of Auckland Business Review, 6 (2): 29–39. 3170.  Inoue, Kazuo, [et al.], 2000: “A Comparative Study of Rural Clinics in Remote Islands and Inland Areas”, in Asia Pacific Journal of Public Health, vol. 12: pp. 22 -. 3171.  Inskip, Ian, 2002: Ordeal by Exocet: HMS Glamorgan and the Falkl, Thomson, William P. L. ‘Ouncelands and Pennylands in the West Highlands and Islands’, Northern Scotland, 22, 27-43. 3172.  Intoh, Michiko, Foss Leach, 1985: Archaeological investigations in the Yap Islands, Micronesia: first millennium B.C. to the present day, Cambridge, England, B.A.R..

2009

176

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3173.  Ioannides, D., 1992: Tourism development agents: the Cypriot resort cycle, Annals of Tourism Research, 19(4), pp.711-731. 3174.  Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. & Sonmez, S. (eds.), 2001: Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism Development, London, Continuum. 3175.  Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F., 2001: Searching for sustainable tourism development in the insular Mediterranean, In: Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F. (eds), Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism Development: Practices, Management and Policies, London: Pinter, pp. 3-22. 3176.  Irei, Takashi, 1982: Okinawajin ni totte no sengo, Tōkyō: Asahi Shinbunsha. 3177.  IRF, 1985: The Uses of historic resources in Eastern Caribbean Island development: report of a workshop held at Brimstone Hill, St. Kitts, October 21-23, 1983, sponsored by Island Resources Foundation, Society for the Restoration of Brimstone Hill [and] Government of St. Kitts-Nevis with the support of the Rockefeller Brothers Fund, [St. Thomas, U.S. V.I.], Island Resources Foundation. 3178.  Irisipau ... [et al.], textes de. 1995: Ecoute le bambou qui pleure: récits de quatre musiciens mélanésiens (‘Aré’aré, Îles Salomon), recueillis et présentés par Hugo Zemp, [Paris]: Gallimard. 3179.  Irwin, G., 1989: Against, across and down the wind: a case for the systematic exploration of theremote Pacific Islands, JPS, Vol. 98(2), 1989: 167-206. 3180.  Irwin, G., 1992: The prehistoric exploration and colonisation of the Pacific, Cambridge, 1992. 3181.  Isaguirre, Ramón R., Charles G. Gerke, Cookie Rocklin, 2003: History of the Bay Islands, 1858-1895: through the eyes of diplomats: United States diplomatic correspondence, [Honduras?: s.n.], (Comayagüela, M.D.C., Honduras, C.A.: Multigráficos Flores). 3182.  Isert, Paul Erdmann, 1992: Letters on West Africa and the Slave Trade: Paul Erdmann Isert’s Journey to Guinea and the Caribbean Islands in Columbia (1788), translated from the German and edited by Selena Axelrod Winsnes, Oxford; New York: Published for the British Academy by Oxford Univ. Press. 3183.  Ishikawa, Noriko; Fukushige, Mototsugu, 2009: “Impacts of tourism and fiscal expenditure on remote islands in Japan: a panel data analysis”, in Applied Economics, vol. 41, issue 7, pages 921-928. 3184.  Ishtar, Zohl dé., 1994: Daughters of the Pacific, North Melbourne, Vic., Australia: Spinifex Press. 3185.  Islands Book Trust (Scotland), 2006: The decline and fall of St. Kilda: proceedings of an international conference organised by The Islands Book Trust in August 2005 to mark the 75th anniversary of the evacuation of St. Kilda. Port Ness: Islands Book Trust. 3186.  Islands Book Trust (Scotland), 2008: Whaling and the Hebrides: the history of island whalers in the south Atlantic and whaling in and around the Hebrides, Kershader, Isle of Lewis: Islands Book Trust. 3187.  Islands Protection Society, 1984: Islands at the edge: preserving the Queen Charlotte Islands wilderness, Vancouver: Douglas & McIntyre; Seattle: University of Washington. 3188.  Issur, sous la dir. de Kumari R. et Vinesh Y. Hookoomsing, 1998: L’océan Indien dans les littératures francophones: pays réels, pays rêvés, pays révélés: [actes du colloque, Université de Maurice, juillet 1997] / [organisé par l’Université de Maurice], Paris: Éd. Karthala; Réduit: Presses de l’Université de Maurice.

2009

CEHA

177

3189.  Ivanov, Vºiºacheslav Vsevolodovich, 1997: The Russian Orthodox Church of Alaska and the Aleutian Islands and its relation to Native American traditions: an attempt at a multicultural society, 1794-1912,Washington, DC, Library of Congress, For sale by the U.S. G.P.O.. 3190.  Ives, Edward D., 1999: Drive Dull Care Away: Folksongs from Prince Edward Island, Charlottetown: Institute of Island Studies. Disponível online em URL: http://books.google. com/books?id=WNNwgB4d7PgC. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 3191.  Ives, Vernon A. edited by. 1984: The Rich papers: letters from Bermuda, 1615-1646: eyewitness accounts sent by the early colonists to Sir Nathaniel Rich, transcribed by Mrs. Ambrose Gosling, Sister Jean Kennedy, and John Adams, Toronto; Buffalo: Published for the Bermuda National Trust by the University of Toronto Press. 3192.  Iyechad, G., and Quimby, F., 1983: Belau; super-port, fortress or identity, in R Teiwaki, et.al., eds Politics in Micronesia, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, 100-30. 3193.  Izuka, Scot K., 2006: Effects of irrigation, drought, and ground-water withdrawals on groundwater levels in the southern Lihue basin, Kauai, Hawaii, Reston, Va: U.S. Geological Survey. 3194.  Jaarsma, S. R. Marta Rohatynskyj, 2000: Ethnographic Artifacts: Challenges to a Reflexive Anthropology, University of Hawaii Press 3195.  Jack Claude Nezat, 2007: The Nezat And Allied Families 1630-2007, Lulu. 3196.  Jackling, Roger, 2005: ‘The impact of the Falklands Conflict on defence policy’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 239-52 3197.  Jackson R.T., 1988: The Australian colonial experience in Papua New Guinea, in Heathcote RL (ed) The Australian experience, Melbourne, Longman Cheshire 3198.  Jackson, Miles M., 1986: Pacific Island studies: a survey of the literature, New York: Greenwood Press. 3199.  Jackson, P., et all..., 1994: Volcanic disasters and cultural discontinuities in the Holocene of West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Anonymous, Ed. Geological Society of America, 1994 annual meeting. Boulder, CO, United States, Geological Society of America (GSA), pp. 263. 3200.  Jacobs, Judy, 1990: Indonesia, a nation of islands, Minneapolis, Minn.: Dillon Press. 3201.  Jahoda, Gloria, 1995: The Trail of Tears, Wings Press. 3202.  Jairazbhoy, R. A., 1990: Ancient Egyptian survivals in the Pacific, London: Karnak House. 3203.  Jalabert, Laurent, 2007: La colonisation sans nom: la Martinique de 1960 à nos jours, Paris: Indes savantes. 3204.  James Gonzalez, Gertrude M., 2000: Sediments and shadows: identity and colonialism in the United States Virgin Islands, Thesis (Ph.D.)--State University of New York at Binghamton. 3205.  James, Brian,2007: ‘The Falklands X-Factor’, History Today, 57:5, 32-33. 3206.  James, Cynthia, 2007: “You’ll Soon Get Used to Our Language” Language, Parody and West Indian Identity in Andrea Levy’s Small Island, Anthurium- A Caribbean Studies Journal , Vol 5, Issue 1 (Spring). 3207.  James, Lawrence Edwin, 1988: Imperial Rearguard: Wars of Empire, 1909-1985, London and McLean, VT.

2009

178

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3208.  James, Winston, 2002: Explaining Afro-Caribbean Social Mobility in the United States: Beyond the Sowell Thesis, Comparative Studies in Society and History, Vol. 44, No. 2 (Apr.), pp. 218-262. 3209.  Jamieson, A. G. (ed.), 1986: A people of the sea: the maritime history of the Channel Islands, N. York, Methuen. 3210.  Janssen, H., 1974: “The story cult of Kaliai”, in Point, 1: 4-28. 3211.  Janssen, H., Kiers, M. and Nijkamp, P., 1995, Private and public development strategies for sustainable tourism development of island economies, In: Coccossis, H. and Nijkamp, P. (eds), Sustainable Tourism Development, London: Avebury, pp.65-83. 3212.  Japon 1979-1999: l’éclatement de l’insularité, Karoline Postel-Vinay, Politique étrangère, Année 1999, Volume 64, Numéro 3 p. 545 – 555 3213.  Jardim, Alberto João, 1995:Tribuna livre, Ponta Delgada: Jornal da Cultura, 1o v.: 1974-75, 2o v.: 1976, 3o v.: 1977-1978. 3214.  Jardim, Alberto João, 1998: Autonomia. A Experiência da Madeira, Funchal, Edicarte. 3215.  Jauze, Jean-Michel (Editeur scientifique); Guébourg, Jean-Louis (Editeur scientifique), 2005: Inégalités et spatialité dans l’océan Indien: actes du colloque de Saint-Denis de La Réunion, 24-26 novembre 2004, Université de la Réunion, Faculté des lettres et des Sciences Humaines, CREGUR, Centre de Recherches et d’Etudes en Géographie de l’Université de la Réunion (Saint-Denis), Paris: L’Harmattan. 3216.  Jauze, Jean-Michel, 2004: La pluriethnicité dans les villes mauriciennes, In Maillard, JeanClaude (coord.), Insularité, société et développement, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 7-32. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index678.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3217.  Jayaraman, K., 1982: Legal regime of islands, New Delhi: Marwah Publications. 3218.  Jayaraman, T. K., 1994: Fiscal and current account imbalances of the Solomon Islands: 1981-1991, Kensington, NSW: Centre for South Pacific Studies, The University of New South Wales. 3219.  Jayawardena, Chandana, with a foreward by Rex V. Nettleford, 2002: Tourism and hospitality education and training in the Caribbean, Kingston, Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press. 3220.  Jayawardena, Chandana. 2005: Caribbean tourism: visions, mission and challenges, Kingston, Jamaica: Ian Randle. 3221.  Jayewardene, Hiran Wasantha, 1990: The regime of islands in international law, Martinus Nijhoff Publishers. 3222.  Jebens, Holger, 1997: “Störenfriede und falsche Christen: Zur Konstruktion und Instrumentalisierung von kastom in der Southern Highlands Province von PapuaNeuguinea: Melanesien”, in Baessler-Archiv, vol. 45 (610 p.)  (2 p.1/2), pp. 481-496 3223.  Jebens, Holder, 2000: “Signs of the Second Coming. On Eschatological Expectation and Disappointment in Highland and Seaboard Papua New Guinea”, in Ethnohistory, 1:171— 204. 3224.  Jebens, Holger, 2001: “Valuku. Maskentänze in West New Britain (Papua-Neuginea) als Aneignung des Eigenen” In: K.H. Kohl und N. Schafhausen (Hrsg.), New Heimat, pp. 7889. New York: Lukas and Sternberg. 3225.  Jebens, Holger, 2002: “Trickery or Secrecy? On Andrew Lattas’s Interpretation of “Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults””, in Anthropos, 79:181-191.

2009

CEHA

179

3226.  Jebens, Holder, 2003: Starting with the Law of the tumbuan. Masked Dances in West New Britain (Papua New Guinea) as an Appropriation of One’s Own Cultural Self, Anthropos, 98:115-126. 3227.  Jebens, Holger, 2004: Introduction: Cargo, cult and culture critique. In Cargo, cult and culture critique, edited by. H. Jebens, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, pp.1-13. 3228.  Jebens, Holder, 2004a: Talking about cargo cults in Koimumu (West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea), In Cargo, cult and culture critque, edited by H. Jebens, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, pp.157-169. 3229.  Jebens, Holder, 2004b: ‘Vali Did That Too’: On Western and Indigenous Cargo Discourses in West New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Anthropological Forum, 14 (2):117-139. 3230.  Jebens, Holder, 2004c: Valuku. Maskentänze in West New Britain (Papua-Neuginea) als Aneignung des Eigenen, In: K.H. Kohl und N. Schafhausen (Hrsg.), New Heimat, New York: Lukas and Sternberg, pp. 78-89. 3231.  Jedrusik, M., 1980: Historyczne uwarunkowania obecnego Rozmieszczenia i struktury upraw na Maskarenach, Komorach i Seszelach, Afryka Azia America Lacinska: Studi i Materialy, no 62, p. p. 75-113. 3232.  Jedrusik, M., 1980a: wplyw wybranych elementow srodowiska przyrodniczego na rozmieszczenie i strukture upraw na maskarenach, seszelach i komorach, Afryka Azia America Lacinska: Studi i Materialy, no 60, p. p. 23-52. 3233.  Jedrusik, M., 2003: Les îles avec et sans passé: le cas de South Ari Atoll (Iles Maldives), In DYMSET, CNRS Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3 (Pessac); Université de la Rochelle; Poitou-Charentes, Conseil Régional Cosaert, Patrice (dir.); Bart, François (dir.), Patrimoines et développement dans les pays tropicaux, Pessac: DYMSET, pp. 641-48. 3234.  Jeffreys, Max, 1997: Wreck of the Sydney Cove, Frenchs Forest, N.S.W., New Holland. 3235.  Jenkins, C., 1996 or 1997: Poverty, nutrition and health care in Papua New Guinea: a case study in four communities. Report submitted to World Bank, Goroka, Papua New Guinea Institute of Medical Research. 3236.  Jenner, P. and Smith, C., 1993: Tourism in the Mediterranean, London: Economist Intelligence Unit. 3237.  Jensen, J.A., 2003: ‘The Position of Greenland and the Faroe Islands within the Danish Realm’, European Public Law, Vol. 9, No. 2, pp. 170-178. 3238.  Jensen, Peter Hoxcer, 1998: From serfdom to Fireburn and strike: the history of Black labor in the Danish West Indies, 1848-1916, Christiamsted, St. Croix, [V.I.], Antilles Press. 3239.  Jersey, Stanley Coleman, 2008: Hell’s islands: the untold story of Guadalcanal, College Station: Texas A&M University Press. 3240.  Jézéquel, Hervé (dir.), 2002: L’île Carn: rencontres en bordure du temps, Paris: Créaphis. 3241.  Jiménez González, José Juan, 1992: Gran Canaria y los canarios, [Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 3242.  Jiménez González, José Juan. 2005: Canarii: la génesis de los canarios desde el Mundo Antiguo, [La Laguna]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 3243.  Joannon, Pierre, 2006: Histoire de l’Irlande et des Irlandais, Paris. 3244.  João, Maria Isabel, 1991: Os Açores no Século XIX. Economia, Sociedade e Movimentos Autonomistas, Lisboa, Edições Cosmos. 3245.  João, Isabel, 1992: “Reflexões sobre a insularidade e integração. O caso do arquipélago

2009

180

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

dos Açores”, in Mare Liberum, 4, 299-306. 3246.  Joaquin, Nick. 1988: Culture and History: Occasional Notes on the Process of Philippine Becoming. Solar Publishing, Metro Manila. 3247.  Jochelson, Waldemar, 2002: Archaeological investigations in the Aleutian Islands, foreword by Herbert D.G. Maschner and Katherine L. Reedy-Maschner, Salt Lake City, University of Utah Press. 3248.  Jochelson, Waldemar, 2002a: History, ethnology, and anthropology of the Aleut, foreword by Katherine L. Reedy-Maschner and Herbert D.G. Maschner, Salt Lake City, University of Utah Press. 3249.  Jodice, Mimmo, 2000: Isolario mediterrâneo, Milano: F. Motta. 3250.  Johannes, R. E. (Robert Earle), 1981: Words of the lagoon: fishing and marine lore in the Palau District of Micronesia, Berkeley: University of California Press. 3251.  Jóhansen, J., 1985: Studies in the vegetational history of the Faroe and Shetland Islands. Thorshavn: Føroya Frôdskaparfelag. 3252.  John Waddell ... [et al.], editors. 1994: The Book of Aran: the Aran Islands, Co. Galway / by John Feehan ... [et al.]; Kinvara, Co. Galway: Tír Eolas,. 3253.  Johnson, David Newman, 2003: Cerncastle: a fortified islet on the north-east coast of Co. Antrim, In Kenyon, John R.; O’Conor, Kieran (ed.), The medieval castle in Ireland and Wales, Dublin: Four Courts, 217-238. 3254.  Johnson, Donald S., 1994, 1996: Phantom islands of the Atlantic: the legends of seven lands that never were, New York: Walker and Co.. 3255.  Johnson, Howard, 1991: The Bahamas in Slavery and Freedom, Kingston: Ian Randle Publishing. 3256.  Johnson, Howard, 1996: 1945 - The Bahamas from slavery to servitude, 1783-1933, Gainesville (FL): University Press of Florida. 3257.  Johnson, J., 1983: USA; the big umbrella, in R Crocombe and A Ali, eds, Foreign forces in Pacific politics, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, p.68-86. 3258.  Johnson, R. W., 1981: Cooke-Ravian Volume of Vulcanological Papers, Port Moresby, Department of Minerals and Energy. 3259.  Johnson, Samuel et James Boswell, 1991: Voyage dans les Hébrides, Paris. 3260.  Johnson, Samuel, 1709-1784, Johnson and Boswell in Scotland: a journey to the Hebrides; ed. Pat Rogers, New Haven (CT); London: Yale University Press. 3261.  Johnson, Samuel, James Boswell 2002: A journey to the Western Islands of Scotland; with, The journal of a tour to the Hebrides, with an introduction by Allan Massie, New York: Knopf. 3262.  Johnson, Sherry, 2005: El Niño, Environmental Crisis, and the Emergence of Alternative Markets in the Hispanic Caribbean, 1760s-70s, William & Mary Quart., LXII, pp. 365-410. Disponível online em url: http://www.librarycompany.org/Economics/2003Conference/ papers/SJohnson.pdf, consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 3263.  Johnson, Terry Lee, 2003: The Bering Sea and Aleutian Islands: region of wonders, edited by Kurt Byers, Fairbanks, Alaska: Alaska Sea Grant College Program, University of Alaska Fairbanks. 3264.  Johnson, Vassel, Sir, 2001: As I see it: how Cayman became a leading financial centre, Lewes, Sussex, Book Guild.

2009

CEHA

181

3265.  Johnson, W. B., 1959: The Cook Islands: land use in an island group of the south-west pacific, The journal of tropical geography, no 13, p. p. 38-5 3266.  Johnson, Whittington B., 2006: Post-emancipation race relations in the Bahamas, Gainesville (FL): University Press of Florida. 3267.  Johnson, Wittington B., 2000: Race Relations in the Bahamas, 1784–1834: The Nonviolent Transformation from a Slave to a Free Society. Fayetteville: University of Arkansas. 3268.  Johnston R., 1971: Distribution and relationship of the Arawe and Whiteman language families, West New Britain, Ukarumpa, PNG, Summer Institute of Linguistics. 3269.  Johnston R., 1980: Language, Communication and Development in New Britain, Ukarumpa: SIL. 3270.  Johnston, translated by George, 1994: Thrand of Gotu: two Icelandic sagas from the Flat Island book, Erin, Ont.: Porcupine’s Quill. 3271.  Jolivet Marie-José, 1985: “Migrations et histoire dans la “Caraïbe Française” “, In: Anthropologie et histoire, Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (1), p. 99-113. 3272.  Jolivet, Marie Jose (dir.). et all..., 1997: La Caraibe: des iles au continent, Cahiers d’Etudes Africaines, vol. vol. 37, no 148, pp. 759-1022 3273.  Jolly, A., 2004: Lords and Lemurs: Mad Scientists, Kings with Spears and the survival of biodiversity in Madagascar, Houghton Mifflin. 3274.  Jolly, Margaret, 1987: The forgotten  women:  a history of migrant labour and gender relations in Vanuatu, Oceania, 58(2):119-139 3275.  Jolly, Margaret, 1992: Banana Leaf Bundles and Skirts: A Pacific Penelope’s Web? In Tradition and History in Melanesian Anthropology, edited by James Carrier, Berkeley: University of California Press, 38–63. 3276.  Jolly, Margaret, 1992: Specters of inauthenticity, The Contemporary Pacific, 4 (1), 49-72. 3277.  Jolly, Margaret, 2000: Fraying Gauguin’s Skirt: Gender, Race and Liminality in Polynesia, In Pacific Studies, 23(1-2):86-103. 3278.  Jolly, M. & L. Manderson (eds.), 1997: Sites of desire, economies of pleasure: sexualities in Asiaand the Pacific, Chicago. 3279.  Jolly, Margaret, 2001: On the Edge: Deserts, Oceans, Islands, In Vicente Diaz and J. Kehaulani Kauanui (eds), Native Pacific Cultural Studies on the Edge, Special Issue, The Contemporary Pacific, Fall, 417-466. 3280.  Jolly, Margaret; Macintyre, Martha, 1989: Family and Gender in the Pacific: domestic contradictions and the colonial impact, Cambridge. 3281.  Jonas, W., 1985: “The commercial timber industry in colonial Papua New Guinea”, in Pacific Studies 8(2): 45-60. 3282.  Jonas, W., 1979: Commercial forestry production in Papua New Guinea: an economic geography, PhD thesis, University of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby. 3283.  Jones, Carleton, 2004: The Burren and the Aran Islands: an archaeological guide, Carleton Jones. Cork: Collins. 3284.  Jones, Dorothy Knee, 1980: A century of servitude: Pribilof Aleuts under U.S. rule, Lanham, MD: University Press of America. 3285.  Jones, Kenneth D., 1995: Native trees for community forests: a guide to landscaping with the native trees of St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, [St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands]: Virgin

2009

182

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Islands Dept. of Agriculture, Urban and Community Forestry Assistance Program: St. George Village Botanical Garden of St. Croix. 3286.  Jones, M., 2001: “The rise of the regional state in economic governance: “partnerships for prosperity” or new scales of state power?”, Environment and planning A, n°7, p. 11851211 3287.  Jones, P. D., 1988: From Bikini to Belau; the nuclear colonisation of the Pacific, WRI. 3288.  Jones, V. J.; Hodgson, D. A.; Chepstow-Lusty, A., 2000: “Palaeolimnological evidence for marked Holocene environmental changes on Signy Island, Antarctica”, in The Holocene, vol. 10: pp. 43 - 60. 3289.  Jones-Davies, sous la direction de M.T., 1994: Shakespeare: cosmopolitisme et insularité: actes du congrès 1993, Société Française Shakespeare; Société française Shakespeare. Congrès (1993: Luxembourg) Paris: Les Belles Lettres. 3290.  Jones-Jackson, Patricia, 1987: When roots die: endangered traditions on the Sea Islands, Athens, University of Georgia Press. 3291.  Jonge, Nico de, 1995: Forgotten islands of Indonesia: the art & culture of the Southeast Moluccas, [Hong Kong]: Periplus Editions. 3292.  Johnson, Whittington B., 2006: Post-emancipation race relations in the Bahamas; Gainesville (FL): University Press of Florida. 3293.  Jordan, Laylon Wayne, Elizabeth H. Stringfellow, 1997: A place called St. John’s: the story of John’s, Edisto, Wadmalaw, Kiawah, and Seabrook Islands of South Carolina, Spartanburg, S.C. Reprint Co.. 3294.  Jørgensen, Gunni, Jóannes Rasmussen, 1986: Glacial striae, roches moutonnées, and ice movements in the Faeroe Islands, København, Geological Survey of Denmark. 3295.  Jorgensen, Tove H., Henriette N. Buttenschön, August G. Wang, Thomas D. Als, Anders D. Børglum and Henrik Ewald1, 2004: The origin of the isolated population of the Faroe Islands investigated using Y chromosomal markers, Biomedical and Life Sciences, Volume 115, Number 1 / June. Disponível online em url: http://www.springerlink.com/ content/4yuhf5m7a22gc4qm/, Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 3296.  Jos, E.; Perrot, D. (dir.), 1999: La Caraïbe face au défi de la mondialisation. Marchés et nations dans l’aire Caraïbe/Amérique, Paris, Montchrestien. 3297.  Jośī, Rāmaśaraṇa, 1984: Tribals, islands of deprivation, Delhi: National Book Shop. 3298.  Jost, Christian, 2001: Système de support à la décision pour une gestion concertée de l’eau, Une approche intégrée du comportement social et des risques aux Iles Loyauté (Nouvelle-Calédonie), Revue Internationale de Geomatique, vol. 11, no 3-4, p. P. 443-467 3299.  Jost, Christian, 2006: Risques et enjeux environnementaux et changements sociétaux à Futuna (Pacifique français), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 233, Janvier-Mars. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index174.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3300.  Joubert, Jean-Louis, 1991-93: Recherches sur les littératures francophones: les îles de l’Océan Indien occidental, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine). 3301.  Jourdan, C., 1987: Des Plantations a la Ville, Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, no 85, pp. 243-251 3302.  Jouve, sous la direction de Dominique. 1988: Ecrire à la croisée des îles, des langues: Otherness in island writing--meeting the other, understanding the others: actes du huitième [i.e.: onzième] Colloque C.O.R.A.I.L., Colloque C.O.R.A.I.L. (11th: 1998: Nouméa, New

2009

CEHA

183

Caledonia), Paris: Harmattan; Nouméa: Université de la Nouvelle-Calédonie: C.O.R.A.I.L.. 3303.  Jouve, Edmond, 1999: Le thème de l’insularité dans l’œuvre de Pierre Benoit, in Meistersheim, A. (dir.), L’île laboratoire, Corte, Éditions Alain Piazzola. 3304.  Jouveau du Breuil, Yvain, 2000: Le peuplement des Saintes au XVIIème siècle: suivi d’un dictionnaire des familles saintoieses, [Ezy-sur-Eure?] La Berrantille. 3305.  Jowitt, Glenn, Peter Shaw, 1999: Pacific island style, London, Thames & Hudson. 3306.  JPH, 1981-1987: Pacific History Bibliography And Comment, Canberra: Journal Of Pacific History, Australian National University. 3307.  Juan Vidal, Josep, 1990: El cens de Floridablanca a les Illes Balears, 1786-1787, Mallorca: M Font. 3308.  Juan, E. San, 1980: “US imperialism in the Philippines”, in Race & Class, Jan; vol. 22: pp. 182 - 189. 3309.  Juillerat, B., 1997: “Book review: To sing with pigs is human. The concept of person in Papua New Guinea - Goodale, JC.”, in Homme, 37(141): 195-196. 3310.  Julia E. Sweig, 2004: Inside the Cuban Revolution, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. 3311.  Julius, Marie-José, 1998: Les flux touristiques aériens entre la France et les Antilles françaises, Bordeaux: 1988, Mém. Maîtrise: Géographie: Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3 3312.  Jumeau, M.-A. 1997: Bibliographie de l’Ile de Pâques, Paris, Société des Océanistes. 3313.  Jupp, J., (ed), 1988: The Australian people, Sydney, Angus and Robertson. 3314.  Justin, Anstice, 1990: The Nicobarese, Calcutta: Seagull Books on behalf of the Anthropological Survey of India. 3315.  Justin, Daniel, 1984: «Pouvoir central, Pouvoir local: essai de sociologie de l’administration à la Martinique», in Revue française d’administration publique, n° 31, juillet-septembre, pp. 72-88. 3316.  Justin, Daniel, 1987: «Contestations nationalitaires, régionalisme et décentralisation en Espagne », in Pouvoirs, 40, pp. 135-155. 3317.  Justin, Daniel, 1989: « L’articulation des politiques publiques étatiques et régionales: le cas de la formation professionnelle à la Martinique » (en collaboration), in Annuaire des Collectivités Locales 1989, Paris, Litec, G.R.A.L., pp. 47-60. 3318.  Justin, Daniel, 1989a: « L’assemblée nationale et son devenir » (en collaboration), in Revue du Droit Public et de la Science Politique, pp. 1245-1272. 3319.  Justin, Daniel, 1989b: « L’imbrication du personnel politique et de la fonction publique outre-mer » in Questions sur l’Administration des D.O.M., ouvrage publié sous la direction de Jean-Claude Fortier, Paris, Economica, pp. 189-200. 3320.  Justin, Daniel, 1989c: « Régionalisation et décentralisation à la Martinique: Ajustements à la marge et intégration politique », in Les Temps modernes, mai-juin, pp. 223-242. 3321.  Justin, Daniel, 1990: « La science politique antillaise entre holisme, individualisme méthodologique et hétérodoxie », in Cahiers d’administration d’outre mer, 3, pp. 77-83. 3322.  Justin, Daniel, 1991: « L’image du général de Gaulle et son utilisation dans la vie politique à la Martinique » (en collaboration avec E. Jos et F. Réno) in De Gaulle en son siècle, Vol. 1, Dans la mémoire des hommes et des peuples, Paris, la Documentation française,

2009

184

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

pp. 348-358. 3323.  Justin, Daniel, 1991a: « L’Etat libre associé de Porto Rico et le référendum du 8 décembre 1991: l’ambiguïté assumée » in Cahiers d’Administration Outre Mer, décembre 1991. 3324.  Justin, Daniel, 1991b: « Système politique et comportements électoraux à Porto Rico », in Problèmes d’Amérique latine, n° 99, janvier-mars, pp. 32-39. 3325.  Justin, Daniel, 1992: «Les démocraties pluralistes face aux scandales politiques: l’Irangate, les “affaires” Flick et Carrefour du Développement», in Revue française de science politique, 42(6), décembre, pp. 981-1007. 3326.  Justin, Daniel, 1993: « Political constraints of Economic dependency: the case of Guadeloupe and Martinique », in Caribbean studies, vol. 26, juillet-décembre 1993, pp. 311-334. 3327.  Justin, Daniel, 1994a: « Les attitudes socio-politiques antillo-guyanaises face à “1993” » (en collaboration) in L’outre-mer et l’Europe communautaire (sous la direction de E. Jos et D. Perrot), Paris, Economica, pp. 123-148. 3328.  Justin, Daniel, 1994b: «Quelques dilemmes de la vie politique insulaire: Porto Rico et la Martinique» in Maurice Burac (éd.), La Guadeloupe, la Martinique et la Guyane dans le monde américain, Paris: Karthala. 3329.  Justin, Daniel, 1995: «Les régions ultrapériphériques face à l’Union européenne: Les difficultés de l’harmonisation dans la différence», in Annuaire des collectivités locales, Paris: Litec, pp. 23-50. 3330.  Justin, Daniel, 1996: Développement et compétition politique: vers une mutation du modèle portoricain?, in Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), Les îles caraïbes: modèles politiques et stratégies de développement, Paris Karthala, pp. 185-223. 3331.  Justin, Daniel, 1996a: «Dynamique migratoire et recomposition identitaire: le cas portoricain» in Fred Réno (sous la direction de), Identités et politique de la Caraïbe et de l’Europe multiculturelles, Paris: Economica, 1995, pp. 95-118). 3332.  Justin, Daniel, 1996b: «Pour une réévaluation des rapports entre l’économique et le politique» in Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), Les îles caraïbes: modèles politiques et stratégies de développement, Paris: Karthala, pp. 11-44. 3333.  Justin, Daniel, 1996c: «Social sciences in the Francophone Caribbean: An evaluation », in Journal of social sciences, III(1-2), juin-décembre, pp. 108-119. 3334.  Justin, Daniel, 1996d: Les îles caraïbes: modèles politiques et stratégies de développement, Paris Karthala. 3335.  Justin, Daniel, 1997: « Introduction » in Fred Constant et Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de départementalisation outre mer, Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 11-22. 3336.  Justin, Daniel, 1997a: L’espace politique martiniquais à l’épreuve de la départementalisation, in Fred Constant et Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de départementalisation outre mer, Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 223-259. 3337.  Justin, sous la direction de Daniel, Fred Constant, 1997: 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de départementalisation outre mer, Paris, l’Harmattan. 3338.  Justin, Daniel, 1998: «En terre de mission» in Enseigner la science politique (sous la direction de Pierre Favre et Jean-Baptiste Legavre), Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 261-269. 3339.  Justin, Daniel, 1999: «Crise ou mutations des institutions: la quête de nouveaux modèles » in Politique et Développement dans la Caraïbe (sous la direction de Fred Constant et

2009

CEHA

185

Justin Daniel), Paris l’Harmattan, 1999, pp. 99-153. 3340.  Justin, Daniel, 1999a: « Idendidad cultural e identidad política en Martinica y Puerto Rico: mitos y realidades», in Revista de ciencias sociales, juin, pp. 33-65. 3341.  Justin, Daniel, 1999b: «Les Départements Français d’Amérique (DFA): Une plate-forme pour le capital français ou une vitrine de la France dans la Caraïbe» in La Caraïbe face au défi de la mondialisation, Marchés et nations dans l’aire Caraïbe/Amérique, Emmanuel Jos et Danielle Perrot (sous la direction), Paris, Montchrestien, pp. 167-191. 3342.  Justin, Daniel, 1999: 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de départementalisation outre mer, Paris, l’Harmattan, 1997 (sous la direction de Fred Constant et Justin Daniel). 3343.  Justin, Daniel, 1999: Politique et Développement dans la Caraïbe (sous la direction de Fred Constant et Justin Daniel), Paris l’Harmattan. 3344.  Justin, Daniel, 2000: “El independentismo puertorriqueño frente al desafío de la globalización” in Felix Ojeda Reyes, El independentismo puertorriqueño, de Betances a nuestros días, Editorial de la Univesidad de Puerto Rico. 15 p. 3345.  Justin, Daniel, 2000a: «Conflits sociaux et construction identitaire à la Martinique» in Jean Bernabé, Jean-Luc Bonniol, Raphael Confiant, Gerry L’Etang, Au Visiteur Lumineux, Des îles créoles aux sociétés plurielles, Mélanges offerts à Jean Benoist, Petit-Bourg, Ibis Rouge Editions/Presses Universitaires Créoles, pp. 339-351. 3346.  Justin, Daniel, 2000b: «Les limites de la démocratie locale en outre mer », in Gérard Gabriel Marion, Mélanges en Hommage à Bernard Vonglis, Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 85102. 3347.  Justin, Daniel, 2000c: «Migration and the Reconstruction of Identity: The Puerto Rican Example» in Robert Hudson and Fred Réno, Politics and Identity: Migrants and Minorities in Multcultural States, London and New York, Macmilan Press/St. Martin Press, pp ; 3-23. 3348.  Justin, Daniel, 2001: “Economic Performance Stimulated by Public Transfers: The Experience of Martinique”, in Integration & Trade, 5, no. 15, 2001, pp. 223-239. 3349.  Justin, Daniel, 2001a: “The construction of dependency: Economy and Politics in the French Antilles” in Aarón Gamaliel Ramos & Angel Israel Rivera Ortiz (eds), Islands at the crossroads: politics in the non-independent Caribbean, Kingston, Jamaica; Boulder, Co.: Ian Randle Publishers, Lynne Rienner Publishers, pp. 61-79. 3350.  Justin, Daniel, 2001b: «La Caraïbe entre mondialisation et régionalisation », in Pierre Guillaume (direction), Identités caraïbes, Paris: Editions du CTHS, pp. 227-245. 3351.  Justin, Daniel, 2001c: « Préface » in Renuga Devi-Voisset, Common Law et commowealth Caraïbe, Royaume-Uni, Etats-Unis, Commowealth Caraïbe, Martinique: Ibis Rouge. 3352.  Justin, Daniel, 2002: “Decentralisation of planning and management responsibilities between centre en periphery: historical distribution of responsibilities and recent reform trends in four Caribbean territories”, en collaboration avec Anne Mills; Haqq, Eddison, [et al.], in Health Policy, no. 61, pp. 11-30. 3353.  Justin, Daniel, 2002a: “Development policies in the French Caribbean: from State centrality to competitive polycentrism” in, Bissessar, Ann Marie (ed.), Policy Transfer, New Public Management and Globalization, Mexico and the Caribbean, Lanham: University Press of America, pp. 97-113. 3354.  Justin, Daniel, 2002b: « L’action locale et internationale des collectivités territoriales dans les DOM », in La revue parlementaire, Novembre. 3355.  Justin, Daniel, 2002c: « L’espace politique aux Antilles françaises », in Ethnologie française,

2009

186

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

XXXII, no. 4, pp. 589-600. 3356.  Justin, Daniel, 2002d: «Los departamentos franceses de América: Plataformas económicas o vitrinas de Francia en el Caribe» in Gerardo Gonzales Nunez & Emilio Pantojas García (eds), El Caribe en la era de la globalización, Hato Rey: Centro de Investigaciones Sociales; Publicaciones Puertorriqueñas Editores, pp. 216-240. 3357.  Justin, Daniel, 2003: «Coopération et culture dans les départements d’Outre-mer», in Observatoire des politiques culturelles, n° 24, pp. 20-22. 3358.  Justin, Daniel, 2003a: « Guyane, Guadeloupe, Martinique. Entre malaise social et nouvelles perspectives institutionnelles » in Serge Cordellier & Sarah Netter (eds), L’Etat des régions françaises 2003, Paris, La Découverte, pp. 244-249. 3359.  Justin, Daniel, 2003b: «Les Caraïbes à l’épreuve du capitalisme mondialisé: convergences idéologiques et résistance populaire » in Georges Voisset (ed.), L’imaginaire de l’archipel, Paris, Karthala, pp. 179-209. 3360.  Justin, Daniel, 2004: «L’articulation des politiques publiques de développement aux Antilles françaises: du tropisme étatique au polycentrisme concurrentiel», in Annales de la Faculté de droit et d’économie de la Martinique, Paris, L’harmattan. 3361.  Justin, Daniel, 2004a: «Le mouvement indépendantiste portoricain face au défi de la mondialisation» in Alain Yacou (ed.), La Caraïbe au tournant de deux siècles, Paris: CERC-Karthala, pp. 215-234. 3362.  Justin, Daniel, 2004b: «The Cotonou Agreement and the ACP-EU partnership: Towards a re-evaluation of politics?» in Ann Marie Bissessar (ed.), Globalization and Governance, Essays on the Challenges for Small States, Jefferson, N.C. McFarland Publishers. 3363.  Justin, Daniel, 2005: «Cadre institutionnel et vie politique outre mer », in Pouvoirs, no. 113, pp. 127-139. 3364.  Justin, Daniel, 2005a: « L’Union européenne et la construction des identités dans la région caraïbe » in Lionel Arnaud dir., Les minorités ethniques et l’Union européenne, Politiques, mobilisations, identités, Paris, La Découverte, pp. 113-135. 3365.  Justin, Daniel, 2005b: « Signification et portée de l’impératif régionaliste dans la Caraïbe » in Christian Lera (ed.), Le monde caraïbe: défis et dynamiques, 2 vols, Vol. 2, Géopolitique, intégration régionale, enjeux économiques, Pessac: Maison des Sciences de l’Homme d’Aquitaine, pp. 117-136. 3366.  Justin, Daniel, 2005c: «The French Départements d’outre mer. Guadeloupe and Martinique » in Lammert de Jong & Dirk Kruijt (eds), Extended Statehood in the Caribbean, Paradoxes of quasi colonialism, local autonomy and extended statehoood in the USA, French, Dutch and British Caribbean, Amsterdam: Rozenberg Publishers, pp. 59-84. 3367.  Justin, Daniel, 2006: «La consultation populaire de décembre 2003, les élections cantonales et régionales de mars 2004: analyse de quelques paradoxes martiniquais», in Pouvoirs dans la Caraïbe, 15. 3368.  Justin, Daniel, 2006a: «Les élus face à la réforme institutionnelle et à l’acte II de la décentralisation: la difficile conciliation d’aspirations contradictoires» in Thierry Michalon (ed.), Entre assimilation et émancipation: l’outre-mer français dans l’impasse, Paris, Editions les Perséides. 3369.  Justin, Daniel, 2006b: «Les formes d’expression politique dans la Caraïbe: ambivalence et paradoxes de la construction de l’ordre politique » in William Berthomière & Christine Chivallon (eds), Diasporas: après quinze années de ferveur, Paris, Editions Karthala, en co-édition avec la Maison des Sciences de l’Homme d’Aquitaine, Pessac.

2009

CEHA

187

3370.  Justin, Daniel, 2006c: «Synthèse: le point de vue du politiste», in Jean-Yves Faberon (dir.), Quel avenir institutionnel pour les collectivités françaises d’Amérique? In Actes du colloque organisé par l’Institut de droit d’outre mer (IDOM), Cayenne, 7-9 décembre 2005, Paris, La Documentation française, 343-351. 3371.  Justin, Daniel, 2006d: «Vie politique outre-mer et influence métropolitaine?», Regards sur l’actualité (n° consacré à la France et son outre-mer), pp. 31-41. 3372.  Justin, Daniel, 2007: « Le cadre institutionnel et le dialogue sur les politiques: l’Accord de Cotonou à l’épreuve d’une réhabilitation du politique » in Danielle Perrrot (ed.), Les relations ACP/UE après le modèle de Lomé: Quel partenariat ?, Bruxelles, Bruylant, pp. 261-285. 3373.  Justin, Daniel, 2007a: « Les départements français d’Amérique et la Caraïbe: les trois âges de la coopération régionale » in Une Méditerranée Caraïbe: Clovis Beauregard, 60 ans de coopération régionale, Fort-de-France, Conseil général, Archives départementales de la Martinique, pp. 9-13. 3374.  Justin, Daniel, 2007b: L’outre-mer a l’épreuve de la décentralisation: Nouveaux cadres institutionnels et difficultés d’adaptation, Paris, L’Harmattan. 3375.  Justin, Daniel; [et al.], 2007c: « La décentralisation du RMI-RMA aux Antilles-Guyane » in Hervé Rihal & Martine Long (eds), La décentralisation du revenu minimum d’insertion, Rapport d’études de l’observatoire de la décentralisation (GRALE), Paris: La Documentation française (Ministère de l’intérieur: Les travaux du centre d’études et de prospective). 3376.  Justin, Daniel; Cantacuzène, Roger, 2007d: «Pluralisme institutionnel et transfert de la gestion des routes “nationales” aux départements/régions d’outre-mer » in Justin Daniel (ed.), L’Outre-mer à l’épreuve de la décentralisation: nouveaux cadres institutionnels et difficultés. 3377.  Kaeppler, A., 1994: Paradise regained; the role of Pacific Museums in forging national identity, in Kaplan FES, (ed), Museums and the making of ‘ourselves”; the role of  objects in national identity, Leicester University Press, pp.19-44. 3378.  Kaeppler, edited by Adrienne and Jacob W. Love. 1998: Anuta. In The Garland Encyclopedia of World Music: Australia and the Pacific Islands, New York: Garland. Pp. 856-861. 3379.  Kahn, M., 1983: Sunday christians, Monday sorcerers, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 18(2), 96-112. 3380.  Kakazu, Hiroshi, 1994: Sustainable development of small island economies, Boulder: Westview Press. 3381.  Kalyanasundaram, K., Bibliography of books on Tamil History, Ethnicity, Culture, Sri lankan Tamils and Tamilnadu Politics, Webpages of Tamil Electronic Library. Disponível online em url: http://tamilelibrary.org/teli/tnbks.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 3382.  Kami, Saia, 1995: Complex demographic effects on demand behavior: micro-data evidence from a Pacific Islands economy, Honolulu, HI: East-West Center, . 3383.  Kamm, Jürgen and Gerold Sedlmayr (eds.), 2007: Insular mentalities: mental maps of Britain: essays in honour of Bernd Lenz, Passau: Stutz. 3384.  Kane, Herb Kawainui, et al., 1980: “Steering by Stars and Seas” in Polynesian Seafaring Heritage, ed. by Cecilia Kapua Lindo and Nancy Alpert Mower. Honolulu: Kamehameha Schools. 3385.  Kanesalingam, V., 1995: Economic Liberalisation in Sri Lanka, Colombo, Sri Lanka:

2009

188

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Friederich Ebert Stiftung. 3386.  Kang, S. K., [et al.], 1983: “Studies on the end-use development of lesser-known tropical timbers. (II) Studies on five species amberoi (Pterocymbium beccarii K. Schum.), celtis (Celtis nymanii K. Schum.), dillenia (Dillenia papuana Mart.), malas (Homalium foetidum Benth.), spondias (Spondias dulcis Forst.), grown in Kapuluk district, New Britain, Papua New Guinea”, Research Reports of the Forest Research Institute, in Korea Republic, No. 30: 191-212. 3387.  Kaplan, Martha, 2007: Fijian Water in Fiji and New York: Local Politics and a Global Commodity, Cultural Anthropology, Vol. 22, No. 4 (Nov.), pp. 685-706. 3388.  Kapua, editors, Cecilia, Lindo, Nancy Alpert Mower, 1980: Polynesian seafaring heritage, [Honolulu]: Kamehameha Schools and the Polynesian Voyaging Society. 3389.  Kardol, Rene. 1999: Proposed Inhabited Artificial Islands in International Waters: International Law Analysis in Regards to Resource Use, Law of the Sea and Norms of Self-Determination and State Recognition. MA thesis: University of Amsterdam. 3390.  Kardulias, P. Nick, edited by. 1994: Beyond the site: regional studies in the Aegean area, Lanham, Md.: University Press of America. 3391.  Karen, Nero, 1997: The End of Insularity, in Donald Denoon, S. Firth, J. Linnekin, M. Meleisa and K. Nero (eds.), Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, Cambridge, 439-67. 3392.  Karlsson, Gunnar, 2000: Iceland’s 1100 years: the history of a marginal society, London: C. Hurst & Co. 3393.  Karp, Ivan and Steven D. Levine, (eds). 1991: Exhibiting Cultures: the Poetics and Politics of Museum Display, Washington and London: Smithsonian Institution Press. 3394.  Kasarherou, C., 1991: Contribution à l’étude de démographie historique de la Nouvelle Calédonie, Nouméa. 3395.  Käser, Lothar, 1990: Die Besiedlung Mikronesiens: eine ethnologisch-linguistische Untersuchung, Berlin: Reimer. 3396.  Kate Barclay, Wayne Peake, 2005: Globalization, regionalization and social change in the Pacific Rim, Guadalajara, Jalisco, México: Universidad de Guadalajara; Sydney, Australia : University of Technology Sydney. 3397.  Kathirithamby, J., [et al.], 1998: “Strepsiptera parasites - novel biocontrol tools for oil palm integrated pest management in Papua New Guinea”, in International Journal of Pest Management, 44(3): 127-133. 3398.  Katsouris, P., 1993: Tourism taxation in Cyprus. Seminar on ‘Tourism Development and the Responsibility of the State, Budapest 15 February. Madrid: World Tourism Organisation, pp.97-102. 3399.  Katzenstein, P., 1985: Small states in world market, Ithata, Cornell University Press. 3400.  Kauffmann, Jean-Paul, 2000: The arch of Kerguelen: voyage to the Islands of Desolation, New York, Four Walls Eight Windows. 3401.  Kaufman, Scott, 2004: “Operation Oracle: The United States, Great Britain, New Zealand, and the Offshore Islands Crisis of 1954-55”, in Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, 32:3 (2004), 106-24. 3402.  Kawaley, I., 1999: “Implications of exclusive economic zone management and regional cooperation between South Pacific small midocean island Commonwealth territories”, Ocean Development and International Law, n°4, p. 333-377.

2009

CEHA

189

3403.  Kay, E. Alison, 1994: Darwin’s biogeography and the oceanic islands of the central Pacific, 1859-1909, In MacLeod, Roy M.; Rehbock, Philip F. (ed.), Darwin’s laboratory: evolutionary theory and natural history in the Pacific (Honolulu (HI): University of Hawai’i Press, 1994), 49-69. 3404.  Kay, E. Alison, edited by. 1994: A Natural history of the Hawaiian Islands: selected readings II, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 3405.  Kaye, K.J., 1990: Use of the Countryside by the Urban State, Scotland’s North-West Seaboard and Islands, Scottish Geographical Magazine, 106(2), pp. 89-97. 3406.  Kayser, M., Brauer, S., Cordaux, R., Casto, A., Lao, O., Zhivotovsky, L. A., Moyse-Faurie, C., Rutledge, R. B., Schiefenhoevel, W., Gil, D., Lin, A. A., Underhill, P. A., Oefner, P. J., Trent, R. J., Stoneking, M., 2006: Melanesian and Asian origins of Polynesians: mtDNA and Y chromosome gradients across the Pacific, Molecular Biology and Evolution, Vol. 23. No. 11. Pp. 2234-2244. 3407.  Kayser, M., Brauer, S., Weiss, G., Underhill, P. A., Roewer, L., Schiefenhšfel, W., and Stoneking, M., 2000: Melanesian Origin of Polynesian Y Chromosomes, Current Biology, volume 10, pp.1237-1246. 3407.  Kazuo, Inoue, [et al.], 2000:  “A comparative study of rural clinics in remote islands and inland areas”, in Asia Pacific Journal of Public Health, 12 (1). pp. 22-26. 3408.  Kean, P., 1998: Power and development: A Foucauldian analysis of the history of economic development on the Gazelle Peninsula and in the Siki Resettlement Schemes, New Britain, Papua New Guinea, PhD thesis. Monash University, Melbourne. 3409.  Kean, P., 2000: “Economic Development in the Siki Settlement Scheme, West New Britain”, Critique of Anthropology, 20(2): 153-172. 3410.  Keane, Maureen, 1991: The Inishkeas: a look at life there before the islands were abandoned in 1937, Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical Society), 11, 67-73. 3411.  Keate, George[1729-1797], 2000: ‘Benevolence on the beach’ [Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas Nicholas. Keate, George, 2000: Benevolence on the beach [Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas Nicholas. In Lamb, (Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago University Press, 2000), 112-16. 3412.  Keate, George, 2002: An account of the Pelew Islands, edited by Karen L. Nero and Nicholas Thomas; assistant editor, Jennifer Newell, London; New York: Leicester University Press. 3413.  Keating, Barbara H.... [et al.], 1987: Seamounts, islands, and atolls, Washington, D.C. American Geophysical Union. 3414.  Keays, S., 1996: A case for Carpentaria; Queensland and the eastern New Guinea colonies to 1900, Journal of the RHSQ, 16, 1, pp.1-13. 3415.  Kebs, Chull, D., 1989: Transmigrasi: the indonesian resettlement programme, Economics, no 39, p. p. 112-125. 3416.  Keegan, William F., and Lisabeth A. Carlson, 2008: Talking Taino: essays on Caribbean natural history from a native perspective, Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press. 3417.  Keehan, Ruth, 2004: ‘A life on Lambay (the story of my grandfather, Michael O’Connell)’, Dublin Historical Record, 57, 50-59. 3418.  Keesing, Roger M., Peter Corris, 1980: Lightning meets the west wind: the Malaita massacre, Melbourne; New York: Oxford University Press. 3419.  Keesing, Roger M., 1982: Kwaio religion: the living and the dead in a Solomon Island

2009

190

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

society, New York: Columbia University Press. 3420.  Keesing, R., 1989: Creating the past, Contemporary Pacific, Vol 1/1 p.19-42. 3421.  Keesing, Roger M., 1992: Custom and confrontation: the Kwaio struggle for cultural autonomy, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 3422.  Kehoe-Forutan, Sardi, 1987: A bibliography of the Torres Strait Islands, [St. Lucia], Dept. of Geographical Sciences, University of Queensland. 3423.  Keiller, Frank, 2000: Prison without bars: living in Jersey under the German occupation, 1940-45, Bradford on Avon, Wiltshire, Seaflower Books. 3424.  Keith, Gordon, 1982: Voices from the islands: true stories about Washington State’s fabulous San Juan Islands and those who inhabit them, Portland, Ore.: Binford & Mort. 3425.  Keket, S. and W. Ivara, 1982: A Checklist of the Islands of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby, National Library Service of PNG. 3426.  Kelleher, John D., 1994: The triumph of the country: the rural community in nineteenthcentury Jersey, St Ouen: John Appleby, 1994. 3427.  Kelly-Dewitt, Susan, The Fortunate Islands, Grosse Pointe Farms, Mich.: Marick Press. 3428.  Kemf, Elizabeth, Ed. 1993:  The Law of the Mother:  Protecting Indigenous Peoples in Protected Areas, Sierra Club Books,   3429.  Kemp, C., 1976: “Trial work with introduced vegetables in West New Britain”, K. Willson and R. M. Bourke, Eds. 1975 Papua New Guinea Food Crops Conference Proceedings, Port Moresby, Department of Primary Industry, pp. 187-204. 3430.  Kemp, Herman C., 1990: Annotated Bibliography of Bibliographies on Indonesia, Leiden: KITLV. 3431.  Kemper Hitch, Thomas, 1992: Islands in transition: the past, present, and future of Hawaii’s economy, edited by Robert M. Kamins, Honolulu: First Hawaiian Bank: Distributed by University of Hawaii Press. 3432.  Kemper, Steven, 1991: The Presence of the Past: Chronicles, Politics, and Culture in Sinhala Life, Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press. 3433.  Kennedy, Cynthia M. ‘The Other White Gold: Salt, Slaves, the Turks and Caicos Islands, and British Colonialism’, The Historian [Albuquerque, NM etc.], 69:2, 215-30. 3434.  Kennedy, E. and Deegan, J., 2001: Seasonality in Irish tourism, 1973–1995. In: T. Baum and S. Lundtorp, Editors, Seasonality in tourism, Pergamon, Amsterdam, pp. 51–74. 3435.  Kennes, W., 1997: “Les PVD et l’intégration régionale”, Le courrier ACP-UE, n°165, p. 6467. 3436.  Kent, Martin, 1987: “Island biogeography and habitat conservation”, in Progress in Physical Geography, Mar 1987; vol. 11: pp. 91 - 102. 3437.  Kent, Noel J., 1983: Hawaii, islands under the influence, New York: Monthly Review Press. 3438.  Kenyon, John R., 1990: Castles town defences and artillery fortifications in Britain and Ireland: a bibliography, 3 (CBA research report, 72), London: Council for British Archaeology. 3439.  Keown, Michelle, 2007: Pacific Islands writing: the postcolonial literatures of Aotearoa/New Zealand and Oceania, Oxford University Press US. 3440.  Kephallēniadēs, N. A, 1985: Romantikes histories sto Aigaio, 16os-19os aiōnas, Athēna, Ekdoseis Philippotē.

2009

CEHA

191

3441.  Keppel, Sylvia, 1984: Primaire textiele technieken van de Mentawai-Eilanden: systematiek van het lus- en vlechtwerk, Amsterdam: VU Uitgeverij. 3442.  Ker-Lindsay, James and Hubert Faustmann, 2009: The Government and Politics of Cyprus, Peter Lang. 3443.  Ker-Lindsay, James, 2005: EU Accession and UN Peacemaking in Cyprus, Palgrave Macmillan. 3444.  Kermel-Torrès, Doryane, 1985: “Coton, sisal, tabac”, In: Atlas d’Haïti, Talence: ORSTOM, planche 17. 3445.  Kermel-Torrès, Doryane, 1985: “Energie”, In: Atlas d’Haïti, Talence: CEGET. 3446.  Kernahan, Mel, 1995: White savages in the South Seas, London; New York: Verso. 3447.  Kerr (S.), 2005: «What is Small Island Sustainable Development About?», Ocean and Coastal Management, n° 48, p. 503-524. 3448.  Kerr, George H., 2000: Okinawa, the history of an island people, with an afterword by Mitsugu Sakihara, Boston: Tuttle Pub.. 3449.  Kersell, John E., 1989: Developing the British Virgin Islands: the first Crown Colony, Public Administration and Development, 9, 97-109. 3450.  Kesler, Ben, 1980: Priceless heritage: history and lore of Estate St. George, home of the St. George Village Botanical Garden of St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, [Frederiksted, St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands: B.R. Kesler]. 3451.  Kesler, Ben, 1981: American paradise?: Frederiksted, St. Croix, Freedom City St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands: B. Kesler. 3452.  Kessy, Emanuel T., 2003: Iron Age settlement patterns and economic change on Zanzibar and Pemba Islands, Kusimba, Chapurukha Makokha, ed. East African archaeology: foragers, potters, smiths, and traders, Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology, pp. 117-131. 3453.  Ketcham, Diane E., 1988: Long Island, shores of plenty: an economic celebration, “Long Island’s enterprises” by Leila Zoogby, Chatsworth Calif., Windsor Publications. 3454.  Kettenis, F. N. W., 1980: The Kilenge - people of PNG, PNG, National Cultural Council. 3455.  Keyso, Ruth Ann, 2000: Women of Okinawa. Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Press. 3456.  Khal Torabully with Marina Carter, 2002: Coolitude: An Anthology of the Indian Labour Diaspora, Anthem Press, London. 3457.  Kiely, Richard, Bechhofer, Frank, Stewart, Robert and McCrone, David, 2001: The Markers and Rules of Scottish National Identity. The Sociological Review, 49(1), pp.33-55. 3458.  Kieran, Brian L., 1992: The lawless Caymanas: a story of slavery and freedom: the West India Regiment connection, Grand Cayman: B.L. Kieran. 3459.  Kikuyama, Masaaki, 1993: Meiji kokka no keisei to shihō seido, Tōkyō: Ochanomizu Shobō. 3460.  Kilberd, D., 1995: Inventing Ireland: the Literature of the Modern Nation. Cape, London. 3461.  King James III, of Majorca, 1994: Leges Palatinae, prefaced of Joan Domenge i Mesquida, [preface translated from the Catalan by L. Ford], Majorca (Kingdom), Sovereign, [Bloomington, Ind.]: Indiana University Press in association with J.J. de Olañeta. 3462.  King, B., 1989: “Does wildlife management by the people work? A case study of the Pokili Wildlife Management Area, Papua New Guinea”, in Science in New Guinea, 15(2): 111-

2009

192

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

118. 3463.  King, B., 1990: Does wildlife management by the people work? A case study, Pokili Wildlife Management Area, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea. Tigerpaper, 17(1): 1-7. 3464.  King, B. 1994. Australian Attitudes to Domestic and International Resort Holidays: A Comparison of Fiji and Queensland, In Tourism: The State of the Art, A. V. Seaton, ed. Pp. 347-358. Chichester, England: Wiley. 3465.  King, B., 1994a: Tourism higher education in island microstates, Tourism Management, 15(4), pp. 267-272. 3466.  King, B.E.M., 1997: Creating Island Resorts, London: Routledge. 3467.  King, D. W., 1980:”A British officer in the eastern Adriatic, 1812-1815: the story of Captain Pearce Lowen of Korcula”, in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research, 58, 27-39. 3468.  King, David et al., 1982: Papua New Guinea Atlas: A Nation in Transition. Bathurst, Australia: R. Brown and the University of Papua New Guinea. 3469.  King, David James Cathcart, 1983: Castellarium Anglicanum: an index and bibliography of the castles in England, Wales, and the islands, Millwood, N.Y.: Kraus International. 3470.  King, ed. by Russell and John Connell, 1999: Small worlds, global lives. Islands and migration, London; New York: Pinter. 3471.  King, Marie, 1992: A most noble anchorage: a story of Russell and the Bay of Islands / by Marie King; edited and published by the Northland Historical Publications Society, Incorporated, Kerikeri, N.Z.: NHPS. 3472.  King, Michael, 1989: Moriori: a people discovered, Auckland (NZ). 3473.  King, Michael, 1990: A land apart: the Chatham Islands of New Zealand, photographs, Robin Morrison, Auckland, New Zealand: Random Century. 3474.  King, Michael, 2003: The Penguin History of New Zealand, New Zealand: Penguin Books. 3475.  King, Peter, 1991: The Channel Islands war 1939-1945, London: Robert Hale. 3476.  King, R. J., 1986: “Ports of shelter and refreshment...” Botany Bay and Norfolk Islands in British naval strategy, 1786-1808”, in Historical Studies (University of Melbourne), 22:87, 199-213. 3477.  King, R., 1993: ‘The Geographical Fascination of Islands’ in D.G. Lockhart, D. DrakakisSmith & J.A. Schembri, eds., The Development Process in Small Island States, London, Routledge, pp. 13-37. 3478.  King, Russell; Connell, J. (eds), 1999: Small worlds, global lives: islands and migration, Londres, Pinter. 3479.  King, Thomas F.; Parker, Patricia L., 1984: Pisekin nóómw nóón Tonaachaw = Archeology in the Tonaachaw historic district, Moen Island, with contributions by Francis Buekea, James Carucci, and Carl C. Christensen, [Carbondale]: Center for Archaeological Investigations, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale. 3480.  Kingston, Bob, 1990: Achill Island: the deserted village at Slievemore: a study, Achill, Co. Mayo: Bob Kingston, 1990. 3481.  Kinnes, Ian, James Hibbs, 1988: The dolmens of Jersey: a guide, La Haule, Jersey: La Haule Books; St. Helier, Jersey: Channel Television.

2009

CEHA

193

3482.  Kinvig, R.H., 1993: The Isle of Man: a social, cultural, and political history, Liverpool: Liverpool University Press. 3483.  Kinzer, Stephen, 2007: Overthrow: America’s Century of Regime Change from Hawaii to Iraq, Times Books. 3484.  Kirby, Michael, 2003: Skelligs calling, Dublin: Lilliput. 3485.  Kirch, Patrick Viinton, 1982: Tikopia; The History and Ecology of a Polynesian Outlier, Bishop Museum Press, Honolulu. 3486.  Kirch, Patrick Vinton and Douglas E. Yen, 1982: Tikopia: The Prehistory and Ecology of a Polynesian Outlier, Bernice P., Bishop Museum Bulletin Number 238, Honolulu: Bishop Museum Press. 3487.  Kirch, Patrick V., 1983: Mangaasi-style Ceramics from Tikopia and Vanikoro and their Implications for East Melanesian prehistory, Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association Bulletin, 3:67-76. 3488.  Kirch, P. V., 1984: The Evolution of the Polynesian Chiefdoms, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. 3489.  Kirch, P. V., 1984: The Polynesian outliers: continuity, change and replacement, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 19(4): 224-238 3490.  Kirch, Patrick V., 1985: On the Genetic and Cultural Relationships of Certain Outlier Populations, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 66:381-382. 3491.  Kirch, ed. by Patrick Vinton, 1986: Island societies: archaeological approaches to evolution and transformation, London: Cambridge university press. 3492.  Kirch, Patrick V., 1986a: Exchange Systems and Inter-island Contact in the Transformation of an Island Society: The Tikopia Case, In Island Societies: Archaeological Approaches to Evolution and Transformation, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Pp. 33-41. 3493.  Kirch, P.V., 1986b: ‘Introduction: The Archaeology of Island Societies’, in P.V. Kirch, ed., Island Societies: Archaeological Approaches to Evolution and Transformation, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 1-5. 3494.  Kirch, Patrick Vinton, 1987: Feathered Gods and Fishhooks: An Introduction to Hawaiian Archaeology and Prehistory, Honolulu: UH Press. 3495.  Kirch, Patrick Vinton; Colin Renfrew, Clive Gamble, 1989: The Evolution of the Polynesian Chiefdoms, Cambridge University Press 3496.  Kirch, P. V.; Hunt, T.L. editors. 1993: The To’aga site: three millennia of Polynesian occupation in the Manu’a Islands, American Samoa, Berkeley: Archaeological Research Facility, University of California, Berkeley. 3497.  Kirch, Patrick Vinton, 1994: The wet and the dry: irrigation and agricultural intensification in Polynesia, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 3498.  Kirch, Patrick V., 1996: Tikopia Social Space Revisited, In Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green, edited by J. Davidson, G. Irwin, F. Leach, A. Pawley, and D. Brown, Dunedin: New Zealand Journal of Archaeology Special Publication. Pp. 257-274. 3499.  Kirch, Patrick V., 1997: Mocrocosmic Histories: Island Perspectives on Globalí Change, American Anthropologist, 99:30-42. 3500.  Kirch, P. V., 1997a: The Lapita Peoples: Ancestors of the Oceanic World, Cambridge, Mass., Blackwell Publishers. 3501.  Kirch, edited by Patrick V. and Hunt, Terry L., 1997: Historical ecology in the Pacific Islands:

2009

194

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

prehistoric environmental and landscape change, New Haven: Yale University Press. 3502.  Kirch, P. V., 1999: The Lapita Peoples, Oxford: Blackwell. 3503.  Kirch, P. V., 2000, 2002: On the Road of the Winds: archaeological history of Pacific Islands before European Contact, Berkeley, University of California Press. 3504.  Kirch, P. V., 2000a: Historical Ecology in the Pacific Islands, Yale University Press. 3505.  Kirch, Patrick V. and Jean-Louis Rallu, editors, 2007: The growth and collapse of Pacific island societies: archaeological and demographic perspectives, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3506.  Kirch, Patrick V., 2000b: Temples as ëHoly Housesí: The transformation of Ritual Architecture in Traditional Polynesian Societies, In Beyond Kinship: Opening Up the House, edited by J. Gillespie and R. Joyce, Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. Pp. 103-114. 3507.  Kirch, Patrick V., 2001: Pigs, Humans, and Tropic Competition on Small Oceanic Oslands, In Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, edited by M. Dietler and B. Hayden. Canberra: Australian National University, Centre for Archaeological Research and Department of Archaeology and Natural History. Pp. 427-439. 3508.  Kirch, Patrick V., 2001a: Polynesian Feasting in Ethnohistoric, Ethnographic, and Archaeological Contexts: A Comparison of Three Societies, In Feasts: Archaeological and Ethnographic Perspectives on Food, Politics, and Power, edited by M. Dietler and B. Hayden. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution Press. 3509.  Kirch, Patrick V., 2001b: Hawaiki: Ancestral Polynesia: An Essay in Historical Anthropology, Cambridge University Press. 3510.  Kirch, Patrick Vinton, contributions by Nick Araho...[et al.]. 2001b: Lapita and its transformations in near Oceania: archaeological investigations in the Mussau Islands, Papua New Guinea, 1985-88, [Berkeley, Calif.], Archaeological Research Facility, University of California. 3511.  Kirch, Patrick Vinton, Jean-Louis Rallu, 2007: The Growth and Collapse of Pacific Island Societies: Archaeological and Demographic Perspectives (Anthropology), University of Hawaii Press. 3512.  Kirk, Robert W., 2008: Pitcairn Island, the Bounty mutineers, and their descendants: a history, Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland & Co. 3513.  Kirkpatrick, John, 1983: The Marquesan notion of the person, Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research Press. 3514.  Kirtland, John C., David F. Coffin, 1981: The relocation and internment of the Aleuts during World War II, Anchorage, Alaska, Aleutian/Pribilof Islands Association. 3515.  Kiste, R.C.,1985: Identity and relocation; the Bikini case, in M Chapman, ed, Mobility and identity in the Island Pacific, special issue of Pacific Viewpoint, 26, 1. 3516.  Kiste, R., 1986: Termination of the US trusteeship in Micronesia, JPH, 21 (3), 1986: 127138. 3517.  Kiste, R.C., 1994: United States in Howe KR, Kiste RC and Lal Bv, eds, Tides of History, Allen and Unwin, 227-56. 3518.  Kiste, edited by Robert C. and Marshall, Mac, 1999: American anthropology in Micronesia: an assessment, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3519.  Kiszely, John P., 2005: ‘The land campaign: A company commander’s perspective’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years

2009

CEHA

195

on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 99-108. 3520.  Kitano, Norio, 1987: Amakusa Kirishitan shi: maboroshi no paraizo, Fukuoka-shi: Ashi Shobō, Shōwa 62 3521.  Kituai, August Ibrum K., 1998: My gun, my brother: the world of the Papua New Guinea colonial police, 1920-1960 (Pacific Islands Monograph, 15), Honolulu (HI): University of Hawai’i Press. 3522.  Kituai, A., 1999: Deaths on the mountain; an account of police violence in the highlands of PNG, in Borofsky R., 1999, ed, Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake history, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.212-30. 3523.  Kiyoshi, Matsuda, 1981: Kodai chūsei Amami shiryō, Tōkyō: JCA Shuppan. 3524.  Kjartan G. Ottósson, 1983: Fróðárundur í Eyrbyggju, Reykjavík: Bókaútgáfa Menningarsjóðs. 3525.  Kjellgren, Eric, IVORY, Carol S. 2005: Adorning the world: art of the Marquesas Islands, New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art; New Haven: Yale University Press. 3526.  Klarreich, Kathie, 2005: Madame Dread: A Tale of Love, Vodou and Civil Strife in Haiti, New York: Nation Books. 3527.  Klein, Herbert S. and Ben Vinson, 2007: African slavery in Latin America and the Caribbean, Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press. 3528.  Klein, Laura and Lillian Ackerman, Eds. 2000: Women and Power in Native North America, University of Oklahoma Press. 3529.  Kluge, P. F., 1991: The Edge of Paradise: America in Micronesia, New York: Random House. 3530.  Klüppelholz, Heinz, 2005: Les connotations de l’insularité dans “ Mercure “ d’Amélie Nothomb, in Trabelsi, Mustapha (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand. 3531.  Knafou, R., 1988: Le tourisme a la Reunion et a Maurice, Mappemonde, no 3, p. p. 9-11. 3532.  Knapman, B., 1986: Aid and the dependent development of Pacific Island States, JPH, vol. 21 (3-4): 139-152. 3533.  Knapman, B., 1986: Merchant capital in the extreme periphery; Burns Philp (South Sea Coy Ltd) in Fiji 1920-1939”, Historical Studies, Vol 22, No 86, pp.93-115. 3534.  Knapman, C. & Ralston, C., 1989: Historical patchwork: a reply to John Young, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 23(2): 221-224. 3535.  Knapman, C., 1986: White women in Fiji 1835-1930: the ruin of empire?, Sydney. 3536.  Knapman, C., 1993: Reproducing empire; Exploring ideologies of gender and race on Australia’s Pacific frontier, in Magarey S, Rowley S and Susan S (Eds), Debutante nation:  Feminism contests the 1890’s, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 3537.  Knapp, A. Bernard, 2008: Prehistoric and Protohistoric Cyprus: Identity, Insularity, Oxford University Press. 3538.  Knapp, Bettina Liebowitz, 1985: Ceremonies and rituals on the Trobriand Islands of Papua, New Guinea. Part I-II, in Arabesque, New York. v. 11, no 4, Nov-Dec, p. 4-7. 3539.  Knapp, R., 1980: China’s Island Frontier: Studies in the Historical Geography of Taiwan, University of Hawai`i Press. 3540.  Knauft, Bruce M., 1999: From primitive to postcolonial in Melanesia and anthropology, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.

2009

196

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3541.  Knight, David W., 1998: The 1688 census of the Danish West Indies: (portrait of a colony in crisis), St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands, Little Nordside Press. 3542.  Knight, Franklin W., 1989: The Modern Caribbean, The University of North Carolina Press. 3543.  Knox, Bruce Arthur, 1984: “British Policy and the Ionian Islands, 1847-1864: Nationalism and Imperial Administration”, in English Historical Review, 99, 503-529, Publisher: Oxford University Press. 3544.  Knox, Robert, 2004: An Historical Relation of the Island of Ceylon in the East Indies, New Delhi (Reprint. Asian Educational Services). 3545.  Knox, S. A., 1985: The making of the Shetland landscape, Edinburgh. 3546.  Knox, W., 2004: Ilheidade: estudo sobre a idéia de ilheidade no imaginário social de dois filmes. In: XIII Ciclo de Estudos sobre o Imaginário: Espaço maginários e Transculturalidade, Recife. Caderno de Resumos. Recife: UFPE. 3547.  Kobata, Sunao, 1985: Kirishitan nōmin no seikatsu, Fukuoka-shi, Ashi Shobō, (1986 printing). 3548.  Kober, Pascal (Editeur scientifique), 2008: Îles: Ces étranges objets de désir, La GéoGraphie. Terre des hommes, Hiver, vol. 1528, no 1, p 3-113. 3549.  Koburger, Charles W., 1995: Pacific turning point: the Solomons campaign, 1942-1943, Westport, Conn.: Praeger. 3550.  Koburger, Charles W., 1999: Wine-dark, blood red sea: naval warfare in the Aegean, 19411946, foreword by G.W. Searle, Westport, Conn.: Praeger. 3551.  Koczberski, G., 2002: “Pots, Plates and Tinpis: New income flows and the strengthening of women’s gendered identities in Papua New Guinea”, in Development, 45(1): 88-92. 3552.  Koczberski, G., Curry, G.; Connell, J., 2000: “Full Circle or Spiralling Out of Control? State Violence and the Control of Urbanisation in Papua New Guinea”, in Urban Studies, 38 (11): 2017-2036. 3553.  Koczberski, G., G. Curry and K. Gibson, 2001: Improving productivity of the smallholder oil palm sector in Papua New Guinea: a socio-economic study of the Hoskins and Popondetta schemes, OPRA Annual Report Supplement. 3554.  Koechlin, J.; Boye, M., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Mayotte: bilan ecologique, possibilites de developpement, programme d’etudes, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 147-161. 3555.  Koechlin, Bernard, 1995: Les Seychelles et l’ócean indien, Paris l’Hamarttan. 3556.  Kohler, Jean-Marie, 1985: Profil sociologique de l’église catholique de Wallis et Futuna (compte rendu de la mission effectuée du 9 au 24 octobre 1985): document de travail, sl: ORSTOM. 3557.  Kohler, Jean-Marie; Pillon, Patrick, 1985: Adapt the school or revise the social objective ? The question of appropriate education for melanesians in New Caledonia, Bundoora: Research centre for Southwest Pacific studies, La Trobe university, (3), 80 p. 3558.  Kohler, Jean-Marie; Pillon, Patrick; Wacquant, Loïc, 1985: “Jeunesse, ordre coutumier et identité canaque en Nouvelle Calédonie”, In: Jeunesse, développement et changements sociaux: année internationale de la Jeunesse, Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (2-3), p. 203-228. 3559.  Kohler, Jean-Marie; Pillon, Patrick; Wacquant, Loïc, 1985: Jeunesse canaque et coutume, Nouméa: Institut Culturel Mélanésien, ORSTOM, 71 p. (Sillon d’Ignames).

2009

CEHA

197

3560.  Kohler, Jean-Marie; Wacquant, Loïc, 1985: “La question scolaire en Nouvelle Calédonie: idéologies et sociologie”, In: Nouvelle-Calédonie: pour l’indépendance, Les Temps Modernes, (464), p. 1654-1685. 3561.  Kohlhoff, Dean, 1995: When the wind was a river: Aleut evacuation in World War II, Seattle: University of Washington Press in association with Aleutian, Pribilof Islands Association, Anchorage. 3562.  Kolig Erich, Hermann Mückler, (eds.), 2002: Politics of Indigeneity in the South Pacific, LIT Verlag, Hamburg . 3563.  Kolkolo, U. M., 1992: A review and assessment of seaweed species of present and potential value to Papua New Guinea, MSc thesis, Simon Fraser University. 3564.  Kolodny, E. et alii., 1996: “Chypre et la Crète: similitudes et contrastes d’évolution des deux îles principales de la Méditerranée orientale”, Travaux de la Maison de l’Orient méditerranéen, n°25, p. 29-52. 3565.  Kondakov, Georgi Ivanovitch, 1991: The Island of dread in the channel: the story of Georgi Ivanovitch Kondakov, edited with notes and illustrations by Brian Bonnard, Russian letters translated by Galina Chernakova, Stroud; Wolfeboro Falls, NH: A. Sutton. 3566.  Kono, H. et alii., 2000: Regional cohesion and competition in the age of globalization, Cheltenham, Edward Elgar publishing. 3567.  Konrad, Monica, 2005: Nameless relations: anonymity, Melanesia and reproductive gift exchange between British ova donors and recipients, New York: Berghahn Books. 3568.  Konstadakopulos, D., 1998: The Regionalisation of Innovation Policy in Southern Europe, in Contemporary Political Studies, A. Dobson and J. Stanyer (eds.). 3569.  Koo, J. O., [et al.], 1983: “Pulping and sheet forming test of mixed tropical hardwoods from Kapuluk forest in Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of the Technical Association of Pulp and Paper Industry of Korea 15(1): 3-9. 3570.  Koot, Christian J., 2007: ‘A “Dangerous Principle”: Free Trade Discourses in Barbados and the English Leeward Islands, 1650-1689’, Early American Studies: an interdisciplinary journal, 5:1, 132-63. 3571.  Koot, Christian J., 2007: ‘Constructing the Empire: English Governors, Imperial Policy, and Inter-imperial Trade in New York City and the Leeward Islands, 1650-1689’, Itinerario, 31:1, 35-60. 3572.  Koppel, Tom, 1995: Kanaka: the Untold Story of Hawaiian Pioneers in British Columbia    and the Pacific Northwest, Whitecap Books. 3573.  Kornfeld, Marcel and Alan J. Osborn, 2003: Islands on the Plains: ecological, social, and ritual use of landscapes, Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press. 3574.  Koroseta To’o, F., 2000: “Globalisation: impact on small islands state economies”, Indigenous affairs, n°1, p. 46-47. 3575.  Korotky, A. M., [et al.], 2000: “Middle-and late-Holocene environments and vegetation history of Kunashir Island, Kurile Islands, northwestern Pacific”, in The Holocene, vol. 10: pp. 311 - 331. 3576.  Korst, Mogens, 1987: Industrial life in Denmark: the Faroe Islands and Greenland: a survey of economic development and production, preface by Poul Schlüter Korst, Copenhagen: Foundation for International Understanding. 3577.  Korstanje, Maximiliano, 2008: Ideología y utopía. La idealización de las islas Malvinas en el pensamiento colectivo argentino, Gazeta de Antropología, Nº 24, pp. 24-09

2009

198

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3578.  Koten to Minzokugaku no Kai, 1981: Okinawa-ken Kudakajima no matsuri, Tōkyō: hatsubaimoto Hakuteisha, Shōwa 56. 3579.  Kottak, Conrad P., 1986: Madagascar: Society and History, Durham: Carolina Academic Press. 3580.  Koukkou, Helenē E., 1983: Historia tōn Heptanēsōn apo to 1797 mechri tēn Anglokratia, Athēna: Dēm. N. Papadēma. 3581.  Kousis, M., 2001: Tourism and the Environment in Corsica, Sardinia, Sicily and Crete. In: Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F. (eds), Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism Development: Practices, Management and Policies, London: Pinter, pp. 214-233. 3582.  Kovats-Bernat, J. Christopher, 2006: Sleeping Rough in Port-au-Prince: An Ethnography of Violence and Street Children in Haiti, University Press of Florida. 3583.  Krämer, Augustin, 1994: Samoa Inseln, translated by Theodore Verhaaren, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Pres. 3584.  Krämer, Augustin, 1994: The Samoa Islands: an outline of a monograph with particular consideration of German Samoa, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Pres. 3585.  Kramer, Augustin,  Theodore Verthaaren (Translator), 2000: The Samoan Islands:  an Outline of a Monograph with Particular Consideration of German Samoa: Constitution, Pedigrees and Traditions, University of Hawai’i Press. 3586.  Krauss, N. L. H., 1980: Bibliography of the Vitu or Witu Islands, New Guinea, Honolulu: The Author. 3587.  Kreiner, edited by Josef, 2006: Japaneseness versus Ryukyuanism: papers read at the Fourth International Conference on Okinawan Studies, Bonn Venue, March 2002, Bonn: Bier’sche Verlagsanstalt. 3588.  Kremezi, Aglaia, 2000: The foods of the Greek islands: cooking and culture at the crossroads of the Mediterranean, Boston, Mass.: Houghton Mifflin. 3589.  Krise, Thomas W., 1999: Caribbeana: an anthology of English literature of the West Indies, 1657-1777, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 3590.  Kristinsson, G.H., 2000: ‘From Home Rule to Sovereignty: The Case of Iceland’ in G. Baldacchino & D. Milne (eds.) Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 141-155. 3591.  Kritzler, Edward, 2008: Jewish pirates of the Caribbean: how a generation of swashbuckling Jews carved out an empire in the new world in their quest for treasure, religious freedom-and revenge, New York: Doubleday. 3592.  Krogstrup, Hanne; Barnholdt Lund, Yvonne, Færøernes erhvervspolitik, Aalborg: Aalborg Universitetsforlag. 3593.  Krüger, Gundolf, 1998: Tahiti and the Society Islands - an archipelago as seen in the light of European yearnings, In Hauser-Schäublin, Brigitta; Krüger, Gundolf (ed.), James Cook: gifts and treasures from the South Seas: Gaben und Schätze aus der Südsee, München and New York: Prestel, 141-71. 3594.  Krull, Kathleen, 1995: Bridges to change: how kids live on a South Carolina Sea Island, photographs by David Hautzig, New York: Lodestar Books. 3595.  Kuipers, J.C., 1993: The Society and Its Environment in Indonesia: a country study, W.H. Frederick and R.L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO

2009

CEHA

199

3596.  Kull, C. A., 2004: Isle of Fire: The Political Ecology of Landscaping Burning in Madagascar. 3597.  Kulturbüro, Katalanischen, 1992: Katalanische Ortsnamen: Führer des amtlichen Sprachgebrauchs auf den Balearen, in Katalonien und im Land València, herausgegeben vom; Herausgeber, Hans-Ingo Radatz, Axel Schönberger, Tilbert Dídac Stegmann. Frankfurt am Main: Domus Editoria Europaea. 3598.  Kurlansky, Mark, 1992: A continent of islands: searching for the Caribbean destiny, Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley Pub. Co.. 3599.  Kury. Lorelai; Brilhante, Lorelai, 2001: Histoire naturelle et voyages scientifiques, 17801830, Paris, France: L’Harmattan. 3600.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1981: Personal Names, In Dictionary of the Language of Rennell and Bellona, English to Rennellese and Bellonese, edited by S.H. Elbert, R. Kuschel, and T. Taupongi, Language and Culture of Rennell and Bellona Islands, Vol. III, Part 2. Copenhagen: The National Museum of Denmark. pp. 111-133. 3601.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1985: BlodhÊvn p Bellona Island, Nordisk Psykologi, 1:51-2. 3602.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1987: Twenty-Four Generations of Intergroup Conflicts on Bellona Island (Solomon Islands), In Ethnic Conflict. International Perspectives, edited by J. Boucher, D. Landis, and K. A. Clark, Newbury Park: Sage Publications. pp. 280-296. 3603.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1988: Vengeance is Their Reply: Blood Feuds and Homicides on Bellona Island. Part 1: Conditions Underlying Generations of Bloodshed. Language and Culture of Rennell and Bellona Islands, Vol. VII: Part 1. Copenhagen: Dansk Psykologisk Forlag. 3604.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1988a: ÿje for ¯je, Tand for Tand - og en Lavine af Mord, Humaniora nr. 1:28-30. 3605.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1990: Jante in Polynesia, In The Master Said: To Study and...edited by B. Arendrup, S.B. Heilesen, and J.ÿ. Petersen, East Asian Institute, East Asian Institute Occasional Papers 6, University of Copenhagen. pp. 116-126. 3606.  Kuschel, Rolf and Torben Monberg, 1990a: Bibliography of Rennell and Bellona Islands, Copenhagen, The University of Copenhagen, 1st. edition. 3607.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1991: Socialpsykologisk Skibbrud p en Polynesisk, In Vrede-Konflikt-Kultur, edited by P. Berliner, B. Karpatchof, and R. Kuschel, 2. Symposium om Kulturpsykologi, K¯benhavn, Dansk psykologisk Forlag. pp. 111-133. 3608.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1992: Women are Women and Men are Mení: How Bellonese Women get Even, In Of Mice and Women: Aspects of Female Aggression, edited by K. Bj–rkvist and P. Niemel”, Festschrift for Kersti Lagerspetz. San Diego, Academic Press, 1992:173-185. 3609.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1993: Gteskabelige Konfliktl¯sninger i et Polynesisk¯-samfund, Nordisk Psykologi, 45(4):274-294. 3610.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1993a: Killing Begets Killing: Homicides and Blood Feuds on a Polynesian Outlier, Bijdragen Tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde (Journal of the Royal Institute of Linguistics and Anthropology) 149(4):690-717. 3611.  Kuschel, Rolf, 1993b: The Bellonese Attitude Toward Nature, In The Invention of Nature, edited by T. Bargatzky and R. Kuschel, Frankfurt am Main, Peter Lang. Pp. 83-101. 3612.  Kuschel, Rolf, Torben Monberg and Torben Wolff, 2000: Bibliography of Rennell and Bellona Islands, Second Revised Edition, Copenhagen: Institute of Psychology, University of Copenhagen.    3613.  Kushner, Ervan F., 1984: Bogged down in Bora Bora: a history of the 198th Coast Artillery Regiment (Antiaircraft) on Bora Bora Island, 1942-1943, E.F. Kushner Books (Paterson,

2009

200

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

N.J.). 3614.  Kuziakina, Natalia 1995: Theatre in the Solovki prison camp, translated from the Russian by Boris M. Meerovich, Luxembourg; [Newark, N.J.], United States: Harwood Academic Publishers. 3615.  Kwa’ioloa, Michael, 1997: Living tradition: a changing life in Solomon Islands, London, Published for the Trustees of the British Museum by British Museum Press. 3616.  Kwapena, N., 1986: “Wildlife in Papua New Guinea: wildlife management by the people”, a case study presented at Session IIIC (Oceanian realm) during World National Parks Conference 13th October, 1982. Boroko, Papua New Guinea:, Division of Wildlife, Dept. of Environment & Conservation. 3617.  Kyrieleis, H., 1981: Führer durch das Heraion von Samos, Athen. 3618.  Kyselka, Will, 1987: An Ocean in Mind. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 3619.  La Brosse, Gaële de (textes réunis et présentés par), 2004: Îles funestes, îles bienheureuses, Paris: Transboréal, (Chemins d’étoiles, 12). 3620.  La Croix, Robert de, 2000: Mystères des îles, Saint Malo. 3621.  La Far, André de, 1966: Ces îles oubliées où s’écrivit l’histoire, Paris. 3622.  Labat, R.P. Jean-Baptiste, 2001: Voyage aux Caraïbes, Saint Malo. 3623.  Labouisse, Jean-Pierre, , 2004: Systèmes agraires et économie du cocotier au Vanuatu: historique et perspectives, Journal de la Société des océanistes, no 118, p. 11-33. 3624.  Lacoste, Y.; et all…, 1985: Ces Iles ou l’on Parle Francais, Herodote, no 37-38, p. p. 1-327. 3625.  Lacour, P.; Poher, A. (pref.), 1987: De l’Oceanie au Pacifique: histoire et enjeux, Paris: France Empire. 3626.  Ladefoged, T. N., 1993: Evolutionary Process in an Oceanic Chiefdom: Intergroup Aggression and Political Integration in Traditional Rotuman Society, Ph. D. Thesis, University of Hawai’i. 3627.  Laenui, P., 1997: Repression and renaissance in Hawaii, in D. Denoon, ed, The Cambridge History of the Pacific islanders, CUP, 403-7. 3628.  LaFrance, David G. and Errol D. Jones, eds., 1992: Latin American Military History: An Annotated Bibliography, Military History Bibliographies, vol. 12. New York: Garland Publishing. 3629.  LaFranchi, Christopher, and Greenpeace Pacific, 1999: Islands Adrift? Comparing Industrial and Small-Scale Economic Options for Marovo Lagoon Region of the Solomon Islands. Suva:Greenpeace Pacific. 3630.  Lajić, Ivan, 1992: Stanovništvo dalmatinskih otoka: povijesne i suvremene značajke depopulacije, Zagreb: Consilium: Institut za migracije i narodnosti Sveučilišta u Zagrebu. 3631.  Lal, Brij V. 1985: Veil of dishonour: sexual jealousy and suicide on Fiji plantations, JPH, vol. 20(3), 135-155. 3632.  Lal, Brij V., 1988: Power and prejudice: the making of the Fiji crisis, Wellington. 3633.  Lal, Brij v. 1997: Towards a United Future: Report of the Fiji Constitution, The Journal of Pacific History, 31, p. 80. 3634.  Lal, Brij V. ed. 1992: Pacific Islands History: journeys and transformations, Canberra. 3635.  Lal, Brij V., 1992a: Broken waves: a history of the Fiji Islands in the twentieth century,

2009

CEHA

201

Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 3636.  Lal, B., 2000: Fiji before the storm. Sydney, Asia Pacific Press. 3637.  Lal, Brij V.; Fortune, Kate edited by. 2000: The Pacific Islands: An Encyclopedia, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3638.  Lal, edited by Brij V., 2004: Pacific places, Pacific histories: essays in honor of Robert C. Kiste, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3639.  Lal, Brij V., 2008: A Time Bomb Lies Buried: Fiji’s Road to Independence, 1960-1970, Australian National university- Epress, SSGM Monograph, No. 1. 3640.  Lalanda, Maria Margarida de Sá Nogueira, «O Mar na Organização das Populações Açorianas nos Séculos XV a XVII», pp. 415-430. Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 3641.  Lamb, J. et al, 2001: Exploration and Exchange: a south seas anthology 1680-1900, Chicago, University of Chicago Press. 3642.  Lambek, Michael, 1981: Human spirits: a cultural account of trance in Mayotte Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. 3643.  Lambek, Michael; Strathern, Andrew, ed. 1998: Bodies and persons: comparative perspectives from Africa and Melanesia, Cambridge, U.K.; New York, NY: Cambridge University Press. 3644.  Lambourdière, sous la direction de Eric, 2007: Les Caraïbes dans la géopolitique mondiale, Collection: Carrefours, Paris, Ellipses. 3645.  Lamont, E.H. 1994: Wild life among the Pacific islanders, Rarotonga; Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 3646.  Lamour, P., 1997: Corruption and governance in the South Pacific, Pacific Studies, Vol 20, 3, pp.1-18. 3647.  Lamusse, R.; Dommen, E. (ed.), 1980: Islands, In Labour policy in the plantation islands, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon. 3648.  Lancioni, T., 1991: Viaggio tra gli Isolari, Milan, Edizioni Rovello, Almanacco del Bibliofilo. 3649.  Landell, Mills, 1991: Smallholder oil palm productivity study, ADB TA No.790-PNG, Bath, United Kingdom, Landell Mills/Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 3650.  Landgridge, Marta, trans. 1988: Von den Steinem’s Marquesan Myths, Canberra, Australia: Target Oceania/The Journal of Pacific History, 1988. 3651.  Landowne, Youme, 2004: Selavi, That is Life: A Haitian Story of Hope, El Paso, TX: Cinco Puntos Press. 3652.  Lane, Andrew, 2000: Royal Marines Commandos in the Falklands War. Tiverton: Halsgrove in association with the Royal Marines Museum. 3653.  Lane, Dorothy Freda, 1995: The island as site of resistance: an examination of Caribbean and New Zealand texts, Paris: P. Lang, cop. 3654.  Lane, J. E. and J. Engberg, 1980: Internationalisering och autonomi, in Statsvetenskaplig tidskrift, 4, pp. 207-215. 3655.  Laney, Rheyna M., 2002: Disaggregating Induced Intensification for Land-Change Analysis: A Case Study from Madagascar, Annals of the Association of American Geographers,

2009

202

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Volume 92, Number 4, December, pp. 702-726(25) 3656.  Langdon, Robert edited by. 1984: Where the whalers went: an index to the Pacific ports and islands visited by American whalers (and some other ships) in the 19th century, Canberra: Pacific Manuscripts Bureau, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. 3657.  Langdon, R., 1992: Sixteenth century Spanish castaways in the Caroline and Marshall Islands, in Rubinstein, D. (ed) Pacific History; Papers from the 8th PHA conference, Guam PHA/MARC pp.7-16. 3658.  Lange, David, 1990: Nuclear Free: The New Zealand Way, New Zealand: Penguin Books. 3659.  Lange, Elsbeth, 1986: Die Landschaftsgeschichte der Insel Rügen seit dem Spätglazial, Akademie-Verlag. 3660.  Lange, Michael A., 2007: The Norwegian Scots: an anthropological interpretation of VikingScottish identity in the Orkney Islands; with a foreword by Barbara E. Crawford. Lewiston (NY); Lampeter: Edwin Mellen Press. 3661.  Langley, Lester D. 1989: The United States and the Caribbean in the Twentieth Century. London: University of Georgia Press. 3662.  Langmore, Diane, 1989: Missionary lives: Papua, 1874-1914, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 3663.  LANIC, Academic Journals, Disponível online em url: http://lanic.utexas.edu/la/region/ journals/. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009. 3664.  Lape, Peter V., 2003: A Highway and a Crossroads: Island Southeast Asia and Culture Contact Archaeology, Archaeology in Oceania, Vol. 38. 3665.  Lape, Peter V., 2002: On the Use of Archaeology and History in Island Southeast Asia, Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient, Vol. 45, No. 4, Excavating the Relations between Archaeology and History in the Study of Pre-Modern Asia [Part 1], pp. 468-491. 3666.  Lapian, Adrian B., 2003: Laut Sulawesi: The Celebes Sea, from Center to Peripheries, Moussons, juillet, no 7, p. 3-16. 3667.  Lapidoth, R., 1997: Autonomy: Flexible Solutions to Ethnic Conflicts, Washington, DC: United States Institute of Peace Press. 3668.  Lapouge, Gilles, 2002: Pirates, boucaniers, flibustier, Paris: Éd.du Chêne. 3669.  Laracy, H., 1994: World War 11, in Howe KR, Kiste RC and Lal BV, eds, Tides of history, Allen and Unwin, 149-69. 3670.  Laracy, Hugh, 2000: ‘Saint-making: the case of Pierre Chanel of Futuna’, New Zealand Journal of History, 34:1, 145-61. 3671.  Larmour, P., 1990: Ethnicity and decentralisation in Melanesia: a review of the 1980s, In: Ethnic nationalism, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. vol. 31, no 2, p. p. 10-27. 3672.  Larmour, Peter, 2005: Foreign flowers: institutional transfer and good governance in the Pacific Islands, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3673.  Larn, Richard; Larn, Bridget, 1995: Shipwreck index of the British Isles, London: Lloyd’s Register of Shipping. 3674.  Larner, W.; Walters, W., 2002: “The political rationality of “new regionalism”: Toward a genealogy of the region”, Theory and society, n°33, p. 391-433.

2009

CEHA

203

3675.  Laroche, Maximilien, 2002: La littérature haïtienne: identité, langue, réalité, Port-au-Prince. 3676.  Larsen, A. C., Stummann Hansen S, 2001: Viking Ireland and the Scandinavian communities in the North Atlantic; in: Larsen AC (ed): The Vikings in Ireland. Roskilde: The Viking Ship Museum. 3677.  Larsen, Curtis E., 1983: Life and land use on the Bahrain Islands: the geoarcheology of an ancient society, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 3678.  Larsen, Lief Calundann, 1986: The Danish colonization of St. John, 1718-1733, St. Thomas: Virgin Islands Resource Management Cooperative. 3679.  Larson, Pier, 2000: History and Memory in the Age of Enslavement. Becoming Merina in Highland Madagascar, 1770–1822, Oxford: James Currey, Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann; and Cape Town: David Philip. 3680.  Larson, Pier Martin, 2009: Ocean of letters: language and creolization in an Indian Ocean diaspora, Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press. 3681.  Lasaqa, I. Q., 1984: The Fijian people before and after independence, Australian National University Press. 3682.  Lasserre, G., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Economies et societes de plantation en milieu insulaire tropical, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 119-125. 3683.  Lasserre, G., 1987: Conférence d’ouverture du colloque « Le géographe et les îles » in Iles tropicales: insularité, ‘insularisme’, Actes du colloque organisé à Bordeaux-Talence du 23 au 25 Octobre 1986, Collection Iles et Archipels. n°8. Bordeaux, CRET-CEGET. 3684.  Lassithiotakis, Michel, 2004 : L’Isola di Candia, piu d’ogn’altra lontana: aspects matériels et culturels de l’insularité en Crète à la fin de la période vénitienne (1570 env. – 1669, Paris: Maisonneuve et Larose; [Istanbul]: Institut français d’études anatoliennes. 3685.  Latapi, Escobar, A., 1997: Emigration Dynamics in Mexico, Central America and the Caribbean. Discussion paper, Costa Rica, International Organisation for Migration. 3686.  Latawski, Paul Chester, 2005: ‘Invoking Munich, expiating Suez: British leadership, historical analogy and the Falklands Crisis’, In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London ; New York: Cass, 226-38 3687.  Latham, L., 1982: The French in New Caledonia, in R.J. May & H. Nelson (eds.), Melanesia beyond diversity, vol. 1, Canberra. 3688.  Latham, M.; Brookfield, H.C., 1983: Iles Fidji orientales: étude du milieu naturel, de son utilisation et de son évolution sous l’influence humaine, Paris: ORSTOM. 3689.  Latham, M.; Brookfield, H.C., 1983a: The Eastern islands of Fiji: a study of the natural environment, its use, and man’s influence on its evolution, Paris: ORSTOM. 3690.  Latimer, H., 1985: Developing - island economies - tourism v agriculture, Tourism Management, 6(1), pp.32-42. 3691.  Latorre, Octavio, 1991: Manuel J. Cobos emperador de Galápagos, Quito, Ecuador: Fundación Charles Darwin para las Islas Galápagos. 3692.  Latorre, Octavio, 1992: La maldición de la Tortuga: historias trágicas de las Islas Galápagos, Quito: [s.n.], (Quito, Ecuador: Artes Gráficas Señal Impreseñal). 3693.  Latorre, Octavio, 1999: El hombre en las Islas Encantadas: la historia humana de Galápagos, Quito,[O. Latorre].

2009

204

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3694.  Lätsch, Frauke, 2005: Insularität und Gesellschaft in der Antike: Untersuchungen zur Auswirkung der Insellage auf die Gesellschaftsentwicklung, Stuttgart: Steiner. 3695.  Lattas, Andrew, 1989: Trickery and sacrifice: Tambarans and the appropriation of female reproductive powers in male initiation ceremonies in West New Britain, Man, 24(3):451469. 3696.  Lattas, Andrew, 1990: Poetics of space and sexual economies of power: gender and the politics of male identity in West New Britain, Ethos, 18(1):71-102. 3697.  Lattas, Andrew, 1991: Sexuality and cargo cults: the politics of gender and procreation in West New Britain, Cultural Anthropology, 6(2):230-256. 3698.  Lattas, Andrew, 1992: Hysteria, anthropological disclosure and the concept of the unconscious: Cargo cults and the scientisation of race and colonial power, Oceania, 63 (1): 1-14. 3699.  Lattas, Andrew, 1992a: The punishment of masks: Cargo cults and ideologies of representation in West New Britain, Canberra Anthropology, 15(2): 69-88. 3700.  Lattas, Andrew, 1992b: Skin, personhood and redemption: the doubled self in West New Britain cargo cults, Oceania, 63(1):27-54. 3701.  Lattas, Andrew, 1993: Gifts, commodities and the problem of alienation, Social Analysis (Adelaide), 34:102-118. 3702.  Lattas, Andrew, 1993a: Sorcery and colonialism: illness, dreams and death as political languages in West New Britain, Man (NS), 28(1): 51-77. 3703.  Lattas, Andrew, 1996. Memory, forgetting and the New Tribes Mission in West New Britain, Oceania, 66 (4): 286-304. 3704.  Lattas, Andrew, 1998: Cultures of Secrecy: Reinventing Race in Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults, University of Wisconsin Press. 3705.  Lattas, Andrew, 1999: “Neither cargo nor cult ...”, Anthropological Forum, 9/1: 107-112. 3706.  Lattas, Andrew, 2001: The underground life of capitalism. Space, persons, and money in Bali (West New Britain), In A. Rumsey and J. Weiner (eds.), Emplaced Myth, Space, Narrative and Knowledge in Aboriginal Australia and Papua New Guinea, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, Pp. 161-270. 3707.  Lattas, Andrew, 2005: ‘Capitalizing on Complicity: Cargo Cults and the Spirit of Modernity on Bali Island (West New Britain)’, Ethnohistory, 52 (1): 47-80. 3708.  Lattas, Andrew, 2006: ‘The utopian promise of government’, Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute (NS), 12 (1): 129-150. 3709.  Latukefu, S., 1992: Papua New Guinea; a century of colonial impact, Port Moresby, UPNG Press. 3710.  Lau Thi Keng, J-C., 1991: Inter-ethnicité et politique à l’île Maurice, Paris, L’Harmattan. 3711.  Lavery, Jason, 2006: The History of Finland (The Greenwood Histories of the Modern Nations), Greenwood Press. 3712.  Lavondes, Anne, 1990: Un modele d’identite: le tatouage aux iles de la Societe (Polynesie francaise), ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, cahiers des sciences humaines, Paris, France, 1990, vol. vol. 26, no 4, p. p. 605-621. 3713.  Lawaetz, Erik J., 1998: Emancipation: the Virgin Islands of the United States celebrates its 150 year anniversary 1848. July 3, [Herning, Denmark], Edition Poul Kristensen.

2009

CEHA

205

3714.  Lawaetz, Eva, 1980: Black education in the Danish West Indies from 1732 to 1853: the pioneering efforts of the Moravian Brethren, St. Croix, U.S. V.I.: Published under the auspices of the American Revolution Bicentennial Commission of the Virgin Islands by St. Croix Friends of Denmark Society. 3715.  Lawson, Stephanie, 1996: Tradition versus democracy in the South Pacific, Fiji, Tonga, and Western Samoa, Cambridge University Press. 3716.  Lawton, Ralph; Ezard, Janet edited, 1993: Topics in the description of Kiriwina, Canberra: Dept. of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. 3717.  Layman, C. H.; Cameron, Jane, 1995: The Falklands and the Dwarf: the cruise of H.M.S. Dwarf in the Falkland Islands, 1881-1882, Chippenham: Picton. 3718.  Lazell, James D. 2005: Island: fact and theory in nature, Berkeley: University of California Press. 3719.  Le Bouëdec, Gérard, François Ploux, Christophe Cérino et Aliette Geistdoerfer (dir.), 2004: Entre terre et mer: sociétés littorales et pluriactivités (XVe-XXe siècle), Rennes. 3720.  Le Bourdiec, F.; Le Bourdiec, P., 1987: Problemes socio-economiques de la facade Orientale Africaine et des Iles du Sud-Ouest de l’Ocean Indien, Annales de geographie, no 533, p. p. 1-32. 3721.  Le Bras, M.; Dupont, A.; Bouchez, P.; Soopramanien, A., 1983: Les Iles et les grandes Endemies Tropicales (conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no 12, p. p. 83-85. 3722.  Le Bras, M.; Dupont, A.; Bouchez, P.; Soopramanien, A., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Les iles et les grandes endemies tropicales, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, 1984/00. p. 125-128. 3723.  Le Galès, P.; Lequesne, C. (dir.), 1997: Les paradoxes des régions en Europe, Paris, La Découverte. 3724.  Le Guat, François, 1995: Les naufragés de Dieu: aventures d’un protestant et de ses compagnons exilés en deux îles désertes de l’océan Indien, 1690-1698, Paris: Phébus. 3725.  Le Guat, François, 1995: Voyage et aventures de François Leguat et de ses compagnons en deux îles désertes des Indes orientales (1690-1698), introduction et notes de JeanMichel Racault. Suivi de Recueil de quelques mémoires servant d’instruction pour l’établissement de l’île d’Eden, par Henri Duquesne (1689), introduction et notes de Paolo Carile, Paris: Editions de Paris: Diffusion Harmonia Mundi. 3726.  Le Guillou, Philippe, 1999, Îles, Terre de brume. 3727.  Le Lannou, M., 1941: Pâtres et paysans de la Sardaigne, Tours, Arrault et Cie. 3728.  Le Pourhiet-Salat, Nicole, 1983: La Défense des îles bretonnes de l’Atlantique, des origines à 1860, Vincennes: Service historique de la Marine. 3729.  Le Quesne, W. J., 1995?: The Le Quesnes of Jersey, Jersey: Channel Islands Family History Society. 3730.  Le Quesne, Walter J., 1991: The de Gruchys of Jersey: including their history from Norman times and comprehensive trees from the fourteenth century to 1881, St. Helier, Jersey, Channel Islands: Channel Islands Family History Society. 3731.  Leach, Henry, Sir, 2005: ‘Crisis management and the assembly of the Task Force’ [Falklands Conflict]. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on : lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5) (London ; New York: Cass), 64-74.

2009

206

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3732.  Leal, João, 1997: Açorianidade: literatura, política, etnografia (1880-1940), Celta Editora. 3733.  Lean, G. A., 1991: Counting systems of Papua New Guinea: Volume 4. The New Britain provinces. Lae, Papua New Guinea, Department of Mathematics and Statistics, Papua New Guinea University of Technology. 3734.  Leary, edited by Paul M.,1981: Proceedings / Conference on Recent Developments in United States-Offshore Areas Relations at the College of the Virgin Islands, St. Thomas Campus, U.S. Virgin Islands, March 27 and 28, 1981. Conference on Recent Developments in United States-Offshore Areas Relations (College of the Virgin Islands) [St. Thomas, V.I.]: College of the Virgin Islands. 3735.  Leary, Paul M. edited by, 1992: Major political & constitutional documents of the United States Virgin Islands, 1671-1991, St. Thomas, VI: University of the Virgin Islands. 3736.  Leary, Paul M. St, 1988: Taking bearings: the United States Virgin Islands, 1917-1987, United States Virgin Islands: Bureau of Public Administration, University of the Virgin Islands. 3737.  Lebarbenchon, Roger Jean, 1988: La grève de Lecq: Guernesey et Jersey,Cherbourg [France]: Isoète. 3738.  Lebigre, J.-M. (dir.), 1997.- Milieux et sociétés dans le Sud-Ouest de Madagascar. Talence, CRET et DyMSET, Collection «Iles et archipels» n° 23. 3739.  Lebigre, J.-M., 1999: Les marais à mangroves : les enjeux de la domestication d’un écosystème tropical. In “Littoral, frontières marines”, Hérodote, 93 : 42-65. 3740.  Lebigre, Jean-Michel (dir.); Decoudras, Pierre-Marie (dir.); Grenier, Christophe (dir.), 2001: Colloque «aires protégées» insulaires et littorales tropicales: Gestion, enjeux, perspectives, comparaisons. Nouméa (Nouvelle-Calédonie), Salle de Conférences du Secrétariat de la Commission du Pacifique, Anse Vata. 30-31 octobre. 3741.  Lebigre, Jean-Michel, Guilène Réaud-Thomas, 2001: Androka (extrême sud de Madagascar), Cartes d’évolution des milieux, Iles et archipels n° 30, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 3742.  Lebigre, J.-M., 2003: L’obó de São Tomé (République de São Tomé e Príncipe): un exemple d’hinterland forestier insulaire, Les Cahiers d’Outre-mer, 224 : 379-400. Disponível online em url:http://com.revues.org/index729.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3743.  Lebigre, J.-M., Portillo, P. & Thompson, W., 2003: Quel avenir pour les mangroves de l’archipel de la Bahía (Honduras) ? In: Hequette, A. (resp. sc.) : Actes du Colloque « Espace littoraux en mutation » Commission de Géographie de la Mer et des Littoraux Dunkerque (1e, 2 et 3 juin 2000), Université du Littoral, Côte d’Opale, 63-71. 3744.  Lebigre, J.-M. & Decoudras, P.M. (dir.), 2004: Les aires protégées insulaires et littorales tropicales, Bordeaux, Université Michel de Montaigne, CRET, Coll. Iles et Archipels, 33. 3745.  Lebigre, J.-M., 2004: Les marais à mangrove de Nouvelle-Calédonie, un exemple de milieu « naturel » lagonaire, Nouméa, Centre de Documentation Pédagogique, Scérén, Sce 44. 3746.  Lebigre, J.-M., d’Aquino, P., 2004: La Géographie au service du développement et de l’environnement ? Bilan de 50 ans de Géographie francophone en Océanie, Assises de la Recherche Française dans le Pacifique (24 - 27 août 2004) Nouméa. 3747.  Lebigre, J.-M., 2005: Les îles basses océaniennes face à l’élévation du niveau marin. In : Fillol, V. & Vernaudon, J. - Stéréotypes et représentations en Océanie. Actes du 17e Colloque Corail (1-3 décembre 2004), Nouméa, 341-357. 3748.  Lebigre, J.M., 2006: Les maquis miniers calédoniens: caractères, fonctions et conservation.

2009

CEHA

207

In: J.L. Klein et F. Lasserre, Le Monde dans tous ses Etats, Québec, Presses de l’Université du Québec, 452-455. 3749.  Lebigre, J.M., Dumas, P., Lefebvre, J.P., Munzinger, J., 2006: The mangrove swamps of New Caledonia : a wide diversity. Poster n°12. Les marais à mangrove de NouvelleCalédonie : une grande diversité. In : Forum Biodiversité des Ecosystèmes coralliens. Nouméa, IRD et CPS, Nouvelle-Calédonie, 30-octobre-4 novembre 2006, Livre des Résumés: 100-101. 3750.  Lebigre, Jean-Michel, 2004: Le “Coeur de Voh” (Nouvelle-Calédonie): Photo-interprétations d’une forme végétale dynamique, In Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.). Insularité, société et développement, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 109-112. 3751.  LeBlanc, Yves, 1980: Les îles de la Madeleine face à leur destin, [Montréal]: Leméac. 3752.  Leblic, Isabelle, 2008: Vivre de la mer, vivre avec la terre…en pays kanak. Savoirs et techniques des pêcheurs kanak du sud de la Nouvelle-Calédonie, Paris, Société des Océanistes, Travaux et documentsocéanistes. 3753.  Leblond, Jean-Baptiste, 2000: Voyage aux Antilles: d’île en île, de la Martinique à Trinidad (1767-1773), Paris: Editions Karthala. 3754.  Leckie, Jacqueline, 2006: Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, Pacific Affairs, Vol. 79. 3755.  Lecoq, 1997: “Îles du dedans, îles du dehors. Les îles médiévales entre le réel et l’imaginaire (VIIe-XIIIe siècle)”, dans Les îles, du mythe à la réalité, M. Pelletier, (éd.), Paris, p. 17-51 3756.  Lecoq, 1998: “L’île aux confins des mondes dans les mappemondes médiévales”, dans Île des merveilles. Mirage, miroir, mythe, D. Reig et G. Chandes (éd.), Paris. 3757.  Lee, Georgia, 1992: The Rock Art of Easter Island. Symbols of Power, Prayers to the Gods, Los Angeles: The Institute of Archaeology Publications (UCLA). 3758.  Lee, Helen H., 1996-2009: Tonga Bibliographies, The World-Wide Web Virtual Library. Disponível online em url:  http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_tonga1.html //  http:// coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_tonga2.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 3759.  Lee, Jacques, 2005: Mauritius: Its Creole Language - The Ultimate Creole Phrase Book and Dictionary, Paperback (August 15), Publisher: Nautilus. 3760.  Lee, Joann Faung Jean, 1991: Asian American experiences in the United States: oral histories of first to fourth generation Americans from China, the Philippines, Japan, India, the Pacific islands, Vietnam, and Cambodia, Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland. 3761.  Lee, Joann Faung Jean compiled. 1992: Asian Americans: oral histories of first to fourth generation Americans from China, the Philippines, Japan, India, the Pacific islands, Vietnam and Cambodia, New York: New Press: Distributed by Norton. 3762.  Leenhardt, Maurice, 1985: Do kamo: la personne et le mythe dans le monde mélanésien, préface de Maria Isaura Pereira de Queiroz, [Paris]: Gallimard. 3763.  Leenhardt, Raymond Henri, 1980: Au vent de la Grande Terre. Histoire des Iles Loyalty de 1840 a 1895, Paris: S.N.. 3764.  Lefevre, Daniel, 1986: L’organisation De L’espace A Maurice Et A La Reunion : Etude De Geographie Comparee; Sous La Direction De Francoise Le Bourdiec, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Doctorat D’etat: Géographie: Nice. 3765.  Lefroy, compiled from the colonial records and other original sources by J.H., 1981: Memorials of the discovery and early settlement of the Bermudas or Somers Islands, 1515-1685 [i.e. 1511-1687], [Hamilton]: Bermuda Historical Society: Bermuda National

2009

208

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Trust. 3766.  Leitch, Wright J.; Merrell,James, 1999: The Only Land They Knew: American Indians, U of Nebraska Press. 3767.  Leite, Ana Mafalda 2000: Os Temas do Mar em Algumas Narrativas Africanas de Língua Portuguesa, in Insularidades e Viagem La Lusophonie: Voix Oceaniques, Org. Anne Quataert e Maria Fernanda Afonso, Lidel, 251-256. 3768.  Lelièvre, Olivier, 1992: Mentawaï, la forêt des esprits, Xonrupt-Longemer, Anako éditions; Paris: Editions Peuples du monde. 3769.  Lemonnier, Pierre, 1990: Guerres et festins: paix, échanges et compétition dans les Highlands de Nouvelle-Guinée, avant-propos, Maurice Godelier, Paris: Editions de la Maison des sciences de l’homme. 3770.  Len, Bell, 1999: Augustus Earle’s The meeting of the artists …., In Calder A, Lamb J and Orr B, eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, Honolulu, UH Press, pp. 241-64. 3771.  Len, Bell, 1999: Looking at Goldie; face to face with ‘All ’e Same T’e Pakeha, in N. Thomas and D. Losche, eds, Double Vision, Cambridge, CUP, pp.163-192. 3772.  Lenfestey, Gillian, 2005 for 2004: ‘Nineteenth century sunbonnets in the Channel Islands’, Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 25:4, 689-98. 3773.  Lenfestey, Hugh, 2005 for 2004: ‘Homage and suit-of-court in the Channel Islands denoting allegiance to the English Crown’, Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 25:4, 674-88. 3774.  Leng, A. S. 1992. A review of methods for maintaining soil fertility in Papua New Guinea, M. P. Levett, J. Earland and P. Heywood, Eds., Proceedings of the First Papua New Guinea Food and Nutrition Conference: Changes in Food and Nutrition in Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press and Department of Agriculture and Livestock, pp. 54-69. 3775.  Lentfer, C., 1995: Ethnobotanical research in West New Britain and the Forestry Research Institute Herbarium, Lae, PNG. June-July 1995, Report submitted to West New Britain Provincial Government. Faculty of Resource Science and Management, Southern Cross University, Lismore NSW. 3776.  Lentfer, C.; M. Therin and R. Torrence 2002: Starch Grains and Environmental Reconstruction: a Modern Test Case from West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Journal of Archaeological Science, 29(7): 687-698. 3777.  Leopoldie, M.A., 1986: Etude bibliographique de l’evolution de l’agriculture commerciale dans quelques iles antillaises: Martinique, Porto-Rico, Haiti, Trinidad et Tobago, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Institut de Geographie, (these). 3778.  Lepelley, René, 1999: Noms de lieux de Normandie et des îles anglo-normandes, Paris, Bonneton. 3779.  Lepthien, Emilie U., 1986: The Philippines, Chicago, Childrens Press. 3780.  Lerat, S., 1983: L’exploitation miniere dans les Iles du Monde Intertropical, (conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no 12, p. p. 61-62. 3781.  Lerat, S., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In L’exploitation miniere dans les iles du monde intertropical, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, 1984/00. p. 145-146.

2009

CEHA

209

3782.  Lerat, sous la direction de Christian, 2008: Élites et intelligentsias dans le monde caraïbe, Paris: L’Harmattan. 3783.  Lesley, J., L. A. Manning and G. D. Ogle, 2001: “A survey of diabetes services in hospitals in Papua New Guinea”, Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 44(3-4): 88-95. 3784.  Lesourd, M., 1986: Permanence de la secheresse aux Iles du Cap Vert: l’amenagement rural ou la lutte contre l’irreversible, In: Etudes saheliennes, cahiers geographiques de rouen, no No special, p. p. 109-128. 3785.  Lesourd, M., 1996: Etat et societe aux iles du Cap Vert. Alternatives pour un petit Etat insulaire, Paris: Karthala. 3786.  Lessa, William Armand, 1980: More tales from Ulithi Atol: a content analysis Berkley: University of California Press. 3787.  Lessard, G., 2000: “Les économies de petite taille et la zone de libre-échange dans les Amériques”, Cahier de recherché, 00-05, Montréal, Groupe de recherche sur l’intégration régionale. 3788.  Lestrade, S., 1987: “Les problèmes économiques des petits Etats insulaires d’après l’exemple des Caraïbes”, Le Courrier ACP-UE, n° 104, p. 78-84. 3789.  Lestringant, Frank, 2002: Le livre des îles: atlas et récits insulaires de la Genèse à Jules Verne, Genève: Droz. 3790.  Lestringant, Frank, 2006: La littérature en archipel ou le retour de l’Insulaire: Saint-Exupéry, Michaux, Calvino, French Cultural Studies, Oct; vol. 17: pp. 303 – 317. 3791.  Létoublon F. (dir.), 1996: Impressions d’îles, Toulouse: Presses universitaires du Mirail. 3792.  Leventis, Yiorghos, 2002: Cyprus: The Struggle for Self-Determination in the 1940s, Peter Lang. 3793.  Leventis, Yiorghos, Murata Sawayanagi Nanako, Hazama Yasushi, 2008: Crossing Over Cyprus. Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, (ILCAA) Tokyo University of Foreign Studies (TUFS). 3794.  Levitt, Ian, 2000: ‘”Taking a gamble”: the Scottish Office, Whitehall and the Highlands and Islands Development Board, 1965-67’, Northern Scotland, 20, 87-112 3795.  Levitt, Ian, 2001: ‘The Scottish Emergencies Organisation, the Scottish Islands and the Seamen’s strike, 1966’, Scottish Archives, 7, 45-58 3796.  Levratto, Nadine, 2001 : Economie de la Corse: y a-t-il une vie après la rente ?, Albiana. l’Harmattan. Levy, Andrea, 2004: Small Island, New York: Picador. 3797.  Lewis, (J.), 1990: «The Vulnerability of Small Island States to Sea Level Rise: The Need for Holistic Strategies», Disasters, 14(3), p. 241-248. 3798.  Lewis, A. B., (1910) 1988: New Britain notebook, The Field Museum of Natural History Bulletin, 59(8):6-28. 3799.  Lewis, D., 1981: Some perspectives on natural disaster vulnerability in Tonga, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. vol. 22, no 2, p. p. 145-162. 3800.  Lewis, D., 1994: We, the Navigators: The Ancient Art of Landfinding in the Pacific, Second Edition, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. 3801.  Lewis, D., 1996: The plantation dream; developing British New Guinea and Papua 18841942, Canberra, ANU.

2009

210

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3802.  Lewis, Gordon K., 2004: The growth of the modern West Indies, Kingston, Jamaica; Miami: Ian Randle. 3803.  Lewis, Patsy, 2002: Surviving small size: regional integration in Caribbean ministates, Kingston, Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press. 3804.  Lewis, Shireen K., 2006: Race, culture, and identity: francophone West African and Caribbean literature and theory from négritude to créolité, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books. 3805.  Lewis, Winston B., 1994: Battle of Savo Island, The battles of Savo Island, 9 August 1942 and the eastern Solomons, 23-25 August 1942, Washington [D.C.]: Naval Historical Center, Department of the Navy. 3806.  Lewis-Hughes, J. H., 1992: Whales! Launch the boats!: the story of Norfolk Island whaling and the American connection, Killara, N.S.W.: [J.H. Lewis-Hughes?. 3807.  Lezcano, Víctor Morales coordinación e introducción. 1993: III Aula Canarias y el Noroeste de Africa (1988), Aula Canarias y el Noroeste de Africa (3rd: 1988: Las Palmas, Canary Islands), Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 3808.  Liconln, David, 2006: Beyond the Plantation: Mauritius in the Global Division of Labour, The Journal of Modern African Studies, 44:1:59-78, Cambridge University Press. 3809.  Lidegaard, M., 2001: Grönlands historia, Stockholm: Boviggen. 3810.  Liedtke, Wolfgang, 1999: Samoa 1880 - 1914: bibliographie deutschsprachiger kolonialer Literatur zu Quellen der Ethnographie und Geschichte, annotiert, Dresden: Staatliches Museum für Völkerkunde Dresden, Forschungsstelle. 3811.  Liennard, Alain, 2003: Analyse de la durabilité socio-économique d»un processus de développement insulaire, la Nouvelle-Calédonie; sous la dir. de Michel Garrabé, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de Montpellier I. Université de soutenance 3812.  Ligabue, Giancarlo, un’idea di, 1995: La terra dei Moai: dalla Polinesia all’Isola di Pasqua, a cura di Giuseppe Orefici, Venezia: Erizzo Editrice, 1995. 3813.  Ligges, Wulf, Klaus Viedebantt, 1985: Inseln und Halligen Nordfrieslands: Amrum, Föhr, die Halligen, Nordstrand, Pellworm, Sylt, Köln: DuMont. 3814.  Liliu’okalani, 1898, 1991: Hawai’i’s Story by Hawai’i’s Queen, Charles E. Tuttle, (reissue). 3815.  Lillard, Charles, [edited by], 1989: The Ghostland people: a documentary history of the Queen Charlotte Islands, 1859-1906, Victoria, B.C.: Sono Nis Press. 3816.  Lillard, Charles, 1995: Just east of sundown: the Queen Charlotte Islands Victoria, B.C.: Horsdal & Schubart. 3817.  Lilley, Ian, 1987: Prehistoric exchange in the Vitiaz Strait, Papua New Guinea, PhD thesis, Australian National University, Canberra. 3818.  Lilley, Ian, 1988: Prehistoric exchange across the Vitiaz Strait, Current Anthropology, 29: 513-516. 3819.  Lilley, Ian, 1988: Type X: Description and discussion of a prehistoric ceramic ware from northeastern Papua New Guinea, Bulletin of the Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association, 8:90-100. 3820.  Lilley, Ian, 1990: Final report: Prehistoric settlement and trade in northwest New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Department of Archaeology, University of Western Australia. 3821.  Lilley, Ian, 1991: Lapita and Post-Lapita developments in the Vitiaz Straits-West New Britain Area. P. S. Bellwood, Ed., Indo-Pacific Prehistory 1990, Canberra and Jakarta, Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association and Asosiasi Prehistorisis Indonesia, pp. 313-322.

2009

CEHA

211

3822.  Lilley, Ian, 2000: Jim Allen and the archaeology of coastal Papua New Guinea, in: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds., Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 249-267. 3823.  Lilley, Ian, 2000: Migration and ethnicity in the evolution of Lapita and post-Lapita maritime societies in northwest Melanesia, In: S. O’Connor and P. Veth, Eds., East of Wallace’s Line: studies of past and present maritime cultures of the Indo-Pacific region, Rotterdam; Brookfield, VT, A.A. Balkema, pp. 177-196. 3824.  Lilley, edited by Ian, 2006: Archaeology of Oceania: Australia and the Pacific Islands, Malden, MA: Blackwell. Disponível online em url: http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/cgibin/bookhome/117903439/. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3825.  Lim, T. K. (Tong Kwee), 1998?: Food and other crops in Fiji : an annotated bibliography, Canberra: Australian Centre for International Agricultural Research. 3826.  Lima Dantas, E. de, 1987: Historical Setting in Cuba: a country study (p. 1-62) J.D. Rudolph (ed.). Washington DC: GPO 3827.  Lima Lalanda Gonçalves, Rolando, 1984  : Eutopie Insularite et Migrations Contribution a L’analyse des Processus Socio Culturels Dans Un Environnement Insulaire. ‘Archipel des Açores; Sous La Direction De Alex Mucchielli, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), [S.l.] : [s.n.], 1984 Thèse de 3e cycle: Sociologie: Montpellier 3. 3828.  Lindley, R., 1986: Autonomy, Basingstock: Macmillan. 3829.  Lindo, Cecilia Kapua and Nancy Alpert Mower, 1980: Polynesian Seafaring Heritage, Honolulu: Kamehameha Schools. 3830.  Lindsay, C.W., 1993: The Economy in Philippines: a country study, R.E. Dolan (ed.). Washington DC: GPO. (pp. 117 188). 3831.  Lindsay, Charles, 1992: Mentawai shaman: keeper of the rain forest: man, nature, and spirits in remote Indonesia, historical essay by Reimar Schefold, New York, N.Y.: Aperture. 3832.  Lindsey, Terence; Morris, Rod, 2000: Collins Field Guide to New Zealand Wildlife, HarperCollins (New Zealand) Limited 3833.  Lindstrom, Lamont, 1993: Cargo cult: strange stories of desire from Melanesia and beyond, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiin, Asian, and Pacific Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press. 3834.  Linford, Pat., 1994?: The Coconut revolution: a personal account, Red Hill, A.C.T.. 3835.  Lini, W., 1982: Australia and the south Pacific; a Vanuatu perspective, Australian Outlook, Vol 36/2 3836.  Linnekin, J., 1988: Who made the feather cloaks? A problem in Hawaiian gender relations, JPS, vol. 97(3), 265-280 3837.  Linnekin, J., 1991: Ignoble savages and other European visions - the La Perouse affair in Samoan history, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 26(1), 3-26. 3838.  Linnekin, Jocelyn, 1990: Sacred queens and women of consequence: rank, gender, and colonialism in the Hawaiian Islands, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press. 3839.  Linnikin, J., and Poyer, L., eds, 1990: Cultural identity and ethnicity in the Pacific, University of Hawaii Press. 3840.  Lippmann, Harry, 2008: Militärmuseen auf den Kanalinseln, Köln: Lippmann. 3841.  LiPuma, Edward, 2000: Encompassing others: the magic of modernity in Melanesia, Ann

2009

212

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Arbor: University of Michigan Press. 3842.  Little, Carl, 1997: Art of the Maine islands, picture editor, Arnold Skolnick, Camden, ME : Down East Books. 3843.  Little, S., Holmes, L. & Grieco, M., 2000: ‘Island Histories, Open Cultures? The Electronic Transformation of Adjacency’, Southern African Business Review, Vol. 4, No.2, pp. 21-25. 3844.  Little, Stephen, Peter Ruthenberg, editors, 2006: Life in the Pacific of the 1700s: the Cook/ Forster Collection of the Georg August University of Gottingen: an exhibition held at the Honolulu Academy of Arts, Hawaii February 23-May 16, 2006, the National Museum of Australia, Canberra, June 22-September 10, 2006, organized by the Honolulu Academy of Arts in cooperation with the Institute of Cultural and Social Anthropology of the Georg August University of Gottingen, [Honolulu]: Honolulu Academy of Arts. 3845.  Liu, J., and T. Var, 1986: Resident Attitudes Toward Tourism Impacts in Hawaii, Annals of Tourism Research, 13, pp.193-214. 3846.  Live, Y.-S. (Editeur scientifique), et all..., 2005: L’identité et la construction de l’identité dans les îles du Sud-Ouest de l’Océan Indien, Kabaro (Paris). 3847.  Liverpool, Hollis, 2001: Rituals of power and rebellion: the carnival tradition in Trinidad and Tobago, 1763-1962, Chicago, IL.,; Trinidad and Tobago: Research Associates School Times; Frontline Distribution. 3848.  Livingston, William S., William Roger Louis, 1979: Australia, New Zealand, and the Pacific Islands since the First World War, University of Texas press. 3849.  Llabrés Ramis, Joan, Jordi Vallespir Soler, 1980: Els nostres arts i oficis d’antany, Ciutat de Mallorca : Museu Arqueològic La Porciúncula. 3850.  Lloyd, Greg and Black, Stuart, 1993: Highlands and Islands Enterprise: Strategies for Economic and Social Development, Local Economy, 8(1), pp. 69-81. 3851.  Lo Bao, Phil; Hutchison, Iain, 2002: BEAline to the islands: the story of air services to offshore communities of the British Isles by British European Airways, its predecessors and successors, Erskine: Kea. 3852.  Lo. Chi-Kin, 1989: China’s Policy towards Territorial Disputes: The Case of the South China Sea Islands, Routledge. 3853.  Lobban jr., R.A., 1995: Cape Verde: Crioulo Colony to Independent Nation, Boulder: Westview Press. 3854.  Lobban, C.S. and Schefter, M. 1997: Tropical Pacific Island Environments, University of Guam Press. 3855.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1993: El comercio del vino entre Gran Canaria y las Indias en el siglo XVI, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Abildo. Insular de Gran Canaria. 3856.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel; Caneda, Ramón López; Santana, Elisa Torres, 1993: La “otra” población: expósitos, ilegítimos, esclavos: Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, siglo XVIII, Las Palmas G.C.: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones. 3857.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1982: La esclavitud en las Canarias Orientales en el siglo XVI (negros, moros y moriscos), Santa Cruz de Tenerife. 3858.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1983: Los libertos en la sociedad canaria del siglo XVI, MadridTenerife. 3859.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1988: El comercio canario-europeo bajo Felipe II, Funchal, CEHA. 3860.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1989: Monedas, pesas y medidas en Canarias en el siglo XVI, Las

2009

CEHA

213

Palmas de Gran Canaria. 3861.  LOBO CABRERA, Manuel, 1990, «La historia de las islas: Canarias y Madeira», in Actas do II Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, s.l., Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 531-546. 3862.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1993: El comercio del vino entre Gran Canaria y las Indias, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria. 3863.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1993: La “otra población”: expósitos, ilegítimos y esclavos. Las Palmas en el siglo XVIII, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria. 3864.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, revisión, ordenación e índices por. 1995: Libro rojo de Gran Canaria, o, Gran libro de provisiones y reales cédulas, introducción por Pedro Cullén del Castillo, presentación por Francisco Morales Padrón, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 3865.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, [et al.], 1994: Textos para la historia de Canarias, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 3866.  Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1995: Don Agustín de Herrera y Rojas, primer marqués de Lanzarote, Madrid. (En colaboración con Fernando Bruquetas de Castro). 3867.  Lockhart, D., Drakakis-Smith, D. and Schembri, J. (eds), 1993: The Development Process in Small Islands States, London and New York: Routledge. 3868.  Lockhart, D. & Drakakis-Smith, D., 1996: Island Tourism: Problems and Perspectives, London, Mansell. 3869.  Lockhart ed. by Douglas G. and David Drakakis-Smith, 1997: Island tourism: trends and prospects, London; New York: Pinter. 3870.  Lockhart, D.G., 1997: Islands and Tourism: An Overview in D.G. Lockhart & D. DrakakisSmith (eds.) Island Tourism: Trends and Prospects, Pinter, pp. 3-20. 3871.  Lockwood, V. S., 2004: Globalization and culture change in the Pacific Islands, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education. 3872.  Lockwood, V.S., 1988: Development French Neocolonialism, and the structure of the Tubuai economy, Oceania, vol. vol. 58, no 3, p. p. 176-192. 3873.  Löffler, C.M., 1983: The Voyage to the Otherworld Island in Early Irish Literature, Salzburg, Institut für Anglistik und Amerikanistik, Universität Salzburg. 3874.  Lofgren, Stephen J., 1993: Northern Solomons, Washington, DC: U.S. Army Center of Military History. 3875.  Logan, F. Donald, 2005: The Vikings in history, Taylor & Francis. 3876.  Lomas, P., 1981: The early contact period in Northern New Ireland (PNG); from wild frontier to plantation economy, Ethnohistory, Vol 28/1, pp.1-21. 3877.  London, (J.), 2004: «Implications of climate change on small island developing states: experience in the Caribbean region», Journal of Environmental Planning and Management, 47(4), p. 491-501. 3878.  Longhurst, A. R. and Pauly, D., 1987: Ecology of Tropical Oceans, Academic Press. 3879.  Longhurst, R., and Grano SA, eds, 2001: Embarquement pour le Queensland; Des Loyaltiens en terre australienne, (Across the Coral Sea; Loyalty Islanders in Australia), Noumea, Australian Consulate (catalogue for an exhibition). 3880.  Loomis, Terrence, 1990: Pacific migrant labour, class, and racism in New Zealand: fresh

2009

214

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

off the boat, Aldershot, Hants, England: Avebury; Brookfield, Vt., USA: Gower Pub. Co.. 3881.  Loper, Christen E., Danielle M. Tesch, Kevin Goldstein, Isabel Torres de Noronha, 2005: Global multilateral environmental agreements and small island developing states, Paper Series No. 2004-2, Sponsored by: UNEP/GPA and the Global Forum on Oceans, Coasts, and Islands. 3882.  Lopes de Melo Borges, Joao Carlos, 1997: A diaspora caboverdeana e a sua influencia na evolucao socioeconomica do Arquipelago, Lisboa: Universidade Tecnica de Lisboa. 3883.  López Aguilar, Juan Fernando, 1998: Estado autonómico y hechos diferenciales: una aproximación al hecho diferencial en el Estado compuesto de la Constitución de 1978: el caso de la autonomía canaria, Madrid, Centro de Estudios Constitucionales. 3884.  López Valdés, Rafael L., 2007: Pardos y morenos esclavos y libres en Cuba y sus instituciones en el Caribe hispano, San Juan, Puerto Rico: Centro de Estudios Avanzados de Puerto Rico y el Caribe. 3885.  Lorelli, John A., 1984: The battle of the Komandorski, Islands, March 1943, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press. 3886.  Loroña, Lionel V., ed., 1987: A Bibliography of Latin American Bibliographies, 1980-1984: Social Sciences and Humanities (Supplement No. 4 to Arthur E. Gropp’s A Bibliography of Latin American Bibliographies), Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press. 3887.  Loughlin, John, 1989: Regionalism and Ethnic Nationalism in France: A Case-study of Corsica, Thesis. San Domenico, Italy: European University Institute. 3888.  Loughlin, J., 1992: Le développement des îles de la Méditerranée, Revue d’économie Régionale et Urbaine, n°4. 3889.  Loughlin, John, and Claude Olivesi (eds.), 1999: Autonomies insulaires: vers une politique de différence pour la Corse. Ajaccio: Editions Albiana. 3890.  Loughlin, J., Alain Delcamp (Edited with), 2003: La décentralisation dans les Etats de l’Union Européenne, Coll. Les Etudes, Paris: La Documentation Française, 2ième édition 3891.  Loughlin, J., With M. Keating and K. Deschouwer, 2003: Culture, Institutions and Regional Development: a Study of Eight European Regions, Cheltenham: Edward Elgar. 3892.  Lougnon, Albert (éd.), 2006: Sous le signe de la tortue: voyages anciens à l’île Bourbon (1611-1725), Ste Clotilde (La Réunion). 3893.  Louis, Diana Farr; Marinos, June, 1995: Prospero’s kitchen: Mediterranean cooking of the Ionian Islands from Corfu to Kythera, illustrated by Judith Ann Lawrence, New York: M. Evans. 3894.  Louman, B., Ed., 1995: Proceedings of the Huon Seminar ‘94: held in Lae, Papua New Guinea, 20-23 June, 1994. Volume 13: Workshop on Forestry Management. Lae, Papua New Guinea University of Technology. 3895.  Lourie, Peter, 2002: Tierra del Fuego: a journey to the end of the earth, Honesdale, PA, Boyds Mills Press. 3896.  Lowe, Celia, 2006: Wild profusion: biodiversity conservation in an Indonesian archipelago, Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press. 3897.  Lowell, S. Gustafson, 1988: The Sovereignty Dispute over the Falkland (Malvinas) Islands, Oxford University Press. 3898.  Lowenthal, D., 1988: ‘Island Self-Reliance or Expert Delusion?’ in Islands 88: Proceedings of the 2nd Conference of Islands of the World, University of Tasmania, Hobart (TAS).

2009

CEHA

3899.  Loxley, Diana, 1990: Problematic shores: the literature of islands, Macmillan.

215

Basingstoke, GB:

3900.  Loxton, Bruce; Coulthard-Clark, Chris, 1994: The shame of Savo: anatomy of a naval disaster, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press. 3901.  Lucas, Raoul (dir.), 2003: Sociétés plurielles dans l’océan Indien: Enjeux culturels et scientifiques, Paris; Saint Denis: Karthala; Université de la Réunion, 2003. 3902.  Ludema, R., 2002: “Increasing returns, multinationals and geography of preferential trade agreements”, Journal on international economics, n°2, p. 329-358. 3903.  Ludlow, Barbara, 2000: ‘The Enderby Settlement in the Auckland Islands’, Woolwich and District Family History Society Journal, 79 (Autumn), 23-28. 3904.  Ludra, Kuldip S., 1999: The defence of Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Chandigarh, Thakur Kuldip S. Ludra. 3905.  Ludtke, Jean, 1989: Atlantic peeks: an ethnographic guide to the Portuguese-speaking Atlantic islands, Hanover, Mass.: Christopher Pub. House. 3906.  Lugo, Ariel E., 1990: Mangroves of the Pacific Islands: research opportunities, Berkeley, Calif. (P.O. Box 245, Berkeley 94701): U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, Forest Service, Pacific Southwest Research Station. 3907.  Lugo-Ortiz, C. R. and W. P. McCafferty, 1999: “A new genus of small Minnow Mayflies (Insecta: Ephemeroptera: Baetidae) with six new species from New Guinea and New Britain”, Annales de Limnologie-International Journal of Limnology, 35(1): 57-70. 3908.  Luis Yanes, María Jesús; Sánchez Hernández, José María, 1995: La historia de Santa Cruz de Tenerife, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria: Ayuntamiento de Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Cabildo de Tenerife. 3909.  Luke, L.B., 2001: Identity and Autonomy in Tobago: from Union to Self Government, 18891980, Washington DC. 3910.  Lull, Vicente... [et. al], 2001, Son Fornés: la prehistòria de les Illes Balears i el jaciment arqueològic de Son Fornés, Montuïri, Mallorca = la prehistoria de las Islas Baleares y el yacimiento arqueológico de Son Fornés, Montuïri, Mallorca, Montuïri, Mallorca: Fundació Son Fornés. 3911.  Lumb, Rosemary, 1980: Migration in the highlands and islands of Scotland[Aberdeen]: Institute for the Study of Sparsely Populated Areas, University of Aberdeen. 3912.  Luna Tobar, Alfredo, 1997: Historia politica internacional de la Islas Galápagos, Quito, Ediciones Abya-Yala. 3913.  Lundstrom, John B., 1994: The first team and the Guadalcanal campaign: naval fighter combat from August to November 1942, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press. 3914.  Luomala, K., 1981: Eels in Gilbert Islands culture: traditional beliefs, rituals and narratives, Journal de la societe des oceanistes, vol. vol. 37, no 72-73, p. p. 227-237. 3915.  Lutkehaus, Nancy C.; Roscoe, Paul B., ed. 1995: Gender rituals: female initiation in Melanesia, New York: Routledge. 3916.  Lütkes, Christiana, 1990: The good gardener: horticulture, work, and work ethic in traditional Melanesian societies, Münster; New York: Waxmann. 3917.  Lutz, Catherine, 1988: Unnatural emotions: everyday sentiments on a Micronesian atoll & their challenge to western theory, Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 3918.  Luxán Meléndez, Santiago de., 1994: La industria tipográfica en Canarias, 1750-1900:

2009

216

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

balance de la producción impresa, [Las Palmas, Canary Islands]: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 3919.  Lvesque, Rodrigue compiled and edited. 1992: History of Micronesia: a collection of source documents, Gatineau, Québec: Éditions Lévesque = Lévesque Publications. 3920.  Lyck, L., 1996: ‘The Faroese Home Rule Act as a Framework for the Faroese Economy’ in L. Lyck (ed.) Constitutional and Economic Space of the Small Nordic Jurisdictions, NordREFO, 6, pp. 137-147. 3921.  Lynch, C.J., 1980: The achievement of independence in Papua New Guinea: the legal aspect, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 15(3-4), 175-193. 3922.  Lynch, John, 1994: An annotated bibliography of Vanuatu languages, Suva, Fiji: Pacific Information Centre and University of the South Pacific Library. 3923.  Lynch, John, 1998: Pacific Languages: A History, Honolulu: University of Hawaiëi Press. 3924.  Lynch, John, Crowley, Terry, 2001: Languages of Vanuatu: A new survey and bibliography, Authored Research Books. 3925.  Lyon Dahl, A., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Gestion traditionnelle et moderne de l’environnement insulaire oceanien, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 141-144. 3926.  Lyovin, Anatole V., 1997: An Introduction to the Languages of the World, New York: Oxford University Press, Inc. 3927.  Lysaght, Patricia, 2001: ‘Food provision strategies on the Great Blasket Island’, In Ó Catháin, Séamus, Northern lights: following folklore in north-western Europe, Dublin: University College Press, 127-140. 3928.  Lytle, Clifford M. and Vine Deloria, Jr. 1998: The Nation Within: the Past and Future of American Indian Sovereignty, University of Texas Press. 3929.  Ma, Yingjiu, 1986: Cong xin hai yang fa lun Diaoyutai lie yu yu Donghai hua jie wen ti, Zhonghua min guo Taiwan Taibei Shi: Zheng zhong shu ju; Meiguo zong jing xiao Hua qiang tu shu gong si, min guo 75 3930.  Mabire, Jean, 1994: Jersey sous l’Occupation, Saint-Malo, France: Ancre de marine. 3931.  Mabuchi, Toichi, 1980: Space and Time in Ryukyuan Cosmology, Asian Folkore Studies, 39. 3932.  Mac Cárthaigh, Críostóir; O’Reilly, Barry, 2001: ‘Ó bhun go barr an bhaile’ [Recent settlement on the Great Blasket Island], In Ó Catháin, Séamus, Northern lights: following folklore in north-western Europe, Dublin: University College Press, pp.148-164. 3933.  Mac Conghail, Muiris, 1987: The Blaskets: a Kerry island library, 1988 reprint. Dublin: Country House. 3934.  Mac Conghail, Muiris, 1991: The literature of the Blasket Islands: an additional bibliographical note, Journal of the Kerry Archaeological & Historical Society, 24 (1991), 69-71. 3935.  Mac Conghail, Muiris, 1994: The Blaskets: people and literature, 2nd edition. Dublin: [s.n.]. 3936.  Mac Giolla Easpaig, Dónall, 1989-90: The place-names of Rathlin Island, Ainm, (Ulster Place-Name Society), 4, 3-89. 3937.  Mac Laughlin, Jim, 1996: “The evolution of anti-Traveller racism in Ireland”, in Race & Class, Jan 1996; vol. 37: pp. 47 - 63. 3938.  Macadam, R. D., 2000: “From pushing production inputs to empowering the community:

2009

CEHA

217

a case study in the transformation of an extension agency”, in Australian Journal of Experimental Agriculture 40: 585-594. 3939.  MacArthur, E. Mairi, 1990: Iona: the living memory of a crofting community, 1750-1914, Edinburgh, vii, Edinburgh University Press. 3940.  MacClancy, J., 1981: From New Hebrides to Vanuatu, 1979-1980, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 16 (1), 1981, 92-104. 3941.  MacCormick, Donald Neil, 2000: ‘Stands Scotland still where she did? New unions for old in the islands’, Irish Jurist, 35, 1-16. 3942.  Macdonald B, 1988: In pursuit of the sacred trust; Trusteeship and independence in Nauru, Wellington, NZIIA. 3943.  MacDonald, B., 1986: Decolonization and beyond: the framework for post-colonial relationships in Oceania, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 21(3-4), 115-126. 3944.  MacDonald, Colin M., 1999: Life in the Highlands and Islands of Scotland - Echoes of the Glen & Highland Journey, Edinburgh: Mercat Press. 3945.  Macdonald, Fiona A., 2005, 2006: Missions to Gaels: reformation and counter-reformation in Ulster and the Highlands and islands of Scotland, Edinburgh: John Donald. 3946.  Macdonald, Fiona, 2001: Marshall Cavendish Corporation, Elizabeth Paren, Kevin Shillington, Gillian Stacey, Philip Steele, “Mauritius”, Peoples of Africa, US: Marshall Cavendish. 3947.  Macdonald, Heather B., 1997: “The Century of the Pacific... Maintaining Health During Economic Development in the Pacific Islands”, in Promotion & Education, Sep 1997; vol. 4: pp. 33 - 36. 3948.  Macgregor, by J.D., 2006: Colonial window: a view from the past: being the diary of a doctor in HM Colonial Medical Service 1951 to 1975, Stanhope: Memoir Club. 3949.  Machida, H., [et al.], 1992: “Holocene explosive eruptions of Witori and Dakataua volcanoes in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea and their possible impact on human environment”, in International Geological Congress, Abstracts--Congres Geologique Internationale, vol. 29, pag. 506. 3950.  Machida, H., R. Blong, H. Moriwaki, Y. Hayakawa, B. Talai, D. Lolock, J. Specht, R. Torrence and C. Pain, 1992: Holocene explosive eruptions of Witori and Dakataua volcanoes in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea. 3951.  MacIntyre, Jean, 2005: “Enchanted Islands Floating on the Foam of Perilous Seas”,in Quidditas: The Journal of the Rocky Mountain Medieval and Renaissance Association, 26-27, 78-89. 3952.  Macintyre, Martha, 1983: The kula: a bibliography, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. 3953.  Maciej, Jędrusik, 2006: Emerging Islands” – A New Role Of Tropical Islands In The World, Asia&Pacifik_3_2006.qxd 2007-01-20 23:20 Page 51-74. Disponível online em url: http:// www.wgsr.uw.edu.pl/pub/uploads/File/Jedrusik.pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 3954.  Mack Kim, D., 1992: The Administrative System of the Islands: Western Isles in The Political Administrative Systems of the European Island Regions Ponta Delgada: Regional Secretariat for Internal Administration, (pp. 119 -36). 3955.  Mack, J., 1986: Madagascar: Island of the Ancestors, British Museum, London. 3956.  Mackay, D., 1986: The Search For The Southern Land. In Fraser, B. (Ed.), The New

2009

218

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Zealand Book Of Events. Auckland: Reed Methuen. 3957.  MacKay, L., 1987: Tourism and changing attitudes to land in Negril, Jamaica, In: Besson, J. and Momsen, J. (eds), Land and Development in the Caribbean, London: Macmillan Caribbean. 3958.  Mackie, Erin Skye, 2009: Rakes, highwaymen, and pirates: the making of the modern gentleman in the eighteenth century, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. 3959.  MacKillop, Donald, 1991: “Rocks, skerries, shoals and islands in the Sounds of Harris and Uist and around the island of Berneray”, in Transactions of the Gaelic Society of Inverness, 56 (1991 for 1988-90), 428-502. 3960.  MacLaine, Brent, Island Literature - An Annotated Bibliography - compiled by MA (Island Studies) students at the University of Prince Edward Island, as part of their course requirements (Course Professor: Brent MacLaine). Disponível online em url: http://www. islandstudies.ca/sites/islandstudies.ca/files/4/Island_Literature_Annotated_Bibliography. pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 3961.  Maclellan, Nic, 2007: “Fiji, Iraq and Pacific island security”, in Race & Class, vol. 48: pp. 47 - 62. 3962.  MacLeod, G., 2001: “New regionalism reconsidered: globalization and the remaking of political economic space”, International journal of urban and regional research, n°4, p. 804-829 3963.  MacLeod, Roy M.; Lewis, Milton J. (ed.). 1988: Disease, medicine and Empire: perspectives on Western medicine and the experience of European expansion. 3964.  Macnaught, T.J., 1982: The Fijian colonial experience, Canberra. 3965.  MacPhee, Ross D.E., 1999: Extinctions in near time: causes, contexts, and consequences, New York, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers. 3966.  MacPherson, Stewart, 1996: “Social work and economic development in Papua New Guinea”, in International Social Work, Jan 1996; vol. 39: pp. 55 - 67. 3967.  MacQueen, N. 1989: Sharpening the spearhead: Sub-regionalism in Melanesia, PS, vol. 12 (2), 33-52. 3968.  Madden, Albert Frederick McCulloch (ed.), 2000: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth, 8: The end of empire : dependencies since 1948, part 1 : the West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands. Westport (CT) and London: Greenwood. 3969.  Madden, Albert Frederick McCulloch (ed.), 2000a: The end of empire: dependencies since 1948 : Part 1 : The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands (Documents in Imperial History, 8; Select documents on the constitutional history of the British Empire and Commonwealth, 8). Westport (CT): Greenwood Press. 3970.  Maddern, Jo Frances, 2008: Spectres of migration and the ghosts of Ellis Island, Cultural Geographies, Jul; vol. 15: pp. 359 - 381. 3971.  Maddison, A. (dir.), 1986: L’Amerique Latine, la region des Caraibes et l’OCDE: dialogue sur la realite economique et les politiques posibles,OCDE: Organisation de Coopération et de Développement Economique - Paris: France. 3972.  Maestri, Edmond, 1994: Les iles du sud-ouest de l’océan Indien et la France de 1815 a nous jhours, Paris, L’harmattan et Saint-Denis, Uné de la Réunion. 3973.  Maestri, Edmond, 2002: Esclavage et abolitions dans l’océan Indien (1723-1860): actes du colloque de Saint-Denis de la Réunion / organisé par l’Université de la Réunion

2009

CEHA

219

en collaboration avec le Conseil général et le Conseil régional de la Réunion, 4 au 8 décembre 1998, Paris: L’Harmattan; Saint-Denis: Université de la Réunion. 3974.  Maffei, Macrina Marilena, 1995: Capelli di serpe: cunti e credenze delle isole Eolie, Roma: Meltemi, c1995. 3975.  Maga, T., 1985: Democracy and defence; the case of Guam, USA 1918-41, JPH, 156-72. 3976.  Maga, Timothy P., 2001: ‘”Away from Tokyo”: the Pacific Islands war crimes trials, 19451949’, Journal of Pacific History, 36:1, 37-50. 3977.  Mageo, Jeannette Marie, 1998: Theorizing self in Samoa: emotions, genders, and sexualities, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press. 3978.  Maggio, Laura, 2004: Bibliografia archeologica del Gargano e delle isole Tremiti: 15571970, Laura Maggio; progetto scientifico a cura di Marina Mazzei, Foggia, C. Grenzi. 3979.  Magnan, Alexandre, 2006: Autour d’empreintes de la mondialisation sur les dynamiques territoriales des petites îles tropicales, Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, 2006, vol. 59, no 236, p. 499-511. Disponível online em url:http://com.revues.org/index606.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3980.  Magnan, Alexandre, 2006a: L’épidémie de Chikungunya à la Réunion : une occasion de réfléchir au(x) paradoxe(s) insulaire(s), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 234, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url:http://com.revues.org/index396.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3981.  Magnan, Alexandre, 2007: Tourisme et réserves d’espaces pour les pratiques locales sur les littoraux de l’île Maurice, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 240, Octobre-Décembre. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index2528.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3982.  Magnusen, Karl O.; Rodríguez, Leonardo, 1998: “Cuba, Labor, and Change”, in Labor Studies Journal, Jun 1998; vol. 23: pp. 21 - 40. 3983.  Mahajani, Usha, 1971: Philippine Nationalism: External Challenge and Filipino Response, 1565-1946, St. Lucia, Queensland, Australia: University of Queensland Press. 3984.  Mahina, O., 1992: The Tongan Traditional History Tala-e-Fonua: A Vernacular EcologyCentered Historico-Cultural Concept, Ph.D. Thesis Australian National University. 3985.  Mahina, O., 1993: The poetics of Tongan traditional history, tala-e-fonua: an ecologycentred concept of culture and history, Journal of Pacifi history, vol. 28 (1). 3986.  Mahirta, 2009: Prehistoric human occupation on Rote and Sawu Islands, Nusa Tenggara Timur, Indonesia, Oxford: John and Erica Hedges Ltd.. 3987.  Mahler, Ditlev L. D., 1993: Shielings and their role in the viking-age economy: new evidence from the Faroe Islands, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 487-505. 3988.  Maiava, Susan, 2001: A clash of paradigms: intervention, response and development in the South Pacific, Aldershot; Burlington, VT: Ashgate. 3989.  Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.). 2004: Insularité, société et développement, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 3-100. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/ index1585.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 3990.  Maillard, Jean-Claude, 2006: «Economie maritime et insularité: le cas des îles tropicales», Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 234, Avril-Juin, online, URL: http://com.revues.org/index30.html. Consultado em 11 de Julho de 2009.

2009

220

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

3991.  Mainet, G. (ed.); David, Gilbert, 1998: Iles et littoraux tropicaux: actes des 7èmes journées de géographie tropicale du comité national de géographes français, In Acteurs, espacesresources, échelles: premiers éléments pour une gestion durable de la pêche artisanale en Mélanésie, Nantes: Ouest Editions, Universite de Bretagne Occidentale, Departement de Geographie; Institut Universitaire Europeen de La Mer; CNRS, Laboratoire de Geographie de la Mer, Geolittomer; UGI; Comite National dês Geographes Francais, Commission Espaces Tropicaux et Leur Developpement 3992.  Maingot, Anthony P. 1994: The United States and the Caribbean: Challenges of an Asymmetrical Relationship. Westview P. 3993.  Maisch, Christian J., 2000: “The Falkland/Malvinas Islands clash of 1831-32: U.S. and British diplomacy in the South Atlantic”, in Diplomatic History, 24, 185-209. 3994.  Major, Kevin, 2002: As Near to Heaven by Sea: A History of Newfoundland and Labrador, Penguin Books. 3995.  Makara, L., 1976: “West New Britain Province”, in Harvest, 3(4): 140-148. 3996.  Makini, Jully, ed., 1991: Na Buka Vivinei Malivi pa Zinama Roviana / Roviana Custom Stories Book, Solomon Islands: Western Province Government, 86 pp., illustrated. “These stories were collected by Sister Lina Jones and by the Rev. E.C. Leadley in the 1930s and 1940s at Kokeqolo, Roviana Lagoon.” Introduction in Roviana and English, text in Roviana. 3997.  Malamut, E., 1989: Les îles de l’empire byzantin, Publications de la Sorbonne, Paris. Malclès, Fabien, 2005 : Offre documentaire et insularité: réflexion autour des collections de droit et des publics de la Bibliothèque Universitaire de la Nouvelle-Calédonie; sous la direction de Françoise Gaudet,... École nationale supérieure des sciences de l’information et des bibliothèques (Villeurbanne, Rhône). Université de soutenance, Mémoire d’étude diplôme de conservateur des bibliothèques: Bibliothéconomie: Villeurbanne, ENSSIB. Disponiverl online em url: http://www.enssib.fr/bibliotheque/documents/dcb/malcles-vol1. pdf // http://www.enssib.fr/bibliotheque/documents/dcb/malcles-vol2.pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 3998.  Malcomson, S. L., 1989: “Stranger than Paradise”, Mother Jones, 14 (January): 19–25. 3999.  Malcomson, S.L., 1990: Palau in his Tuturani; a political journey in the Pacific Islands, Simon & Schuster, 27-46, 1990. 4000.  Malcomson, Scott L., 1990: Tuturani: a political journey in the Pacific Islands, New York: Poseidon Press. 4001.  Malhotra, O. P., 1986: Tribal education in Andaman and Nicobar Islands New Delhi, S. Chand & Co., 1986. 4002.  Malhotra, R. (Rikshesh), 1989: The Indian islanders: an anthropological perspective, New Delhi, India: Mittal Publications. 4003.  Maliarevsky, Michel, 2006: Îles d’Europe, Paris: Acanthe. 4004.  Malik, Jamal, 2006: ‘Letters, prison sketches and autobiographical literature: The case of Fadl-e Haqq Khairabadi in the Andaman Penal Colony’, Indian Economic and Social History Review, 43:1, 77-100. 4005.  Malinowski, Bronislaw, 1987: The sexual life of savages in North-western Melanesia: an ethnographic account of courtship, marriage, and family life among the natives of the Trobriand Islands, British New Guinea, introduction by Annette B. Weiner, with a preface by Havelock Ellis, Boston, Beacon Press.

2009

CEHA

221

4006.  Malo, Paul, 2004: A floating world: more people, places, and pastimes of the Thousand Islands, Fulton, N.Y.: Laurentian Press. 4007.  Maloney, Clarence, 1980: People of the Maldive Islands, Bombay: Orient Longman. 4008.  Malten, Thomas, 1983: Malediven und Lakkadiven. Materialien zur Bibliographie der Atolle im Indischen Ozean, Beiträge zur Südasien-Forschung Südasien-Institut Universität Heidelberg, Nr. 87. Franz Steiner Verlag. Wiesbaden. 4009.  Maluf, Sônia Weidner, 1992: “Witches and witchcraft: a study about representations of female power on Santa Catarina Island”, in International Sociology, Jun 1992; vol. 7: pp. 225 - 234. 4010.  Manchester City Art Gallery, 1988: The Falklands factor: representations of a conflict [Exhibition catalogue], Manchester: Manchester City Art Galleries. 4011.  Manera, Carles (director), Miquel Angel Casasnovas, Miguel José Deyá, Joana Maria Escartín; pròleg, Pere Sampol i Mas, Las islas del calzado: historia económica del sector en Baleares (1200-2000), Palma de Mallorca: L. Muntaner. 4012.  Manfredi, Valerio Massimo, 1996: Le isole fortunate: topografia di un mito, “L’Erma” di Bretschneider. 4013.  Mangenot, G., 1981: Les flores des iles et les problemes qu’elles posent, Mondes et Cultures, no 3, p. p. 545-550; p. 553-555 4014.  Mangilao, 2003: Directory of libraries and archives in the Pacific Islands, Guam: University of Guam. 4015.  Manila, Gabriel Janer, 1986: Els Escriptors Balears i la seva producció en català: els autors i els seus llibres, apèndix bibliogràfic de Lluís Villalonga, [Palma, Mallorca?] Conselleria d’Educació i Cultura del Govern Balear, Direcció General de Cultura. 4016.  Manning, Conleth, 1985: “Archaeological excavations at two church sites on Inishmore, Aran Islands”, in Journal of the Royal Society of Antiquaries of Ireland, 115, 96-120. 4017.  Manoharan, S., 2007: Linguistic identity of an endangered tribe: present Great Andamanese, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, India, Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages. 4018.  Manor, James (ed.), 1984: Sri Lanka in Change and Crisis, New York: St. Martin’s. 4019.  Mansfield, E.; Milner, H., 1999: “The new wave of regionalism”, International Organization, n°3, p. 589-627. 4020.  Mansion, J., 1912: Bibliographie scientifique de la Corse des origines à 1910, in Bulletin de la Société des sciences historiques et naturelles de la Corse’. 4021.  Mantovani, E., 1996: “Book review: To sing with pigs is human. The concept of person in Papua New Guinea - Goodale,JC”, in Anthropos 91(4-6): 597-599. 4022.  Maragos, J. E. (1991). Research demands of the coastal marine environment of Papua New Guinea. In: M. Pearl, B. Beehler, A. Allison and M. Taylor, Eds., Conservation and environment in Papua New Guinea: establishing research priorities. Proceedings of a symposium held June 3, 1991, Honolulu, Hawaii. New York/ Washington, D.C., The Government of Papua New Guinea, through the Embassy, Washington D.C. and Wildlife Conservation International, pp. 11-25. 4023.  Marcille, J.; Bour, W., 1981: La peche des thons a la senne et a la canne dans l’Ocean Pacifique tropical: situation actuelle et perspectives de developpement, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, Paris, France, 1981 4024.  Marck, J.C. 1986: Micronesian dialects and the overnight voyage, JPS, vol. 95(1), 1986:

2009

222

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

253-258. 4025.  Margaret Washington, 1998: A peculiar people: slave religion and community-culture among the Gullahs Creel, New York: New York University Press. 4026.  Margarido, Alfredo, 1994: “Pour une histoire des géopolitiques culturelles des îles du CapVert”, in Lusotopie, pp. 103-112. 4027.  Margolin, Jean-Claude, 1989: Sur l’insularité d’Utopia: entre l’érudition et la rêverie, Angers. 4028.  Margolis, Susanna, 1988: Adventuring in the Pacific: the Sierra Club travel guide to the Islands of Polynesia, Melanesia, and Micronesia, San Francisco: Sierra Club Books. 4029.  Mari, S., 1997: “Coûts et bénéfices de l’insularité du point de vue économique, le cas de Minorque” in Sanguin, A.-L. (dir.), Vivre dans une île. Une géopolitique des Insularités, Paris, L’Harmattan, Collection “Géographie et Cultures”, p. 211-219 4030.  Mariano, Gabrel, 1959: Inquietação e serenidade: aspecto da insularidade na poesia de Cabo-Verde, In: Estudos Ultramarinos, nº 3, p. 55-79. 4031.  Marimon i Riutort, Antoni, 1997: La crisi de 1898 a les Illes Balears: repercussions polítiques i ideològiques de les Guerres de Cuba i de les Filipines, pròleg de Sebastià Serra Busquets, Palma de Mallorca, El Tall. 4032.  Marimoutou, Jean-Claude; Racault, Jean-Michel, textes réunis par. 1995: L’insularité thématique et représentations: actes du Colloque international de Saint-Denis de la Réunion, avril 1992: Colloque international de Saint-Denis de La Réunion (1992) Paris: L’Harmattan. 4033.  Maríñez, Pablo A., 2007: El Gran Caribe ante los cambios internacionales y la política exterior dominicana, Santo Domingo: FUNGLODE, Centro de Documentación & Gestión del Conocimiento. 4034.  Mariño Gomes, Primitivo, 1997: “L’Espagne et l’Orient au début du XVIème siècle. Un autre droit que dans l’Amérique”, in Mare Liberum, nº 13, Junho, pp. 83–93. 4035.  Marinos, P., 1983: Small islands tourism: the case of Zakynthos, Greece, Tourism Management, 4(3), pp.212-215. 4036.  Marjavaara, Roger, 2007: Route to Destruction? Second Home Tourism in Small Island Communities, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 2, No. 1 pp. 27-46. 4037.  Mark, Joan T., 1999: Margaret Mead: coming of age in America, New York: Oxford University Press. 4038.  Marksbury, R.A., 1982: Legislating Social Order: an example from the yap Islands, Oceania, 1982, no 1, p. p. 19-28 4039.  Markusen, A., 2002: “Two frontiers for regional science: regional policy and interdisplinary reach”, Papers in regional science, n°81, p. 279-290 4040.  Marlay, R., 1993: Government and Politics in Philippines: a country study (pp. 189-240), R.E. Dolan (ed.). Washington DC: GPO. 4041.  Marquer, Armel, 1994: Monseigneur David Le Cadre: 1875-1952, évèque de Démétriade, vicaire apostolique des Iles Marquises: notice biographique [Questenbert]: A. Marquer, 1994. 4042.  Marques Guedes, Armando, 2001: “Thinking East Timor, Indonesia and Southeast Asia”, in Lusotopie, pp. 315-325. 4043.  Marques Silva, Lurdes, 2000: “Descolonização, nacionalismo e sepa­ratismo no Sudeste Asiático. Os casos da Indonésia e Timor Leste”, in Lusotopie, pp.359-376.

2009

CEHA

223

4044.  Marr, L. J.; Cox, J. S., 1987: Guernsey bailiwick harbours and landing-places, c.2000 BC to 1987, Guernsey. 4045.  Marr, L. James, 1984: Guernsey people, with an introduction by Le Seigneur de Sausmarez and a supplement on early Bailiwick names by S.K. Kellett-Smith; illustrations arranged by Carel Toms, Chichester, Sussex: Phillimore. 4046.  Marr, L. James, 1987: Guernsey Bailiwick harbours and landing-places, c. 2000 B.C. to 1987, Guernsey: Toucan. 4047.  Marras, Margherita, 1998: L’insularité dans la littérature narrative sarde du XXe siècle, Toulouse: Éd. universitaires du Sud. 4048.  Marras, Margherita, 2005: L’insularité entre imaginaire et réalité chez les romanciers sardes et siciliens contemporains, Mustapha Trabelsi (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand. 4049.  Marschall, Wolfgang edited by. 1994: Texts from the islands: oral and written traditions of Indonesia and the Malay world: proceedings of the 7th European Colloquium on Indonesian and Malay Studies, Berne, June 1989, European Colloquium on Indonesian and Malay Studies (7th: 1989: Bern, Switzerland), Berne: University of Berne, Institute of Ethnology. 4050.  Marsella, Anthony J., Austin, Ayda Aukahi, Grant. Bruce A., 2005: Social change and psychosocial adaptation in the Pacific Islands, New York: Springer. 4051.  Marshall Sahlins, M., (sd): Poor man, rich man, big-man, chief, Political types 4052.  Marshall, Bernard, 1982: “Religion as an Agent of Social Control and Social Stability on the Slave Plantations in the British Windward Islands”, in Journal of Ethnic Studies, 10:1, 61-82. 4053.  Marshall, Bernard, 1982: “Slave Resistance and White Reaction in the British Windward Islands 1763-1833”, in Caribbean Quarterly, 28:3, 33-46. 4054.  Marshall, Jenny White; Rourke, Grellan D., 2000: High Island: an Irish monastery in the Atlantic. Dublin: Town House & Country House. 4055.  Marshall, K.G., 1993: The Economy in Philippines: a country study, W.H. Frederick and R.L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO, pp. 137-206. 4056.  Marshall, S. L. A., 2001: Island victory: the battle of Kwajalein Atoll, Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press. 4057.  Marshall, W. K., 1980: Metayage in the sugar industry of the British Windward Islands, 1838-1865: Social and economic problems in the Windward Islands, 1838-1865[Mona, Jamaica]: University of the West Indies, Dept. of History. 4058.  Marshall, W. K., 1985: Apprenticeship and labour relations in four Windward Islands, In Abolition and its aftermath: the historical context, 1790-1916, ed. Richardson, D. (1985), 203-24. 4059.  Marshall, Woodville K., 1989: “St Lucia in the Economic History of the Windward Islands: The 19th Century Experience”, in Caribbean Quarterly, 35:3, 25-33. 4060.  Marshall, Woodville K., 1995: Provision ground and plantation labour in four Windward Islands: competition for resources during slavery, In Berlin, Ira; Morgan, Philip D. (ed.), The slaves’ economy: independent production by slaves in the Americas, London & Portland (OR): Cass, 48-67. 4061.  Marshall, Y., 1985: Who made the Lapita pots? a case study in gender, JPS, vol. 94, 205233.

2009

224

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4062.  Marston, Geoffrey, 1986: “Abandonment of Territorial Claims: the Cases of Bouvet and Spratly Islands”, in British Year Book of International Law, 57, Publisher: Oxford University Press. 337-56. 4063.  Marston, Geoffrey, 1998: The British acquisition of the Nicobar Islands, 1869: a possible example of abandonment of territorial sovereignty, British Year Book of International Law, 69, 245-65. 4064.  Martens, Conrad, 1994: Journal of a voyage from England to Australia 1833-35: via South America and the Pacific Islands aboard HMS Hyacinth, Indus, HMS Beagle, Peruvian and Black Warrior, transcript by Michael Organ, Sydney: State Library of NSW Press. 4065.  Martín Martín, Víctor, 1991: Agua y agricultura en Canarias: el sur de Tenerife, Las Palmas [de Gran Canaria]: Benchomo. 4066.  Martin, A. March, 1999: Scotland in Europe Scotland, European Commission Representation. United Kingdom. 4067.  Martin, A., 1989: “Dominica”, in Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean. A regional study, Meditz, S., et M., Hanratty, Federal Research Division, Washington, Library of Congress, p. 286-287. 4068.  Martín, Carmelo, 1991: Canarias, siete claves políticas, prólogo de Juan Cruz Ruiz, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Ediciones IDEA] 4069.  Martin, Denis-Constant, 1996: “Popular Culture, Identity and Politics in the Context of the Trinidad Carnival: ‘I is another,1 All of We is One”, in Studies in History, Aug; vol. 12: pp. 153 - 170. 4070.  Martin, H, et alia, Bibliographies of Taiwan Studies, Ruhr-Universität Bochum. Disponível online em url: http://www.ruhr-uni-bochum.de/slc/taiwan/biblio1.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4071.  Martin, Henry Byam, Sir, 1981: The Polynesian journal of Captain Henry Byam Martin, R.N.: in command of H.M.S. Grampus-50 guns at Hawaii and on station in Tahiti and the Society Islands, August 1846 to August 1847, illustrated with water colours ... from the originals by Captain Martin, Canberra: Australian National University Press. 4072.  Martin, Jean Comores, 1983: Quatre iles entre pirates et planteurs, Paris: L’Harmattan, 1983 2 vols. 4073.  Martin, Jean, 1983: Comores, quatre îles entre pirates et planteurs, Paris: L’Harmattan. 4074.  Martin, John Angus, 2007: A–Z of Grenada Heritage, Macmillan Caribbean. 4075.  Martin, M.; Yacou, A. (dir.)., 1991: Études Caribéennes. Société et Politique, Toulouse, Presses de l’Institut d’Etudes Politiques de Toulouse. 4076.  Martin, Martin(1655-1719), 1999: A description of the Western Islands of Scotland, ca. 1695; and, A late voyage to St. Kilda, Edinburgh, Birlinn. 4077.  Martin, Ron. Regional Development in the 1990’s The British Isles in Transition, Regional Policy and Development Series 4, Jessica Kinsley Publishers. London and Philadelphia, pp. 108-116. 4078.  Martin, Tony, 2003: “Eric Williams and the Anglo-American Caribbean Commission: Trinidad’s Future Nationalist Leader as Aspiring Imperial Bureaucrat, 1942-1944”, Journal of African American History, 88, no.3 (Summer): 274-290. 4079.  Martinelli, Maria Clara, 2000: Nuovi studi di archeologia eoliana / a cura di Umberto Spigo, Palermo: Regione siciliana, Assessorato dei beni culturali, ambientali e della pubblica istruzione.

2009

CEHA

225

4080.  Martinetti, Joseph, 1986: La Corse: Etude De Geographie Politique, Sous La Direction De Andre Dauphine, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de 3e cycle: Géographie: Nice. 4081.  Martinetti, J., 1987: Réalités et mythifications géographiques d’un espace marginal en mutation: la Corse. Etude de géopolitique, ANRT, Lille. 4082.  Martinetti, Joseph, 1989: Insularité et marginalité en Méditerranée occidentale: l’exemple corse, Ajaccio: Le Signet. 4083.  Martínez Cruzado, Juan C., 2002: The Use of Mitochondrial DNA to Discover PreColumbian Migrations to the Caribbean: Results for Puerto Rico and Expectations for the Dominican Republic. KACIKE: The Journal of Caribbean Amerindian History and Anthropology. Disponível online url: http://www.kacike.org/MartinezEnglish.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 4084.  Martínez Ferrando, Jesús Ernesto, 1993: La tragica storia dei re di Maiorca, introduzione, traduzione, note ed appendici a cura di Michele De Cesare, Cagliari: Consiglio nazionale delle ricerche, Istituto sui rapporti italo-Iberici. 4085.  Martínez Gálvez, Inmaculada; Rodríguez, Valentín Medina, 1992: Nuevas aportaciones al estudio de la emigración clandestina de las Islas Canarias a América Latina: 1948-1955, Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 4086.  Martínez Hernández, Marcos, 2002: Las Islas Canarias en la antigüedad clásica: mito, historia e imaginario, [La Laguna]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 4087.  Martinez, Marcos, 1994: Islas Escatológicas em Plutarco, in García Valdés, M.(ed.), Estudios sobre Plutarco: Ideas Religiosas, Madrid, pp.81-107. 4088.  Martinez, Marcos, 1994: Ls Islas Poéticas en la Literatura Grecolatina antigua y Medieval, in Aguilar, R. m., López Slvá, M., Alfageme, I.R., (editores), Homenaje a Luis Gil, Madrid, pp.431-449. 4089.  Martinez, Marcos, 1996: Las Islas Canarias dela Antiguidad al Renascimiento. Nuevos Aspectos, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, CPpC. 4090.  Martinez, Marcos, 1998: El mito de la Isla Perdida y su Tradición en la Historia, Cartografia, Literatura y Arte, in Revista de Filología de la universidad de La Laguna, nº.16, pp.143144. 4091.  Martinez, Paul François; Giblin, Béatrice (préf.); Lacoste, Yves (préf.), 2001: Géopolitique de la Réunion. Tome I: Approches géohistoriques, Saint-André (Ile de la Réunion): OCEAN Editions. 4092.  Martins, Ana Claudia Aymoré, 2007: Morus, Moreau, Morel: a ilha como espaço da utopia, Brasília: Editora UnB. 4093.  Martouzet, Denis, 2001: Fort-de-France.Ville fragile?, Paris: Anthropos. 4094.  Marujo, Manuela, 2003: Carnival and Easter Dances: From the Islands to the New World, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 143-152. 4095.  Marum, A., 1984: Report on advisory visit to Bali/Vitu Islands for period 30 April - 4 May 1984, Unpublished Report, Rural Development Division, Kimbe, West New Britain Province. 4096.  Marwick, Robert C., 1999: Rousay roots: family histories in Rousay, Egilsay, and Wyre, Orkney Islands, Kilwinning, Ayrshire, Scotland, R. Marwick. 4097.  Marx, M.; Peters-Berries, C., 1998: “SADC: les difficultés de l’intégration régionale”, Développement et coopération, n°2, p. 16-23.

2009

226

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4098.  Masao, Fidelis Taliwawa, 1988: The East African coast and the Comoro Islands, General history of Africa, edited by M. El Fasi, Berkeley: University of California Press, Volume 3, pp. 586-615. 4099.  Maschio, T., 1998: The narrative and counter-narrative of the gift: emotional dimensions of ceremonial exchange in southwestern New Britian, The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute (incorporating Man): 4(1):83-100. 4100.  Maschio, T., 1989: Metaphor, Ritual and Expression: The Person in Rauto Discourse and Ritual Practice, Ph.D. dissertation, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada. 4101.  Maschio, T., 1992: To remember the faces of the dead: mourning and the full sadness of memory in southwestern New Britain, Ethos, 20(4): 387-420. 4102.  Maschio, T., 1994: To Remember the Faces of the Dead: The Plenitude of Memory in Southwestern New Britain, Madison, WI: The University of Wisconsin Press. 4103.  Maschio, T., 1995: Mythic images and objects of myth in Rauto female puberty ritual, in Gender Rituals: Female Initiation in Melanesia, Eds Nancy Lutkehaus and Paul Roscoe: Routledge Press, pp. 131-161. 4104.  Maschio, T., 1995a: Narrative, memory, and the self in southwestern New Britain, Anthropology and Humanism, 20(2):98-116. 4105.  Maschio, Thomas, 1995b: “Mythic images and objects of myth in Rauto female puberty ritual”, in Gender Rituals: Female Initiation in Melanesia, Eds Nancy Lutkehaus and Paul Roscoe: Routledge Press, pp. 131-161. 4106.  Maschio, T., 1996: “Book Review: To sing with pigs is human: The concept of person in Papua New Guinea - Goodale, JC”, in Journal Of the Royal Anthropological Institute, 2(4): 756-757. 4107.  Maschio, Thomas, 1998: “The narrative and counter-narrative of the gift: emotional dimensions of ceremonial exchange in southwestern New Britian”, in The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute (incorporating Man): 4(1):83-100. 4108.  Mason, B.; Dixon, N., 2002: “Pago poised to blow its top”, in New Scientist, 176. 4109.  Mason, Keith, 1993: The world an absentee planter and his slaves made: Sir William Stapleton and his Nevis sugar estate, 1722-1740’, Bulletin of the John Rylands University Library of Manchester, 75:1, 103-31. 4110.  Mason, L., 1989: A Marshallese nation emerges from the political fragmentation of American Micronesia, PS, 13, 1, 1-46. 4111.  Massa, Françoise, Ed., 1999: Les Iles Atlantiques: Réalités et imaginaire. Actes du coloque, Rennes: Université Haute Bretagne Rennes 2, Equipe de Recherches interdisciplinaires en Langues romanes(ERILAR), [Rennes, France]: Université Rennes 2. 4112.  Massa, Jean-Michel, 1997: “Heurs et malheurs de Gilberto Freyre en Guinée portugaise et au Cap-Vert”, in Lusotopie, pp. 227-236. 4113.  Massey, Eithne, 2004: Legendary Ireland: a journey through Celtic places and myths, Madison : University of Wisconsin Press. 4114.  Massieu, Antonio de Béthencourt, 2002: Felipe V y el atlántico: III centenario del advenimiento de los Borbones: XIV Coloquio de Historia Canario-Americana, 2000 / coordinación de Coloquio de Historia Canario-Americana (14th: 2000: Las Palmas, Canary Islands), Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 4115.  Masson, Emile, 1984: Utopie des îles bienheureuses dans le Pacifique en l’an 1980 [précédé d’un discours inédit de 1917], Quimper & Le Guilvinec.

2009

CEHA

227

4116.  Massot i Muntaner, Josep, 1990: Els escriptors i la Guerra Civil a les Illes Balears, Barcelona: Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat, 1990. 4117.  Massot i Muntaner, Josep, 1995: El cònsol Alan Hillgarth i les Illes Balears (1936-1939), Barcelona: Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat. 4118.  Massot i Muntaner, Josep, 2002: Aspectes de la guerra civil a les Illes Balears, Barcelona, Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat. 4119.  Mata Olmo, Rafael, 2006: Desarrollo sostenibles, insularidad y gobierno del territorio: la experiencia del PTI de Menoría, Boletín de la Asociación de Geógrafos Españoles, Nº. 41. 4120.  Mata, Inocência, 1991: Insularidade e literatura, o mar e a originalidade da literatura santomense, RILP - Revista Internacional de Língua Portuguesa, nº 4, pp.119-124. 4121.  Mata, Inocência, 1993, Emergência e existência de uma literatura. O caso santomense, Lisboa, ALAC. 4122.  Mata, Inocência, 1998: Diálogo com as ilhas: sobre cultura e literatura de São Tome e Príncipe, Lisboa: Edições Colibri. 4123.  Mata, Inocência, 2004, A suave pátria. Reflexões politico-culturais sobre a sociedade sãotomense, Lisboa, Edições Colibri. 4124.  Mather, Alexander S., R. J. Ardern, 1981: An annotated bibliography of rural land use in the highlands and islands of Scotland, [Aberdeen, Grampian]: Dept. of Geography, University of Aberdeen, 1981. 4125.  Mathieu-Job, Martine, 2005: L’imaginaire de l’île dans l’œuvre romanesque de Loys Masson, Mustapha Trabelsi (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand. 4126.  Mathur, L. P., 1985: Kala pani: history of Andaman & Nicobar Islands, with a study of India’s freedom struggle, Delhi, India: Eastern Book Corp.. 4127.  Matibag, Eugenio, 2003: Haitian-Dominican Counterpoint: Insularity and Difference, Palgrave Macmillan. 4128.  Matos Rodríguez, FéLix V., 1999: “Spatial and Demographic Change in Nine Teenthcentury San Juan, Puerto Rico, 1800-1868”, in Journal of Urban History, May; vol. 25: pp. 477 – 513. 4129.  Matos, Artur Teodoro de, 1980:Transportes e comunicações em Portugal, Açores e Madeira, 1750-1850, Universidade dos Açores. 4130.  Matos, Artur Teodoro de, 1993: “Os donos do poder e a economia de S. Tomé e Príncipe no inicio de seiscentos”, in Mare Liberum, nº 6, Dezembro, pp. 179–187. 4131.  Matos, Artur Teodoro de, 2001: “Um importante relato sobre a situação política e social da ilha de Timor em finais do século XVII”, in Mare Liberum, nº 21–22, Janeiro–Dezembro, pp. 409–436. 4132.  Matos, Artur Teodoro de; Pinheiro, Luís da Cunha, 2001: «Os Moradores do Conselho da Praia da Ilha Terceira em Meados do Século XVII: Uma Estimativa dos Seus Rendimentos», pp. 371-389, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/ Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 4133.  MATOS, Artur Teodoro de, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses e José Guilherme Reis Leite (Dir.), 2008: História dos Açores, dos descobrimentos ao século XX, Instituto Açoriano de Cultura, 2 vols.

2009

228

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4134.  Matos, Manuel Cadafaz de, 1995: “Dos Primórdios da Imprensa Cristã nas Filipinas e a sua Relação com a Cultura Portuguesa no Oriente (1593-1640). Para uma História da Leitura dos Portugueses nas Molucas entre 1523 e 1530”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 463–485. 4135.  Matos, Rafael, 1996: Les iles Canaries: relais pour l’invention et la conquete du Nouveau Monde, Geographie et Cultures, no 18, p. p. 75-91. 4136.  Matsumoto, Masaaki,1986: Ryūkyūko ni okeru kokka no keisei, Tōkyō: Kōsei Shorin, Shōwa 61. 4137.  Matteaccioli, A., 1981: Diversité régionale et cohérence nationale: l’exemple des régions Méditerranéennes, Economica, Paris. 4138.  Mattei Burgarella, M.N., 1995: L’économie insulaire, thèse d’état, Paris. 4139.  Matthews, Elizabeth, edited by. 1995: Fishing for answers: women and fisheries in the Pacific islands, Suva, Fili: Women and Fisheries Network. 4140.  Matthews, Gelien, 2006: Caribbean slave revolts and the British abolitionist movement, Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press. 4141.  Matthews, P. J. and C. Gosden, 1997: Plant Remains from Waterlogged Sites in the Arawe Islands, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea: Implications for the History of Plant Use and Domestication, Economic botany, 51(2): 121. 4142.  Matthías Viðar Sæmundsson, 1982: Mynd nútímamannsins: um tilvistarleg viđhorf í sögum Gunnars Gunnarssonar, Reykjavík: Bókaútgáfa Menningarsjóđs. 4143.  Maude, H. E., 1968: Of islands and men: studies in Pacific History, Melbourne. 4144.  Maude, H. E., 1981: Slavers in Paradise. The Peruvian Labour Trade in Polynesia, 18621864, Australian National University Press, Canberra. 4145.  Maul, George A. (ed.), 1996: Small islands: marine science and sustainable development, Washington, DC: American Geophysical Union. 4146.  Maurer, Bill, 1997: Recharting the Caribbean: land, law, and citizenship in the British Virgin Islands, Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press. 4147.  Maurer, Bill, 2001: Islands in the Net: Rewiring Technological and Financial Circuits in the “Offshore” Caribbean, Comparative Studies in Society and History, Vol. 43, No. 3 (Jul.), pp. 467-501 4148.  Maurice, éd. par Pierre [et] Mathias Chauchat, 2002: Régime politique, développement et insularité dans l’hémisphère sud /; sous l’égide de l’Observatoire des relations internationales dans l’hémisphère sud, ORIHS -Observatoire des relations internationales dans l’hémisphère sud (Saint-Denis). Éditeur scientifique, Université Pierre MendèsFrance. 4149.  Mauro, F., 1986: “Sur la complémentarité des sociétés insulaires dans l’Atlantique” I Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, Funchal, T. II, 1363-1366. 4150.  Mäusbacher, Roland, 1991: Die jungquartäre Relief- und Klimageschichte im Bereich der Fildeshalbinsel Süd-Shetland Inseln, Antarktis, Heidelberg: Im Selbstverlag des Geographischen Instituts der Universität Heidelberg. 4151.  Mauzy, Diane K. & R. S. Milne, 2002: Singapore Politics: Under the People’s Action Party, Routledge. 4152.  Maximin, Colette, 2008: Dynamiques interculturelles dans l’aire caribéenne, Paris: Karthala. 4153.  May, P. and M. Tuckson, 1982: The Traditional Pottery of Papua New Guinea, Sydney, Bay

2009

CEHA

229

Books. 4154.  May, R.J. (ed.), 1986: Between two nations: the Indonesia-Papua New Guinea border and WestPapua nationalism, Canberra. 4155.  May, R.J., & M. Spriggs (eds.), 1990: The Bougainville crisis, Canberra. 4156.  May, Ron J., 1997 : Des promesses à la crise: économie politique de la Papousie-Nouvelle Guinée, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. 38, no 149, pp. 139-156. 4157.  Mayne, Richard, 1981: The Battle of Jersey, London: Phillimore. 4158.  Mayo, L.W., 1988: US administration and prospects for economic self-sufficiency; a comparison of Guam and select areas of Micronesia, PS, 11, 3, 53-76, 1988 4159.  Mayol Serra, Joan. 2005: Autonomia i medi ambient a les Balears (1983-2003), Palma: Edicions Documenta Balear. 4160.  Mayr, E. and J. Diamond, 2001: The Birds of Northern Melanesia: Speciation, Ecology, and Biogeography, New York, Oxford University Press. 4161.  Mayr, E.; Diamond, J. 2001: The Birds of Northern Melanesia: Speciation, Ecology, and Biogeography, New York, Oxford University Press. 4162.  Mazzega D., Musitelli J., 1980: L’organisation régionale en Italie, La documentation française, Paris. 4163.  Mazzetti, Ernesto, 1999: Capri, Ischia e Procida: dal mito alla metropoli, [Naples], Electa Napoli. 4164.  Mc Dougall, D., 1997: “Indian ocean regionalism: perspectives from Mauritius, the Seychelles and Reunion”, Round Table, n° 341, p. 53-66. 4165.  McAlister, Elizabeth, 2002: Rara! Vodou, Power, and Performance in Haiti and its Diaspora, Berkeley: University of California Press. 4166.  McAteer, William, 1991: Rivals in Eden: a history of the French settlement and British conquest of the Seychelles Islands, 1742-1818, Sussex, England: Book Guild. 4167.  McBride, J. David, 2006: ‘Contraband Traders, Lawless Vagabonds, and the British Settlement and Occupation of Roatan, Bay Islands, Honduras’, In Skowronek, Russell K.; Ewen, Charles Robin (ed.), X marks the spot: the archaeology of piracy (New perspectives on maritime history and nautical archaeology), Gainsville: University Press of Florida, 4463. 4168.  McBryde, I., 1989: To establish a commerce of this sort; Cross-cultural exchange at the Port Jackson settlement in Hardy, J. and Frost, A. (Eds), Studies from Terra Australis to Australia,  Canberra, Australian Academy of the Humanities. 4169.  McCall, G., 1994: ‘Nissology: A Proposal for Consideration’, Journal of the Pacific Society, Vol. 17, Nos. 2-3, pp. 1-8. 4170.  McCall, G., 1994a: “Nissology: the study of islands”, Journal of the Pacific society, n°2-3, p. 1-14. 4171.  McCall, G., 1996: “Clearing confusion in a disembedded world: the case for nissology”, Geographische Zeitschrift, nº2, p. 74-85. 4172.  McCall, G., 1996a: ‘Nissology; A Debate and Discourse from Below’. Disponível online em URL: www.southpacific.arts.unsw.edu.au/resourcenissology.htm. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009.

2009

230

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4173.  McCall, Grant, 2001: The Fateful Hoaxing of Margaret Mead: A Historical Analysis of her Samoan Research book review”, Australian Journal of Anthropology, April. 4174.  McCallan, E. A., 1986: Life on old St. David’s, Bermuda, Hamilton, Bermuda, Bermuda Historical Society. 4175.  McCammon, A. L. T., 1984: Currencies of the Anglo-Norman isles, London: Spink. 4176.  McCartney, Donald M., 2004: Bahamian Culture And Factors Which Impact Upon It. Pittsburgh, PA: Dorrance Publishing. 4177.  McClatchey, W. C., 1993: Studies on the Ethnobotany of the Island of Rotuma, Masters Thesis, Brigham Young University, Provo, Utah. 4178.  McColl, G. D., 1984: International trade in the Pacific Basin, Kensington, Australia : Centre for Applied Economic Research, University of New South Wales. 4179.  McCormack, John, 2002: Manors and seigneurial pretensions in the Channel Islands, In Meirion-Jones, Gwyn; Impey, Edward; Jones, Michael C. E. (ed.), The seigneurial residence in Western Europe AD c 800-1600 (BAR, International ser., 1088), Oxford: Archaeopress, 113-29. 4180.  McCormick, Larry R....[et. al.], 1984: Living with Long Island’s south shore, Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, c1984. 4181.  McCosker, A., 1998: Masked Eden: a history of the Australians in New Guinea, Maleny, Qld., Matala Press. 4182.  McCune, Shannon Boyd-Bailey, 1984: Islands in conflict in East Asian waters, Hong Kong: Asian Research Service, c1984. 4183.  McDaniel, C. N. and Gowdy, J. M., 2000: Paradise for Sale, University of California Press 4184.  McDermid, Jane, 2003: “Gender and geography: the schooling of poor girls in the highlands and islands of nineteenth-century Scotland”, in History of Education Review, 32:2 (2003), 30-45. 4185.  McDiarmid, Bunny, Elisabeth Mealey, 1997: Pacific paradise, nuclear nightmare: a critique of the proposal to use the Marshall Islands as a nuclear waste dump, Greenpeace, [edited by [Washington D.C.: Greenpeace USA]. 4186.  McDonald, Michelle Craig, 2005: ‘The Chance of the Moment: Coffee and the New West Indies Commodities Trade’, William and Mary Quarterly, 62:3 (2005), 441-72. 4187.  McDougall, Walter A., 1993: Let the Sea Make a Noise: A History of the North Pacific from Magellan to MacArthur, Basic Books, New York. 4188.  McDowell, N., 1988: Reproductive decision making and the value of children in rural Papua New Guinea, IASER Monograph No. 27, Port Moresby, Institute of Applied Social and Economic Research. 4189.  McElroy, C. J., 2001: Over the Lip of the World: Among the Storytellers of Madagascar, University of Washington Press. 4190.  McElroy, J.L. and de Albuquerque, K., 1986: The tourism demonstration effect in the Caribbean, Journal of Travel Research, 25(2), pp.31-34. 4191.  McElroy, Jerome L., 2003: Tourism Development in Small Islands across the World Tourism Development in Small Islands across the World, Geografiska Annaler, Series B, Human Geography. 4192.  McFeely, William S., 1994: Sapelo’s people: a long walk into freedom, New York: W.W. Norton & Co..

2009

CEHA

231

4193.  McGarrity, Maria, 2008: Washed by the Gulf Stream: the historic and geographic relation of Irish and Caribbean literature, Newark: University of Delaware Press; Cranbury, NJ: Associated University Presses. 4194.  McGavin, P. A., 1993: Economic security in Melanesia: key issues for managing contract stability and mineral resources development in Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands, and Vanuatu (Paul A.),Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, EastWest Center: Distributed by University of Hawaii Press. 4195.  McGavin, P. A., 1993: Industrialization in Papua New Guinea: unrealized potential?, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center: Distributed by University of Hawaii Press, Order Dept.. 4196.  McGhee, Robert, 1971: An Archaeological Survey of Western Victoria Island, N.W.T., Canada, Ottawa, Ont: National Museums of Canada. 4197.  McGlone, M.S., [et al.], 1997: “Late-glacial and Holocene vegetation and environment of Campbell Island, far southern New Zealand”, in The Holocene, vol. 7: pp. 1 - 12. 4198.  McGlone, Matt S.; Wilmshurst, Janet M.; Wiser, Susan K., 2000: “Lateglacial and Holocene vegetation and climatic change on Auckland Island, Subantarctic New Zealand”, in The Holocene, vol. 10: pp. 719 - 728. 4199.  McGlynn, Frank, 1980: Marginality and flux: an Afro-Caribbean community through two centuries, Thesis (Ph. D.)--University of Pittsburgh. 4200.  McGowan, Joe, 1998: Inishmurray: gale, stone, and fire: portrait of a fabled island, Mullaghmore, Co. Sligo, Aeolus. 4201.  McGowan, Joseph, 2004: Inishmurray: island voices, Mullaghmore, Co. Sligo: Aeolus. 4202.  McGowen, Tom, 1984: Midway and Guadalcanal, New York: F. Watts. 4203.  Mcgrath, T.B., 1984: Change and persistence among the people of Guam, journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 79, pp. 257-264 4204.  Mcgrath, T.B., 1987: Where church and state meet: responses to civil and religious power in colonial Micronesia, journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 85, p. p. 235-242. 4205.  McGregor, Andrew, 1988: The Fiji fresh ginger industry: a case study in non-traditional export development, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center. 4206.  McGregor, Andrew, 1992: Private sector development: policies and programs for the Pacific Islands, Honolulu, Hawaii: Published for the East-West Center by University of Hawaii Press. 4207.  McGregor, Andrew, Charles Eaton, Michael Manning, 1992: Commercial management companies in the agricultural development of the Pacific Islands, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center. 4208.  Mcgregor, D., 1994: Ho’I Ho’I Ea Hawaii; restoring Hawaiian sovereignty, in vom Busch W, et.al., eds, New politics in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 31-54. 4209.  McGregor, F.M., Duncan, David Barker,Sally Lloyd Evans, 1998: Resource sustainability and Caribbean development, Kingston, Jamaica, The Press, University of the West Indies. 4210.  McGrew, M., and C Brook, eds, 1998: Asia-Pacific in the new world order, Routledge. 4211.  McHugh, Patricia, 2003: A reading guide to Island of the Blue Dolphins by Scott O’Dell, New York, Scholastic. 4212.  McInnes, D. (ed), 2000: People of Papua New Guinea, South Melbourne, Vic., Pearson

2009

232

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Education. 4213.  McKee, D., Tisdell, C., 1990: Developmental issues in small island economies, New York, Praeger. 4214.  McKinnon, Susan, 1991: From a shattered sun: hierarchy, gender, and alliance in the Tanimbar Islands, Madison, Wis.: University of Wisconsin Press. 4215.  McKnight, Tom L., 1995: Oceania: the geography of Australia, New Zealand, and the Pacific Islands, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. 4216.  McLean, Mervyn, 1991: The structure of Tikopia music, Auckland, N.Z.: Archive of Maori and Pacific Music, Dept. of Anthropology, University of Auckland, 1991. 4217.  McLean, Mervyn, 1995: An annotated bibliography of Oceanic music and dance, Warren, Mich.: Harmonie Park Press. 4218.  McLeod, A., 2000: Island: the Collected Stories, Toronto, McClelland & Stewart. 4219.  McLoughlin, Roy, 1997: The sea was their fortune: a maritime history of the Channel Islands, Bradford-on-Avon: Seaflower. 4220.  McManners, Hugh, 2007: Forgotten voices of the Falklands, London: Ebury in association with the Imperial War Museum. 4221.  McNaughton, William Dick, 2003: Early congregational independency in the Highlands and Islands and the North-East of Scotland, Tiree: Trustees of Ruaig Congregational Church. 4222.  McNeil, Gordon, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project Working Paper B: Forestry Sector, Primary Industry Management Services, Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) CARE Australia. 4223.  McNeil, Robert A. and Barbara G. Valk, eds., 1990: Latin American Studies: A Basic Guide to Sources, 2nd ed., rev. and enl. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press. 4224.  McNeillie, Andrew, 2001: An Aran Keening, Dublin: Lilliput Press. 4225.  McPherson, Naomi, (also see Scaletta) 1985: Primogeniture and Primogenitor: Firstborn Child and Mortuary Ceremonies among the Kabana (Bariai), West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Ph.D. Thesis, Supervisor: Prof. David Counts. McMaster Univsersity. 4226.  McPherson, (Scaletta) Naomi, 1985a: “Death by sorcery: the social dynamics of dying in Bariai, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea”, in Aging and Its Transformations: Moving Towards Death in Pacific Societies, ASAO Monograph Series No. 10. D.A. Counts and D.R. Counts (eds.) University Press of America. Washington. Pp. 223-247. 4227.  McPherson, Naomi, 1991: A question of morality: sorcery and concepts of deviance among the Kabana, West New Britain, Anthropologica, 33 (1-2): 127-143. 4228.  McPherson, Naomi, 1992: Childbirth: A case history from West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Oceania, 57: 33 - 52. 4229.  McPherson, Naomi, 1994: “Modern obstetrics in a rural setting: women and reproduction in northwest New Britain” In Urban Anthropology and Studies of Cultural Systems and World Economic Development, Special Issue: Women and Development in the Pacific. J. Dickerson-Putnam (editor). 23(1): 39-72. 4230.  McPherson, Naomi, 1994: “The legacy of Moro the snake-man in Bariai”, In The Children of Kilibob: Creation, Cosmos, and Culture in Northeast New Guinea, eds. Ali Pomponio, David Counts, and Thomas Harding. Special Issue of Pacific Studies 17(4):153-182. 4231.  McPherson, Naomi, 1997: (reprint of 1985 article) “Death by sorcery: the social dynamics of dying in Bariai, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea” In Magic, Witchcraft and Religion:

2009

CEHA

233

An Anthropological Study of the Supernatural, Fourth Edition, Arthur C. Lehman and J.E. Meyers, eds. Mountainview, Ca: Mayfield Publishing Company. 4232.  McPherson, Naomi, 1997: “Firstborn House (Vol. 1.X.10); Birth House (Vol. 1.X.14); Kabana (Vol. 2.III.5)” In Encyclopedia of Vernacular Architecture of the World, (2 Vols.). Paul Oliver, ed. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, UK. 4233.  McPherson, Naomi, 2001: ““Wanted Young Man, Must Like Adventure”: Ian McCallum Mack, Patrol Officer”, Naomi McPherson, Ed. In Colonial New Guinea: Anthropological Perspectives, ASAO Monograph 19, Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press, Pp 82111. 4234.  McPherson, Naomi, 2001a: Wanted Young Man, Must Like Adventure, Ian McCallum Mack, Patrol Officer. Pp 82-111, In Naomi McPherson, Ed. In Colonial New Guinea: Anthropological Perspectives, ASAO Monograph 19. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press. 4235.  . McPherson, Naomi (ed.), 2001: In Colonial New Guinea: Anthropological Perspectives, ASAO Monograph 19. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press. 4236.  McPhetres, S.F., 1992: Challenges to democracy in the Commonwealth of the Northern Marianas Islands, in R Crocombe et.all., eds, IPS/USP, 217-38, McPhetres. A., 1983: Northern Marianas Islands; US commonwealth in R Teiwaki, et.al., eds Politics in Micronesia, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, 146-160, 1983. 4237.  McQuarrie, P., 1994: Strategic atolls; Tuvalu and the Second World War, IPS/USP 4238.  McQuarrie. Peter, 2007: Tokelau: People, atolls, and history, Peter McQuarrie Press 4239.  McQueen, Bob, 2005: Island base: Ascension Island in the Falklands War, Bromley, Kent: The author. 4240.  McRobie, George, 1988: An Island Future: Towards Sustainability and Self-Reliance. Institute of Islands Studies, Charlottetown Prince Edward Island. 4241.  McWatt, Mark A. editor, 1985: West Indian literature and its social context: proceedings of the Fourth Annual Conference on West Indian Literature, University of the West Indies, Cave Hill, Mona, St. Augustine, College of the Virgin Islands, University of Guyana / Conference on West Indian Literature (4th: 1984: University of the West Indies, Cave Hill Campus) St. Michael, Barbados: Dept. of English, U.W.I., Cave Hill. 4242.  McWilliams, Shirley M., 1982: “Rathlin Island”, in Family Links, 1:4, 23-25. 4243.  Mead, M., 1928/2001: Coming of Age in Samoa: A Psychological Study of Primitive Youth for Western Civilization, York, Harper Collins. 4244.  Mead, M., 1934/2002: Kinship in the Admiralty Islands, London, Transaction Publishers. 4245.  Mead, Margaret, 2001: Coming of age in Samoa: a psychological study of primitive youth for western civilisation, New York: Perennial Classics. 4246.  Mead, Margaret, 2001: Letters from the field, 1925-1975, [with an introduction by Jan Morris], New York: Perennial, 2001. 4247.  Mead, Margaret, 2002: Kinship in the Admiralty Islands, with a new introduction by Jeanne Guillemin, New Brunswick, N.J. Transaction Publishers. 4248.  Mediansky, edited by F.A., 1995: Strategic cooperation and competition in the Pacific Islands, Sydney: Centre for South Pacific Studies, University of New South Wales; [Pennsylvania]: Australia-New Zealand Studies Center, Pennsylvania State University. 4249.  Medina López, Javier, 1995: El español de América y Canarias desde una perspectiva

2009

234

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

histórica, prólogo, Elena M. Rojas, Madrid: Verbum. 4250.  Meditz, Sandra W., Dennis M. Hanratty, 1987, 1989: Caribbean Islands: islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional study, Federal Research Division, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C.: Federal Research Division. 4251.  Mee, C.; Doole, Jennifer, 1993: Aegean antiquities on Merseyside: the collections of Liverpool Museum and Liverpool University, Liverpool: National Museums and Galleries on Merseyside. 4252.  Meeks, Brian, Folke Lindahl, 2001: New Caribbean thought: a reader, Jamaica, University of the West Indies Press. 4253.  Méheux, Kirstie, 2007: Fiji Bibliographies & Indexes, Just Pacific. Disponível online em url:  http://www.justpacific.com/fiji/bibliographies/index.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 4254.  Mehr, Farhang, 1997: A colonial legacy: the dispute over the islands of Abu Musa, and the Greater and Lesser Tunbs, Lanham, Md., University Press of America. 4255.  Mein Smith, Philippa, 2005: A Concise History of New Zealand. Australia: Cambridge University Press. 4256.  Meintel, D.; Cohen, R. (ed.), 1983: African Islands and enclaves, In Cape Verde: Survival Without Self-Sufficiency; Beverly Hills; Londres; New Delhi: SAGE Publications, 1983. p. 145-164. 4257.  Meistersheim A., 1988: «Insularité, insularisme, iléité, quelques concepts opératoires». Cahiers de l’institut de développement des îles méditerranéennes, n°.1, p. 96-120. 4258.  Meistersheim, Anne (dir.), 1999: L’île laboratoire, Ajaccio: Editions Alain Piazzola. 4259.  Meistersheim, Anne, 1989: Images d’ileité, in Les îles européennes Politiques Insulaires, Corse, IDM. 4260.  Meistersheim, Anne, 2001: Territoire et insularité. Le cas de la Corse, Paris, 1991, puis Figures de l’île, Ajaccio. 4261.  Meistersheim. Anne, 2001a: Figures de l’île. Ajaccio, DCL. 4262.  Meistersheim, Anne, 2006: Le malentendu. Entre imaginaire insulaire et imaginaire continental, in Ethnologie française, 3 (Vol. 36), p. 503-508. 4263.  Melas, Emmanouēl M., 1985: The islands of Karpathos, Saros and Kasos in the Neolithic and Bronze Age, Göteborg, P. Åströms förlag. 4264.  Meleisea, M., 1987: Lagaga; a short history of Western Samoa, IPS/USP. 4265.  Meleisea, M., 1987a: The making of modern Samoa: traditional authority & colonial administrationin the modern history of Western Samoa, Suva. 4266.  Meleisea, M., and Schoeffel, P., 1996: Discovering outsiders, in Denoon D, ed, 1996, The Cambridge history of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, Melbourne, pp.119-51. 4267.  Meleisea, Penelope Schoeffel, 1996a: Sociocultural issues and economic development in the Pacific Islands, [Manila, Philippines]: Office of Pacific Operations and Social Development Division, Asian Development Bank. 4268.  Melià Ques, Josep, 1999: Nacionalisme i constitució: una perspectiva balear, pròleg de Joan Oliver Araujo, Mallorca: Editorial Moll. 4269.  Meliá, Juan Tous; Piqué, Alfredo Herrera, textos. 1995: Las Palmas de Gran Canaria a través de la cartografía, 1588-1899, [Las Palmas]: Museo Militar Regional de Canarias:

2009

CEHA

235

Casa de Colón: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 4270.  Mellén Blanco, Francisco. 1986. Manuscritos y documentos españoles para la historia de la isla de Pascua. Madrid: CEHOPU. 4271.  Meller, N., 1980: On matters constitutional in Micronesia, Journal of Pacific History, 15, 83-92. 4272.  Meller, N., 1983: Hawaii; 50th state, in Afeaki E, et.al., Politics in Polynesia, IPS/USP, 22938. 4273.  Meller, N., 1990: The Micronesian executive; the FSM and the Marshall Islands, PS, 14, 1, 55-72, 1990. 4274.  Meller, Norman, 1985: Constitutionalism in Micronesia, assistance of Terza Meller, Honolulu, Hawaii, Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University--Hawaii Campus: Distributed for the Institute for Polynesian Studies by the University of Hawaii Press. 4275.  Melo (de), J., Panagariya, A., 1993: New dimensions in regional integration. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. 4276.  Melo, João de, 1999: “O «Complexo de Ítaca» nas literaturas insulares – Açores, Madeiras e Cabo Verde”, in Camões. Revista de Letras e Culturas Lusófonas, Julho/Setembro. 4277.  Melo, Lúcia da Costa, 1983: Dinis da Luz sob o signo da insularidade: palestra proferida por ocasião das festas do Concelho do Nordeste de 1983, Câmara Municipal do Concelho de Nordeste. 4278.  Melville, Herman, 1997: Les îles enchantées, Paris. 4279.  Ménanteau, L.; Vanney, J.-R. (cood. scient.), 1997: Atlas côtier du Nord-Est d’Haïti. Environnement et patrimoine culturel de la région de Fort-Liberté, Port-au-Prince/Nantes. Projet “Route 2004”. Ministère de la Culture (Haïti)/PNUD. 4280.  Menard, Henry W., 1986: Islands, New York, Scientific American Library, Distributed by W.H. Freeman. 4281.  Mendes, John, 1986: Cote ce Cote la: Trinidad & Tobago Dictionary. Arima, Trinidad. 4282.  MENDES, José Manuel de Oliveira, 2003: Do ressentimento ao reconhecimento: vozes, identidades e processos político nos Açores (1974-1996), Porto, Edições Afrontamento. 4283.  Mendoza de Arce, Daniel, 2006: Music in North America and the West Indies from the discovery to 1850: a historical survey, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press. 4284.  Meneses, Avelino de Freitas de, 1993: Os Açores nas encruzilhadas de Setecentos (17401770), Universidade dos Açores, 2 vols. 4285.  Mengual, Paul-Gabriel, 1996: Le Cirque de Salazie (Ile de la Réunion): Analyse des risques naturels et critique des opérations de développement local; sous la dir. de: M. le prof. J. L. Ballais, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Mémoire de Maîtrise: Géographie physique: Aix-Marseille. 4286.  Menton, LK; Tamura, E.H., 1999: A history of Hawaii, CDRG/University of Hawaii. 4287.  Mercado, Leonardo N., ed. 2001: Old cultures, renewed religions: the search for cultural identity in a changing world, Manila: Logos Publications. 4288.  Mercedes Suárez, Lucía de las, 1999: Caribbean women claiming their islands, Thesis (Ph.D.), Duke University. 4289.  Mercer, John, 1980: The Canary Islanders: their prehistory, conquest, and survival, London:

2009

236

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Collings. 4290.  Mercer, Julia E., 1982: Bermuda settlers of the 17th century: genealogical notes from Bermuda, with an index by Judith McGhan, Baltimore: Genealogical Pub. Co.. 4291.  Mercer, P., 1995: White Australia defied; Pacific Islander settlement in North Queensland, Townsville, James Cook University. 4292.  Merceron, François, 2005: Dynamiques démographiques contemporaines de la Polynésie française: héritage colonial, pluri-ethnisme et macrocéphalie urbaine, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin, Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index246. html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 4293.  Merchant, S., 1989: Australia’s defence cooperation program and regional security, in Hegarty DW and Polomka P, eds, The security of Oceania in the 1990s, Canberra ANU pp.71-8. 4294.  Merediz, Eyda M., 2004: Refracted images: the Canary Islands through a New World lens: transatlantic readings, Tempe, Ariz.: Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies. 4295.  Meriç, Recep, 1982: Metropolis in Ionien: Ergebnisse einer Survey-Unternehmung in den Jahren 1972-1975, Konigstein, Ts: Verlag Anton Hain, 1982. 4296.  Merkistein, Suni, 1997: Føroysk telving í 20. øld: úr Avhaldinum til Jerevan, Tórshavn, Talvsamband Føroya, (ilha Faroe). 4297.  Merle, M., 1996: Un système international sans territoire ? In Badie B. et Smouts M. C., dir., L’international sans territoires. Cultures et conflits, Paris, L’harmattan, p. 289-309. 4298.  Merleau-Ponty Claire et Cécile Mozziconacci, 2006: Histoires des Maori, un peuple d’Océanie, d’après les contes recueillis par George Grey, Arles. 4299.  Merler. Alberto, 1993: I gruppi dirigenti corsi: questioni di insularità, identità, sviluppo, dipendenza, autonomia, in C. saint-blancat (a cura di), La Corsica: identità etnico linguistica e sviluppo, Cedam, Padova. 4300.  Merler. Alberto, 1993: International Parks: Transbourdary Cooperatio between the Islands of Corsican and Sardinia, in Insula, 2. 4301.  Merler, Alberto, 1993a: L’autonomia insulare che si fà capacità di autogoverno. Una prospettiva per la gestione ambientale naturale ed umano, in Quaderni bolotanesi, 19. 4302.  Merler. Alberto, 1993-94: Gesamttirol als eine Insel, in Tiroler Almanach, 23 Jahrgang. 4303.  Merler. Alberto, 1994: “Res mediterranea” e cooperazione sardo-corsa, in Civiltà del mare, 6. 4304.  Merler. Alberto, 1994a: Shaki Kankyôteki Na, Tohshosei, Jiritsu. Chichûkai Sekai Ni Okeru Ichikôsatu (Parchi socio-ambientali, insularità e autonomia. Riferimenti al mondo mediterraneo), in Sangyô to Kyôiku, 2. 4305.  Merler. Alberto, 1994b: Espace méditerranéen et communications interinsulaires, in Res mediterranea, 1. 4306.  Merler. Alberto, 1996: Argomentazioni a proposito di interculturalità insulare e scuola come servizio sociale, in Quaderni bolotanesi, 22. 4307.  Merler. Alberto, 1996a: Strategie globali, mari e isole negli accordi transfrontalieri europei. Parte prima: dall’interreg corso-sardo all’imedoc fra Baleari, Corsica e Sardegna, in Civiltà del mare, 3/4. 4308.  Merler. Alberto, con M. Niihara, 1996: Le isole mediterranee e Okinawa, in Annuario degli

2009

CEHA

237

studi su Okinawa, 2, 1996. 4309.  Merler. Alberto, con M.L. Piga, 1996: Regolazione sociale, Insularità, Percorsi di sviluppo, Edes, Sassari. 4310.  Merler. Alberto, 1997: La prospettiva insulare corso-sarda del mediterraneo, Quaderni bolotanesi, 23. 4311.  Merler. Alberto, 1997a: Strategie globali, mari e isole negli accordi transfrontalieri europei. Parte seconda: rapporti nei mari e fra i mari europei, in Civiltà del mare, 1. 4312.  Merler. Alberto, 1999: La Sardegna terra insulare. Non isolata, in S. Cubeddu (a cura di), L’ora dei sardi, Edizioni Fondazione Sardinia, Cagliari. 4313.  Merouses, Nikos, 2002: Chios. Physiko periballon & katoikese apo te neolithike epoche mechri to telos tes archaiothtas. (Chios. Natural Environment & Habitation from the Neolithic Age to the end of Antiquity) pg. 80. Papyros. 4314.  Merrill, Tim, ed., 1992: Guyana: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the Library of Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/guyana/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4315.  Mervart, A. M., 1980: The Andamanese, Nicobarese, and hill tribes of Assam / by A.M. Meerwarth; with a new introduction by N.N. Acharyya, Gauhati: Spectrum Publications: sole distributors, United Publishers. 4316.  Meti, Lauofo, 2002: Samoa: The Making of the Constitution. Apia: Government of Samoa. 4317.  Metropolitan Museum of Art (New York, N.Y.), 1987: The Pacific Islands, Africa, and the Americas, introductions by Douglas Newton, Julie Jones, Kate Ezra, New York, Metropolitan Museum of Art. 4318.  Metz, Helen Chapin ed., 1994: Seychelles: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the Library of Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/seychelles/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4319.  Metz, Helen Chapin, ed., 1994: Madagascar: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the Library of Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/madagascar/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4320.  Metz, Helen Chapin edited by. 1995: Indian ocean: five island countries, Washington, D.C.: Federal Research Division, Library of Congress: For sale by the Supt. of Docs., U.S. G.P.O. 4321.  Metzner, J., 1980: Disequilibrium of agricultural regions in the eastern lesser sunda islands: consequences for geoecological regional planning, Applied sciences and development, no 15, pp. 62-81. 4322.  Meyer, Eric, 2001: Sri Lanka, Entre particularismes et mondialisation, Paris: La Documentation Francaise. 4323.  Meyer, Manulani Aluli, 2001: Our Own Liberation: Reflections on Hawaiian Epistemology. The Contemporary Pacific, 13:124–148. 4324.  Meyers, Bruce F., 2004: Swift, silent, and deadly: Marine amphibious reconnaissance in the Pacific, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press. 4325.  Meyerson, B, D.J. Seyler, and J.F. Hornbeck, 1989: Trinidad and Tobago in Islands of the Commonwaelth Caribbean: a regional study, S.W. Meditz and D.M. Hanratty (eds.). Washington DC: GPO, pp. 161-254. 4326.  Michal, E., 1993: Protected states; the political status of the FSM and the RMI, The

2009

238

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Contemporary Pacific, 5, 2, 303-32. 4327.  Michal, E.J., 1992: American Samoa or Eastern Samoa?; the potential for American Samoa to become freely associated with the United States, The Contemporary Pacific, 4, 1, 13760. 4328.  Michalon, Thierry (Directeur scientifique); Daniel, Justin (Préfacier), 2006: Entre assimilation et émancipation: L’Outre-mer français dans l’impasse?, Paris: Editions Les Perséides, 2006. 4329.  Michell, John F., 1994: At the center of the world: polar symbolism discovered in Celtic, Norse, and other ritualized landscapes, New York, N.Y.: Thames and Hudson. 4330.  Micó Pérez, Rafael. 2005: Cronología absoluta y periodización de la prehistoria de las Islas Baleares, Oxford: Archaeopress. 4331.  Middeke, Michael, 2000: “Anglo-American nuclear weapons cooperation after the Nassau Conference: the British policy of interdependence”, in Journal of Cold War Studies, 2:2, 69-96. 4332.  Middlebrook, Martin, 2001: The Falklands War, 1982, Rev. edn. London: Penguin. 4333.  Middleton, Angela, 2007: “Silent Voices, Hidden Lives : Archaeology, Class and Gender in the CMS Missions, Bay of Islands, New Zealand, 1814–1845”, in International Journal of Historical Archaeology, 11:1, 1-31. 4334.  Midgley, M.,1983: ‘Duties Concerning Islands’ in R. Elliot & A. Gare, eds., Environmental Philosophy, St. Lucia, University of Queensland Press, pp. 166-181. 4335.  Midian, Andrew, 1999: The value of indigenous music in the life and ministry of the church: the United Church in the Duke of York Islands Boroko, Papua New Guinea, Institute of Papua New Guinea Studies. 4336.  Midwinter, Arthur, Keating, Michael and Mitchell, James, 1991: Politics and Public Policy in Scotland. MacMillan Education Ltd, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire and London. 4337.  Mignot, Arthur T., 2001: ‘”Mon Plaisir” and the Methodists of Guernsey’, Proceedings of the Wesley Historical Society, 53:2, 42-45. 4338.  Mijares, Armand Salvador B., 2007: Unearthing prehistory: the archaeology of Northestern Luzon, Philippine Islands, Oxford: John and Erica Hedges, Ltd.. 4339.  Miles, John,1997: Infectious diseases: colonising the Pacific?, Dunedin. 4340.  Miles, Melinda and Eugenia Charles, eds., 2004: Let Haiti Live: Unjust U.S. Policies Toward Its Oldest Neighbor, Coconut Creek, FL: Educa Vision Inc.. 4341.  Miles, Suzannah Smith, 2004: Writings of the islands: Sullivan’s Island and Isle of Palms, Charleston, SC: History Press. 4342.  Millares Torres, Agustín; Godoy, José Ramón, 1977-1981: Historia general de las islas Canarias, complementada con elaboraciones actuales de diversos especialistas, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cedirca. 4343.  Millares, Míchel Jorge, 2006: Isla: el turismo en la provincia de Las Palmas, 1946-1969: entre Néstor y el Desarrollismo, Tenerife: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 4344.  Miller, Brian M., 1988: Archaeological investigations on the north coast of Rota, Mariana Islands, contributions by Melinda S. Allen ... [et al.], Carbondale: Southern Illinois University. 4345.  Miller, Daniel, 1980: Settlement and diversity in the Solomon Islands, Man, 15: 451-466.

2009

CEHA

239

4346.  Miller, George (editor), 1996: To The Spice Islands And Beyond: Travels in Eastern Indonesia, Oxford University Press, Paperback, 3. 4347.  Miller, George, 2004: Meta-Guide to Indonesia: Annotated Bibliography of post-1990 Bibliographies on Indonesia. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/ WWWVLPages/IndonPages/Meta-Bibliography.html.Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4348.  Miller, James, 2003: 1948 Feb. 19-. The North Atlantic front: Orkney, Shetland, Faroe, and Iceland at war. Edinburgh: Birlinn. 4349.  Miller, Kenneth E. (Editor), 1991: Greenland: Bibliography (World bibliographical series) (Hardcover) by ABC-CLIO Ltd (Jun). 4350.  Miller, Rebecca Susan, 2007: Carriacou string band serenade: performing identity in the eastern Caribbean, Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University Press. 4351.  Millien, Virginie, 1999: Taille des incisives et structure de taille des communautés de rongeurs: aspects écologiques et évolutifs en milieu insulaire, Thèse de doctorat: Géologie et Paléontologie: Montpellier 2. 4352.  Mills Peter R., 2003: Neo in Oceania. Foreign Vessels Owned by Hawaiian Chiefs before 1830, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 38, No. 1, pp.53-67. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/geog_mr/geog122online/13-economy/mills.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 4353.  Mills, L., 1991: Smallholder Oil Palm Productivity Study, Bath UK, Landell Mills/Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 4354.  Mills, Stevenson Matthew, 2003: Wars End on Okinawa: In Search of Captain Robert Fowler, Journal of Military History, 67:2. 4355.  Milne, David, 2001: “Prince Edward Island; Politics in a Beleaguered Garden,” in Brownsey, K. and Howlett, M. (editors), The Provincial State in Canada, Broadview Press, Toronto. 111-139. 4356.  Milne, eds., 2000: Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 214-229. 4357.  Milne, S., 1987: The cook Islands tourist industry: ownership and planning, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. vol. 28, no 2, p. p. 119-138. 4358.  Minamura, Takeichi, 1995: Sengo Nihon no keisei to hatten: senryō to kaikaku no hikaku kenkyū, Tōkyō: Nihon Keizai Hyōronsha. 4359.  Minerva, N. – 1995: “Le cercle magique: stratégies de protection du milieu insulaire dans le mythe et l’utopie”, In: Racault, J. M. & Marimoutou, J. C. L’insularité, thématique et representations, Paris, L’Harmatan. 4360.  Mininberg, Emeshe Juhász, 1996: Estética insular y poética de la identidad en el Caribe: Paradiso, L’isolé soleil y Omeros, Dissertation Abstracts Internacional, 57[6], 2486A. Yale University. 4361.  Minnesota Museum of Art, 1981: Melanesian images: an exhibition of ritual objects from islands in the South Pacific, March 10-May 17, 1981, presented by Minnesota Museum of Art, Saint Paul, Minn.: The Museum. 4362.  Miossec, J.-M., 1994: “Malte en transition: démographie, économie et gestion de l’espace”. Revue du monde musulman et de la Méditerranée, n° 71, p. 199-216. Miranda, Nuno, 1961: Literatura e insularidade, In: Cabo Verde: boletim de propaganda e informação. Ano XIII, n.º 145 (Outubro de 1961), p. 1-4. 4363.  Miras, C. de, 1987: L’économie martiniquaise: développement sans croissance, in: Iles,

2009

240

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

insularité, insularisme, CRET, Talence, pp 399-420. (Collection Iles et Archipels, n°8). 4364.  Miras, Claude de, 1997: Le développement des petites économies insulaires relève-t-il encore de l’économie de marché ?, Revue tiers monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 79-98. 4365.  Miras, Claude de., 1985: Le secteur de la menuiserie-ébénisterie à Fort de France (Martinique): conditions de production et de reproduction, Fort de France: ORSTOM. 4366.  Miras, Claude de; Bonnemaison, JoÙl (ed.); Freyss, J. (ed.), Le développement des petites économies insulaires relève-t-il encore de l’économie de marché? In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, revue tiers monde, 1997, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 79-98. 4367.  Mirbagheri, Farid, 1989: Cyprus and International Peacemaking, Hurst. 4368.  Miró, Santiago, Maestros depurados en Baleares durante la Guerra Civil, presentación Manuel Tuñón de Lara, Palma, Mallorca: L. Muntaner. 4369.  Mitcham, Allison, 1984: Offshore islands of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, illustrated by Peter Mitcham, Hantsport, N.S.: Lancelot Press. 4370.  Mitcham, Allison, 1986: Paradise or purgatory: island life in Nova Scotia & New Brunswick, illustrated by Peter Mitcham., Hantsport, N.S.: Lancelot Press. 4371.  Mitchell, A., 1989: Fragile paradise: nature and man in the Pacific, London. 4372.  Mitchell, Alison; [et al.], 1987: Pre-1855 gravestone inscriptions in Bute & Arran: an index, Edinburgh. 4373.  Mitchell, Frank, 1989: Man and environment in Valencia Island, Dublin: Royal Irish Academy. 4374.  Mitchell, James, 1996: The old castle’ on Mutton Island, Journal of the Galway Archaeological and Historical Society, 48 (1996), 98-103. 4375.  Mitchell, R.E., and D.G. Reid, 2001: Community Integration: Island Tourism in Peru, Annals of Tourism Research, 28(1), pp.113-139. 4376.  Mitchell, W. E., 1992: “Introduction: Mother Folly in the Islands” In: W. E. Mitchell, Ed., Clowning as Critical Practice: performance humor in the South Pacific, Pittsburgh, University of Pittsburgh Press, pp. 3-57. 4377.  Mitchison, R., 2002: A history of Scotland, London: Routledge. 4378.  Mittelman, J., 1996: “Rethinking the “new regionalism” in the context of globalization”, Global Governance, n°2, p. 189-213. 4379.  Mittermeier R.A.; [et al.], 2006: Lemurs of Madagascar, Conservation International, Washington D.C. 4380.  Mittermeier, R.A.; [et al.], 1999: Hotspots – Earth’s Biologically Richest and Most Endangered Terrestrial Ecoregions, Cemex S.A., Mexico. 4381.  Miyagi, Eishō, 1982: Ryūkyū shisha no Edo nobori, Tōkyō: Daiichi Shobō, Shōwa 57. 4382.  Miyata, Toshihiko, 1984: Ryūkyū Shinkoku kōekishi: nishū “Rekidai hōan” no kenkyū, Nantō bunka sōsho – 7,Miyata Toshihiko cho. 4383.  Miyazato, Seigen, 1986: Amerika no Okinawa seisaku, Naha-shi: Niraisha, Yamaguchiken Shimonoseki-shi, Hatsubaimoto Shin Nihon Kyōiku Tosho Kabushiki Kaisha. 4384.  Moberg, Mark, 2008: Slipping away: banana politics and fair trade in the Eastern Caribbean, New York: Berghahn Books. 4385.  Moerenhout, Jacques-Antoine 2006: Voyages aux îles du Grand Océan - Géographie: les

2009

CEHA

241

tribulations d’un négociant, armateur et ethnographe en Polynésie orientale, 1828-1834, Besançon. 4386.  Moghaddam, Hossein H., 2005: ‘Anglo-Iranian relations over the disputed islands in the Persian Gulf: constraints on rapprochement’, In Martin, Vanessa (ed.), Anglo-Iranian relations since 1800 (Royal Asiatic Society books) (London: Routledge), 148-60. 4387.  Mohamed, A., 2002: The Diplomacy of Micro-states, La Haye, Netherlands Institute of International Relations, Discussion Papers in Diplomacy, n° 78. 4388.  Mohamed, Naseema; Kalus, Ludvik; Guillot, Claude; Dos Santos Alves, Jorge M.; Doumenge, François, 2005: Les Maldives, Archipel (Paris), no 70, p. 3-143. 4389.  Moir, G. D., 1995: The history of the Falklands, Croydon, Surrey. 4390.  Moirab, A.A., 1984: Etudes economique et sociale comparees de quatre petits ensembles Insulaires: Comores, Maurice, Reunion, Seychelles, Bordeaux: Institut de Geographie et D’Etudes Regionales, Universite de Bordeaux 3, Talence, France. 4391.  Moitt, Bernard, 2004: Sugar, slavery, and society: perspectives on the Caribbean, India, the Mascarenes, and the United States, Gainesville: University Press of Florida. 4392.  Mojetta, Angelo, Andrea and Antonella Ferrari, 2000: Wonders of the coral reefs: the Red Sea, the Maldives, Malaysia, the Caribbean, Vercelli, Italy: White Star. 4393.  Moles A., 1982: «Nissonologie ou sciences des îles», L’Espace géographique, n°4, p. 281289. 4394.  Moll, V. P. (Verna P.) compiler. 1991: Virgin Islands, Oxford, England; Santa Barbara, Calif.: Clio Press, [bibliografia]. 4395.  Monaghan, David, 1998: The Falklands War: myth and countermyth, Palgrave Macmillan. 4396.  Monberg, T., 1980: Pacific Studies in Denmark: Research on the Islands of Rennell and Bellona, Annual Newsletter of Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies, 14:71-82. 4397.  Monberg, Torben & Kuschel, Rolf, 1981: Na Tautupu’a o Mugaba ma Mungiki / Tales from Rennell and Bellona. Copenhagen: National Museum of Denmark, 78 pp., illustrated. In Rennellese and English 4398.  Monberg, Torben, 1991: Bellona Island beliefs and rituals, drawings by Pernille Monberg, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 4399.  Monberg, T., 1996: The Bellonese: High, Lowóand Equal: Leadership and Change on a Polynesian Outlier in the Solomon Islands, In Essays Presented to Sir Raymond Firth on the Occasion of His 90th Birthday, edited by R. Feinberg and K. A. Watson-Gegeo. London: Athlone Press. 4400.  Monberg, T., 2002: Bellona and Rennell Islanders, Encyclopedia of World Cultures Supplement, edited by M. Ember, C. R. Ember, and Ian Skoggard, New York: Macmillan Reference USA, Gale Group, Thomson Learning. Pp. 46-50. 4401.  Monberg, T., 2002a: Oceaniens Kunst, In Konstens V”rldshistoria, Utomeuropeisk Konst, edited by G. Paulsson and M. Gelfer-J¯rgensen, Lund: Natur og Kultur. Pp. 450-473. 4402.  Monge, J.T., 1997: Puerto Rico: The Trials of the Oldest Colony in the World, New Haven: Yale University Press. 4403.  Monje, S.C., 1992: The Azores in the Atlantic World: Geostrategic factor, In Camões Center Quarterly, vol 3. (pp. 2-12). 4404.  Monk,, K.A.; Fretes, Y., Reksodiharjo-Lilley, G., 1996, 1997: The Ecology of Nusa Tenggara and Maluku. Hong Kong: Periplus Editions Ltd.

2009

242

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4405.  Monnerie, Denis, 1988: Nitu. Les vivants, les morts et le cosmos selon la société de MonoAlu (Iles Salomon), Ph.D. Thesis, Lille, France: Universite de Lille. 4406.  Monnier, Yves, 1983: L’Immuable et le changeant: étude de la partie française de l’Ile de Saint-Martin, Talence: Centre d’études de géographie tropicale du C.N.R.S: Centre de recherche sur les espaces tropicaux de l’université de Bordeaux III. 4407.  Monreal, Edelweiss, 2000: Brandán, el guardián de la fantasía: el secreto de San Borondón, ilustrado por Violeta Monreal, León, Everest. 4408.  Monro. Donald, 2003: Description of the Occidental, i.e., Western Islands of Scotland, Birlinn Ltd; New ed of 1703 ed edition (6 Jan 2003). 4409.  Monsod, jointly with Solita, Akilagpa Sawyerr et al, 1995: Sustainable Development & International Economic Cooperation, Nations General Assembly 50th session 1/50/501, 33 pages. 4410.  Monteil, Michel. 2005: L’émigration française vers Jersey, 1850-1950, Aix-en-Provence: Publications de l’université de Provence. 4411.  Montes, Manuel F., 1993: The Pacific Islands’ trade and investment: a brief historical review and discussion of prospects / Manuel F. Montes and Gerard A. Finin. Honolulu, Hawaii (1777 East-West Rd., Honolulu 96848): East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program. 4412.  Montesdeoca Medina, J. M., 2001: “Del enciclopedismo grecolatino a los islarios humanitas. Breve historia de un género”, Revista de Filologia, 19, p. 229-253. 4413.  Montesdeoca, J.M., 2004: Los islarios de la época del humanismo: el Insulis de Domenico Silvestri, edición y traducción, La Laguna, Servicio de Publicaciones Universidad de La Laguna. (CD-ROM edition). 4414.  Montgomery, Michael, edited by. 1994: The crucible of Carolina: essays in the development of Gullah language and culture, Athens: University of Georgia Press. 4415.  Moore, Janie Gilliard, 1980: “Africanisms among Blacks of the Sea Islands”, in Journal of Black Studies, vol. 10: pp. 467 - 480. 4416.  Moore, Brian L., Swithin R. Wilmot, 1998: Before & after 1865: education, politics and regionalism in the Caribbean: in honour of Sir Roy Augier, Kingston, Ian Randle Publishers. 4417.  Moore, C., 1991: The life and death of William Bairstow Ingham; PNG in the 1870s, JRHSQ, Vol 14/10, pp.393-432. 4418.  Moore, C., 1997: Decolonising the history of Australia’s South Sea Islanders, in Denoon D, ed, Emerging from empire; decolonisation in the Pacific, Canberra, RSPacS, ANU, pp.194-203. 4419.  Moore, C. R., 1985: Kanaka; a history of Melanesian Mackay, Port Moresby, IPNGS/UPNG Press. 4420.  Moore, C.R., 1990: Revising the revisionists; the historiography of immigrant Melanesians in Australia 1847-1990, Pacific Studies, Vol 15, 2, 61-86. 4421.  Moore, C.R., 1992: New Guinea History; a bibliography of journal articles on Papua New Guinea and Irian Jaya, St Lucia, University of Queensland. 4422.  Moore, C.R., 1992a: Pacific History Journal bibliography, PMB, ANU, Canberra. 4423.  Moore, C.R., 1993: Australia’s Pacific Islanders 1906-1991, in Reynolds, H. (ed) Race relations in north Queensland, 2nd Edition. 4424.  Moore, C.R., 1993a: The counterculture of survival; Melanesians in the Mackay district

2009

CEHA

243

of Queensland 1865-1906, in Lal, B.V., Munro D. and Beechert, E.D. (eds), Plantation workers, Honolulu, UH Press. 4425.  Moore, C. R., 1997: Australia in the world; nation, community and identity, (Documents), in Evans, R., Moore, C., Saunders, K. and B. Jamison, eds, 1997, 1901 Our Future’s past; documenting Australia’s federation,  Sydney, Macmillan,  211-29. 4426.  Moore, C. R., 1997a: Quanchi M and Bennett S, 1997, Australian South Sea Islanders; a curriculum resource for secondary schools, Brisbane, AusAID/Queensland Government. 4427.  Moore, C. R., 1999: A Papua New Guinea Political Chronicle 1967-1991, Bathurst, Crawford 4428.  Moore, C. R., 1999a: Goodbye Queensland, Goodbye White Australia, Goodbye Christians; Australia’s South Sea Islander community and deportation 1901-1908, The New Federalist, Vol 4, pp.22-29. 4429.  Moore, C. R., 2000: Refocussing indigenous trade and power; the dynamics of early foreign contact and trade in Torres Strait, Cape York and Southeast New Guinea in the Nineteenth century, Journal of the RHSQ, Vol 18, No 7, pp.289-302. 4430.  Moore, C.R., 2001: The South Sea Islanders of Mackay, Queensland, Australia, in Fitzpatrick J, ed, Endangered peoples of Oceania, Westport, Greenwood Press, pp.16781. 4431.  Moore, Clive, 1992: Pacific history journal bibliography, Canberra: Pacific Manuscripts Bureau, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. Disponível online em url: ftp://coombs.anu.edu.au/coombspapers/coombsarchives/pacific-asianhistory/pac-jnl-bibl.txt // http://coombs.anu.edu.au/WWWVLPacific/Pac-Jrnl-Bibliography. html#search. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4432.  Moore, Clive, 2003: New Guinea: Crossing Boundaries and History. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 4433.  Moore, Clive; Leckie, Jacqueline; Munro, Doug edited by, 1990: Labour in the South Pacific, Townsville: James Cook University of Northern Queensland. 4434.  Moore, David W., 2005: The Other British Isles: a history of Shetland, Orkney, the Hebrides, Isle of Man, Anglesey, Scilly, Isle of Wight, and the Channel, Jefferson (N.C.); London: McFarland. 4435.  Moore, David W., 2005: The other British Isles: a history of Shetland, Orkney, the Hebrides, Isle of Man, Anglesey, Scilly, Isle of Wight, and the Channel Islands, Jefferson (NC): McFarland. 4436.  Moore, edited by Brian L., and Swithin R. Wilmot, 1998: Before & after 1865: education, politics and regionalism in the Caribbean: in honour of Sir Roy Augier, Kingston: Ian Randle Publishers. 4437.  Moore, Janie Gilliard, 1980: “Africanisms among Blacks of the Sea Islands”, in Journal of Black Studies, Jun; vol. 10: pp. 467 - 480. 4438.  Moore, R., 2000: “The debris of empire: the 1981 Nationality Act and the Oceanic Dependent Territories”, in Immigrants & Minorities, 19:1, 1-24. 4439.  Morales Lezcano, Víctor, 1992: Los ingleses en Canarias, Islas Canarias: Viceconsejería de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno de Canarias. 4440.  Morales Lezcano, Víctor, Javier Ponce Marrero (coordinadores), 2006: Canarias y el noroeste de África: historia de una frontera: actas del Primer Simposio, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, 8 de julio de 2006, [Las Palmas de Gran Canaria]: Gobierno de Canarias, Presidencia del Gobierno, Dirección General de Relaciones con África: Universidad de

2009

244

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones. 4441.  Morat, P.; Veillon, J.M.; Mac kee, H.S., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Affinites floristiques des phanerogames de la foret dense humide neo-caledonienne, Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 81-92. 4442.  Moré, Gustavo Luis, 2008: Casas reales: manual bibliográfico sobre la arquitectura y el urbanismo en la historia del Gran Caribe, 1492-2000, Santo Domingo, República Dominicana: Museo de las Casas Reales. 4443.  Moreland, D.A, 1984: The quest that failed; Jack London’s last tales of the South Seas”, PS, 8, 1, 48-70. 4444.  Moreno, Barry, 2008: Ellis Island’s famous immigrants, Charleston, SC: Arcadia Pub.. 4445.  Moreno, Luis Bourillón...et al, edición y texto, 1988: Islas del Golfo de California, México, D.F.: Secretaría de Gobernación/UNAM. 4446.  Moreton, Cole, 2000: Hungry for home, leaving the Blaskets: a journey from the edge of Ireland. London: Viking. 4447.  Morga, Antonio de, 1990: Historical events of the Philippine Islands, published in Mexico in 1609 recently brought to light and annotated by José Rizal, preceded by a prologue by Ferdinand Blumentritt. Manila: National Historical Institute. 4448.  Morga, Antonio de, 1990: Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Manila: National Historical Institute. 4449.  Morgan, A., 1996: Mystery in the eye of the beholder; cross-cultural encounters on 19th century Yap, Journal of Pacific History , Vol 31, No 1, pp.27-41. 4450.  Morgan, L., 1990: To Make a Life in the Islands: “Beachcombers”, in Rotuma, Typescript. 4451.  Morgan, William N., 1989: Prehistoric architecture in Micronesia, with photographs by Newton Morgan, assisted by Dylan Morgan, London: Kegan Paul International. 4452.  Mori, J., H. Patia, C. McKee, I. Itikarai, P. Lowenstein, P. Desaintours and B. Talai, 1989: “Seismicity Associated With Eruptive Activity At Langila Volcano, Papua New Guinea”, Journal of Volcanology and Geothermal Research, 38(3-4): 243-255. 4453.  Mori, J.; [et al.], 1989: “Seismicity Associated With Eruptive Activity At Langila Volcano, Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of Volcanology and Geothermal Research, 38(3-4): 243255. 4454.  Moriguchi, Katsu, 1985: Kogoi: Yaeyama, Hatomajima seikatsushi, Tōkyō, Marujusha, Hatsubaimoto Shakai Hyōronsha. 4455.  Morison, Samuel Eliot, 2001: History of United States Naval Operations in World War II, University of Illinois Press. 4456.  Morisset, Jean; Waddell, Eric, La francophonie oceane: le souffle des iles lointaines, Geographie et Cultures, no 15, p. p. 85-103 4456.  Moriwaki, Hiroshi, [et al.], 2006: “Holocene changes in sea level and coastal environments on Rarotonga, Cook Islands, South Pacific Ocean”, in The Holocene, vol. 16: pp. 839 848. 4457.  Mørkøre, J., 1991: ‘Class Interests and Nationalism in Faroese Politics’, North Atlantic Studies, Vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 57-67. 4458.  Mørkøre, J., 1996: ‘The Faroese Home Rule Model: Theory and Reality’ in L. Lyck (ed.) Constitutional and Economic Space of the Small Nordic Jurisdictions, NordREFO, 1996: 6, pp. 162-191.

2009

CEHA

245

4459.  Moro, Rubén Oscar, 1990: The History of the South Atlantic Conflict: The War for the Malvinas, New York and London. 4460.  Morris, P., Hawkins, F., 1998: Birds of Madagascar: a Photographic Guide, Yale University Press, New Haven and London. 4461.  Morrison, Alex, 2003: Rathlin Island as I knew it, with assistance of John A. I. McCurdy, Northern Ireland: Help the Aged. 4462.  Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty, and Linda Crowl, 1994: Preface to the Series. In Science of Pacific Island Peoples, Volumes I–IV, edited by John Morrison, Paul Geraghty, and Linda Crowl, vii–viii. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 4463.  Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty and Linda Crowl, editors, 1994a: Science of Pacific Island Peoples, Volume I: Ocean and Coastal Studies. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 4464.  Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty and Linda Crowl, editors, 1994: Science of Pacific Island Peoples,Volume II: Land Use and Agriculture.Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 4465.  Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty and Linda Crowl, editors, 1994: Science of Pacific Island Peoples, Volume III: Fauna, Flora, Food and Medicine. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 4466.  Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty and Linda Crowl, editors, 1994: Science of Pacific Island Peoples, Volume IV: Education, Language, Patterns and Policy. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 4467.  Morrissey, James, 1987: Inishbofin, Connemara, Dublin: Crannóg. 4468.  Morro Veny, Guillem, 1998: L’Alçament fora, Palma de Mallorca, El Tall. 4469.  Morton, H., 2001: Remembering freedom and the freedom to remember; Tongan memories of independence, in Mageo J.M., ed, Cultural memory; reconfiguring history and identity in the postcolonial Pacific, UHPress, 37-57. 4470.  Moses, R.S.; Ashby, G., 1992: Tradition and democracy on Pohnpei island” in R Crocombe et.al., eds, Culture and democracy in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 205-16. 4471.  Moss, Joyce; Wilson, George, 1993: Peoples of the world: Asians and Pacific Islanders: the culture, geographical setting, and historical background of 41 Asian and Pacific Island peoples, Detroit: Gale Research. 4472.  Mott, P. G., 1986: Wings over ice: an account of the Falkland Islands and Dependencies Aerial Survey Expedition 1955-57, Long Sutton. 4473.  Mottiaux, Aude, 2008: Endémismes... “Vivre” la protection de l’environnement dans les îles d’Hyères, Techniques et culture (Paris), 1er semestre 2008, vol. Nouvelle série, no 50, p. 60-83. 4474.  Mouchard, Christel, 1989: La reine des boucaniers: une aventurière en Océanie (18501913), Paris: Editions du Seuil. 4475.  Moulin, Jane Freeman, 1994: Music of the southern Marquesas Islands, Auckland, N.Z.: Archive of Maori and Pacific Music, Dept. of Anthropology, University of Auckland. 4476.  Mountain, Alan; Alain Proust, 2000: This is Mauritius, Struik. 4477.  Mourão, Isabel A. Tavares, 2001: «De Ilhéu em Ilhéu. Sete Anos de Caminho até Macau... Análise de um Texto Inédito, dos Fins do Século XVII, Intitulado Relação de alguns naufragantes que se salvarão e viverão em hua Ilha de area sete anos», pp. 359-377,

2009

246

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 4478.  Mourdoukoutas, P., 1985: Seasonal Employment and Tourism Development: The Case of the Greek Islands, PhD thesis. Economics State University of New York, Stony Brook. 4479.  Moureau, études rassemblées par François, 1989: L’Île, territoire mythique [Groupe de recherches sur la littérature des voyages de l’Université Paris-IV], Paris: Aux Amateurs de Livres. 4480.  Moutzourēs, Iōannēs K., 1984: Hē harmosteia tōn nēsōn tou Aigaiou pelagous sta chronia tēs Hellēnikēs Epanastaseōs, Athēnai: Syll. pros Diadosin Ōphelimōn Vivliōn. 4481.  Mowforth, Martin, Clive Charlton and Ian Munt, 2008: Tourism and responsibility: perspectives from Latin America and the Caribbean, London; New York: Routledge. 4482.  Moya Pons, Frank, 1972: La Dominación Haitiana, 1822-1844, (Colección `Estudios.’) Santiago, República Dominicana: Universidad Católica Madre y Maestra. 4483.  Moya Pons, Frank, 1982: Historia Dominicana, (2 vols.) (Colecciones Dominicanas.) Santo Domingo: Caribe Grolier,Moya Pons, Frank, 1998: The Dominican Republic: A National History, Markus Wiener Publishers; 2nd edition. 4484.  Moya Pons, Frank, 2007: History of the Caribbean: plantations, trade, and war in the Atlantic world, Princeton: Markus Wiener Publishers. 4485.  Moyle, Richard M., 2007: Songs from the second float: a musical ethnography of Takū Atoll, Papua New Guinea, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, University of Hawai’i Press. 4486.  Muckle, A., 2002: Killing the “Fantôme Canaque”: Evoking and Invoking the Possibility of Revolt in New Caledonia (1853-1915), Journal of Pacific History, Volume 37, Number 1, 1 June, pp. 25-44(20). 4487.  Mufty, J., 1986: “Reflexions on “The case of Antonio Rivero and sovereignty over the Falkland Islands”, in Historical Journal, 29, Publisher: Cambridge University Press. ISSN 0018246X. 427-32. 4488.  Mukerjee, Madhusree, 2003: The land of naked people: encounters with Stone Age islanders, Boston: Houghton Mifflin. 4489.  Mulcahy, Matthew, 2006: Hurricanes and society in the British Greater Caribbean, 16241783, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. 4490.  Mullins, Steve, 1994: Torres Strait: a history of colonial occupation and culture contact 1864-1897, Rockhampton, Qld.: Central Queensland University Press. 4491.  Mulloy, Sheila, 1987-88: “Inishbofin - the ultimate stronghold”, In Irish Sword, 17, 105-115. 4492.  Mulloy, Sheila, 1989:”Military history of the western islands” (with special reference to Inishbofin), in Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical Society), 9, 101-119. 4493.  Mumme, Russell; Stevens, Jim; Cook, Jonathan, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project Working Paper E: Transport and Shipping Sector, Final Draft, Economic Situation, Primary Industry Management Services, Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) CARE Australia. 4494.  Mundo Lo, Sara de, 1983: The Falkland/Malvinas Islands: a bibliography of books (16191982), Urbana, Ill.: Albatross.

2009

CEHA

247

4495.  Munoz, Paul Michel, 2006: Early Kingdoms of the Indonesian Archipelago and the Malay Peninsula, Singapore: Editions Didier Millet. 4496.  Munro, Doug; Firth, Stewart G., 1986: “Towards colonial protectorates: the case of the Gilbert and Ellice Islands”, in Australian Journal of Politics & History, 32:1, 63-71, Publisher: Blackwell Publishers. 4497.  Munro, Doug; Firth, Stewart G., 1987: “From Company Rule to Consular Control: Gilbert Island Labourers on German Plantations in Samoa, 1867-96”, in Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, 16:1, 22-[34?], Publisher: Routledge. 4498.  Munro, Doug; Munro, Teloma, 1987: “The Rise and Fall of the Vaitupu Company: An Episode in the Commercial History of Tuvalu”, in Journal of Pacific History, 22:3-4. 4499.  Munro, D., 1987: The lives and times of resident traders in Tuvalu: an exercise in history frombelow, PS, vol. 10(2), 73-106. 4500.  Munro, D., 1994/5: The Queensland labour trade, Journal of Pacific Studies, 18, pp.10536. 4501.  Munro, D., 1995: The labour trade in Melanesians to Queensland; a historiographic essay, in Journal of Social History, Vol 28, No 3. 4502.  Munro, Doug, Brij V. Lal, Colaborador Doug Munro, Brij V. Lal, 2005, 2006: Texts And Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, University of Hawaii Press. 4503.  Munro, I. S. R., 1958: “The fishes of the New Guinea Region: a check-list of the fishes of New Guinea incorporating records of species collected by the Fisheries Survey vessel “Fairwind” during the years 1948 to 1950”, in Fisheries bulletin / Territory of Papua and New Guinea -- no. 1, Papua and New Guinea agricultural journal -- v. 10, no. 4, Fisheries bulletin (Papua New Guinea. Dept. of Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries) -- no. 1, p. [97]369. 4504.  Munro, Jean and R.W. Munro, 1986: Acts of the lords of the Isles, 1336-1493, Edinburgh, Scottish History Society. 4505.  Muratake, Seiichi, 1984: Saishi kūkan no kōzō: shakai jinruigaku nōto, Tōkyō: Tōkyō Daigaku Shuppankai. 4506.  Murgatroyd, compiled by Peter, 1990-2009: Pacific Law Journal Index, Law Librarian of the University of the South Pacific. Disponível online em url: http://www.vanuatu.usp.ac.fj/ library2/Pacific%20Law%20Pathfinder/Homepage.htm. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009. 4507.  Murillo, Mario, 2001: Islands of resistance: Puerto Rico, Vieques, and U.S. policy, New York: Seven Stories Press. 4508.  Murphy, Matt, 1990: An islander looks back, Sherkin Island, Co. Cork: Sherkin Island Marine Station, 1990. 4509.  Murphy, Michael J., 1987: Rathlin: island of blood and enchantment: the folklore of Rathlin, Dundalk: Dundalgan Press. 4510.  Murray, edited by John A., 1991: The Islands and the sea: five centuries of nature writing from the Caribbean, New York: Oxford University Press. 4511.  Murray, Edmundo, 2005: ‘The Irish in Falklands/Malvinas Islands’, Irish Migration Studies in Latin America, 3.6 4512.  Murray, G., 1982: “Proposed Kaliai Cattle Project Report, West New Britain Province”, Kimbe, D.P.I., in Guinea Incorporating Records of Species Collected by the Fisheries Survey Vessel “Fairwind” During the Years 1948 to 1950, Port Moresby, Department of

2009

248

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries. 4513.  Murray, W., 2001: “The second wave of globalisation and agrarian change in the Pacific islands”, Journal of rural studies, n°2, p. 135-148. 4514.  Muschietti, Ulises M., ... [et al.], Conflictos en el Atlántico Sur: (siglos XVII-XIX), Buenos Aires: Circulo Militar. 4515.  Musée de l’Alta Rocca, 1995  : L’homme et son territoire: usages et aménagements de l’espace par les communautés rurales insulaires: actes / Vèmes rencontres culturelles interdisciplinaires, 3 et 4 septembre 1994; organisée par le Musée de l’Alta Rocca à Levie, Lévie : Musée de l’Alta Rocca. 4516.  Mut Calafell, Antonio, 1980: Inventario de la documentación del Real Patrimonio Balear, siglo XIX: Archivo del Palacio Real de Madrid, [Madrid]: Ministerio de Cultura, Dirección General de Bellas Artes, Archivos y Bibliotecas, Subdirección General de Archivos. 4517.  Mutō, Masayuki, 1993: Umi no Shōsōin Okinoshima: yomigaeru kenkoku no kamigami, Tōkyō: Sekai Nippōsha, Heisei 5. 4518.  Myers, Garth Andrew, 1996: “Isle of Cloves, Sea of Discourses: Writing About Zanzibar”, in Cultural Geographies, Oct; vol. 3: pp. 408 - 426. 4519.  Myers, Lynne Born; Myers, Christopher A., 1995: Galápagos: islands of change, photographs by Nathan Farb, New York: Hyperion Books for Children. 4520.  Myers, R.H. & M. Peattie (eds.), 1984: The Japanese colonial empire, 1885-1945, Princeton. 4521.  Myka, Frank P., 1993: Decline of indigenous populations: the case of the Andaman Islanders, foreword by G. Prakash Reddy, Jaipur: Rawat Publications. 4522.  Myres, John Nowell Linton, 1981: “The stone vaults of the Jersey churches: their historical significance” in Annual Bulletin, Société Jersiaise, 23, 85-96. 4523.  Nadal, Antoni, 1999: La preautonomía balear: 1975-1983, Palma, Mallorca, Edicions Documenta Balear: “Sa Nostra”, Caixa de Balears, Consell de Mallorca. 4524.  Nagarajan, P., 2006: ‘Collapse of Easter Island: Lessons for Sustainability of Small Islands’, National Island Jurisdictions, London, Routledge. 4525.  Nahmias, Nicolas, 2000 : Aux îles grecques, Hachette. 4526.  Nairn, Richard, 2005: Ireland’s coastline: exploring its nature and heritage, Cork: Collins Press. 4527.  Nakanuma, Kaoru; Saitō Kimiko, 1991: Mō hitotsu no Meiji Ishin: Nakanuma Ryōzō to Oki sōdō, Tōkyō: Sōfūsha. 4528.  Nakasone, Kōichi, 1985: Nankai no uta to minzoku: Okinawa min’yō e no izanai, Naha-shi, Hirugisha. 4529.  Nankivell, Paul, 1991: The Solomon Islands economy: prospects for stabilisation and sustainable growth, PDP Australia Ltd.; [with the assistance of] John Zerby ... [et al.]. 4530.  Naoki, Inoue, Yamauchi Tamihiro, Kawa Kaoru, 2002: Korean History Studies in Japan: The 2001 Shigaku Zasshi Review of Historiography, Korean Studies, Vol. 26. 4531.  Narokobi, Bernard, 1980, 1983: The Melanesian Way, Suva, Institute of Papua New Guinea Studies. 4532.  Narokobi, Bernard, 1983: Life and leadership in Melanesia, Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific; Port Moresby: University of Papua New Guinea. 4533.  Narsey, Wadan, 2007: Gender issues in employment, underemployment and incomes in

2009

CEHA

249

Fiji, Suva, Fiji: Vanuavou Publications. 4534.  Nascimento, Augusto, 1998: “A marginalidade social e política do protestantismo em São Tome e Príncipe (do último quartel de oitocentos a meados de novecentos)”, in Lusotopie, pp.307-315. 4535.  Nascimento, Augusto, 1995: “Conflitos Locais e Soberania Portuguesa no Príncipe nas Décadas de 1820 e 1830”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 387–397. 4536.  Nascimento, Augusto, 2001, “O papagaio e o falcão. A génese da autonomia na ultraperiférica ilha do Príncipe” in Autonomia e história das ilhas, Funchal, Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico. 4537.  Nascimento, Augusto, 2001a, “Identidades e saberes na encruzilhada do nacionalismo são-tomense” in Política internacional nº24, vol.3, Lisboa. 4538.  Nascimento, Augusto, 2006, “Cabo-verdianos em S. Tomé e Príncipe: os contornos da consciência de segundos europeus”. Disponível online em url: http://www.antropologia. net/publicacoes/actascongresso2006/cap2/AugustoNascimentoVF.pdf. Consulta em 16 de Agosto de 2009. 4539.  Nascimento, Augusto, 2007, Ciências sociais em S. Tomé e Príncipe: a independência e o estado da arte, Disponível online em url: http://www.africanos.eu/ceaup/uploads.EB005/ pdf. Consulta em 16 de Agosto de 2009 4540.  Nash, Roy, 1990: Scandal in Madeira: the story of Richard Thomas Lowe, Sussex, England: Book Guild. 4541.  Naswa, Sumedha, 1999: Tribes of Andaman and Nicobar Islands: ethnography and bibliography, New Delhi: Mittal Publications. 4542.  Natalino, Ronzitti, 1984: La Questione delle Falkland-Malvinas nel diritto internazionale, contributi di A. Accolti-Gil ... [et al.], Milano: A. Giuffrè. 4543.  National Library of Australia, 2001: Cook and Omai: The Cult of the South Seas, Canberra: National Library of Australia. 4544.  National Planning Office, 1982: Kandrian-Gloucester Development Study West New Britain, National Planning Office. 4545.  National Statistical Office, 1987: 1980 National Population Census Final Figures West New Britain Province: Census Unit Populations, Port Moresby, National Statistical Office. 4546.  National Statistical Office, 1994: Papua New Guinea, report on the 1990 national population and housing census in Eastern Highlands province, Port Moresby, PNG:, National Statistical Office. 4547.  Natusch, Sheila, 1992: Hell and high water: a German occupation of the Chatham Islands, 1843-1910, [Christchurch, N.Z.]: Pegasus. 4548.  Nau, C., 2002: Dictionnaire des îles, Paris, Mango. 4549.  Naudé, Pierre-François, 2009: Spécial Cap-Vert: Insolente insularité, Jeune Afrique, 12 au 18 avril, no 2518, p. 42-44. 4550.  Nauerby, Tom, 1996: No nation is an island: language, culture and national identity in the Faroe Islands, Arhus, Denmark: SNAI-North Atlantic Publications: Aarhus University Press. 4551.  Navarro, Francisco Quintana editor. 1992: Informes consulares británicos sobre Canarias (1856-1914), [Las Palmas]: Centro de Investigación Económica y Social de la Caja de Canarias.

2009

250

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4552.  Nazarahari, Reza, 2005: ‘An assessment of the withdrawal of British forces from the Persian Gulf (1971) within the framework of disputed islands’, In Martin, Vanessa (ed.), Anglo-Iranian relations since 1800 (Royal Asiatic Society books), London: Routledge, 137-47. 4553.  NCA, 1995: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX, (Actas do I Colóquio, realizado nas ilhas do Faial e do Pico em Maio de 1993), Núcleo Cultural da Horta. 4554.  NCA, 2004: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX (Actas do III Colóquio, realizado em Maio de 2002 nas ilhas do Faial e das Flores), Núcleo Cultural da Horta. 4555.  NCA, 2007: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX (Actas do IV Colóquio, realizado em Maio de 2006 nas ilhas do Faial e do Pico), Núcleo Cultural da Horta. 4556.  Neary, Peter 1996: Newfoundland in the North Atlantic world, 1929-1949, McGill-Queen’s University Press, Montreal, Quebec. 4557.  Negreira Parets, Juan José, 2006: Baleares en la Guerra de Filipinas (1896-1898), Palma (Mallorca): Lleonard Muntaner Editor. 4558.  Negrón-Muntaner, Frances and Ramón Grosfoguel, 1997: Puerto Rican jam: rethinking colonialism and nationalism, Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press. 4559.  Nekoeng, Jules, 1990: Les paysans kanak et leur espace à Lifou: Iles Loyauté, NouvelleCalédonie, Grenoble: Université Joseph Fourier. 4560.  Nelson, Charles E., 1988: “Exotic fruits and seeds from the coasts of Britain and adjacent islands”, in Journal of the Royal Institution of Cornwall, ns, 10:2, 147-77. 4561.  Nelson, H., 1982: The Australians in Papua and New Guinea, in R.J. May & H. Nelson (eds.), Melanesia beyond diversity, vol. 1, Canberra. 4562.  Nelson, H., 1989: Masters in the tropics, in Gammage B and Spearritt P, (eds), Australians 1938, Fairfax, Syme and Weldon. 4563.  Nelson, H., 1995: From ANZAC Day to Remembrance Day; remnants of Australian rule in Papua New Guinea, Lal, BV and Nelson, H, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp.25-36. 4564.  Nelson, H., 1996: The war diaries of Eddie Allan Stanton, Papua, 1942-45, Sydney, Allen and Unwin. 4565.  Nelson, H., 1998: From frontier to territory; colony and nation; Australia and New Guinea, in Elizalde D, ed, Les relaciones internacionales en el Pacifico (siglos XVIII-XX) colonizacion, descolonizacion y encuentro cultural, Madrid, CSdeIC, pp.671-94. 4566.  Nelson, H., 2000: Gallipoli, Kokoda and the making of national identity, in Nile R, ed, The Australian legend and its discontents, St Lucia, UQP, 200-217 4567.  Nelson, H., 2000a: Liberation; the end of Australian rule in PNG, JPH, 35, 3, 269-80. 4568.  Nelson, H., 2001: Isla del oro; seeking New Guinea gold, in McCalman I, Cook A and Reeves A, eds, Gold; forgotten histories and lost objects of Australia, Cambridge, CUP, 189-206. 4569.  Nelson, R. and Wall, G., 1986: Transport and accommodation: changing interrelationships on Vancouver Island, Annals of Tourism Research, 13(2), pp.239-260. 4570.  Nelson, R., 1991: The Island Within, New York, Random House. 4571.  Nerdrum, Monica, 1998: Skärgårdskvinnor: tradition, modernitet och diversitet, Åbo, Åbo akademis förlag; Pargas: Distribution och försälning Oy Tibo-Trading.

2009

CEHA

251

4572.  Nero, K., 1997: The end of insularity, in Denoon D, et.al, eds, The Cambridge history of the Pacific Islanders, CUP. 4573.  Nettles, John, 1991: Bergerac’s Jersey, colour photography by Kim Sayer, etchings by Michael Richecoeur, London: BBC Books. 4574.  Neumann, K., 1989: Not the way it really was: writing a history of the Tolai (Papua New Guinea), Journal of Pacific History, vol. 24(2), 209-220. 4575.  Neumann, K., 1992: Not the way it really was; constructing the Tolai past, UH Press, Honolulu. 4576.  Neumann, K., 1994: In order to win their friendship...: Rewriting First contact, Contemporary Pacific, Vol 6/1, pp.111-45. 4577.  Neumann, Klaus, Nicholas Thomas, Hilary Ericksen, 1999: Quicksands: Foundational Histories in Australia and Aotearoa New Zealand, University of New South Wales Press. 4578.  New Berman, M., 1983: Arawe: a traditional Melanesian culture in modern times, Kimbe, Papua New Guinea, Asples Productions. 4579.  Newall, Venetia, 2000: “The Dutch in Shetland: their influence on the history, trade, folklife and lore of the islands”, In Owen, Trefor M. (ed.), From Corrib to Cultra: folklife essays in honour of Alan Gailey (Belfast: Institute of Irish Studies), 216-32. 4580.  Newbury, C., 1980: Tahiti Nui: change and survival in French Polynesia, 1767-1945, Honolulu. 4581.  Newbury, C., 1980: The Melanesian labor reserve: some reflections on Pacific labor markets in the nineteenth century, PS, vol. 4(1): 1-25 4582.  Newbury, C., 1988: Spoils of war; sub-imperial collaboration in South West Africa and New Guinea 1914-20, Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, Vol 16, pp.86-106 4583.  Newfield, Paul, 2002: A Canary Islands Bibliography-Genealogical and Historical. (Select, Working, Arbitrary And Expanding Bibliography, Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David Counts 2004 The good, the bad, and the unresolved death in Kaliai, In Social Science & Medicine, 58: 887-897. 4584.  Newitt, M. D. D., 1984: The Comoro Islands: struggle against dependency in the Indian Ocean, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press; London, England: Gower. 4585.  Newitt, M., Hintjens, H., 1992: The political economy of small tropical islands: the importance of being small, Exeter, University of Exeter. 4586.  Newitt, M.D.D, 1992: Introduction in The Political Economy of Small Tropical Islands: The Importance of Being Smal H.M. Hintjens and M.D.D. Newitt (eds.), Exeter: University of Exeter Press, pp. 1-17. 4587.  Newitt, Malyn, 1992: The Perils of Being a Micro State: São Tomé and the Comoros Islands Since Independence in Hintjens, H.M and Newitt, M.D.D (eds.), The Political Economy of Small Tropical Islands The Importance of Being Small. University of Exeter Press, pp. 76-92. 4588.  Newlands, David, Mike Danson, John McCarthy, 2004: Divided Scotland?: the nature, causes, and consequences of economic disparities within Scotland, Aldershot, Hants, England; Burlington, VT: Ashgate. 4589.  Newton, D., 1988: “Oil palm: a wolf in sheep’s clothing for Oro Province”, in Bikmaus: a Journal of Papua New Guinea Affairs, Ideas and the Arts, 4(4): 81-84. 4590.  Newton, D., 1988: Reflections in Bronze. Lapita and Dong-Son Art in the Western Pacific,

2009

252

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

In: J. P. Barbier and D. Newton, Eds., Islands and Ancestors - Indigenous Styles of Southeast Asia, New York & Geneva, Metropolitan Museum of Art, & Geneva: Musee Barbier Mueller, pp. 10-23. 4591.  Newton, J., 1983: “Oil palm: a wolf in sheep’s clothing for Oro Province”, Bikmaus: a Journal of Papua New Guinea Affairs, Ideas and the Arts, 4(4): 81-84. 4592.  Newton, John, 1999: “Colonialism above the Snowline: Baughan, Ruskin and the South Island Myth”, in The Journal of Commonwealth Literature, Jan; vol. 34: pp. 85 - 96. 4593.  Nezat, Jack Claude, 2007: The Nezat And Allied Families 1630-2007, Lulu. 4594.  NGS, 1998: Islands lost in time, prepared by the Book Division, National Geographic Society. 4595.  Ní Ghuithín, Máire, 1986: Bean an Oileáin, Baile Átha Cliath, Coiscéim. 4596.  Ní Shúilleabháin, Eibhlín, 2000: Cín lae Eibhlín Ní Shúilleabháin; editor Máiréad Ní Loingsigh. Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim. 4597.  Nibbs-O’Garro, Carmen, 2000: In de calypso tent, St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands. 4598.  Nic Craith, Máiréad, 1995: Primary education on the Great Blasket Island 1864-1940, Journal of the Kerry Archaeological & Historical Society, 28, 77-137. 4599.  Nicolas, F., 1997: “Mondialisation et régionalisation dans les pays en voie de développement: les deux faces de Janus”, Politique Étrangère, Nº2, p. 293-307. 4600.  Nicolas, Thierry, 1998: De l’archipel à l’appendice continental ou la logique d’intégration de la Guadeloupe à la France continentale. Pouvoirs dans la Caraïbe, n° spécial, Fortde-France. 4601.  Nicolas, Thierry, 2000: Les Antilles françaises entre insularité et continentalité, Géographie et Cultures, Paris, n° 30. 4602.  Nicolas, Thierry, 2001: «La circulation comme facteur d´intégration nationale et d’«hypoinsularité»: le cas des Antilles françaises», Cahiers d’outre-mer, vol. 54, no 216, pp. 397-415, Hommage à Guy Lasserre. Disponível online em URL: http://com.revues.org/ document2307.html. Consulta a 14 julho 2009. 4603.  Nicolas, Thierry, 2003 : Les Antilles françaises entre insularité et «continentalité»: un essai sur les effets de l’intégration de la Guadeloupe et de la Martinique à l’espace national et européen, Université Paris-Sorbonne. Université de soutenance, Lille: Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses 4604.  Nicolas, Thierry, 2005: L’hypo-insularité, une nouvelle condition insulaire: l’exemple des Antilles françaises, Espace géographique, (Paris), octobre-décembre 2005, vol. 34, no 4, pp. 329-341. 4605.  Nicolas, Thierry, 2008: «L’insularité aujourd’hui: entre mythes et réalités», Études caribéennes, 6/2007, L’écotourisme dans la Caraïbe. Disponível online em URL: http:// etudescaribeennes.revues.org/document509.html. Consulta 29 Março 2009. 4606.  Nicolas, Thomas, 1992: Liberty and license; the Forster’s accounts of New Zealand sociality, in Calder A, Lamb J. and Orr B, eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.132-55. 4607.  Nicolet, Claude, 2001: United States Policy Towards Cyprus, 1954-1974, Bibliopolis. 4608.  Nicoll, M. E.; Langrand, O., 1989: Madagascar: Revue de la Conservation et des Aires Protégées, WWF International. 4609.  Nicholas, Thomas, 1989: The indigenous appropriation of European things, in Entangled

2009

CEHA

253

objects; exchange, material culture and colonialism in the Pacific, Harvard Uni Press, Cambridge, pp.83-124. 4610.  Nicholson, A., 2002: Sea Room: An Island Life, London, Harper Collins. 4611.  Nicholson, Ian Hawkins, 1990: Log of logs: a catalogue of logs, journals, shipboard diaries, letters, and all forms of voyage narratives, 1788-1988, for Australia and New Zealand, and surrounding oceans (Roebuck Society publication, 41, 47, 52), 3 vols, Canberra: Australian Association for Maritime History. 4612.  Niemann, M., 2000: A spatial approach to regionalisms in the global economy, Basingstoke, Macmillan. 4613.  Niezen, Ronald, 2000: Spirit Wars:  Native North American Religions in the Age of Nation Building, University of California Press. 4614.  Niihara, Michinobu, 1992: Un tentativo di ragionare sulla teoria dell’ insularità e A. Merler, Le isole, oltre i mari, entrambi, in Quaderni Bolotanesi, 18. 4615.  Niihara, Michinobu, 2006:The Obscurity of Autonomia: Autonomy and Identities of the Åland Islands, in Furuki, Toshiaki (ed.), Self-Governance of Islands in the Era of Regions: A Comparative Study of the Åland Islands in the Baltic Sea and the Ryukyu Islands in the East China Sea, Japan, Institute of Social Sciences, Chuo University. 4616.  Nile R. and Clerk, C., 1996: The Pacific and the European imagination, in Cultural atlas of Australia, new Zealand and the South Pacific, Sydney, RD Press, pp.98-123. 4617.  Nimmo, H.A., 1986: Recent population movements in the sulu archipelago: implications to sama culture history, Archipel, 1986, no 32, p. p. 25-38. 4618.  NNDB, 2009: Sri Lanka. Subject of Books, NNDB. Disponível online em url: http://www. nndb.com/geo/335/000080095/bibliography/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4619.  Noble, Vergil E., 1993: The archeological investigation of four lighthouse complexes at the western end of Lake Superior. The 1988 testing program within Apostle Islands National Lakeshore, Lincoln, Neb.: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, National Park Service, Midwest Archeological Center. 4620.  Nordqvist, K. Å., 1998: Autonomy as a conflict-solving mechanism – an overview in Autonomy: Applications and Implications, M. Suksi (ed.), Autonomy: Applications and Implications, The Hague: London: Kluwer Law International. pp. 59-77. 4621.  Nordström, Alison Devine...[et al.], Beiträgen von, 1995: Bi, lder aus dem Paradies: koloniale Fotografie aus Samoa, 1875-1925, herausgegeben von Jutta Beate Engelhard und Peter Mesenhöller, Marburg: Jonas; Köln: im Auftrag der Gesellschaft für Völkerkunde, Verein zur Förderung des Rautenstrauch-Joest-Museums der Stadt Köln. 4622.  Norio, Kitano, 1985: Amakusa kaigai hattenshi, Fukuoka-shi: Ashi Shobō, Shōwa 60. 4623.  Norman, Albert, The Falkland Islands, their kinship isles, the antarctic hemisphere, & the freedom of the 2 great oceans: discovery & diplomacy, law & war, Northfield, Vt. A. Norman. 4624.  North-Coombes, Alfred, 1991: The vindication of François Leguat: first resident and historian of Rodrigues, 1691-1693, Rose-Hill, Mauritius: Editions de l’Ocean Indien. 4625.  North-Coombes, Alfred, 1994: La découverte des Mascareignes: rétrospective et mise au point definitive, [Mauritius: s.n.], 1994 ([Port Louis]: Mauritius Print. Specialists). 4626.  Northedge, F.S., 1982: “The Falkland Islands: Origins of the British Involvement”, in International Relations, Jan; vol. 7: pp. 2167 - 2189.

2009

254

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4627.  Northrup, David, ed., 2002: The Atlantic Slave Trade, Second Edition. Boston, Massachusetts: Houghton Mifflin Company. 4628.  Norton, Robert, 1993: Ethno-nationalism and the Constitutive Power of Cultural Politics: A Comparative Study of Sri Lanka and Fiji, Journal of Asian and African Studies, Jan; vol. 28: pp. 180 - 197. 4629.  Nott, John William Frederic, Sir, 2003: Here today, gone tomorrow: recollections of an errant politician, London: Politico’s. 4630.  Nouailhat, René, 1998: Saints et patrons: les premiers moines de Lérins, Paris: Belles lettres. 4631.  Novarese, Daniela, 2003: ‘Tra Inghilterra e Francia: dichiarazione e garanzia dei diritti fondamentali nel costituzionalismo europeo fra sette e ottocento’, Società e Storia, 26:99, 31-44. 4632.  Nufer, H. F., 1978: Micronesia under American rule; an evaluation of the strategic trusteeship 1947-1977, Exposition Press. 4633.  Nunes, João Manuel de Sousa, 1989: Entre a insularidade e o cosmopolitismo: a controvérsia sobre o turismo na Grã-Bretanha dos séculos XVII e XVIII, Islenha, no 4, Jan-Jun., p. 18-24. 4634.  Nunes, João Manuel de Sousa, 1992: Imagens de insularidade na literatura, Islenha, no 9, no 11, pp.36-39, 96-103. 4635.  Nunn, P.D., 1990: Recent environmental changes on Pacific Islands, The Geographical Journal, vol. vol. 156, no 2, p. p. 125-140. 4636.  Nunn, Patrick D., 1994: Oceanic islands, Oxford, UK: Cambridge, Mass., USA: Blackwell. 4637.  Nunn, P., Waddell, E. (eds), 1994: The margin fades: geographical itineraries in a world of islands, Suva, University of the South Pacific Press. 4638.  Nunn, Patrick D., 1995: “Holocene tectonic histories for five islands in the south-central Lau group, south Pacific” in The Holocene, vol. 5: pp. 160 - 171. 4639.  Nunn, P. D., 1997: Pacific Island Landscapes, Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific, Suva. 4640.  Nunn, P.D., 2000: «Environmental Catastrophe in the Pacific Islands Around A.D. 1300», Geoarchaeology, 15(7), p. 715-740. 4641.  Nunn, P.D., 2001: «Ecological Crises or Marginal Disruptions: the Effects of the First Humans on Pacific Islands», New Zealand Geographer, 57(2), p. 11-20. 4642.  Nunn, P.D., Britton (J. M. R.), 2001-a: «Human-Environment Relationships in the Pacific Islands around AD 1300», Environment and History, 7, p. 3-22. 4643.  Nunn, P.D., 2001: On the convergence of myth and reality: examples from the Pacific Islands, The Geographical Journal, vol. 167, no 2, p. p. 125-138. 4644.  Nunn P.D., 2003: “Fished Up or Thrown Down: The Geography of Pacific Island Origin Myths”, in Annals of the Association of American Geographers, Volume 93, Number 2, June, pp. 350-364(15). 4645.  Nunn, P.D., 2003: Nature-Society Interactions in the Pacific Islands, Geografiska Annaler, Vol. 85 B, No. 4, pp. 219-229. 4646.  Nunn, P.D., 2004: Through a Mist on the Ocean: Human Understanding of Island Environments, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 311-325.

2009

CEHA

255

4647.  Nunn, Patrick D., 2009: Vanished islands and hidden continents of the Pacific, Honolulu: University of Hawai´i Press. 4648.  Núñez Pestaño, Juan Ramón, 2001: La Nivaria triunfante y su capital gloriosa, o, Los orígenes del pleito insular, La Laguna: Universidad de La Laguna. 4649.  Nwulia, Moses D.E., 1981: The history of slavery in Mauritius and the Seychelles, 18101875, Rutherford, N.J.: Fairleigh Dickenson University Press; London: Associated University Presses 4650.  NYPL, 1984: Faroese “pamphlets”: a collection [of 47 Faroese monographs published 1891-1939, assembled by NYPL Research Libraries], New York: New York Public Library, disponível online em url: http://freepages.genealogy.rootsweb.ancestry. com/~brasscannon/biblio-2.pdf. Consulta a 11 de julho de 2009. 4651.  Ó Cearnaigh, Seán Pheats Tom, 1992: Fiolar an eireabaill bháin, Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim. 4652.  Ó Ciarmhaic, Michael, 1984: Cliathan na Sceilg, Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim. 4653.  Ó Conaire, Breandán, 2000/1: “Nótaí ar fhaisnéis bheatha as Árainn Mhór”, in Studia Hibernica, 31, 147-67 4654.  Ó Conaola, Máirtín, b., 1994: Scéalta Mháirtín Neile: bailiúchán scéalta ó Árainn - Holger Pedersen, a thóg síos sa bhliain 1895; Ole Munch-Pedersen a chóirigh agus a chuir in eagar. Baile Átha Claith: Comhairle Bhéaloideas Éireann, An Coláiste Ollscoile. 4655.  Ó Conghaile, Micheál, 1988: Conamara agus Árainn, 1880-1980: gnéithe den stair shóisialta, Béal an Daingin: Cló Iar-Chonnachta. 4656.  Ó Conluain, Proinsias, (ed.). 1983: Islands and authors: pen-pictures of life past and present on the islands of Ireland, Dublin and Cork: Mercier Press in association with Radio Telefís Éireann. 4657.  Ó Criomhthain, Seán, 1997: Cleití gé ón mBlascaod Mór, in eagar ag Pádraig Ó Fiannachta, An Daingean [Kerry, Ireland], An Sagart. 4658.  Ó Dubhshláine, Mícheál, 2003: A dark day on the Blaskets: the drowning of Domhnall Ó Criomhthain and Eibhlín Nic Niocaill on the Blasket Islands, 1909. Dingle: Brandon. 4659.  Ó Gallchoir, Micheál (An Cope), 1986: “Inis Caorach”, in Donegal Annual, 38 (1986), 8789. 4660.  Ó hEithir, Breandán; Ó hEithir, Ruairí (ed.), 1991: An Aran reader, Dublin: Lilliput Press. 4661.  Ó Mainnín, Mícheál B., 1989-90: The element island in Ulster place-names, Ainm, (Ulster Place-Name Society), 4, 200-210. 4662.  Ó Muircheartaigh, Aogán (ed.), 1989: Oidhreacht an Bhlascaoid, Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim. 4663.  O.R.S.T.O.M, 1983: Profession, Géographe: Pratique De La Recherche Tropicale, Laboratoire De Sociologie Et Géographie Africaines, L.A. 94 (CNRS-EHESS) [Et] Office De La Recherche Scientifique Et Technique Outre-Mer, O.R.S.T.O.M., Paris: 4664.  O’Brien, R., 1992: Global financial integration: the end of geography, Londres, Pinter Publishers. 4665.  O’Connell, Monique, 2004: “The Venetian Patriciate in the Mediterranean: Legal Identity and, and lineage in fifteenth-century Venetian Crete, Renaissance Quarterly, Summer, 2004. Disponível online em url: http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb3394/is_2_57/ai_ n29094688/. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009.

2009

256

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4666.  O’Crohan, Tomas, 2000: The Islandman, New York: Oxford UP. 4667.  O’Donnell, D., 1993: The Pacific guano islands; the stirring of American empire in the Pacific Ocean, PS, 16, 1, 43-66. 4668.  Oakes, Amy, 2006: Diversionary War and Argentina’s Invasion of the Falkland Islands, Security Studies, 15:3, 431-63. 4669.  Oakes, Betsy, 1992: Workers in the British Virgin Islands: the complexities of residence and migration, Social and economic studies, vol. 41, no 1, pp. 67-87. 4670.  Oakley, Derek, 2002: The Falklands military machine, Staplehurst: Spellmount. 4671.  Oberling, Pierre, 1982: The Road to Bellapais, Columbia University Press. 4672.  Oberti, Georges, 1990: Pasquale de’ Paoli, Editions Pasquale de’ Paoli. 4673.  Obeyesekere, G., 1992: The apotheosis of Captain Cook; European mythmaking in the Pacific, Princeton University Pres 4674.  Obrecht, Andreas J., 2006: Geschichten aus anderen Welten: eine Reise nach Neuguinea und Inselmelanesien, Ostafrika, Nepal und die südöstliche Karibik, Wien, Köln, Weimar, Böhlau. 4675.  O’Brien, Brigid, 1986-87: “Islandmore”, in Cois Deirge, 2-5. 4676.  O’Brien, Denise; Tiffany, Sharon W. edited by, 1984: Rethinking women’s roles: perspectives from the Pacific, Berkeley: University of California Press. 4677.  O’Brien, Patty, 2006: The Pacific muse: exotic femininity and the colonial Pacific, Seattle: University of Washington Press. 4678.  O’Brien, William, 1995: Ross Island - the beginning, Archaeology Ireland, 11:1, 24-27. 4679.  O’Brien, William, 2004: Ross Island: mining metal and society in early Ireland (Bronze age studies, 6), Galway: National University of Ireland. 4680.  O’Carroll, Cian, 1988: Iniscathaigh Scattery island myth, miracle and legend, in The Other Clare, 12, 18-20. 4681.  OCDE, 1993: Intégration régionale et pays en développement, Paris, OCDE. 4682.  OCDE, 1998: Migrations, libre-échange et intégration régionale dans le bassin méditerranéen, Paris, OCDE. 4683.  Ochiai, Tadashi, 1992: Hoppō ryōdo mondai: sono rekishiteki jijitsu, hōri, seijiteki haikei,Tōkyō: Bunka Shobō Hakubunsha. 4684.  Ocho Brun, Miguel Ángel, 2001: España y las Islas Griegas: una visión histórica, Madrid: Ministerio de Asuntos Exteriores, Secretaría General Técnica. 4685.  Ochs, Elinor, 1988: Culture and language development: language acquisition and language socialization in a Samoan village, Cambridge [Cambridgeshire]; New York: Cambridge University Press. 4686.  Ocock, John Greville Agard, 2005: The discovery of islands: essays in British history, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 4687.  O’Collins, Maev., 1984: Youth in Papua New Guinea: with reference to Fiji, Solomon Islands and Vanuatu, Canberra, ACT: Dept. of Political and Social Change, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National Univerity. 4688.  O’Crohan, Seán, 1992: A day in our life; translated by Tim Enright. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

2009

CEHA

257

4689.  Oda Fujio hen, 1998: Okinoshima to kodai saisi, Tōkyō: Yoshikawa Kōbunkan, Shōwa 63. 4690.  ODIT-France, 2009: Tourisme durable dans les îles: protéger, développer, valoriser / ODIT France, Observation, développement et ingénierie touristiques France, Paris: ODIT France. 4691.  Odouard, Albert, 1992: Les Iles Canaries, terres d’Europe au large de l’Afrique, sous la direction de Max Derruau, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université Blaise Pascal (Clermont-Ferrand). Université de soutenance, [Clermond-Ferrand]: [s.n.]. 4692.  Odouard, Albert; Huetz de Lemps, Alain (pref.), 1995: Les Iles Canaries: Terres d’Europe au large de l’Afrique, Bordeaux: CRET, coll. “Îles et archipels”, n°20. 4693.  O’Driscoll, F., 2000: Ils ne siégent pas à l’ONU: revue de quelques micro-Etats, micronations et autres entités éphémères, Toulon: Presses du Midi. 4694.  Ofcansky, T.P., 1995: Strategic Considerations in Indian Ocean: five island countries (pp. 285-332), H. Chapin Metz (ed.). Washington DC: GPO. 4695.  Ogan, E., 1996: Copra came before copper; the Nasioi of Bougainville and plantation colonialism 1902-1964, PS, 19,1, pp.31-51. 4696.  Ogashiwa, Y., 1991: Microstates and nuclear issues; regional cooperation in the Pacific, IPS/Usp. 4697.  Ogier, D. M. (Darryl Mark), 1996: 1962 - Reformation and society in Guernsey, Woodbridge and Rochester (NY): Boydell. 4698.  Ogier, D. M. (Darryl Mark), 2005: The government and law of Guernsey, Guernsey: States of Guernsey. 4699.  Oglethorpe, M., 1984: Tourism in Malta: a crisis of dependence, Leisure Studies, 3, pp.147162. 4700.  O’Hanlon, M., 1995: “Medusa’s Art. Interpreting Melanesian Shields” In: Tavarelli, Ed. Protection Power and Display, Shields of Island Southeast Asia and Melanesia. Boston, Boston College Museum of Art, pp. 74-104. 4701.  O’Hanlon, Michael; Welsch, Robert L., 2000: Hunting the gatherers: ethnographic collectors, agents and agency in Melanesia, 1870s-1930s, New York; Oxford: Berghahn Books. 4702.  Ohnemus, Sylvia, 1998: Zur Kultur der Admiralitäts-Insulaner in Melanesien English An ethnology of the Admiralty Islanders: the Alfred Bühler Collection, Museum der Kulturen, Basel,[translation, Robert Williamson; editing, Christian Kaufmann, Antje Denner, Norma Stephenson; maps, Rudolf Zimmerman; drawings, Susanna Gisin Zimmerman; photographs, Peter Horner ... et al.) Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press. 4703.  Ohno, S., [et al.], 1989: “The Scolytidae and Platypodidae (Coleoptera) from Bismarck Archipelago found in logs at Nagoya port”, in Research Bulletin of the Plant Protection Service, Japan, No. 25: 59-69. 4704.  Okihiro, Gary Y., 2001: The Columbia Guide to Asian American History, Columbia University Press. 4705.  Ōkuma, Ryōichi, 1985: Ogasawara Shotō ikokusen raikōki Tōkyō, Kondō Shuppansha, Shōwa 60. 4706.  Olafsson, À., 2000: ‘Constitutionalism and Economics in the Faroes’ in G. Baldacchino & D. Milne (eds.) Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 121-140. 4707.  Olaneta, José J. de, Editor. 1982: Leyendas, tradiciones, cuentos fabulosos y otros relatos

2009

258

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

fantasticos de las islas Cabrera, Formentera, Elivissa, Menorca y Mallorca, Barcelona. 4708.  Olausson, P. M., 2007: Aspects of Autonomy – The European Island Regions. Unpublished Paper Presented at the 2nd International Conference on Regional Autonomy and Ethnic Minorities, Uppsala, Sweden. Disponível online em URL: em https://oa.doria.fi/bitstream/ handle/10024/33681/OlaussonPar.pdf?sequence=2. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4709.  Olesen, Thorsten B., 2004: The Cold War and the Nordic countries: historiography at a crossroads, Edição de University Press of Southern Denmark. 4710.  Oliveira, Alexandre M. Teixeira Guedes da S., 2001: «Sistemas Defensivos na Costa Portuguesa: Engenheiros e Construtores do Estado Moderno», pp. 341-351, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. 4711.  Oliveira, J. A. de, 1992: The autonomous region of Madeira in The political administrative systems of the European Island Regions, Ponta Delgada: Regional Secretariat for Internal Administration. 4712.  Oliver, Douglas L., 1981: Two Tahitian villages: a study in comparisons, Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies. 4713.  Oliver, Douglas L. 1989: The Pacific Island, Third Edition. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 4714.  Oliver, Douglas L., 1989a: Native cultures of the Pacific islands, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 4715.  Oliver, Douglas L., 1989b: Oceania: the native cultures of Australia and the Pacific Islands, illustrations by Lois Johnson, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 4716.  Oliver, Douglas L., 2002: Polinesia in Early Historic Times, Honolulu, The Bess Press. 4717.  Oliver, José M. y Alberto Relancio (eds.), 2007: El descubrimiento científico de las Islas Canarias, La Orotava, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Fundación Canaria Orotava de Historia de la Ciencia. 4718.  Olivesi, C., 1990: Une gestion périphérique du politique: l’exemple corse, Actes, n° 69, janvier. 4719.  Olivesi, C., Pastorel, J.P., 1990: La place de la Corse dans la coopération Méditerranéenne, Revue administrative, n° 255, mai-juin. 4720.  Olivesi, C., Pastorel, J.P., 1991: Pour la coopération transfrontalière Corse-Sardaigne, Revue administrative, mai-juin. 4721.  Olivesi, C., Pastorel, J.-P., 1992: Statut de la Corse: vers un droit commun des îles communautaires ? , Revue administrative, juillet-août. 4722.  Olivesi, C., 1992: Statut de la Corse vers un droit commun des îles communautaires?, Revue administrative, n° 268, juillet-août. 4723.  Olivesi, C., 1995: Corse contestataire, état, Europe in identité et politique de la caraïbe et de l’Europe multiculturelle, Economica, Paris. 4724.  Olivesi, C., 1998: The failure of regionalist party formation in Corsica in Regionalist parties in western Europ’, ECPR/Rountledge, London. 4725.  Olivier, Anne, 1983: Les bignoniacées à Taiwan: problèmes de l’insularité; sous la dir. de J. Garnier, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse d’exercice: Pharmacie: Rouen.

2009

CEHA

259

4726.  Olivier, Isabelle, 2005: Odyssées arthuriennes: aventures et insularité dans les romans arthuriens (XIIe-XIIIe siècles), thèse présentée par; sous la direction de Philippe Walter, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), [Grenoble]: [Université Stendhal Grenoble 3]. 4727.  Olmos Giupponi, María Belén, 2006: Derechos humanos e integración en América Latina y el Caribe, Valencia: Tirant lo Blanch: Publicacions Universitat de València. 4728.  Olson, S. L., 1982: ‘Biological archeology in the West Indies’, The Florida Anthropologist, 35(4): 162-8. 4729.  Olson, S. L. e James, H. F., 1984: ‘The role of Polynesians in the extinction of the avifauna of the Hawaiian islands’, in P. S. Martis e R. G. Klein (orgs.), Quaternary extinctions: a prehistoric revolution, Tucson, University of Arizona Press, pp. 768-80. 4730.  Olson, S. L., 1989: ‘Extinction on islands: man as a catastrophe’, in D. Western e M. Pearl (orgs.), Conservation for the twenty-first century, Nova York, Oxford University Press. 4731.  Olson, S. L. 1990: ‘The prehistoric impact of man on biogeographical patterns of insular birds’, Atti Convegni Lincei, 85: 45-51. 4732.  Olwig, Karen Fog, 1980: Vestinderne: fra dansk slaveri til amerikansk masse-turisme Holte: Skarv; [København]: [eksp. DBK]. 4733.  Olwig, Karen Fog, 1985: Cultural adaptation and resistance on St. John: three centuries of Afro-Caribbean life, Gainesville: University of Florida Press. 4734.  Olwig, Karen Fog edited by. 1995: Small islands, large questions: society, culture, and resistance in the post-Emancipation Caribbean, London; Portland, Or.:F. Cass. 4735.  Olwig. edited by Karen,1995: Fog Small islands, large questions: society, culture, and resistance in the post-Emancipation Caribbean, London; Portland, Or.: F. Cass. 4736.  O’Malley, Brendan and Ian Craig, 1999: The Cyprus Conspiracy, I.B. Tauris 4737.  O’Malley, Brendan and Ian Craig, 2001: The Cyprus Conspiracy: America, Espionage and the Turkish Invasion, I.B.Tauris, 4738.  Ommer, Rosemary E., 1991: From outpost to outport: a structural analysis of the JerseyGaspé cod fishery, 1767-1886, Montreal; Buffalo: McGill-Queen’s University Press. 4739.  O’Neal, Eugenia, 2001: From the Field to the Legislature: A History of Women in the Virgin Islands, Greenwood Press. 4740.  O’Neil, Carle F., Pacific Memories: Montana National Guardsmen Recall the Fighting on New Guinea in World War II, Montana, 52 (Summer), 48-57. Disponível online em url: http://www.visitmt.com/history/Pacific_Memories.asp. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009. 4741.  O’Neill, T., 1961: And We, the People; Ten Years With the Primitive Tribes of New Guinea, New York, Kennedy. 4742.  Ono, Jūrō, 1982: Amami minzoku bunka no kenkyū, Tōkyō: Hōsei Daigaku Shuppankyoku. 4743.  ONU, 1988: Le Droit de la mer. Régime des îles: Travaux préparatoires concernant la partie VIII (article 121) de la Convention des Nations Unies sur le droit de la mer, Nations Unies. 4744.  Oostindie, G. & Klinkers, I., 2003: ‘The Perpetuation of the Transatlantic Kingdom since 1975’ in G. Oostindie & I. Klinkers (eds.) Decolonizing the Caribbean: Dutch Policies in a Comparative Perspective, Amsterdam, Amsterdam University Press, pp. 118-152. 4745.  Oostindie, Gert, Inge Klinkers, 2003: Decolonising the Caribbean: Dutch policies in a comparative perspective, Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press.

2009

260

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4746.  Oostindie, G., 2006: “Dependence and Autonomy in Sub-National Island Jurisdictions: The Case of the Kingdom of the Netherlands. The Round Table: The Commonwealth Journal of International Affairs, Vol. 95, No. 386, pp. 609-626. 4747.  Oraison, A., 2001: “La protection de l’environnement terrestre et marin des îles Éparses: le cas du récif de Tromelin, de l’archipel des Glorieuses et des îlots Juan de Nova, Europa et Bassas da India”, Revue juridique et politique, indépendance et coopération, n°1, p. 78-87. 4748.  Orbell, Margaret; Finnegan, Ruth, edited by, 1995: South Pacific oral traditions, Bloomington : Indiana University Press. 4749.  Ordinas Garau, Antoni, 1994: Actualització del recull bibliogràfic de toponímia i antroponímia de les Illes Balears, compilador; pròleg de Climent Picornell, Palma: Universitat de les Illes Balears. 4750.  O’Reilly, Jennifer, 2005: ‘Islands and idols at the ends of the earth: exegesis and conversion in Bede’s “Historia ecclesiastica”’. In Lebecq, Stéphane; Perrin, Michel; Szerwiniack, Olivier (ed.), Bède le vénérable entre tradition et postérité = The venerable Bede, tradition and posterity : colloque, Villeneuve d’Ascq et Amiens, du 3 au 6 juillet 2002 (Histoire de l’Europe du Nord-Ouest, 34) (Villeneuve d’Ascq: Université Charles de Gaulle), 119-45. 4751.  O’Reilly, Patrick, 1980: Calédoniens: repertoire bio-bibliographique de la NouvelleCalédonie. 2d ed. Paris: Société dês Océanistes; Musée de l’Homme. 4752.  Orfila Pons, Margarita, Miguel Angel Cau Ontiveros, (coord.); Lorenzo Abad Casal ... [et al.]. 2004: Les Ciutats romanes del llevant peninsular i les Illes Balears, Barcelona, Pòrtic. 4753.  Orfila, Jaume Murillo, M. Magdalena Riera Frau, Natàlia Soberats Sagreras, 1997: Sobre ceràmica: dades per a una bibliografia de la ceràmica a les Illes Balears, Palma Mallorca, Consejería de Cultura, Educación y Deportes. 4754.  Orgill, Andrew, 1993: The Falklands War: background, conflict, aftermath: an annotated bibliography, London; New York: Mansell. 4755.  Orihuela, A. ...[et al.], 1992: De la República a la Guerra Civil en Las Palmas, Las Palmas: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones. 4756.  Orizio, Riccardo, 2001: Lost White Tribes: The End of Privilege and the Last Colonials in Sri Lanka, Jamaica, Brazil, Haiti, Namibia, and Guadeloupe, New York: Free Press. 4757.  Orotky, K. N. G.; S. Ulerzhitsky, A. M., [et al.], 1998:  “Holocene tephra of Kunashir I. (Kuril. Islands). Volcanology and Seismology”, in The Holocene, 20, 49–63. 4758.  Orr, Katherine Shelley, 1983: The natural world of the Turks and Caicos Islands, edited by Jane Allison Halaby, [S.l. : s.n.], c1983 (Rockville, Md.: McCollum Press). 4759.  Orsini, L., 1993: La Corse et la construction européenne: à la recherche d’un statut économique et fiscal insulaire, Revue de science administrative de la Méditerranée occidentale. 4760.  Orta Galindo, Cosme, 2008: Islas salvajes, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Unión de Profesionales de la Comunicación de Canarias. 4761.  Ortalli. Gherardo, 2005: Venezia e le Isole Ionie / a cura di Chryssa Maltezou, Venezia: Istituto veneto di scienze, lettere ed arti. 4762.  Osario, J. K., 2001: What kine Hawaiian are you?; a Mo’olelo about nationhood, race, history and the contemporary sovereignty movement in Hawai’i, TCP, 13, 2 ,359-80. 4763.  Osborne, Elizabeth, 1997: Torres Strait Islander women and the Pacific War, Canberra, Aboriginal Studies Press.

2009

CEHA

261

4764.  Osborne, Milton, 2000: Southeast Asia: An Introductory History. Allen & Unwin. 4765.  Osborne, Robin, 1985: Indonesia’s secret war: the guerilla struggle in Irian Jaya, Sydney. 4766.  O’Shaughnessy, Andrew Jackson, 2000: An Empire Divided - The American Revolution and the British Caribbean, University of Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia. 4767.  Ōshuri, Rabu, Uehara Masatoshi; kanshū Teruya Yoshihiko, 1987: Aoi me ga mita “Dai Ryūkyū” = Great Lewchew discovered: 19th century Ryukyu in western art and illustration, Naha-shi: Niraisha; Yamaguchi-ken Shimonoseki-shi: Hatsubaimoto Shin Nihon Kyōiku Tosho. 4768.  Osifelo, Frederick Sir, 1985, 1986: Kanaka boy: an autobiography, Suva, Institute of Pacific Studies and the Solomon Islands Extension Centre of the University of the South Pacific. 4769.  Osman, Amina, 1997: le discours social et l’imaginaire litteraire dans la litterature mauricienne de langue francaise; sous la direction de charles bonn, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Litterature Comparee: Paris 13. 4770.  Ospina, Pablo, 2001: Identidades en Galápagos: el sentimiento de una diferencia, Quito, Ecuador: Ediciones Trama. 4771.  Ospina, Pablo y Cecilia Falconí, editores, 2007: Galápagos: migraciones, economía, cultura, conflictos y acuerdos, Quito, Ecuador: Corporación Editora Nacional: Universidad Andina Simón Bolívar. 4772.  Ospital, Isabelle, 1989: Peuplement et population dans le Pacifique Sud-Ouest: NouvelleCaledonie, Iles Salomon, Vanuatu, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Uer de Geographie. 4773.  Osterling, J.P., 1987: The Society and Its Environment in Cuba: a country study (pp. 63108). Rudolph, J.D. (ed.). Washington DC: GPO. 4774.  O’Sullivan, Ted, 1992: Bere Island: a short history, Cork: Inisgragy Books. 4775.  Ōta, Masahide, 1985: Okinawa no teiō kōtō benmukan, Tōkyō. 4776.  Ōta, Ryū, 1982: Nihon genjūmin to tennōsei, Tōkyō: Shinsensha. 4777.  Ott, Kerstin, 1993: Die Utopie der glücklichen Inseln: Wandlungen und Konstanten im Werk von James Krüss, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine). 4778.  Ottenheimer, Martin and Harriet, 1994: Historical dictionary of the Comoro Islands, Metuchen, N. J.: Scarecrow Press. 4779.  Ottino, Pierre, 1985: “Développements et enjeux sociaux en Nouvelle-Calédonie: l’opération café”, in Les Temps Modernes, 41 (464), p. 1623-1653. 4780.  Ottino, Pierre, 1985: “Un site ancien aux îles Marquises: l’abri-sous-roche d’Anapua, à Ua Pou”, in Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 41 (80), p. 33-37. 4781.  Ottino, Pierre, 1985: Archéologie des îles Marquises: contribution à la connaissance de l’île de Ua Pou, Paris: Univ. Paris 1. 4782.  Ottley, Earle B., 1982: Trials and triumphs: the long road to a middle class society in the U.S. Virgin Islands, Charlotte Amalie, St. Thomas: E.B. Ottley. 4783.  Otto, T.; Turner, J.; Filer, C., 1990: “The Sociology of Baitfish Royalties in Papua New Guinea”, in Occasional Paper No.6, Department of Anthropology and Sociology, University of Papua New Guinea. 4784.  Oueslati, Ameur, 1986: Jerba et Kerkna: (îles de la côte orientale de la Tunisie: leur évolution géomorphologique au cours du quartenaire, [Tunis], Université de Tunis.

2009

262

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

4785.  Ouessant; [par l’association Bibliographie de Bretagne et l’Asociation Culture, arts et lettres des îles], 2001: Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne; Ouessant: Association Culture, arts et lettres des îles. 4786.  Ouou, Emulio-Ree, 1980: History of South Malaita, Origin of Livings, Centre and Diameter of the Universe, Honiara: Government Printer. 4787.  Overlack, P., 1992: Australian defence awareness and German naval planning in the Pacific 1900-1914, War and Society, Vol 10, 1, pp.37-51. 4788.  Overlack, P., 1998: Bless the Queen and curse the colonial office; Australasian reaction to German consolidation in the Pacific 1871-99, Jornal of Pacific History, Vol 33, 2, pp.13352. 4789.  Overton, J.D., 1987: Roads, rice and cane regional planning and rural development in western vanua levu, Fiji, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. vol. 28, no 1, pp. 40-54. 4790.  Overton, J., 1993: “Small states, big issues? Human geography in the Pacific islands”, Singapore journal of Tropical Geography, n°2, p. 265-276. 4791.  Owen, R.E., Witt, S. and Gammon, S., 1993: Sustainable tourism development in Wales: From theory to practice, Tourism Management, 14(3), pp.463-474. 4792.  Oxford Univ, 2001: Imperialism and Nationalism: Maritime Southeast Asia: Malaysia, Indonesia and the Philippines, 1830-1966. Disponível online em url: http://www.history. ox.ac.uk/currentunder/bibliographies/fhs-fs-imperialism_maritime_se_asia.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4793.  Paci, R., 1997: Crescita economica e sistemi produttivi locali in Sardegna, Cagliari, Cooperativa Universitaria Editrice Cagliaritana. 4794.  Pacific Information Centre (Suva, Fiji). Lisitala, 1984: A Bibliography of Pacific Writers. Suva, Fiji: Pacific Information Centre. 4795.  Padrão Temudo, Marina, 2008: “De serviçal a camponês: A persistência das desigualdades sociais em São Tomé e Principe”, in Lusotopie, vol. XV, no 2, p. 71-93. 4796.  Padrón, Francisco Morales, 1989: Canarias y América, prólogo por Fernando Fernández Martín, Madrid: Gela: Espasa-Calpe/Argantonio. 4797.  Padrón, Francisco Morales, transcripción, estudio y notas. 1993: Canarias: crónicas de su conquista, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 4798.  Pagán Jiménez, Jaime R., 2007: De antiguos pueblos y culturas botánicas en el Puerto Rico indígena: el archipiélago borincano y la llegada de los primeros pobladores agroceramistas, Oxford: Archaeopress / John and Erica Hedges Ltd.. 4799.  Page, S.J. and Thom, K.J., 1997: Towards sustainable tourism planning in New Zealand: Public sector responses, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 5 (1), pp.59-77. 4800.  Page, S. (ed.), 2000: Regions and development: politics, security and economics, Londres, Frank Cass. 4801.  Page, S., 2000: Regionalism among developing countries, Basingstoke, Macmillan. 4802.  Pagni, Lucien; Zens, Stefan, 1989: Tuvlu, sans ressources et sans misere - la douceur de vie polynesienne, Le Courrier Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 114, pp. 48-55. 4803.  Paiewonsky, Isidor, 1987, 1989: Eyewitness accounts of slavery in the Danish West Indies: also graphic tales of other slave happenings on ships and plantations, New York: Fordham University Press.

2009

CEHA

263

4804.  Paiewonsky, Micahel, 1990: Conquest of Eden, 1493-1515: other voyages of Columbus, Guadeloupe, Puerto Rico, Hispaniola, Virgin Islands, Rome: St Thomas: MAPes MONDe, Editore. 4805.  Pain, C. F.; Specht, F., 1985: Tectonic stability of West New Britain; evidence from cave sediments, Search Sydney, 1511-12: 343-344. 4806.  Paine, S.C.M, 2002: The Sino-Japanese War of 1894–1895: Perceptions, Power, and Primacy, London: Cambridge University Press. 4807.  Painter, Kenneth, edited by. 1994: Rosemary Cramp -- The archaeology of the early church in the Channel Islands, in Churches built in ancient times: recent studies in early Christian archaeology, London: Society of Antiquaries of London: Accordia Research Centre, University of London. 4808.  Palard, J., 1998: Vers l’Europe des régions? , La documentation française, Paris. 4809.  Palermo, V., 2007: Sal en las heridas: las Malvinas en la cultura argentina contemporánea, Buenos Aires: Sudamericana. 4810.  Paletti, C., 1999: Un’operazione riuscita: Corsica settembre 1943 em Memorie storiche militari, Ufficio Storico Stato Maggiore Esercito, Roma. 4811.  Palfreyman, W. D., R. W. Johnson, R. J. S. Cooke, R. J. Bultitude and (compiled by), 1986: Volcanic activity in Papua New Guinea before 1944: an annotated bibliography of reported observations, Department of Resources and Energy, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Geology and Geophysics, Canberra, Australian Government Publishing Service. 4812.  Palley, Claire, 2005: An International Relations Debacle: The UN Secretary-General’s Mission of Good Offices in Cyprus, 1999-2004, Hart Publishing. 4813.  Palmer, Margaret 1983: The mapping of Bermuda: a bibliography of printed maps & charts, 1548, London: Holland Press; Pembroke, Bermuda: Sole distribution in Bermuda through Nicholas Lusher. 4814.  Palmié, edited by Stephan, 2008: Africas of the Americas: beyond the search for origins in the study of Afro-Atlantic religions, Leiden; Boston: Brill. 4815.  Pálsson, Gísli, Guđrún Pétursdóttir, 1997: Social implications of quota systems in fisheries: proceedings of a seminar held in the Vestman Islands in May 1996, Copenhagen, Nordic Council of Ministers, c1997. 4816.  Panagariya, A., 1999: The regionalism debate: an overview, The World economy, n°4, p. 477-513. 4817.  Pancorbo, Luis, 2006: Las islas del rey Salomón: en busca de la Tierra Austral, Barcelona: Laertes. 4818.  Pandey, Gauri Shankar, 2000: Patriots of Andaman in freedom struggle movement, 19421945, Port Blair: Sangeeta Pub. House for Homfraygunj Martyrs Memorial Committee. 4819.  Pandya, Vishvajit, 1993: Above the forest: a study of Andamanese ethnoanemology, cosmology, and the power ritual, Delhi; New York: Oxford University Press. 4820.  Panikkar, K., 1999: Regionalism and World Security, India Quaterly, n°3/4, p. 131-136. 4821.  Panoff, M.; Farani Taioro, 1981: La premiere generation des colons Francais a Tahiti, Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, vol. vol. 37, no 70-71, p. p. 3-26. 4822.  Panoff, M., 1985: Du travail villageois au travail en plantation, Techniques et Culture, 5: 125-137. 4823.  Panoff, M.; 1987: Y Eut-il des esclaves en nouvelle-Bretagne: une critique des temoignages,

2009

264

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, no 85, p. p. 133-155. 4824.  Panoff, M. 1994: “L’Art d’Etre Grand-Mere chez les Maenge”, in Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 98 ?(1): 1-8. 4825.  Panoff, M. 1994/95: “Workers, recruiters and planters in the Bismarck Archipelago, 18851914” in The Journal of Pacific Studies, 18: 32-65. 4826.  Panoff, Michel, sous la direction. 1995: Trésors des îles Marquises, Paris: Réunion des Musées nationaux. 4827.  Pantin, D., 1997: Alternative Ecological Vulnerability Indices for Developing Countries with Special Reference to Small Island Developing States (SIDS), Report for the United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Sustainable Economic Development Unit. Trinidad, University of West Indies. 4828.  Papadakis, N., 1977: The international legal regime of artificial islands, Leyden: Sijthoff. 4829.  Papadakis, Yiannis, 2005: Echoes from the Dead Zone: Across the Cyprus Divide, LondonNew York: I.B. Tauris 4830.  Papoutsaki, E. and Sundar Harris, U., 2008: Unpacking ‘Islandness’ in South Pacific Islands Communication. In Papoutsaki and Sundar Harris, South Pacific Islands Communication: Regional perspectives, local issues Singapore: AMIC. Disponível online em URL: http:// kauri.aut.ac.nz:8080/dspace/bitstream/123456789/197/1/comm_intro.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009, pp. 1-12. 4831.  Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association, 1990: Annual report 1989, Kimbe, Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association. 4832.  Papua New Guinea, 1982/3: National Nutrition Survey: Provincial Tabulation West New Britain Province, Goroka and Boroko, Papua New Guinea Institute of Medical Research and Nutrition Section, National Department of Health. 4833.  Papua New Guinea, 1980: West New Britain Province, Preliminary Field Counts, National Census. 4834.  Papua New Guinea, National Statistical Office, 1982: West New Britain Province, Provincial Data System Rural Community Register P.O. Wardstrip, Papua New Guinea. 4835.  Paquette, R.L. and S.L. Engerman, 1996: The Lesser Antilles in the Age of European Expansion, Gainesville: University press of Florida. 4836.  Paraskevopoulos, Christos J., 2001: Interpreting convergence in the European Union: patterns of collective action, social learning, and Europeanization, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire ; New York: Palgrave. 4837.  Paravisini-Gebert, edited by Lizabeth and Ivette Romero-Cesareo, 2008: Displacements and transformations in Caribbean cultures, Gainesville: University Press of Florida. 4838.  Paravisini-Gebert, Lizabeth, 2008: Literature of the Caribbean, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press. 4839.  Parfit, Michael, 2003: “Islands of the Pacific”, National Geographic, 203 (March): 106–125. 4840.  Parfitt, R. L.; Scotter, D. R., 1972: “Note on the water characteristics and mineralogy of a soil containing diagnostic pumice”, in The Papua New Guinea Agricultural Journal, 23(1/2): 9-11. 4841.  Parish, Michael Woodbine, 1993: Aegean adventures 1940-43: and the end of Churchill’s dream, Sussex, England: Book Guild. 4842.  Parker, Jason C., 2008: Brother’s keeper: the United States, race, and empire in the British

2009

CEHA

265

Caribbean, 1937-1962, Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press. 4843.  Parker, R. S., 1995: Appraising the colonial record; Australia in Papua New Guinea, Lal BV and Nelson H, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp.9-24. 4844.  Parkinson, Richard, 1986: Ethnography of Ontong Java and Tasman Islands with remarks re. The Marqueen and Abgarris Islands, translated by Rose S. Hartmann; introduced and annotated by Richard Feinberg, Pacific Studies, 9(3):1-31. 4845.  Parkinson, Richard, 1999: Thirty years in the South Seas: land and people, customs and traditions in the Bismarck Archipelago and on the German Solomon Islands, edited by B. Ankermann; translated by John Dennison; translation edited by J. Peter White, Bathurst, N.S.W.: Crawford House Publishing in association with Oceania Publications, University of Sydney. 4846.  Parmentier, R. J., 1991: The rhetoric of free association and Palau’s political struggle, The Contemporary Pacific, 3, 1, 146-58. 4847.  Parmentier, Jan, 1997: To the Dogger Bank, the Faroes and Iceland. A joint stock fishing company in Nieuport, 1727-1737, In Holm, Poul; Janzen, Olaf Uwe (ed.), Northern Seas Yearbook (Fiskeri- og sofartsmuseets studieserie, 10), Esbjerg: Fiskeri- og Søfartsmuseet, 39-56. 4848.  Parmentier, Jan, 1999: «The Cape Verde Islands and the Azores as Ports of Call in the Dutch and Flemish East India Trade During the 17th and 18th Centuries», Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional, pp. 257-280. 4849.  Parr, J. F., C. Lentfer and W. E. Boyd, 2001: “Spatial patterning of a Lapita landscape at an archaeological site in the West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea”, Domodomo, 13(2): 7-18. 4850.  Parsons, James Jerome, edited by William M. Denevan, 1989: Hispanic lands and peoples: selected writings of James J. Parsons, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press. 4851.  Parsons, Michael, 2002: “The South Atlantic conflict of 1982: a test for Anglo-American relations”, in Revue française de civilisation britannique, 12:1, 85-100. 4852.  Partridge, C.; Davenport, T. G., 1992: Fortifications of Alderney: a concise history and guide to the defences of Alderney from Roman times to the second world war, Alderney. 4853.  Partridge, Colin; Davenport, Trevor, 1993: The fortifications of Alderney, Alderney, Channel Islands: Published on behalf of the Alderney Fortifications Centre, by Alderney Publishers. 4854.  Partridge, Michael Stephen, 1986: “The defence of the Channel Islands, 1814-1870”, in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research, 64, Publisher: Society for Army Historical Research, 34-42. 4855.  Pasqualini, Michel (dir.), 2003: Des îles côte à côte: Histoire du peuplement des îles de l’Antiquité au Moyen Âge (Provence, Alpes-Maritimes, Ligurie, Toscane), Aix-en-Provence & Bordighera. 4856.  Passo, Fabrizio Dal, 2003: Bibliografia, in Miti, utopie e realtà della rivoluzione corsa (17291769), Tese de doutoramento. Disponível online em url: http://www.tesionline.it/consult/ bibliografia.jsp?idt=8316. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4857.  Pastinelli, Héloïse, 2004 : La prise en compte et le traitement de l’insularité par les Etats espagnol, italien et français: étude comparative des statuts institutionnels de trois

2009

266

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

territoires insulaires en Méditerranée Occidentale: la Corse, les Baléares et la Sardaigne; sous la direction de Monsieur le Professeur Hugues Portelli, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université Panthéon-Assas (Paris). Université de soutenance. 4858.  Pastor, R., 1992: US foreign policy toward latin America and the Caribbean, Princeton, Princeton University Press. 4859.  Paterson, C.B., 1986: In the far Pacific; at the birth of nations, National Geographic, 46099, Oct. 4860.  Paterson, Donald Edgar, 1999: Introduction to South Pacific Law (coauthored  with Jennifer Corrin Care, Tess Newton Cain), Cavendish Publishing Limited, London. 4861.  Paterson, Donald Edgar, 2000: Selected Constitutions of the South Pacific, Institute of Justice and Applied legal Studies, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji. 4862.  Paterson, Donald Edgar, 2004: South Pacific Property Law, Cavendish Publishing, London (with Sue Farran). 4863.  Patman, Robert G., 2005: “Globalisation, Sovereignty, and the Transformation of New Zealand Foreign Policy” (PDF). Working Paper 21/05. Centre for Strategic Studies, Victoria University of Wellington. Disponível online em url: http://www.vuw.ac.nz/css/docs/ Working_Papers/WP21.pdf. Consulta em 13 de Agosto de 2009. 4864.  Patourel, J.H., 2004: Le The medieval administration of the Channel Islands, 1199-1399; Barreau de Guernesey: Guernsey Bar. 4865.  Patrick D. Nunn, 2004: “Through a mist on the ocean: human understanding of island environments”, in Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, vol. 95, issue 3, pages 311-325. 4866.  Patterson, Carolyn Bennett, 1986: “In the Far Pacific: At the Birth of Nations”, National Geographic, 170 (October): 460–500. 4867.  Patton, Mark, 1995: Neolithic communities of the Channel Islands, Oxford: Tempus Reparatum. 4868.  Patton, Mark, 1996: Islands in time: island sociogeography and Mediterranean prehistory, London; New York: Routledge. 4869.  Paul, Max., 1983: Black families in modern Bermuda, Göttingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany: Edition Herodot. 4870.  Paulian, R., 1983: Les Iles, Laboratoires Naturels... (conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, 1983, no 12, p. p. 29-40 4871.  Paulian, R., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Les iles, laboratoires naturels, Specificite et contraintes biologiques des milieux insulaires, Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 69-80. 4872.  Paulin, Élisa, 1997: Théories de la spécialisation internationale et économies insulaires: le cas des îles de la Caraïbe, l’Harmattan. 4873.  Pavão J. Almeida, 1988: Constantes da Insularidade numa Definição de Literatura Açoriana, online em http://lusofonia.com.sapo.pt/acores/acorianidade_pavao_1988.htm. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4874.  Pavlides, C. and C. Gosden, 1994: 35,000 year old sites in the rainforests of West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Antiquity, 68(604-610). 4875.  Pavlides, C., 1993: “New archaeological research at Yombon, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea”, in Archaeology in Oceania, 28(1): 55-9.

2009

CEHA

267

4876.  Pawley, Andrew; Ross, Malcolm; Tryon, Darrell, ed. 2001: The boy from Bundaberg: studies in Melanesian linguistics in honour of Tom Dutton, Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University. 4877.  Paximadopoulou-Staurinou, Miranta, 1980: Hoi exegerseis tēs Kephallēnias kata ta etē 1848 kai 1849, Athēna: [Hetaireia Kephallēniakōn Historikōn Ereunōn]. 4878.  Payne, A., 2004: Small States in the Global Politics of Development in The Table, Vol. 93. No 376 (pp. 623). 4879.  Paz Sánchez, Manuel de, 1984: Historia de la francmasonería en las Islas Canarias, 1739-1936, prólogo Antonio de Bethencourt Massieu, [La Laguna]: Ediciones del Excmo. Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 4880.  Paz, Manuel de., 1992: La esclavitud blanca: contribución a la historia del inmigrante canario en América: siglo XIX, [Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 4881.  Paz Sánchez, Manuel; González, Manuel Hernández, 1994: Amados compatriotas: acerca del impacto de la emancipación americana en Canarias, [La Laguna, Canary Islands]: Ayuntamiento de La Laguna, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 4882.  Paz Sánchez, Manuel de; Carmona Calero, Emilia, 1995: Canarias, la masonería, Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 4883.  Peacock, A., 1995: Ministerial memoir; Papua New Guinea’s transition to independence, Lal BV and Nelson H, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp.1-8. 4884.  Peacock, Compiled by Dr Karen, 1997: Pacific islands literature - a selective reading guide, Hamilton Library, University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http:// www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/Pacific_literature_bibliography_07.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4885.  Peacock, Compiled by Dr Karen, 2001: Island Lives: A Selected Bibliography of Biographies, Hamilton Library. University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www. hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/biog.07.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 4886.  Peacock, Karen, 2001: Hamilton Library (UHM) Selected Refs. on Fiji, UHM, Center for Pacific Island Studies. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/ bibliography/Fiji2001.htm.Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.[Obs.: lista de referências bibliográficas sobre as ilhas Fiji]. 4887.  Peacock, Karen, 2001: Reference Sources for Papua New Guinea, Hamilton Library, University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/ bibliography/PNGbib2001.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 4888.  Peacock, Karen, 2001a: Selected Reference Sources for Micronesia, Hamilton Library, University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/ bibliography/micronesia2001.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 4889.  Peacock, Karen, 2007: Island Lives: A Selected Bibliography of Biographies, Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/biog.07.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 4890.  Peacock, Karen, 2007a: Pacific Collections National Library of Australia Pacific Islands Literature: A Selective Reading Guide, Hamilton Library,University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/Pacific_literature_ bibliography_07.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. 4891.  Pearn, editors, John Peggy Carter, 1995: Islands of incarceration: convict and quarantine

2009

268

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

islands of the Australian coast, The Australian Society of the History of Medicine. Brisbane, Q., Australia: Amphion Press. 4892.  Pearson, Bill, 1984: Rifled sanctuaries: some views of the Pacific Islands in Western literature to 1900, [Auckland, N.Z.]: Auckland University Press. 4893.  Pearson, M. P.; Godden, K., 2002: In Search of the Red Slave: Shipwreck and Captivity in Madagascar, Sutton Publishing. 4894.  Pearson, Michael; Stehberg, Ruben, 2006: ‘Nineteenth century sealing sites on Rugged Island, South Shetland Islands’, Polar Record, 42:4, 335-47 4895.  Pearson, Paul N.; Nicholas, C. J., 2007: “Marks of extreme violence” : Charles Darwin’s geological observations at St Jago (São Tiago), Cape Verde islands, In Wyse Jackson, Patrick N. (ed.), Four centuries of geological travel : the search for knowledge on foot, bicycle, sledge and camel (Geological Society special publication, 287), London: The Geological Society, 239-53 4896.  Pearson, edited by Richard, 2009: Okinawa: the rise of an Island Kingdom: archaeological and cultural perspectives: proceedings of a symposium, Kingdom of the Coral Seas, November 17, 2007, at the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, Oxford: Archaeopress. 4897.  Peattie, Mark R., 1988: Nanyō: the rise and fall of the Japanese in Micronesia, 1885-1945, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian, and Pacific Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press. 4898.  Peck, William A., 1993: The pig war and other experiences of William Peck: soldier 18581862, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: the journal of William A. Peck, Jr, senior editor, C. Brewster Coulter; special editor, Bert Webber, Medford, OR : Webb Research Group. 4899.  Peckham, Robert S., 2003: ‘The uncertain state of islands: national identity and the discourse of islands in nineteenth-century Britain and Greece’, Journal of Historical Geography, 29:4, 499-515. 4900.  Pedersen, Erik Overgaard, 1997: The attempted sale of the Danish West Indies to the United States of America, 1865-1870, Frankfurt, Haag + Herchen. 4901.  Pedgley, David E., 1998: Early Tostevins in Guernsey, Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 24:3, 469-8. 4902.  Pedinielli, L., 1993: Corse, ton identité historique, La Garde. 4903.  Pedraza, Silvia, 2007: Political Disaffection in Cuba’s Revolution and Exodus (Cambridge Studies in Contentious Politics)) Cambridge University Press. 4904.  Pedreira, Antonio Salvador, 2001: Insularismo: ensayos de interpretación puertorriqueña, ed. de Mercedes López-Baralt 4905.  Peebles, Patrick, 1982: Sri Lanka: A Handbook of Historical Statistics, Boston: G. K. Hall. 4906.  Péhaut, Yves, 1990: Les plantations allemandes des mers du Sud avant 1914, Iles et archipels n° 12, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 4907.  Peil, Tiina, 1999: Islescapes: Estonian small islands and islanders through three centuries, Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell international. 4908.  Pelletier, Monique (dir.) et all…, 2002: Les îles, du mythe à la réalité, Paris: Editions du CTHS, Ministère de la Recherche; France, Ministère de l’Education Nationale; Comité des Travaux Historiques et Scientifiques. 4909.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1992, 1993: L’insularité dans la mer Intérieure japonaise, Bordeaux,

2009

CEHA

269

CRET-CEGET, collection “Iles et archipels”, 16. 4910.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1992: Insularité et Démographie dans la Mer Intérieure Japonaise, in Mappe Monde, 4. Disponível online em URL: http://www.mgm.fr/PUB/Mappemonde/ M492/JAPON.pdf. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009. 4911.  Pelletier, P., 1993: L’insularité dans la mer intérieure japonaise. Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles et archipels”, n°16. 4912.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1995: La géopolitique insulaire du Japon, Hérodote, N°78-79, p.20-95. 4913.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1997: La Japonésie. Géopolitique et géographie historique de la surinsularité au Japon, CNRS Editions, Paris. 4914.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1997-a: “Aspects géopolitiques de la surinsularité japonaise” in A.-L.(dir.), Vivre dans une île. Une géopolitique des Insularités, L’Harmattan, Collection”Géographie et Cultures”, p. 131-141. 4915.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1997-b: “Iles-frontières, territoires impossibles?”, Études internationales, nº1, p. 73-103. 4916.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1998: “Le paradigme japonésien”, Revue française de géoéconomie, nº‹6, p.87-97. 4917.  Pelletier, Philippe, 1999: «Iles éloignées, passages obligés: le rôle de la surinsularité dans la civilisation japonaise», L’Île Laboratoire, Anne Meistersheim éd., Ajaccio, Editions Alain Piazzola, p. 301-317. 4918.  Pelletier, Philippe, 2000a: “Le Japon: territoire insulaire ou montagnard? Une réflexion anthropo-géographique autour des termes kuni, shima et yama”, Montagnes imaginées, montagnes représentées, nouveaux discours sur la montagne de l’Europe au Japon, André Siganos et Simone Vierne dir., Grenoble, Ellug, p. 81-99. 4919.  Pelletier, Philippe, 2000b: “Tumulte des flots entre Japon et Corée, à propos de la dénomination de la “mer du Japon””, Annales de Géographie, 613, p. 279-305. 4920.  Pelletier, Philippe, 2005: «L’île, un bon objet géographique - Préface». Les Dynamiques contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires - De l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires, Nathalie Bernardie-Tahir et François Taglioni éd., Paris, Karthala, p. 7-17. 4921.  Pelletier, Philippe, Nathalie Bernardie, François Taglioni, 2005; Les dynamiques contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires: de l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires, KARTHALA Editions. 4922.  Pelling (M.), Uitto (J. I.), 2001: «Small Island Developing States: Natural Disaster Vulnerability and Global Change», Environmental Hazards, 3(2), p. 49-62. 4923.  Peloso, Silvano, 2004: Al di là delle Colonne d’Ercole: Madera e gli arcipelaghi atlantici nelle cronache italiane di viaggio dell’età delle scoperte, Viterbo: Sette città. 4924.  Pelt, Jean-Marie, 1999: La cannelle et le panda: les naturalistes explorateurs autour du monde, Paris: Fayard. 4925.  Peltre, Wurtz Jacqueline, 1985: “Le ravitaillement en riz à Madagascar de 1974 à 1984: le cas d’Antananarivo”, In: Bricas N. (ed.), Courade Georges (ed.), Coussy J. (ed.), Hugon P. (ed.), Muchnik J. (ed.) Nourrir les villes en Afrique sub-saharienne, Paris: L’Harmattan, p. 231-246. (Villes et Entreprises). 4926.  Pempel, T., 2000: International finance and Asian regionalism, The Pacific Review, n°1, p.57-72. 4927.  Peña, Pablo Atoche ... [et al.], 1995: Evidencias arqueológicas del mundo romano en

2009

270

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Lanzarote, Islas Canarias, Arrecife [Canary Islands]: Servicio de Publicaciones del Excmo. Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote. 4928.  Peoples, James G., 1984: Island in trust: culture change and dependence in a Micronesian economy, Boulder, Colo: Westview Press, 1984. 4929.  Peoples, James G., 1993: “Political Evolution in Micronesia”, Ethnology, 32 (Winter): 1–17. 4930.  Pepe, Leandro Leone, 2006:  “O envolvimento do Brasil na questão Timorense”, in Lusotopie, vol. XIII, no 2, p. 49-58. 4931.  Peraldi, Xavier, Marciano, Alain, 1997: Le financement des infrastructures de transport dans les régions périphériques. Une approche par les choix publics, Revue économique, Volume 48 Numéro 2 pp. 257-270. 4932.  Peraldi, X., 1999: “ Le système de continuité territoriale de la Corse: coûteux, forcément coûteux ”, Revue d’économie régionale et urbaine, n°2, pp. 333-352. 4933.  Peraldi, X., 2002: Accessibilité des régions périphériques de l’Union Européenne et politiques publiques de transport, Région et développement, n° 15, p. 121-146. 4934.  Perdue, Theda and Michael D. Green, Eds. 1995: The Cherokee Removal:  A Brief History    with Documents, Bedford Books. 4935.  Perdue, Theda, 1999:  Cherokee Women:  Gender and Culture Change, 1700-1835, University of Nebraska Press. 4936.  Pereira, Daniel, 2005: Estudos da História de Cabo Verde, Praia, Alfa-Comunicações. 4937.  Pereira, Fernando Jasmins, 1979: O destino das ilhas, Lisboa: Edições A Rua. 4938.  Peretz, D., 2001: Small States in the global economy, Londres, Commonwealth Secretariat/ World Bank. 4939.  Pérez Jr, Louis A., 1995: Essays on Cuban History: Historiography and Research, University Presses of Florida. 4940.  Pérez Jr., Louis A., 1998: The War of 1898: The United States and Cuba in History and Historiography, University of North Carolina Press. 4941.  Pérez Saavedra, Francisco, 1995: Lanzarote, isla de lava y espuma: su historia, su paisaje y su gente, [Lanzarote, Canary Islands]: Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 4942.  Pérez Vidal, José, 1979: Canarias en Galdós, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 4943.  Pérez Voituriez, Antonio, 1985: Alternativas de Canarias en la integración de España en la CEE: algunos aspectos jurídicos internacionales de sus posibles relaciones, ante la incidencia de la integración española, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, Caja General de Ahorros de Canarias. 4944.  Pérez, Christine, 2005: La perception de l’insularité dans les mondes méditerranéen ancien et archipélagique polynésien d’avant la découverte missionnaire, Paris: Publibook. 4945.  Pérez, José Miguel, Guillermo Ascanio, 1997: Capitalismo y lucha de clases en el campo canario (1931-1936) ensayo preliminar, Ignacio Reyes, Tenerife, Islas Canarias, Baile del Sol. 4946.  Pérez, transcripción, estudio preliminar y notas, Llorenç, Lleonard Muntaner, Mateu Colom 1986: El Tribunal de la Inquisición en Mallorca: relación de causas de fe, 1578-1806; prólogo de Bartolomé Escandell Bonet, Tribunal de la Inquisición en Mallorca, Palma de Mallorca: M. Font.

2009

CEHA

271

4947.  Perham, Margery edited, 1988: Pacific prelude: a journey to Samoa and Australasia, 1929, introduction by A.H.M. Kirk-Greene, London: P. Owen. 4948.  Perinbanayagam, R. S., 1996: “Book review: To sing with pigs is human: The concept of person in Papua New Guinea - Goodale, JC”, in Contemporary Sociology-a Journal of Reviews 25(6): 808-809. 4949.  Peristianis, Nicos, (ed.), 2006: Britain in Cyprus: colonialism and post-colonialism 18782006, Mannheim: Bibliopolis. 4950.  Perloff, Nancy, 1995: Gauguin’s French Baggage: Decadence and Colonialism in Tahiti, In Elazar Barkan and Ronald Bush (eds) Prehistories of the Future: The Primitivist Project and the Culture of Modernism, Stanford: Stanford University Press, 226-269. 4951.  Peroin, Jean-François, 2005: Îles et oasis: de lisolat au monde, Annales de géographie, juiller-août, vol. 114, no 644, p. 339-341. 4952.  Péron, Françoise, 1993: Des îles et des Hommes: Insularité Aujourd’hui. Rennes, Editions de la Cité-Ouest France. 4953.  Péron, Françoise, 1991: “Spécifité des sociétés insulaires contemporaines: examples des îles françaises de l’Atlantique et de la Manche”, In: Territoires et sociétés insulaires, Colloque International. Brest, Minist. de l’Environment. 4954.  Péron, Françoise, 1992: L’évolution démographique récente des îles du Ponant: l’amorce d’un renouveau insulaire ? , Norois (Caen), no 156, p. 439-450. 4955.  Péron, Françoise et Rieucau Jean dir., 1996: La Maritimité aujourd’hui, Paris, L’Harmattan, Géographie et cultures. 4956.  Péron, Françoise, (dir.), 1996a: Les îles en société fonctions sociales, dimensions subjectives et intégration au système monde, Séminaire de l’URA 904, Brest, 3-5 avril 1996, p. 1-40. 4957.  Péron, Françoise, 1996b: «La mer comme valorisation d’un territoire, l’île productrice de mythes et nouveau géo-symbole», La Maritimité aujourd’hui, F. Péron et J. Rieucau dir., Paris, L’Harmattan, Géographie et cultures, 338 p., p. 79-91. 4958.  Péron, Françoise, 1997: Ouessant, l’île sentinelle: vie et tradition d’une île bretonne, nouv. éd. revue et augmentée, Douarnenez: Le Chasse-Marée. 4959.  Péron, Françoise, 2004: ‘The Contemporary Lure of the Island’, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 326-339. 4960.  Péron, Françoise, 2005: Fonctions sociales et dimensions subjectives des espaces insulaires (à partir de l’exemple des îles du Ponant), In Troin, Jean-François, Îles et oásis, Annales de géographie, juiller-août, vol. 114, no 644, p. 422-436. 4961.  Perras, Galen R., 2003: Stepping stones to nowhere: the Aleutian Islands, Alaska, and American military strategy, 1867-1945, Vancouver: UBC Press. 4962.  Perrin, M. F. et alii, 1987: Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme, Bourdeaux, Cret. (Collection Iles e Archipels; n. 08). 4963.  Perrin, François, 2001: Mayotte: L’île au lagon, Orphie. 4964.  Pesme, Jacques-Olivier, 1997: Tourisme et développement durable à Saint-Thomas (Îles Vierges américaines), Iles et archipels n° 24, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 4965.  Perroni, C.; Whalley, J., 2000: “The new regionalism”, Canadian Journal of Economics, n°1, p. 3-18. 4966.  Perry, P.J., 1985: Les causes geographiques du partage politique des Iles Samoa, Les

2009

272

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

Cahiers D’Outre Mer, no 149, p. p. 53-63. 4967.  Pesme, Jacques Olivier, 1995: Developpement economique et social d’une communaute francaise dans les Antilles anglophones: le cas des Frenchies dans l’ile de Saint-Thomas aux Iles Vierges americaines, In: Iles tropicales, Les Cahiers D’Outre Mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 277-293. 4968.  Pesme, Jacques Olivier; Singaravelou (pref.). 1997: Tourisme et developpement durable a Saint-Thomas (Iles Vierges Americaines), Talence: CRET. 4969.  Pesme, Jacques-Olivier, 1997: Tourisme et développement durable à Saint-Thomas (Îles Vierges américaines), Iles et archipels n° 24, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 4970.  Petersen, G., 1984: Ponape’s body politic; island and nation, PS, 8, 1, 112-36. 4971.  Petersen, G., 1985:A cultural analysis of the Ponapean independence vote in the 1983 plebiscite, PS, 9, 1, 13-52. 4972.  Petersen, G., 1986: Redistribution in a Micronesian Commercial Economy, Oceania, vol. vol. 57, no 2, p. p. 83-98. 4973.  Petersen, G., 1994: The FSM’s 1990 Constitutional Convention; calm before the storm? TCP, 6, 2, 337-70. 4974.  Petersen, G., 1995: Why is Micronesian independence an issue? in B.V. Lal and H. Nelson, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post colonial Pacific, PHA, p.69-82. 4975.  Pethica, James L.; Roy, James C. (ed.). 1998: ‘To the land of the free from the islands of slaves’: Henry Stratford Persse’s letters from Galway to America, 1821-1832, Cork: Cork University Press. 4976.  Petit Skinner, S., 1980: Micronesie, Region D’Oceanie mal connue, Mondes et Cultures, no 2, p. p. 483-501. 4977.  Petrie, Cameron A., 2008: “Assessing the effects of volcanic disasters on human settlement in the Willaumez Peninsula, Papua New Guinea: a Bayesian approach to radiocarbon calibration, in The Holocene, Vol. 18, No. 5, 729-744. 4978.  Petruso, Karl, 1992: Ayia Irini: the balance weights: an analysis of weight measurement in prehistoric Crete and the Cycladic Islands, Mainz on Rine: P. von Zabern. 4979.  Petterson, D., 2002: Revolution in Zanzibar – An American’s Cold War, Oxford: Westview 4980.  Petty, Bruce M., 2002: Saipan: oral histories of the Pacific War, Jefferson, N.C., McFarland. 4981.  Philbrick, Nathaniel, 2003: Sea of Glory: America’s Voyage of Discovery, the U.S. Exploring Expedition, 1838–1842, Viking Adult. 4982.  Philippe, Jean-Alexis, 2008: Le commerce martiniquais entre insularité et mondialisation; sous la direction d’Alain Metton, Créteil : Université de Paris-Val-de-Marne, Thèse de doctorat: Géographie-Urbanisme: Paris 12. 4983.  Phillips, Fred, Sir, 1991: Caribbean life and culture: a citizen reflects, Kingston, Jamaica: Heinemann Publishers (Caribbean). 4984.  Phillips, Shawn M.; Phillips, Lisa W., 2008: ‘Health Transition in the Cayman Islands: A Historical Analysis of a Caribbean Population, 1890–1930’, Wadabagei, 11:3, 100-18. 4985.  Philp, Jude, Past time: Torres Strait Islander material from the Haddon Collection, 18881905: a National Museum of Australia exhibition from the University of Cambridge, Canberra: National Museum of Australia. 4986.  Philpott, Robert A., 1996: An archaeological survey of Port Egmont, the first British

2009

CEHA

273

settlement in the Falkland Islands, Post-Medieval Archaeology, 30, 1-62. 4987.  Phlogaitēs, Spyridōn I., 1981: Système vénitien de successions ab intestat et structures familiales dans les îles ioniennes, préface, André A. Gasis, Genève: Droz. 4988.  Piazza, proceedings editors, Millie M., Patricia Young, 1997: Sustainable development in the Pacific Islands: conference proceedings, Pacific Islands Conference of Leaders (16th: 1997: Pohnpei, Micronesia), Pohnpei: Federated States of Micronesia. 4989.  Piazza, Walter F., 1992: A epopéia açorico-madeirense, 1747-1756, Florianópolis: Editora da UFSC: Editora Lunardelli. 4990.  Picard, David, 2006  : Les nouveaux jardins sacrés: insularité tropicale et intégration globale: une approche anthropologique du tourisme international à la Réunion, Lille: A.N.R.T., Thèse de doctorat: Anthropologie: La Réunion. 4991.  Pieters, P. E., 1968: “Village water supply survey, northwest of WNB district 1968”, in Note on Investigation 674173., Dept of Lands, Surveys and Mines. 4992.  Pigafetta, Antonio, 2007: The first voyage around the world, 1519-1522: an account of Magellan’s expedition, edited by Theodore J. Cachey, Toronto [Ont.]; Buffalo [N.Y.]: University of Toronto Press. 4993.  Pike, G. R. and B. Craig, 1999: “The Usher photographic collection from the South-West Pacific”, Records of the South Australian Museum, 31(2): 215-253. 4994.  Pike, Hew, 2008: From the frontline: family letters and diaries: 1914 to the Falklands and Afghanistan, Barnsley: Pen & Sword. 4995.  Pillon, Patrick, 1985: Développement et enjeux sociaux en Nouvelle Calédonie: l’Opération Café, Nouméa: ORSTOM, 44 p. 4996.  Pillon, Patrick, 1985: Espaces sociaux précoloniaux et identités mélanésiennes, Nouméa: ORSTOM. 4997.  Pillon, Patrick, 1985a: Jeunesse urbaine mélanésienne et différenciations sociales, Nouméa: ORSTOM. 4998.  Pillon, Patrick, 1985b: Rapport de mission en Papouasie-Nouvelle Guinée du 23 août 1985 au 6 septembre 1985, Nouméa: ORSTOM. 4999.  Piña Homs, Román, 1982: Els reis de la Casa de Mallorca, [Palma de Mallorca]: Ajuntament de Palma. 5000.  Piña Homs, Román, 1985: La lluita per l’autonomia de les Balears, [Palma], Obra Cultural, Balear. 5001.  Pine, Emilie, 2004: The great escape? ‘The Islandman (1938), In Rockett, Kevin (ed.), National cinema and beyond (Studies in Irish Film, 1), Dublin: Four Courts, 43-51. 5002.  Pinkerton, Alasdair, 2008: Strangers in the Night”: The Falklands Conflict as a Radio War, 20th Century British History, 19:3, 344-75. Publisher: Oxford University Press. 5003.  Pinney, Peter, 1992: The devil’s garden: Solomon Islands war diary, 1945, St. Lucia, Qld., Australia: University of Queensland Press. 5004.  Pinto, Rui Miguel da Costa, 1995: “O Bispo de Cabo Verde, Frei Pedro Brandão e a Relação Igreja-Moradores nos Finais do Século XVI”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 363–368. 5005.  Piper, J., 1981: Iles Salomon: L’Impact du Modernisme sur la vie Traditionnelle, Le Courrier Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 67, p. p. 22-33

2009

274

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

5006.  Piper, J., 1990: Don’t sit under the coconut tree with anyone else but me!, Australian policy towards the South Pacific, in Australian Journal of International Affairs, Vol 44/2. 5007.  Piper, J., and Urwin, G., 2001: Australian policy towards Papua and New Guinea and the South Pacific; critique and response, unpublished paper, Canberra, ANU. 5008.  Pisanelli, Flaviano, 2005: La Sicile au miroir: Leonardo Sciascia et Gesualdo Bufalino, in Trabelsi, Mustapha (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand. 5009.  Pitt, Barrie William, 2002: Coronel and Falkland: two great naval battles of the First World War, London: Cassell. 5010.  Placeres, César Rodríguez, 1997: Los símbolos de la identidad canaria, Gran Canaria, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria. 5011.  Planas Rosselló, Antonio, 1995: El Sindicat de Fora: corporación representativa de las Villas de Mallorca: (1315-1834), prólogo, Román Piña Homs, Mallorca: Miquel Font. 5012.  Planas Rosselló, Antonio, 2006: El notariado en el Reino de Mallorca: siglos XIII-XVIII, Palma: Lleonard Muntaner. 5013.  Platero, Carlos, 2005: La alcaldía de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria (1484-2005) Palmas de Gran Canaria: Anroart Ediciones. 5014.  Platier, A., 1956: “Inégalités économiques et politiques de développement à l’échelle régionale et à l’échelle mondiale”, L’Égypte contemporaine, n°1, p. 1-48 5015.  Plaza, edited by Dwaine E. and Frances Henry, 2006: Returning to the source: the final stage of the Caribbean migration circuit, Trinidad and Tobago; Jamaica; Barbados: University of the West Indies Press. 5016.  Plender, Richard, 1990: The protocol, the bailiwicks and the Jersey cow, In Plender, Richard (ed.), Legal history and comparative law: essays in honour of Albert Kiralfy, 193-213. 5017.  Plumer, Aytug, 2003: Cyprus, 1963-64: The Fateful Years, Cyrep (Lefkosa). 5018.  Plummer, John, 2008: Islands and lifelines: journeys with friends from across a lifetime to the dramatic edges of Britain and Ireland, Leicester: Matador. 5019.  Poche, B., 1983: La région comme espace de référence identitaire, in Espace et Société, n° 42, janvier-juin. 5020.  Pochin-Mould, Daphne, 2004: “The fat monks and the Skellig rocks” in Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula Historical and Archaeological Society], 12, 31-41. 5021.  Pocock, J. G. A. (John Greville Agard), 2005: The discovery of islands: essays in British history, Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press. 5022.  Poirine, Bernard, 1991: L’economie de la Polynesie Francaise: de la Rente Atomique Au Developpement; Sous La Direction De P. Desneuf, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Sciences économiques: Paris 2. 5023.  Poirine, Bernard, 1993: Three essays from French Polynesia, Kensington, NSW: Centre for South Pacific Studies, University of New South Wales. 5024.  Poirine, Bernard, 1995: Les petites economies insulaires: theories et strategies de developpement, Paris: L’Harmattan. 5025.  Poirine, B., 2001: “Insularity and Governance: The Case of French Polynesia”, Public Organization Review, nº2, p. 193-213 5026.  Poisson, Georges, 1998: Présences littéraires en Basse-Normandie et dans les îles anglonormandes, avec la collaboration de Dominique Gros, photographies de Tristan Jeanne-

2009

CEHA

275

Valès, Cherbourg, Isoète. 5027.  Polack, F., 1998: ‘Writing and Rewriting the Island: Tasmania, Politics and Contemporary Island Fiction’ in L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J. Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The Literature of Small Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island, pp. 215-230. 5028.  Polis, G.; Rose, M., 2000: “Research papers on the insularity of islands”, Ecography, nº 6, pp. 693-701 5029.  Pollard, Bob, 1998: Solomon Islands development assistance 1990-2001: report, [Honiara, Solomon Islands: Pasifiki Services,] 5030.  Pollard, Stephen, 1995: The culture of successful Palauan enterprise, Honolulu, HI: EastWest Center. 5031.  Pollock, Griselda, 1992: Avant-Garde Gambits 1888-1893. Gender and the Color of Art History, Walter Neurath Memorial Lecture 1992, New York: Thames and Hudson. 5032.  Pollock, J., 1992: The mining of Nauru and its aftermath; political implications of rehabilitation, in Rubinstein, D., (ed), Pacific history; Papers of the 8th PHA Conference, Guam, PHA. 5033.  Pollock, J., 1995: Nauru’s post-independence struggles, Lal, B.V. and Nelson, H., eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp.49-56. 5034.  Pollock, Nancy J., 1992: These roots remain: food habits in islands of the central and eastern Pacific since western contact, Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies; Honolulu, Hawaii: Distributed for the Institute for Polynesian Studies by the University of Hawaii Press. 5035.  Pollock, Nancy J.; Ron Crocombe, eds., 1988: French Polynesia: A Book of Selected Readings, Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies of the University of the South Pacific. 5036.  Polo Andrés, Clemente and Elisabeth Valle, 2007:, An Assessment of the Weight of Tourism in the Balearic Islands, No 2007/04, CRE Working Papers (Documents de treball del CRE) from Centre de Recerca Econòmica (UIB ·”Sa Nostra”) http://www.cre.sanostra.es/ internet/cre.nsf/pernomcurt/DT_adjunt/$FILE/dt2007_4.pdf. 5037.  Pomponi, F., 1977: Le régionalisme en Corse dans l’entre-deux-guerres (1919-1939) in Gras, C., Livet, G., Régions et régionalisme en France du XVIIIeme siècle à nos jours, P.U.F., Paris; 5038.  Pomponio, Alice, 1992: Seagulls don’t fly into the bush: cultural identity and development in Melanesia, Belmont, Calif.: Wadsworth Pub. Co.. 5039.  Pomponio, Alice; Counts, David; Harding, Tom G., 1994: “Children of Kilibob”, in Special issue of Pacific Studies 17. 5040.  Ponce Dentinho, Tomaz; Ferreira, Pedro; Silva, Vasco, 2006: “Input Output Tables for the Management of Water Resources in Islands”, in The Case of Terceira Island, ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association. Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa06/papers/124.pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009. 5041.  Pons Bestard, Josep, 1990: Memoria de Mallorca, 1936, pròleg i estudi preliminar, David Ginard Féron, Palma de Mallorca: El Tall Editorial. 5042.  Pons Moll, Clàudia, 2007: La teoria de l’optimitat: una introducció aplicada al catalá de les Illes Balears, Barcelona: Institut Menorquí d’Estudis, Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat.

2009

276

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

5043.  Pons, Antonio, 1984: Los Judíos del Reino de Mallorca durante los siglos XIII y XIV, Palma de Mallorca: M. Font. 5044.  Pontier, Bernard, 2001: Une île britannique: l’insularité et la «britannicité» de l’île de Vancouver entre 1778 et 1871, Université de la Sorbonne nouvelle (Paris). Université de soutenance, Lille: Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses, Thèse de doctorat: Études anglaises: Paris 3. 5045.  Poole, Deborah, 1997: Vision, Race and Modernity: A Visual Economy of the Andean Image World, Princeton: Princeton University Press. 5046.  Poor, Henry V., 1994: Battle of Cape Esperance, The battles of Cape Esperance, 11 October 1942 and Santa Cruz Islands, 26 October 1942, Washington [D.C.]: Naval Historical Center, Dept. of the Navy. 5047.  Popkin, Jeremy D., 2003: Facing Racial Revolution: Captivity Narratives and Identity in the Saint-Domingue Insurrection, Eighteenth-Century Studies, Volume 36, Number 4, Summer, pp. 511-533. 5048.  Porcel, Baltasar, 1984: Les illes, encantades, Barcelona: Ediciones 62. 5049.  Porcheret, Laurent, 2003: Identité et développement d’un espace insulaire périphérique de l’Union européenne: le cas de l’archipel des Açores / thèse de doctorat nouveau régime en géographie présentée et soutenue par…; sous la dir. d’Alain Vanneph,... et Michel Lesourd,..., Université de Versailles-Saint-Quentin-en-Yvelines. Université de soutenance, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux. 5050.  Porrata-Doria, Rafael Jr., 1992: “The Philippine Bases and Status of Forces Agreement: Lessons for the Future,” Military Law Review, Vol. 67: 67-132. 5051.  Poska, A.; Saarse, L., 2002: “Vegetation development and introduction of agriculture to Saaremaa Island, Estonia: the human response to shore displacement”, in The Holocene, Jul 2002; vol. 12: pp. 555 - 568. 5052.  Poskitt, Jan (ed.). 2002: Over the sea to Skye: early travel by canoe to the Scottish islands and west coast 1874-1876, Grange-over-Sands: Solway Dory. 5053.  Postel-Vinay, K., 1998: “La transformation spatiale des relations internationales” in Smouts, M.-C. (dir.), Les nouvelles relations internationales: pratiques et théories, Paris, Presses de Sciences Po, p. 163-181. 5054.  Postel-Vinay, Karoline, 1999: Japon 1979-1999: l’éclatement de l’insularité, Politique étrangère, Volume 64, Numéro 3,p. 545–555. Disponível online em URL: http://www. persee.fr/articleAsPDF/polit_0032-342x_1999_num_64_3_4881/article_polit_0032342x_1999_num_64_3_4881.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 5055.  Potter, Edwin, 1985 – 1988: The history of the penal system in the Virgin Islands, [Charlotte Amalie? : s.n.,]. 5056.  Potter, R., 2000: The urban Caribbean in an era of global change, Aldershot, Asghate. 5057.  Potter, R.; Dann, G., 1995: Globalization, postmodernity and Development in the Commonwealth Caribbean, Curacao, Paper presented at the 20th Annual Conference of the Caribbean Studies Association. 5058.  Pouchain, Gérard, 1985: Promenades dans l’archipel de la Manche, avec un guide nommé Victor Hugo, préfaces de Sir Frank Ereaut et de Sir Charles Frossard, Condé-sur-Noireau, Editions C. Corlet. 5059.  Poulgrain, G., 1999: Delaying the discovery of oil in West New Guinea, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 34, 2, pp.205-18.

2009

CEHA

277

5060.  Pouwer, J., 1999: The colonisation, decolonisation and recolonisation of West New Guinea, Journal of Pacific History, 24, 2, pp.157-79. 5061.  Powell, Wilfred, 1883: Wanderings in a Wild Country, or, Three Years Amongst the Cannibals of New Britain, London: Sampson Low, Marston, Searle and Rivington. 5062.  Poyatos, Juan, 2000: Leyendas del Mar Balear: cuentos fantásticos, relatos extraños e historias populares ocurridas (o imaginadas) en estas aguas, fotografías y dibujos del autor, Palma de Mallorca: Editorial Moll. 5063.  Poyer, L., 1985: The Ngatik massacre: documentary and oral traditional accounts, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 20(1), 4-22. 5064.  Poyer, Lin, 1992: Defining History Across Cultures: Islander and Outsider Contrasts, Isla, 1/1, 73-89. 5065.  Poyer, L., 1993: The Ngatik massacre; history and identity on a Micronesian island, Smithsonian Institute Press, Washington. 5066.  Poyer, L., Falgout, S., Carucci, L.M., 2001: The typhoon of war; Micronesian experiences of the Pacific war, University of Hawaii Press. 5067.  Pozdniakov, Konstantin, 1996: Les Bases du Déchiffrement de l’Écriture de l’Ile de Pâques, Journal de la Societé des Océanistes, 103:2, 289-303. 5068.  Prasad, Biman C., 2006: Institutions, economic performance and sustainable development: a case study of the Fiji Islands, New York: Nova Science. 5069.  Prasad, P., 2006: L’insularité, L’«Indigénisme», et L’inceste dans Paul et Virginie in Laporte, Dominique, L’autre en mémoire, Presses Université Laval. 5070.  Prasad, Satendra, Kevin Hince, 2001: Industrial relations in the South Pacific: Samoa, Tonga, the Cook Islands, Kiribati, Solomon Islands, Vanuatu, and Fiji Islands, [Suva,Fiji]: Dept. of Sociology, School of Economic Development, University of the South Pacific. 5071.  Premdas, R. R., 1983: The Solomon Islands: independance and political change, Civilisations, vol. 33, no 2, pp. 227-261. 5072.  Premdas, R.R. and J. S. Steeves, 1992: Decentralization in a Ministate: The Case of the Republic of Vanuatu, Public administration in small and island states, R. Baker (ed.). West Hartford; Conn., Kumarian Press. pp. 84-98. 5073.  Premdas, R.; Steeves, J., 1993: “Ethnic politics and inequality in Fiji: understanding the new Constitution”. Journal de la Société des océanistes, nº 1, p. 63-75. 5074.  Premdas, R., 1995: Ethnic conflict and development: the case of Fiji, Aldershot, Avebury. 5075.  Prendergast, Mae, 1995: The Aran islands, Galway Roots [Journal of the Galway Family History Society], 3, 89-95. 5076.  Prestholdt, Jeremy, 2007: “Similitude and Empire: On Comorian Strategies of Englishness”, in Journal of World History [Honolulu], 18:2, 113-38. 5077.  Preston, P., 1998: Pacific-Asia in the global system; an introduction, Blackwell. 5078.  Preston-Mafham, K., 1991: Madagascar: A Natural History, Facts on File. 5079.  Preu, C.; Engelbrecht, C., 1994: Background, conceptual structure and organizationaladministrative establishing of a “sustainable development strategy” for Coral Islands, The example of the Maldivian Archipielago (Indian Ocean), Geojournal, vol. 33, no 4, p. p. 433-442. 5080.  Preziosi, Donald, Louise Hitchcock, 1999: Aegean art and architecture, Oxford, Oxford

2009

278

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

University Press. 5081.  Price, R. D. and K. C. Emerson, 1986: “Two new species of Hohorstiella (Mallophaga: Menoponidae) from New Guinea and New Britain”, Journal of Medical Entomology, 23(4): 356-360. 5082.  Price, S.; S. Launa and M. Maima, 1994: Gender strategy for galip nut enterprise, Kimbe, Papua New Guinea, Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project. 5083.  Prince, Mary, 2000: The history of Mary Prince: a West Indian slave, London: Penguin. 5084.  Prince, Stephen, 2002: “British command and control in the Falklands Campaign”, in Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 333-49. 5085.  Pringle, Robert, 2004: Bali: Indonesia’s Hindu Realm; A short history of Asia Series, Allen & Unwin. 5086.  Prior, I.; Stanhope, J.; Dommen, E. (ed.), 1980: Islands, In Epidemics, Health and disease in a small, isolated environment, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon, p. 995-1016. 5087.  Prior, R. N. B., T. Solulu, S. Laup and P. Gende, 2001: “Finschhafen coconut disorder in some tree crops in Papua New Guinea”, Science in New Guinea, 26(1, 2 ,3): 61-64. 5088.  Pritchard, George, 1983: The aggressions of the French at Tahiti and other islands in the Pacific, edited by Paul de Deckker, [Auckland]: Auckland University Press; [Wellington?]: Oxford University Press in association with the Alexander Turnbull Library Endowment Trust. 5089.  Pritchard, Mary J., 1984: Siapo: bark cloth art of Samoa, [American Samoa]: American Samoa Council on Culture, Arts and Humanities, Honolulu: Edward Enterprises. 5090.  Pritchard, W. T. (William Thomas), 1985: Polynesian reminiscences: or, Life in the South Pacific Islands, Papakura, N.Z.: Southern Reprints. 5091.  Privatera, J.F., 1998: Basic Sicilian: A brief reference grammar, Lewiston, N.Y.; Lampeter: Edwin Mellen Press. 5092.  Priziac, Michel, 1997: Noms des îles de Bretagne, MP. 5093.  Racault, Jean-Michel, 2007: Mémoires du Grand Océan: des relations de voyages aux littératures francophones de l’océan Indien, Paris: PUPS, Presses de l’Université ParisSorbonne. 5094.  Proinnsias Breathnach ... [et al.], 1984: Aspects of rural development in the Scottish Highlands and Islands: a review of the Highlands and Islands Development Board and its scheme for the promotion of community development co-operatives: report of a study visit in September/October 1982, Maynooth (Maynooth, Co. Kildare): Geography Department, St. Patrick’s College. 5095.  Project Preparation Branch, I. D., Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1991: The Smallholder Cocoa and Coconut Rehabilitation and Expansion Project (SCCREP) Phase Three: 1989-1993, West New Britain, Oro, Central and Milne Bay Provinces, Department of Agriculture and Livestock, Konedobu, Papua New Guinea. 5096.  Prontera, F., 1989: ‘Géographie et Mythes dans l’Isolario des Grecs,’ in M. Pelletier, ed., Géographie du Monde au Moyen Âge et à la Renaissance, Paris, C.T.H.S., pp. 169-179. 5097.  Prosper, J.-G., 1993: L’île Maurice: au sommet de la vague économique francophone, Paris, l’Harmattan. 5098.  Proud, Edward Baxby, 2005: The postal history of the Leeward Islands, Heathfield: ProudBailey Co. Ltd..

2009

CEHA

279

5099.  Proud, Edward B., 2006: The postal history of B.I.O.T., Maldive Islands and Seychelles; (British colonial series). Heathfield, East Sussex: Proud-Bailey Co. Ltd. 5100.  Prowse, D. W., 2002: A History of Newfoundland (1895), Boulder Publications, Portugal Cove, Newfoundland. 5101.  Prudhomme, Claude, 1984: Histoire religieuse de La Réunion, Paris: Karthala. 5102.  Psaropoulou, Betty, 1984: Teleutaioi tsoukalades tou Anatolikou Aigaiou, Nauplio: Peloponnēsiako Laographiko Hidryma. 5103.  Ptak, R., 1992: The Northern trade route of the spice Islands: South China Sea -Sulu ZoneNorth Moluccas (14th to early 16th century), Archipel, 1992/05, no 43, p. p. 27-56 5104.  Pugh, Philip, 2007: “The Empire strikes back”: the Falklands / Malvinas campaigns of 1982, Mariner’s Mirror, 93:3, 307-24. 5105.  Pukui, Mary Kawena; Samuel H. Elbert, 1986: Hawaiian Dictionary, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. 5106.  Pulea, Mere, 1986: The family, law and population in the Pacific islands, Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 5107.  Puri, Shalini, 2003: Marginal migrations: the circulation of cultures within the Caribbean, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean. 5108.  Putz, G., 1993: “The More Things Change, the More They Get the Same…”: Why Recreational Culture Kills Island Life’, Island Journal, Maine, Island Institute, No. 10, pp.53-55. 5109.  Quammen, D., 1996: The Song of the Dodo: Island Biogeography in an Age of Extinctions, New York, Touchstone. 5110.  Quammen, David, An Inventory of His Papers, 1856-1999 and undated, at the Southwest Collection/Special Collections Library. Disponível online em url: http://www.lib.utexas. edu/taro/tturb/00159/trb-00159.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 5111.  Adams, R, eds, 1992: Culture Contact in the Pacific, CUP, Melbourne. 5112.  Quanchi, M., 1994: A trip through the islands in 1918, Meanjin, Vol 53, No 4, pp.714-22. 5113.  Quanchi, M., 1997: References on Australia’s relationship with the Pacific (other than PNG), Carseldine, School of Humanities and Human Services. 5114.  Quanchi, M., 1997a: The invisibility of Gospel ploughmen; the imaging of South Sea pastors in Papua, Pacific Studies, 20, 4, 77-101. 5115.  Quanchi, M., 1997b: Thomas McMahon; photography as propaganda in the Pacific, History of Photography, Vol 27/ 1, pp.42-53. 5116.  Quanchi, M., ed. 1997c: Imaging, representation and photography of the Pacific Islands, (special issue of PS, 20, 4), Laie, BYU. 5117.  Quanchi, M., 1998: Australia’s South Sea Islanders; a call for recognition, Journal of the Pacific Society, Vol 21, 3-4, pp.3-19. 5118.  Quanchi, M., 1998a: Lobbying, ethnicity and marginal voices; the Australian South Sea Islanders call for recognition, The History Teacher, Vol 36, 1, pp.31-41. 5119.  Quanchi, M., 1999: Tree houses, representation and photography on the Papuan coast 1880 to 1930, in Craig, B., Kernot, B. and Anderson, C., eds, Art and performance in Oceania, Bathurst, Crawford House, pp.218-30. 5120.  Quanchi, M., 2000: Australia and the Pacific Islands; a Bibliography 1984-1999, Carseldine,

2009

280

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

QUT (held in Library CA). 5121.  Quanchi, M., and Shekleton, M., 2001: Disorderly categories in picture postcards from colonial Papua and New Guinea, History of Photography, 25, 4, 1-19. 5122.  Quanchi, Max, 2004: ‘Jewel of the Pacific and planter’s paradise: the visual argument for Australian sub-imperialism in the Solomon Islands’, Journal of Pacific History, 39:1, 4358. 5123.  Quanchi, Max; Robson, John, 2005: Historical dictionary of the discovery and exploration of the Pacific islands; (Historical dictionaries of discovery and exploration, 2), Lanham (MD): Scarecrow Press. 5124.  Quellet, Ricardo Luis, 1982: Historia política de las Islas Malvinas, [Buenos Aires] Fuerza Aérea Argentina, Escuela Superior de Guerra Aérea. 5125.  Quérée, Jennifer, 2003: ‘Seabirds, seals and sailcloth: the clothing of the Dundonald castaways’, Costume, 37, 75-94. 5126.  Quesne, Henri du, 1989: L’île d’Eden (recueil de quelques mémoires servant d’instruction sur l’établissement de l’isle d’Eden), Saint Denis (La Réunion). 5127.  Quevedo Martín, Agustín, 1995: Sociedad y cultura: isleñas, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Servicio de Publicaciones de la Caja General de Ahorros de Canarias: Cabildo de Tenerife, Consejería de Cultura. 5128.  Quick, Abdullah Hakim, 2007: Deeper roots: Muslims in the Americas and the Caribbean from before Columbus to the present, Cape Town, South Africa: DPB Printers and Booksellers. 5129.  Quinault, Roland Edwin, 2001: “Britain 1950: the state of the islands immediately following the Second World War”, History Today, 51:4, 14-21. 5130.  Quinn, David Beers, 1989: Atlantic Islands, In Ireland, John de Courcy, 1911-2006; Sheehy, David C. (ed.), Atlantic visions, Dun Laoghaire: Boole Press, 77-93. 5131.  Quinn, N. J., B. Kojis and P. R. Warpeha, Eds, 1984: Subsistence Fishing Practices of Papua New Guinea, Traditional Technology Series No. 2. Lae, Appropriate Tech. Develop. Inst. 5132.  Quinn, T. J., 1981: Athens and Samos, Chios and Lesbos, Manchester. 5133.  Quintanilla, Mark, 2003: The World of Alexander Campbell: An Eighteenth-Century Grenadian Planter, Albion: A Quarterly Journal Concerned with British Studies, Vol. 35, No. 2 (Summer), pp. 229-256. 5134.  Quiros Fernandez de, Pedro; Baert, Annie (trad.); Deckker, Paul de (préf.), 2001: Histoire de la découverte des régions australes. Iles Salomon, Marquises, Santa Cruz, Tuamotu, Cook du Nord et Vanuatu, Paris: L’Harmattan. 5135.  Ra, Herr, 1983: Australia and the southwest Pacific, in Boyce, P. and Angel, J. (eds) Independence and alliance; Australia in World affairs 1976-1980, Allen and Unwin. 5136.  Ra, Herr, 1986: Regionalism, strategic denial and South Pacific security, Jornal of Pacific History, vol. 21 (4),:170-182. 5137.  Raagmaa, Garri, 2002: Regional Identity in Regional Development and Planning. European Planning Studies, 10(1), pp. 55-76. 5138.  Raban, Peter, 1987: “War and trade in the mid-eighteenth century”, in Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 22, 131-63. 5139.  Raban, Sandra, 2001: ‘Edward I’s other inquiries’. In Prestwich, Michael; Britnell, Richard

2009

CEHA

281

Hugh; Frame, Robin (ed.), Thirteenth Century England IX: proceedings of the Durham Conference, Woodbridge: Boydell, 43-57. 5140.  Rabeherifara, Jean Claude, 1985: Rapport de mission à Ambilobe (Madagascar) sur la société Siramamy Malagazy (Sirama), 17 mai-30 juin 1984, Paris: ORSTOM, p. 217248, Les Problêmes posés par l’Etude du Milieu de Travail et des Rapports Travail / Hors Travail (Concepts, Méthodologies d’Enquêtes), Réunion Thématique, Paris (FRA). 5141.  Racault, J. M. & Marimoutou, J. C. et alii – 1995: L’Insularité: thématique et représentations, Paris, Édit. Harmattan. 5142.  Racault, Jean-Michel, 2007: Mémoires du Grand Océan: des relations de voyages aux littératures francophones de l’océan Indien, Paris: PUPS, DL. 5143.  Radcliffe-Brown, A.R., 1922/1948: The Andaman Islanders: A study in social anthropology, Glencoe IL, Free Press. 5144.  Rademaker, Cor S. M., 1994: The Catholic mission in the Cook Islands 1894-1994, Bavel (Netherlands): Fathers of the Sacred Heart. 5145.  Radford, R., 1987: Highlanders and foreigners in the Upper Ramuu; The Kainantu area 1919-1942, MUP, Melbourne 5146.  Radiguet, Max, 2001: Les derniers sauvages: aux Iles Marquises, 1842-1859, Paris: Phébus. 5147.  Radike, Floyd W., 2003: Across the dark islands: the war in the Pacific, New York: Ballantine Books. 5148.  Radovsky, Frank J., Peter H. Raven, S.H. Sohmer, edited by. 1984: Biogeography of the tropical Pacific: proceedings of a symposium, Lawrence, Kan., U.S.A.: Association of Systematics Collections; [Honolulu, Hawaii]: Bernice P. Bishop Museum. 5149.  Raferty, Barry, 1991: The island Celts, In Moscati, Sabatino; Frey, Otto Hermann (ed.), The Celts, London: Thames & Hudson, 555-572. 5150.  Rai, Milan, 1993: Columbus in Ireland, Race & Class, Jan 1993; vol. 34: pp. 25 - 34. 5151.  Railon, F., 1999: L’Indonésie, la réinvention d’un archipel, Paris, La Documentation française. 5152.  Raimon Pallàs, [et al.], 2001: “Using tephrochronology to date temperate ice: correlation between ice tephras on Livingston Island and eruptive units on Deception Island volcano” (South Shetland Islands, Antarctica), in The Holocene, vol. 11: pp. 149 - 160. 5153.  Rainbird, Paul, 2003, 2004: The archaeology of Micronesia, Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press. 5154.  Rainbird, Paul, 2003: “Taking the Tapu: Defining Micronesia by Absence”, in  Journal of Pacific History, 38 (September 2003): 237–250. 5155.  Rainbird, Paul, 2007: The archaeology of islands, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press. 5156.  Rallu, Jean Louis, 1981: La depopulation des archipels du Pacifique: l’exemple de quatre villages de l’Ile Malekula, Population, vol. vol. 36, no 3, pp. 519-54. 5157.  Rallu, Jean-Louis, 2009: Population et développement dans l’Outre-Mer de l’Union européenne, Population et sociétés, mai, no 456, pp. 1-4. 5158.  Ralston, C., & N. Thomas, (eds), 1987: Sanctity and power - gender in Polynesian History, Jornal of Pacific History, special issue, vol. 22(3& 4).

2009

282

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

5159.  Ralston, C., 1986: Hawaii 1778-1854; some aspects of maka’ainana response to rapid cultural change, Jornal of Pacific History, 19, 21-40, 1986. 5160.  Rambaud, Catherine, 1985: “Un exemple de développement industriel dans un pays dominé par l’économie de plantation: la zone franche de l’île Maurice”, In: Femmes et politiques alimentaires, Paris: ORSTOM, (Colloques et Séminaires), La Place des Femmes dans l’Autosuffisance et les Stratégies Alimentaires.Séminaire International, Paris (FRA), p. 139-149. 5161.  Ramerini, Marco, 1998-2006: Bibliography Of Portuguese Colonial History-Sri Lanka (Ceylon) Centuries Xvi-Xvii-Xviii. Disponível online em url: http://www.colonialvoyage. com/biblioPSriLanka.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009. 5162.  Ramírez Muñoz, Manuel, 1995: Historia del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria, 1913-1936, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria. 5163.  Ramis Puiggros, Andreu, 1997: Malnoms a Llorito: segles XIV-XX: àlies, estratègies de nominació comunitària, [pròleg de Joan Miralles i Monserrat], Binissalem, Illes Balears, Di7 Grup d’Edició. 5164.  Ramisch, H., 1989: The Variation of English in Guernsey. Channel Islands, Frankfurt am Main: Verlag Peter Lang. 5165.  Ramnarine, Tina K., 2007: Beautiful Cosmos: Performance and Belonging in the Caribbean Diaspora, London, Pluto Press. 5166.  Ramos Pérez, David, 2001: Transporte aéreo, territorio e insularidad en Canarias: una aproximación en el umbral del siglo XXI, Tauro Producciones. 5167.  Ramos, G.; Rivera, A. (eds), 2001: Islands at the crossroads: politics in the nonindependant Caribbean, Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers. 5168.  Rampell, E., 1992: Beleu; nuclear free isles under siege, in D Robie, ed, Tu Galala; social change in the Pacific, Bridgit Williams Books/Pluto Press, 137-44. 5169.  Ramsey, Winston G., 1981: The war in the Channel Islands: then and now, After the Battle 5170.  Ranney, Austin, Howard R. Penniman, 1985: Democracy in the Islands: the Micronesian plebiscites of 1983, Washington, D.C., American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy Research. 5171.  Raoulx, Benoit, 1993: Iles Du Grand Large: Des Iles Feroe Aux Iles Malouines; Sous La Direction De Robert Herin, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Caen. 5172.  Rapaport, edited by Moshe, 1999: The Pacific islands: environment & society, Honolulu, Hi.: Bess Press. 5173.  Rapson, A. M., 1962: “Shark attacks in New Guinea waters”, in The Papua and New Guinea Agricultural Journal, 14(4): 141-150. 5174.  Rasor, Eugene L. (comp.). 1992: The Falklands/Malvinas campaign: a bibliography, (Bibliographies of Battles and Leaders, 6). New York; London: Greenwood Press. 5175.  Rasor, Eugene L., 1996: The Southwest Pacific Campaign, 1941-1945: Historiography and Annotated Bibliography, Greenwood Press. 5176.  Rasor, Eugene L., 1997: The Solomon Islands campaign, Guadalcanal to Rabau: historiography and annotated bibliography, Westport, Conn., Greenwood Press. 5177.  Ratter, Beate M. W., 1992: Karibische Netze: San Andrés y Providencia und die Cayman Islands zwischen weltwirtschaftlicher Integration und regionalkultureller Autonomie,

2009

CEHA

283

Hamburg: Wayasbah. 5178.  Ratter, Beate M. W., 2001: Redes caribes: San Andrés y Providencia y las islas Cayman: entre la integración económica mundial y la autonomía cultural regional, [San Andrés y Providencia, Colombia?]: Universidad Nacional de Colombia, Instituto de Estudios Caribeños, Sede San Andrés; [Bogotá, Colombia]: Instituto Colombiano para el Fomento de la Educación Superior (ICFES), Oficina de Planeación. 5179.  Ravault, François, 1985: “Polynésie, la bombe et l’indépendance”, In: Ces îles où l’on parle français, Hérodote, (37/38), p. 163-180. 5180.  Ravenhill, 2000: “APEC adrift: implications for economic regionalism in Asia and the Pacific”, The Pacific Review, n°2, p. 319-333. 5181.  Ravina, Mark, 2003: The Last Samurai: The Life and Battles of Saigo Takamori, Wiley. 5182.  Ravis-Giordani, textes réunis et publ. par Georges, 1989: L’ Île miroir: actes du colloque d’Aix-en-Provence, 27-28 novembre 1987/[organisé par le] Centre d’études corses, Ajaccio, la Marge. 5183.  Ravuvu, A., 1995: The facade of democracy: Fijian struggles for political control 18301987, Suva, Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific. 5184.  Razjigaeva, N. G. [et al.], 2002: “Holocene climatic changes and environmental history of Iturup Island, Kurile Islands, northwestern Pacific”, in The Holocene, vol. 12: pp. 469 – 480. 5185.  Read, Brian Ahier, 1995: No cause for panic: Channel Islands refugees, 1940-45, St Hélier: Seaflower Books. 5186.  Read, Tory, 2002: Navigating a new course: stories in community-based conservation in the Pacific islands, New York: United Nations Development Programme. 5187.  Rebekah E. Pite, 2003: “The Force of Food: Life on the Atkins Family Sugar Plantation in Cienfuegos, Cuba, 1884-1900.” Massachusetts Historical Review, 5, 59-93. 5188.  Rechebei, E.D. and S McPhetres, eds, 1997: History of Palau; heritage of an emerging nation, Ministry of Education, Palau. 5189.  Reddy, G. P. (G. Prakash), 1982: Scarcity and survival: a study in culture ecology of Chowra Island in Nicobar archipelago, Delhi: D.K. Publications; New Delhi: distributed by D.K. Publisher’ Distributors. 5190.  Redknap, Mark; Campbell, Ewan; Lane, Alan, 1989: “Llangorse crannog”, in Archaeology in Wales, 29, 57-58. 5191.  Redon, Marie, 2002: Le Nord de Grande-Terre, un paradis raté? Espaces ruraux et mutations sociales en Guadeloupe, Paris: PRODIG-CNRS, 2002. 5192.  Redon, Marie, 2006: Saint Martin / Sint-Maarten, une petite île divisée pour de grands enjeux, Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, 2006, vol. 59, no 234, p. 233-265. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index73.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009. 5193.  Redon, Marie, 2008: Île et frontière: étude comparée de trois îles divisées: Haïti/République Dominicaine, Timor Leste/Indonésie, Saint-Martin/Sint-Maarten; thèse dirigée par JeanLouis Chaléard, Lille : Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses. 5194.  Reed, L., 1998: Part of our own story; representations of indigenous Australians and Papua New Guineans with in Australia remembers 1945-1995 – the continuing desire for a homogenous national identity, Oceania, 69, 3, pp.156-73.

2009

284

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

5195.  Reesink, G. P., 1995: “Book review: Historical atlas of ethnic and linguistic groups in Papua New Guinea, vol 3, pt 4, New Britain, pt 5, New Ireland, pt 6, Bougainville - Wassmann,J.” In Bijdragen Tot De Taal- Land- En Volkenkunde, 151(3): 465-467. 5196.  Regius, H., 1999: “Our ethnological troops in the field’: Swedes and museum collecting in Melanesia circa 1900” In: B. Craig, B. Kernot and C. Anderson, Eds. Art and Performance in Oceania, Bathurst, N.S.W., Crawford House Publishing, pp. 231-245. 5197.  Regnault, Jean Marc, 1995: La decentralisation outre-mer: un combat pour l’emancipation politique et economique. L’exemple du statut de 1984 en Polynesie Francaise, In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 405-420. 5198.  Rehg, Kenneth L.,1995: The Significance of Linguistic Interaction Spheres in Reconstructing Micronesian Prehistory, Oceanic Linguistics, Vol. 34, No. 2 (Dec.), pp. 305-326. 5199.  Reid, Anthony, 2005: An Indonesian Frontier: Acehnese and Other Histories of Sumatra, National University of Singapore Press. 5200.  Reid, Basil A., 2007: Popular myths about Caribbean history, [S.l.: s.n.,]. 5201.  Reid, Basil A., 2009: Myths and realities of Caribbean history, Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press. 5202.  Reid, R., 1997: The Simpson of the Kokoda Track; Major Albert Moore, Salvation Army, Wartime, 1, 26-9. 5203.  Reig, Daniel, textes réunis et présentés par, 1997: Ile des merveilles: mirage, miroir, mythe: colloque de Cerisy, Paris, France: L’Harmattan. 5204.  Reilly, Q., 1982: Danger of haemolysis from primaquine use”, in Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 25(3): 194. 5205.  Reinstädler, Janett Ottmar Ette, eds, 2000: Todas las islas la isla: nuevas y novísimas tendencias en la literatura y cultura de Cuba, Madrid: Iberoamericana: Frankfurt am Main: Vervuert. 5206.  Reitel, Bernard, 1993: Logiques De Desserte D’un Espace D’archipels: L’exemple Des Transports Dans Le Pacifique Insulaire. (Co-Dirigee Par M. Dupon, Sous La Direction De Henri Reymond, Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Strasbourg 1. 5207.  Remaudiere, G.; Etienne, J., 1988: Les aphididae (Hom.) des iles et archipels de l’ocean indien, L’Agronomie Tropicale, vol. vol. 43, no 4, p. p. 327-346. 5208.  Renault, Kenneth C., 2005: From corner shop to grand marché: a history of the Channel Islands Co-operative Society; by; with additions by Allan Smith. St Hélier: Channel Islands Co-operative Society. 5209.  Renault, Lescure Odile, 1985: La question amérindienne en Guyane française: Les Galibi, in Ethnies, 1 (1/2), p. 19-20. 5210.  Renault, Lescure Odile; Grenand, Françoise, 1985: “La question amérindienne en Guyane française: Le problème scolaire”, in Ethnies, 1 (1/2), p. 36-38.Renfrew, Colin, 1985: The Prehistory of Orkney, Edinburgh, Edinburgh University Press. 5211.  Rennie, N., 1995: Far-fetched facts; the literature of travel and the idea of the South Land, Clarendon, Oxford. 5212.  Rensel, J., 1994: For Love or Money? Interhousehold Exchange and the Economy of Rotuma, Ph. D. Thesis, University of Hawai’i at Manoa, Honolulu. 5213.  Rensel, Jan, & Rodman, Margaret (Editors), 1997: Home in the Islands: Housing and Social Change in the Pacific, Honolulu. University of Hawai’i Press.

2009

CEHA

285

5213.  Revel, Nicole, [et al], 1998: “As if in a Dream ...”: Epics and Shamanism among Hunters. Palawan Island, The Philippines”, in Diogenes, Mar 1998; vol. 46: pp. 7 - 30. 5214.  Reverzy, Jean-François, Jean-Claude Carpanin Marimoutou, 1990: Ile et fables: paroles de l’autre, paroles du même: linguistique, littérature, psychanalyse: psychanalyse, langues et littérature: actes du colloque, Saint-Gilles de la Réunion, 5-9 juillet 1988: Faculté des lettres et sciences humaines, Université de la Réunion, CERFOI-URA 1041 du CNRS / Paris: L’INSERM et l’ARRPpPOI: L’Harmattan. 5215.  Rey, Terry, 2002: The Politics of Patron Sainthood in Haiti: 500 Years of Iconic Struggle, The Catholic historical review, vol. 88, no3, pp. 519-543. 5216.  Reydellet, Dureau, 1994: Mahé de la Bourdonnais: gouverneur des Mascareignes, SaintDenis, La Réunion: Editions CNH. 5217.  Rhoads, E.C., 1984: The impact of modernisation on the aged in American Samoa, PS, 7, 2, 15-33. 5218.  Rhoads, Jim & Specht, Jim, 1980: Aspects of the Oral History of the Bali-Witu Islands, West New Britain Province, Oral History, 8(8): 10-22. 5219.  Ribes i Marí, Enric, 1992, Noms de lloc, Sant Jordi de ses Salines, Eivissa: Edicions Can Sifre. 5220.  Riccardo Pineri (dir.), 2004: Utopies insulaires, Papeete. 5221.  Rice, Elizabeth Talbot, 2004: “Defending the Falklands, 1849-1863”, in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research, 82:329, 82-84. 5222.  Richards, J., 1982: “Politics in small independent communities: conflict or consensus?, Comparative Politics, n° 2, p. 155-171. 5223.  Richards, R., 1990: Indigenous beachcombers; the case of Tapeooe a Tahitian traveller from 1798 to 1812, Great Circle, Vol 13/1, pp.1-13. 5224.  Richards, R., 1994: The decision to lotu.... the spread of Christianity in Samoa, in Pacific Studies   Vol 17 No 1, pp.29-44. 5225.  Richards, Rhys, 1982: Whaling and sealing at the Chatham Islands, Canberra [A.C.]: Roebuck Society. 5226.  Richards, Rhys, 1992?: Samoa’s forgotten whaling heritage: American whaling in Samoan waters 1824-1878: a chronological selection of extracts from primary sources, mainly whaling logbooks, journals and contemporary news items,Wellington, N.Z.: Lithographic Services, Ltd.. 5227.  Richardson, Bonham C., 1997: Economy and environment in the Caribbean: Barbados and the Windwards in the late 1800s, with a foreword by David Lowenthal, Barbados, The Press University of the West Indies, Gainesville, University Press of Florida. 5228.  Richardson, B., 2001: The South and the Caribbean, Jackson, University Press. 5229.  Richer de Forges, Bertrand, 1998: La Diversite Du Benthos Marin De Nouvelle-Caledonie: De L’espece A La Notion De Patrimoine; Sous La Direction De Philippe Bouchet, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Sciences Biologiques Fondamentales Et Appliquees, Psychologie: Museum National D’histoire Naturelle. 5230.  Richez, G., 1981: Les grandes îles de la Méditerranée occidentale, in Méditerranée, n° 72. 5231.  Richmond, Oliver and James Ker-Lindsay (eds.), 2001: The Work of the UN in Cyprus: Promoting Peace and Development. Palgrave Macmillan. 5232.  Richmond, Oliver, 1998: Mediating in Cyprus, Frank Cass.

2009

286

Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009

5233.  Richstad, Jim; Miles M. Jackson edited by.1984: Publishing in the Pacific Islands: a symposium, [Honolulu]: Graduate School of Library Studies, University of Hawaii. 5234.  Richter, Daniel K., 1993: The Ordeal of the Longhouse:  Peoples of the Iroquois League in the Era of European Colonization, Omohundro Institute of Early American History. 5235.  Rick, Torben C., 2007: The archaeology and historical ecology of Late Holocene San Miguel Island, Los Angeles: Cotsen Institute of Archaeology, University of California. 5236.  Rick, edited by Torben C. and Erlandson, Jon M., 2008: Human impacts on ancient marine ecosystems: a global perspective, Berkeley: University of California Press. 5237.  Ricklefs, M. C., 1991, 1993: A History of Modern Indonesia since c.1300, Second Edition. MacMillan. 5238.  Ricklefs, M. C., 1993: A History of Modern Indonesia: c. 1300 to the Present, (2d ed.) Stanford: Stanford University Press, 5239.  Ricklefs, M .C., 2001: A History of Indonesia since c 1200, Basingstoke: Palgrave. 5240.  Ridgell, Reilly, 1995: Pacific Nations and Territories. The Islands of Micronesia, Melanesia, and Polynesia, Honolulu. Bess Press, Inc. / Pacific Region Educational Laboratory. 5241.  Ridgway, K. R., J. S. Godfrey, G. Meyers and R. Bailey, 1993: “Sea-Level Response to the 1986-1987 El-Nino Southern Oscillation Event in the Western Pacific in the Vicinity of Papua New Guinea”, Journal of Geophysical Research-Oceans, 98(C9): 16387-16395. 5242.  Riesenberg, S.H., 1980: The native polity of Ponape, Washington: Smithsonian Institution Press. 5243.  Rietveld, P., 1999: Regional development in an age of structural economic change, Aldershot, Asghate. 5244.  Rieucau, Jean, 2004: Bioko (Guinée équatoriale): un espace insulaire stratégique au centre du golfe de Guinée, les cahiers d’outre mer, 2004, vol. 57, no 226-227, p. 217-232. 5245.  Rigby, Nigel, Merwe, Pieter van, Williams, Glyn, 2005: Pioneers of the Pacific: voyages of exploration, 1787-1810 / Nigel Rigby, Pieter van der and Glyn Williams. Crawley, W.A.: UWA Press. 5246.  Rigby, Nigel; van der Merwe, Pieter, 2002: Captain Cook in the Pacific, National Maritime Museum, London UK. 5247.  Rigler, Robert G. Mrs.; Greenwood, G.R. Mrs., 1984: Descendants of New England Protestant missionaries to the Sandwich Islands (Hawaiian Islands), 1820-1900: an alphabetically arranged copy of births, marriages, and deaths from the records of the Hawaiian Mission Children’s Society Library, Honolulu, Hawaii. 5248.  Riley, Carlos Guilherme, 1995: As ilhas e a Abertura da Fronteira Oceânica, in Arquipélago. História in Memoriam Maria Olimpia da Rocha Gil, Revista da universidade dos Açores, 2ª série, vol.II (nº.1), pp.17-31. 5249.  Riley, G., 1981: Three years survey - clinical and children mimeo, Kimbe, WNB Division of Health. 5250.  Ritter, P.L., 1981: The population of Kosrae at contact, Micronesica, vol. vol. 17, no 1-2, p. p. 11-28. 5251.  Rivera Guzman, P. (ed.), 1997: Life in the Caribbean, Kingston, Canoe Press. 5252.  Rivera Ortiz, Angel Israel, 2001: Islands at the crossroads: politics in the non-independent Caribbean, [edited by] Aarón Gamaliel Ramos and Angel Israel Rivera,